I2000SR

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual (i 2000, i2000SR, c 8000, ci 8200, c 16000, ci 16200)
201837-104
Abbott Laboratories Abbott Park, IL 60064
1998, 2007 Abbott Laboratories ARCHITECT is a registered trademark of Abbott Laboratories Patents Pending
Table of contents
Read me first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Read me-1

Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-3 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-4 Proprietary statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-5 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-6 ARCHITECT c System warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-7 ARCHITECT i System warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-8 Abbott warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-9 Agency approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-10 Trademark statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-11 System labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read me-13
System documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-1

Printed documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-2 Organization of the printed operations manual . System documentation-2 Conventions for the printed documentation . . . System documentation-4 Online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-6 Conventions for the online documentation . . . . System documentation-8 Help window descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-10 Help window toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-12 Help window topic pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-13 Help window navigation pane (online operations manual) . . . . System documentation-14 Contents tab (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-15 Organization of the online operations manual . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-17 Index tab (online operations manual) . . System documentation-18 Search tab (online operations manual) . System documentation-19 Favorites tab (online operations manual)System documentation-20 Procedure map description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-21 Task lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-22 Online documentation use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-24 Tips for using the online documentation . . . . . System documentation-24 Procedures for using the online documentation System documentation-26
Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual
Table of contents-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Access the online operations manual . . . . . System documentation-27 Access Help? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-28 Display and use the procedure map . . . . . . System documentation-29 Use the table of contents (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . System documentation-30 Page through the content (online operations manual) . . . . . . . System documentation-30 Use the index (online operations manual) . System documentation-31 Search for a term (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-32 Perform an advanced search (online operations manual) . . . . . System documentation-33 Boolean operators description . . . . . . . . System documentation-37 Nested expressions description . . . . . . . System documentation-37 Wildcard expressions description . . . . . System documentation-38 Use the glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-38 Scroll through a topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-39 Display related information . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-39 Redisplay a topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-40 Display a favorite topic (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . System documentation-40 Play videos and animations . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-41 Print topics from the online documentationSystem documentation-41 Close the help window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-43 Resize and move the help window . . . . . . . System documentation-43 Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual) . . . System documentation-44 Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual) . . . . . . . . . System documentation-45
Use or function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

ARCHITECT System overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Primary components of an ARCHITECT System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 ARCHITECT integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 ARCHITECT c 8000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 ARCHITECT c 16000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 ARCHITECT i 2000 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 ARCHITECT i 2000SR System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 System control center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Table of contents-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SCC standard components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Network hub and CPU back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 SCC optional components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 ARCHITECT System software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Software interface description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Icons and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Function bar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Software navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Snapshot screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Access the Snapshot screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Window - Snapshot screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Log on window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 User logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Log on (general operator). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Log on (system administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Change the system administrator password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Log off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Processing modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Processing module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 c 8000 processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 c 16000 processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Processing module keypad (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Processing center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Sample hardware components (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Sample carousel (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000). . . . . 1-33 Reagent hardware components (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Reagent supply centers (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Onboard solution areas (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Reaction carousel (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Cuvette segments (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Table of contents-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Lamp (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Mixer unit (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Cuvette washer (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 ICT unit (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Water bath/waste overflow area (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Supply and pump center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Pump center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Bulk solution supply center (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Sample and reagent syringe area (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Processing center (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 Sample hardware components (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 Sample carousel (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000) . . . 1-53 Reagent hardware components (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54 Reagent supply centers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 Onboard solution areas (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Reaction carousel (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59 Cuvette segments (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 Lamp (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 Mixer unit (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 Cuvette washer (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62 ICT unit (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63 Water bath/waste overflow area (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64 Supply and pump centers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66 Pump centers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66 Bulk solution supply center (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 Sample and reagent syringe area (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69 Optional components (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70 Processing modules (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 i 2000 processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 i 2000SR processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78 Processing center map (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
Table of contents-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81 Sample and STAT syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 Sample and STAT wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . 1-83 Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84 Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . 1-85 Reagent pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86 Reagent syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87 Reagent wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88 Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . 1-89 Load diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 RV access door (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91 RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . 1-92 STAT diverter (i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92 Vortexers (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93 Wash zone diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94 Wash zone manifolds (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94 Process path drive motor (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95 Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 CMIA reader (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 Liquid waste arm (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97 RV unloader (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98 Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98 Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99 Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100 Pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101 Trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102 Wash buffer storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103 Wash buffer reservoir (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104 Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105 Wash buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 Solid waste storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107 Waste chute and trap door (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108 Optional components (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109 ARM optional accessory (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109 ARM keypad (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111 ARM connectors (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
Table of contents-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Sample handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115 RSH - robotic sample handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115 Priority bay (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116 Routine bay (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117 Carrier transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119 Carrier positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119 RSH keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120 SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121 SSH keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122 LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123 LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-124 Required consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126 ARCHITECT System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126 Sample cups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126 ARCHITECT c System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-126 Reagent kits and components (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127 Reagent labels (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127 Reagent cartridges (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128 Calibrators (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129 ICT module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130 ICT calibrators (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131 ICT cleaning fluid (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132 Bulk solutions (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132 ICT reference solution (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Alkaline wash (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134 Acid wash (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135 Onboard solutions (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-136 Water bath additive (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137 ARCHITECT i System consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138 Reagent kits and components (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138 Reagent labels (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 Septums and replacement caps (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140 Single constituent controls (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141 Multiconstituent controls (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141 Calibrators (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142 Bulk solutions (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143 Pre-trigger solution (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
Table of contents-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Trigger solution (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144 Concentrated wash buffer (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145 Reaction vessels (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146 Required accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147 Sample carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-147 Carrier trays (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148 LAS sample carousel (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-148 Reagent segments (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151 Reagent segments (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-154 System statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156 Sample handler status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156 RSH status types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-157 SSH status types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158 LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159 Processing module status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160 Processing module status types (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161 Processing module status types (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164 Automatic processing module activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166 System flush (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166 System flush (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167 System prime (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168 Processing module wash (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168 Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System) . . . . . . . . . 1-168
Installation procedures and special requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

System installation or relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 System installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 System checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 System relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 System configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Configuration screen - System settings view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Access the Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Procedures - Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . 2-6 Configuring system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Configure host interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Configure report settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Table of contents-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure a QC run definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Viewing system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 View the batch sample ordering type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 View average number of tests per sample setting (multi-module i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 View the host communication settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 View the automatic report printing setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 View the option for printing flags on reports . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 View the report header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 View the system low alert setting for reagent kits. . . . . . . . 2-14 View the system language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 View the screen timeout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 View the date and time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 View the sample bar code settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 View the LIS serial port settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 View the LAS serial port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 View the onboard solution options (c System) . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 View the wash buffer transfer option (i System) . . . . . . . . . 2-18 View the LAS timeout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits . 2-20 Changing system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Change the batch sample ordering type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Change the automatic report printing settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Change the option for printing flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Change the report header text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits . . . . . 2-24 Change the system language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Change the screen timeout setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Change the date and time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH) . . 2-28 Change the sample bar code settings for codabar . . . . . . . . 2-28 Change the sample bar code settings for code 39 . . . . . . . . 2-29 Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . 2-30 Change the LIS serial port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Change the LAS serial port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Table of contents-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Change the onboard solution options (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Change the onboard solution options (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System . . . . . . . 2-35 Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits 2-37 Windows - Configuration screen - System settings view . . . . . . . . 2-38 Configure sample ordering window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Details for sample ordering window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Configure host - release mode window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Details for host - release mode window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Configure reports printing window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Details for reports printing window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Configure reagents - supplies window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Details for reagents - supplies window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Configure password window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Details for password window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Configure system control center window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Details for system control center window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Configure modules window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Details for modules window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Configure modules window (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Details for modules window (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Configure modules window (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Details for modules window (i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Configure sample handler window (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Details for sample handler window (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Details for sample handler window (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard). . . . . . . . . 2-59 Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) . . . . . . . . 2-60 Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Configure bar codes window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Details for bar codes window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Configure serial ports window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Details for serial ports window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Table of contents-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configuration screen - Assay settings view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view . . . 2-65 Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view . . . . . . . . . 2-67 Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view . 2-68 Import assay window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Export assay window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Procedures - Configuration screen - Assay settings view . . . . . . . . 2-70 Configuring Abbott assays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Configure normal and extreme ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Configure patient and QC panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Configure a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Configure result units and decimal places . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System) 2-76 Enter a calibrator concentration (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated) 2-79 Configure the default dilution setting (i System) . . . . . . . . 2-82 Configuring user-defined assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Configure a calculated assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 Configure a photometric assay (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 Configure the SmartWash settings (c System). . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System) 2-93 Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System). . 2-94 Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 Viewing assay settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 View assay parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 View assay availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 View the normal and extreme result range settings . . . . . . 2-99 View the patient and QC panel definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 View the assay retest rule settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Table of contents-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System)2-101 View the calibrator concentration settings (c System). . . . 2-102 View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 View the linearity range settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System) . . 2-104 View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System) . . . . 2-105 View the last required read setting (photometric - c System) . . 2-105 View the default dilution setting (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 Changing assay configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 Change the name of an assay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108 Change the availability of an assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 Change normal and extreme ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110 Change a patient or QC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111 Delete a patient or QC panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111 Add an assay to a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112 Remove an assay from a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113 Delete a retest rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114 Change a linearity range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115 Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System) 2-116 Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System) . 2-117 Change default calibration type (photometric - c System) 2-118 Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System) 2-119 Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . 2-120 Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System). . 2-121 Delete a reagent (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122 Delete a reagent kit (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123 Change the default dilution setting (i System) . . . . . . . . . 2-124 Change interpretation settings (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125 Change the result units setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126 Printing assay parameter reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127 Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view . . . . . . . . . 2-127 Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) . . . 2-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) . . . . 2-130 Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated). . . 2-131 Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) . . 2-132 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-133 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136 Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137 Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138 Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view . . . 2-139 Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view . . . 2-140 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) . 2-141 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) . 2-142 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-145 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-149 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152 Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) . . . 2-153 Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System). . . 2-154 Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) 2-155 Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System). 2-156 Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) . . . 2-157 Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) . . . 2-158 Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) 2-158 Configure assay parameters window - Results view. . . . . . . . . 2-159 Configure results parameters window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160 Details for assay parameters window - Results view . . . . . . . . 2-161 Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view . . . 2-162 Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view. . . 2-163 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view 2-164 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view 2-165 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166 Configure result units window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167 Details for result units window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168 Configure panel definitions window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169 Details for panel definition window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169 Configure assay retest rules window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170 Add / edit assay retest rules window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171 Select assay window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172 Details for assay retest rules window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173 Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174 Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view. . . . . . . 2-175 Procedures - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . 2-176 Configuring QC - Cal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure a new single analyte control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176 Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level. . . 2-178 Configure a new multiconstituent control . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179 Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180 Configure a Westgard rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181 Configure a calibrator set (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182 Viewing QC - Cal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183 View single analyte control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183 View multiconstituent control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184 View multiconstituent bar code SID settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-185 View Westgard rule(s) settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185 View settings for a calibrator set (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 Changing QC - Cal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186 Add a lot to a single analyte control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187 Change single analyte control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188 Delete a single analyte control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189 Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level . . 2-190 Add an assay to a multiconstituent control . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191 Change multiconstituent control settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-193 Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID . . . . . . . 2-194 Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings . . . . . . . . 2-195 Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-195 Delete a multiconstituent control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-196 Change Westgard rule settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197 Windows - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view . . . . . . 2-198 Configure single analyte window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-198 Details for single analyte window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-199 Configure multiconstituent control window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200 Define data window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-201 Details for multiconstituent control window . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202 Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window . . . . . . . . . 2-203 Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window. . . . . . . . . 2-204 Configure Westgard window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205 Details for Westgard window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206 Configure calibrator set window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207 Details for calibrator set window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-208
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Software installation and backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209 Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209 Access the Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210 Procedure - Utilities screen - Software install view . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210 View the system software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-210 Utilities screen - Backup software view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-211 Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 Procedure - Utilities screen - Backup view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 Create a system software backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-212 Windows - Utilities screen - Backup view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213 Create backup window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-213 Assay file management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-214 Install or delete an assay file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-214 Import an assay file (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-215 Export an assay file (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216 Maintenance and diagnostic file management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-218 Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file . . . . . . . 2-218
Principles of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

c System principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Photometric method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Photometric technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 End-point assay reactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Rate assay reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Optical measurements (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Optical system and measurement sequence (c System). . . . . . . . 3-4 Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Potentiometric method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Integrated chip technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 ICT measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing . . . . . . . 3-7 Measurement by the ICT module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . 3-12 Assay processing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c System) . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c System) . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Assay processing for an ICT protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SmartWash feature (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 OSS feature (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Sample interference indices (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Sample interference indices protocols (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Sample interference indices measurement (c System) . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 i System principles of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 CMIA method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 CMIA technology and reaction sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Optical measurements (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Optical system and measurement sequence (i System). . . . . . . 3-27 Data reduction calculation (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Assay processing (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Performance characteristics and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 c System performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 i System performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 ARCHITECT System specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 c System processing module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 i System processing module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 System capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 SCC onboard data storage capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 c System processing module capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 i System processing module capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Sample handler capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Physical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Weight and force specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 System clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SCC clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 c System processing module with RSH clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 c System processing module with LAS clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 i System processing module with RSH clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 i 2000 processing module with SSH clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler clearances 4-18 i 2000SR processing module with LAS clearances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Electrical specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 SCC electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 c System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 i System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Electrical safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Optical specifications (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements. 4-24 External waste pump specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 External waste pump general specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements . . 4-25 External waste pump clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Environmental specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Computer and interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Printer specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Printer general specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Printer electrical specifications and requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Bar code label requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 1D reagent bar code label guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 1D reagent bar code label data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 1D reagent bar code label placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Sample bar code label requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Sample bar code label guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Sample ID (identification) length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Sample bar code label length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Sample bar code label placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 ARM specifications and requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 ARM physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 ARM clearance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 ARM electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 ARM electrical safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 ARM water source requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 ARM environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

System startup, pause, and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 SCC power off and power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Power on the SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Power off the SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Cycle power to the SCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and pause . . 5-6 Power on the processing module and/or sample handler . . . . . . . . 5-7 Power off the processing module and/or sample handler . . . . . . . . 5-9 Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler . . . 5-12 Start up the processing module and/or sample handler. . . . . . . . . 5-13 Pause the processing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Pause the RSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Pause the sample carousel (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Pause the sample load queue (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 ARM power off and power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Power off the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Power on and initialize the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Emergency shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system . . . . 5-21 Perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system . . . . 5-22 Long-term shutdown (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Consumable inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Supply status screen and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Supply status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Access the Supply status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . 5-29 Windows - Supply status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Update supplies window - c System view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management . . 5-31 Verify supply and waste inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 c System procedures - consumable inventory management . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System) . . . . . . . . 5-33 Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Prepare detergent A (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System) . . . . . . . . . 5-45 i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - consumable inventory management . . . . 5-46 Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . 5-47 Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Prepare wash buffer (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR) 5-52 Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . 5-55 Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System) . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 Reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Reagent status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Reagent status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Access the Reagent status screen - c System view . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64 Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view. . . . . . . 5-66 Reagent status screen - View all view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 Access the Reagent status screen - View all view . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 Descriptions of reagent statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Windows - Reagent status screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 Details for reagent (Reagent status) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71 Assign location window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72 Find options (Reagent status) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window 5-74 Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 Access the Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 Window - Reagent history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 Details for reagent (history) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management . . 5-79 Verify reagent inventory on a single module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79 Verify reagent inventory on all modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80 Find a specific reagent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81 View reagent details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 View reagent history details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 Scan the reagent carousel(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 c System procedures - reagent inventory management . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84 Load bar coded reagents (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85 Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System) . . 5-87 Load sample diluent(s) (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88 Load non-bar coded reagents (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 Replace sample diluent(s) (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96 Unload bar coded reagents (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98 Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100 i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - reagent inventory management . . . . . . 5-102 Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102 Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105 Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106 Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108 Patient and control orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 Automated ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 Host computer download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110 Host order query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111 Automated control ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111 Auto retest (patient samples). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Patient order screens and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113 Patient order screen - Single patient view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113 Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view . . . . . . . 5-114 Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115 Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view . . . . 5-116 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116 Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view 5-117 Procedures - Patient order screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118 Create a patient order (single order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118 Create a patient order (batch, bar coded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121 Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 Add a test to a patient order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 Windows - Patient order screen and views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view . 5-132 Details for sample window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133 Details for batch window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133 Control order screen and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134 Control order screen - Single analyte view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view. . . . . . . 5-136 Control order screen - Multiconstituent view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137 Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view . . . . 5-138 Procedures - Control order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 Create a control order (single analyte). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139 Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS) . . . . . . . 5-141 Create a control order (multiconstituent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143 Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS). . . . . 5-146 Windows - Control order screen and views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148 Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view . . . 5-149 Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view. 5-149 Order status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150 Access the Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 Descriptions of test statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153 Procedures - Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
View the status of ordered tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154 Find a specific test order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155 View order or rerun status details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156 Add a comment to an order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157 Delete a test from a patient order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158 Windows - Order status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158 Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window . . . . . . . . . 5-158 Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view . . 5-160 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162 Access the Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164 Procedures - Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165 View sample status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165 Find a specific sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166 View sample status details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Windows - Sample status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Find options (Sample status) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Sample management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170 Sample requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170 Sample cup and/or tube requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170 Sample volume requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172 Sample cup volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172 Primary tube volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173 Aliquot tube volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174 Sample gauge label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174 Onboard sample storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175 Sample integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176 Loading samples (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176 Load samples in sample carriers (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176 Load samples for routine processing (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179 Load samples for priority processing (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181 Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . 5-183 Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH). . . . . . . 5-185 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188 Loading samples (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-191 Load samples in sample carriers (SSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-192 Load samples for routine processing (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-196 Load samples for priority processing (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-197 Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-198 Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH) . . . . . . . 5-201 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . 5-203 Load samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000) 5-203 Initiating or resuming sample processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-205 Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH) . . . . . . . . . . 5-206 Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-207 Sample processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-207 Control sample processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-208 RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . 5-208 Sample carousel sample processing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-210 SSH sample processing (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-211 LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-213 Batch processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215 Unloading samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-215 Unload samples (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-216 Access a sample with tests in process (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-217 Unload samples (sample carousel - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-218 Unload samples (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-219 Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-220 Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-222 Patient results review and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-222 Results review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-222 Access the Results review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-224 Descriptions of patient result flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225 Procedures - Results review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226 View all patient results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-226 Find a specific patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-227 View patient result details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-228
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Add a comment to a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-229 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System) 5-230 Rerun a test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-231 Delete a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-233 Release a patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-234 Windows - Results review screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235 Find options (Results review) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235 Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view . 5-236 Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System) . . 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-238 Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-239 Details for result (Results review) window (i System) . . . . . . . 5-240 Rerun options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-241 Edit result window (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-242 QC result review and release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-242 QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-243 Access the QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245 Descriptions of quality control result flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-245 Procedures - QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-246 View all control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-247 Find a specific control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-247 View control result details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-248 Add a comment to a control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-249 Release a control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-250 Windows - QC result review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-251 Find options (QC result review) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-251 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-252 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric graph view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-253 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) . . 5-254 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view . 5-255 Rerun options (QC result review) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-256 Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review . . . . . . . . . . 5-257
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Rerun status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-257 Access the Rerun status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-259 Procedures - Rerun status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-260 View the status of tests scheduled for rerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-260 Delete a test from a rerun order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-261 Patient and QC stored results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-262 Patient stored results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-262 Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-262 Access the Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-264 Procedures - Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-264 View all stored patient results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265 Find a specific stored patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265 View stored patient results details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-266 Retransmit a stored patient result to the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-267 Cancel result transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-268 Delete a stored patient result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269 Archive stored patient results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-269 Descriptions of archive messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271 Windows - Stored results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-271 Find options (Stored results) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-272 Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view . . 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System) . . 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-274 Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-275 Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) . . . . . . . . 5-276 Archive results window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-277 Stored QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-278 Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-278 Access the Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-280 Procedures - Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-281 View all stored control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-281 Find a specific stored control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-282 View stored control result details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-283 Retransmit a stored control result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-284 Archive stored control results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-284
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Windows - Stored QC results screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-286 Find options (Stored QC results) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-286 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-287 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric graph view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-288 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) . 5-289 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated view. 5-290 Archive QC results window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-291 Exception management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-293 Exception status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-293 Access the Exception status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295 Procedures - Exception status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295 View all exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296 Find a specific exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-296 View exception details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-297 Add a comment to an exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-298 Transmit an exception to the host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299 Delete an exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-299 Windows - Exception status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-300 Find options (Exception status) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-300 Details for exceptions window - data view (c System) . . . . . . 5-301 Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-302 Details for exceptions window (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-303 Details for exceptions window - calculated view . . . . . . . . . . 5-304 Details for exceptions window - control view. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-305 Details for exceptions window - calculated control view . . . . 5-306 Details for exceptions window - calibrator view . . . . . . . . . . . 5-307 Quality control analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309 Westgard rule application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-309 Westgard rule descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-310 Westgard rule run descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-311 Levey-Jennings graph screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-312 Procedures - Levey-Jennings graph screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-314 Create a Levey-Jennings graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-315 Change a Levey-Jennings graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-316
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-318 Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-318 View details for a Levey-Jennings point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-319 Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-320 Recalculate Westgard analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-320 Windows - Levey-Jennings graph screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-321 QC selection window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-321 Point detail window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-322 QC summary review screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-323 Procedures - QC summary review screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325 View QC data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-326 Find the summary for specific QC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-326 View QC data details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-327 View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph . . . . . . . . . 5-328 Windows - QC summary review screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-328 Find options (QC summary review) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-328 Details for QC summary window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-329 QC reports screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-330 Access the QC reports screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-331 Report printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-333 Print a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-333 Print the Order List report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-336 Print the Levey-Jennings report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-337 Print the QC Analysis report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-337 Print the QC Summary report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-338 Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month. . . . . . . . . 5-339 Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure . . . . . . . 5-340 Print a Procedure report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-341 Print the Message History Log report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-343 View a print job in the print queue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-344 Delete a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-345 Print a screen image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-345 Windows - Report printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-346 Print options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-346 Printer window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-347
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Assay calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Calibration guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Mandatory assay calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Optional assay calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Calibration sampling rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Calibration methods (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Calibration method (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Calibration methods (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Calibration types (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Full calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Adjustment calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Blank adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 1-point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 2-point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Calibration types (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Adjust calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Full calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Index calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Calibration curve storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Active calibration curve storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Inactive calibration curve storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Failed calibration curve storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Access the Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Procedure - Calibration order screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Create a calibration order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Window - Calibration order screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Assay options (Calibration order) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Calibration review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Calibration verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Calibration status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Access the Calibration status screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Descriptions of calibration statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Windows - Calibration status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Find options (Calibration status) window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
views (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System) . 6-21 Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System) . . . . . 6-22 Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System). . . . . . 6-23 Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System) . . . . . . . 6-24 Calibration history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Access the Calibration history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Windows - Calibration history screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Find options (Calibration history) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Archive calibration curves window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Procedures - Calibration review. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 View assay calibration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 View assay calibration history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Find a specific calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 View calibration curve information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Fail a calibration curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 Archive calibration curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Operational precautions and limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Precautions and requirements for system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Requirements for handling consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Requirements for handling specimens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Limitations of result interpretation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Operator responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Safety icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Hazard symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Biological hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Chemical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Spill clean-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Waste handling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Decontamination procedure requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Electrical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Mechanical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Physical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Service and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance suggestions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Access the Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Procedures - Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 View maintenance procedure information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Perform a maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks . . . 9-8 Return to a maintenance procedure in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 View details for a maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Windows - Maintenance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Maintenance Perform window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Version details for procedure (maintenance) window . . . . . . . 9-12 Details for maintenance item window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Access the Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Procedures - Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Approve the Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Add a comment to a maintenance procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Windows - Maintenance log screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Approve maintenance log window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Details for maintenance log window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Maintenance statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 c System processing module maintenance categories. . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Daily maintenance description (c System processing module). 9-21 Weekly maintenance description (c System processing module) . . . 9-24 Monthly maintenance description (c System processing module) . . 9-27 Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing module) . 9-28 As-needed maintenance description (c System processing module). 9-35 c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics . . . . . 9-42 6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . 9-46 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000). . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 9-49 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics . . . . 9-52 6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . 9-56 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . 9-57 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 9-59 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61 i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules maintenance categories . . . . . 9-62 Daily maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) 9-63 Weekly maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 As-needed maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65 i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics . 9-72 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 RSH maintenance categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76 As-needed maintenance description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77 RSH associated maintenance graphics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 6311 RSH Cleaning graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78 SSH maintenance categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 As-needed maintenance description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 LAS carousel sample handler maintenance categories (i 2000). . . . 9-80 As-needed maintenance description (LAS carousel sample handler i 2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
SCC maintenance categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82 As-needed maintenance description (SCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82 Component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83 c 8000 component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83 ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center component replacement . . 9-83 ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components . . . . . . . . . 9-84 Replace the sample probe (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-85 Replace reagent probes (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-88 Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92 Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95 Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99 Replace a cuvette (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104 Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108 Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-111 Replace the mixer (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114 Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-116 Replace the sample carousel clip (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-122 ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump components replacement 9-124 ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components . . 9-125 Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126 Replace check valves (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-130 Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . 9-134 Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-136 Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000) 9-139 Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-148 Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-155 Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-158 Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component) . . . . 9-160 c 16000 component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162 ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center component replacement 9-162 ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components . . . . . . . 9-163 Replace the sample probe (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-164 Replace reagent probes (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-167 Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-171
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-174 Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-178 Replace a cuvette (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183 Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-186 Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189 Replace the mixer (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-192 Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-194 Replace the sample carousel clip (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200 ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump components replacement . . . 9-202 ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components. . 9-203 Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204 Replace check valves (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-207 Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . 9-212 Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-214 Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000) 9-217 Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-224 Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-231 Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-234 Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component) . . . 9-236 i 2000/i 2000SR component replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-237 ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement 9-238 ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers . . . . . . 9-238 i 2000/i 2000SR processing center component replacement . . . . . 9-240 Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR) 9-240 Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . 9-244 Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-248 Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-255 Replace the waste arm probe/tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . 9-264 i 2000/i 2000SR supply and waste center component replacement 9-266 Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR). . . .
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
9-267 Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-269 Replace the buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-272 SCC component replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-274 Replace the keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-275 Replace the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-278 Replace the network hub and cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-281 Replace the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-285 Replace the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-288 Replace the touch-screen monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-291
Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Approach to troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 System troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 System troubleshooting variables (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Operator troubleshooting variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Environmental troubleshooting variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 System logs screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Access the System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Procedures - System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Review message logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Find a specific message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 View low level error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Delete a temporary message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Windows - System logs screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Find options (System logs) window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 General error codes (0001-0999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Assay specific error codes (1000-1999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113 Maintenance error codes (2000-2999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-181 Level sense error codes (3000-3999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-230 Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-311 Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-333 Optics error codes (6000-6999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-411 Temperature error codes (7000-7999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-420 Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-440
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Software error codes (9000-9999) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-477 Observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-547 Processing module observed problems (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-547 1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-548 Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing the assay (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-549 Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a reagent scan was performed (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-549 Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-550 Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System) . . . . . . . . . . 10-551 Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-552 High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System) . . . . 10-552 ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak (c System) 10-552 ICT probe leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-553 Lamp is not on (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-553 Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System). 10-554 Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-554 No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System). . . . 10-555 Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System). . . . . . . . . . . 10-555 No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-556 Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System). 10-556 Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System) . . . . . . . . 10-556 Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-557 Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-557 Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-558 Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-558 Samples are loaded in the sample carousel, but are not processed (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-559 Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System) . 10-559 Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System) 10-560 Processing module observed problems (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-560 2050 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-560 Bar code read failure occurs after instrument has been powered off (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-561 Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System) . . . . 10-561
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
RV loader jams (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-562 Wash buffer volume did not update (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-562 Sample results observed problems (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-562 A#1 Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-563 A#2 Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-565 All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100 mmol/L (c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-566 Controls out of range (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-567 Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System) . . . 10-568 Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System) . . 10-568 Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System) . . . 10-569 Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System) . . 10-569 Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System) . 10-569 Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System). . . . . 10-570 Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System) . . . 10-570 Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System) . . 10-570 Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System) . . . . . . . . 10-571 Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System) . 10-573 FLEX Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-575 PSHH Result flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-575 Sample results observed problems (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-575 Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift (i System) 10-576 Controls out of range (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-577 Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-578 Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-581 Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-582 Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-587 Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-590 Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-592 Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
(i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-594 Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-599 Erratic assay results (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-603 Sample handler observed problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-607 Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted 10-607 Sample handler will not go to Running status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-608 Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a test (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-608 Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed . . . 10-609 SCC observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-609 "&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte control name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-611 All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or R2 checkbox on the Find options window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-611 All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the Extra Bottle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-612 Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for results windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-612 Bi-directional host communication is not working . . . . . . . . . . 10-612 c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Stopped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-613 c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-613 c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but tests are not processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-613 C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report. . . . . . . 10-614 Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-614 Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-614 Gray screen displays during an archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-614 icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full" . . . . . . . . . . . 10-615 Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed . . . . . . 10-615 Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-616 Keyboard fails to respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-617 LAS (laboratory automation system) communication - Unable to communicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-617
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column . 10-617 Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items . 10-617 Many error messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-618 Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing message displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-618 Order Status report does not print all the codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-618 Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding . 10-619 QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not print on the QC Analysis report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-619 Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings time arrives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-619 Result column does not sort as expected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620 Results did not display or print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620 Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception is not removed from the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620 Sample ID is truncated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-620 SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-621 Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance . . . 10-621 Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-621 Slow screen response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-622 Software Architecture Exception 38 displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-622 Software Architecture Exception 50 displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-622 Tests remain in Pending Transmission status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-623 Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-623 Tests remain in Scheduled status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-623 The message "The location (x) has a bar coded kit. Do you still want to assign this location?" displays when assigning a location for a non-bar coded reagent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-624 Touchscreen monitor display is blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-624 Touchscreen monitor fails to respond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-625 Unable to delete results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-625 Unable to find specific patient or QC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-625 Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently . . . 10-625 UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-626 Peripheral devices observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-626
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
ARCHITECT ARM observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-626 A to D timeout (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-628 ARM accessory is not functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-628 ARM accessory is stopped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-629 ARM decontamination mode aborted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-629 ARM message not sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-630 Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high conductivity) illuminated (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-631 Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low conductivity) illuminated (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-632 Calibration check failure (ARM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-633 Checksum failure (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-633 Communication timeout (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-634 Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-635 Decontamination is in process (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-635 Flood condition (ARM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-636 High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM). . . . . . . . . 10-637 Invalid ARM error code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-638 Invalid ARM status code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-639 Invalid format of ARM message "message string" . . . . . . . . . 10-640 Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . 10-641 Meter handshaking failure (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-642 Motor stall (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-643 SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM) . . . . 10-644 Sensor cable disconnected (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-644 System flush is in process (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-645 Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-646 Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM). . . . . . . . . . 10-646 Printer observed problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-646 Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History Report 10-647 Print window displays behind the Help window . . . . . . . . . 10-647 Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-648 Print on reports is too light to read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-648 Report will not print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-648 Sample report does not print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-649
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Windows printer error displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-649 System diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-650 Diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-650 Access the Diagnostics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-651 Procedures - Diagnostics screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-652 View diagnostic procedure information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-652 Perform a diagnostic procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-653 Windows - Diagnostic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-655 Diagnostic perform window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-655 Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window . . . . . . . 10-656 Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-657 c System processing module diagnostic categories . . . . . . . . . . . 10-658 Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-658 Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . . 10-659 Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing module) 10-660 Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-661 Module diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . . 10-662 Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-663 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing module) . 10-663 Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-664 Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . 10-665 Precision diagnostics description (c System processing module) . . . 10-666 i 2000/i 2000SR System processing module diagnostic categories 10-667 Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-668 Pipettor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-670 Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-671 Syringe/pump diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-674 Bar code reader diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-674 Module diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-675 Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i System processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-677 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-678 Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-680 Carousel diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-680 Precision diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-681 RSH diagnostic categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-684 Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . . 10-684 Module diagnostics description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-685 Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . 10-687 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-687 SSH diagnostic categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-688 Bar code reader diagnostics description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-688 Module diagnostics description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-689 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-690 LAS carousel sample handler diagnostic categories (i 2000) . . . . 10-691 Bar code reader diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-691 Module diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler i 2000). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-692 SCC diagnostic categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-693 Miscellaneous corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-697 Processing module corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-697 Clean the bar code reader window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-697 Enable or disable the ICT module (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-700 Evaluate the check valve (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-701 Remove the sample carousel (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-706 Reinstall the sample carousel (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-707 Sample handler corrective action procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-708 Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
positioner(s) (RSH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-708 SCC corrective action procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710 Reseat cables to the SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710 ARM corrective action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-710 Change the wash buffer transfer option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-711 Flush the ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-711 Calibrate the ARM level sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-712 LAS corrective action procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-714 Verify LAS communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-714
Printed report examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1

Absorbance Data Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-3 Assay Parameter Report (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-6 Assay Parameter Report (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-15 Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) . . . . . . . .Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System) . . .Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-34 Cal Curve Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-37 Exception Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-39 Exception Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-42 Levey - Jennings Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-44 Maintenance History Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-47 Message History Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-49 Order List Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-51 Order Status Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-53 Patient Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-55 Procedure Report, Basic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-59 QC Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-61 QC Result Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-64 QC Results List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-67 QC Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-69 Reagent Load Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-71 Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-73 Rerun List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix A-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Result Details Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-77 Results List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-80 Sample Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-82 Sample Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-84 Temporary Message Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-86
Verification of i System assay claims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1

Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection) . . . . . . . . Appendix B-3 Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-4 Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example . . . . . Appendix B-5 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation) . . . . . . Appendix B-6 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-7 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-8 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example . . . . . Appendix B-9 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example . . . . . . . . Appendix B-10 Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution) . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-11 Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet Appendix B-12 Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example . . . . Appendix B-13 Precision - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-14 Precision - method 1 data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-14 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 . . . . . . . Appendix B-16 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet .Appendix B-18 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph Appendix B-19 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet example Appendix B-20 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example . . . . Appendix B-21 Reportable range/calibration verificationmethod 2 . . . . . . . Appendix B-22 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet .Appendix B-24 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 graph Appendix B-25 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet example. Appendix B-26 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 graph example . . . . Appendix B-26 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 . . . . . . . Appendix B-28 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet .Appendix B-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 graph Appendix B-31 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet example . Appendix B-32 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 graph example . . . . . Appendix B-32 Automated dilution verification - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-34 Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet. . . . Appendix B-35 Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example Appendix B-35 Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-37 Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet . . . Appendix B-38 Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-39 Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet . Appendix B-40 Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet Appendix B-41 Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet example. Appendix B-41 Analytical specificity - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-43 Reference range - method 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-44
Math models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-1

c System data reduction methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2 Photometric data reduction methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2 Absorbance method (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2 Factor method (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-2 Linear method (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-3 Logit-4 method (photometric - c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-5 Spline method (photometric - c System). . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-6 Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System) . Appendix C-7 Potentiometric data reduction method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-8 Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System) . . . . . . . Appendix C-9 Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System). . . . . . . . Appendix C-10 Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System) . . . . Appendix C-11 i System data reduction methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-13 Point to point method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-13 Linear regression method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-13 4PLC methods (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-15 4PLC with x residual minimization (x-weighted) method (i System) . .
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Appendix C-16 4PLC with y residual minimization (y-weighted) method (i System). . Appendix C-17 Cutoff assay method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-17 One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System) . . .Appendix C-18 Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System) . . .Appendix C-18 i System adjustment methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-19 Ratio technique method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-19 Linear transformation method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-20 Parameter method (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-21 Curve shape method (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C-21
List numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-1

Consumable list numbers (c System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-2 Consumable list numbers (i System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-3 Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-4 Accessory kit list numbers (c 16000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-7 Accessory kit list number (i System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-10 Additional accessory list numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-12 Electronic media list numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-13 Manual list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-14 SCC component list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-15 Sample handler kit list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-17 Processing module list numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-18
Descriptions of screen elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-1

Icons and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-6 Field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-15 Overview icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-15 Snapshot screen field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-15 Log on window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-19 Sample status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-19 Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions Appendix E-21 Orders icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-21 Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions. .Appendix E-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-24 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions . . Appendix E-25 Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-26 Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-27 Details for sample window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-28 Details for batch window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-29 Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions Appendix E-29 Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-31 Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-32 Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-33 Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-34 Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-35 Order status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-35 Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions . . . Appendix E-36 Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-37 Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-39 Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-40 Results icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-41 Results review screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-42 Find options (Results review) window field descriptions Appendix E-43 Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-44 Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-45 Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-47 Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-48 Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions Appendix E-50 Rerun options window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-51 Stored results screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-52 Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions Appendix E-53 Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-54 Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-56 Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-58 Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-59 Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions Appendix E-61 Archive results window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-62 QC-Cal icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-63 QC result review screen field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-65 Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions . .Appendix E-66 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-67 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-68 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-70 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-71 Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions .Appendix E-72 Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions. . . . . . . Appendix E-73 QC selection window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-74 Point detail window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-75 Calibration order screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-76 Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions .Appendix E-76 Calibration status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-77 Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-78 Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-79 Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-80 Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-81 Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-83 Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions Appendix E-84 Calibration history screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-85 Archive calibration curves window field descriptions . . Appendix E-85 Stored QC results screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-86 Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions . Appendix E-87 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-88 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-90 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-91 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-92 Archive QC results window field descriptions . . . . . . . . Appendix E-93 QC reports screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-94 QC summary review screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . Appendix E-95 Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions . . . . . . . Appendix E-95 Details for QC summary window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-96 Exceptions icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-97 Exception status screen field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-97 Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions . . Appendix E-98 Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions Appendix E-99 Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-100 Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions . Appendix E-102
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions. . . Appendix E-103 Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-104 Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-106 Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions . . . Appendix E-107 Rerun status screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-108 Reagents icon screens and windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-109 Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions . . . Appendix E-110 Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions . . . .Appendix E-111 Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptionsAppendix E-112 Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-113 Assign location window (c System) field descriptions. Appendix E-114 Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions . . . .Appendix E-115 Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions . . . Appendix E-115 Reagent history screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-116 Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions Appendix E-117 Supplies icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-118 Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions Appendix E-119 Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions.Appendix E-119 Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions . .Appendix E-120 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-121 System icon screens and windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-121 Maintenance screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-127 Maintenance Perform window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-128 Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions Appendix E-129 Details for maintenance item window field descriptions . . . .Appendix E-129 Maintenance log screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-130 Approve maintenance log window field descriptions . Appendix E-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions . Appendix E-131 Diagnostics screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-131 Diagnostic perform window field descriptions . . . . . . . Appendix E-132 Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions . Appendix E-133 System logs screen field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-133 Find options (System logs) window field descriptions . Appendix E-134 Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions . . . . . . . Appendix E-134 Configure sample ordering window field descriptions. Appendix E-135 Details for sample ordering window field descriptions Appendix E-136 Configure host - release mode window field descriptions . . . Appendix E-137 Details for host - release mode window field descriptions . . . Appendix E-139 Configure reports printing window field descriptions . Appendix E-140 Details for reports printing window field descriptions . Appendix E-140 Configure reagents - supplies window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-141 Details for reagents - supplies window field descriptions. . . . Appendix E-143 Configure password window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-144 Details for password window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-144 Configure system control center window field descriptions . Appendix E-145 Details for system control center window field descriptions . Appendix E-146 Configure modules window (c System) field descriptions . . . Appendix E-147 Details for modules window (c System) field descriptions . . . Appendix E-148 Configure modules window (i 2000) field descriptions Appendix E-148 Details for modules window (i 2000) field descriptionsAppendix E-149 Configure modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-149 Details for modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions. . . . Appendix E-150 Configure sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions . Appendix E-151 Details for sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions . Appendix
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
E-151 Details for sample handler window (SSH) field descriptions .Appendix E-152 Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions Appendix E-152 Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions Appendix E-152 Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions . Appendix E-153 Configure bar codes window field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-153 Details for bar codes window field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-155 Configure serial ports window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-156 Details for serial ports window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-157 Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-158 Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-158 Import assay window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-158 Descriptions of import status messages . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-159 Export assay window field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-160 Descriptions of export status messages . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-161 Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-161 Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-162 Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-163 Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-164 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . Appendix E-165 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . Appendix E-168 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-169 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-171 Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-172 Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-175
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-176 Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-177 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-178 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-178 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-179 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-180 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-181 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-182 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-182 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-183 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-184 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-185 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-186 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-187 Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-188 Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-189 Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-190 Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-190 Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-191 Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-192 Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-192
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions . Appendix E-193 Configure results parameters window field descriptions . . . .Appendix E-194 Details for assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions . Appendix E-195 Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-196 Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-196 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-197 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-197 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-198 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-199 Configure result units window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-199 Details for result units window field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-200 Configure panel definitions window field descriptions Appendix E-200 Details for panel definition window field descriptions Appendix E-201 Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions Appendix E-201 Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions Appendix E-202 Select assay window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-204 Details for assay retest rules window field descriptions Appendix E-204 Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-205 Configure single analyte window field descriptions . . Appendix E-206 Details for single analyte window field descriptions. . Appendix E-206 Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-207 Define data window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-208 Details for multiconstituent control window field descriptions. . . . . . Appendix E-209 Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions. . Appendix E-210 Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions . Appendix E-211 Configure Westgard window field descriptions . . . . . Appendix E-211
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Table of contents
Details for Westgard window field descriptions . . . . . . Appendix E-211 Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions. . . . . . . . Appendix E-212 Details for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions . . . . . . . Appendix E-212 Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions . . . . Appendix E-212 Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions . . . Appendix E-213 Create backup window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-213 Print options window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-213 Printer window field descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E-214
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Foreword
Congratulations on the addition of the ARCHITECT System to your laboratory. The ARCHITECT family of systems incorporates the latest advancements in laboratory automation, assay technology, and modularity. Ease of use System integration and a common software user interface provide single sample management and result reporting capabilities. Touch screen control allows easy navigation. An intuitive software user interface reduces training time. Help?, integrated with the system software, provides immediate access to information about the currently displayed screen, window, or error message. The online operation manual provides the fastest, easiest, most comprehensive, and most accurate resource for your informational needs. Scheduled maintenance procedures display in a To Do list for automatic tracking and ease of performance. A Maintenance log, automatically updated after each procedure is performed, provides current and accurate maintenance records.
Sample management Sample carriers accommodate a variety of test tube types. Sample handlers allow loading of up to 365 (ci System) samples. 215 (c System) samples. 125 (i 2000) samples. 250 (i 4000) samples. 135 (i 2000SR) samples.
Multi-dimensional sampling provides routine, priority, automated rerun, and reflex processing capabilities. Clot detection ensures accurate sampling.
Read me first-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
With robotic sample handler (RSH) Indicators provide sample processing status at a glance. Sample handler design provides continuous sample access.
Simplified troubleshooting Direct access to error message help provides probable cause and corrective action information. A troubleshooting model provides a practical, systematic approach to solving problems and implementing solutions.
Read me first topics include: Customer support, page Read me-3 Intended use, page Read me-4 Proprietary statement, page Read me-5 Disclaimers, page Read me-6 ARCHITECT c System warranty, page Read me-7 ARCHITECT i System warranty, page Read me-8 Abbott warranty, page Read me-9 Agency approvals, page Read me-10 Trademark statement, page Read me-11 System labeling, page Read me-13
Read me first-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Customer support
Customer support
If you have any questions regarding your ARCHITECT System, please contact your local Abbott Laboratories Diagnostics Division customer support representative for prompt answers to your inquiries.
United States: Canada: International: 1-877-4ABBOTT (1-877-422-2688) 1-800-387-8378 (English speaking customers) 1-800-465-2675 (French speaking customers) Call your local Abbott customer support representative.
Read me first-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Intended use
Read me first
Intended use
The Abbott ARCHITECT System is intended for in vitro diagnostic use only. The Abbott ARCHITECT System is designed to perform automated: Chemistry tests, utilizing photometry and potentiometric technology Immunoassay tests, utilizing CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle assay) detection technology
Read me first-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Proprietary statement
Proprietary statement
The ARCHITECT System software programs and system documentation are protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. The software and manual were developed solely for use with the ARCHITECT System and for in vitro diagnostic applications as specified in the operating instructions. The information, documents and related graphics published herein (the "Information") are the sole property of Abbott Laboratories. Permission to use the Information is granted, provided that the copyright notice appears on all copies; use of the Information is for operation of ABBOTT products by Abbott trained personnel or informational use only; the Information is not modified in any way; and no graphics are used separate from accompanying text.
Each person assumes full responsibility and all risks arising from use of the Information. The Information is presented "AS IS" and may include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Abbott Laboratories reserves the right to make additions, deletions, or modifications to the Information at any time without any prior notification.
Read me first-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Disclaimers
Read me first
Disclaimers
All samples (printouts, graphics, displays, screens, etc.) are for information and illustration purposes only and shall not be used for clinical or maintenance evaluations. Data shown in sample printouts and screens do not reflect actual patient names or test results. The Information was developed to be used by Abbott Laboratories trained personnel, by other persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, or under the direct supervision and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives. In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its affiliates be liable for any damages or losses incurred in connection with or arising from the use of the Information by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories. This limitation shall not apply to those persons knowledgeable or experienced with the operation and service of the product identified, or under the direct supervision and with cooperation from Abbott Laboratories technical sales or service representatives. No confidential relationship shall be established in the event that any user of the Information should make any oral, written or electronic response to Abbott Laboratories (such as feedback, questions, comments, suggestions, ideas, etc.). Such response and any information submitted therewith shall be considered non-confidential, and Abbott shall be free to reproduce, publish or otherwise use such information for any purposes whatsoever including, without limitation, the research, development, manufacture, service, use, or sale of products incorporating such information. The sender of any information to Abbott is fully responsible for its content, including its truthfulness and accuracy and its non-infringement of any other person's proprietary rights. Abbott Laboratories is not engaged in rendering medical advice or services. Updates to the Information may be provided in either paper or electronic format. Always refer to the latest documents for the most current information. Incremental manual updates may cause the master Table of contents or master Index page numbering to change. No part of this media may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
Read me first-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
ARCHITECT c System warranty
ARCHITECT c System warranty

Abbott Laboratories warrants instruments sold by Abbott Diagnostics Division to be free from defects in workmanship and materials during normal use by the original purchaser. This warranty shall continue for a period of one year, commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date of shipment to the original purchaser, or until title is transferred from the original purchaser, whichever occurs first (the "Warranty Period"). If any defects occur during the Warranty period, contact your Abbott Customer Service Representative immediately, and be prepared to furnish information including the serial number, the model number, and pertinent details concerning the defect. This Warranty does not cover defects or malfunctions which: (1) are not reported to Abbott during the Warranty Period and within one week of occurrence; (2) result from chemical decomposition or corrosion; (3) are caused primarily by failure to comply with any requirements or instruction contained in the applicable Abbott Operations Manual; or (4) result from maintenance, repair, or modification, performed without Abbott's authorization. Abbott's liability for all matters arising from the supply, installation, use, repair, and maintenance of the instrument, whether arising under this Warranty or otherwise, shall be limited solely to the repair or (at Abbott's sole discretion) replacement of the instrument or of components thereof. Replaced parts shall become the property of Abbott Laboratories. In no event shall Abbott be liable for injuries sustained by third parties, consequential damages, and/or lost profits. The ICT module Warranty is 15,000 samples or two months post-installation, whichever occurs first. The cuvette warranty is one year post-installation. THE FOREGOING IS THE SOLE WARRANTY MADE BY ABBOTT LABORATORIES REGARDING THE INSTRUMENT, AND ABBOTT SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IMPLIED FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Read me first-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT i System warranty
Read me first
ARCHITECT i System warranty

Abbott Laboratories (Abbott) warrants the ARCHITECT i System (system) when used for its intended purpose by the original purchaser, excluding items subject to wear and tear which require replacement during normal use. This warranty shall continue for a period of ninety (90) days commencing twenty-one (21) days from the date of system installation, or until title is transferred from the original purchaser, whichever occurs first (the Warranty Period). The warranty does not cover the software included in the system, which is subject to the warranty stated in the Software License Agreement. Other warranty options may be available through your Abbott representative. The warranty is country dependent, based on local legal requirements.
Read me first-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Abbott warranty
Abbott warranty
ABBOTT LABORATORIES MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WITH RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION. ABBOTT LABORATORIES HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, CREATED BY LAW, CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ABBOTT LABORATORIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT) CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE EXISTENCE OR USE OF THE INFORMATION, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ABBOTT LABORATORIES HAS BEEN ADVISED AS TO THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Read me first-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Agency approvals
Read me first
Agency approvals
The ARCHITECT System has been tested and found to comply with the following agency standards: UL 61010A-1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1 General Requirements CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use - Part 1 General Requirements 21CFR Part 1040.10: Performance Standards for Light Emitting Products IEC 60825-1: Safety of Laser Products (Class I Laser Products) Directive 2002/96/EC: Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment CE Marking
In Vitro Diagnostic Directive Manufacturer
98/79/EC Abbott Laboratories Diagnostic Division Abbott Park, IL 60064 USA
Authorized Representative in the European Community
Abbott Max-Planck-Ring 2 65205 Wiesbaden Germany +49-6122-580
Read me first-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Trademark statement
Trademark statement
ARCHITECT, i 2000, i 2000SR, c 8000, ci 8200, Chemiflex, AxSYM, AEROSET, and MasterCheck are registered trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. i 4000, i 6000, i 8000, c 16000, ci 16200, c System, i System, ARCHITECT ARM, FlexRate, and SmartWash are trademarks of Abbott Laboratories. The following references are used throughout this manual to represent trademarks of Abbott Laboratories.
Reference AEROSET ARCHITECT ARM AxSYM Chemiflex Trademark AEROSET ARCHITECT ARCHITECT ARM AxSYM Chemiflex
c 8000 c 16000 ci 8200 ci 16200

FlexRate
c 8000 c 16000 ci 8200 ci 16200

FlexRate
i 2000 i 2000SR c System i System

MasterCheck SmartWash
i 2000 i 2000SR c System i System

MasterCheck SmartWash
All Abbott Laboratories product names and trademarks are owned by or licensed to Abbott Laboratories, its subsidiaries or affiliates. No use of any Abbott trademark, trade name, trade dress, or product name may be made without the prior written authorization of Abbott Laboratories, except to identify the product or services of Abbott Laboratories. All other trademarks, brands, product names, and trade names are the property of their respective companies. All rights reserved. Except as permitted above, no license or right, express or implied, is granted to any person under any patent, trademark, or other proprietary right of Abbott Laboratories.
Read me first-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Trademark statement
Read me first
The following U.S. Patents are relevant to the ARCHITECT c System or its components.
4,533,457 4,797,192 4,619,739 5,025,389 4,647,362 5,413,770 4,678,755
The following U.S. Patents are relevant to ARCHITECT i Systems or components.

5,468,646 5,565,570 5,795,784 Des. 401,700 Des. 404,829 5,938,120 6,063,634 6,413,780 5,536,049 5,669,819 Des. 397,938 5,783,699 Des. 406,901 Des. 413,539 6,150,113 6,562,298 5,543,524 5,682,662 Des. 401,699 5,856,194 5,915,282 5,965,828 6,153,377 6,588,625 5,545,739 5,723,795 Des. 401,697 5,859,429 5,915,583 6,022,746 6,162,645
There are other such patents and patent applications in the United States and worldwide.
Read me first-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
System labeling
System labeling
The symbols in the following table are used on ARCHITECT System labeling.
Key to symbols used on labeling

Label Description Authorized Representative in the European Community Legal manufacturer NOTE: A new presentation of the Legal manufacturer label will be phased into the system labeling in a future revision.
In vitro Diagnostic Medical Device

Manufacturer Date of manufacture
Serial number Alternating current Class 2 laser radiation
Caution, risk of electrical shock
Electrical and electronic equipment waste
Temperature limitation
Use by/Expiration date
Consult operating instructions Caution, risk of danger, consult instructions for use
Read me first-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System labeling
Read me first
Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)

Label Description Batch code/Lot number Quantity Unit Biological risks
Biohazard
Caution, hot surface
Assay disk Version Conventional units Standard international unit Sample cups ICT Cleaning Fluid ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution Water Bath Additive Pre-Trigger Solution Trigger Solution Concentrated Wash Buffer Wash buffer
Read me first-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Read me first
Key to symbols used on labeling (continued)
Label Description Reaction vessels Septum Replacement caps Multi-Assay Manual Diluent Catalog number/List number Acid Wash Alkaline Wash ICT Reference Solution
System labeling
Detergent A Detergent B
Read me first-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation
System <F=0> documentation
Introduction
Documentation for the ARCHITECT System consists of the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, available in both printed and online versions, and ARCHITECT System Help. Please take the time to become familiar with the organization, features, and use of each. Learning to use the documentation will pay off in time saved, trouble averted, and more confident operation of the ARCHITECT System. System documentation topics include: Printed documentation, page System documentation-2 Online documentation, page System documentation-6
System documentation-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Printed documentation
The printed version of the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual contains complete instructions for using and maintaining the ARCHITECT System. You will find it a valuable aid as you learn to use the system and an essential reference. Printed documentation topics include: Organization of the printed operations manual, page System documentation-2 Conventions for the printed documentation, page System documentation-4
Organization of the printed operations manual

The printed ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized as follows.
Read me first Refer to this section for important information such as: Customer support numbers Intended use of the system Trademark statements Warranty details System documentation Refer to this section for: Information on content organization Features of the support documentation Use of both the printed and online operations manual as well as online help Section 1 Use or function Use this section to identify: Basic system components Fundamentals of the user interface Operating statuses of the processing module(s) and sample handler Section 2 Installation procedures and special requirements Refer to this section for: Information on locating and placing the instrument Installing system and assay software Configuring the system to meet your laboratory's specific needs
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3 Principles of operation
Refer to this section for an explanation of: The assay technology How the system translates measurements into useful data and reports
Section 4 Performance characteristics and specifications
Refer to this section for details such as: Dimensions of the instrument System capabilities Power requirements Use this section to learn how to perform the various tasks related to running assays on the system. Use this section to learn how to: Run assay calibrations Review completed calibration results Review this section carefully for information about actions or conditions that can impact the: Integrity of the ARCHITECT System Accuracy of patient test results
Section 5 Operating instructions Section 6 Calibration procedures Section 7 Operational precautions and limitations
Section 8 Hazards
Use this section to become familiar with the safety icons both on the instrument and in the manual that alert you to potentially hazardous situations. Refer to this section for: Descriptions of all maintenance procedures Instructions for performing scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance procedures Step-by-step instructions for replacing components
Section 9 Service and maintenance
Section 10 Troubleshooting and diagnostics
Refer to this section for: Troubleshooting basics Information on probable causes and corrective actions for observed problems and error codes Descriptions of all diagnostic procedures Instructions for performing diagnostic procedures
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendixes
Refer to the appendixes for information on: Reports Assay claim verifications Math models List numbers Screen and window elements
Glossary Index
Refer to this section for definitions of ARCHITECT System terms. Use this alphabetical listing of subject matter to find specific information about the system. Refer to this section for a history of revisions to the operations manual.
Revision history
Conventions for the printed documentation

Conventions are a set of defined standards and are used to convey meaning in an expected manner. The conventions used in the ARCHITECT System printed documentation are intended to facilitate finding, reading, understanding, and using the available information.
Text conventions
Description Italicized typeface Bold typeface Use Indicates references to related information. Emphasizes key words within procedures. For example, within the numbered steps bold typeface is applied to names of: Icons and menu items Buttons Function keys Lists and tables and their available selections Options and check boxes Numbers in brackets, for example [1], [2], and so forth Reference specific areas of an illustration within a procedure.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Content conventions
Description Requirements tables at the beginning of each procedure Use
Provide the information you need to know prior to performing a procedure. This information varies by procedure and may include: Prerequisites for performing the procedure Module status required to perform the procedure Operator access level required to perform the procedure Time required to complete the procedure Tools required to perform the procedure Replacement parts or supplies that you must have on hand
Lists of related information topics at the Reference topics that provide end of procedures, as appropriate information related to the procedure, which can help in performing the procedure. Lists of related procedural topics at the Reference procedures that can be end of screen and window descriptions, performed from specific screens and as appropriate windows.
Graphic conventions
Description Safety symbols, see Safety icons, page 8-4, and the caution or warning signal word Use Identify activities that expose you to potentially dangerous conditions.
Important signal word
Advise you of precautions you should take to avoid a negative impact on system operations or assay results. Highlights information that is relevant to the current subject matter.
Note signal word
Numerical references on illustrations, photographs, and reports
Indicate the area described in the table that follows.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Online documentation
The online documentation is designed to provide the fastest, easiest, and most accurate resource for your informational needs. The online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) contains the same content as the printed operations manual, which includes complete instructions for using and maintaining an ARCHITECT System. You can access the online operations manual from the software on the SCC (system control center) and from a stand-alone computer with the online operations manual installed. Access to the online operations manual from the system software
Legend: 1. Operations manual menu item: Displays the online operations manual. 2. Online operations manual: Displays the content of the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual electronically.
Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) is integrated with the system software on the SCC to provide direct access to information about the SCC screen, window, or error message currently displayed. Help? content is a subset of information found in the operations manual. You can access Help? for: A screen or window - from the screen or window
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
An error message - from the error message and the Details for exception status window
Access to Help? (screen or window)
Legend: 1. Help button: Displays Help? for the current screen or window. 2. Help?: Displays detailed information about the screen or window. Help content for the screen or window currently displayed includes overview information, links to descriptions of all fields, and links to procedures you can perform from the screen or window.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Access to Help? (error message)
Legend: 1. Help button (error message): Displays Help? for the current error message. 2. Help?: Displays detailed information about the error message including corrective actions required to resolve the issue.
Online documentation topics include: Conventions for the online documentation, page System documentation-8 Help window descriptions, page System documentation-10 Procedure map description, page System documentation-21 Tips for using the online documentation, page System documentation-24 Procedures for using the online documentation, page System documentation-26
Conventions for the online documentation

Conventions are a set of defined standards and are used to convey meaning in an expected manner. The conventions used in the
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
ARCHITECT System online documentation are intended to facilitate finding, reading, understanding, and using the available information.
Text conventions
Description Bold typeface Used Emphasizes key words within procedures. For example, within the numbered steps bold typeface is applied to names of: Icons and menu items Buttons Function keys Lists and tables and their available selections Options and check boxes Blue, underlined text Blue, 3D (three-dimensional) bullets Numbers in brackets, for example [1], [2], and so forth Indicates links to related information. Indicate procedural topics. Reference specific areas of an illustration within a procedure.
Content conventions
Description Requirements tables at the beginning of each procedure Use Provide the information you need to know prior to performing a procedure. This information varies by procedure and may include: Prerequisites for performing the procedure Module status required to perform the procedure Operator access level required to perform the procedure Time required to complete the procedure Tools required to perform the procedure Replacement parts or supplies that you must have on hand Lists of related information topics at the Reference topics that provide additional end of procedures, as appropriate information related to procedures. Lists of related procedural topics at the Reference procedures that can be end of screen and window descriptions, performed from specific screens and as appropriate windows.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Graphic conventions
Description Safety symbols see Safety icons, page 8-4, and the caution or warning signal word Use Identify activities that expose you to potentially dangerous conditions.
Important symbol and signal word
Advise you of precautions you should take to avoid a negative impact on system operations or assay results. Highlight information that is relevant to the current subject matter. Indicate the area described in the table that follows. Indicate the area described in the table that follows and serve as hypertext links to that information.
Note symbol and signal word
Numerical references on illustrations and photographs Numerical references on reports
Help window descriptions

The online documentation (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual and ARCHITECT System Help) is designed for online viewing and use and displays in a help window, which provides several elements to help you quickly access desired information and functionality.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Help window example - online operations manual
Legend: 1. Title bar: Displays the name of the help window. 2. Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12: Use the buttons to display topics in the topic pane, print a topic, or close the help window. 3. Help window navigation pane (online operations manual), page System documentation-14: Use to find and display topics. 4. Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13: Use to view topic content and display related information. 5. Help on Help button: Select to display a list of tasks/procedures for using the online documentation. 6. Minimize button: Select to reduce the help window to a program button on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. To display the minimized help window, select the program button. Maximize/Restore Down button: Select to enlarge the help window to full screen size or to restore the help window to its last size and position before it was maximized. Exit button: Select to close the help window.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Help window example - Help? (screen or window)
Legend: 1. Title bar: Displays the name of the help window. 2. Toolbar: Use the buttons to display topics in the topic pane, print a topic, or close the help window. 3. Topic pane: Use to view topic content and display related information. 4. Minimize button: Select to reduce the help window to a program button on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. To display the minimized help window, select the program button. Maximize/Restore Down button: Select to enlarge the help window to full screen size or to restore the help window to its last size and position before it was maximized. Exit button: Select to close the help window.
Help window toolbar

The toolbar, below the title bar on the help window, contains command buttons that provide quick access to commonly used navigational aids as well as the print and close commands.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Previous
(Online operations manual) Select to display the previous topic listed in the table of contents.
Next
(Online operations manual) Select to display the next topic listed in the table of contents.
Back
Select to display the last topic you viewed.
Forward
Select to display the next topic in a previously displayed sequence of topics.
Home
Select to display the procedure map. (Not available for error codes.)
Print
Select to print the current topic or all topics under a particular heading.
Glossary
Select to display the glossary.
Close
Select to close the help window.
Help window topic pane

The topic pane, under the toolbar, is the area of the help window where online content displays. In addition to content, individual
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
topics may contain navigational aids (for example, hypertext and image maps) and multimedia. Topic pane example - Help?
Related procedures... Display related information, page System documentation-39

Play videos and animations, page System documentation-41
Help window navigation pane (online operations manual)

The navigation pane, under the toolbar and to the left of the topic pane, is the area of the help window that provides the primary navigational functionality. NOTE: When only a portion of the topic title is displayed in the navigation pane, you can click and drag the right border of the pane to widen it. It contains four tabs that you can use to find and display information in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual: Contents tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Index tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-18 Search tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-19 Favorites tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-20
Navigation pane and tabs
Related procedures... Use the table of contents (online operations manual), page System documentation-30
Use the index (online operations manual), page System documentation-31 Search for a term (online operations manual), page System documentation-32 Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-44
Contents tab (online operations manual)

The Contents tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays the table of contents, which shows how information in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized, see Organization of the online operations manual, page System documentation-17. Topics
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
identified by a book icon and a plus (+) sign have one or more subtopics. Topics identified by a page icon have no additional subtopics. Contents tab
Related procedures... Use the table of contents (online operations manual), page System documentation-30
Page through the content (online operations manual), page System documentation-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Organization of the online operations manual

The online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual is organized as follows:
Read me first Refer to this section for important information such as: Customer support numbers Intended use of the system Trademark statements Warranty details System documentation Refer to this section for: Information on content organization Features of the support documentation Use of both the printed and online operations manual as well as online help Section 1 Use or function Use this section to identify: Basic system components Fundamentals of the user interface Operating statuses of the processing module(s) and sample handler Section 2 Installation procedures and special requirements Refer to this section for: Information on locating and placing the instrument Installing system and assay software Configuring the system to meet your laboratory's specific needs Section 3 Principles of operation Refer to this section for an explanation of: The assay technology How the system translates measurements into useful data and reports Section 4 Performance characteristics and specifications Refer to this section for details such as: Dimensions of the instrument System capabilities Power requirements Section 5 Operating instructions Use this section to learn how to perform the various tasks related to running assays on the system.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 6 Calibration procedures Section 7 Operational precautions and limitations
Use this section to learn how to: Run assay calibrations Review completed calibration results Review this section carefully for information about actions or conditions that can impact the: Integrity of the ARCHITECT System Accuracy of patient test results
Section 8 Hazards
Use this section to become familiar with the safety icons both on the instrument and in the manual that alert you to potentially hazardous situations. Refer to this section for: Descriptions of all maintenance procedures Instructions for performing scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance procedures Step-by-step instructions for replacing components
Section 9 Service and maintenance
Section 10 Troubleshooting and diagnostics
Refer to this section for: Troubleshooting basics Information on probable causes and corrective actions for observed problems and error codes Descriptions of all diagnostic procedures Instructions for performing diagnostic procedures
Appendixes
Refer to the appendixes for information on: Reports Assay claim verifications Math models List numbers Screen and window elements
Revision history
Refer to this section for a history of revisions to the operations manual.
Index tab (online operations manual)

The Index tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays an alphabetical list of all index entries in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual. Entries are indexed by subject and relevance, and
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
include terms for all experience levels and informational types from general to specific. Index tab
Related procedures... Use the index (online operations manual), page System documentation-31
Search tab (online operations manual)

The Search tab is a tab on the navigation pane that allows you to locate every occurrence (up to 500) of a word or phrase used in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual. You can also limit the number of results returned by using advanced search capabilities to refine your search. NOTE: When only a portion of the topic title is displayed in the Search tab's navigation pane, you can click and drag either the right border of the pane or the Title column.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Search tab
Related procedures... Search for a term (online operations manual), page System documentation-32
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System documentation-33
Favorites tab (online operations manual)

The Favorites tab is a tab on the navigation pane that displays topics you have added to your favorites list, which are topics you wish to access often. The list is saved and is available each time you open the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual. Favorites tab
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Related procedures... Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-44
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-40 Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-45
Procedure map description

The procedure map is an online image map that displays categories of job-related activities and provides links to lists of tasks and procedures. You can use the procedure map to quickly access step-by-step instructions for performing your primary job responsibilities. Procedure map
Legend: 1. Help on Help: Provides access to procedures associated with using the online documentation.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Stored Results: Provides access to procedures associated with retransmitting, printing, and archiving patient and control results. 3. Quality Control: Provides access to procedures associated with reviewing Levey-Jennings graph data and printing QC reports. 4. Setup: Provides access to procedures associated with configuring and viewing system, assay, and QC/Cal settings, installing software and assays, and printing reports. 5. Troubleshooting: Provides access to procedures associated with emergency shutdown, reviewing system logs, performing diagnostics, replacing components, and printing diagnostic reports. 6. Maintenance: Provides access to procedures associated with performing maintenance, approving maintenance logs, and printing reports. 7. Sample Processing: Provides access to procedures associated with preparing for operation, ordering tests, loading and processing samples, reviewing results, and printing reports.
Related procedures... Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29
Task lists
Task lists are online topics you access from the procedure map. Each topic contains an expandable list of tasks related to the selected procedure map category or job-related activity. Under each task is a list of links to the associated procedures.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Example of a task list (maintenance)
Legend: 1. Task list item expanded 2. Task list item collapsed
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Online documentation use

The online documentation is designed to help you quickly and easily find the information you need to: Accomplish a task Recover from a mistake Troubleshoot a problem Optimize task performance Understand the concepts behind system operation and performance
Online documentation use topics include: Tips for using the online documentation, page System documentation-24 Procedures for using the online documentation, page System documentation-26
Tips for using the online documentation

The online documentation is designed to provide the fastest, easiest, and most accurate resource for your informational needs. However, your understanding of how it works and how to use it will enhance your satisfaction with the results. For example, there are a number of ways to retrieve information. To an extent the fastest and easiest method depends on the online documentation you are using and the type of information you are seeking. The following tables provide tips for using Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) and the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) to find specific types of information.
Using Help?
To... Then...
View a description of the current screen Access Help?, page System or window documentation-28. View a list of procedures you can perform from the current screen or window 1. Access Help?, page System documentation-28. 2. Scroll through a topic, page System documentation-39 to view the list of procedures under Related procedures.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Using Help? (continued)
To... Then...
Display the steps of a procedure you 1. Access Help?, page System can perform from the current screen or documentation-28. window 2. Scroll through a topic, page System documentation-39, and then select one of the list items under Related procedures. Find the location of a part when performing a maintenance procedure 1. Access Help?, page System documentation-28, for the Maintenance Perform window. 2. Display related information, page System documentation-39, for associated maintenance graphics. Find a description of a procedure when 1. Access Help?, page System performing maintenance and documentation-28, for the diagnostic procedures Maintenance Perform window. 2. Display related information, page System documentation-39, for maintenance categories and procedure descriptions. View all procedures related to the performance of a particular task Look up a word View topics that contain related information View more information about an error code including suggested corrective actions
Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29. Use the glossary, page System documentation-38. Display related information, page System documentation-39. Access Help?, page System documentation-28.
Using the online operations manual

To... Get an overview of the subject matter found in the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual Then...
Use the table of contents (online operations manual), page System documentation-30
Step through a sequence of associated Page through the content (online topics operations manual), page System documentation-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Using the online operations manual (continued)

To... Then...
Find a description of a particular screen Perform one of the following: or window Use the index (online operations manual), page System documentation-31 Search for a term (online operations manual), page System documentation-32 View the procedures you can perform from a particular screen View all procedures related to the performance of a particular task Find and view a particular procedure Select the blue, underlined text found in the body of the content or at the end of the topic under Related procedures.
Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29.

Perform one of the following: Use the index (online operations manual), page System documentation-31 Search for a term (online operations manual), page System documentation-32
Look up a word View topics that contain related information Quickly display frequently accessed topics
Use the glossary, page System documentation-38. Display related information, page System documentation-39.
1. Add topics to your favorites list. See Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-44. 2. Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-40.
View more information about an error code including suggested corrective actions
Search for the error code, see Search for a term (online operations manual), page System documentation-32.
Procedures for using the online documentation

The following procedures provide instructions on how to access and use the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) and Help? (ARCHITECT System Help):
Access the online operations manual, page System documentation-27 Access Help?, page System documentation-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Display and use the procedure map, page System documentation-29 Use the table of contents (online operations manual), page System documentation-30 Page through the content (online operations manual), page System documentation-30 Use the index (online operations manual), page System documentation-31 Search for a term (online operations manual), page System documentation-32 Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System documentation-33 Use the glossary, page System documentation-38 Scroll through a topic, page System documentation-39 Display related information, page System documentation-39 Redisplay a topic, page System documentation-40 Display a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-40 Play videos and animations, page System documentation-41 Print topics from the online documentation, page System documentation-41 Close the help window, page System documentation-43 Resize and move the help window, page System documentation-43 Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-44 Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual), page System documentation-45
Access the online operations manual

Perform this procedure to display the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) on either the SCC (system control center) or a stand-alone computer that has the online operations manual installed.
Prerequisite Module status User access level NA Any General operator
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To access the online operations manual from the SCC: Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Operations manual. The online operations manual opens in a help window and displays the title page in the topic pane. To access the online operations manual from a stand-alone computer: Click Start, point to Programs, point to ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, and then click the (Language) Operations Manual. The online operations manual opens in a help window and displays the title page in the topic pane.
Related information... Online documentation, page System documentation-6

Help window descriptions, page System documentation-10
Access Help?
Perform this procedure to display Help? (ARCHITECT System Help) on the SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite Module status User access level NA Any General operator
To access Help?: Select the help button found in the lower right-hand corner of the software screen or window. Help? opens and displays content specific to the current screen or window. To access Help? for error code messages, perform one of the following: Select the help button on the error message. Select the Error? help button exceptions window. on the Details for
Help? opens and displays content specific to the current error message.
Related information... Online documentation, page System documentation-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Display and use the procedure map

Perform this procedure to view a list of procedures related to the performance of a particular task and to display the instructions associated with each procedure.
Prerequisite
Access the online operations manual, page System documentation-27, or Access Help?, page System documentation-28
Any General operator
Module status User access level
To display and use the procedure map: 1. Select the Home button on the toolbar. The procedure map displays in the topic pane. 2. Select a category on the procedure map to display a list of related tasks. The topic content related to your selection displays in the topic pane with an expandable list of related tasks. 3. Select a task(s) with a right arrow symbol related subtasks or procedures. The right arrow changes to a down arrow or procedures displays. to display a list of and a list of subtasks
NOTE: You can select tasks with a down arrow symbol to collapse the list. 4. Repeat step 3 until the desired procedure displays, and then select the procedure. The procedure content displays in the topic pane. 5. Select the Back button to return to the task list. (optional)
Related information... Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12

Procedure map description, page System documentation-21 Task lists, page System documentation-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use the table of contents (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to view a list of topics found in the online operations manual (ARCHITECT System Operations Manual) and to display the associated content.
Prerequisite Module status User access level
Access the online operations manual, page System documentation-27

To use the table of contents: 1. Select the Contents tab on the navigation pane. 2. Select the + symbols next to the book icons. NOTE: You can select the - symbol to collapse the list. 3. Use the scroll bar to the right of the navigation pane to view all content. 4. Select a topic title. The topic content displays in the topic pane.
Related information... Help window descriptions, page System documentation-10

Contents tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-15 Organization of the online operations manual, page System documentation-17
Page through the content (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to step through a sequence of associated topics much like turning the pages of a book. You can start anywhere in the table of contents, but a logical starting point is at a heading or subheading level.

To page through the content: 1. Select the Contents tab on the navigation pane, and then select a topic title.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
The topic content displays in the topic pane. 2. Select the Next button on the toolbar to display the next topic listed in the table of contents. 3. Repeat step 2 as often as desired. 4. Select the Previous button to display the previous topic listed in the table of contents. (optional)

Organization of the online operations manual, page System documentation-17
Use the index (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to view a list of index entries and display the associated content.

To use the index: 1. Select the Index tab on the navigation pane. 2. Type a word or scroll through the list. 3. Select the desired entry, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. Or The Topics Found dialog displays if the selected entry is found in more than one topic. Highlight the desired topic, and then select Display.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Index tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-18
Search for a term (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to conduct a basic search of the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual for the use of a particular word or phrase. For example, if you search for the word create every topic that contains the word create is found. NOTE: In non-English languages instances of the same word, with and without accented characters, are found. Exact matches including the accented and non-accented characters are highlighted. Search results may be expanded to include word forms of the entry. The basic rules for formulating search queries are: Enter the desired word or phrase in either uppercase or lowercase characters. Searches are not case sensitive. Enter any combination of letters (a-z) and numbers (0-9). You cannot search for single letters (a, b, c, and so forth). Punctuation marks such as a period, colon, semicolon, comma, and hyphen are ignored.
To target your search and narrow the number of results returned, see Perform an advanced search (online operations manual), page System documentation-33.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
To search for a term:
1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane. 2. Enter the desired word or phrase, or select the down arrow choose from previous used search terms. to
NOTE: Use quotation marks to specify a literal phrase for example, sample processing. Without the quotation marks, your search is equivalent to specifying "sample" AND "processing," which finds topics that contain both individual words and not necessarily the phrase. 3. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 4. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional) 5. Select a topic from the Select Topics to display list, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane.

Search tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-19
Perform an advanced search (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to target your search and narrow the number of results returned. Steps are included to perform an advanced search using: Boolean operators - qualifiers that enable you to refine a search by creating a relationship between words Nested expressions - a combination of operators, one inside another, that enable you to perform an even more refined search Wildcard expressions - keyboard characters that enable you to search for terms without entering a complete entry Previous results only Similar word matches
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Topic titles only

To perform an advanced search using boolean operators: 1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the desired terms. 2. Place the cursor where you want to use a boolean operator, and then select the right arrow button to display a list of operators. 3. Select the boolean operator to add, see Boolean operators description, page System documentation-37. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add additional operators. (optional) NOTE: You can type the boolean operator(s) or select the right arrow button , and then select the operator to add. 5. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 6. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional) 7. Select the desired topic, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. To perform an advanced search using nested expressions: 1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the nested expression, see Nested expressions description, page System documentation-37. NOTE: You can type the boolean operator(s) or select the right arrow button , and then select the operator to add. 2. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 3. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional)
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
4. Select the desired topic, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. To perform an advanced search using a wildcard expression: 1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the characters and wildcard expression, see Wildcard expressions description, page System documentation-38. 2. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 3. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional) 4. Select the desired topic, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. To perform an advanced search in previous results only: 1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the word or phrase you want to find. 2. Select the Search previous results check box to search through the results of your last search in the current help session. 3. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 4. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional) 5. Select the desired topic, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. NOTE: The Search tab opens with the Search previous results check box selected if you used this feature last. To search through all files in the operations manual you must select this check box to clear it. To perform an advanced search for similar words: 1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the word or phrase you want to find. 2. Select the Match similar words check box.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
NOTE: This search feature adjusts word forms to expand the context, for example the word create is also found as creating, to create, created, and so forth. This feature is not functional for non-English languages. 3. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 4. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional) 5. Select the desired topic, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. NOTE: The Search tab displays with the Match similar words check box selected if you used this feature last. You can select this check box to clear it. To perform an advanced search in topic titles only: 1. Select the Search tab on the navigation pane, and then enter the word or phrase you want to find. 2. Select the Search titles only check box. 3. Select List Topics. The number of results found and a list of topics that contain the word or phrase display sorted by rank (number of occurrences in a topic). 4. Select Title to sort the topic list alphabetically. (optional) 5. Select the desired topic, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. NOTE: The Search tab displays with the Search titles only check box selected if you used this feature last. To search through all files in the operations manual you must select this check box to clear it.

Search tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation Boolean operators description
Boolean operators (AND, OR, NOT, and NEAR) are qualifiers that enable you to refine a search by creating a relationship between words. If you do not specify an operator, AND is used. For example, a search for system control center is equivalent to a search for system AND control AND center. The following table shows how to use each operator.
Using boolean operators

To search for Both words in the same topic Either word in a topic Use processing AND module processing OR module Results in A list of topics containing both the words "processing" and "module" A list of topics containing either the word "processing" or the word "module" or both A list of topics containing the word "processing," but not the word "module" A list of topics containing the word "processing" within eight words of the word "module"
The first word without the second word Both words in the same topic, close together
processing NOT module
processing NEAR module
Nested expressions description

Nested expressions are a combination of operators, one inside another, that enable you to create a highly refined search. The expressions in parentheses are evaluated first. For example, a search for calibration NOT (active OR failed) finds topics containing the word calibration without either of the words active or failed. Without the parentheses your search is evaluated from left to right and finds topics containing the word calibration without the word active, or topics containing the word failed. You can nest expressions five levels deep. The following example shows a nested expression using two levels: calibration AND ((active OR failed) NEAR curve) This search finds topics containing the word calibration used with the words active and curve close together, or topics containing the word calibration with the words failed and curve close together.
Related information... Boolean operators description, page System documentation-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Wildcard expressions description

Wildcard expressions are keyboard characters used to represent one or more real characters. You use wildcard expressions to search for terms without entering a complete entry by: Using a question mark as a substitute for a single character Using an asterisk as a substitute for any number of characters NOTE: The question mark or asterisk cannot be the only character used. The following table shows how to use the asterisk wildcard expression.
Using an asterisk wildcard expression

To search for Results that start with specific characters or numbers Use op* Results in A list of topics that contain the terms "operator," "operating," "operation," and so forth. A list of topics that contain the numbers "80186," "80286," "80386," and so forth. A list of topics that contain the numbers "125," "1025," "12025," and so forth. A list of topics that contain the numbers "15," "215," "3015," and so forth.
Results that start and end with 80*86 specific characters or numbers Results that end with specific characters or numbers Results that contain specific characters or numbers *25 *15*
Use the glossary

Perform this procedure to look up the definition.
Prerequisite
To use the glossary: 1. Select the Glossary button on the toolbar. The glossary displays. 2. Select the desired letter. An alphabetized list of terms and definitions that start with the selected letter displays. 3. Use the scroll bar to the right of the topic pane, as required, to display the desired word.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13
Scroll through a topic

Perform this procedure to view all content of a longer topic or to control which part of the content displays in the help window.
Prerequisite
To scroll through a topic: 1. Use the down arrow, in the lower right-hand corner of topics that have scroll bars, to scroll through the content. The content scrolls down and the scroll box indicates your position in the topic. 2. Select the up or down arrow to move a few lines at a time. (optional) 3. Select an empty space above or below the scroll box to move several lines at a time. (optional) 4. Drag the scroll box to the desired location. (optional)
Related information... Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13
Display related information

Perform this procedure to display related information such as a further explanation, a definition, procedures, and so forth.
Prerequisite
To display related information: 1. Select the hypertext (blue, underlined text). The related information displays in the topic pane.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
2. Select the Back button on the toolbar to return to the previously displayed topic. (optional)

Redisplay a topic
Perform this procedure to display a topic(s) you have viewed in your current help session.
Prerequisite
To redisplay a topic: 1. Select the Back button on the toolbar to display the last topic you viewed. 2. Select the Forward button to display the next topic in a previously displayed sequence of topics.
Display a favorite topic (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to display a topic(s) in your favorites list.

To display a favorite topic: 1. Select the Favorites tab on the navigation pane. 2. Select the desired topic from the Topics list, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Favorites tab (online operations manual), page System documentation-20
Play videos and animations

Perform this procedure to display and play video and animation clips.
Prerequisite
To play video and animation clips: 1. Select the movie button multimedia capabilities. to the left of images that have
The video or animation clip loads and begins to play. Three buttons display below the image. These buttons represent the standard play , pause , and stop buttons commonly associated with VCRs and CD-Players.
2. Select the movie button after the video or animation has played to return to the original view.
Related information... Help window topic pane, page System documentation-13
Print topics from the online documentation

Perform this procedure to print the currently displayed topic or to print all topics under a heading.
Prerequisite
To print topics from the online documentation: 1. Select the Print button on the toolbar. The Print Topics window displays with Print the selected topic option selected if you are using the Contents tab to access topics.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Or The Print window displays with the General tab selected. 2. Perform steps a and b or step b depending on the window that displays. a. From the Print Topics window select OK to print the selected topic or select Print the selected heading and all subtopics option, and then select OK.
The Print window displays with the General tab selected.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
b.
Option Printer Print to file Find Printer Page Range Number of copies
From the Print window follow these instructions:

Instructions Do not change the selection when printing from the SCC (system control center). Do not select. Do not select. Do not change the default selection of All. Select the up arrow to increase the number of copies. (optional) Do not select the Collate option. Select to print.
Print

Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12
Close the help window

Perform this procedure to close the help window.
Prerequisite
To close the help window: Select the Close button on the toolbar. The help window closes.

Help window toolbar, page System documentation-12
Resize and move the help window

Perform this procedure to change the size and position of the help window and the width of help window panes. Steps are included to: Maximize the help window Resize the navigation and topic panes (online operations manual)
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Change the width or height of the help window Move the help window
General operator
Prerequisite
User access level
To maximize the help window: Select the Maximize button help window. in the upper right-hand corner of the
The help window enlarges to full screen size. You can select the Restore Down button to return it to its previous size and position. To resize the navigation and topic panes (online operations manual): 1. Position the pointer on the divider between the two panes. The pointer changes to a double arrow 2. Drag the divider right or left. To change the height or width of the help window: 1. Position the pointer on the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the help window. The pointer changes to a double arrow 2. Drag the edge in the desired direction. To move the help window: 1. Position the pointer on the title bar. 2. Drag the help window to the desired position. . .
Add or remove a favorite topic (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to add a topic(s) to your favorites list for quick access, or to remove a topic(s) that is no longer needed.

To add a favorite topic:

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
System documentation Section HowTo

1. Display the desired topic. 2. Select the Favorites tab on the navigation pane. 3. Select Add. The topic title displays in the Topic list. To remove a favorite topic: 1. Select the Favorites tab on the navigation pane. 2. Select the desired topic from the Topics list, and then select Remove. The topic title no longer displays in the Topic list. Online documentation use

Rename a favorite topic (online operations manual)

Perform this procedure to rename a favorites topic.

To rename a favorite topic: 1. Select the Favorites tab on the navigation pane. 2. Select the desired topic from the Topics list, and then select Display. The topic content displays in the topic pane. 3. Enter the new name in the Current topic data entry box, and then select Add. 4. Select the old topic name, and then select Remove. (optional)

Section HowTo-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1

Use or <F=0> function
Introduction
The modular design and integration capabilities of the ARCHITECT family of analyzers provide a single workstation capable of processing a variety of assays. With an intuitive software interface, real-time display of system statuses, and a "to do" list of scheduled maintenance activities, you can minimize system interaction and optimize your productivity. Use or function topics include: ARCHITECT System overview, page 1-2 Provides a general description of the available ARCHITECT System configurations. System control center, page 1-8 Provides a detailed description of the computer system, both hardware and software, that provides the interface to your ARCHITECT System. Processing modules, page 1-25 Provides a detailed description of each processing module including all related hardware components. Sample handlers, page 1-115 Provides a detailed description of each sample transport system including all related hardware components. Required consumables, page 1-126 Describes the consumables that are required to operate each system. Required accessories, page 1-147 Describes the accessories that are required to operate each system. System statuses, page 1-156 Lists and describes the various statuses of each system. Automatic processing module activities, page 1-166 Describes the automatic activities performed by the processing module(s).
Section 1-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
ARCHITECT System overview
Section 1

The modular design of the ARCHITECT family of analyzers allows multiple processing modules, which perform all sample processing activities, to be physically joined to form a single workstation or system. The processing module(s) determines your system configuration. ARCHITECT Systems can be configured to process samples using potentiometric and photometric methods and/or CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) methods. System overview topics include: Primary components of an ARCHITECT System, page 1-2 ARCHITECT integrated system, page 1-2 ARCHITECT c 8000 System, page 1-3 ARCHITECT c 16000 System, page 1-4 ARCHITECT i 2000 System, page 1-5 ARCHITECT i 2000SR System, page 1-6
Primary components of an ARCHITECT System

Each ARCHITECT System, regardless of type, consists of three primary components: System control center, page 1-8 - provides a common user interface across all ARCHITECT System configurations. Processing modules, page 1-25 - performs all sample processing activities from aspiration to final read. The type(s) and number(s) of processing module(s) determines your system configuration. Sample handlers, page 1-115 - transports samples through an ARCHITECT System. Each system has a single, primary sample handler regardless of the number of processing modules and types.
ARCHITECT integrated system

The ARCHITECT integrated system is a fully-automated clinical chemistry and immunoassay system consisting of a c System and an i System processing module that form a single workstation. Integrated systems include:
Section 1-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ARCHITECT ci 8200 consisting of a c 8000 and an i 2000SR processing module ARCHITECT ci 16200 consisting of a c 16000 and an i 2000SR processing module
Figure 1.1: Primary components of an integrated system
Legend: 1. System control center, page 1-8: Computer system that provides user control of the processing module(s) and related components through a centralized interface. 2. Processing module (c System), page 1-25: Diagnostic module that performs sample processing using potentiometric and photometric methods. 3. Processing modules (i System), page 1-71: Diagnostic module with priority processing capability that performs sample processing using the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method. 4. RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115: Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for analysis and retesting.
ARCHITECT c 8000 System

The ARCHITECT c 8000 System is an open, fully-automated, clinical chemistry system allowing random and continuous access, and priority processing.
Section 1-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.2: Primary components of a c 8000 System
Legend: 1. c 8000 processing module, page 1-25: Diagnostic module that performs sample processing using potentiometric and photometric methods. 2. RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115: Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for analysis and retesting. 3. System control center, page 1-8: Computer system that provides user control of the processing module(s) and related components through a centralized interface.
ARCHITECT c 16000 System

The ARCHITECT c 16000 System is an open, fully-automated, clinical chemistry system allowing random and continuous access, and priority processing.
Section 1-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.3: Primary components of a c 16000 System
Legend: 1. c 16000 processing module, page 1-27: Diagnostic module that performs sample processing using potentiometric and photometric methods. 2. RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115: Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for analysis and retesting. 3. System control center, page 1-8: Computer system that provides user control of the processing module(s) and related components through a centralized interface.
ARCHITECT i 2000 System

The ARCHITECT i 2000 System is a fully-automated immunoassay system allowing random and continuous access, and priority processing. Up to four processing modules can be joined to form a single workstation.
Section 1-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.4: Primary components of an i 2000 System
Legend: 1. i 2000 processing module, page 1-71: Diagnostic module that performs sample processing using the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method. 2. SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121: Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for analysis. 3. System control center, page 1-8: Computer system that provides user control of the processing module(s) and related components through a centralized interface.
ARCHITECT i 2000SR System

The ARCHITECT i 2000SR System is a fully-automated immunoassay system allowing random and continuous access as well as priority and automated retest processing.
Section 1-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.5: Primary components of an i 2000SR System
Legend: 1. i 2000SR processing module, page 1-75: Diagnostic module with priority processing capability that performs sample processing using the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) method. 2. RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115: Transport module that presents samples to the processing module(s) for analysis and retesting. 3. System control center, page 1-8: Computer system that provides user control of the processing module(s) and related components through a centralized interface.
Section 1-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System control center
Section 1

The SCC (system control center) is a computer system that provides the software interface to the ARCHITECT System and can provide an interface to a host computer. From the SCC you can: Configure the system Enter patient, control, and calibration orders Review patient results, control data, and calibration results Control the processing module(s) and the sample handler Perform system diagnostics and maintenance procedures Receive test orders and diagnostic data from a host computer Transfer test results to a host computer
System control center topics include: SCC standard components, page 1-8 SCC optional components, page 1-11 ARCHITECT System software, page 1-11
SCC standard components

The following illustration shows the standard components of the SCC (system control center).
Section 1-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.6: SCC standard components System control center
Legend: 1. Touch-screen monitor: Allows you to make onscreen selections by touching text areas and graphics, icons and menu items, and function bar buttons. 2. CPU (central processing unit): Houses the microprocessor and other computer components. NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of CPU components. 3. Floppy drive: Used to: Collect system logs for troubleshooting purposes Import and export assay files (c System). Install assay, maintenance, and diagnostic files Upgrade system software Archive patient and quality control results Collect system logs for troubleshooting purposes
4. CD-RW drive: Used to:
5. Keyboard: Used with the mouse and/or touch-screen monitor to enter information. You can use the keyboard as an alternate means of performing most functions. 6. Mouse (pointing device): Used with the touch-screen monitor and/or keyboard to make onscreen selections.
Section 1-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
7. Network hub and CPU back panel, page 1-10 (not shown): Provides the connection between the SCC and modules for information exchange.
Related information... SCC optional components, page 1-11
Network hub and CPU back panel

The network hub is an external device that joins communication lines and enables the electronic transfer of information between the SCC (system control center) and processing modules(s). Cables run from the hub to ethernet connectors on the back of the SCC and processing module(s). Additional I/O (input/output) ports and connectors on the back panel of the CPU (central processing unit) provide connections to other external devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, printer, and monitor. Figure 1.7: Network hub and CPU back panel
Legend: 1. CPU (central processing unit - rear view): Provides the I/O (input/output) ports and connectors for external devices. NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of CPU components. 2. Ethernet connector: Provides the physical connection between the network hub and the SCC and allows communication between the SCC and the processing module(s). 3. Ethernet connectors: Provides the physical connection between the network hub and each module, and allows communication between the processing module(s) and the SCC.
Section 1-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Scanner and keyboard connector: Provides the connection for the bar code scanner and keyboard. 5. Mouse connector: Provides the connection for the mouse. 6. Com1 port: Provides the connection for the touch-screen interface. 7. Printer port: Provides the connection for the printer. 8. Video connector: Provides the connection for the monitor.
SCC optional components

Optional components available for the SCC (system control center) include: Printer - provides a hard copy of test results and printed reports. Bar code scanner - provides a convenient means of scanning sample bar codes to allow positive sample identification. UPS (uninterruptible power supply) - provides a temporary, continuous flow of power to the CPU (central processing unit) during a power failure, allowing you to save data as necessary and perform a controlled shutdown procedure. External modem - connects the ARCHITECT System to a telephone line, which allows communication with Abbott personnel for training and troubleshooting purposes. Cart - supports the SCC components. Speakers - provide audio output.
ARCHITECT System software

ARCHITECT System software is the computer program or set of computer instructions that interprets system and assay information, calculates results, and provides the interface for controlling the system hardware. System software topics include: Software interface description, page 1-11 Software navigation, page 1-17 Snapshot screen, page 1-18
Software interface description

The software interface is the portion of the computer program with which you interact by making selections and entering information. The interface provided by the ARCHITECT System software is a GUI
Section 1-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
(graphical user interface), which is a type of display format. A GUI allows you to initiate commands or make choices by selecting icons, buttons, items from lists, and so forth. You can use the mouse, touch-screen monitor, and/or keyboard to make your selections. The software interface is common among all ARCHITECT Systems. Figure 1.8: Software interface layout
Legend: 1. Icons: Represent a category of screens. When you select an icon, its color changes from green to blue and a menu displays below the icon. See Icons and menus, page Appendix E-2. 2. Menus: Lists the available items for the selected category (icon). When you select a menu item, the associated screen displays. See Icons and menus, page Appendix E-2. 3. Screens, page 1-13: Provides access to all related system information and functions. 4. Buttons, page Appendix E-6: Allow you to perform actions associated with the active screen and correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. Some may be unavailable until you make a selection on the screen. 5. Windows, page 1-15: Provides additional details or functions related to the active screen. 6. Messages, page 1-16 or Prompts, page 1-17: Provides informational or error messages that allow you to complete a procedure or address the current situation. 7. Help button: Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active screen, window, or error message.
Section 1-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1 Screens

When you select an icon, and then a menu item, the associated screen displays. This screen is considered the active screen and provides access to all related system information and functions. A screen can have different views (information displays) based on module type and your onscreen selections. Figure 1.9: Example of a screen System control center
Legend: 1. Icons and menus, page 1-14: Provide access to a menu that lists related screens. 2. Title bar: Identifies the active screen. 3. Information area: Displays data and allows you to make selections and/or enter information to perform various functions. 4. Function bar buttons, page 1-14: Allow you to perform actions associated with the active screen and correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. Some may be unavailable until you make a selection on the screen. 5. Help button: Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active screen, window, or error message.
For descriptions of all elements on a screen or window, see Descriptions of screen elements, page Appendix E-1.
Section 1-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Icons and menus

Icons and menus are the navigational elements that allow you to display specific screens. Additionally, icons serve as blinking indicators to inform you that a condition requires your attention. Figure 1.10: Example of icons and a menu
Legend: 1. Icons: Represent a category of screens. When you select an icon, its color changes from green to blue and a menu displays below the icon. 2. Menu: Lists the available items for the selected category (icon). When you select a menu item, the associated screen displays.
NOTE: Icons can be accessed by the keyboard equivalents shown in the figure below. Figure 1.11: Icon keyboard equivalents
Function bar buttons

Function bar buttons are the buttons at the bottom of each screen that allow you to perform actions or access windows associated with the screen. They correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. You can use either the function bar buttons or the keyboard function keys. The two types of function bar buttons are: Screen available - have white lettering and are always available (green background). For example, from the Order status screen you can always select F3 - Find.
Section 1-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Context available - have yellow lettering and are available (green background) or unavailable (gray background) based on selections you make from the screen. For example, from the Order status screen you can only select the F5 - Details function key after you select an order.
Figure 1.12: Screen and context function bar buttons
Legend: 1. Screen available function bar buttons: Are always enabled for the active screen. 2. Unavailable context function bar buttons: Are available after you make a selection on the screen.
Windows
Windows provide additional information or functions related to the active screen. You access windows by selecting a button on the screen. The window displays on top of, or in front of, the screen.
Section 1-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.13: Example of a window
Legend: 1. Title bar: Identifies the active window. 2. Information area: Displays data and allows you to make selections and/or enter information to perform various functions. 3. Help button: Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active screen, window, or error message.
For a description of all elements on a screen or window, see Descriptions of screen elements, page Appendix E-1.
Messages
Messages provide important information during the course of normal system operation. They display in front of the currently displayed screen or window and require an acknowledgement. All interaction with the user interface is suspended as long as the message displays.
Section 1-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.14: Example of a message System control center
The type of message is indicated by one of two symbols at the left of the window.
Caution: Indicates a condition that requires you to take corrective action as described in the text of the message.
Information: Provides feedback or other useful information.
Prompts
Prompts allow you to continue or cancel the requested operation. They display in front of the currently displayed screen or window and require a response. All interaction with the user interface is suspended as long as the prompt displays. Figure 1.15: Example of a prompt
Software navigation
The ARCHITECT System software interface is designed to provide consistent and easy access to system information, software functions, and context-sensitive help. You can navigate through the screens and windows by using the mouse (pointing device), touch-screen monitor, and/or keyboard.
Section 1-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.16: Software navigation
Legend: 1. Select an icon to display a menu that lists related items. See Icons and menus, page 1-14. 2. Select a menu item from the menu to display that screen. See Icons and menus, page 1-14. 3. Select a function bar button to perform an action or access a window associated with the screen. NOTE: Some function bar buttons may be unavailable until you make a selection on the screen. 4. Select the help button to access context-sensitive help for the screen, window, or error message.
Snapshot screen
From the Snapshot screen you can view key system information such as: Sample handler status, page 1-156 - displays on the sample handler graphic. NOTE: The sample handler status graphic is not displayed for an i 2000SR processing module configured with a LAS (laboratory automation system). Processing module status, page 1-160 - displays on the processing module graphic(s). Test processing status - displays on the order status button. You can select this button to display the Order status screen.
Section 1-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent status - displays on the reagent status button. You can select this button to display the Reagent status screen. Calibration curve status (c System) - displays on the calibration status button. You can select this button to display the Calibration status screen. Supply and waste status - displays on the supply status button. You can select this button to display the Supply status screen. Number of orders pending rerun - displays on the Reruns status button. You can select this button to display the Rerun status screen. Number of exceptions pending review - displays on the Exceptions status button. You can select this button to display the Exception status screen.
Additionally, the Printer, LIS, ARM, and LAS status buttons display if your system is configured with these optional components. A caution symbol indicates a condition that requires attention. Figure 1.17: Snapshot screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Snapshot screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-15. To display this screen, see Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20.
Section 1-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Related procedures... Log on (general operator), page 1-22

Log on (system administrator), page 1-23 Change the system administrator password, page 1-23 Log off, page 1-24 Power on the SCC, page 5-3 Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13 Pause the processing module, page 5-14 Pause the RSH, page 5-15 Pause the sample carousel (c System), page 5-16 Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17 Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18 Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206 Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207
Access the Snapshot screen

Perform this procedure to display the Snapshot screen.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator NA
To access the Snapshot screen: Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Snapshot. The Snapshot screen displays. The information is dependent on your system configuration and test processing status.
Related information... Snapshot screen, page 1-18

Sample handler status, page 1-156 Processing module status, page 1-160
Section 1-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1 Window - Snapshot screen

The window you can access from the Snapshot screen is the Log on window, page 1-21. System control center
Log on window
From the Log on window you can log on as: General operator - required to display your operator ID on printouts and reports System administrator - required to perform system configuration, assay configuration, specific diagnostic procedures, and approve the maintenance log
Figure 1.18: Log on window (system administrator)
For descriptions of these fields, see Log on window field descriptions, page Appendix E-19.
Related procedures... Log on (general operator), page 1-22

Log on (system administrator), page 1-23 Change the system administrator password, page 1-23 Log off, page 1-24
User logon
User logon is the identifier that controls access to certain SCC (system control center) functionality. The two types of user logon are: General operator - required to print the operator ID of the current user on printouts and reports
Section 1-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Administrator - required to perform administrator functions such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic procedures, and approving the maintenance log
Additionally, Abbott Area Customer Support may provide a user name and temporary password to operators who call for troubleshooting assistance. This logon authorizes selected functions in addition to those allowed by the system administrator logon.
Log on (general operator)

Perform this procedure so that your operator ID displays on various screens and reports. NOTE: Although you can run the system without logging on, you must log on if your operator ID is needed on system printouts and reports. To log on as a system administrator, see Log on (system administrator), page 1-23.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies
Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20

Any General operator NA
To log on (general operator): 1. Select F2 - Log on on the Snapshot screen. The Log on window displays. 2. Enter your operator ID in the User name data entry box (maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters). 3. Select Done to log on. Your operator ID displays in the upper left-hand corner of the Snapshot screen.
Related information... User logon, page 1-21

Snapshot screen, page 1-18 Log on window, page 1-21
Section 1-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1 Log on (system administrator)

Perform this procedure to complete system administrator functions such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic procedures, and approving the maintenance log. To log on as a general operator, see Log on (general operator), page 1-22. To change the administrator password, see Change the system administrator password, page 1-23.

Any System administrator NA
To log on (system administrator): 1. Select F2 - Log on on the Snapshot screen. The Log on window displays. 2. Enter ADMIN (all capital letters) in the User name data entry box. 3. Enter the system administrator password in the Password field. 4. Select Done to log on. ADMIN displays in the upper left-hand corner of the Snapshot screen.

Change the system administrator password

Perform this procedure to configure a new system administrator password.
Access the Configuration screen - System settings view, page 2-5

Any System administrator NA
To change the system administrator password:
Section 1-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
1. Select Password from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. 3. The Configure password window displays. 4. Enter the new password in the System administrator password data entry box. 5. Enter the new password in the System administrator password confirm data entry box to confirm the new password. 6. Select Done to save your changes.
Related information... Configuration screen - System settings view, page 2-4

Configure password window, page 2-47
Log off
Perform this procedure to log off if you are currently logged on to the system.

Any Any NA
To log off: 1. Select F2 - Log on on the Snapshot screen. The Log on window displays. 2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the user name. 3. Select Done to log off. 4. Verify that a logon identifier does not display in the upper left-hand corner of the Snapshot screen.

Section 1-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Processing modules
Processing modules perform all sample processing activities from aspiration to final read. Unless otherwise indicated, the term processing module is used generically throughout this documentation to refer to all types. Processing module topics include: Processing module (c System), page 1-25 Processing modules (i System), page 1-71
Processing module (c System)

The c System processing modules perform all sample processing activities from aspiration to final read. The two types of c System processing modules are: c 8000 processing module, page 1-25 c 16000 processing module, page 1-27
c 8000 processing module

The c 8000 processing module is a chemistry analyzer that performs sample processing. It processes up to 800 photometric and 600 potentiometric tests per hour making use of up to 56 - 65 onboard reagents in two temperature-controlled reagent supply centers. For the c 8000 processing module, the sample handler configuration is the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples for retest. The c 8000 processing module can also be configured with a LAS (laboratory automation system).
Section 1-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.19: c 8000 processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend: 1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29: Provides a local user interface for controlling the processing center. 3. Supply center door: Provides access to the bulk storage supply center. 4. Pump center door: Provides access to the pump center. 5. Card cage door: Provides access to the card cage.
Section 1-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.20: c 8000 processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend: 1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Main power supply: Provides power to the processing module. 3. Water management unit: Provides the water supply connection.
Related information... Processing center (c 8000), page 1-31

Sample and reagent syringe area (c 8000), page 1-49 Optional components (c System), page 1-70 ARCHITECT integrated system, page 1-2 ARCHITECT c 8000 System, page 1-3
c 16000 processing module

The c 16000 processing module is a chemistry analyzer that performs sample processing. It processes up to 1600 photometric and 600 potentiometric tests per hour making use of up to 56 - 65 onboard reagents in two temperature-controlled reagent supply centers. For the c 16000 processing module, the sample handler configuration is the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples for retest.
Section 1-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
The c 16000 processing module can also be configured with a LAS (laboratory automation system). Figure 1.21: c 16000 processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend: 1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29: Provides a local user interface for controlling the processing center. 3. Supply and pump center doors: Left - Provides access to the sample and reagent syringes. Middle - Provides access to the sample and reagent syringe and probe wash pumps. Right - Provides access to the bulk solution storage supply center and the wash solution and cuvette wash pumps.
Section 1-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.22: c 16000 processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend: 1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. ICT pump access cover: Provides access to the ICT aspiration and reference solution pumps. 3. Main power supply: Provides power to the processing module. 4. Water management unit: Provides the water supply connection.
Related information... Processing center (c 16000), page 1-50

Sample and reagent syringe area (c 16000), page 1-69 Optional components (c System), page 1-70 ARCHITECT c 16000 System, page 1-4 ARCHITECT integrated system, page 1-2
Processing module keypad (c System)

The processing module keypad, located on the right side of the processing module, is an input device used by the operator to direct the processing center activities.
Section 1-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.23: Components of the c System processing module keypad
Legend: 1. Run key: Places the processing module into a Running status and prepares the module to accept samples. Restarts the processing center after a Scheduled Pause.
2. Carousel advance key (2): Aligns if necessary, and then advances reagent supply center 2 by 1/3 turn to aid in loading and unloading reagents. The LED illuminates when access to the reagent supply center is allowed. 3. Carousel advance key (1): Aligns if necessary, and then advances reagent supply center 1 by 1/3 turn to aid in loading and unloading reagents. The LED illuminates when access to the reagent supply center is allowed. 4. Pause key: Places the processing module into a Scheduled Pause status and stops aspiration of new tests. Tests already in progress continue to completion. 5. Stop key: Stops all processing module activity, but does not shut down power to the processing module. 6. L1, L2, L3, L4 keys: Used when performing some diagnostic and maintenance procedures. 7. Display area: Displays text during some maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
Section 1-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1 Processing center (c 8000)

The processing center is the main activity area of the processing module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed in a reaction carousel where assay processing is performed. Figure 1.24: ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components Processing modules
Legend: 1. Sample hardware components (c 8000), page 1-31: Provide sample aspiration, dispense, and positive identification. 2. Reagent hardware components (c 8000), page 1-34: Provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and positive identification. 3. Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000), page 1-39: Position the cuvettes for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Sample hardware components (c 8000)

Sample hardware components are devices that provide sample aspiration, dispense, and positive identification.
Section 1-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.25: Sample hardware components (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32: Used for loading patient samples, calibrators, and controls. 2. Indicator lights: Used to access and advance the sample carousel. See Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000), page 1-33. 3. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and sample ID. 4. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes. See Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000), page 1-33. 5. Sample probe wash cup: Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip. See Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000), page 1-33.
Sample carousel (c 8000) The sample carousel is a local sample handler with 32 refrigerated positions used for loading clinical chemistry patient samples, calibrators, and controls. Positions 31 and 32 are reserved for onboard solutions that are used in the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. Samples can be loaded in tubes and sample cups. Patient samples and controls in tubes can be bar code labeled to provide positive identification. Bar codes cannot be used for calibrator samples. Samples on the carousel take priority over those on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) under normal operating conditions. In the event of a RSH or LAS failure, the sample carousel can be used as the primary area for loading clinical chemistry samples.
Section 1-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.26: Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Sample carousel: Used for loading patient samples, calibrators, and controls. 2. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and bar coded labels on samples. 3. Sample carousel access indicator (square): Indicates when you can access the sample carousel and provides a method to pause. When the access indicator light is: Off - the sample carousel is moving and cannot be accessed. Blinking - the access indicator has been pressed and the sample carousel is in the process of pausing. On - the sample carousel can be accessed.
4. Sample carousel advance indicator (round): Indicates when you can advance the sample carousel. When the advance indicator light is: On - the sample carousel can be advanced. Off - the advance indicator button has been pressed and the sample carousel is in the process of advancing a 1/3 rotation or the sample carousel is closed.
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000) The sample pipettor is a device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into the cuvettes. It also transfers diluted samples
Section 1-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
from the cuvette used to make the dilution into the cuvette used for the reaction. This pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration. The sample probe wash cup is an active wash station that washes any remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip. The sample probe is washed between samples to eliminate carryover. Figure 1.27: Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes. 2. Sample probe wash cup: Washes remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Reagent hardware components (c 8000)

Reagent hardware components are devices that provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and positive identification.
Section 1-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.28: Reagent hardware components (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits and diluents. See Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35. 2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits and onboard solutions. See Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35. 3. Reagent pipettor 1 and wash cup: Pipettor aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes. Wash cup washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip. See Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000), page 1-37. 4. Reagent pipettor 2 and wash cup: Pipettor aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes. Wash cup washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip. See Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000), page 1-37. 5. R1 onboard solution area: Holds probe wash solutions for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. See Onboard solution areas (c 8000), page 1-38. 6. R2 onboard solution area: Holds probe wash solutions for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. See Onboard solution areas (c 8000), page 1-38. 7. R1 bar code reader: Reads 2D (two-dimensional) bar code labels on Abbott pre-packaged reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined reagents. 8. R2 bar code reader: Reads 2D bar code labels on Abbott pre-packaged reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined reagents.
Reagent supply centers (c 8000) Reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) are refrigerated reagent carousels for onboard storage of: reagent kits (R1 and R2) onboard solutions in position D1 (R1 and R2) sample diluents
Section 1-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 for more information. These reagent supply centers and their associated reagent pipettors are separately controlled to allow reagents to be independently aspirated and dispensed by each reagent pipettor. The c 8000 reagent supply center 1 consists of an inner and outer carousel that are segmented to store a maximum of 56 - 65 reagent cartridges depending on the configuration of the segments. The location and capacity of each segment is presented in the following table.
Segment Outer A Description A 12 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges. This segment also has a pipettor calibration target. A 12 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges or a 15 position reagent segment designed for small cartridges. A 20 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges. This segment also has a pipettor calibration target.
Outer A, B, and C
Inner D
The c 8000 reagent supply center 2 consists of one carousel that is segmented to store a maximum of 36 - 56 reagent cartridges depending on the configuration of the segments. The location and capacity of each segment is presented in the following table.
Segment A Description A 14 position reagent segment designed for small cartridges. This segment also has a pipettor calibration target. A 9 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges or a 14 position reagent segment designed for small cartridges.
B, C, and D
For more information on available reagent segments, see Reagent segments (c 8000), page 1-149. Reagents can be bar code labeled to provide positive identification.
Section 1-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.29: Temperature-controlled reagent supply centers (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits and onboard solutions. 2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits and onboard solutions.
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000) Reagent pipettors 1 and 2 are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the cuvette. Reagent pipettor 1 also transfers sample diluents from reagent supply center 1 into a cuvette to be used for onboard sample dilution. Reagent pipettor wash cups are active wash stations that wash any remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Section 1-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.30: Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Reagent pipettor 1: Aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes. 2. Reagent pipettor 1 wash cup: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip. 3. Reagent pipettor 2: Aspirates and dispenses reagents into cuvettes. 4. Reagent pipettor 2 wash cup: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Onboard solution areas (c 8000) Reagent onboard solution areas are storage locations for probe wash solutions, which are used for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. A rack within each area holds two 90 mL cartridges in positions E1 and E2. Position D1 in each reagent carousel may also be used for onboard solution storage when an additional location is necessary.
Section 1-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.31: Onboard solution areas (c 8000) Processing modules
Legend: 1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1) onboard solution area: Holds probe wash solutions for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. 2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2) onboard solution area: Holds probe wash solutions for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000)

Reaction carousel hardware components are devices that position the cuvettes for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Section 1-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.32: Reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Reaction carousel (c 8000), page 1-40: Positions the cuvettes for sample processing. 2. Cuvette segments (c 8000), page 1-41: Hold cuvettes in the reaction carousel. 3. Lamp (c 8000), page 1-42: Provides the light source for photometric measurement. 4. Mixer unit (c 8000), page 1-42: Houses the mixers that mix sample with reagent. 5. Cuvette washer (c 8000), page 1-43: Washes and dries the cuvettes. 6. ICT unit (c 8000), page 1-44: Measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using ICT (integrated chip technology). 7. Water bath/waste overflow area (c 8000), page 1-45: Receives liquid waste from the pipettors. ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Reaction carousel (c 8000) The reaction carousel is a device that: Accommodates a variety of assay protocols Consists of 11 cuvette segments Is surrounded by a 37C water bath Rotates counter-clockwise to position the cuvettes at the following locations:
Section 1-40
Sample dispense R1 reagent dispense R2 reagent dispense ICT electrolyte aspiration

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Mixing positions (2) Photometric read position Diluted sample aspiration Processing modules
Figure 1.33: Reaction carousel (c 8000)
Cuvette segments (c 8000) Cuvette segments are racks that sit in the reaction carousel and hold cuvettes. Each cuvette segment holds 15 cuvettes. With 11 segments, the reaction carousel can hold 165 cuvettes.
Section 1-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.34: Cuvette segment (c 8000)
Lamp (c 8000) The lamp is an optical device used to provide the light source for photometric measurement. Figure 1.35: Lamp (c 8000)
Mixer unit (c 8000) The mixer unit is a device that houses two mixers (1 and 2) that mix the sample and reagent together. Mixer 1 (left side) mixes the sample (undiluted or diluted) with reagent 1. Mixer 2 (right side) mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
The exterior of each mixer is washed after each mixing operation.
Section 1-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.36: Mixer unit and mixers (c 8000) Processing modules
Legend: 1. Mixer 1: Mixes the sample with reagent 1. 2. Mixer 2: Mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
Cuvette washer (c 8000) The cuvette washer is a device with eight nozzles that, from left to right, perform the following functions before and after each cuvette is used: Nozzle 1 - aspirates sample and reagent mixture to waste Nozzle 2 - dispenses Alkaline Wash to clean the cuvette, and then aspirates it to waste Nozzle 3 - dispenses Acid Wash to clean the cuvette, and then aspirates it to waste Nozzles 4 and 5 - dispense water to rinse the cuvette, and then aspirate it to waste Nozzle 6 - dispenses water into the cuvette for the water blank measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity Nozzle 7 - aspirates the remaining water in the cuvette to waste Nozzle 8 - dries the cuvette
Section 1-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.37: Cuvette washer (c 8000)
ICT unit (c 8000) The ICT (integrated chip technology) unit is a device that consists of the ICT probe and ICT module and is used to perform indirect potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The ICT module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using integrated chip technology.
Section 1-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.38: ICT unit (c 8000) Processing modules
Legend: 1. ICT probe: Connected to the ICT module in the ICT unit. The ICT probe aspirates diluted sample from the cuvettes or ICT Reference Solution from the ICT reference solution cup into the ICT module for processing. 2. ICT module: Located in the ICT unit. The ICT module measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using integrated chip technology. 3. ICT reference solution cup: Located beneath the ICT probe when the ICT unit is in the home position. ICT reference solution cup contains preheated reference solution that is aspirated by the ICT probe and measured by the ICT module. Sensors in the cup confirm the cup fills completely and sufficient solution is aspirated during measurement. 4. ICT reference solution warming ring: A narrow metal tube located in the water bath. The ICT reference solution warming ring warms the reference solution to 37C before the reference solution fills the ICT reference solution cup.
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 8000) The water bath/waste overflow area is a waste collection compartment that receives overflow from the water bath and liquid waste from the pipettors, ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit. Liquid waste from the pipettors and ICT reference solution cup collect in a low-concentration waste compartment, and then is removed through the low-concentration waste tubing. Liquid waste from the ICT unit collects in a high-concentration waste compartment and then is removed through the high-concentration waste tubing.
Section 1-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.39: Water bath and waste overflow area (c 8000)
Legend: 1. R1 tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettor 1 wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment. 2. R2 tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettor 2 wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment. 3. Sample tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from the sample pipettor wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment. 4. ICT reference solution cup low-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT reference solution cup into the low-concentration waste compartment. 5. ICT unit high-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT unit into the high-concentration waste compartment.
Supply and pump center (c 8000)

The supply and pump center is the storage area for processing module pumps, bulk solutions, and sample and reagent syringes and drives.
Section 1-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.40: Supply and pump center (c 8000) Processing modules
Legend: 1. Pump center: Houses the processing module pumps. 2. Bulk solution supply center: Provides onboard storage for ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash. 3. Sample and reagent syringes area: Houses the sample and reagent syringes and drives.
Pump center (c 8000)

The pump center is the area that houses the processing module pumps. These pumps provide the pressure needed to aspirate and dispense liquids into the appropriate components in the processing center and to the sample and reagent syringes.
Section 1-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.41: Processing module pumps (c 8000)
Legend: 1. ICT reference solution pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver ICT Reference Solution into the ICT reference solution cup. After the reference solution is measured, the ICT reference solution pump uses the syringe on the left to drain the cup. 2. Wash solution pump: Delivers diluted alkaline and acid wash solutions to the cuvette washer to wash cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance procedures. 3. ICT aspiration pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver samples or ICT Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once measurement is complete, the ICT aspiration pump uses the syringe on the left to aspirate waste from the water bath/waste overflow area to the high-concentration waster tubing: 4. ICT aspiration valve: Controls the direction of liquid flow while the ICT aspiration pump operates. 5. Cuvette wash pump: Delivers Reagent Grade Type II water to the cuvette washer. 6. Probe wash pump: Uses Reagent Grade Type II water to flush the sample and reagent probes. 7. High-concentration waste pump: Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate waste from the cuvettes to the optional high-concentration waste bottle or the drain.
Section 1-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1 Bulk solution supply center (c 8000)

The bulk solution supply center is an onboard storage area for ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash. The quantity of each bulk solution is verified by individual weight sensors. The sensor is tripped when the volume of the solution decreases to approximately 20% remaining. Figure 1.42: Bulk solution supply center (c 8000) Processing modules
Legend: 1. ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133: Aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results. 2. Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis. 3. Acid wash (c System), page 1-135: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 8000)

The sample and reagent syringe area is the location for the sample and reagent syringes and drives. Each drive supports a syringe that controls the aspiration and dispense of samples or reagents.
Section 1-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.43: Sample and reagent syringes (c 8000)
Legend: 1. Sample syringe: Aspirates and dispenses the sample. 2. Reagent syringes 1 and 2: Aspirates and dispenses the reagent.
Processing center (c 16000)

The processing center is the main activity area of the processing module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed in a reaction carousel where assay processing is performed.
Section 1-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.44: ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components
Legend: 1. Sample hardware components: Provide sample aspiration, dispense, and positive identification. 2. Reagent hardware components: Provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and positive identification. 3. Reaction carousel hardware components: Position the cuvettes for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Related information... Sample hardware components (c 16000), page 1-51

Reagent hardware components (c 16000), page 1-54 Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000), page 1-58
Sample hardware components (c 16000)

Sample hardware components are devices that provide sample aspiration, dispense, and positive identification.
Section 1-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.45: Sample hardware components (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Sample carousel: Used for loading patient samples, calibrators, and controls. 2. Indicator lights: Used to access and advance the sample carousel. 3. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and sample ID. 4. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes. 5. Sample probe wash cup: Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Related information... Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52

Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000), page 1-53 Sample carousel (c 16000) The sample carousel is a local sample handler with 32 refrigerated positions used for loading clinical chemistry patient samples, calibrators, and controls. Positions 31 and 32 are reserved for onboard solutions that are used in the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. Samples can be loaded in tubes and sample cups. Patient samples and controls in tubes can be bar code labeled to provide positive identification. Bar codes cannot be used for calibrator samples. Samples on the carousel take priority over those on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) under normal operating conditions. In the event of a RSH or LAS failure, the sample carousel can be used as the primary area for loading clinical chemistry samples.
Section 1-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.46: Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Sample carousel: Used for loading patient samples, calibrators, and controls. 2. Sample bar code reader: Reads the carousel ID and bar coded labels on samples. 3. Sample carousel access indicator (square): Indicates when you can access the sample carousel and provides a method to pause. When the access indicator light is: Off - the sample carousel is moving and cannot be accessed. Blinking - the access indicator has been pressed and the sample carousel is in the process of pausing. On - the sample carousel can be accessed.
4. Sample carousel advance indicator (round): Indicates when you can advance the sample carousel. When the advance indicator light is: On - the sample carousel can be advanced. Off - the advance indicator button has been pressed and the sample carousel is in the process of advancing a 1/3 rotation or the sample carousel is closed.
Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000) The sample pipettor is a device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into the cuvettes. It also transfers diluted samples from the cuvette used to make the dilution into the cuvette used for the reaction. This pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration. The sample probe wash cup is an active wash station that washes any remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip. The sample probe is washed between samples to eliminate carryover.
Section 1-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.47: Sample pipettor and sample probe wash cup (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Sample pipettor: Aspirates and dispenses samples into cuvettes. 2. Sample probe wash cup: Washes remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Reagent hardware components (c 16000)

Reagent hardware components are devices that provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and positive identification.
Section 1-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.48: Reagent hardware components (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits, diluents, and onboard solutions. 2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2): Provides refrigerated storage for reagent kits and onboard solutions. 3. Reagent pipettors R1A and R1B and wash cups: Pipettors aspirate and dispense reagents into cuvettes. Wash cups wash the probe exterior, interior, and tip. 4. Reagent pipettors R2A and R2B and wash cups: Pipettors aspirate and dispense reagents into cuvettes. Wash cups wash the probe exterior, interior, and tip. 5. Reagent bar code readers: Read 2D (two-dimensional) bar code labels on Abbott pre-packaged reagents or 1D bar code labels on user-defined reagents.
Related information... Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55

Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000), page 1-57 Reagent supply centers (c 16000) Reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) are refrigerated reagent carousels for onboard storage of: reagent kits sample diluents onboard solutions
See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 and Onboard solution areas (c 16000), page 1-58 for more information.
Section 1-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
These reagent supply centers and their associated reagent pipettors are separately controlled to allow reagents to be independently aspirated and dispensed by each reagent pipettor. To improve throughput the c 16000 uses a dual line feature to pair assays for each run. The system aspirates reagents for the two assays, one assay on a designated A-line and the other on a designated B-line, in the same cycle. Both reagent supply centers consists of an inner and outer carousel that are segmented to store a maximum of 56 - 65 reagent cartridges. The location and capacity of each segment on the carousel is presented in the following table.
Carousel Outer (A-line) Segment Outer A, B, and C Description A 12 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges or a 15 position reagent segment for small cartridges. The 12 position reagent segment A has a pipettor calibration target. A 20 position reagent segment designed for large cartridges. This segment also has a pipettor calibration target.
Inner (B-line)
Inner D
The shaded areas in the figure below indicate the location of the segments used for A-line (Outer) reagents. The unshaded area is the location for B-line (Inner) reagents. Figure 1.49: A-line and B-line locations on reagent supply centers
For more information on available reagent segments, see Reagent segments (c 16000), page 1-153. Reagents can be bar code labeled to provide positive identification.
Section 1-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.50: Temperature-controlled reagent supply centers (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Reagent supply center 1 (R1): Provides onboard storage for reagent kits, onboard solutions, and diluents. 2. Reagent supply center 2 (R2): Provides onboard storage for reagent kits and onboard solutions.
Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000) Reagent pipettors 1 (A and B) and 2 (A and B) are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the cuvette. Reagent pipettors 1 also transfer sample diluents from reagent supply center 1 into cuvettes to be used for onboard sample dilution. Reagent pipettor wash cups are active wash stations that wash any remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Section 1-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.51: Reagent pipettors and wash cups (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Reagent pipettors R1A and R1B: Aspirate and dispense reagents into cuvettes. 2. Reagent pipettor 1 wash cups: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip. 3. Reagent pipettors R2A and R2B: Aspirate and dispense reagents into cuvettes. 4. Reagent pipettor 2 wash cups: Washes the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Onboard solution areas (c 16000) Onboard solutions are wash solutions used to clean probes, mixers, and cuvettes for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures. These solutions are stored in positions 1, 2, and 3 on reagent segments C and D on both the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000)

Reaction carousel hardware components are devices that position the cuvettes for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, photometric or potentiometric analysis, and cuvette washing.
Section 1-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.52: Reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Reaction carousel: Positions the cuvettes for sample processing. 2. Cuvette segments: Hold cuvettes in the reaction carousel. 3. Lamp: Provides the light source for photometric measurement. 4. Mixer unit: Houses the mixers that mix sample with reagent. 5. Cuvette washer: Washes and dries the cuvettes. 6. ICT unit: Measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using ICT (integrated chip technology). 7. Water bath/waste overflow area: Receives liquid waste from the pipettors. ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Related information... Reaction carousel (c 16000), page 1-59

Cuvette segments (c 16000), page 1-60 Lamp (c 16000), page 1-61 Mixer unit (c 16000), page 1-61 Cuvette washer (c 16000), page 1-62 ICT unit (c 16000), page 1-63 Water bath/waste overflow area (c 16000), page 1-64 Reaction carousel (c 16000) The reaction carousel is a device that: Accommodates a variety of assay protocols Consists of 15 cuvette segments Is surrounded by a 37C water bath
Section 1-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Rotates counter-clockwise to position the cuvettes at the following locations: Sample dispense R1 reagent dispense R2 reagent dispense ICT electrolyte aspiration Mixing positions (2) Photometric read position Diluted sample aspiration
Figure 1.53: Reaction carousel (c 16000)
Cuvette segments (c 16000) Cuvette segments are racks that sit in the reaction carousel and hold cuvettes. Each cuvette segment holds 11 cuvette pairs (22 cuvettes). With 15 cuvette segments the reaction carousel contains 165 cuvette pairs or a total of 330 cuvettes (22 cuvettes x 15 cuvette segments).
Section 1-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.54: Cuvette segment (c 16000) Processing modules
Lamp (c 16000) The lamp is an optical device used to provide the light source for photometric measurement. Figure 1.55: Lamp (c 16000)
Mixer unit (c 16000) The mixer unit is a device that houses two mixer pairs (1A, 1B and 2A, 2B) that mix the sample and reagent together. Mixer 1 pair (left side) mixes the sample (undiluted or diluted) with reagent 1. Mixer 2 pair (right side) mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
The exterior of each mixer is washed after each mixing operation.

Section 1-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.56: Mixer unit and mixers (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Mixer 1: Mixes the sample with reagent 1. 2. Mixer 2: Mixes the sample/reagent 1 mixture with reagent 2.
Cuvette washer (c 16000) The cuvette washer is a device with eight nozzle pairs that, from left to right, perform the following functions before and after each cuvette is used: Nozzle pair 1 - aspirates sample and reagent mixture to waste Nozzle pair 2 - dispenses Alkaline Wash to clean the cuvette, and then aspirates it to waste Nozzle pair 3 - dispenses Acid Wash to clean the cuvette, and then aspirates it to waste Nozzle pairs 4 and 5 - dispense water to rinse the cuvette, and then aspirate it to waste Nozzle pair 6 - dispenses water into the cuvette for the water blank measurement, which ensures cuvette integrity Nozzle pair 7 - aspirates the remaining water in the cuvette to waste Nozzle pair 8 - dries the cuvette
Section 1-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.57: Cuvette washer (c 16000) Processing modules
ICT unit (c 16000) The ICT (integrated chip technology) unit is a device that consists of the ICT probe and ICT module and is used to perform indirect potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The ICT module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using integrated chip technology.
Section 1-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.58: ICT unit (c 16000)
Legend: 1. ICT probe: Connected to the ICT module in the ICT unit. The ICT probe aspirates diluted sample from the cuvettes or ICT Reference Solution from the ICT reference solution cup into the ICT module for processing. 2. ICT module: Located in the ICT unit. The ICT module measures potentiometric assays (electrolytes) using integrated chip technology. 3. ICT reference solution cup: Located beneath the ICT probe when the ICT unit is in the home position. ICT reference solution cup contains preheated reference solution that is aspirated by the ICT probe and measured by the ICT module. Sensors in the cup confirm the cup fills completely and sufficient solution is aspirated during measurement. 4. ICT reference solution warming ring: A narrow metal tube located in the water bath. The ICT reference solution warming ring warms the reference solution to 37C before the reference solution fills the ICT reference solution cup.
Water bath/waste overflow area (c 16000) The water bath/waste overflow area is a waste collection compartment that receives overflow from the water bath and liquid waste from the pipettors, ICT reference solution cup, and ICT unit.
Section 1-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Liquid waste from the pipettors and ICT reference solution cup collect in a low-concentration waste compartment, and then is removed through the low-concentration waste tubing. Liquid waste from the ICT unit collects in a high-concentration waste compartment and then is removed through the high-concentration waste tubing. Figure 1.59: Water bath and waste overflow area (c 16000)
Legend: 1. R1 (A and B) tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettors 1 wash cups into the low-concentration waste compartment. 2. Sample tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from the sample pipettor wash cup into the low-concentration waste compartment. 3. R2A tubing: Delivers excess deionized water from reagent pipettors 2 wash cups into the low-concentration waste compartment. 4. Alkaline wash solution tubing: Delivers diluted alkaline wash solution from the wash solution pump into the low-concentration waste compartment. 5. ICT reference solution cup low-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT reference solution cup into the low-concentration waste compartment 6. ICT unit high-concentration waste tubing: Delivers liquid waste from the ICT unit into the high-concentration waste compartment. 7. R2B tubing: Delivers deionized water into the water bath to compensate for loss of water during normal running.
Section 1-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Supply and pump centers (c 16000)

The supply and pump centers are the storage areas for processing module pumps, bulk solutions, and sample and reagent syringes and drives. Figure 1.60: Supply and pump centers (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Sample and reagent syringes area: Houses the sample and reagent syringes and drives. 2. Pump center: Houses the processing module pumps. 3. Bulk solution supply center: Provides onboard storage for ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash.
Pump centers (c 16000)

The pump centers are the areas that house the processing module pumps. These pumps provide the pressure needed to aspirate and dispense liquids into the appropriate components in the processing center and to the sample and reagent syringes. The pump center on the front of the processing module houses the probe wash, wash solution, and cuvette wash pumps.
Section 1-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.61: c 16000 Pump center (front view) Processing modules
Legend: 1. Probe wash pumps: Uses Reagent Grade Type II water to flush the sample and reagent probes. 2. Wash solution pump: Delivers diluted alkaline and acid wash solutions to the cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance procedures. 3. Cuvette wash pump: Delivers Reagent Grade Type II water to the cuvette washer.
The pump centers on the back of the processing module house the ICT and high-concentration waste pumps.
Section 1-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.62: c 16000 Pump centers (rear view)
Legend: 1. ICT aspiration pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver samples or ICT Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once measurement is complete, the ICT aspiration pump uses the syringe on the left to aspirate waste from the water bath/waste overflow area to the high-concentration waste tubing. The ICT aspiration valve controls the direction of liquid flow while the ICT aspiration pump operates. 2. ICT reference solution pump: Uses the syringe on the right to deliver ICT Reference Solution into the ICT reference solution cup. After the reference solution is measured, the ICT reference solution pump uses the syringe on the left to drain the cup. 3. High-concentration waste pump: Works with the cuvette washer to aspirate waste from the cuvettes to the optional high-concentration waste container or the drain.
Bulk solution supply center (c 16000)

The bulk solution supply center is an onboard storage area for ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash. The quantity of each bulk solution is verified by individual weight sensors. The sensor is tripped when the volume of the solution decreases to approximately 20% remaining.
Section 1-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.63: Bulk solution supply center (c 16000)
Legend: 1. ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133: Aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results. 2. Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis. 3. Acid wash (c System), page 1-135: Used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
Sample and reagent syringe area (c 16000)

The sample and reagent syringe area is the location for the sample and reagent syringes and drives. Each drive supports a syringe that controls the aspiration and dispense of samples or reagents.
Section 1-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.64: Sample and reagent syringes (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Sample syringe: Aspirates and dispenses the sample. 2. R1 Reagent syringes (A and B): Aspirate and dispense the reagent. 3. R2 Reagent syringes (A and B): Aspirate and dispense the reagent.
Optional components (c System)

Optional components for the c System processing modules include: UPS (uninterruptible power supply) - provides a temporary, continuous flow of power to the processing module during a power failure.
Section 1-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
High-concentration waste bottle - collects the high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit.
Processing modules (i System)

The i System processing modules perform all sample processing activities from aspiration to final read. The two types of i System processing modules are: i 2000 processing module, page 1-71 i 2000SR processing module, page 1-75
i 2000 processing module

An i 2000 processing module is an immunoassay analyzer that performs sample processing. It processes up to 200 CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour making use of up to 25 onboard reagent kits (100 and/or 500 tests) in a temperature-controlled reagent carousel. The i 2000 processing module can be configured with either the SSH (standard sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler. The following illustrations show the: i 2000 processing module (front view - SSH), page 1-72 i 2000 processing module (rear view - SSH), page 1-73 i 2000 processing module (front view - LAS carousel sample handler), page 1-74 i 2000 processing module (rear view - LAS carousel sample handler), page 1-75
Section 1-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.65: i 2000 processing module (front view - SSH)
Legend: 1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77: Provides a local user interface for controlling the processing center. 3. Supply and waste center door: Provides access to the bulk storage and solid waste storage area. 4. Card cage door: Provides access to the card cage.
Section 1-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.66: i 2000 processing module (rear view - SSH)
Legend: 1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Rear processing center access panel: Provides access to the processing center components. 3. Power supply panel: Provides access to the power supply components. 4. Pump bay panel: Provides access to the pumps and vacuum center.
Section 1-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.67: i 2000 processing module (front view - LAS carousel sample handler)
Legend: 1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77: Provides a local user interface for controlling the processing center. 3. Sample pipettor cover: Covers the sample pipettor as it accesses samples on the LAS track. 4. Supply and waste center door: Provides access to the bulk storage and solid waste storage area. 5. Card cage door: Provides access to the card cage.
Section 1-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.68: i 2000 processing module (rear view - LAS carousel sample handler)
Legend: 1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Rear processing center access panel: Provides access to the processing center components. 3. Power supply panel: Provides access to the power supply components. 4. Pump bay panel: Provides access to the pumps and vacuum system.
Related information... Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-78

Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98 Optional components (i System), page 1-109 ARCHITECT i 2000 System, page 1-5
i 2000SR processing module

An i 2000SR processing module is an immunoassay analyzer that performs sample processing. It processes up to 200 CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour
Section 1-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
making use of up to 25 onboard reagent kits (100 and/or 500 tests) in a temperature-controlled reagent carousel and provides stat processing. For the i 2000SR processing module the sample handler configuration is the robotic sample handler, which automatically positions samples for retest. The i 2000SR processing module can also be configured with a LAS (laboratory automation system). Figure 1.69: i 2000SR processing module (front view - RSH)
Legend: 1. Front processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77: Provides a local user interface for controlling the processing center. 3. Supply and waste center door: Provides access to the bulk storage and solid waste storage area. 4. Card cage door: Provides access to the card cage.
Section 1-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.70: i 2000SR processing module (rear view - RSH)
Legend: 1. Rear processing center cover: Provides access to the components that perform assay processing activities. 2. Rear processing center access panel: Provides access to the processing center components. 3. Power supply panel: Provides access to the power supply components. 4. Pump bay panel: Provides access to the pumps and vacuum system.
Related information... Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-78

Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98 Optional components (i System), page 1-109 ARCHITECT integrated system, page 1-2 ARCHITECT i 2000SR System, page 1-6
Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The processing module keypad, located on the left side of the processing module, is an input device used by the operator to direct the processing center activities.
Section 1-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.71: Components of an i System processing module keypad
Legend: 1. Run key: Places the processing module into Running status and prepares the module to accept samples. Restarts the processing center after a Scheduled Pause.
2. Carousel advance key: Aligns the reagent carousel and advances the reagent carousel five positions to aid in loading reagents. 3. Access indicator light: Illuminates to indicate that the processing module is in the Warming or Ready status and you can access the reagent carousel. 4. Stop key: Stops all processing module activity, but does not shut down power to the processing module. 5. L1, L2, L3, L4 keys: Used when performing some diagnostic and maintenance procedures.
Processing center (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The processing center is the main activity area of the processing module. Samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed into the RVs (reaction vessels) in the process path where assay processing is performed.
Section 1-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.72: ARCHITECT i System processing center hardware components
Legend: 1. Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-80: Provide sample aspiration and dispense. 2. Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-84: Provide reagent aspiration and dispense. 3. Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-89: Position the RVs for sample and reagent aspiration, mixing, washing, and CMIA processing.
Related information... Processing center map (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-79
Processing center map (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Processing center maps are attached to the front and rear processing center covers on an ARCHITECT i System to assist you in locating components when you are performing component replacement procedures or troubleshooting processing module problems. The map displays a letter and/or number identifier for each component. The i 2000SR processing module has additional components which display
Section 1-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
on the map in pink (ST, STW, VTXST, STD, STS). These components are used when processing STAT assay protocols. Figure 1.73: Processing center map
For a description of each component refer to Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-80, Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-84, or Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-89.
Sample hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Sample hardware components are devices that provide sample aspiration and dispense.
Section 1-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.74: Sample hardware components of the processing center
Legend: 1. Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-81 (S and ST): Aspirate and dispense samples into the RVs (reaction vessels). 2. Sample and STAT syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-82 (SS and STS): Control the aspiration and dispense of samples. 3. Sample and STAT wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-83 (SW and STW): Used to wash remaining fluid from the probe interior and tip.
Sample and STAT pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR) The sample and STAT pipettors (S and ST, respectively, on the processing center map) are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense samples into the reaction vessel. The sample pipettor also transfers pretreated samples into a new reaction vessel after the appropriate incubation period. These pipettor assemblies include a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
Section 1-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.75: Sample and STAT pipettors
Legend: 1. Sample pipettor 2. STAT pipettor
Sample and STAT syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR) The sample and STAT syringes (SS and STS, respectively, on the processing center map) are devices that control the aspiration and dispense of samples.
Section 1-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.76: Example of a sample or STAT syringe
Sample and STAT wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR) The sample and STAT wash stations (SW and STW, respectively, on the processing center map) are passive wash stations where the sample and STAT probes dispense excess sample and any remaining fluid is washed from the probe interior and tip.
Section 1-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.77: Example of a sample or STAT wash station
Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Reagent hardware components are devices that provide reagent aspiration, dispense, and positive identification. Figure 1.78: Reagent hardware components of the processing module
Legend: 1. Reagent carousel: Provides cooled, temperature-controlled storage for reagent kits. See Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-85.
Section 1-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
2. Reagent bar code reader: Reads 2D (two dimensional) bar code labels on reagent bottles. See Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-85. 3. Reagent pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-86 (R1 and R2): Aspirate and dispense reagents into RVs (reaction vessels). 4. Reagent syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-87 (R1S and R2S): Aspirate and dispense reagents. 5. Reagent wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-88 (R1W and R2W): Wash any remaining fluid from the probe interior and exterior surfaces.
Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR) The reagent carousel is a rotating circular device that: Holds up to 25 bar coded reagent kits (75 individual bottles) in a cooled, temperature-controlled environment Consists of three rings that are color coded to match the color stripe at the top of the reagent bottle labels Provides microparticle dispersion by continuously rotating the microparticle reagent bottles Rotates to position bottles for reagent aspiration and dispense
Section 1-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.79: Reagent carousel
Reagent pipettors (i 2000/i 2000SR) Reagent pipettors (R1 and R2 on the processing center map) are devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the RV (reaction vessel). Each pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration.
Section 1-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.80: Reagent pipettor (R1) Processing modules
Figure 1.81: Reagent pipettor (R2)
Reagent syringes (i 2000/i 2000SR) The reagent syringes (R1S and R2S on the processing center map) are devices that control the aspiration and dispense of reagents.
Section 1-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.82: Example of a reagent syringe (R1 or R2)
Reagent wash stations (i 2000/i 2000SR) The reagent wash stations (R1W and R2W on the processing center map) are active wash stations that wash any remaining fluid from the probe interior and exterior surfaces. In addition, a vacuum source dries the exterior of the probe. The portion of the probe that enters the reagent bottle is washed and dried in this wash station.
Section 1-88
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
Figure 1.83: Example of a reagent wash station (R1 or R2)
Process path hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The process path is a covered circular track that provides incubation temperatures, liquid aspiration, and wash points as necessary for the assay protocol. The process path advances RVs (reaction vessels) every 18 seconds and positions them at the designated locations to process the CMIA reaction. For information on the CMIA reaction, see CMIA technology and reaction sequence, page 3-24.
Section 1-89
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.84: Process path hardware components
Legend: 1. Load diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-91 (LD): Moves RVs from the inner track to the outer track of the process path when reaction vessels are needed for processing. 2. RV access door (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-91 (RVA): Used for diagnostic purposes only. This door allows access to one position on the outer track. 3. RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-92 (RVL): Provides onboard storage for RVs and transports RVs into the process path. 4. STAT diverter (i 2000SR), page 1-92 (STD): Moves RVs on an i 2000SR processing module from the inner track to the outer track of the process path when RVs are needed for STAT processing. 5. Vortexers (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-93 (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3, VTXST): Mix the reaction mixture to suspend microparticles. 6. Wash zone diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-94 (WZD): Directs RVs to one of two paths. One path moves RVs through the wash zone where a wash occurs. The other path moves RVs around the wash zone. 7. Wash zone manifolds (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-94 (WZ1, WZ2): Dispenses wash buffer, and removes and discards unbound analyte from the reaction mixture in the RV. 8. Process path drive motor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-95 (PPM): Rotates the process path disk, which holds RVs in place, and advances the RVs from position to position. 9. Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-96 (PT/T): Dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger Solution into the RVs.
Section 1-90
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
10. CMIA reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-96 (CMIA): Measures the chemiluminescent emission from RVs and outputs data corresponding to the quantity of emission detected. 11. Liquid waste arm (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-97 (A): Removes liquid from RVs prior to unloading it to the solid waste container. 12. RV unloader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98 (UL): Removes used RVs from the process path and discards them into the solid waste container after assay processing.
Load diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR) The load diverter (LD on the processing center map) is a device that moves RVs (reaction vessels) from the inner track to the outer track of the process path when RVs are needed for routine processing. Figure 1.85: Load diverter
RV access door (i 2000/i 2000SR) The RV access door (RVA on the processing center map) is an opening that allows access to one position on the outer track. You use this door for diagnostic purposes only and should always make sure it is closed during system operation.
Section 1-91
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.86: RV access door
RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR) The RV loader and hopper assembly (RVL on the processing center map) is a device that provides onboard storage for RVs (reaction vessels) and transports the RVs into the process path. Figure 1.87: RV loader and hopper assembly
STAT diverter (i 2000SR) The STAT diverter (STD on the processing center map) is a device that moves RVs (reaction vessels) from the inner track to the outer track of the process path when the RVs are needed for STAT processing.
Section 1-92
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.88: STAT diverter Processing modules
Vortexers (i 2000/i 2000SR) The vortexers (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3, and VTXST on the processing center map) are devices that mix the reaction mixture to suspend microparticles. The RVs are vortexed in the process path.
Section 1-93
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.89: Vortexers
Wash zone diverter (i 2000/i 2000SR) The wash zone diverter (WZD on the processing center map) is a device that directs RVs (reaction vessels) to one of two paths. One path moves RVs through the wash zone where a wash occurs. The other path moves RVs around the wash zone. Figure 1.90: Wash zone diverter
Wash zone manifolds (i 2000/i 2000SR) The wash zone manifolds (WZ1 and WZ2 on the processing center map) are devices that remove and discard unbound analyte from the
Section 1-94
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
reaction mixture in an RV (reaction vessel). Each wash zone has four positions where the following actions occur: Position 1 - A magnet attracts paramagnetic microparticles to the wall of the RV and a dispense nozzle dispenses wash buffer into the RV. Positions 2 and 3 - A vacuum is applied to the wash zone probes as they move to the bottom of the RV. In addition, nozzles dispense wash buffer into the RV. Additional wash/aspiration cycles occur at these positions. Position 4 - A wash zone probe aspirates liquid waste from the RV.
Figure 1.91: Wash zone manifold (WZ1)
Process path drive motor (i 2000/i 2000SR) The process path drive motor (PPM on the processing center map) is a device that rotates the process path disk, which holds the RVs (reaction vessels) in place, and advances the RVs from position to position.
Section 1-95
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.92: Process path drive motor (PPM)
Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (i 2000/i 2000SR) The pre-trigger/trigger manifold (PT/T on the processing center map) is a device that dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger Solution into RVs (reaction vessels). Figure 1.93: Pre-trigger/trigger manifold (PT/T)
CMIA reader (i 2000/i 2000SR) The CMIA reader (CMIA on the processing center map) is a device that measures the chemiluminescent emission from RVs (reaction vessels) and reports the quantity of emission detected.
Section 1-96
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.94: CMIA reader (CMIA) Processing modules
Liquid waste arm (i 2000/i 2000SR) The liquid waste arm (A on the processing center map) is a device that removes liquid from RVs (reaction vessels) prior to unloading them to the solid waste container.
Section 1-97
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.95: Liquid waste arm (A)
RV unloader (i 2000/i 2000SR) The RV unloader (UL on the processing center map) is a device that removes used RVs (reaction vessels) from the process path and discards them into the solid waste container after assay processing. Figure 1.96: RV unloader (UL)
Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The supply and waste center is the onboard storage area for bulk solutions and solid waste.
Section 1-98
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.97: Supply and waste center Processing modules
Legend: 1. Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-99: Provides onboard storage for Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution. 2. Wash buffer storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-103: Provides onboard storage for the wash buffer. 3. Solid waste storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-107: Provides storage for the used RVs (reaction vessels).
Pre-trigger/trigger storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The pre-trigger/trigger storage area is the location in the supply and waste center that provides onboard storage for the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution, which are necessary for test processing.
Section 1-99
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.98: Pre-trigger trigger storage area
Legend: 1. Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-100: Holds the pre-trigger and trigger bottles. 2. Trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-102: Detects the volume of remaining trigger solution. 3. Pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-101: Detects the volume of remaining pre-trigger solution.
Pre-trigger/trigger tray (i 2000/i 2000SR) The pre-trigger/trigger tray is a platform in the supply and waste center that holds the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution bottles.
Section 1-100
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.99: Pre-trigger/trigger tray Processing modules
Legend: 1. Trigger solution (i System), page 1-144: Used to produce the chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read. 2. Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-143: Used to split the acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This process prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of trigger solution.
Pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) The pre-trigger level sensor is an assembly with a magnetic float sensor located in the pre-trigger bottle that indicates when the liquid level is low. When the sensor trips, approximately 70 mLs of usable solution remains.
Section 1-101
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.100: Pre-trigger level sensor
Trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR) The trigger level sensor is an assembly with a magnetic float sensor located in the trigger bottle that indicates when the liquid level is low. When the sensor trips, approximately 70 mLs of usable solution remains.
Section 1-102
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.101: Trigger level sensor Processing modules
Wash buffer storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The wash buffer storage area is the location in the supply and waste center for onboard storage of wash buffer, which is used in test processing.
Section 1-103
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.102: Wash buffer storage area
Legend: 1. Wash buffer reservoir (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-104: Provides onboard storage for up to 25 liters of wash buffer. 2. Wash buffer level sensor: Draws wash buffer from the reservoir and measures the remaining volume of wash buffer. See Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-105. 3. Wash buffer inlet assembly: Dispenses wash buffer into the reservoir from the wash buffer preparation container or ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module). See Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-105. 4. Wash buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-106: Protects the fluidics components by eliminating particulates.
Wash buffer reservoir (i 2000/i 2000SR) The wash buffer reservoir is an onboard container in the supply and waste center that holds up to 25 liters of wash buffer.
Section 1-104
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.103: Wash buffer reservoir Processing modules
Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly (i 2000/i 2000SR) The wash buffer level sensor, located in the wash buffer reservoir, is an assembly containing a tube with three magnetic float sensors that indicate when the wash buffer reservoir is full (top sensor), needs to be filled by the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory (middle sensor), or is empty (lower sensor). The wash buffer level sensor tube transports wash buffer from the reservoir during test processing. The wash buffer inlet assembly tube transports wash buffer into the reservoir from the wash buffer preparation container or ARM.
Section 1-105
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.104: Wash buffer level sensor and wash buffer inlet assembly
Wash buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR) The wash buffer filter, located in the wash buffer storage area, is an assembly containing material used to eliminate particulates that might damage the fluidics components of the system.
Section 1-106
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.105: Wash buffer filter Processing modules
Solid waste storage area (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The solid waste storage area is the location in the supply and waste center that provides a storage area for the solid waste container that holds used RVs (reaction vessels). The RVs are directed into the container by a waste chute.
Section 1-107
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.106: Solid waste storage area
Waste chute and trap door (i 2000/i 2000SR) The waste chute is a device in the supply and waste center that receives used RVs (reaction vessels) by gravity and directs them into the solid waste container. The trap door holds up to 50 RVs when you remove the solid waste container during processing.
Section 1-108
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.107: Waste chute and trap door Processing modules
Optional components (i System)

Optional components available for an i System processing module include: UPS (uninterruptible power supply) - provides a temporary, continuous flow of power to the processing module during a power failure ARM optional accessory (i System), page 1-109 - dilutes Concentrated Wash Buffer to the proper concentration and delivers it to the wash buffer reservoir.
ARM optional accessory (i System)

The ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory is an optional ARCHITECT i System accessory that automatically dilutes Concentrated Wash Buffer to the proper concentration and delivers it to the wash buffer reservoir. The ARM is connected to a water supply and is loaded with a 10 L container of concentrated wash buffer. A single motor operating at a constant speed is geared to drive two pumps at a 9:1 ratio to each other, pumping the necessary proportions of water and concentrated wash buffer into a mixing chamber.
Section 1-109
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Sensors verify that incoming water and outgoing wash buffer meet predetermined specifications for ion content and temperature. If the standards are not met, the ARM motor stops automatically. Figure 1.108: ARM (front view)
Legend: 1. ARM keypad (i System), page 1-111: Provides a local user interface for controlling the ARM. 2. Tubing assembly: Detects the level of concentrated wash buffer in the 10 L container and transfers the concentrated wash buffer to the mixing chamber inside the ARM. 3. Fluidics and electronics bay: Provides access to the pump and circuit boards. 4. Concentrated wash buffer (10 L container): Concentrated wash buffer diluted by the ARM and delivered to the processing modules.
Section 1-110
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.109: ARM (rear view) Processing modules
Related information... ARM connectors (i System), page 1-113

ARM keypad (i System) The ARM keypad is an input device used by the operator to operate the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
Section 1-111
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
Figure 1.110: Components of the ARM keypad
Legend: 1. Start key: Initiates operation. The green indicator below the key illuminates during operation and flashes when wash buffer is being pumped to the wash buffer reservoir in the processing module. 2. Decontamination key (used by Abbott service representatives): Initiates the decontamination procedures. 3. Flush to drain key: Initiates a flush. This key is not functional when your wash buffer transfer option is set to Automatic. 4. Replace buffer key: Initiates loading of the 10 L container of Concentrated Wash Buffer. The amber indicator illuminates during this procedure. 5. Stop key: Stops the procedure currently in progress and/or interrupts communication to the SCC (system control center). The red indicator illuminates when you press the stop key. 6. Water quality error indicator: Illuminates red if the incoming water does not meet the NCCLS Type II resistivity standard. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops. 7. Buffer quality error indicator: Illuminates red if the diluted buffer mixture is outside acceptable limits. The up arrow indicates too much water. The down arrow indicates too little water. When either occurs, the system stops transfer of buffer. 8. Flood indicator: Illuminates red if liquid is detected in the flood pan. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops. 9. Water temperature indicator: Illuminates red if incoming water temperature is outside the range of 15 - 37C. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops. 10. Low inlet pressure indicator: Illuminates red if incoming water pressure or the flow rate is too low. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops. 11. High outlet pressure indicator: Illuminates red if the outgoing wash buffer pressure exceeds the pressure limit of the inlet valves. When this occurs, transfer of buffer stops.
Section 1-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing modules
12. Inventory level indicator: Indicates the volume of buffer remaining in the container. 3 bars illuminated = full 2 bars illuminated = mid (50%) 1 bar illuminated = low (20%) No bar illuminated = empty (<2%) The red indicator illuminates and the ARM stops.
ARM connectors (i System) Connectors on the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are ports that provide the connections for transporting fluids to and from the ARM and communicating with the SCC (system control center). Figure 1.111: Connectors on rear of ARM
1.
Diluted wash buffer outlet: Provides the connection that allows diluted wash buffer to be transferred to the wash buffer reservoir in the processing module. Decontamination port 1: Provides the connection that allows a 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution to be flushed through the ARM for decontamination.
2.
Section 1-113
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Processing modules
Section 1
3.
Water inlet: Provides the connection from the deionized water system to the ARM. Waste 1 (pressurized) port: Provides pressurized waste from the internal drip pan located inside the ARM to the external waste pump or floor drain. Waste 2 (gravity) port: Provides gravity waste from the internal drip pan, located inside the ARM, to the external waste pump or floor drain. RS232 port: Provides communication between the ARM and the SCC. Power switch: Used to cycle the power.
4.
5.
6. 7.
Figure 1.112: Connectors on top of ARM
1.
Sensor cable: Provides the connection from the tubing assembly to the ARM. Concentrated wash buffer inlet: Provides the connection that allows the concentrated wash buffer to be transferred to the mixing chamber of the ARM. Decontamination port 2: Provides the connection that allows the ARM system to be flushed with water to remove the 0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution.
2.
3.
Section 1-114
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample handlers
Sample handlers
The sample handler is a transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to the processing module(s). A single primary sample handler transports samples through an ARCHITECT System regardless of the number of processing modules and types. NOTE: Unless otherwise indicated, the term sample handler is used generically throughout this documentation to refer to all configurations. Sample handler topics include: RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115 SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121 LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123
RSH - robotic sample handler

The RSH (robotic sample handler) is a transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to a c System and/or i 2000SR processing module. The design of the RSH allows random and continuous access, and sample positioning for automatic retesting. Two types of bays position samples for either routine or priority processing.
Section 1-115
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sample handlers
Section 1
Figure 1.113: Robotic sample handler components
Legend: 1. RSH cover: Provides access to the RSH components. 2. RSH keypad, page 1-120: Provides a local user interface for controlling the sample handler. 3. RSH bar code reader: Reads the sample and sample carrier ID. 4. Priority bay (RSH), page 1-116: Positions samples for priority processing. 5. Routine bay (RSH), page 1-117: Positions samples for routine processing. 6. Carrier positioner, page 1-119: Positions carriers for sample aspiration. 7. Carrier transport, page 1-119: Transfers sample carriers from the bays to the carrier positioner and back.
Priority bay (RSH)

The priority bay is a holding area that positions samples for priority processing. You place samples in sample carriers and load them into the priority bay. The carrier transport picks up each carrier and moves it past the bar code reader. The bar code reader identifies the samples, the carrier transport moves the carriers back to the priority bays, and then the carrier transport moves the carriers to the appropriate processing module for sample aspiration.
Section 1-116
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.114: Priority bay Sample handlers
Legend: 1. Priority bay: Holds carriers and positions samples for priority processing. 2. Status indicator: Indicates the status of sample processing and when you can access samples: Indicators off - no samples are loaded in the position. Green (steady) - samples are loaded, but processing has not begun. You can access the samples. Amber (steady) - samples are processing and you cannot access them. Green (blinking) - processing is complete and you can access the samples.
NOTE: If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the indicator for the bay or section changes back to amber while the sample is re-aspirated. Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred. You can access the samples.
3. Sample carrier: Holds five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within a sample carrier.
Routine bay (RSH)

The routine bay is a holding area that positions samples for routine processing. You place samples in sample carriers, load the carriers onto
Section 1-117
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sample handlers
Section 1
carrier trays, and then slide the trays into a routine bay. The carrier transport picks up each carrier and moves it past the bar code reader. The bar code reader identifies the samples, the carrier transport moves the carriers back to the routine bay, and then the carrier transport moves the carriers to the appropriate processing module for sample aspiration. Figure 1.115: Routine bay
Legend: 1. Status indicator: Indicates the status of sample processing and when you can access samples: Indicators off - no samples are loaded in the position. Green (steady) - samples are loaded, but processing has not begun. You can access the samples. Amber (steady) - samples are processing and you cannot access them. Green (blinking) - processing is complete and you can access the samples.
NOTE: If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the indicator for the bay or section changes back to amber while the sample is re-aspirated. Amber and green (alternating) - bar code scan or other error occurred. You can access the samples.
2. Carrier tray: Holds up to five sample carriers. 3. Bay door: Provides access to the routine bay.
Section 1-118
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function Section 1 Carrier transport

The carrier transport is a mechanism used to transport sample carriers from: A bay on the RSH (robotic sample handler) to the RSH bar code reader The RSH bar code reader to a carrier positioner or back to the bay The carrier positioner back to the bay Sample handlers
Figure 1.116: Carrier transport
Carrier positioner
The carrier positioner is a mechanism on the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions sample carriers at the appropriate processing module sample aspiration position. Each processing module has a carrier positioner with four positions: On a c System positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample carriers from routine bays, position 3 is for sample carriers from priority bays, and position 4 is not used. On an i 2000SR positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample carriers accessed by the routine sample pipettor and positions 3 and 4 are for sample carriers accessed by the STAT sample pipettor.
Section 1-119
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sample handlers
Section 1
Figure 1.117: Carrier positioner
RSH keypad
The RSH (robotic sample handler) keypad is an input device used by the operator to control the sample handler. Figure 1.118: Components of the RSH keypad
Legend: 1. Run key: Resumes or begins the transport of samples that are located in the bays. 2. Pause key: Pauses the sample handler. 3. Stop key: Stops the sample handler, but does not shut down power to the sample handler.
Section 1-120
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample handlers
SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000)

The SSH (standard sample handler) is a transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing module(s). You place samples in sample carriers, and then load them onto the sample load queue. Bar code readers identify the samples, and then the sample handler transports the carriers to the processing queue for sample aspiration. Once aspiration is complete, the processing queue transports the carriers to the unload queue. Depending on the number of processing modules, two SSH configurations are available: Single lane - provides sample handling for a single processing module. The maximum capacity is 125 samples (25 sample carriers, 5 samples per carrier). Double lane- provides sample handling for multi-module (up to four processing modules) systems. The maximum capacity is 250 samples (50 sample carriers, 5 samples per carrier).
Figure 1.119: SSH components (single lane)
Legend: 1. Sample load queue (single lane): Transfers the sample carriers to the sample processing queue. 2. Sample carriers, page 1-147: Hold five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within a sample carrier.
Section 1-121
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sample handlers
Section 1
3. SSH keypad, page 1-122: Provides a local user interface for controlling the sample handler. 4. Sample load queue bar code reader: Reads the sample carrier ID, position, and sample ID. 5. Sample processing queue bar code reader: Reads the sample carrier ID and position. Does not read the sample ID. 6. Left processing queue access door: Provides access to the sample processing queue. 7. Right processing queue access door: Provides access to the sample processing queue. 8. Sample processing queue: Transfers the sample carrier to the sample pipettor. Once samples are aspirated, the sample carrier is transferred to another processing module or to the sample unload queue. 9. Sample unload queue (single lane): Provides the location where sample carriers are unloaded.
Figure 1.120: SSH configuration (double-lane)
Legend: 1. Sample load queue (double lane): Transfers the sample carriers to the sample processing queue. 2. Sample unload queue (double lane): Provides the location where sample carriers are unloaded.
SSH keypad
The SSH (standard sample handler) keypad is an input device used by the operator to control the sample handler.
Section 1-122
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.121: Components of the SSH keypad Sample handlers
Legend: 1. Run key: Resumes or begins the transport of samples that are located on the sample load queue. 2. Pause key: Pauses the sample load queue so you can load sample carriers or perform priority loading. 3. Pause indicator (yellow): Illuminates to indicate that the sample load queue is paused and ready for loading of sample carriers. 4. Reverse key: Reverses the sample load queue direction for ease of loading priority sample carriers. Functional only when the pause indicator is illuminated. 5. Stop key: Stops the sample handler, but does not shut down power to the sample handler. 6. Active lane indicators (green; active on double load queues only): Indicate the currently active lane. The lane indicator is used to facilitate priority loading on multi-module systems.
LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000)

The LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler is a transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing module that is integrated with an LAS track system. In the event of a track failure, the LAS carousel can be used as the primary area for loading samples. Under normal operating conditions when both the LAS track and LAS carousel are functional, samples on the carousel take priority over those on the LAS track.
Section 1-123
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Sample handlers
Section 1
Figure 1.122: LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000)
Legend: 1. LAS carousel cover: Provides access to the LAS sample carousel. 2. LAS sample carousel (i 2000), page 1-148: Holds 20 primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within the carousel. 3. LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000), page 1-124: Provides a local user interface for the control of the LAS carousel.
LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000)

The LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler keypad is an input device used by the operator to control the sample handler.
Section 1-124
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample handlers
Figure 1.123: Components of the LAS carousel sample handler keypad (i 2000)
Legend: 1. Run key: Resumes or begins the processing of samples located on the LAS carousel. 2. Pause key: Pauses the LAS carousel after completing aspiration of the current sample or current group of calibrators. 3. Pause indicator (yellow): Illuminates to indicate that the LAS carousel is paused and ready for loading or unloading samples. 4. Carousel advance key: Moves the LAS carousel clockwise five positions. Functional only when the pause indicator is illuminated. 5. Stop key: Stops the LAS carousel, but does not shut down the power to the carousel.
Section 1-125
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Required consumables
Section 1
Consumables are replenishable items required to run assays on an ARCHITECT System. It is important to maintain adequate inventory of these consumables. Required consumables topics include: ARCHITECT System consumables, page 1-126 ARCHITECT c System consumables, page 1-126 ARCHITECT i System consumables, page 1-138
ARCHITECT System consumables

Sample cups, page 1-126, are used on every ARCHITECT System.
Sample cups
The sample cup is a 1400 L disposable container that holds patient samples, calibrators, or controls. Volume graduation lines at 125 L, 500 L, and 1400 L help you fill sample cups, eliminating the need for precision pipetting. You can use sample cups in conjunction with sample tubes with bar code labels to facilitate positive sample identification. Figure 1.124: Sample cups
ARCHITECT c System consumables

The following consumables are used on an ARCHITECT c System:
Section 1-126
Reagent kits and components (c System), page 1-127

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128 Calibrators (c System), page 1-129 ICT module (c System), page 1-130 ICT calibrators (c System), page 1-131 ICT cleaning fluid (c System), page 1-132 Bulk solutions (c System), page 1-132 Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 Water bath additive (c System), page 1-137 Required consumables
Reagent kits and components (c System)

Reagent kits are one or more cartridges that contain all the necessary reagent components for an ARCHITECT c System photometric or potentiometric assay. Reagent kits can be stored on board the system in accordance with assay-specific instructions. For details about onboard storage, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Figure 1.125: Reagent kits and components
Related information... Reagent labels (c System), page 1-127
Reagent labels (c System)

Reagent labels are unique identifiers on Abbott pre-packaged reagents that contain a 2D (two-dimensional) bar code. Bar code information includes:
Section 1-127
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Reagent name Reagent serial number Lot number Cartridge size Expiration date Onboard stability time
A reagent supply center indicator (R1 or R2) is at the top of the reagent label to aid in loading reagents. Figure 1.126: Reagent labels
Reagent cartridges (c System)

Reagent cartridges are containers used in the reagent supply centers to hold the reagents used during operation. They may also hold supplies of diluted wash solutions, diluents, and Water Bath Additive.
Section 1-128
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.127: Reagent cartridges Required consumables
Legend: 1. Large, 90 mL cartridge: White or natural. 2. 100 mL cartridge: Brown (only available with some prepackaged reagents and cannot be ordered separately). 3. 20 mL cartridge: White 4. Small, 55 mL cartridge: White or natural. 5. 20 mL bottle: Brown (only available with some prepackaged reagents and cannot be ordered separately).
Related information... Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151

Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000), page 1-154
Calibrators (c System)
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte. A variety of calibrators (single and multiconstituent) are used on the system. See the Abbott Clinical Chemistry package insert or reagent application sheet to identify the calibrators used for each assay.
Section 1-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.128: Calibrators
ICT module (c System)

The ICT module is an integrated chip located within the ICT unit that contains the Na+, K+, Cl-, and reference electrodes. The warranty for the ICT module is 15,000 samples or two months post-installation, whichever comes first.
Section 1-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.129: ICT module Required consumables
ICT calibrators (c System)

ICT calibrators (7% bovine serum albumin base) and ICT urine calibrators (aqueous base) are samples with known values used to calibrate the ICT module. Each set contains a low and high level. See the Abbott Clinical Chemistry package insert or reagent application sheet for information on calibration.
Section 1-131
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.130: ICT calibrators
ICT cleaning fluid (c System)

ICT Cleaning Fluid is a cleaning agent prepared by the operator and used during daily maintenance procedures to clean the ICT module. To prepare ICT cleaning fluid, see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System), page 9-23. Figure 1.131: ICT cleaning fluid
Bulk solutions (c System)

Bulk solutions are liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are used in sample processing. Three bulk solutions are loaded onto weighted platforms behind the supply center door of the processing module:
Section 1-132
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133 Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134 Acid wash (c System), page 1-135 Required consumables
NOTE: For specific information on the storage of the bulk solutions, see the labels on the bulk solution bottles.
Related information... Bulk solution supply center (c 8000), page 1-49

Bulk solution supply center (c 16000), page 1-68
ICT reference solution (c System)

ICT Reference Solution (2000 mL bottle) is a mid-concentration standard. It is aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results.
Section 1-133
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.132: Reference solution
Alkaline wash (c System)

Alkaline Wash (500 mL bottle) is an alkaline wash solution used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
Section 1-134
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.133: Alkaline wash Required consumables
Alkaline Wash contains sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Corrosive (C). For more information see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Acid wash (c System)

Acid Wash (500 mL bottle) is an acidic wash solution used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis. A dilution of the acid wash solution may also be used for probe washing. See Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136.
Section 1-135
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.134: Acid wash
Acid Wash contains methyl alcohol and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Harmful (Xn). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Onboard solutions (c System)

Onboard solutions are detergents used to wash the sample and reagent probes, mixers, and reaction cuvettes. These solutions are used during system operation when additional probe or cuvette washes may be required to prevent assay-to-assay interference (SmartWash feature). They may also be used during some maintenance procedures. Onboard solutions include: 0.5% acid wash solution (a 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash bulk solution) Detergent A 10% detergent B solution (a 10% dilution of Detergent B)
Section 1-136
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.135: Onboard solutions Required consumables
Detergent A contains 2-aminoethanol and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Harmful (Xn). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Detergent B contains sodium hydroxide and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Corrosive (C). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Acid Wash contains methyl alcohol and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Harmful (Xn). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Water bath additive (c System)

Water Bath Additive is an antimicrobial solution used to reduce microbial contamination in the water bath. A supply of water bath additive is placed in one of the reagent supply centers for the automated daily maintenance procedure. During the procedure, the solution is dispensed into the water bath.
Section 1-137
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.136: Water bath additive
Water Bath Additive contains 5-Chloro-2-methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and 2-Methyl-4-isothiazolin-3-one and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Irritant (Xi). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
ARCHITECT i System consumables

The following consumables are used on an ARCHITECT i System: Reagent kits and components (i System), page 1-138 Septums and replacement caps (i System), page 1-140 Single constituent controls (i System), page 1-141 Multiconstituent controls (i System), page 1-141 Calibrators (i System), page 1-142 Bulk solutions (i System), page 1-143 Reaction vessels (i System), page 1-146
Reagent kits and components (i System)

Reagent kits are two or more bottles that contain all the necessary reagent components for an ARCHITECT i System assay. Based on the size, reagent kits include:
Section 1-138
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

100 test kits 500 test kits Required consumables
Reagent kits can be stored on board the system in accordance with assay-specific instructions. For details about onboard storage, see the assay-specific package insert. Figure 1.137: Reagent kit and components
Related information... Reagent labels (i System), page 1-139
Reagent labels (i System)

Reagent labels are unique identifiers on Abbott pre-packaged reagents that contain 2D (two-dimensional) bar codes. Bar code information includes: Assay name Reagent serial number Lot number Test size (number of tests per kit) Expiration date Onboard stability time Master calibration curve information for assays that use the 2-point adjustment calibration method
Color bands, which match the reagent carousel position, are located at the top of the reagent label to aid in loading reagents.
Section 1-139
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.138: Reagent labels
Septums and replacement caps (i System)

Septums are membranes with slits that are used to prevent reagent evaporation and contamination, and to ensure reagent integrity. You place septums on all open reagent bottles prior to loading the bottle into the processing module. Replacement caps are teal-colored caps used to visually indicate that reagent bottles have been opened. You place replacement caps on open reagent bottles with the septums in place when you remove reagent bottles from the processing module. You can then store the bottles upright in refrigerated storage off the system.
Section 1-140
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.139: Septums and replacement caps Required consumables
Single constituent controls (i System)

Single constituent controls are assay-specific samples that contain known concentrations of analyte. They are typically labeled L, M, and H, or Pos and Neg. Figure 1.140: Single constituent controls
Multiconstituent controls (i System)

Abbott multiconstituent controls are samples that contain multiple analytes. Two or three levels of control are available to allow performance monitoring within a clinical range: Immunoassay-MCC (Liquid) - contains immunoassay markers (including some cancer assay markers)
Section 1-141
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Tumor Marker-MCC (Lyophilized) - contains all the cancer markers available to an ARCHITECT i System
Figure 1.141: Multiconstituent controls
Calibrators (i System)
Calibrators are samples that contain known concentrations of analyte. Single analyte calibrators are used on an i System. See the assay-specific package insert to identify the calibrators used for each assay.
Section 1-142
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.142: Calibrators Required consumables
Bulk solutions (i System)

Bulk solutions are liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are used in sample processing. Three bulk solutions are loaded into the supply and waste center of an ARCHITECT i System processing module: Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-143 Trigger solution (i System), page 1-144 Concentrated wash buffer (i System), page 1-145
NOTE: For information specific to storing bulk solutions, see the labels on the bulk solution bottles.
Related information... Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98
Pre-trigger solution (i System)

Pre-Trigger Solution is a hydrogen peroxide solution used to split the acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This process prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger Solution. The pre-trigger bottle is black.
Section 1-143
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.143: Pre-trigger solution
Trigger solution (i System)

Trigger Solution is a sodium hydroxide solution used to produce the chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read. The trigger bottle is natural.
Section 1-144
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.144: Trigger solution Required consumables
Trigger Solution contains sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and is classified per applicable EC (European Community) Directives as: Irritant (Xi). For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Concentrated wash buffer (i System)

Concentrated Wash Buffer is a solution containing phosphate buffered saline. Wash buffer is used throughout assay processing and is pumped to the sample and reagent pipetting assemblies and the two wash zones. A 25 L reservoir is kept on board the system in the supply and waste center and can be replenished while the system is running. Concentrated wash buffer is supplied in a 1 L bottle that must be diluted prior to use or in a 10 L cubitainer for use with the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
Section 1-145
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.145: Concentrated wash buffer (1 L bottle)
Reaction vessels (i System)

RVs (reaction vessels) are disposable containers in which the CMIA reaction takes place. RVs are stored in bulk in the RV hopper and are automatically loaded into the process path as needed. The maximum onboard storage is 1200 RVs. You can add RVs to the hopper at any time. Figure 1.146: Reaction vessel
Section 1-146
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Required accessories
Accessories are components that are required for sample processing on an ARCHITECT System. It is important to maintain a sufficient supply of these accessories. Required accessory topics include: Sample carriers, page 1-147 Carrier trays (RSH), page 1-148 LAS sample carousel (i 2000), page 1-148 Reagent segments (c 8000), page 1-149 Reagent segments (c 16000), page 1-153 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000), page 1-154
Sample carriers
Sample carriers are racks used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or SSH (standard sample handler) to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor(s). Sample carriers are bar coded for identification and hold five primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within a sample carrier. Sample carriers have a sample gauge label to verify the sample volume in a primary or aliquot tube. See Sample gauge label, page 5-174.
Section 1-147
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.147: Sample carriers
Carrier trays (RSH)

Carrier trays are accessories used to hold sample carriers for loading on the RSH (robotic sample handler). Each tray holds up to five sample carriers. Figure 1.148: Carrier trays
LAS sample carousel (i 2000)

LAS sample carousels are carousels used on the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor. LAS sample
Section 1-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

carousels are bar coded for identification and hold 20 primary tubes, aliquot tubes, or sample cups, which you may mix within the carousel. Figure 1.149: LAS sample carousel
Reagent segments (c 8000)

Reagent segments are sections of each reagent supply center that hold reagents and diluents. Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning sample or reagent pipettors when necessary. Reagent segments are configured for reagent supply centers 1 and 2 as follows: Reagent supply center 1 consists of three outer segments and one inner segment. Reagent supply center 2 consists of four outer segments.
Section 1-149
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Figure 1.150: Reagent segments (c 8000)
Legend: 1. R2 segment, 9 position: May be used in segments B, C, or D of reagent supply center 2. 2. R2 segment, 14 position: With pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment A of reagent supply center 2. Without pipettor calibration target: May be used in segments B, C, or D of reagent supply center 2.
3. R1 inner segment, 20 position, with pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment D of reagent supply center 1. 4. R1 outer segment, 15 position: May be used in segments A, B, or C of reagent supply center 1. 5. R1 outer segment, 12 position: With pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment A of reagent supply center 1. Without pipettor calibration target: May be used in segments B or C of reagent supply center 1.
Section 1-150
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000)

Reagent cartridge adapters are positioners used to ensure correct alignment of the small (55 mL cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridges placed in reagent supply centers 1 and 2. Reagent cartridge adapters come in two sizes and are configured for the following reagent cartridges: Small reagent cartridge adapter - used with small (55 mL cartridge) and 20 mL (cartridge) reagent cartridge 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter - used with the 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridge
Figure 1.151: Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000)
Legend: 1. 20 mL reagent adapter: Used with bottle (20 mL) reagent cartridges 2. Small reagent cartridge adapter: Used with small (55 mL) and (20 mL) reagent cartridges
Section 1-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
The following tables show possible configurations of segments, cartridges, and adapters in R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Table 1.1: Reagent supply center 1 (R1) reagent cartridge configurations (c 8000)
Segments Positions Cartridges Adapters No
A (outer with 12 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) pipettor calibration target) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) A, B, and C (outer) 12 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) 15 positions (17 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) D (inner with pipettor calibration target) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge)
Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No No Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No No No No
Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No
Table 1.2: Reagent supply center 2 (R2) reagent cartridge configurations (c 8000)
Segments Positions Cartridges Adapters No No No Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No No No
A (with pipettor 14 positions (17 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) calibration target) 20 mL (cartridge) B, C, and D 9 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) 14 positions (17 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge)
Section 1-152
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent segments (c 16000)

Reagent segments are sections of each reagent supply center that hold reagents and diluents. Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning sample or reagent pipettors when necessary. Reagent supply centers consist of three outer segments and one inner segment. Figure 1.152: Reagent segments (c 16000)
Legend: 1. Inner segment, 20 position, with pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment D of reagent supply centers 1 and 2. 2. Outer segment, 15 position: May be used in segments A, B, or C of reagent supply centers 1 and 2. 3. Outer segment, 12 position:
With pipettor calibration target: May be used only in segment A of reagent supply centers 1 and 2. Without pipettor calibration target: May be used in segments A, B or C of reagent supply centers 1 and 2.
Section 1-153
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000)

Reagent cartridge adapters are positioners used to ensure correct alignment of the small (55 mL cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridges placed in reagent supply centers 1 and 2. Reagent cartridge adapters come in two sizes and are configured for the following reagent cartridges: Small reagent cartridge adapter - used with small (55 mL cartridge) and 20 mL (cartridge) reagent cartridge 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter - used with the 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridge
Figure 1.153: Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000)
Legend: 1. 20 mL reagent adapter: Used with bottle (20 mL) reagent cartridges 2. Small reagent cartridge adapter: Used with small (55 mL) and (20 mL) reagent cartridges
The following tables show possible configurations of segments, cartridges, and adapters in R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Section 1-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 1.3: Reagent cartridge configurations (c 16000)

Segments Positions Cartridges Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) B and C (outer) 12 positions (25 mm) Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) 15 positions (17 mm) D (inner with pipettor 20 positions calibration target) (25 mm) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) Adapters No Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No No Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No No No No Small reagent cartridge adapter Small reagent cartridge adapter 20 mL reagent cartridge adapter No
A (outer with pipettor 12 positions calibration target) (25 mm)
Section 1-155
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System statuses
Section 1
System statuses
System status refers to the operational modes of the ARCHITECT System. Key information displays on the Snapshot screen, providing an immediate overview of your system. The processing modules and sample handlers have several status types. The following diagram illustrates the progression of statuses from Offline to Running. The transition times are approximate and may vary between the processing module and sample handler. Figure 1.154: Processing module and sample handler status sequence
*The Scheduled pause status applies to all processing modules, the RSH (robotic sample handler) and the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler. For the SSH (standard sample handler) this status is Load queue paused. System status topics include: Sample handler status, page 1-156 Processing module status, page 1-160
Sample handler status

The sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen indicates the status of the sample handler. Sample handler status types depend on your sample handler configuration: RSH status types, page 1-157 SSH status types, page 1-158 LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000), page 1-159
Section 1-156
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.155: Sample handler graphic System statuses
RSH status types

The RSH (robotic sample handler) has seven possible status types. The following table provides a description of each. Table 1.4: RSH status types
Status Offline Indicates One of the following exists: Power to the sample handler is off. Power has been turned on, but communication between the sample handler and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established. Communication between the sample handler and the SCC has been lost due to a software or system error. Stopped One of the following exists: Power to the sample handler is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen has not been selected. F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected. Stop key on the sample handler keypad was selected. A sample handler diagnostic procedure has completed. One of the RSH covers was opened while the sample handler was running. Sample handler detected a fatal error while processing. Ready One of the following exists: Startup is complete. Scheduled pause status is complete. Running One of the following exists: F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected. Run key on the sample handler keypad was selected. Scheduled pause One of the following exists: F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected. Pause key on the sample handler keypad was selected. All processing modules are unavailable for sample processing.
Section 1-157
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System statuses
Section 1
Table 1.4: RSH status types (continued)

Status Initializing Indicates Either the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up was selected. This status is a temporary status during which the system performs the following initialization functions: Homes all moving parts on the sample handler Checks the bar code reader Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready depending on whether run or startup was selected. Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the RSH is in process on a module.
SSH status types

The SSH (standard sample handler) has seven possible status types. The following table provides a description of each. Table 1.5: SSH status types
Status Offline Indicates One of the following exists: Power to the sample handler is off. Power has been turned on, but communication between the sample handler and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established. Communication between the sample handler and the SCC has been lost due to a software or system error. Stopped One of the following exists: Power to the sample handler is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen has not been selected. F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected. Stop key on the sample handler keypad was selected. A sample handler diagnostic procedure has completed. One of the processing queue access doors was opened while the sample handler was running. Sample handler detected a fatal error while processing. Ready Running Startup is complete. One of the following exists: F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected. Run key on the sample handler keypad was selected.
Section 1-158
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 1.5: SSH status types (continued)
Status Load queue paused Indicates One of the following exists: F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected. Pause key on the sample handler keypad was selected. 60 seconds have elapsed without samples being loaded and a run initiated. The sample unload queue is full. All processing modules are unavailable for sample processing. Initializing Either the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up was selected. This status is a temporary status during which the system performs the following initialization functions: Checks the load and processing queue bar code readers Homes all moving parts on the sample handler Starts the load and processing queue Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready depending on whether run or startup was selected. Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the SSH is in process on a module.
System statuses
LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000)

The LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler has seven possible status types. The following table provides a description of each. Table 1.6: LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000)
Status Offline Indicates One of the following exists: Power to the LAS carousel is off. Power has been turned on, but communication between the LAS carousel and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established. Communication between the sample handler and the SCC has been lost due to a software or system error. Stopped One of the following exists: Power to the LAS carousel is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen has not been selected. F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected. Stop key on the LAS carousel sample handler keypad was selected. A sample handler diagnostic procedure has completed. The LAS carousel cover was opened while the LAS carousel was running. Sample handler detected a fatal error while processing.
Section 1-159
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System statuses
Section 1
Table 1.6: LAS carousel sample handler status types (i 2000) (continued)
Status Ready Indicates One of the following exists: Startup is complete. All samples on the LAS carousel have completed. Scheduled pause status is complete. NOTE: The pause indicator illuminates. Running One of the following exists: F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected. Run key on the LAS carousel sample handler keypad was selected. Scheduled pause One of the following exists: F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected. Pause key on the LAS carousel sample handler keypad was selected. All processing modules are unavailable for sample processing. Initializing Either the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up was selected. This status is a temporary status during which the system performs the following initialization functions: Homes the LAS carousel sample handler Checks the processing queue bar code reader Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready depending on whether run or startup was selected. Maintenance A maintenance procedure requiring use of the LAS carousel is in process on a module.
Processing module status

The processing module graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen indicates the status of the processing module and displays other key system information.
Section 1-160
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 1.156: Processing module status System statuses
Processing module status types depend on the configuration of your system. For a description of the various statuses, see: Processing module status types (c System), page 1-161 Processing module status types (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-164
Processing module status types (c System)

The c System processing modules have nine possible status types. The following table provides a description of each.
Section 1-161
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System statuses
Section 1
See c System processing module status and associated tasks, page 1-163, for a list of tasks that can be performed in each processing module status.
Table 1.7: c System processing module status types

Status Offline Indicates One of the following exists: Power to the processing module is off. Prohibited activities You cannot run samples on the module.
You cannot load or unload reagents because the reagent supply center is Power has been turned on, but communication between the processing not aligned correctly. module and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established. Communication between the processing module and the SCC has been lost due to a software or system error. Stopped One of the following exists: Power to the processing module is on, but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen has not been selected. F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected. Stop key on the processing module keypad was selected. A processing module diagnostic procedure has completed. Processing module detected a fatal error while processing. Warming Ready Startup is complete, but temperature initialization is not. One of the following exists: Startup is complete (including temperature initialization). Scheduled Pause status is complete. Scheduled pause One of the following exists: F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was selected. Supplies ran out. Processing module detected an error while processing. Running One of the following exists: F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected. Run key on the processing module keypad was selected. You cannot open the reagent supply center covers. You cannot run samples on the module. You cannot run samples on the module. You cannot load or unload reagents because the reagent supply center is not aligned correctly.
Section 1-162
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 1.7: c System processing module status types (continued)
Status Initializing Indicates A temporary status that occurs when the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up is selected. The following initialization functions are performed by the system: Initialization after F5 - Start-up is selected: Homes motors Initializes the reagent bar code reader Initialization after the run key or F8 - Run is selected: Checks cover sensors Scans reagents Washes probes Checks inventory Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready depending on whether run or startup was selected. Scanning A temporary status that occurs when F4 Scan on the Reagent status screen is selected. Once the scan is complete, the status changes to Ready. You cannot run samples on the module. Prohibited activities You cannot run samples on the module. You cannot load or unload reagents because the reagent supply center is not aligned correctly.
System statuses
Maintenance
A maintenance procedure is in process on You cannot run samples on the module. the module.
Table 1.8: c System processing module status and associated tasks

O Order samples Initiate a run Load reagents** Load samples on sample carousel Load bulk solutions (Acid and Alkaline wash, and ICT reference) Load onboard solutions Empty waste No No No Yes Yes Yes I No No No No No No W No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes S No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Re Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ru No No Yes No SP No No Yes No S No No Yes Yes M No No Yes No Yes No
Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes
Yes* Yes* No
Yes* Yes* Yes * * No No Yes
*Ordering QC and calibrations is not recommended because the system cannot calculate the required sample volume unless the processing module status is Running.
Section 1-163
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
System statuses
Section 1
**Check the keypad before performing the operations. In the table above the processing module statuses listed across the top are O (Offline), I (Initializing), W (Warming), S (Stopped), Re (Ready), Ru (Running), SP (Scheduled Pause), S (Scanning), and M (Maintenance).
Processing module status types (i 2000/i 2000SR)

The i 2000 and i 2000SR processing modules have nine possible status types. The following table provides a description of each. Table 1.9: i 2000 and i 2000SR processing module status types
Status Offline Indicates One of the following exists: Power to the processing module is off. Prohibited activities You cannot run samples on the module.
You cannot load or unload reagents because the reagent carousel is not Power has been turned on, but communication between the processing aligned correctly. module and SCC (system control center) has not been re-established. Communication between the processing module and the SCC has been lost due to a software or system error. Stopped One of the following exists: Power to the processing module is on but F5 - Start-up on the Snapshot screen has not been selected. F6 - Stop on the Snapshot screen was selected. Stop key on the processing module keypad was selected. Processing module diagnostic procedure has completed. Processing module detected a fatal error while processing. Warming Ready Startup is complete, but temperature initialization is not. One of the following exists: Startup is complete (including temperature initialization). Scheduled Pause status is complete. You cannot run samples on the module. You cannot run samples on the module. You cannot load or unload reagents because the reagent carousel is not aligned correctly.
Section 1-164
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 1.9: i 2000 and i 2000SR processing module status types (continued)
Status Indicates Prohibited activities
System statuses
Scheduled pause One of the following exists:
You cannot open the processing center F7 - Pause on the Snapshot screen was covers. selected. Supplies ran out. Processing module detected an error while processing.
Running
One of the following exists: F8 - Run on the Snapshot screen was selected. Run key on the processing module keypad was selected.
You cannot open the processing center covers.
Initializing
A temporary status that occurs when the run key, F8 - Run, or F5 - Start-up is selected. The following initialization functions are performed by the system: Initialization after F5 - Start-up is selected: Homes motors Initializes the reagent bar code reader Fills the inner ring in the process path with RVs (reaction vessels) Clears RVs from the outer ring of the process path Initialization after the run key or F8 - Run is selected: Checks door sensors Scans reagents and starts microparticle dispersion Washes probes Checks inventory Performs a background read Once initialization is complete, the status changes to Running or Ready depending on whether run or startup was selected.
You cannot run samples on the module. You cannot load or unload reagents because the reagent carousel is not aligned correctly. You cannot load wash buffer.
Scanning
A temporary status that occurs when F4 Scan on the Reagent status screen is selected. Once the scan is complete, the status changes to Ready.
You cannot run samples on the module.
Maintenance
A maintenance procedure is in process on You cannot run samples on the module. the module.
Section 1-165
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Automatic processing module activities
Section 1

Periodically, fluids are pumped through various processing module components to remove air or bubbles. It is important to ensure that enough onboard inventory to perform these automatic flushes and primes is available. Automatic processing module activity topics include: System flush (c System), page 1-166 System flush (i System), page 1-167 System prime (i System), page 1-168 Processing module wash (c System), page 1-168 Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System), page 1-168
System flush (c System)

A system flush is an automated process used to remove bubbles that may be present. Periodic flushes are performed at the beginning of a run on all pipettors by pumping Reagent Grade Type ll water through the probes into the wash cups. The periodic flushes occur: When you start up the system after powering on Every eight hours if the processing module status is Running and there are no tests in process NOTE: Performing the 2132 Flush Water Line maintenance procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush. ICT Reference Solution, Alkaline Wash, and Acid Wash are used to perform the automatic flushes that occur when you initiate a run after replacing a bulk solution(s). Each c 8000 flush requires: 2750 L of reference solution 60 L of alkaline wash solution 40 L of acid wash solution 2750 L of reference solution 120 L of alkaline wash solution 80 L of acid wash solution
Each c 16000 flush requires:
Section 1-166
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: Performing the 2155 Flush Bulk Solution maintenance procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush.
Related information... ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133

Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134 Acid wash (c System), page 1-135
System flush (i System)

A system flush is an automated process used to remove bubbles that may be present. Periodic flushes are performed on all pipettors by pumping wash buffer through the pipettor probes into the wash stations. The wash zones and the pre-trigger/trigger manifold are flushed by pumping fluid through a bypass valve and into the waste line. Wash buffer, Pre-Trigger Solution, and Trigger Solution are used to perform the automatic flushes that occur: When you start up the system after powering on Every eight hours when the processing module status is: Ready and the processing module covers are closed, or Running and no tests are in process
NOTE: Performing the 2130 Flush Fluids maintenance procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush. When you initiate a run after replacing a solution(s)
If the system is idle for an extended period of time, for example over a weekend (48 hours), you need to ensure there is enough inventory for all flushes that will take place. Each flush requires: 460 mL of wash buffer (i 2000) 522 mL of wash buffer (i 2000SR) 14 mL of pre-trigger 14 mL of trigger
In a 48 hour period, for example, there are six flushes. Therefore, the required inventory is: 2.76 L of wash buffer (i 2000) 3.13 L of wash buffer (i 2000SR)
Section 1-167
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Use or function
Section 1
84 mL of pre-trigger 84 mL of trigger
System prime (i System)

A prime is the process the system uses to dispense solutions into RVs (reaction vessels) to ensure the fluidics system is primed. The system periodically primes to remove air from the wash zone, pre-trigger, and trigger delivery nozzles. Priming pumps fluid through the delivery nozzles and into an RV. The RV is then automatically discarded. Prime occurs automatically when you initiate a run.
Processing module wash (c System)

Processing module wash is the process that cleans hardware components that come into contact with reagents and samples. The following table describes the wash solutions used for each hardware component.
Component Reagents and sample probes Wash Washed with Reagent Grade Type ll water during analysis Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash solutions may be performed if SmartWash is required per assay setting definition Washed with Detergent A automatically at regular intervals Cuvette segments Washed with Reagent Grade Type ll water and alkaline and acid wash solutions before and after each use Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash solutions may be performed if SmartWash is required per assay setting definition Mixers Washed with Reagent Grade Type ll water during analysis Additional washes with alkaline, acid, or detergent wash solutions may be performed if SmartWash is required per assay setting definition Washed with detergent A automatically at regular intervals
Automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s) (c System)

Automatic rotation of reagent supply center 2 for the c 8000 and reagent supply centers 1 and 2 for the c 16000 is a programmed
Section 1-168
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

rotation used to stabilize the carousel temperature. The reagent supply center automatically rotates 1/2 turn every 10 minutes when the cover is closed and the processing module is in Ready or Running (idle) status.
Section 1-169
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Installation procedures and special requirements Section 2

Installation procedures and special requirements <F=0>
Introduction
To ensure accurate results and maximum performance, your ARCHITECT System must be properly installed. After the system has been installed, you must configure it to meet your site's specific requirements. Installation procedures and special requirements topics include: System installation or relocation, page 2-2 Describes the steps for installing or relocating the system. System configuration, page 2-4 Provides a description of all configuration screens and windows, and step-by-step instructions for performing configuration procedures. Software installation and backup, page 2-209 Provides a description of all software installation and backup screens and windows, and step-by-step instructions for performing installation and backup procedures. Assay file management, page 2-214 Describes how to install new assay files. Maintenance and diagnostic file management, page 2-218 Describes how to install new maintenance and diagnostic procedure files.
Section 2-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Installation procedures and special requirements

System installation or relocation
Section 2
System installation or relocation

Installation of the ARCHITECT System is a team effort involving Abbott customer support and the Abbott field service representative. System installation or relocation topics include: System installation, page 2-2 System checkout, page 2-2 System relocation, page 2-3
System installation
Prior to installation the Abbott field service representative ensures the site is prepared. The location must meet environmental specifications and electrical requirements before the system can be installed. For additional information, see Specifications and requirements, page 4-3. CAUTION: The Abbott field service representative unpacks, positions, and installs the ARCHITECT System, and unpacks the accessory kits that accompany the system. Do not attempt to unpack or install the ARCHITECT System.
NOTE: Do not position the ARCHITECT System in direct sunlight. For additional information on items included in the accessory kit, see Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000), page Appendix D-4, Accessory kit list numbers (c 16000), page Appendix D-7, or Accessory kit list number (i System), page Appendix D-10. During installation, the Abbott field service representative performs system preparation and checkout.
System checkout
After you position and install the ARCHITECT System, you should perform the following to ensure that the system operates properly:
Section 2-2
Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214 Configuring system settings, page 2-6 Configuring Abbott assays, page 2-70 Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83 Configuring QC - Cal settings, page 2-176
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Order and calibrate assays Order and run controls Perform testing specific to your site requirements System installation or relocation
System relocation
For information on relocating your ARCHITECT System, contact your Abbott field service representative. WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Before the system can be moved or shipped, decontamination is required. For more information, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13.
Section 2-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System configuration
Section 2
Configuration settings define the information the ARCHITECT System needs to meet your site's specific requirements. You perform system configuration at installation and may reconfigure the system at any time, if necessary. You access windows to configure system, assay, and QC - Cal settings from the Configuration screen. Access to these windows is controlled by logon. The system administrator logon allows you to access configuration windows to change most configurable items. The general operator logon allows you to: View configured settings Configure host-release mode options Re-initialize communication with the standard LAS sample handler
For more information on logons, see User logon, page 1-21. System configuration topics include: Configuration screen - System settings view, page 2-4 Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-65 Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view, page 2-174
Configuration screen - System settings view

From the System settings view of the Configuration screen the general operator can access windows to view detailed information for configured system settings. The system administrator can access windows to configure these settings, which include: Sample ordering Host - Release mode Reports - Printing Reagents - Supplies Password System control center Modules Sample handler
Section 2-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample bar code reader Serial ports System configuration
Figure 2.1: Configuration screen - System settings view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions, page Appendix E-134. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Configuration screen System settings view, page 2-5.
Related procedures... Configuring system settings, page 2-6

Viewing system settings, page 2-9 Changing system settings, page 2-20
Access the Configuration screen - System settings view

Perform this procedure to display the System settings view of the Configuration screen.
Section 2-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
To access the Configuration screen - System settings view: Select System from the menu bar, and then select Configuration. The Configuration screen - System settings view displays.
Procedures - Configuration screen - System settings view

Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - System settings view and its related windows are grouped by task: Configuring system settings, page 2-6 Viewing system settings, page 2-9 Changing system settings, page 2-20
Configuring system settings

Procedures for configuring system settings include: Configure host interface settings, page 2-6 Configure report settings, page 2-7 Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8
Configure host interface settings Perform this procedure to configure the host interface settings for release mode, communications, and transmitting results to the host.

Stopped, Warming, or Ready (Exceptions are noted) General operator NA
To configure host interface settings: 1. Select Host - Release mode from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure host-release mode window displays. 3. Select the desired Bidirectional host option. NOTE: You can configure this value in any system status.
Section 2-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Turning Bidirectional host off allows you to clear all results waiting to be sent to the host. 4. Enter the timeout interval (in seconds) in the Host query timeout data entry box. (optional) NOTE: You can configure this value in any system status. System throughput may be degraded if the time interval is greater than 10 seconds. 5. Select the desired Error code number and text option. 6. Select the desired Release and Transmit options for patient and QC results. 7. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure host - release mode window, page 2-40 Configure report settings Perform this procedure to configure the settings for printing flags on reports and automatic report printing, and to specify the text to print in the report header for the Sample Report and Patient Report.

Stopped, Warming, or Ready System administrator NA
To configure report settings: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reports-printing window displays. 3. Select the Off option for the Print flags on reports setting. (optional) NOTE: The CNTL (control), EXP (expired), EXPC (expired calibration curve) (c System only), and EDIT (c System only) flags print on the sample and patient reports whether the feature is turned on or off.
Section 2-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
4. Select the On option for the following automatic report printing settings: Maintenance - A Procedure report prints after a maintenance procedure completes, if a report is available. (optional) Sample - The Sample Report prints after all tests for a sample complete and the results are released. (optional) Results list - The Results List Report prints after 24 results complete and are released or 10 minutes have elapsed. (optional) Calibration curve results - A Cal Curve Detail report prints after a calibration completes. (optional)
5. Enter the desired report header information in the Header for sample and patient reports data entry boxes. (optional) 6. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reports printing window, page 2-42 Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System), page Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-34 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59 Results List Report, page Appendix A-80 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 Configure a QC run definition Perform this procedure to define a run period for the evaluation of Westgard rules. The run definition should be configured when you
Section 2-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

enable Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM. To configure Westgard rules, see Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181.

To configure a QC run definition: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure system control center window displays. 3. Enter the start time in the QC run definition Start time data entry box. 4. Enter the number of hours per run in the QC run definition No. of hours per run data entry box. 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure system control center window, page 2-48
Viewing system settings

Procedures for viewing system settings include: View the batch sample ordering type, page 2-10 View average number of tests per sample setting (multi-module i System), page 2-10 View the host communication settings, page 2-11 View the automatic report printing setting, page 2-12 View the option for printing flags on reports, page 2-13 View the report header text, page 2-13 View the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14 View the system language setting, page 2-14 View the screen timeout setting, page 2-15
Section 2-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
View the date and time settings, page 2-15 View the sample bar code settings, page 2-16 View the LIS serial port settings, page 2-17 View the LAS serial port settings, page 2-17 View the onboard solution options (c System), page 2-18 View the wash buffer transfer option (i System), page 2-18 View the LAS timeout setting, page 2-19 View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-19 View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-20
View the batch sample ordering type Perform this procedure to display the Details for sample ordering window. From this window you can view the batch sample type. The type depends on whether the samples for the batch are bar code labeled.

To view the batch sample ordering type: 1. Select Sample ordering from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for sample ordering window displays.

Details for sample ordering window, page 2-39 View average number of tests per sample setting (multi-module i System) Perform this procedure to display the Details for sample ordering window. From this window you can view the setting for the average
Section 2-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

number of tests per sample, which is used to optimize the scheduling of tests for each module.

To view the average number of tests per sample: 1. Select Sample ordering from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for sample ordering window displays.

Details for sample ordering window, page 2-39 View the host communication settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for host - release mode window. From this window you can view the current settings for host communication which include the release mode, communication type, and result reporting to a host computer.

To view the host communication settings: 1. Select Host - Release mode from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for host - release mode window displays.

Details for host - release mode window, page 2-41
Section 2-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
View the automatic report printing setting Perform this procedure to display the Details for reports printing window. From this window you can view the current settings for automatic printing of the Procedure, Sample, Results List, and Cal Curve Details reports.

To view the automatic report printing setting: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reports printing window displays.

Details for reports printing window, page 2-43 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59 Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System), page Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-34
Section 2-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

View the option for printing flags on reports Perform this procedure to display the Details for reports printing window. From this window you can view the current settings for printing flags on Sample and Patient reports.

To view the options for printing flags on reports: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reports printing window displays.

Details for reports printing window, page 2-43 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 View the report header text Perform this procedure to display the Details for reports printing window. From this window you can view the current text for the report header that prints on the Sample and Patient reports.

To view the report header text: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reports printing window displays.
Section 2-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2

Details for reports printing window, page 2-43 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 View the system low alert setting for reagent kits Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagents - supplies window. From this window you can view the current level at which the system low alert notification occurs. To view the reagent-specific low alert setting, see View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-105.

To view the system low alert setting for reagent kits: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reagents - supplies window displays.

Details for reagents - supplies window, page 2-46 View the system language setting Perform this procedure to display the Details for system control center window. From this window you can view the current setting for the system language.

Section 2-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To view the system language setting: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for system control center window displays. System configuration

Details for system control center window, page 2-49 View the screen timeout setting Perform this procedure to display the Details for system control center window. From this window you can view the current setting for the screen timeout.

To view the screen timeout setting: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for system control center window displays.

Details for system control center window, page 2-49 View the date and time settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for system control center window. From this window you can view the current settings for the system date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic adjustment for daylight savings time.
Prerequisite Module status

Any
Section 2-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
User access level Supplies
General operator NA
To view the date and time settings: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for system control center window displays.

Details for system control center window, page 2-49 View the sample bar code settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for bar codes window. From this window you can view the current settings for sample bar codes.

To view the sample bar code settings: 1. Select Sample bar code reader from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for bar codes window displays. 3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select the desired bar code type.

Details for bar codes window, page 2-63
Section 2-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

View the LIS serial port settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for serial ports window. From this window you can view the current settings for the system's communications ports for the LIS (laboratory information system).

To view the LIS serial port settings: 1. Select Serial ports from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for serial ports window displays. 3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LIS.

Details for serial ports window, page 2-65 View the LAS serial port settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for serial ports window. From this window you can view the current settings for the system's communications ports for the LAS (laboratory automation system).

To view the LAS serial port settings: 1. Select Serial ports from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for serial ports window displays. 3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LAS.
Section 2-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2

Details for serial ports window, page 2-65 View the onboard solution options (c System) Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagents - supplies window. From this window you can view the current position and cartridge size for onboard solutions.

To view the onboard solution options: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reagent - supplies window displays.

Details for reagents - supplies window, page 2-46 View the wash buffer transfer option (i System) Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagents - supplies window. From this window you can view the current setting for the wash buffer transfer option.

To view the wash buffer transfer option: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details.
Section 2-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Details for reagent - supplies window displays.

Details for reagents - supplies window, page 2-46 View the LAS timeout setting Perform this procedure to display the Details for sample handler window. From this window you can view the current settings for the LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler timeout setting.

To view the LAS timeout setting: 1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for sample handler window displays.

Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-60 View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR) Perform this procedure to access the Details for modules window. From this window you can view the current settings for the percentage of STAT protocols run on the ARCHITECT i 2000SR System. This option defines the number of reaction vessel positions allocated for STAT assay protocols. If this percentage does not reflect the actual number of STAT protocols run, throughput may be decreased.

To view the STAT protocol percentage:

Section 2-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
1. Select Modules from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for modules window displays. 3. Select the list button, and then select Module 2 if you have an integrated system.

Details for modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-55 View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagents - supplies window. From this window you can view the current option for running controls for onboard reagent kits.

To view the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reagent - supplies window displays.

Details for reagents - supplies window, page 2-46
Changing system settings

Procedures for changing system settings include: Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21 Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-22 Change the option for printing flags, page 2-23 Change the report header text, page 2-24
Section 2-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-24 Change the system language setting, page 2-25 Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26 Change the date and time settings, page 2-27 Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-28 Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28 Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29 Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30 Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-31 Change the LAS serial port settings, page 2-32 Change the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33 Change the onboard solution options (c 16000), page 2-34 Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System, page 2-35 Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications, page 2-35 Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-36 Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-37
Change the batch sample ordering type Perform this procedure to change the batch sample ordering type for bar coded or non-bar coded samples. The batch ordering type determines the fields that display on the Patient order screen - Batch view.
Prerequisite

No batch orders pending Stopped, Warming, or Ready System administrator NA
Module status User access level Supplies
To change the batch sample ordering type: 1. Select F6 - Configure on the Configuration screen. The Configure sample ordering window displays. 2. Select the desired Batch ordering option.
Section 2-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
3. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure sample ordering window, page 2-39 Change the automatic report printing settings Perform this procedure to enable or disable automatic printing of the Procedure, Sample, Results List, and Cal Curve Details reports.

To change the automatic report printing settings: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reports printing window displays. 3. Select the desired Automatic report printing option(s) for: Maintenance - A Procedure report prints after a maintenance procedure completes, if a report is available. Sample - The Sample Report prints after all tests for a sample complete and the results are released. Results list - The Results List Report prints after 18 results complete and are released or 10 minutes have elapsed. Calibration curve results - A Cal Curve Detail report prints after a calibration completes.

Configure reports printing window, page 2-42 Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-22
Section 2-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System), page Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-34 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59 Results List Report, page Appendix A-80 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 Change the option for printing flags Perform this procedure to enable or disable the printing of flags on the Sample and Patient reports. NOTE: The CNTL (control), EXP (expired), EXPC (expired calibration curve) (c System only), and EDIT (c System only) flags print on the sample and patient reports whether the feature is turned on or off.

To change the options for printing flags: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reports printing window displays. 3. Select the desired Print flags on reports option. 4. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reports printing window, page 2-42 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82
Section 2-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change the report header text Perform this procedure to change the text that displays in the report header on the Sample and Patient reports.

To change the report header text: 1. Select Reports - Printing from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reports printing window displays. 3. Enter the desired report header information in the Header for sample and patient reports data entry boxes. NOTE: Each field on the screen represents one line of the report header (approximately 50 characters per line). 4. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reports printing window, page 2-42 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits Perform this procedure to change the level at which the system low alert notification occurs. To change the level at which the low alert notification occurs for a specific reagent, see Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-121.
Section 2-24

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To change the system low alert setting for reagent kits: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagents - supplies window displays. 3. Enter the desired alert level (number of tests left) in the Default reagent low alert data entry box. 4. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44 Change the system language setting Perform this procedure to change the language for the system. NOTE: Messages in the Temporary message and Message history logs remain in the language in which they were generated. If you change the system language to or from Japanese, previously generated messages may display
for some characters.

Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator NA
To change the system language setting: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure system control center window displays. 3. Select the System language list button, and then select the desired language. 4. Select Done. A prompt displays to notify you that the SCC will shut down and restart to change the language. 5. Select OK to shut down the SCC.
Section 2-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
6. Wait for the SCC to cycle through shutdown. 7. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7. NOTE: If your system is configured with the bar code scanner, you must modify the keyboard language to match the system language. See the ARCHITECT Bar Code Scanner User's Guide or the ARCHITECT and AxSYM Bar Code Scanner User's Guide for instructions.

Configure system control center window, page 2-48 Change the screen timeout setting Perform this procedure to change the setting for the screen timeout.

To change the screen timeout setting: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure system control center window displays. 3. Enter the desired screen timeout in the Screen timeout data entry box. 4. Select Done to save your changes.

Section 2-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change the date and time settings Perform this procedure to change the date and time settings.

To change the date and time settings: 1. Select System control center from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure system control center window displays. 3. Enter the date using the current format in the System date data entry box. 4. Enter the time in the System time data entry box. The system time displays in a 24-hour format. 5. Select the desired Date format option. NOTE: When you edit this field, the new format does not display in the System date field until you select Done and access the window again. 6. Select the Time zone list button, and then select the desired time zone. 7. Select the Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings check box. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Section 2-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH) Perform this procedure to change the settings that determine whether the RSH (robotic sample handler) automatically repositions patient samples for retest.

To change automatic repositioning for retest setting: 1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure sample handler window displays. 3. Select the desired Retest option. 4. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure sample handler window (RSH), page 2-56 Change the sample bar code settings for codabar Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for codabar. To change bar code settings for code 39, see Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29. To change bar code settings for I 2 of 5, see Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30.

To change the sample bar code settings for codabar: 1. Select Sample bar code reader from the System categories list on the Configuration screen.
Section 2-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure bar codes window displays. 3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select Codabar. 4. Select the desired Bar code type option to either enable or disable the bar code type. 5. Select the desired Checksums option. 6. Select the Send checksum digits to the SCC check box, if you enabled Checksums. (optional) 7. Select the Send the start / stop characters to the SCC check box, if you enabled Checksums. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes. System configuration

Configure bar codes window, page 2-62 Change the sample bar code settings for code 39 Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for code 39. To change bar code settings for I 2 of 5, see Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30. To change bar code settings for codabar, see Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28.

To change the sample bar code settings for code 39: 1. Select Sample bar code reader from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure bar codes window displays. 3. Select the desired Bar code type option to either enable or disable the bar code type.
Section 2-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
4. Select the desired Checksums option. 5. Select the Send checksum digits to the SCC check box, if you enabled Checksums. (optional) 6. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure bar codes window, page 2-62 Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5 Perform this procedure to change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5. To change bar code settings for code 39, Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29. To change bar code settings for codabar, see Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28.

To change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5: 1. Select Sample bar code reader from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure bar codes window displays. 3. Select the Bar code type list button, and then select I 2 of 5. 4. Select the desired Bar code type option to either enable or disable the bar code type. 5. Select the desired Checksums option. 6. Select the Send checksum digits to the SCC check box, if you enabled Checksums. (optional) 7. Enter a value in the Code length #1 data entry box. 8. Enter a value in the Code length #2 data entry box. (optional) 9. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Configure bar codes window, page 2-62 Change the LIS serial port settings Perform this procedure to change the LIS (laboratory information system) serial port settings.

To change the LIS serial port settings: 1. Select Serial ports from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure serial ports window displays. 3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LIS. 4. Select the Baud rate list button, and then select the desired value. 5. Select the desired Parity option. 6. Select the desired Data bits option. 7. Select the desired Stop bits option. 8. Select Done. A confirmation message displays. 9. Select OK to save your changes. The serial port changes take effect the next time the system control center power is cycled. To cycle power to the system control center, see Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

Configure serial ports window, page 2-64
Section 2-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change the LAS serial port settings Perform this procedure to change the LAS (laboratory automation system) serial port settings.

To change the LAS serial port settings: 1. Select Serial ports from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure serial ports window displays. 3. Select the Port type list button, and then select LAS. 4. Select the Baud rate list button, and then select the desired value. 5. Select the desired Parity option. 6. Select the desired Data bits option. 7. Select the desired Stop bits option. 8. Select Done. A confirmation message displays. 9. Select OK to save your changes. The serial port changes take effect the next time the system control center power is cycled. To cycle power to the system control center, see Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

Configure serial ports window, page 2-64
Section 2-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change the onboard solution options (c 8000) Perform this procedure to change the position and cartridge size for onboard solutions located in the reagent onboard solutions area.

To change the onboard solution options: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagents - supplies window displays. 3. Select the Position (R1 & R2) E1 solution list button, and then select the desired solution. NOTE: You cannot select the same solution in more than one position. 4. Select the Position (R1 & R2) E2 solution list button, and then select the desired solution. 5. Select the Position (R1) D1 solution list button, and then select the desired solution. NOTE: When selected, the same solution name appears for position (R2) D1 solution. 6. Select the Position (R1) D1 size list button, and then select the desired cartridge size. 7. Select the Position (R2) D1 size list button, and then select the desired cartridge size. 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44 Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 Onboard solution areas (c 8000), page 1-38
Section 2-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change the onboard solution options (c 16000) Perform this procedure to change the position and cartridge size for onboard solutions located in the reagent onboard solutions area.

To change the onboard solution options: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagents - supplies window displays. 3. Select the Position (R1 & R2) C1,D1 solution list button, select the desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size. NOTE: You cannot select the same solution in more than one position. 4. Select the Position (R1 & R2) C2,D2 solution list button, select the desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size. NOTE: You cannot select the same solution in more than one position. 5. Select the Position (R1 & R2) C3 solution list button, select the desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size. 6. Select the Position (R1 & R2) D3 solution list button, select the desired solution, and then select the desired cartridge size. 7. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44 Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 Onboard solution areas (c 16000), page 1-58
Section 2-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System Perform this procedure to change the configured setting for average number of tests per sample. NOTE: If the default setting for Average number of tests per sample does not reflect actual laboratory conditions, editing this setting can improve throughput.

To optimize throughput on a multi-module i System: 1. Select F6 - Configure from the Configuration screen. The Configure sample ordering window displays. 2. Enter the number of tests per sample in the Average number of tests data entry box. 3. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure sample ordering window, page 2-39 Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications Perform this procedure to change the LAS (laboratory automation system) timeout settings and reinitialize communications when you are setting up a standard LAS interface or when one of the following error codes occurs: 8263 - Invalid recovery type 8359 - Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS 8360 - Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts and/or LAS <NAK> messages exceeded 8361 - LAS message communication error 8464 - LAS initialization communication failed
Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 2-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
General operator NA
To change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications: 1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure sample handler window displays. 3. Enter the desired value in the Initialization timeout data entry box. 4. Enter the desired value in the Response timeout data entry box. 5. Select the Send communications message to LAS checkbox to send a reinitialize communications message to the LAS. (optional) 6. Select Done to send a communications message to the LAS. A confirmation message displays. 7. Select OK to save your changes and send a communications message to the LAS.

Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-59 Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR) Perform this procedure to change the percentage of STAT protocols for the ARCHITECT i 2000SR System. This option defines the number of reaction vessel positions allocated for STAT assay protocols. If this percentage does not reflect the actual number of STAT protocols run, throughput may be decreased.

To change the STAT protocol percentage: 1. Select Modules from the System categories list on the Configuration screen.
Section 2-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure modules window displays. 3. Select the Module list button, and then select the i 2000SR module. 4. Select the desired STAT protocol percentage option. 5. Select Done to save your changes. System configuration

Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54 Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits Perform this procedure to change the option for running controls for onboard reagents.

To change the option for running controls for onboard reagents: 1. Select Reagents-Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagents-supplies window displays. 3. Select the desired Run controls for onboard reagents by option for: Lot: Run QC on only one kit per lot Kit: Run QC for every kit in a lot
NOTE: Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically run on one kit on one module (selected by the system software) regardless of the option selected. 4. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44
Windows - Configuration screen - System settings view

Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - System settings view include: Configure sample ordering window, page 2-39 Details for sample ordering window, page 2-39 Configure host - release mode window, page 2-40 Details for host - release mode window, page 2-41 Configure reports printing window, page 2-42 Details for reports printing window, page 2-43 Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44 Details for reagents - supplies window, page 2-46 Configure password window, page 2-47 Details for password window, page 2-48 Configure system control center window, page 2-48 Details for system control center window, page 2-49 Configure modules window (c System), page 2-50 Details for modules window (c System), page 2-51 Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52 Details for modules window (i 2000), page 2-53 Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54 Details for modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-55 Configure sample handler window (RSH), page 2-56 Details for sample handler window (RSH), page 2-57 Details for sample handler window (SSH), page 2-58 Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-59 Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-60 Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi), page 2-61 Configure bar codes window, page 2-62 Details for bar codes window, page 2-63 Configure serial ports window, page 2-64
Section 2-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for serial ports window, page 2-65 System configuration
Configure sample ordering window

From the Configure sample ordering window the system administrator can configure settings for batch ordering, calibration override (c System), and average tests per sample (multi-module i System). Figure 2.2: Configure sample ordering window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample ordering window field descriptions, page Appendix E-135.
Related procedures... Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21
Optimize throughput on a multi-module i System, page 2-35
Details for sample ordering window

From the Details for sample ordering window you can view the current settings for batch ordering, calibration expiration override (c System), and average test(s) per sample (multi-module i System).
Section 2-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.3: Details for sample ordering window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample ordering window field descriptions, page Appendix E-136.
Related procedures... View the batch sample ordering type, page 2-10
View average number of tests per sample setting (multi-module i System), page 2-10
Configure host - release mode window

From the Configure host - release mode window the system administrator can configure the settings for release mode, communication type, and result reporting to a host computer.
Section 2-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.4: Configure host - release mode window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure host - release mode window field descriptions, page Appendix E-137.
Related procedures... Configure host interface settings, page 2-6

Cancel result transmission, page 5-268
Details for host - release mode window

From the Details for host - release mode window you can view the current settings for release mode, communication type, and result reporting to a host computer.
Section 2-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.5: Details for host - release mode window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for host - release mode window field descriptions, page Appendix E-139.
Related procedures... View the host communication settings, page 2-11
Configure reports printing window

From the Configure reports printing window the system administrator can configure the settings for printing flags on reports, automatic report printing, and specify the text to print in the report header.
Section 2-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.6: Configure reports printing window System configuration
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix E-140.
Related procedures... Configure report settings, page 2-7

Change the option for printing flags, page 2-23 Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-22 Change the report header text, page 2-24
Details for reports printing window

From the Details for reports printing window you can view the current settings for printing flags on reports and automatic report printing, and the text for the report header.
Section 2-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.7: Details for reports printing window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix E-140.
Related procedures... View the option for printing flags on reports, page 2-13
View the automatic report printing setting, page 2-12 View the report header text, page 2-13
Configure reagents - supplies window

From the Configure reagents - supplies window the system administrator can configure the settings for: Reagent options Default reagent low alert Reagent expiration and stability override Run controls by reagent lot or reagent kit
Supply options Wash and detergent solutions (c System) Cartridge size (c System) Wash buffer transfer (i System) Pre-Trigger and Trigger stability override (i System)
Section 2-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.8: Configure reagents - supplies window (i System, c 8000)
Figure 2.9: Configure reagents - supplies window (i System, c 16000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagents - supplies window field descriptions, page Appendix E-141.
Related procedures... Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-24
Change the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33 Change the onboard solution options (c 16000), page 2-34 Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711
Section 2-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-37
Details for reagents - supplies window

From the Details for reagents - supplies window you can view the current settings for reagent options including: Default reagent low alert Reagent expiration and stability override Run controls by reagent lot or reagent kit
You can also view the current settings for supply options including: Wash and detergent solution (c System) Cartridge size (c System) Wash buffer transfer (i System) Pre-Trigger and Trigger stability override (i System)
Figure 2.10: Details for reagents - supplies window (i System, c 8000)
Section 2-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.11: Details for reagents - supplies window (i System, c 16000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagents - supplies window field descriptions, page Appendix E-143.
Related procedures... View the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-14
View the onboard solution options (c System), page 2-18 View the wash buffer transfer option (i System), page 2-18 View the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-20
Configure password window

From the Configure password window the system administrator can configure the system administrator password.
Section 2-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.12: Configure password window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure password window field descriptions, page Appendix E-144.
Related procedures... Change the system administrator password, page 1-23
Details for password window

From the Details for password window the system administrator can view the current system administrator password. Figure 2.13: Details for password window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for password window field descriptions, page Appendix E-144.
Configure system control center window

From the Configure system control center window the system administrator can configure the settings for the SCC (system control center), which include: System date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic adjustment for daylight savings time
Section 2-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Number format for thousands separator System language Screen timeout QC run definition Beep volume System configuration
Figure 2.14: Configure system control center window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure system control center window field descriptions, page Appendix E-145.
Related procedures... Change the date and time settings, page 2-27
Change the system language setting, page 2-25 Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8 Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26
Details for system control center window

From the Details for system control center window you can view the current settings for the SCC (system control center), which include: System date, date format, time, time zone, and automatic adjustment for daylight savings time Number format for thousands separator System language
Section 2-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Screen timeout QC run definition Beep volume
Figure 2.15: Details for system control center
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for system control center window field descriptions, page Appendix E-146.
Related procedures... View the system language setting, page 2-14

View the date and time settings, page 2-15 View the screen timeout setting, page 2-15
Configure modules window (c System)

From the Configure modules window the system administrator can: Enable / disable the sample saving mode Configure the module to run with an ICT module Configure the module to run with the high concentration waste bottle
Section 2-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.16: Configure modules window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-147.
Related procedures... Enable or disable the ICT module (c System), page 10-700
Details for modules window (c System)

From the Details for modules window you can view the current settings for: Serial number of the processing module Sample saving mode
You can also view whether the system is configured to run with the ICT (integrated chip technology) module and / or the high-concentration waste bottle.
Section 2-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.17: Details for modules window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for modules window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-148.
Configure modules window (i 2000)

From the Configure modules window the system administrator can enter the: Optics normalization value Linearity value
Section 2-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.18: Configure modules window (i 2000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (i 2000) field descriptions, page Appendix E-148.
Details for modules window (i 2000)

From the Details for modules window you can view the current settings for: Serial number for the processing module Optics normalization and linearity values
Section 2-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.19: Details for modules window (i 2000)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for modules window (i 2000) field descriptions, page Appendix E-149.
Configure modules window (i 2000SR)

From the Configure modules window the system administrator can: Enter the optics normalization and linearity values Select the STAT protocol percentage
Section 2-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.20: Configure modules window (i 2000SR)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions, page Appendix E-149.
Related procedures... Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-36
Details for modules window (i 2000SR)

From the Details for modules window you can view the current settings for: Serial number of the processing module Optics normalization and linearity values STAT protocol percentage
Section 2-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.21: Details for modules window (i 2000SR)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions, page Appendix E-150.
Related procedures... View the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-19
Configure sample handler window (RSH)

From the Configure sample handler window the system administrator can enable or disable the sample handler to automatically reposition samples for retest.
Section 2-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.22: Configure sample handler window (RSH)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-151.
Related procedures... Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-28
Details for sample handler window (RSH)

From the Details for sample handler window you can view the current settings for: Sample handler type Sample handler serial number Automatic repositioning of samples for retest
Section 2-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.23: Details for sample handler window (RSH)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-151.
Related procedures... Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-28
Details for sample handler window (SSH)

From the Details for sample handler window you can view the current settings for the sample handler type and sample handler serial number.
Section 2-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.24: Details for sample handler window (SSH)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample handler window (SSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard)

From the Configure sample handler window you can: Edit the value for initialization timeout Edit the value for response timeout Send a communication message to the LAS (laboratory automation system) to re-initialize communication
Section 2-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.25: Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
Related procedures... Change the LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications, page 2-35
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard)

From the Details for sample handler window you can view the current settings for: Sample handler type Carousel serial number LAS (laboratory automation system) interface type LAS interface initialization timeout and response time
Section 2-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.26: Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152.
Related procedures... View the LAS timeout setting, page 2-19
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi)

From the Details for sample handler window you can view the current settings for: Sample handler type Carousel serial number LAS (laboratory automation system) interface type
Section 2-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.27: Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions, page Appendix E-153.
Configure bar codes window

From the Configure bar codes window the system administrator can enable or disable bar code types and, depending on the type, can configure: Checksums Send checksum digits to the SCC (system control center) Send the start / stop characters to the SCC Code length #1 Code length #2
Section 2-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.28: Configure bar codes window System configuration
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix E-153.
Related procedures... Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28
Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29 Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30
Details for bar codes window

From the Details for bar codes window, depending on the bar code type selected, you can view the current settings for: Bar code type Checksums Send checksum digits to the SCC (system control center) Send the start / stop characters to the SCC Code length #1 Code length #2
Section 2-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.29: Details for bar codes window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix E-155.
Related procedures... View the sample bar code settings, page 2-16
Configure serial ports window

From the Configure serial ports window the system administrator can configure communication settings for the serial ports. Figure 2.30: Configure serial ports window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix E-156.
Related procedures... Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-31
Change the LAS serial port settings, page 2-32
Section 2-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Installation procedures and special requirements Section 2 Details for serial ports window
From the Details for serial ports window you can view the current communication settings for the port types. Figure 2.31: Details for serial ports window System configuration
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix E-157.
Related procedures... View the LIS serial port settings, page 2-17
View the LAS serial port settings, page 2-17
Configuration screen - Assay settings view

From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen you can configure settings associated with assays. The display of this view is dependent on your selection from the Assay categories list: Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-65 Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-67 Import assay window, page 2-69 Export assay window, page 2-70
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view

From the Assay settings - Assay parameters view of the Configuration screen the general operator can access windows to view detailed information for configured assay settings. The system administrator can access windows to configure these settings, which include:
Section 2-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Assay parameters CC reagent settings New assay Result units Panel definitions Retest rules
Figure 2.32: Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - Assay settings Assay parameters view field descriptions, page Appendix E-158. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Configuration screen Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-67.
Related procedures... Configuring Abbott assays, page 2-70

Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83 Changing assay configuration settings, page 2-107 Change the result units setting, page 2-126 Printing assay parameter reports, page 2-127
Section 2-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view

Perform this procedure to display the Assay settings - Assay parameters view of the Configuration screen.
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay Parameters view: 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Configuration. The Configuration screen - System settings view displays. 2. Select the Assay settings option. The Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay Parameters view displays.
Related information... Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-65
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view

From the Assay settings - New assay view of the Configuration screen the system administrator can select an assay file type and access windows to configure. Assay file types include calculated and photometric.
Section 2-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.33: Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - Assay settings New assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-158. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Configuration screen Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-68.
Related procedures... Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88

Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view

Perform this procedure to display the Assay settings - New assay view of the Configuration screen.
To access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view: 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Configuration.
Section 2-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configuration screen - System settings view displays. 2. Select the Assay settings option. The Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view displays. 3. Select New assay from the Assay categories list. The Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view displays.
Related information... Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-67
Import assay window

From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen the system administrator can import an assay file from another ARCHITECT c System. Figure 2.34: Import assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Import assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-158.
Related information... Import an assay file (c System), page 2-215
Section 2-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Export assay window

From the Assay settings view of the Configuration screen you can export an assay file to another ARCHITECT c System. Figure 2.35: Export assay window
For descriptions of these fields, see Export assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-160.
Related procedures... Export an assay file (c System), page 2-216
Procedures - Configuration screen - Assay settings view

Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - Assay settings view and its related windows are grouped by task: Configuring Abbott assays, page 2-70 Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83 Viewing assay settings, page 2-97 Changing assay configuration settings, page 2-107 Printing assay parameter reports, page 2-127
Configuring Abbott assays

Procedures for configuring Abbott assay settings include: Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71
Section 2-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-72 Configure a retest rule, page 2-73 Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75 Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-76 Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77 Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c System), page 2-78 Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-79 Configure the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-82 System configuration
Configure normal and extreme ranges Perform this procedure to configure normal and extreme result ranges for an assay. NOTE: Ranges are evaluated in the order defined.
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings Assay parameters view, page 2-67
To configure normal and extreme ranges: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration screen, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Results option. The Configure assay parameters window - Results view displays. 3. Select Add. The Configure results parameters window displays. 4. Select the desired Gender option. 5. Select the Age list button, and then select the desired age format. NOTE: If you do not enter an age when creating a patient order, the age is assumed to be 0.
Section 2-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
6. Enter a value in the Minimum and Maximum data entry boxes. 7. Enter a value in the Normal range data entry boxes. 8. Enter a value in the Extreme range data entry boxes. (optional) 9. Select Done to return to the Results view of the Configure assay parameters window. Your values display in the Gender and age specific ranges table. 10. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 9 for each. (optional) 11. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-159 Configure results parameters window, page 2-160 Configure patient and QC panels Perform this procedure to create a panel(s) that may be used when ordering patient or control samples.
To configure patient and QC panels: 1. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure panel definitions window displays. 3. Enter a unique name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters) in the New panel name data entry box. 4. Select the desired Panel type check box(es). 5. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. 6. Select Add to create the panel.
Section 2-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The panel name displays in the Panels list. 7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to add another panel. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes. System configuration
Configure panel definitions window, page 2-169 Configure a retest rule Perform this procedure to configure a retest rule(s), which provides automatic patient sample reordering for those samples that meet specified retest rules on an assay-by-assay basis. IMPORTANT: If you configure a calculated assay as your retest assay the system will use existing valid constituent results to perform the calculation.
To configure a retest rule: 1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay retest rules window displays. 3. Select Add rule. The Add / edit assay retest rules window displays. 4. Enter a name in the Rule name data entry box. 5. Enter the number of replicates in the Replicates data entry box. NOTE: The system runs the number of replicates entered for all retest assays. 6. Select the desired Retest indicator option to determine the retest criteria, result range, or error code.
Section 2-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
NOTE: If you selected the error code option and one of the following error codes occurs, the assay is retested. 1005 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the lowest calibrator. 1007 - Unable to process test, activated read failure. 1008 - Unable to process test, final read failure. 1051 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded optical limits. 1053 - Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity failure. 1054 - Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure. 1232 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the highest calibrator. 1250 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest calibrator. 1350 - Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within absorbance range. 1351 - Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.
7. Enter a value(s) in the Result range data entry box(es), if displayed. To automatically retest all samples when the original results are within a specific range, enter values in both data entry boxes. To automatically retest all samples when the original results are less than a specific value, leave the first data entry box blank and enter the value in the second data entry box. To automatically retest all samples when the original results are greater than a specific value, enter the value in the first data entry box and leave the second data entry box blank.
8. Select Select assay. (optional) The Select assay window displays. a. b. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. Deselect the original assay if you do not want to include it as a retest assay. (optional)
Section 2-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c. System configuration
Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules window. The selected assay(s) displays in the Selected retest assays list.
9. Select the desired Original dilution option for the original assay. (optional) 10. Select a retest assay from the Selected retest assays list. (optional) 11. Select the desired Retest dilution option. (optional) 12. Repeat steps 10 and 11 for each retest assay. 13. Select Done to return to the Configure assay retest rules window. The retest rule displays. 14. Repeat steps 3 through 13 to configure additional rules for this assay. (optional) 15. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 14 for each. (optional) 16. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-170 Add / edit assay retest rules window, page 2-171 Select assay window, page 2-172 Configure result units and decimal places Perform this procedure to configure alternate result units and decimal places for an assay.
To configure result units and decimal places:
Section 2-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
1. Select Result units from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure result units window displays. 3. Enter the result units by performing one of the following: Select the Result units list button, and then select the desired unit (i System assays). Enter the unit in the Results units data entry box (c System assays).
4. Enter the desired value in the Decimal places data entry box. 5. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each. (optional) 6. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure result units window, page 2-167 Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to configure the dilution option to use if a dilution is not specified when a test is ordered.
To configure the default dilution setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view displays. 2. Select the Reagent / Sample option.
Section 2-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view displays. 3. Select the Default dilution option. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then select a default dilution for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-135 Enter a calibrator concentration (c System) Perform this procedure to enter a calibrator concentration(s) when you first configure an assay or when you use a new lot of calibrator. NOTE: Changing the calibrator concentration(s) will change the assay calibration status to No Cal. A full calibration must be performed. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Stopped, Warming, or Ready System administrator Calibrator value sheet
To enter a calibrator concentration: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Calibration option. The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view displays. 3. Enter the concentrations for the new calibrators: For photometric assays, enter a value in the appropriate Concentration data entry box.
Section 2-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
For potentiometric assays, enter a value in the Low concentration and High concentration data entry boxes.
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then enter the concentrations for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System), page 2-151 Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to define the adjustment type and level of a full calibration curve. You can configure the calibration adjustment to occur at scheduled intervals or to be ordered at non-scheduled intervals. NOTE: If you modify the calibration adjustment type and/or interval for an Abbott assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. If you configure a factor calibration method, you cannot configure adjustment settings. To specify an adjustment when ordering, see Create a calibration order, page 6-12.
To Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected.
Section 2-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select the Calibration option. The Configure assay parameters window - CalibrationCalibrators view displays. 3. Select the Intervals option. The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration- Intervals view displays. 4. Select the Adjust type list button, and then select an adjustment type. NOTE: If you select the 1-point or 2-point adjustment type, you must also configure the Adjust level setting. 5. Select the Adjust level list button, if available, and then select the calibrator level to use for adjustment. (optional) 6. Enter the expiration interval for the adjustment calibration in the Adjust interval data entry box. (optional) 7. Select the Default ordering type list button, and then select the desired default ordering type. 8. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 4 - 7 for each. (optional) 9. Select Done to save your changes. System configuration
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System), page 2-147 Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated) Perform this procedure to include the interpretation with the test result and to determine whether results are held for review.
To configure interpretation options:
Section 2-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Interpretation option. The Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view displays.
3. Select the Name list button, and then select the desired name for the interpretation.
Section 2-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: If the desired name is not listed, select User defined and enter the name.
4. Repeat step 3 to select another interpretation name. 5. Enter a value(s) in the Range data entry box(es). NOTE: The first Range data entry must be value. The last Range data entry must be value. the low-linearity the high-linearity
Section 2-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
6. Select the Results review required check box(es) for the desired interpretation(s). (optional)
7. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 6 for each. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view, page 2-162 Configure the default dilution setting (i System) Perform this procedure to configure the dilution option to use if a dilution is not specified when you order a test.
To configure the default dilution setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure.
Section 2-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Dilution option. 3. Select the desired Default dilution option. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then select a default dilution for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System), page 2-129
Configuring user-defined assays

For calculated assays see Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84. Use the following order to configure c System photometric user-defined assays. Table 2.1: Configuring c System user-defined assays
Procedure Description Perform this procedure if a calibrator set is not defined for the assay. Perform this procedure to define the reagent and to link to the procedure to define the reagent kit if the assay uses non-bar coded reagents. Perform this procedure if the assay uses a non-bar coded sample diluent not previously configured. Perform this procedure to create a reagent kit with a unique identifier for a non-bar code labeled sample diluent (c 16000).
Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182 Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System), page 2-92 Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c 16000), page 2-95
Section 2-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Table 2.1: Configuring c System user-defined assays (continued)

Procedure Description Perform this procedure to configure the assay parameters. If you followed the recommended order your calibrator, reagent, and sample diluent (if required) information is available. Perform this procedure to configure result units and number of decimal places desired.
Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88
Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75
The following procedures are optional once the user-defined assay is configured. Table 2.2: Configuring optional items for user-defined assays
Procedure Description Perform this procedure to create a panel(s) to use when ordering patient or control samples. Perform this procedure to configure a retest rule(s) to provide automatic patient sample reordering for those samples that meet specified retest rules on an assay-by-assay basis. See 1D reagent bar code label data format, page 4-30
Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-72 Configure a retest rule, page 2-73
Prepare reagent bar code labels.
To save your configuration information to an alternative location, see Create a system software backup, page 2-212. To save assay files to a floppy disk, see Export an assay file (c System), page 2-216. Configure a calculated assay Perform this procedure to create an assay with a mathematical formula for deriving a calculated (ratio) result.
Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view, page 2-68
To configure a calculated assay: 1. Select F6 - Configure.
Section 2-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) displays.
2. Enter the desired name in the Assay data entry box. 3. Enter the desired assay number in the Number data entry box. NOTE: The next available assay number displays in the number field, but may be edited. The user-defined assay number range is 2000-2999. A calculated assay installed from an assay disk has an assay number ranging from 3000-3099 which cannot be edited. 4. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the desired option. 5. Select Select assays. The Select assay window displays. a. Select the assay(s) to be included in the formula from the Assays list. The assays are assigned to calculator buttons in the order you select them. For example: For an LDL calculation you would select Cholesterol, HDL, and Triglyceride. b. Select Done to return to the Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated).
Section 2-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
The selected assay(s) display in the Selected assays area and the appropriate ASSAY buttons display above the calculator keypad.
6. Enter the formula for the calculation by selecting the desired constituent assay(s) and calculator buttons. NOTE: You must include all of the selected constituent assay(s) in the formula. For example: To enter the formula for an LDL calculation Cholesterol - HDL - (Triglyceride /5), you would perform the following steps: a. b. c. d. Select the ASSAY1 (cholesterol) button the minus button . Select the ASSAY2 (HDL) button minus button . Select the open parenthesis button ASSAY3 (Triglyceride) button . , and then select , and then select the , and then select the
Select the divide button , then select 5, and then select the close parenthesis button .
Section 2-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The formula for the calculation displays in the Formula data entry box.
7. Enter a result range for the assay(s) in the Minimum and Maximum value data entry box(es). NOTE: If the constituent test result(s) is outside the defined range, the calculated test becomes an exception and a result is not reported.
8. Select the Results option to configure ranges. See Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71.
Section 2-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
9. Select the Interpretation option to configure interpretations. See Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-79. 10. Select Done to create the calculated assay and return to the Configuration screen. The calculated assay displays in the Assays list.
To configure result units and decimal places for the calculated assay, see Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75.
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated), page 2-131 Select assay window, page 2-172 Configure a photometric assay (c System) Perform this procedure to configure a user-defined photometric assay. The ARCHITECT System can store 200 c System assay files.
Prerequisite Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182 Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93 Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c 16000), page 2-95 Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System), page 2-92 (optional) Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings New assay view, page 2-68 Module status User access level Supplies Stopped, Warming, or Ready System administrator NA
To configure a photometric assay: 1. Select the Photometric option on the Configuration screen, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters - General - Reaction definition view displays. 2. Configure the settings for the General option. a. Enter the desired name in the Assay data entry box.
Section 2-88
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

b. System configuration
Enter the desired assay number in the Number data entry box.
NOTE: The next available assay number displays in the number field, but may be edited. The user-defined assay number range is 2000-2999. c. d. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the desired availability option. Configure the settings for the Reaction definition, Reagent / Sample, and Validity checks options.
3. Configure the settings for the Calibration option. a. Select the Calibration option. The Configure assay parameters - Calibration - Calibrators view displays. b. c. Select the Calibration method list button, and then select the desired method. Configure the settings for the Calibrators, Volumes, Intervals, and Validity checks options.
4. Select the SmartWash option to configure washes. (optional) See Configure the SmartWash settings (c System), page 2-90. 5. Select the Results option to configure ranges. See Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71. 6. Select the Interpretation option to configure interpretations. (optional) See Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-79. 7. Select Done to create the photometric assay. The assay now displays in the Assays list. To configure result units and decimal places for the photometric assay, see Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75. For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide.
Section 2-89
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-133 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-135 Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System), page 2-137 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System), page 2-145 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System), page 2-147 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System), page 2-149
Configure the SmartWash settings (c System) Perform this procedure to configure SmartWash settings. The SmartWash feature provides an additional wash for the reagent probes, sample probe, and cuvette to prevent assay-to-assay interference. NOTE: Do not configure more than one wash type for each component. Only one wash solution configured for each component is used by the system.
To configure the SmartWash settings: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the SmartWash option. The Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view displays. 3. Select Add.
Section 2-90
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Add / edit SmartWash - Rgt 1 probe view displays. 4. Configure the settings for the Rgt 1 probe options. (optional) a. b. c. d. Select the desired reagent(s) from the Reagents list. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash type. Enter the volume (20 - 345 L) of the wash type in the Volume data entry box. Enter the number of replicates in the Replicates data entry box.
5. Select the Rgt 2 probe option, and then repeat steps 4a through 4d. (optional) 6. Configure settings for the Sample probe options. (optional) a. Select the Sample probe option. The Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view displays. b. c. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash type. Select the desired Sample wash protocol option.
7. Configure the settings for the Cuvette options. (optional) a. Select the Cuvette option. The Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view displays. b. c. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. Select the Wash list button, and then select the desired wash type.
8. Select Done. A confirmation message displays. 9. Select OK to save your changes. The Configure assay parameters window displays. 10. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 9 for each. (optional) 11. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen - Assay settings view.
Section 2-91
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System), page 2-155 Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System), page 2-156 Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System), page 2-157 Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System), page 2-158 Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to configure an onboard sample diluent.
To configure a user-defined sample diluent: 1. Select CC Reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select NEW from the Reagents list, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. 3. Enter a unique name for the sample diluent (maximum of 7 alphanumeric characters) in the Reagent name data entry box. 4. Select the Reagent type list button, and then select Sample diluent. 5. Enter a value in the Reagent low alert data entry box. (optional) 6. Select Done to save your changes. To configure the kit for the sample diluent on the c 8000 processing module see Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System), page 2-94. To configure the kits for the sample diluent on the c 16000 processing module see Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c 16000), page 2-95.
Section 2-92
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-165 Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to configure a reagent when using non-bar coded reagents or reagents not supplied by Abbott Laboratories.
To configure a user-defined reagent: 1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select NEW from the Reagents list, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. 3. Enter a unique name (maximum of 7 alphanumeric characters) in the Reagent name data entry box. NOTE: When you are configuring bar coded reagents not supplied by Abbott Laboratories, the reagent name must match the name (including capitalization) encoded in the bar code. When you are configuring reagents that use 1D (one dimensional) bar code labels, the reagent name must be identical to digits 1 - 5 of the bar code. See 1D reagent bar code label data format, page 4-30. 4. Select the Reagent type list button, and then select R1 only or R1 and R2. 5. Enter a value in the Reagent low alert data entry box. (optional) 6. Enter a value in the Onboard stability data entry box. (optional) 7. Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System), page 2-94 for non-bar coded reagents. (optional)
Section 2-93
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
To configure a non-bar coded sample diluent, see Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System), page 2-92. To configure the assay parameters, see Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88. To load a non-bar coded reagent, see Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91. To load a 1D (one-dimensional) bar code labeled reagent, see Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-165 Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to create a reagent kit with a unique identifier for non-bar coded reagents. This identifier allows the system to track the onboard stability and remaining tests for a kit even if it is moved. It also allows the system to perform reagent changeover when a cartridge is empty. NOTE: You must define at least one reagent kit before you can load the reagent in the reagent supply centers.
To configure a user-defined reagent kit: 1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. The information is dependent on the reagent you selected. 3. Select the Lot number list button, and then perform one of the following:
Section 2-94
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Select the desired lot from the list. Select New lot, and then enter a lot number (maximum of eight alphanumeric characters) in the Lot number data entry box. System configuration
4. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box. NOTE: You can define multiple serial numbers for each lot number to allow you to load multiple kits of the same reagent. Each kit defined for a single lot number must have a unique numeric identifier (serial number). 5. Enter a date in the Expiration date data entry box. (optional) 6. Select the R1 cartridge size list button, and then select the cartridge size. 7. Select the R2 cartridge size list button, and then select the cartridge size. (optional) 8. Select Add kit to create the kit. The new kit displays in the Configured kits list. 9. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-164 Configure a reagent kit for a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c 16000) Perform this procedure to create a reagent kit with a unique identifier for non-bar coded sample diluent. This identifier allows the system to track the onboard stability and remaining tests for a kit even if it is moved. It also allows the system to perform reagent changeover when a cartridge is empty. NOTE: You must define two reagent kits for the sample diluent before you can load the diluent in the reagent supply centers. The c 16000
Section 2-95
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
processing module requires sample diluent loaded in both the outer (segment A, B, or C) and inner (segment D) carousels.
To configure a user-defined reagent kit: 1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired diluent from the Reagents list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. The information is dependent on the reagent you selected. 3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select New lot from the list. 4. Enter a lot number (maximum of eight alphanumeric characters) in the Lot number data entry box. 5. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box to identify the diluent cartridge for loading in the outer carousel. NOTE: You can define multiple serial numbers for each lot number of diluent thereby allowing you to load one cartridge in the outer (segment A, B, or C) carousel and another in the inner (segment D) carousel. 6. Select the R1 cartridge size list button, and then select the cartridge size. 7. Select Add kit to create the kit. The new kit displays in the Configured kits list. 8. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the lot number created in step 4. 9. Enter a unique number in the Serial number data entry box to identify the diluent cartridge for loading in the inner carousel. 10. Select the R1 cartridge size list button, and then select the cartridge size. (optional) 11. Select Add kit to create the kit.
Section 2-96
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The new kit displays in the Configured kits list. 12. Select Done to save your changes. To assign the location of the sample diluent see Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-164
Viewing assay settings

Procedures for viewing assay settings include: View assay parameters, page 2-98 View assay availability, page 2-98 View the normal and extreme result range settings, page 2-99 View the patient and QC panel definitions, page 2-100 View the assay retest rule settings, page 2-100 View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-101 View the calibrator concentration settings (c System), page 2-102 View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System), page 2-102 View the linearity range settings, page 2-103 View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System), page 2-104 View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-105 View the last required read setting (photometric - c System), page 2-105 View the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-106
Section 2-97
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
View assay parameters Perform this procedure to display the Details for assay parameters window. From this window you can access and view the assay parameter settings.
To view assay parameters: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Select the appropriate options to view additional parameters. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen. For assay parameter information refer to the manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
Related information... Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-127
View assay availability Perform this procedure to display the General view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this window you can view the setting that determines if you can select the assay name on the order screens.
To view assay availability:

Section 2-98
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System configuration 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Related information... Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-134
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System), page 2-130 Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-140 View the normal and extreme result range settings Perform this procedure to display the Results view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see the current normal and extreme result range settings.
To view the normal and extreme result range settings: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Results option. The Details for assay parameters window - Results view displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Section 2-99
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Related information... Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-65

Details for assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-161 View the patient and QC panel definitions Perform this procedure to display the Details for panel definition window. From this window you can view the current settings for patient and QC panels.
To view the patient and QC panel definitions: 1. Select Panel definitions from the Assays categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for panel definition window displays. 3. Select the desired panel from the Panels list. 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for panel definition window, page 2-169 View the assay retest rule settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for assay retest rules window. From this window you can view the current settings for assay retest rules.
To view the assay retest rule settings:
Section 2-100
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for assay retest rules window displays. 3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for assay retest rules window, page 2-173 View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to display the General - Reagent / Sample view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see the current setting for the default dilution.
To view the default dilution setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view displays. 2. Select the Reagent / Sample option. The Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Section 2-101
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-136 View the calibrator concentration settings (c System) Perform this procedure to display the Calibration - Calibrators view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see the current calibrator concentration settings to verify they match the calibrator lot in use.
To view the calibrator concentration settings: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Select the Calibration option. The Details for assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view displays. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-144 View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to display the Calibration - Intervals view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see
Section 2-102
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

the current setting for the default calibration ordering type. This ordering type is used when you order a calibration.
To view the default calibration ordering type: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Calibration option. The Details for assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Select the Intervals option. The Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view displays. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System), page 2-148 View the linearity range settings Perform this procedure to display the Results view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see the current linearity range settings.
Any
Section 2-103
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
General operator NA
To view the linearity range settings: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Results option. The Details for assay parameters window - Results view displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-161 View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System) Perform this procedure to display the Details for result units window. From this window you can view the current settings for correlation factor and intercept.
To view the correlation factor and intercept settings: 1. Select Result units from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for result units window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Section 2-104
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for result units window, page 2-168 View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System) Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window. From this window you can view the current reagent-specific low alert settings.
To view the reagent-specific low alert setting: 1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. The information is dependent on the reagent you selected. 3. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-165 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-166 View the last required read setting (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to display the General - Reaction definition view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see the last required read parameter setting.
Any
Section 2-105
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
General operator NA
To view the last required read setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen. For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide.
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-134 View the default dilution setting (i System) Perform this procedure to display the Dilution view of the Details for assay parameters window. From this view you can see the current setting for the default dilution.
To view the default dilution setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Dilution option. The Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view displays.
Section 2-106
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System), page 2-154.
Changing assay configuration settings

Procedures for changing assay settings include: Change the name of an assay, page 2-108 Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109 Change normal and extreme ranges, page 2-110 Change a patient or QC panel, page 2-111 Delete a patient or QC panel, page 2-111 Add an assay to a retest rule, page 2-112 Remove an assay from a retest rule, page 2-113 Delete a retest rule, page 2-114 Change a linearity range, page 2-115 Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System), page 2-116 Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-117 Change default calibration type (photometric - c System), page 2-118 Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77 Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System), page 2-119 Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System), page 2-120 Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-121 Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122 Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123 Change the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-124
Section 2-107
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change interpretation settings (i System), page 2-125 Change the result units setting, page 2-126
Change the name of an assay Perform this procedure to change the assay name that displays on all screens and windows.
Prerequisite
No orders pending for the assay being changed Stopped, Warming, or Ready System administrator NA
To change the name of an assay: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Enter a unique name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters) in the Assay data entry box. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and enter a unique name for each. (optional) 4. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-133 Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System), page 2-129 Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-139
Section 2-108
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change the availability of an assay Perform this procedure to change assay availability, which determines whether an assay(s) is available for ordering on the order screens.
Prerequisite
To change the availability of an assay: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the desired assay availability. Enabled - Indicates the assay is available for ordering. Disabled - Indicates the assay name does not display on the patient, control, and calibration order screens. Patient disabled - Indicates the assay name does not display on the Patient order screen.
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then enable or disable each. (optional) 4. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-133 Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System), page 2-129 Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-139
Section 2-109
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Change normal and extreme ranges Perform this procedure to edit normal and extreme ranges. NOTE: Ranges are evaluated in the order defined.
Prerequisite
To change normal and extreme ranges: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration screen, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Results option. The Configure assay parameters window - Results view displays. 3. Select the desired range from the Gender and age specific ranges table, and then select Edit. The Configure results parameters window displays. 4. Select the Age list button, and then select the desired age format. 5. Enter a value in the Minimum and Maximum data entry boxes. 6. Enter a value in the Normal range data entry boxes. 7. Enter a value in the Extreme range data entry boxes. (optional) 8. Select Done to return to the Results view of the Configure assay parameters window. Your edits display in the Gender and age specific ranges table. 9. Select another range, and then repeat steps 3 through 8. (optional) 10. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 9 for each. (optional) 11. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-110
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Configure assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-159 Configure results parameters window, page 2-160 Change a patient or QC panel Perform this procedure to add or remove assays from a previously defined panel or to change the panel type.
To change a patient or QC panel: 1. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure panel definitions window displays. 3. Select the desired panel from the Panels list. 4. Select or deselect the Panel type check box(es). 5. Select or deselect an assay(s) from the Assays list. 6. Select Add to add your changes. 7. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure panel definitions window, page 2-169 Delete a patient or QC panel Perform this procedure to delete a patient or QC panel when the panel is no longer in use.
Section 2-111
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
System administrator NA
To delete a patient or QC panel: 1. Select Panel definitions from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure panel definitions window displays. 3. Select the panel to delete from the Panels list, and then select Delete. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to delete the panel. The panel name no longer displays in the Panels list. 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Configure panel definitions window, page 2-169 Add an assay to a retest rule Perform this procedure to add an assay(s) to a retest rule(s).
To add an assay to a retest rule: 1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure assay retest rules window displays. 3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list, and then select Edit rule. The Add / edit assay retest rules window displays.
Section 2-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Select Select assay. The Select assay window displays. a. b. Select the desired assay(s). Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules window. The selected assay(s) display in the Selected retest assays list. 5. Select an assay from the Selected retest assays list. 6. Select the desired Retest dilution option. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each assay. 8. Select Done to return to the Configure assay retest rules window. 9. Repeat steps 3 through 8 to add a retest assay(s) to another rule. (optional) 10. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 9 for each. (optional) 11. Select Done to save your changes. System configuration
Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-170 Add / edit assay retest rules window, page 2-171 Select assay window, page 2-172 Remove an assay from a retest rule Perform this procedure to remove an assay from a retest rule(s).
To remove an assay from a retest rule: 1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen.
Section 2-113
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
2. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure assay retest rules window displays. 3. Select the desired rule from the Assay retest rules list, and then select Edit rule. The Add / edit assay retest rules window displays. 4. Select Select assay. The Select assay window displays. a. b. Deselect the desired assay(s). Select Done to return to the Add / edit assay retest rules window. The updated Selected retest assays list displays. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to remove a retest assay(s) from another rule. (optional) 6. Select Done to return to the Configure assay retest rules window. 7. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 6 for each. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-170 Add / edit assay retest rules window, page 2-171 Select assay window, page 2-172 Delete a retest rule Perform this procedure to delete a retest rule(s).
Prerequisite
Section 2-114
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To delete a retest rule: 1. Select Retest rules from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay retest rules window displays. 3. Select the desired rule, and then select Delete rule. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay, if you selected more than one, and then repeat step 3 for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes. System configuration
Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-170 Change a linearity range Perform this procedure to change the linearity range for an assay(s) when your laboratory determines the linearity range has changed. NOTE: If you modify the linearity range for an Abbott assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version.
Prerequisite
To change a linearity range: 1. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Select the Results option.
Section 2-115
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
The Configure assay parameters window - Results view displays. 4. Edit the value in the Low-Linearity data entry box. NOTE: For i System assays this field can only be edited when the first default dilution option is configured. 5. Edit the value in the High-Linearity data entry box. NOTE: For i System assays this field can only be edited when the first default dilution option is configured. This value cannot be edited above the assay default high-linearity. 6. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 4 and 5 for each. (optional) 7. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-159 Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to specify the last read that is required for result calculation. The result calculates as soon as the last defined read is measured rather than waiting for all 33 reads to complete.
Prerequisite
To change the last required read setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view displays. 3. Select the Last required read data entry box, and then enter the read time (1-33).
Section 2-116
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: This read time cannot occur before the last read time defined for Main, Flex, Blank, Color correction, or Reaction check. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then enter the read time for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes. For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-133 Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to select the dilution option to use if a dilution is not specified when the test is ordered. To specify a dilution for a specific sample when ordering, see Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118, Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139, or Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143.
Prerequisite
To change the default dilution setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Reagent / Sample option. The Configure assay parameters window - Reagent / Sample view displays.
Section 2-117
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
3. Select the desired Default dilution option. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then select a default dilution for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-135 Change default calibration type (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to change the setting for the default calibration type. This setting is used if the type is not specified when you order a calibration. NOTE: The Default calibration type setting is only available if you have configured an adjustment type. To specify a calibration type when ordering a calibration, see Create a calibration order, page 6-12.
Prerequisite
To change the default calibration type: 1. Select an assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Calibration option. The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view displays. 3. Select the Intervals option. The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view displays.
Section 2-118
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Select the Default ordering type list button, and then select the desired calibration type. 5. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then select a calibration type for each. (optional) 6. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System), page 2-147 Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System) Perform this procedure to edit the correlation factor and intercept when correlating assay results to another system. NOTE: If you modify the correlation factor and/or intercept for an Abbott assay an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version.
To change the correlation factor and intercept settings: 1. Select Result units from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure result units window displays. 3. Edit the value in the Correlation factor data entry box. 4. Edit the value in the Intercept data entry box. 5. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each. (optional) 6. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-119
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide.
Configure result units window, page 2-167 Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System) Perform this procedure to delete a calibrator set when the calibrator is no longer used.
Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view, page 2-175

To delete a calibrator set: NOTE: If a calibrator set is defined for use in any assay parameter file, you must perform step 1 or step 2 prior to deleting the calibrator set. 1. Change the assay to use a different calibrator set. (optional) a. b. Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-67. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view displays. c. Select the Calibration option. The Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view displays. d. e. f. Select the Calibrator list button, and then select a different calibrator. Use the previous/next buttons if you selected more than one assay, and then repeat step 1d for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes.
2. Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set if the assay file is no longer needed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. (optional)
Section 2-120
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Select Calibrator set from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 4. Select the desired calibrator set, and then select F7 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. 5. Select OK to delete the calibrator set. The calibrator set name no longer displays in the calibrator set table. 6. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.
Related information... Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view, page 2-174

Configure calibrator set window (c System), page 2-207 Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System) Perform this procedure to change the level at which the low alert notification occurs for a specific reagent. To change the level at which the system low alert notification occurs, see Change the system low alert setting for reagent kits, page 2-24.
To change the reagent-specific low alert setting: 1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list on the Configuration screen. 3. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. 4. Enter the desired alert level (number of tests) in the Reagent low alert data entry box. 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-121
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-164 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-165 Delete a reagent (c System) Perform this procedure to delete a user-defined reagent when it is no longer in use.
Prerequisite
All reagent kits using the reagent must be deleted. See Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123
To delete a reagent: NOTE: If a reagent is defined for use in any assay parameter file, you must perform step 1 or 2 prior to deleting the reagent. 1. Change the reagent parameter in the assay to use a different reagent. (optional) a. b. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, on the Configuration screen. Select F6 - Configure The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view displays. c. Select the Reagent / Sample option. The Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view displays. d. e. f. Select the Reagent list button, and then select a different reagent. Use the previous/next buttons if you selected more than one assay, and then repeat step 1d for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-122
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Delete the assay that uses the reagent if the assay file is no longer needed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. (optional) 3. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 4. Select the desired reagent from the Reagents list, and then select F7 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. 5. Select OK to delete the reagent.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-135 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-165 Delete a reagent kit (c System) Perform this procedure to delete a reagent kit when it is no longer in use. NOTE: Performing this procedure does not delete the defined reagent. To delete the reagent and the associated kits, see Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122.
To delete a reagent kit: 1. Select CC reagent settings from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the reagent associated with the kit from the Reagents list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window displays. 3. Select the desired kit from the Configured kits list, and then select Delete kit.
Section 2-123
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
4. Select Done to delete the kit.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-164 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-165 Change the default dilution setting (i System) Perform this procedure to select the dilution option to use if a dilution is not specified when the test is ordered. To specify a dilution for a specific sample when ordering, see Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118, Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139, or Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143.
Prerequisite
To change the default dilution setting: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. The information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 2. Select the Dilution option. 3. Select the desired Default dilution option. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then select a default dilution for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-124
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System), page 2-153 Change interpretation settings (i System) Perform this procedure to change the settings that determine whether the interpretation is included with the test result and results are held for review. The interpretation option is available for specific ARCHITECT i System assays.
To change interpretation settings: 1. Select Assay parameters from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired i System assay(s) from the Assay list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window - General view displays. 3. Select the Interpretation option. The Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view displays. 4. Select the Name list button, and then select the desired name for the interpretation. (optional) 5. Repeat step 4 to select another interpretation name. (optional) 6. Enter the desired value(s) in the Range data entry box(es), if available. (optional) NOTE: The first Range data entry must be the low-linearity value. The last Range data entry must be the high-linearity value. 7. Select the Results review required checkbox(es) for the desired interpretation(s). (optional) 8. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 4 through 7 for each. (optional) 9. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 2-125
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Related information... Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-67
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view, page 2-162 Change the result units setting Perform this procedure to change the result units for an assay. IMPORTANT: When you edit the result concentration unit, all previous Levey-Jennings and QC summary information is deleted.
To change the result units setting: 1. Select Result units from the Assay categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure result units window displays. 3. Enter the result units by performing one of the following: Select the Result units list button, and then select the desired unit (i System assays). Enter the unit in the Results units data entry box (c System assays).
NOTE: For c System assays, the system changes the result unit name displayed but it does not automatically adjust any values. You must enter the following parameters, if applicable, using the appropriate conversion factor.
Section 2-126
Calibrator concentrations Gender and age specific ranges (normal and extreme) Linearity ranges Interpretation ranges Control means Retest rules result ranges
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Constituent assay ranges for calculated assays
4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat step 3 for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.
Configure result units window, page 2-167 Printing assay parameter reports Procedures for printing reports include: Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, page 5-343
Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view

Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - Assay settings view include: Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System), page 2-129 Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System), page 2-130 Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated), page 2-131 Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated), page 2-132 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-133 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System), page 2-134 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-135 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System), page 2-136 Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System), page 2-137
Section 2-127
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System), page 2-138 Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-139 Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view, page 2-140 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System), page 2-141 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System), page 2-142 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-144 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System), page 2-145 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System), page 2-146 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System), page 2-147 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System), page 2-148 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System), page 2-149 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System), page 2-150 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System), page 2-151 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System), page 2-152 Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System), page 2-153 Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System), page 2-154 Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System), page 2-155 Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System), page 2-156
Section 2-128
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System), page 2-158 Configure assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-159 Configure results parameters window, page 2-160 Details for assay parameters window - Results view, page 2-161 Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view, page 2-162 Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view, page 2-163 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-164 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view, page 2-165 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-165 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view, page 2-166 Configure result units window, page 2-167 Details for result units window, page 2-168 Configure panel definitions window, page 2-169 Details for panel definition window, page 2-169 Configure assay retest rules window, page 2-170 Add / edit assay retest rules window, page 2-171 Select assay window, page 2-172 Details for assay retest rules window, page 2-173
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System)

From the General view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure general assay settings, such as the assay name and assay availability.
Section 2-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.36: Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-161.

Change the name of an assay, page 2-108 Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System)

From the General view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current general assay settings, such as: Assay name, number, and availability Assay type and pretreatment option Assay and calibration version
Section 2-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.37: Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-162.
Related procedures... View assay availability, page 2-98
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated)

From the General view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings used to calculate the assay.
Section 2-131
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.38: Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-163.
Related procedures... Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84
Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated)

From the General calculated view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings used to calculate an assay.
Section 2-132
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.39: Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-164.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reaction definition view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure: General assay settings, which include the assay name, number, type, availability, and version Reaction definition settings, which include the reaction mode, wave lengths, read times, and last required read
Section 2-133
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.40: Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-165.

Change the name of an assay, page 2-108 Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109 Change the last required read setting (photometric - c System), page 2-116
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reaction definition view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current: General assay settings, which include the assay name, number, type, availability, and version Reaction definition settings, which include the reaction mode, wave lengths, read times, and last required read
Section 2-134
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.41: Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-168.

View the last required read setting (photometric - c System), page 2-105
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reagent / Sample view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for reagent(s) and sample, such as: Reagent and sample diluent definition Reagent and water volumes Dilution volumes
Section 2-135
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.42: Configure assay parameters window -General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-169

Change the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-117 Configure the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-76
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Reagent / Sample view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for reagent(s) and sample, such as: Reagent and sample diluent definition Reagent and water volumes Dilution volumes
Section 2-136
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.43: Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-171.
Related procedures... View the default dilution setting (photometric - c System), page 2-101
Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Validity checks view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for validity checks used in result calculation.
Section 2-137
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.44: Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-172.
Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
From the General - Validity checks view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for the validity checks used in result calculation.
Section 2-138
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.45: Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-175.
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view

From the General view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure general assay settings, such as the assay name, availability, and reagent used for the assay.
Section 2-139
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.46: Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-176.
Related procedures... Change the name of an assay, page 2-108

Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109
Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view

From the General view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current general assay settings, such as: Assay name, number, and availability Reagent used for the assay
Section 2-140
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.47: Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-177.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System)

From the Calibration view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the setting for calibrator replicates.
Section 2-141
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.48: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-178.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System)

From the Calibration view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current calibration settings, such as: Method for calibration, data reduction, and calibration adjustment Calibrator replicates Calibrator names and concentrations
Section 2-142
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.49: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-178.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System)

From the Calibration - Calibrators view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for the calibration method and calibrator names, replicates, and concentrations.
Section 2-143
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.50: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-179.
Related procedures... Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77

Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System)
From the Calibration - Calibrators view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the settings for the calibration method and calibrator names, replicates, and concentrations.
Section 2-144
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.51: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration Calibrators view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-180.
Related procedures... View the calibrator concentration settings (c System), page 2-102
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System)

From the Calibration - Volumes view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for calibrator volumes.
Section 2-145
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.52: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Volumes view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-181.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System)
From the Calibration - Volumes view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for calibrator volumes.
Section 2-146
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.53: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration Volumes view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-182.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System)

From the Calibration - Intervals view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for calibration type and intervals.
Section 2-147
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.54: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Intervals view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-182.

Configure a calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric - c System), page 2-78 Change default calibration type (photometric - c System), page 2-118
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System)
From the Calibration - Intervals view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for calibration type and intervals.
Section 2-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.55: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration Intervals view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-183.
Related procedures... View the default calibration ordering type (photometric - c System), page 2-102
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
From the Calibration - Validity checks view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for validity checks used to calculate the calibration curve.
Section 2-149
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.56: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-184.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
From the Calibration - Validity checks view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for validity checks used to calculate the calibration curve.
Section 2-150
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.57: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration Validity checks view (photometric - c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-185.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System)

From the Calibration view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for calibration and index options.
Section 2-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.58: Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-186.
Related procedures... Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System)

From the Calibration - ICT view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for calibration and index options.
Section 2-152
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.59: Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-187.
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)

From the Dilution view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the default dilution for an ARCHITECT i System assay.
Section 2-153
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.60: Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-188.
Related procedures... Change the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-124
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)

From the Dilution view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for the default dilution and dilution ranges for an ARCHITECT i System assay.
Section 2-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.61: Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-189.
Related procedures... View the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-106
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)

From the SmartWash view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure and delete the SmartWash settings for the sample probe, reagent probe(s), and the cuvette.
Section 2-155
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.62: Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-190.
Related procedures... Configure the SmartWash settings (c System), page 2-90
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System)

From the Rgt 1 and Rgt 2 probe views of the Add / edit SmartWash window the system administrator can add or edit SmartWash settings, which include: Wash type to use on the reagent probe Wash type volume Wash type replicates
The SmartWash settings can be configured for both reagent probes.
Section 2-156
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.63: Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-190.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System)

From the Sample probe view of the Add / edit SmartWash window the system administrator can add or edit SmartWash settings, which include the wash type and sample wash protocol used for each assay. Figure 2.64: Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-191.
Section 2-157
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System)

From the Cuvette view of the Add / edit SmartWash window the system administrator can add or edit the wash type settings used for each assay. Figure 2.65: Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit SmartWash window Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-192.
Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)

From the SmartWash view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current SmartWash settings for the sample probe, reagent probe(s), and the cuvette.
Section 2-158
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.66: Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-192.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view

From the Results view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can: Configure age and gender specific ranges Change normal and extreme ranges Edit or delete ranges Change a linearity range
Section 2-159
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.67: Configure assay parameters window - Results view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-193.
Related procedures... Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71

Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88 Change normal and extreme ranges, page 2-110 Change a linearity range, page 2-115 Change the default dilution setting (i System), page 2-124
Configure results parameters window

From the Configure results parameters window the system administrator can configure normal and extreme ranges.
Section 2-160
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.68: Configure results parameters window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure results parameters window field descriptions, page Appendix E-194.
Related procedures... Configure normal and extreme ranges, page 2-71

Change normal and extreme ranges, page 2-110
Details for assay parameters window - Results view

From the Results view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for normal and extreme ranges and assay linearity.
Section 2-161
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.69: Details for assay parameters window - Results view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-195.
Related procedures... View the normal and extreme result range settings, page 2-99
View the linearity range settings, page 2-103
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view

From the Interpretation view of the Configure assay parameters window the system administrator can configure the settings for interpretation name, range, and the requirement to review the result.
Section 2-162
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.70: Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay parameters window Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-196.

Configure interpretation options (c System and calculated), page 2-79 Change interpretation settings (i System), page 2-125
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view

From the Interpretation view of the Details for assay parameters window you can view the current settings for interpretation name, range, and the requirement to review the result.
Section 2-163
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.71: Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay parameters window Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-196.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view

From the Abbott assay view of the Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window the system administrator can configure the number of tests for the reagent-specific low alert setting. Figure 2.72: Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-197.
Section 2-164
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related procedures... Configuring Abbott assays, page 2-70
Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-121 System configuration
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view
From the Abbott assay view of the Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window you can view the current settings for the reagent-specific low alert. Figure 2.73: Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-197.
Related procedures... View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-105
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view

From the user-defined assay view of the Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window the system administrator can configure the settings for: Reagent name and type Reagent low alert and onboard stability Reagent kit lot number, serial number, expiration date, and cartridge size
The system administrator can also delete reagent kits and access a window to add a new kit.
Section 2-165
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.74: Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window user-defined assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-198.
Related procedures... Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93

Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric - c System), page 2-92 Change the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-121 Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - user-defined assay view
From the user-defined assay view of the Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window you can view the current settings for: Reagent name and type Reagent low alert and onboard stability Reagent kit lot number, serial number, expiration date, and cartridge size
Section 2-166
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.75: Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window user-defined assay view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-199.
Related procedures... View the reagent-specific low alert setting (c System), page 2-105
Configure result units window

From the Configure result units window the system administrator can configure the settings for: Result units and decimal places Correlation factor and intercept (c System)
Section 2-167
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.76: Configure result units window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure result units window field descriptions, page Appendix E-199.

Configure result units and decimal places, page 2-75 Change the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System), page 2-119 Change the result units setting, page 2-126
Details for result units window

From the Details for result units window you can view the current settings for: Result units and decimal places Correlation factor and intercept (c System)
Figure 2.77: Details for result units window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result units window field descriptions, page Appendix E-200.
Section 2-168
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related procedures... View the correlation factor and intercept settings (c System), page 2-104
Configure panel definitions window

From the Configure panel definitions window the system administrator can configure patient and QC panels. Figure 2.78: Configure panel definitions window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure panel definitions window field descriptions, page Appendix E-200.
Related procedures... Configure patient and QC panels, page 2-72

Change a patient or QC panel, page 2-111 Delete a patient or QC panel, page 2-111
Details for panel definition window

From the Details for panel definition window you can view the current settings for patient and QC panel definitions.
Section 2-169
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.79: Details for panel definition window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for panel definition window field descriptions, page Appendix E-201.
Related procedures... View the patient and QC panel definitions, page 2-100
Configure assay retest rules window

From the Configure assay retest rules window the system administrator can add, change, or delete retest rules.
Section 2-170
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.80: Configure assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions, page Appendix E-201.
Related procedures... Configure a retest rule, page 2-73

Add an assay to a retest rule, page 2-112 Remove an assay from a retest rule, page 2-113 Delete a retest rule, page 2-114 Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-28
Add / edit assay retest rules window

From the Add / edit assay retest rules window the system administrator can add or edit assay retest rules.
Section 2-171
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.81: Add / edit assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions, page Appendix E-202.
Related procedures... Configure a retest rule, page 2-73

Add an assay to a retest rule, page 2-112 Remove an assay from a retest rule, page 2-113 Delete a retest rule, page 2-114
Select assay window

From the Select assay window the system administrator can select or deselect assay(s) for assay retest rules, multiconstituent controls, and calculated assays.
Section 2-172
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.82: Select assay window System configuration
For descriptions of these fields, see Select assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-204.
Related information... Configure a retest rule, page 2-73

Add an assay to a retest rule, page 2-112 Remove an assay from a retest rule, page 2-113 Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179 Add an assay to a multiconstituent control, page 2-191 Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84
Details for assay retest rules window

From the Details for assay retest rules window you can view the current settings for retest rules.
Section 2-173
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.83: Details for assay retest rules window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for assay retest rules window field descriptions, page Appendix E-204.
Related procedures... View the assay retest rule settings, page 2-100
Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view

From the QC - Cal settings view of the Configuration screen the general operator can access windows to view detailed information for configured QC Cal settings. The system administrator can access windows to configure these settings, which include: QC - Single analyte QC - Multiconstituent Multiconstituent bar code SID Westgard rules Calibrator set
Section 2-174
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.84: Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view
For descriptions of these fields, see Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions, page Appendix E-205. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Configuration screen QC - Cal settings view, page 2-175.
Related procedures... Configuring QC - Cal settings, page 2-176

Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-183 Changing QC - Cal settings, page 2-186
Access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view

Perform this procedure to display the QC - Cal view of the Configuration screen.
To access the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view: 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Configuration.
Section 2-175
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
The Configuration screen displays. 2. Select the QC - Cal settings option. The Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view displays.
Procedures - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view

Procedures you can perform from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view and its related windows are grouped by task: Configuring QC - Cal settings, page 2-176 Viewing QC - Cal settings, page 2-183 Changing QC - Cal settings, page 2-186
Configuring QC - Cal settings

Procedures for configuring QC - Cal settings include: Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176 Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level, page 2-178 Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179 Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-180 Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181 Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182
Configure a new single analyte control Perform this procedure to configure control information for each level of a new single analyte control set. NOTE: You cannot configure controls for calculated assays.

To configure a new single analyte control: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure.
Section 2-176
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configure single analyte window displays. 2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select New Lot. 3. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot no. data entry box. 4. Enter the expiration date for the control in the Exp. date data entry box. (optional) 5. Enter values for the following level information in the appropriate data entry box: Level name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters and name is case sensitive) Manufacturer mean (optional) Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional) Expected mean Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
6. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the desired dilution for the control level. 7. Enter the ID for the control level bar code in the Bar code SID data entry box. (optional) NOTE: The Bar code SID must be unique for each control level within a lot. 8. Select the Display order list button, and then select the desired display order for the control level. 9. Select Add level to add the control. The control level name displays in the Level list. 10. Select the Level list button, select New Level to add another level, and then repeat steps 5 through 9. (optional) 11. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 through 10 for each. (optional) 12. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure single analyte window, page 2-198
Section 2-177
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level Perform this procedure to define a bar code for a single analyte control level. NOTE: You cannot configure controls for calculated assays.

To configure a bar code for a single analyte control level: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure single analyte window displays. 2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select the desired lot. 3. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 4. Enter the ID to be used for the control level bar code in the Bar code SID data entry box. NOTE: The Bar code SID must be unique for each control level within a lot. 5. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then enter a bar code SID. (optional) 6. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 through 5 for each. (optional) 7. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure single analyte window, page 2-198
Section 2-178
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Configure a new multiconstituent control Perform this procedure to configure control information for each level of a multiconstituent control set.

To configure a new multiconstituent control: 1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select NEW from the Controls list, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure multiconstituent control window displays. 3. Enter the control name in the Control data entry box. 4. Select the Lot number list button, and then select New Lot. 5. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot number data entry box. 6. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 7. Enter the expiration date for the control in the Exp. date data entry box. (optional) 8. Select Select assays. The Select assay window displays. a. b. Select the desired assay(s) from the list. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent control window. The assay(s) display in the table. 9. Select the assay(s) from the table, and then select Define data. The Define data window displays. NOTE: You must define the assay-specific data for each assay before you can add the level. a. Enter values for the following level information in the appropriate data entry box:
Section 2-179
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
b. Manufacturer mean (optional) Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional) Expected mean Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the desired dilution for the control level.
NOTE: This button is not available for calculated assay controls. c. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 9a and 9b for each. (optional) Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent control window. The assay-specific data displays in the table. 10. Select Add level to add the level. 11. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat steps 8 through 10. (optional) 12. Select Done to save your changes.
d.

Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-200 Select assay window, page 2-172 Define data window, page 2-201 Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID Perform this procedure to assign a bar code SID for a configured multiconstituent control.

To configure a multiconstituent bar code SID:
Section 2-180
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen, and then select F6 Configure. The Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window displays. 2. Enter the ID to be used for the multiconstituent control level bar code in the New bar code SID data entry box. NOTE: The bar code SID must be unique for each control level within a lot. 3. Select the Control list button, and then select the desired control. 4. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot. 5. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 6. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select Add. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to configure additional bar code SIDs. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-203 Configure a Westgard rule Perform this procedure to configure Westgard rules, which are used to assess quality control results.

To configure a Westgard rule: 1. Select Westgard rules from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure.
Section 2-181
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
The Configure Westgard window displays. 3. Select the desired rule from the Rules list. 4. Select the desired Status option. NOTE: If you selected Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM, you must configure a run definition. 5. Select the desired Flag type option. NOTE: Westgard rules configured as a warning do not produce a flag for patient results. Westgard rules configured as a failure produce a CNTL flag for a patient result. 6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 to configure another rule for the displayed assay. (optional) 7. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 6 for each. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.
To define a run, see Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8.

Configure Westgard window, page 2-205 Westgard rule application, page 5-309 Configure a calibrator set (c System) Perform this procedure to create a calibrator set.

To configure a calibrator set: 1. Select Calibrator set from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select NEW from the Calibrator sets list, and then select F6 Configure.
Section 2-182
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Configure calibrator set window displays. 3. Enter a unique name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters) in the Calibrator name data entry box. 4. Enter a value (1 - 6) in the Number of levels data entry box. 5. Select Done to create the calibrator set. To configure the calibrator concentrations, see Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77.

Configure calibrator set window (c System), page 2-207
Viewing QC - Cal settings

Procedures for viewing QC - Cal settings include: View single analyte control settings, page 2-183 View multiconstituent control settings, page 2-184 View multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-185 View Westgard rule(s) settings, page 2-185 View settings for a calibrator set (c System), page 2-186
View single analyte control settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for single analyte window. From this window you can view the current settings for single analyte controls.

To view the single analyte control settings: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for single analyte window displays. 2. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level.
Section 2-183
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.

Details for single analyte window, page 2-199 View multiconstituent control settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for multiconstituent control window. From this window you can view the current configuration settings for multiconstituent controls.

To view multiconstituent control settings: 1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired control from the Controls table, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for multiconstituent control window displays. 3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired lot. 4. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.

Details for multiconstituent control window, page 2-202
Section 2-184
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

View multiconstituent bar code SID settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window. From this window you can view the current settings for multiconstituent bar code SIDs.

To view multiconstituent bar code SID settings: 1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen, and then select F5 Details. The Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window displays. 2. Select the desired bar code from the Bar codes list. 3. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.

Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-204 View Westgard rule(s) settings Perform this procedure to display the Details for Westgard window. From this window you can view the current settings for Westgard rules.

To view Westgard rule settings: 1. Select Westgard rules from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for Westgard window displays.
Section 2-185
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
3. Select the desired rule from the Rules list. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 5. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.

Details for Westgard window, page 2-206 Westgard rule application, page 5-309 View settings for a calibrator set (c System) Perform this procedure to display the Details for calibrator set window. From this window you can view the current settings for a calibrator set.

To view settings for a calibrator set: 1. Select Calibrator set from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired calibrator set from the Calibrator sets list, and then select F5 - Details. The Details for calibrator set window displays. 3. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen.

Details for calibrator set window (c System), page 2-208
Changing QC - Cal settings

Procedures for changing QC - Cal settings include:
Section 2-186
Add a lot to a single analyte control, page 2-187 Change single analyte control settings, page 2-188 Delete a single analyte control level, page 2-189
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level, page 2-190 Add an assay to a multiconstituent control, page 2-191 Change multiconstituent control settings, page 2-193 Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-194 Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-195 Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-195 Delete a multiconstituent control level, page 2-196 Change Westgard rule settings, page 2-197
Add a lot to a single analyte control Perform this procedure to add a lot to an existing single analyte control.

To add a lot to a single analyte control: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure single analyte window displays. 2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select New Lot. 3. Enter the lot number for the control in the Lot no. data entry box. 4. Enter the expiration date for the control in the Exp. date data entry box. (optional) 5. Enter values for the following level information in the appropriate data entry box: Level name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters and name is case sensitive) Manufacturer mean (optional) Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional) Expected mean
Section 2-187
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
6. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the dilution for the control level. 7. Enter the ID for the control level bar code in the Bar code SID data entry box. (optional) NOTE: The bar code SID must be unique for each control level within a lot. 8. Select the Display order list button, and then select a display order for the control level. 9. Select Add level to add the lot. The lot number displays in the Lot no. list. 10. Select the Level list button, select New Level to add another level, and then repeat steps 5 through 9. (optional) 11. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 through 10 for each. (optional) 12. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure single analyte window, page 2-198 Change single analyte control settings Perform this procedure to configure control information for each level of a new single analyte control set.

To change single analyte control settings: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure single analyte window displays. 2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select the desired lot.
Section 2-188
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 4. Enter values for the following level information in the appropriate data entry box: Level name (maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters and name is case sensitive) Manufacturer mean (optional) Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional) Expected mean Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
5. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the desired dilution. 6. Select the Display order list button, and then select the desired order. 7. Enter the ID for the control level bar code in the Bar code SID data entry box. (optional) 8. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat steps 4 - 7. (optional) 9. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 - 8 for each. (optional) 10. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure single analyte window, page 2-198 Delete a single analyte control level Perform this procedure to delete a single analyte control level.

To delete a single analyte control level:
Section 2-189
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
1. Release, archive, and delete all control results for the control level. See Release a control result, page 5-250 and then Archive stored control results, page 5-284. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure single analyte window displays. 3. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select the desired lot. 4. Select the Level list button, and then select the level to delete. 5. Select Delete level. 6. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then select Delete. (optional) 7. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 5 for each. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure single analyte window, page 2-198 Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level Perform this procedure to change the default dilution for a single analyte control level. To specify a dilution for a specific sample when ordering, see Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139.

To change the default dilution for a single analyte control level: 1. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure single analyte window displays. 2. Select the Lot no. list button, and then select the desired lot.
Section 2-190
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 4. Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the desired dilution. 5. Select the Level list button, and then another level. (optional) 6. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 2 through 5 for each. (optional) 7. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure single analyte window, page 2-198 Add an assay to a multiconstituent control Perform this procedure to add an assay(s) to the level(s) of a multiconstituent control.

To add an assay to a multiconstituent control: 1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired multiconstituent control from the Controls list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure multiconstituent control window displays. 3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired lot number. 4. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 5. Select Select assays. The Select assay window displays. a. b. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent control window.
Section 2-191
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
The selected assay(s) display in the table. 6. Select the assay(s) from the table, and then select Define data. The Define data window displays. NOTE: You must define the assay-specific data for each assay before you can add the level. a. Enter values for the following level information in the appropriate data entry box: b. c. Manufacturer mean (optional) Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional) Expected mean Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the desired dilution for the control level. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 6a and 6b for each. (optional) Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent control window. The assay-specific data displays in the table.
d.
7. Select Add level to add the assay to the level. 8. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat steps 5 through 7. (optional) 9. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-200 Select assay window, page 2-172 Define data window, page 2-201
Section 2-192
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change multiconstituent control settings Perform this procedure to change multiconstituent control settings when you determine that the quality control values for the ranges have changed.

To change multiconstituent control settings: 1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired multiconstituent control from the Controls list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure multiconstituent control window displays. 3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired lot number. 4. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 5. Select the desired assay(s) from the table, and then select Define data. The Define data window displays. a. Enter the desired values for the following level information in the appropriate data entry box: b. c. Manufacturer mean (optional) Manufacturer 1 SD (standard deviation) (optional) Expected mean Expected 1 SD (standard deviation)
Select the Default dilution list button, and then select the desired dilution for the control level. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 5a and 5b for each. (optional) Select Done to return to the Configure multiconstituent control window. The assay-specific data displays in the table.
d.
Section 2-193
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
6. Select Add level to add the data to the level. 7. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat steps 5 and 6. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-200 Define data window, page 2-201 Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID Perform this procedure to add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID.

To add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID: 1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen and then select F6 Configure. The Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window displays. 2. Select the desired bar code SID from the Bar codes list. NOTE: The bar code SID is unique for each control level within a lot. 3. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select Add. 4. Select another bar code SID from the Bar codes list, and then repeat step 3. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-203
Section 2-194
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings Perform this procedure to change multiconstituent bar code SID settings.

To change multiconstituent bar code SID settings: 1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen and then select F6 Configure. The Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window displays. 2. Select the desired bar code SID from the Bar codes list. NOTE: The bar code SID is unique for each control level within a lot. 3. Select the Control list button, and then select the desired control. 4. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot. 5. Select the Level list button, and then select the desired level. 6. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select Add. 7. Select another bar code SID from the Bar codes list, and then repeat steps 3 through 6. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-203 Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID Perform this procedure to delete a multiconstituent bar code SID.

Section 2-195
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
System administrator NA
To delete a multiconstituent bar code SID: 1. Select Multiconstituent bar code SID from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen and then select F6 Configure. The Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window displays. 2. Select the desired bar code SID from the Bar codes list. 3. Select Delete. 4. Select another bar code SID from the Bar codes list, and then repeat step 3. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-203 Delete a multiconstituent control level Perform this procedure to delete a level from a multiconstituent control set.

To delete a multiconstituent control level: 1. Select QC - Multiconstituent from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired multiconstituent control from the Controls list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure multiconstituent control window displays. 3. Select the Lot number list button, and then select the desired lot number. 4. Select the Level list button, and then select the level to delete. 5. Select Delete level.
Section 2-196
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

A confirmation message displays. 6. Select the Level list button, select another level, and then repeat step 5. (optional) 7. Select Done to save your changes. NOTE: If there is only one level of a multiconstituent control configured and you delete the level, the control name is also deleted. System configuration

Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-200 Change Westgard rule settings Perform this procedure to change Westgard rule settings, which are used to assess quality control results.

To change Westgard rule settings: 1. Select Westgard rules from the QC - Cal categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure Westgard window displays. 3. Select the desired rule from the Rules list. 4. Select the Status option to enable or disable the rule. NOTE: If you selected Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, or 4-1s xM, you must configure a run definition. See Configure a QC run definition, page 2-8. 5. Select the Flag type option for the rule. NOTE: Westgard rules configured as a warning do not produce a flag for patient results. Westgard rules configured as a failure produce a CNTL flag for patient results.
Section 2-197
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to configure another rule for the displayed assay. (optional) 7. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 through 6 for each. (optional) 8. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure Westgard window, page 2-205 Westgard rule application, page 5-309
Windows - Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view

Windows you can access from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view include: Configure single analyte window, page 2-198 Details for single analyte window, page 2-199 Configure multiconstituent control window, page 2-200 Define data window, page 2-201 Details for multiconstituent control window, page 2-202 Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-203 Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window, page 2-204 Configure Westgard window, page 2-205 Details for Westgard window, page 2-206 Configure calibrator set window (c System), page 2-207 Details for calibrator set window (c System), page 2-208
Configure single analyte window

From the Configure single analyte window the system administrator can configure single analyte control settings, which include: Control level name, lot number, expiration date, default dilution, bar code SID (sample identification), and display order Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation) Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
Section 2-198
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.85: Configure single analyte window System configuration
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix E-206.
Related procedures... Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176

Add a lot to a single analyte control, page 2-187 Change single analyte control settings, page 2-188 Delete a single analyte control level, page 2-189 Change the default dilution for a single analyte control level, page 2-190 Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level, page 2-178
Details for single analyte window

From the Details for single analyte window you can view the current settings for single analyte controls, which include: Control level name, lot number, expiration date, default dilution, bar code SID (sample identification), and display order Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation) Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
Section 2-199
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.86: Details for single analyte window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix E-206.
Related procedures... View single analyte control settings, page 2-183
Configure multiconstituent control window

From the Configure multiconstituent control window the system administrator can configure the settings for the control name, level name, lot number, and expiration date. Also, the system administrator can access windows to add or delete a level, define data for a level, and add or delete an assay from a level.
Section 2-200
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.87: Configure multiconstituent control window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions, page Appendix E-207.
Related procedures... Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179

Add an assay to a multiconstituent control, page 2-191 Change multiconstituent control settings, page 2-193 Delete a multiconstituent control level, page 2-196
Define data window

From the Define data window the system administrator can configure the following settings for multiconstituent controls: Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation) Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation) Default dilution
Section 2-201
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.88: Define data window
For descriptions of these fields, see Define data window field descriptions, page Appendix E-208.
Related procedures... Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179

Change multiconstituent control settings, page 2-193 Add an assay to a multiconstituent control, page 2-191
Details for multiconstituent control window

From the Details for multiconstituent control window you can view the current settings for multiconstituent controls, which include: Control level name, lot number, expiration date, default dilution, and display order Manufacturer mean and 1 SD (standard deviation) Expected mean and 1 SD (standard deviation)
Section 2-202
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.89: Details for multiconstituent control window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for multiconstituent control window field descriptions, page Appendix E-209.
Related procedures... View multiconstituent control settings, page 2-184
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window

From the Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window, the system administrator can assign the bar code SID (sample identification) for a configured multiconstituent control. Also, the system administrator can add or delete assays from a bar code SID and delete a bar code SID.
Section 2-203
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.90: Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-210.
Related procedures... Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-180

Add an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-194 Change multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-195 Delete a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-195
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window

From the Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window you can view the current settings for multiconstituent bar code SID (sample identification), which include control name, lot number, level name and assays.
Section 2-204
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.91: Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211.
Related procedures... View multiconstituent bar code SID settings, page 2-185
Configure Westgard window

From the Configure Westgard window, the system administrator can select the Westgard rules that are enabled for an assay and determine whether the failure of the rules is flagged as a Warning or a Failure.
Section 2-205
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Figure 2.92: Configure Westgard window
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211.
Related procedures... Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181

Change Westgard rule settings, page 2-197
Details for Westgard window

From the Details for Westgard window you can view the Westgard rule(s) that are enabled for an assay and whether the failure of the rule(s) is flagged as a Warning or a Failure.
Section 2-206
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 2.93: Details for Westgard window System configuration
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211.
Related procedures... View Westgard rule(s) settings, page 2-185
Configure calibrator set window (c System)

From the Configure calibrator set window the system administrator can configure the calibrator set name and number of levels. Figure 2.94: Configure calibrator set window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-212.
Related procedures... Configure a calibrator set (c System), page 2-182

Section 2-207
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Delete a calibrator set (photometric - c System), page 2-120
Details for calibrator set window (c System)

From the Details for calibrator set window you can view the current settings for the calibrator set name and number of levels. Figure 2.95: Details for calibrator set window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-212.
Related procedures... View settings for a calibrator set (c System), page 2-186
Section 2-208
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Software installation and backup

Your Abbott field service representative must install the software before you can use your system. You may need to install certain system software releases. Abbott Laboratories will notify you when you are to install a new software release. Before you install system software, read the information that accompanies the ARCHITECT System Software CD-ROM. Software installation and backup topics include: Utilities screen - Software install view, page 2-209 Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-211
Utilities screen - Software install view

From the Software install view of the Utilities screen the general operator can view the current system software version. The system administrator can install system software. Figure 2.96: Utilities screen - Software install view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions, page Appendix E-212.
Section 2-209
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities screen Software install view, page 2-210.
Related procedures... View the system software version, page 2-210
Access the Utilities screen - Software install view

Perform this procedure to display the Software install view of the Utilities screen.
To access the Utilities screen - Software install view: 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities. The Utilities screen - Backup software view displays. 2. Select the Software install option. The Utilities screen - Software install view displays.
Related information... Utilities screen - Software install view, page 2-209
Procedure - Utilities screen - Software install view

The procedure you can perform from the Utilities screen - Software install view and its related window is: View the system software version, page 2-210
View the system software version

Perform this procedure to view the version information for the current system software.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator / system administrator NA
To view the system software version: 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities.
Section 2-210
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Utilities screen - Backup software view displays. 2. Select the Software install option. The current software version displays.
Related information... Utilities screen - Software install view, page 2-209
Utilities screen - Backup software view

From the Backup view of the Utilities screen you can create a software backup, access a window to add a comment for the backup, and view backups that were previously created. If necessary, Abbott service and support personnel can restore your software from a backup. Figure 2.97: Utilities screen - Backup software view
For descriptions of these fields, see Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions, page Appendix E-213. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-212.
Related procedures... Create a system software backup, page 2-212
Section 2-211
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view

Perform this procedure to display the Backup software view of the Utilities screen.
To access the Utilities screen - Backup software view: Select System from the menu bar, and then select Utilities. The Utilities screen - Backup software view displays.
Related information... Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-211

Create backup window, page 2-213
Procedure - Utilities screen - Backup view

The procedure you can perform from the Utilities screen - Backup view and its related window is: Create a system software backup, page 2-212
Create a system software backup

Perform this procedure in accordance with your laboratory's data backup schedule and any time you perform module calibration procedures, edit configuration, add a new assay, or calibrate an assay. The software backup procedure allows you to transfer ARCHITECT System information, such as module calibrations, configuration, and the database, to an alternative location. Backing up system information protects against data loss. You can create and save a total of three software backups. Additional backups replace the existing backups starting with the oldest first.
Access the Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-212

Offline, Stopped, or Ready General operator NA
To create a system software backup:
Section 2-212
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Software installation and backup 1. Select F4 - Create backup from the Utilities screen. The Create backup window displays. 2. Enter a comment (up to 50 characters) in the Comment data entry box. (optional) 3. Select Done to create the backup. A progress indicator displays until the process completes.
Related information... Utilities screen - Backup software view, page 2-211

Create backup window, page 2-213
Windows - Utilities screen - Backup view

Windows you can access from the Utilities screen - Backup view include: Create backup window, page 2-213
Create backup window

From the Create backup window you can enter a comment for the software backup. Figure 2.98: Create backup window
For descriptions of these fields, see Create backup window field descriptions, page Appendix E-213.
Related procedures... Create a system software backup, page 2-212
Section 2-213
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay file management
Section 2

You need to install assay files when you install a new system and when new assays become available. Assay installation requires system administrator logon or higher. Before you install assay files, read the information that accompanies the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM. Assay installation procedures include: Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214 Import an assay file (c System), page 2-215 Export an assay file (c System), page 2-216
Install or delete an assay file

Perform this SCC (system control center) diagnostic procedure to install or delete an assay file(s). The ARCHITECT System can store 200 c System assay files. When deleting a c System photometric assay that is used as a reference assay, you must perform one of the following: Change the Use Cal Factor or Reference photometric assay parameter in the assay file to use a different assay Delete the assay
Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-651
Stopped, Warming, or Ready System Administrator ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM
To install or delete an assay file(s): 1. Select the Module 5 (SCC) option on the Diagnostics screen. 2. Select the page down scroll button, and then select the Utilities tab. The diagnostic procedures for the Utilities category display. 3. Select 6114 Install / Delete Assays from the DIAGNOSTICS PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 - Perform. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to perform the procedure. The Diagnostic perform window displays.
Section 2-214
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Follow the onscreen instructions to install or delete an assay(s) file. NOTE: When handling CD-ROMs, only hold them by their edges. Avoid getting fingerprints on the CD-ROM surface. If the CD-ROM comes in contact with moisture the ink can smear or run. 6. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen. 7. Remove the CD-ROM from the drive if you installed an assay file(s). (optional) NOTE: If you installed a new version of an existing assay file(s), see the information that accompanied the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM for specific calibration and QC requirements. You may need to calibrate the assay(s) and run all levels of controls before reporting patient results. See Create a calibration order, page 6-12, Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139 or Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143.
Related information... Diagnostics screen, page 10-650

Diagnostic perform window, page 10-655 SCC diagnostic categories, page 10-693
Import an assay file (c System)

Perform this procedure to copy an assay file to another ARCHITECT c System. The ARCHITECT System can store 200 c System assay files. IMPORTANT: When you copy an assay file from an ARCHITECT c 8000 System to an ARCHITECT c 16000 System (or visa versa), the sample probe wash protocol and/or wavelength assay parameters may change. A status message displays to indicate this change during the import process. For more information see Descriptions of import status messages, page Appendix E-159. For assay parameter information refer to the manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
Offline, Stopped, or Ready System administrator Floppy disk with exported assay files
Section 2-215
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 2
To import an assay file: 1. Select F3 - Import on the Configuration screen. You are prompted to insert a floppy disk into the floppy drive. 2. Insert a disk into the drive. The Import assay window displays a list of the files on the disk. 3. Select the desired assay(s), and then select the Import button. The selected assay files are copied to the system and the Import assay window displays the status of the imported files. NOTE: If there is a software version mismatch between the system you have exported the files from and the system you are importing the files to, an error message displays and the assays will not be copied. 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen. IMPORTANT: You MUST confirm all assay parameters are imported correctly. See Viewing assay settings, page 2-97. 5. Remove the floppy disk from the drive.
Import assay window, page 2-69
Export an assay file (c System)

Perform this procedure to save an assay file from one ARCHITECT c System onto a floppy disk so you copy it to another c System.
Offline, Stopped, or Ready General operator Floppy disk
To export an assay file: 1. Insert a floppy disk into the floppy drive. 2. Select F4 - Export on the Configuration screen. The Export assay window displays.
Section 2-216
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Select the desired assay(s), and then select the Export button. The selected assay files are copied to the floppy disk, and the Export assay window displays the status. 4. Select Done to return to the Configuration screen. 5. Remove the floppy disk from the drive. To copy the file to another system, see Import an assay file (c System), page 2-215.
Export assay window, page 2-70
Section 2-217
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance and diagnostic file management
Section 2

You need to install maintenance and diagnostic files when you install a new system and when new maintenance and diagnostics files become available. Maintenance and diagnostic file installation requires system administrator logon or higher. Before you install these files, read the information that accompanies the ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostics CD-ROM. To install or delete maintenance or diagnostic files, see Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file, page 2-218
Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file

Perform this procedure to install or delete a procedure file(s).

Stopped, Warming, or Ready System Administrator ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostic CD-ROM
To install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file: 1. Select the Module 5 (SCC) option on the Diagnostics screen. 2. Select the page down scroll button, and then select the Utilities tab. The diagnostic procedures for the Utilities category display. 3. Select 6115 Install / Delete Procedures from the DIAGNOSTICS PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 Perform. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to perform the procedure. The Diagnostic perform window displays. 5. Follow the onscreen instructions to install or delete a procedure file(s). NOTE: When handling CD-ROMs, only hold them by their edges. Avoid getting fingerprints on the CD-ROM surface. If the CD-ROM comes in contact with moisture the ink can smear or run.
Section 2-218
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

6. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen. 7. Remove the CD-ROM from the drive if you installed a procedure file(s). (optional)

Diagnostic perform window, page 10-655 SCC diagnostic categories, page 10-693
Section 2-219
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Principles of operation Section 3

Principles of operation <F=0>
Introduction
An ARCHITECT System uses photometric, potentiometric, and/or CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) technology to measure analyte concentrations in samples. Principles of operation topics include: c System principles of operation, page 3-2 Provides an overview of the technology, optical measurements, and protocols used for c System assay processing. i System principles of operation, page 3-24 Provides an overview of the technology, optical measurements, and protocols used for i System assay processing.
Section 3-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Principles of operation
c System principles of operation
Section 3

ARCHITECT c System principles of operation provides an overview of the photometric and potentiometric assay methods, assay processing, and the SmartWash feature used for analyte measurement. Information also includes an overview of sample interference indices for lipemic, hemolyzed, and icteric samples. c System principles of operation topics include: Photometric method, page 3-2 Potentiometric method, page 3-6 Assay processing (c System), page 3-13 SmartWash feature (c System), page 3-19 Sample interference indices (c System), page 3-20
Photometric method
Photometric method is the process used by the c System to measure sample absorbance for the quantitation of analyte concentration. Photometric method topics include: Photometric technology, page 3-2 Optical measurements (c System), page 3-4
Photometric technology
Photometric technology is the measurement of the amount of light a sample absorbs and involves passing a beam of light through a sample and measuring the intensity of light that reaches a detector. Beer's Law establishes the mathematical relationship between the absorbance of the solution and the concentration of the analyte. The absorbance of the solution changes as the reaction progresses and measurements are taken when either all reactant is depleted and the reaction is stable (end-point assays), or when the reactant reaches a stable rate (rate assays). Photometric technology topics include: End-point assay reactions, page 3-3 Rate assay reactions, page 3-3
Section 3-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Principles of operation Section 3 End-point assay reactions

End-point assay reactions are reactions that are allowed to react until all reactant is depleted and the absorbance is stable. When the reaction is complete, the system measures the absorbance readings used for calibration and calculating results. For end-point assays, the system calculates the concentration using the absorbance data obtained during the main read time specified on the Configure assay parameters window - General Reaction Definition view. The following illustration shows a typical end-point assay reaction curve. Figure 3.1: Example of an end-point assay reaction curve c System principles of operation
Related information... Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83
Rate assay reactions

Rate assay reactions are reactions that are allowed to reach a stable rate in which the change in absorbance between readings is constant. The system performs several readings during this time, calculates absorbance change per minute (rate), and then uses the rate to calculate results. For rate assays, the system uses the linear least squares method to calculate the change of absorbance per minute ( Abs/min) during the main read time specified on the Configure assay parameters window General Reaction Definition view. The calculation must include at
Section 3-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
least three photometric points to receive a result without a flag. The maximum number of photometric points is 33. The following illustration shows a typical rate assay reaction curve. Figure 3.2: Example of a down rate assay reaction curve
Related information... Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83
Optical measurements (c System)

Optical measurement is the process the c System uses to obtain absorbance readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte concentration units or qualitative interpretations. Optical measurement topics include: Optical system and measurement sequence (c System), page 3-4 Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System), page 3-6
Optical system and measurement sequence (c System)

The optics system on the processing module is a direct photometry system that directs and aligns the light from the source lamp, through the water bath and reaction cuvette, and then into the optics unit. The system focuses only light that originates from the source lamp and simultaneously measures the intensity of 16 different wavelengths.
Section 3-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 3.3: Optical system c System principles of operation
Legend: 1. Lamp 2. Heat glass 3. Convex lens 4. Water bath lens 5. Cuvette 6. Shutter 7. Convex lens 8. Mirror 9. Entrance slit 10. Diffraction grating 11. Linear photodiode array 12. Preamp board 13. DAQ (data acquisition board) 14. CPU (central processing unit) board
Measurement occurs as the optical system performs the following: 1. A convex lens focuses light from a tungsten halogen lamp and passes the light through the reaction cuvette to allow measurement of absorbance changes as the reaction progresses. 2. A second convex lens focuses the light onto the mirror, which reflects the light through the slit onto the diffraction grating. 3. The grating breaks up the focused light beam into 16 component wavelengths (340 to 804 mm) and reflects the light spectrum to the photodiode array. 4. A photodiode array measures the light intensity at the different wavelengths.
Section 3-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
5. The preamp board, DAQ board, and CPU board convert and amplify the signal from the photodiode array, and then communicate transmittance values to the SCC (system control center) where data reduction and result calculation occur.
Data reduction calculation (photometric - c System)

Data reduction calculation is the method used to calculate the final absorbance values and result concentration. The SCC (system control center) receives the transmittance readings from the processing module for each cuvette, determines the readings required to calculate the assay, and then converts these readings to absorbance values. The system uses readings from one (monochromatic) or two (bichromatic) wavelengths to calculate assay results. Most assays are bichromatic.
Number of wavelengths measured at How the absorbance values are each read point calculated 1 - Monochromatic 2 - Bichromatic Uses the reading from a single wavelength. Subtracts the readings taken at the secondary wavelength from the readings taken at the primary wavelength and uses the difference as the absorbance value.
NOTE: The system adjusts the absorbance data readings to 10 mm light path length values. The absorbance readings are blank corrected (as specified for each test), and then converted to concentration units.
Related information... Photometric data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2
Potentiometric method
Potentiometry is a detection technology used by the c System to measure electrical potential in a sample. The c System uses an ICT (integrated chip technology) module to measure potentiometric assays (electrolytes). Potentiometric method topics include: Integrated chip technology, page 3-7 ICT measurement, page 3-7
Section 3-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Principles of operation Section 3 Integrated chip technology

ICT (integrated chip technology) is the method the c System uses to simultaneously measure sodium, potassium, and chloride. ICT methodology uses solid state ion-selective electrodes contained in a single chip (ICT module), which reduces the maintenance required to perform electrolyte measurements.
Electrode Sodium (Na+) Description A Crown Ether ionophore incorporated into an ion-selective plastic membrane. (It is NOT a glass electrode, and therefore is less affected by pH changes.) Potassium (K+) Chloride (Cl-) Reference Valinomycin incorporated into an ion-selective plastic membrane. A solid silver chloride (AgCl) disk. A silver/silver chloride electrode in a potassium chloride (KCl) gel inner solution, separated from the sample by a porous ceramic tube.
ICT measurement
ICT measurement is the process the c System uses to obtain millivolt readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte conversion units. The measurements of ICT Reference Solution and ICT samples are used to calculate the assay results. ICT measurement topics include: ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing, page 3-7 Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11 Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System), page 3-12
ICT reference solution and sample delivery/processing

ICT Reference Solution and ICT samples are delivered to the ICT module where measurement takes place.
Section 3-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Figure 3.4: ICT Reference Solution delivery
During processing, the following events occur: 1. The ICT reference solution cup is filled with ICT Reference Solution. The syringe on the right side of the ICT reference solution pump moves ICT Reference Solution from the bottle, through the warming ring, and into the ICT reference solution cup. 2. The ICT Reference Solution is analyzed. a. b. The ICT unit moves down to position the ICT probe in the ICT reference solution cup. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump aspirates ICT Reference Solution from the cup into the ICT module.
Section 3-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c. c System principles of operation
The ICT module measures the ICT Reference Solution and the system converts the measurements into millivolt readings used for reference when calculating sample result concentrations. See Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11.
3. Waste is removed. High-concentration waste a. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the ICT Reference Solution from the ICT module to the high-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump aspirates the liquid waste from the high-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the liquid waste to the high-concentration waste tubing. The syringe on the left side of the ICT reference solution pump moves the remaining ICT Reference Solution from the ICT reference solution cup. The syringe on the left side of the ICT reference solution pump moves the solution into the low-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area. Gravity causes the liquid waste to drain from the low-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area into the low-concentration waste tubing.
b.
c.
Low-concentration waste a.
b.
c.
Section 3-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Figure 3.5: ICT sample delivery
During processing, the following events occur: 1. The sample and reagent are dispensed into the cuvette. a. b. c. d. The sample pipettor dispenses 15 L of sample into the cuvette. Reagent pipettor 1 dispenses 345 L of ICT sample diluent into the cuvette. Mixer 1 mixes the sample and diluent. The reaction carousel continues to rotate for a total of 31 movements until the cuvette aligns with the ICT unit.
2. The sample is analyzed. a. b. c. The ICT unit moves out and down to position the ICT probe in the cuvette. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump aspirates the sample from the cuvette into the ICT module. The ICT module measures the sample and the system converts the measurements into millivolt readings used when calculating sample result concentrations. See Measurement by the ICT module, page 3-11.
Section 3-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Waste is removed. a. The syringe on the right side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the sample from the ICT module to the high-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump aspirates the liquid waste from the high-concentration compartment in the water bath/waste overflow area. The syringe on the left side of the ICT aspiration pump moves the liquid waste to the high-concentration waste tubing. c System principles of operation
b.
c.
Measurement by the ICT module

The ICT module measures: ICT Reference Solution - (once before and after each serum sample and twice before and after each urine sample) to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results Samples - (patient, QC, and calibrators) to obtain the readings used to calculate results
The following measurements are captured: Potential difference between the sample and ICT Reference Solution for each electrode Potential of each electrode in contact with ICT Reference Solution Potential of each electrode in contact with the sample
In the figure below the internal components of the ICT module are shown on the right. The direction of the sample flow is indicated by the arrow.
Section 3-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Figure 3.6: ICT module and internal components
Legend: 1. O-ring 2. Liquid junction ceramic tube 3. Inner solution (KCl gel) 4. Ref electrode 5. Cl- electrode 6. K+ electrode 7. Na+ electrode
Data reduction calculation (potentiometric - c System)

Data reduction calculation is the method used to calculate the final result concentration. For each sample, the system compares the millivolt readings from the sample to the millivolt readings from the ICT Reference Solution analyzed immediately after the sample. The difference in the millivolt readings is used to calculate the assay results.
Related information... Potentiometric data reduction method, page Appendix C-8
Section 3-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay processing (c System)

Many kinds of assay processing activities take place between sample aspiration and the final read. Components located around the reaction carousel perform these activities. NOTE: The c 16000 assay processing components differ from the c 8000 in order to accommodate the A and B lines. For more information see Processing center (c 16000), page 1-50. Figure 3.7: c System assay processing components
Legend: 1. Sample pipettor 2. Sample probe wash cup 3. Reagent pipettor (1) and wash cup 4. Reagent pipettor (2) and wash cup 5. ICT unit 6. Cuvette washer 7. Mixers (2) 8. Mixer wash cups (2) 9. Lamp
Section 3-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
10. Cuvette segments (11)
The movement of the reaction carousel, the timing of these movements, and the position of the components allow each reaction activity to occur at a specified time and location. During processing, the reaction carousel rotates counter-clockwise approximately 1/4 turn every 4.5 seconds to position the cuvettes at each location. Each rotation includes 41 cuvette positions on the c 8000 processing module or 41 cuvette pair positions on the c 16000 processing module. As each rotation occurs the cuvettes pass the photometric position, where the lamp is located, and the absorbance is measured in each cuvette. The following illustration shows key positions on the reaction carousel where activities occur.
Section 3-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 3.8: Reaction carousel positions
The following information describes the movement and timing used in all assay protocol types.
Position(s) 1 Description The sample pipettor dispenses sample into the cuvette at the starting position. The c 16000 sample pipettor dispenses sample into one cuvette or two separate (paired) cuvettes. The reaction carousel rotates approximately 1/4 turn (41 cuvettes for the c 8000 processing module or 41 cuvette pairs for the c 16000 processing module). The cuvette containing sample is now at the first reagent dispense position. Reagent pipettor 1 dispenses reagent 1 in the cuvette. The reaction carousel rotates one cycle (1/4 turn) to this position at which no activity takes place. The reaction carousel rotates one cycle to the first mixing position where the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and reagent 1.
3 4
Section 3-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Position(s) Movement from 4 to 5
Description As the reaction carousel rotates from position 4 to position 5, the cuvette passes the photometric position where the lamp is located and the photometer measures the absorbance. A full rotation of the reaction carousel consists of 4 cycles. For the c 8000 processing module each cycle rotates 41 cuvette positions, therefore a full rotation includes 164 cuvettes (4 x 41 = 164). For the c 16000 processing module each cycle rotates 41 cuvette pair positions, therefore a full rotation includes 164 cuvette pairs (4 x 41 = 164 pairs). Since there are a total of 165 cuvettes or cuvette pairs, the cuvette is now one position behind the starting position.
6 - 135
The reaction carousel continues to rotate and the reaction mixture incubates. The photometer takes absorbance readings every time the cuvette passes the photometric position for a total of 33 read times. The cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette. The clean cuvette waits at this position for one cycle before it begins again at position 1 with a new reaction.
136 - 164
165
Some assay protocols may also use the following locations.

Position(s) 5 Description If onboard dilution is required, the sample pipettor aspirates the diluted sample and dispenses the sample into the new cuvette that is currently at position 1. For an ICT sample, the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample into the ICT unit. If the reaction requires a second reagent, reagent pipettor 2 dispenses reagent 2 into the cuvette. The mixer unit (mixer 2) mixes the second reagent with the sample and reagent mixture.
31 67 68
The following illustration shows the relationship between the timing of photometric reads and the dispense of samples and reagents.
Section 3-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 3.9: Photometric timing c System principles of operation
Related information... Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c System), page 3-17
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c System), page 3-18 Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c System), page 3-18 Assay processing for an ICT protocol, page 3-19
Assay processing for a one-reagent protocol (c System)

The following steps describe the c System operation and photometric reaction that occurs during one-reagent assay processing. In position 1 the sample pipettor (either from the sample handler or the sample carousel) aspirates sample, and then dispenses it into a cuvette. In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates reagent, and then dispenses it into the cuvette. In position 4 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and reagent. In positions 4 - 132 the reaction mixture incubates, and the photometer takes photometric reads every time the cuvette passes the photometric position where the lamp is located. The reaction completes.
Section 3-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
In positions 136 - 164 the cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette.
Assay processing for a two-reagent protocol (c System)

The following steps describe the c System operation and photometric reaction that occurs during two-reagent assay processing. In position 1 the sample pipettor (either from the sample handler or the sample carousel) aspirates sample, and then dispenses it into a cuvette. In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates reagent, and then dispenses the first reagent into the cuvette. In position 4 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and reagent. In positions 4 - 66 the reaction mixture incubates, and the photometer takes photometric reads every time the cuvette passes the photometric position where the lamp is located. In position 67 reagent pipettor 2 aspirates reagent, and then dispenses the second reagent into the cuvette. In position 68 mixer unit (mixer 2) mixes the second reagent with the sample and reagent mixture. In positions 68 - 132 the reaction mixture incubates, and the photometer takes photometric reads every time the cuvette passes the photometer. The reaction completes. In positions 136 - 164 the cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste and cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette.
Assay processing for a dilution protocol (c System)

The following steps describe the c System operation that occurs when the sample is diluted prior to sample processing.
Section 3-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

In position 1 the sample pipettor (either from the sample handler or the sample carousel) aspirates sample, and then dispenses it into a cuvette. In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates sample diluent, and then dispenses it into the cuvette. In position 4 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and diluent. In position 5 the sample pipettor aspirates diluted sample, and then dispenses it into a new cuvette. The sample then follows the one-reagent or two-reagent assay protocol, as appropriate.
Assay processing for an ICT protocol

The following steps describe the c System operation and potentiometric reaction for ICT (integrated chip technology) assays. In position 1 the sample pipettor (either from the sample handler or the sample carousel) aspirates sample, and then dispenses it into a cuvette. In position 2 reagent pipettor 1 aspirates ICT sample diluent, and then dispenses it into the cuvette. In position 4 the mixer unit (mixer 1) mixes the sample and ICT sample diluent. In position 31 the ICT probe aspirates the diluted sample, and then the ICT module analyzes the sample. NOTE: The ICT module analyzes the ICT Reference Solution once before and after each serum sample and twice before and after each urine sample to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results. In positions 136 - 164 the cuvette washer removes the reaction mixture to waste, cleans the cuvette with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and DI water. Then the cuvette washer dispenses DI water into the cuvette for a water blank measurement to ensure cuvette integrity. Finally, the cuvette washer aspirates the water and dries the cuvette.
SmartWash feature (c System)

SmartWash is a feature of the c System that provides an additional wash process, when needed, for reagent probes, sample probes, and cuvettes. It is used to prevent assay-to-assay interference when specific combinations of assays are tested.
Section 3-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
If a known combination of assays results in assay-to-assay interference, you can avoid interference by configuring the combination as a SmartWash pair. This configuration executes an additional wash process between measurement of the assays. NOTE: Abbott reagents are configured with default SmartWash pair settings. To prevent consecutive measurement of assays configured as SmartWash pairs the c System processing module uses the OSS (optimum sampling sequence) feature, which automatically changes the sampling sequence.
OSS feature (c System)

The OSS (optimum sampling sequence) feature is an automatic process that maximizes processing speed and throughput by allowing the system to rearrange sampling sequence. This rearrangement prevents consecutive measurement of interfering reagents, and therefore reduces the number of required washes and unused cuvettes. If it is not possible to rearrange the sampling sequence, the system automatically activates SmartWash. In the following example assays A, B, and C are ordered and SmartWash is configured between A and B. The elimination of the wash cycle shows how throughput is improved when the OSS feature is used.
OSS feature not used Cycle 1 2 3 4 System operations Sampling for assay A Sampling for assay B Sampling for assay C OSS feature used Cycle 1 3 System operations Sampling for assay B Sampling for assay A Sampling for assay C
Wash (empty cuvettes) 2
Sample interference indices (c System)

The sample interference indices are sample measurements that allow estimation of lipids, hemoglobin, and bilirubin present in lipemic, hemolyzed, and icteric samples, respectively. The estimation is based on absorbance measurement of:
Section 3-20
Turbidity for lipids (lipemia) Red color for hemoglobin (hemolysis) Yellow color for bilirubin (icterus)
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c System interference indices topics include: Sample interference indices protocols (c System), page 3-21 Sample interference indices measurement (c System), page 3-22
Sample interference indices protocols (c System)

The sample interference indices protocols are two different methods that you can use to measure the lipemia, hemolysis, and icterus for a sample. Both methods require selection of a reference photometric assay that the system uses to estimate indices on a sample. You can select an existing assay for the reference photometric assay (common test file) or create a new assay that is only used for sample interference indices measurement (extra test file). The type of assay file you select determines whether an additional cuvette is used to measure the indices. The common test file is a protocol that uses an existing assay file such as AST or ALT as the reference photometric assay. The system simultaneously measures indices in the same cuvette as the selected assay and therefore does not impact system throughput. When determining whether to use the common test file option, consider: Your choice of reference assays is limited to assays that are measured at different wavelengths than the indices and use a colorless reagent. Extra reagent is used if you do not routinely order the reference assay on most samples because reagent is dispensed for sample interference indices even though you do not order the reference assay.
The extra test file is a protocol that uses an assay file for the reference photometric assay that is defined to use saline as the reagent. The system measures the indices using saline and therefore does not impact reagent use. This method uses an earlier read window than the common test file method therefore providing a faster turnaround time for reporting results. When determining whether to use the extra test file, consider that throughput is lowered because an additional cuvette is required.
Related information... Sample interference indices measurement (c System), page 3-22
Section 3-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Sample interference indices measurement (c System)

Sample interference indices measurement is the process a c System uses to measure hemolysis, icterus, and lipemia in a sample once it has been mixed with the reagent or saline. Specimens containing interfering substances such as hemolysis, icterus, and lipemia absorb at different wavelengths as shown in the following graph. Figure 3.10: Absorption spectra of NADH and hemolyzed, icteric, and lipemic samples
NOTE: NADH is the reference absorbance peak. To measure the three interfering substances, the system measures absorbance values of four wavelength pairs and, using the appropriate photometric reads, applies a mathematical calculation to determine the relative interferent concentration as shown: Lipemia = M (a01 x A1 + a02 x A2 + a03 x A3 + a04 x A4) Hemolysis = M (a05 x A1 + a06 x A2 + a07 x A3 + a08 x A4) Icterus = M (a09 x A1 + a10 x A2 + a11 x A3 + a12 x A4)
Section 3-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Where:
M = M is the correction for the sample dilution. (reagent volume + sample volume) / (sample volume). Constants specific to each interferrant are used by the system to calculate the sample interference indices. Constants are not user definable.
a01, a02, a03, and a04 (lipemic) a05, a06, a07, and a08 (hemolysis) a09, a10, a11, and a12 (icterus)
Absorbance level measured at = wavelength pairs A1 (500 nm/524 nm) A2 (572 nm/604 nm) A3 (628 nm/660 nm) A4 (524 nm/804 nm)
(absorbance primary wavelength absorbance secondary wavelength.)
Related information... Sample interference indices protocols (c System), page 3-21
Section 3-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
i System principles of operation
Section 3

ARCHITECT i System principles of operation provides an overview of the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) technology, assay processing, and optical system used for analyte measurement. i System principles of operation topics include: CMIA method, page 3-24 Assay processing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-29
CMIA method
CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) is a detection method used by an i System to measure and quantify analyte concentration. CMIA method topics include: CMIA technology and reaction sequence, page 3-24 Optical measurements (i System), page 3-27
CMIA technology and reaction sequence

CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) is a technology used to determine the presence of antigens, antibodies, and analytes in samples. The reactants necessary for CMIA technology include: Paramagnetic microparticles coated with a capture molecule (antigen, antibody, or viral particle) specific for the analyte being measured Acridinium-labeled conjugate Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution
The following graphic symbols are used to represent these reactants.
Section 3-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 3.11: Graphical symbols i System principles of operation
Legend: 1. Anti-analyte microparticle with capture molecule 2. Sample analyte measured 3. Acridinium-labeled conjugate 4. Sample analyte not measured
A CMIA reaction sequence is the order of interactions between the analyte present in the sample and the reactants. A sequence is specific to the assay protocol. The following two-step reaction sequence illustrates the basic principles of a reaction. 1. The R1 pipettor dispenses microparticles (paramagnetic microparticles coated with capture molecules) into the sample in the reaction vessel. The vortexer mixes the reaction mixture. Figure 3.12: Sample and microparticle binding
2. The reaction mixture incubates and the analyte present in the sample binds to the corresponding capture molecules on the microparticles forming the immune complex. 3. A magnet attracts the paramagnetic microparticles (bound to the specific analyte) to a wall of the reaction vessel. The wash zone 1 manifold washes the reaction mixture to remove unbound materials. Further processing can now take place.
Section 3-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Figure 3.13: Magnet attracting paramagnetic microparticles
4. The R2 pipettor dispenses a chemiluminescent acridinium-labeled conjugate. The conjugate binds to the immune complex to complete the reaction mixture. Figure 3.14: Addition of the acridinium-labeled conjugate
5. The reaction mixture incubates. 6. The wash zone 2 manifold washes the reaction mixture to remove unbound materials. 7. The pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution (hydrogen peroxide) and the CMIA optical system takes a background read. Pre-trigger performs the following functions: Creates an acidic environment to prevent early release of energy (light emission). Helps to keep microparticles from clumping. Splits acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This action prepares the acridinium dye for the next step.
Section 3-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

8. The trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution (sodium hydroxide) to the reaction mixture. The acridinium undergoes an oxidative reaction when exposed to peroxide and an alkaline solution. This reaction causes the chemiluminescent reaction to occur. N-methylacridone forms and releases energy (light emission) as it returns to its ground state. 9. The CMIA optical system measures the chemiluminescent emission (activated read) over a predefined time period to quantitate the analyte concentration or to determine qualitative interpretations for index (cutoff) assays.
Related information... Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-31
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-33 STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR), page 3-38 STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR), page 3-41
Optical measurements (i System)

Optical measurement is the process an i System uses to obtain RLU (relative light unit) readings, and then convert them to assay-specific analyte concentration units or qualitative interpretations for index (cutoff) assays. Optical measurement topics include: Optical system and measurement sequence (i System), page 3-27 Data reduction calculation (i System), page 3-29
Optical system and measurement sequence (i System)

The optical system on the processing module is a system that directs the chemiluminescent emission from the reaction vessel to the CMIA (chemiluminescent micropartical immunoassay) reader.
Section 3-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Figure 3.15: Optical system
Legend: 1. Photomultiplier tube (PMT) 2. CMIA reader 3. Light pipe 4. Trigger Solution delivery nozzle 5. Reaction vessel 6. Magnet 7. CMIA shutter assembly
Measurement occurs as the optical system performs the following: 1. Closes the shutter around the reaction vessel to seal off ambient light 2. Turns on the high voltage to the PMT (photomultiplier tube), takes a background read (Pre-Trigger Solution has already been dispensed), and transfers the data to the CPU (central processing unit) 3. Dispenses Trigger Solution into the reaction vessel NOTE: This solution initiates the chemiluminescent reaction that results in the emission of photons of light. 4. Uses the light pipe to collect the emitted light and directs it to the PMT, which is in the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reader 5. Takes the activated read by collecting the emitted photons of light
Section 3-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

6. Transfers the count data to the CPU NOTE: The chemiluminescent light produced during this reaction is directly or indirectly proportional to the amount of analyte present in the sample, depending on the type of assay. 7. Sums the signal over a defined time period to yield the RLU (relative light unit) 8. Turns off the high voltage PMT 9. Opens the shutter
Data reduction calculation (i System)

Data reduction calculation is the method used to calculate the final read in RLUs (relative light units). The calculation is: Final Read (RLU) = Activated Read - Background In performing the data reduction calculation the system: 1. Sums the signal measured by the CMIA optical system 2. Verifies that: Background counts fall within an acceptable range Activated read profile falls within an acceptable set of ranges
3. Subtracts the background counts from the activated read counts to calculate the final read and converted it to concentration units
Related information... i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-13
Assay processing (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Many kinds of assay processing activities take place between sample aspiration and the final read. The movement of the process path, the timing of these movements, and the position of the components allow each reaction activity to occur at a specified time and location. The following illustration shows the components surrounding the process path that are used for assay measurements.
Section 3-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
Figure 3.16: i System assay processing components
Legend: 1. Reagent pipettor 1 (R1) 2. Reagent wash stations (2) (R1W, R2W) 3. Sample pipettor (S) 4. Sample wash station (SW) 5. Sample carrier 6. STAT pipettor (ST) 7. STAT wash station (STW) 8. RV loader and hopper assembly (RVL) 9. Reagent pipettor 2 (R2) 10. Wash zone manifolds (2) (WZ1, WZ2) 11. Pre-Trigger/Trigger manifold (PT/T) 12. CMIA reader (CMIA) 13. Reagent syringes (2) (R1S, R2S) 14. Sample syringe (SS) 15. STAT syringe (STS) 16. Vortexers (4) (VTX1, VTX2, VTX3, VTXST) 17. Reagent pipetting locations
Section 3-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

i System technology, known as Chemiflex technology, provides you with a variety of protocols or assay processing methods. Depending on the type of protocol, assay processing steps occur at different positions on the process path.
Related information... Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-31
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-33 Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-36 STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR), page 3-38 STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR), page 3-41
Assay processing for One step 25 (i 2000/i 2000SR)

A One step 25 assay protocol is a method of assay processing in which the sample and all required reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. Total processing time for a One step 25 assay is 29 minutes including a 25 minute incubation time. See Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-36, for additional processing required by pretreatment assays. The following steps describe i System operation and CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction that occurs during One step 25 assay processing. Figure 3.17: Process path, positions 1 - 3
Section 3-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the microparticles and acridinium-labeled conjugate. NOTE: For a delayed one-step assay the R2 pipettor adds the acridinium-labeled conjugate at position 71 and the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture at position 72. 3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample, microparticles, and conjugate. 4. At positions 4 - 86 the reaction mixture incubates for 25 minutes. Figure 3.18: Process path, positions 87 - 90
5. At positions 87 - 90 the wash zone 2 manifold washes the reaction mixture in the RV, and then removes unbound materials.
Section 3-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 3.19: Process path, positions 94 - 98
6. At position 94 the pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then mixes using the vortexer. 7. At position 98 the CMIA optical system takes a background read, the trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical system takes an activated read. 8. At position 100 the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV. 9. At position 109 the RV unloader removes the RV, and then disposes of it in the solid waste container.
Assay processing for Two step 18-4 (i 2000/i 2000SR)

A Two step 18-4 assay protocol is a method of sample processing in which the sample and some reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. The conjugate reagent is added after the microparticles are washed. Total processing time for a Two step 18-4 assay is 29 minutes including a 22 minute incubation time. For additional processing steps required by pretreatment assays, see Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-36. The following steps describe the i System operation and CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction that occurs during Two step 18-4 assay processing.
Section 3-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the microparticles. 3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and microparticles. 4. At positions 4 - 63 the reaction mixture incubates for 18 minutes. Figure 3.21: Process path, positions 64 - 67
Section 3-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 3.22: Process path, positions 71 and 72
6. At position 71 the R2 pipettor dispenses acridinium-labeled conjugate. 7. At position 72 the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture. 8. At positions 73 - 86 the reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes. Figure 3.23: Process path, positions 87 - 90
Section 3-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
10. At position 94 the pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then mixes using the vortexer. 11. At position 98 the CMIA optical system takes a background read, the trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical system takes an activated read. 12. At position 100 the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV. 13. At position 109 the RV unloader removes the RV, and then disposes of it in the solid waste container.
Pretreatment (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Pretreatment is the performance of additional steps prior to performing one-step or two-step assay protocols. An i System automatically performs these steps if pretreatment is required. Depending on the type of pretreatment processing, incubation times and number of pretreatment reagents vary. For information on processing activities for specific pretreatment types, see Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-37 Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-37 Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 3-38
Section 3-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing for Pretreatment 7 (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Performance of Pretreatment 7 requires an additional 7 minutes. During pretreatment, the system completes the following steps. 1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses sample in the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the pretreatment reagents to the sample in the RV. 3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and pretreatment reagents. 4. At positions 4 - 24 the reaction mixture incubates for 7 minutes. 5. At position 24 the sample pipettor transfers the pretreated sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1. The one-step or two-step assay processing protocol proceeds. NOTE: For more information on assay-specific pretreatment processing protocols, see the i System assay-package insert.
Processing for Pretreatment 7-7 (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Performance of Pretreatment 7-7 requires an additional 14 minutes. During pretreatment, the system completes the following steps. 1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses sample in the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the first pretreatment reagents to the sample in the RV. 3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and pretreatment reagents. 4. At positions 4 - 24 the reaction mixture incubates for 7 minutes. 5. At position 24 the sample pipettor transfers the pretreated sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1. 6. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the second pretreatment reagents to the sample in the RV. 7. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and pretreatment reagents. 8. At positions 4 - 24 the reaction mixture incubates for 7 minutes.
Section 3-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
9. At position 24 the sample pipettor transfers the pretreated sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1. The one-step or two-step assay processing protocol proceeds. NOTE: For more information on assay-specific pretreatment processing protocols, see the i System assay-package insert.
Processing for Pretreatment 14 (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Performance of Pretreatment 14 requires an additional 14 minutes. During pretreatment, the system completes the following steps. 1. At position 1 the sample pipettor dispenses sample in the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 2 the R1 pipettor dispenses the pretreatment reagents to the sample in the RV. 3. At position 3 the vortexer mixes the sample and pretreatment reagents. 4. At positions 4 - 24 the reaction mixture incubates for 7 minutes. 5. At position 24 the sample pipettor transfers the pretreated sample to a new reaction vessel in position 1, and then the system re-incubates the mixture for an additional 7 minutes. The one-step or two-step assay processing protocol proceeds. NOTE: For more information on assay-specific pretreatment processing protocols, see the i System assay-package insert.
STAT assay processing for One step 11 (i 2000SR)

A One step 11 assay protocol, like a One step 25 assay protocol, is a method of sample processing in which the sample and all required reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. A One step 11 assay, however, has a shorter incubation time. Total processing time for a One step 11 assay is 18 minutes including an 11 minute incubation time. The following steps describe the ARCHITECT i 2000SR System operation and CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction that occurs during One step 11 assay processing.
Section 3-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. At position 47 the STAT pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 48 the R2 pipettor dispenses the microparticles and acridinium-labeled conjugate. 3. At position 49 the vortexer mixes the sample, microparticles, and conjugate. 4. At positions 50 - 86 the reaction mixture incubates for 11 minutes.
Section 3-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
5. At positions 87 - 90 the wash zone 2 manifold washes the reaction mixture in the RV, and then removes unbound materials. Figure 3.27: Process path, positions 94 - 98
6. At position 94 the pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then mixes using the vortexer. 7. At position 98 the CMIA optical system takes a background read, the trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical system takes an activated read.
Section 3-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

8. At position 100 the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV. 9. At position 109 the RV unloader removes the RV, and then disposes of it in the solid waste container.
STAT assay processing for Two step 4-4 (i 2000SR)

A Two step 4-4 assay protocol, like a Two step 18-4 assay protocol, is a method of sample processing in which the sample and some reagents are added prior to washing the microparticles. The conjugate reagent is added after the microparticles are washed. A Two step 4-4 assay, however, has a shorter incubation time. Total processing time for a Two step 4-4 assay is 18 minutes including an 8 minute incubation time. The following steps describe the i 2000SR System operation and CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction that occurs during Two step 4-4 assay processing. Figure 3.28: Process path, positions 47 - 49
1. At position 47 the STAT pipettor dispenses the sample into the RV (reaction vessel). 2. At position 48 the R2 pipettor dispenses the microparticles. 3. At position 49 the vortexer mixes the sample and microparticles. 4. At positions 50 - 63 the reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes.
Section 3-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
6. At position 71 the R2 pipettor dispenses acridinium-labeled conjugate. 7. At position 72 the vortexer mixes the reaction mixture. 8. At positions 73 - 86 the reaction mixture incubates for 4 minutes.
Section 3-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

10. At position 94 the pre-trigger nozzle dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then mixes using the vortexer. 11. At position 98 the CMIA optical system takes a background read, the trigger nozzle dispenses Trigger Solution to the reaction mixture, and then the CMIA optical system takes an activated read.
Section 3-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 3
12. At position 100 the liquid waste arm aspirates the liquid waste from the RV. 13. At position 109 the RV unloader removes the RV, and then disposes of it in the solid waste container.
Section 3-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Performance characteristics and specifications Section 4

Performance characteristics and specifications <F=0>
Introduction
Before attempting to operate your system, you may want to familiarize yourself with its performance characteristics, throughput capabilities and capacities, specifications, and requirements for samples, temperature, waste, and clearance. You may also want to familiarize yourself with the specifications and requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory, if your laboratory has chosen to use this accessory. Performance characteristics and specifications topics include: Performance characteristics, page 4-2 Describes the operational mode, detection technique, and pipetting capabilities of the ARCHITECT System. Specifications and requirements, page 4-3 Describes the specifications and system capacities for the ARCHITECT System. ARM specifications and requirements, page 4-37 Describes the specifications and requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM accessory. NOTE: For assay information, see your reagent manufacturer's documentation, such as the package insert or reagent application sheet.
Section 4-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Performance characteristics and specifications

Performance characteristics
Section 4
Performance characteristics
Performance characteristics include the operational mode, detection technology, and pipetting capabilities of the system. Performance characteristics topics include: c System performance characteristics, page 4-2 i System performance characteristics, page 4-2
c System performance characteristics

Performance characteristics representative of the c System are presented in the following table. Table 4.1: c System performance characteristics
Operational mode Detection technology: Photometric Potentiometric Pipetting capability End-point and rate ICT (integrated chip technology) ion-selective electrodes Robotic precision with clot detection Random and continuous access, priority loading
i System performance characteristics

Performance characteristics representative of an i System are presented in the following table. Table 4.2: i System performance characteristics
Operational mode Detection technology Emission measurement Random and continuous access, priority loading CMIA (Chemiluminescent Microparticle Immunoassay) The CMIA optical assembly measures the chemiluminescent emission from the reaction vessel and outputs data corresponding to the quantity of emission detected. Robotic precision with clot detection
Pipetting capability
Section 4-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Specifications and requirements

The system specifications and requirements presented are related to the proper installation and operation of the ARCHITECT System. Specifications and requirements topics include: General specifications, page 4-3 System capacities, page 4-6 Physical specifications, page 4-9 Weight and force specifications, page 4-10 System clearances, page 4-15 Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19 Electrical safety parameters, page 4-22 Optical specifications (c System), page 4-22 Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23 External waste pump specifications and requirements, page 4-24 Environmental specifications and requirements, page 4-26 Computer and interface specifications, page 4-26 Printer specifications and requirements, page 4-27 Bar code label requirements, page 4-28
General specifications
General specifications include information about throughput for each processing module, sample types that can be used on the ARCHITECT System, the primary components of the system, and the operator interface components. General specifications topics include: ARCHITECT System specifications, page 4-4 c System processing module specifications, page 4-5 i System processing module specifications, page 4-5
Section 4-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
ARCHITECT System specifications

General specifications for the ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table. Table 4.3: System specifications
Primary components Operator interface System control center, sample handler, and processing module System control center touch-screen monitor, keyboard, and pointing device; processing module keypad; sample handler keypad; optional bar code scanner Up to 800 tests per hour Up to 600 tests per hour Up to 1200 tests per hour 4 - 10 minutes Approximately 30 minutes Up to 1600 tests per hour Up to 600 tests per hour Up to 1800 tests per hour 4 - 10 minutes Approximately 30 minutes Up to 200 tests per hour 29 minutes (non-pretreatment) 36 to 43 minutes (pretreatment) Throughput i 2000SR stand alone: General Time to first result Up to 200 tests per hour 29 minutes (non-pretreatment) 36 to 43 minutes (pretreatment) 18 minutes (STAT protocol) Sample types Serum, plasma, or other body fluids. For more information, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
Throughput c 8000 stand alone: Photometric assays only ICT (integrated chip technology) assays only Photometric and ICT assay mix Individual assay time Warm-up time from cold start Throughput c 16000 stand alone: Photometric assays only ICT (integrated chip technology) assays only Photometric and ICT assay mix Individual assay time Warm-up time from cold start Throughput i 2000 stand alone: General Time to first result
Section 4-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.3: System specifications (continued)

Sample volume required See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Less than 0.1 ppm Levey-Jennings and Westgard rules Hard drive Optional UPS (uninterruptible power supply)
Sample probe carryover performance Quality control Onboard data storage Stored data protection
c System processing module specifications

General specifications for the c System are presented in the following table. Table 4.4: c System processing module specifications
Bar code readers (4) Dispensing volume: Sample (Photometric): Sample (ICT): Reagent Temperature: Onboard reagent refrigerator Reaction mixture Sample carousel 2C to 10C 36.7C to 37.3C Minimum of 10C below room temperature 2.0 - 35.0 L per test in 0.1 L increments 15 L per sample 20 - 345 L per test in 1 L increments Reagent supply centers (2), sample carousel, and RSH
i System processing module specifications

General specifications for an i System are presented in the following table. Table 4.5: i System processing module specifications
Bar code readers: i 2000 system with SSH (standard sample handler) (3) i 2000 with LAS (Laboratory Automation System) carousel sample handler (2) i 2000SR with RSH (robotic sample handler) (2) Reagent carousel, sample load queue, and sample processing queue Reagent carousel and sample processing queue Reagent carousel and RSH
Section 4-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.5: i System processing module specifications (continued)

Dispensing volume: Sample Reagent (i 2000/i 2000SR) Pre-Trigger Solution Trigger Solution Temperature: Onboard reagent refrigerator Reaction mixture Average liquid waste output: i 2000/i 2000SR 5.5 L per hour 2C to 12C 36.4C to 37.6C 2 - 200 L in 1 L increments 5 - 90 L in 1 L increments 100 L per test 300 L per test
System capacities
System capacities include storage information for the SCC (system control center), processing modules, and sample handlers. System capacities topics include: SCC onboard data storage capacities, page 4-6 c System processing module capacities, page 4-7 i System processing module capacities, page 4-8 Sample handler capacities, page 4-8
SCC onboard data storage capacities

Capacities for the SCC (system control center) are presented in the following table. Table 4.6: Onboard data storage capacities
Reagent kits Message history log Temporary messages Printer spool QC results Released results: SCC with Pentium IV SCC with Pentium II or III Unreleased results: Patient 8,000 test orders, tests in process, and/or exceptions 50,000 results 25,000 results 3,000 kits 12,000 messages 200 messages 10 print requests 35,000 results
Section 4-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.6: Onboard data storage capacities (continued)

QC Calibrator Calibration curves (Inactive) Assay files 2,000 test orders, tests in process, and/or exceptions 1,000 test orders, tests in process, and/or exceptions Up to 3 months 200 c System assay files
c System processing module capacities

Capacities for the c System processing module are presented in the following table. Table 4.7: c System processing module capacities
Bulk solutions: ICT Reference Solution Alkaline Wash Acid Wash 2L 500 mL 500 mL 56 - 65 positions 36 - 56 positions 56 - 65 positions 56 - 65 positions 165 cuvettes 165 cuvette pairs 160 L 360 L
c 8000 Reagent supply centers:

R1 R2
c 16000 Reagent supply centers:

R1 R2 Reaction carousel c 8000 c 16000 Reaction cuvettes: Minimum volume Maximum volume for photometric reaction Sample carousel: Positions used for patient, calibrators, and control samples Positions used for wash solutions High-concentration waste bottle: Volume Weight 10 L 22 lbs. (10 kg) Carousel positions 1 - 30 Carousel positions 31 - 32
Section 4-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
i System processing module capacities

Capacities for an i System processing modules are presented in the following table. Table 4.8: i System processing module capacities
Bulk solutions: Pre-Trigger Solution Trigger Solution Wash buffer reservoir volume (i 2000/i 2000SR) Wash buffer reservoir weight (i 2000/i 2000SR) Reagent carousel 975 mL 975 mL 25 L 55 lbs. (25 kg) 25* reagent positions available for loading 100 or 500** test kits
*
Does not include use of reagent kits with > three reagent bottles
**
i 2000/i 2000SR only
Process path:
i 2000/i 2000SR
RVs (reaction vessels): Total volume Maximum reaction mixture volume RV hopper: i 2000/i 2000SR Solid waste:
112 positions (in both inside and outside track) 1000 L 400 L 1200 RVs
Container capacity (i 2000/i 2000SR) 5 hours of operation at 200 RVs (reaction vessels) per hour (for a total of 1,000 RVs) Waste chute capacity(i 2000/i 2000SR only) Biohazard bag size: i 2000/i 2000SR 25" X 35" (63.5 cm X 88.9 cm) 15 minutes of run time when the waste container is removed during processing (holds 50 RVs)
Sample handler capacities

Capacities for the sample handlers are presented in the following table. Table 4.9: Sample handler capacities
Sample carriers SSH (standard sample handler) 5 positions per carrier 25 sample carriers per lane
Section 4-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.9: Sample handler capacities (continued)

LAS (Laboratory Automation System) carousel Carrier trays RSH (robotic sample handler) priority bay RSH routine bay 20 positions per carousel 5 sample carriers or 25 positions 7 sample carriers or 35 positions 1 carrier tray per bay 6 bays on a c System stand alone 4 bays on an i System stand alone 12 bays on an integrated system
Physical specifications
Physical specifications for the ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table. Measurements for the processing modules and sample handlers do not include the SCC (system control center) or any optional accessories. Table 4.10: Physical specifications
Module SCC Depth 21" (53.3 cm) 49" (124.5 cm) Width 15.5" (39.4 cm) 79" (200.6 cm) Height 22" (55.9 cm) 48" (121.9 cm) Weight 55 lbs. (25 kg) 1425 lbs. (646.4 kg)
c 8000 processing module and sample handler c 16000 processing module and sample handler i 2000SR processing module and sample handler ci 8200 processing module and sample handler
49" (124.5 cm)
79" (200.6 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
1545 lbs. (701 kg)
49" (124.5 cm)
61" (154.9 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
1081 lbs. (490.3 kg)
49" (124.5 cm)
127" (322.6 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
2447 lbs. (1109.9 kg)
Section 4-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.10: Physical specifications (continued)

Module Depth 49" (124.5 cm) Width 127" (322.6 cm) Height 48" (121.9 cm) Weight 2679 lbs. (1215 kg)
ci 16200 processing module and sample handler i 2000 processing module and sample handler i 2000 processing modules (2) and sample handler i 2000 processing modules (3) and sample handler i 2000 processing modules (4) and sample handler i 2000 processing module and LAS carousel sample handler
44" (111.8 cm)
68" (172.7 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
1100 lbs. (499 kg)
44" (111.8 cm)
132" (335.3 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
2200 lbs. (998 kg)
44" (111.8 cm)
176" (447.0 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
3130 lbs. (1420 kg)
44" (111.8 cm)
221" (561.3 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
4060 lbs. (1842 kg)
48" (121.9 cm)
53" (134.6 cm)
48" (121.9 cm)
1100 lbs. (499 kg)
Weight and force specifications

Weight and force specifications are presented in the following tables. NOTE: Specifications also apply to processing modules with LAS sample handlers.
Section 4-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 4.1: ci 8200 and ci 16200 footprint
Table 4.11: ARCHITECT ci 8200 weight and force specifications

Total weight Weight at each foot 2447 lbs. (1110 kg) 1. 407 lbs. (185 kg) 2. 552 lbs. (250 kg) 3. 418 lbs. (190 kg) 4. 305 lbs. (138 kg) 5. 535 lbs. (243 kg) 6. 230 lbs. (104 kg) Force at each foot 1. 88.48 lbs./sq. in. (6.22 kg/sq. cm) 2. 71.32 lbs./sq. in. (5.01 kg/sq. cm) 3. 133.12 lbs./sq. in. (9.36 kg/sq. cm) 4. 66.30 lbs./sq. in. (4.66 kg/sq. cm) 5. 69.12 lbs./sq. in. (4.86 kg/sq. cm) 6. 73.25 lbs./sq. in. (5.15 kg/sq. cm)
Section 4-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.12: ARCHITECT ci 16200 weight and force specifications

Total weight Weight at each foot 2679 lbs. (1215 kg) 1. 534 lbs. (242 kg) 2. 700 lbs. (318 kg) 3. 245 lbs. (111 kg) 4. 331 lbs. (150 kg) 5. 422 lbs. (191 kg) 6. 250 lbs. (113 kg) Force at each foot 1. 116.1 lbs./sq. in. (8.16 kg/sq. cm) 2. 158.4 lbs./sq. in. (11.14 kg/sq. cm) 3. 78 lbs./sq. in. (5.48 kg/sq. cm) 4. 72 lbs./sq. in. (5.06 kg/sq. cm) 5. 95.5 lbs./sq. in. (6.71 kg/sq. cm) 6. 111.4 lbs./sq. in. (7.83 kg/sq. cm)
Section 4-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 4.2: c 8000 and c 16000 footprint
Table 4.13: ARCHITECT c 8000 weight and force specifications

Total weight Weight at each foot 1425 lbs. (646 kg) 1. 320 lbs. (145 kg) 2. 456 lbs. (207 kg) 3. 339 lbs. (154 kg) 4. 310 lbs. (141 kg) Force at each foot 1. 69.57 lbs./sq. in. (4.89 kg/sq. cm) 2. 99.13 lbs./sq. in. (6.97 kg/sq. cm) 3. 73.70 lbs./sq. in. (5.18 kg/sq. cm) 4. 67.39 lbs./sq. in. (4.74 kg/sq. cm)
Table 4.14: ARCHITECT c 16000 weight and force specifications

Total weight Weight at each foot 1545 lbs. (701 kg) 1. 482 lbs. (219 kg) 2. 385 lbs. (175 kg) 3. 310.5 lbs. (140.8 kg) 4. 367.5 lbs. (166.7 kg) Force at each foot 1. 105 lbs./sq. in. (7.38 kg/sq. cm) 2. 84 lbs./sq. in. (5.91 kg/sq. cm) 3. 68 lbs./sq. in. (4.78 kg/sq. cm) 4. 80 lbs./sq. in. (5.62 kg/sq. cm)
Section 4-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Figure 4.3: i 2000SR footprint
Table 4.15: ARCHITECT i 2000SR weight and force specifications

Section 4-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 4.4: i 2000 footprint Specifications and requirements
Table 4.16: ARCHITECT i 2000 weight and force specifications

System clearances
System clearances include information about the space required around the system and processing module(s) so you can safely operate and service an ARCHITECT System. System clearance topics include: SCC clearances, page 4-16 c System processing module with RSH clearances, page 4-16 c System processing module with LAS clearances, page 4-17 i System processing module with RSH clearances, page 4-17 i 2000 processing module with SSH clearances, page 4-18 i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler clearances, page 4-18 i 2000SR processing module with LAS clearances, page 4-19
Section 4-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
SCC clearances
Clearances for the SCC (system control center) are presented in the following table. Table 4.17: SCC clearances
Power cord length Clearance behind and on either side (for cooling and airflow) Clearance above monitor (for cooling and airflow) Clearance in front (for work area) 34" (86.4 cm) 24" (61.0 cm) 6' (1.8 m) 6" (15.2 cm)
c System processing module with RSH clearances

Clearances for the c System processing module with RSH (robotic sample handler) are presented in the following table. Table 4.18: c System processing module with RSH
Power cord length (to allow positioning of the module so that it is not difficult to disconnect the power cord) Left and right clearances (for access) Rear clearance: (for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and traffic) Single module Integrated system (with c System processing module) Clearance above (to open processing center covers) Front clearance (to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace bulk solutions, syringe and pump components) 34" (86.4 cm) 30" (76.2 cm) 30" (76.2 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 24" (61.0 cm) 13' (4.0 m)
Section 4-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c System processing module with LAS clearances

Clearances for the c System processing module with LAS (laboratory automation system) are presented in the following table. Table 4.19: c System processing module with LAS
Power cord length (to allow positioning of the module so that it is not difficult to disconnect the power cord) Left clearance (for access) Right clearance: (to access the LAS track) Rear clearance: (for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and traffic) Clearance above (to open processing center covers) Front clearance (to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace bulk solutions, syringe and pump components) 34" (86.4 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) Varies per track vendor 30" (76.2 cm) 24" (61.0 cm) 13' (4.0 m)
i System processing module with RSH clearances

Clearances for an i System processing module with RSH (robotic sample handler) are presented in the following table. Table 4.20: i System processing module with RSH
Power cord length (to allow positioning of the module so that it is not difficult to disconnect the power cord) Left and right clearances (to access the sample load and unload queues) Rear clearance: (for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and traffic) Single module Integrated system (with c System processing module) 20" (50.8 cm) 30" (76.2 cm) 24" (61.0 cm) 15' (4.6 m)
Section 4-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.20: i System processing module with RSH (continued)

Clearance above (to open processing center covers) Front clearance (to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace bulk solutions and waste) 34" (86.4 cm) 20" (50.8 cm)
i 2000 processing module with SSH clearances

Clearances for an i 2000 processing module with SSH (standard sample handler) are presented in the following table. Table 4.21: i 2000 processing module with SSH
Power cord length (to allow positioning of the module so that it is not difficult to disconnect the power cord) Left and right clearances (to access the sample load and unload queues) Rear clearance: (for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and traffic) Single module Multi-module Clearance above (to open processing center covers) Front clearance (to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace bulk solutions and waste) 34" (86.4 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 30" (76.2 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 24" (61.0 cm) 15' (4.6 m)
i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler clearances

Clearances for an i 2000 processing module with LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler are presented in the following table. Table 4.22: i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler
Power cord length (to allow positioning of the module so that it is not difficult to disconnect the power cord) Left clearance (to access the LAS track) Varies per track vendor 15' (4.6 m)
Section 4-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.22: i 2000 processing module with LAS carousel sample handler (continued)
Right clearance (for access) Rear clearance (for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and traffic) Clearance above (to open processing center covers) Front clearance (to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace bulk solutions and waste) 34" (86.4 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 24" (61.0 cm)
i 2000SR processing module with LAS clearances

Clearances for an i 2000SR processing module with LAS (laboratory automation system) are presented in the following table. Table 4.23: i 2000SR processing module with LAS
Power cord length (to allow positioning of the module so that it is not difficult to disconnect the power cord) Track side clearance (to access the LAS track) Non-track side clearance (for access) Rear clearance (for safety access to main circuit breakers, cooling, airflow, cable and tubing routing, maintenance, and traffic) Clearance above (to open processing center covers) Front clearance (to open front doors and to access, remove, and replace bulk solutions and waste) 34" (86.4 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 20" (50.8 cm) 24" (61.0 cm) Varies per track vendor 15' (4.6 m)
Electrical specifications and requirements

Electrical specifications and requirements include information about the circuits, outlet types, and outlet requirements. Electrical requirements topics include:
Section 4-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
SCC electrical requirements, page 4-20 c System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-20 i System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-21
SCC electrical requirements

Electrical requirements for the SCC (system control center) are presented in the following table. Table 4.24: Electrical requirements - SCC
AC power: Low voltage option High voltage option Circuit breaker that can be reset: Low voltage option High voltage option Outlet (one) North America International Power cord length NEMA 5-15 three prong (120 VAC, 15A) IEC 320 M grounded (220 - 240 VAC) 6' (1.8 m) 14 amp 12 amp Voltage: 90 - 132 VAC Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz Voltage: 180 - 264 VAC Frequency: 47 - 63 Hz
c System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for the c System processing module with its sample handler are presented in the following table. Table 4.25: Electrical specifications and requirements - c System processing module with sample handler
AC power Voltage: 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC) Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz) Circuit breaker that can be reset: North America International Outlet (one) With UPS - 30 amp Without UPS - 20 amp 16 amp
Section 4-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.25: Electrical specifications and requirements - c System processing module with sample handler (continued)
North America With UPS - NEMA L6-30R (250 VAC, 30A, twistlock) Without UPS - NEMA L6-20R (250 VAC, 20A, twistlock) International Power cord length Rated power consumption Estimated heat output IEC309 (250 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC, 16A) 13' (4.0 m) 3000 volt amp (3 kVA) maximum 2200 watts (includes SCC)
i System processing module with sample handler electrical specifications and requirements
Electrical specifications and requirements for an i System processing module with its sample handler are presented in the following table. Table 4.26: Electrical specifications and requirements - i System processing module with sample handler
AC power Voltage: 208, 220, 230, or 240 10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC) Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz) Circuit breaker that can be reset (i 2000SR): North America International Circuit breaker that can be reset (i 2000): One breaker for each processing module. North America International Outlet (one, i 2000SR): North America International Outlet (one, i 2000): One outlet for each processing module. North America NEMA L6-30R (250 VAC, 30A, twistlock) NEMA L6-20R (250 VAC, 20A, twistlock) IEC 309 (250 VAC or 220-240 VAC, 16A) 30 amp 32 amp With UPS - 30 amp Without UPS - 20 amp 16 amp
Section 4-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.26: Electrical specifications and requirements - i System processing module with sample handler (continued)
International Power cord length i 2000/i 2000SR Rated power consumption: i 2000SR i 2000 Estimated heat output i 2000/i 2000SR 2500 watts (includes SCC) 3000 volt amp (3 kVA) maximum 4700 volt amp (4.7 kVA) maximum 15' (4.6 m) IEC 309 (250 VAC or 220-240 VAC, 32A)
Electrical safety parameters

Electrical safety parameters for an ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table. Table 4.27: Electrical safety parameters
Installation category Pollution degree II (Overvoltage category) 2
NOTE: Electrical safety parameters have no bearing on performance.
Optical specifications (c System)

Optical specifications for the c System processing module are presented in the following table. Table 4.28: Optical specifications for the c System processing module
Light source Detector Light path length Photometric method Reaction cuvette Tungsten-halogen lamp Silicon photodiode array 5 mm Concave diffraction grating Rectangular glass cuvette 16 wavelengths (340, 380, 404, 412, 444, 476, 500, 524, 548, 572, 604, 628, 660, 700, 748, and 804 nm) 16 wavelengths (340, 380, 404, 416, 450, 476, 500, 524, 548, 572, 604, 628, 660, 700, 748, and 804 nm) -0.1 to 3.2 Abs (converted to 10 mm light path length) 2% at 2.0 Abs
c 8000 Wavelengths
c 16000 Wavelengths
Photometric range Linearity
Section 4-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements

Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements include information about water quality, water consumption, the drain port location, and drain capacity. Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements topics include: c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23 i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements, page 4-24
c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements
Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements for the c System processing module are presented in the following table. Table 4.29: Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements c System processing module
c 8000 Deionized water consumption 25 L per hour during normal operation c 16000 Deionized water consumption c 8000 Average liquid waste output c 16000 Average liquid waste output
Water quality (NCCLS Type II): Maximum microbial contamination Minimum resistivity Pressure IMPORTANT: Do not process samples on the c System when you are performing maintenance on your DI water system. After maintenance is complete, check the pressure to be sure it is within specifications. Drainage port: You must have a drainage port that meets the following specifications or you must use the external waste pump (optional accessory) if the drain is located in a sink or otherwise elevated. Location Height Within 9.5 ft. (2.9 m) from the rear of the system 8" (20.3 cm) above floor level < 1000 colony-forming units/mL 1 Meg Ohm - cm @ 25C (77F) 15 - 25 psi 54 L per hour during normal operation 25 L per hour 54 L per hour
Section 4-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.29: Water and liquid waste specifications and requirements c System processing module (continued)
Drainage capacity Liquid waste configuration: Two gravity-fed waste tubes One (c 8000) or two (c 16000) high-concentration waste tube(s) Drain into the drainage port or the external waste pump Drains into the high-concentration waste bottle, drainage port, or the external waste pump 300 L per hour
i System processing module water and liquid waste requirements

Water and liquid waste requirements for an i System processing module are presented in the following table. Table 4.30: Water and liquid waste requirements - i System processing module
Water quality (NCCLS Type II): Maximum microbial contamination Minimum resistivity Liquid waste < 1000 colony-forming units/mL 1 Meg Ohm - cm @ 25C (77F) Gravity flow to drain at floor level or external pump to sink
External waste pump specifications and requirements

The external waste pump is optional for use with the c System and/or i System when a floor drain is unavailable and a sink drain is used. This accessory pumps waste from the processing module(s) to an elevated drain located in a sink. External waste pump specifications and requirements topics include: External waste pump general specifications, page 4-24 External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-25 External waste pump clearances, page 4-25
External waste pump general specifications

Physical specifications for the external waste pump are presented in the following table. Table 4.31: External waste pump general specifications
Depth Width 13" (33 cm) 13" (33 cm)
Section 4-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.31: External waste pump general specifications (continued)

Height Weight 13" (33 cm) 18 lbs. (8 kg)
External waste pump electrical specifications and requirements

Electrical specifications and requirements for the external waste pump are presented in the following table. NOTE: You must manually set the voltage selector switch. Table 4.32: Electrical specifications and requirements - external waste pump
AC power: North America Voltage: 115 10% VAC (104 - 126 VAC) Frequency: 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz) International Voltage: 220 10% VAC (207 - 253 VAC) Frequency: 50 Hz (47 - 63 Hz) Circuit breaker that can be reset: North America International Outlet (one): North America International NEMA 5-15 three prong (120 VAC, 15A) IEC 320 M grounded (220 - 240 VAC) 1.6 amp 0.8 amp
External waste pump clearances

Clearances for the external waste pump are presented in the following table. Table 4.33: External waste pump clearances
Clearance on either side (for access) Clearance in front (for access) Clearance in rear (for access) 9" (22.9 cm) 9" (22.9 cm) 5" (12.7 cm)
Section 4-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Environmental specifications and requirements

Environmental specifications and requirements for the ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table. Table 4.34: Environmental specifications and requirements
Heat dissipation (including the system control center and sample handler): c System i System Noise level 7514 BTU/hour 8539 BTU/hour Does not exceed 48 dB during normal operation and peaks at 70 dB for a 10 second period 15C to 30C (59F to 86F) 10% - 85% (non-condensing) RH (relative humidity) at 25C (77F) NOTE: For SCC (system control center) humidity requirements refer to the component manufacturers' information. Altitude Placement 8500 ft. (2590.7 m) For indoor use. Do not place in direct sunlight. Avoid drafts from heating and cooling vents.
Temperature, operating Humidity
Computer and interface specifications

Computer and interface specifications for the SCC (system control center) of an ARCHITECT System are presented in the following table. Table 4.35: Computer and interface specifications
Processor Hard drive (2): C drive D drive Floppy drive CD-RW drive: Minimum read speed Minimum write speed Operator interface: Color monitor
Section 4-26
Minimum: Intel Pentium II; 350 MHz, 640 Mb RAM Minimum: 10 Gbyte Minimum: 10 Gbyte 3.5", 1.44 Mbyte 24x 8x Standard VGA connection
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.35: Computer and interface specifications (continued)

Touchscreen Keyboard Pointing device Optional external modem: Speed PC interface Cabling Telephone line Minimum 28.8 bps Integrated RS-232 RS-232 25-pin serial cable, RJ-11 phone cord and power adapter cable Direct line (no switchboard interface) is required. Dedicated line is recommended, but not required. Bidirectional Serial RS-232 port 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps ASTM standard (E 1381-91 and E1394-91) Ethernet, 100 BASE-T Ethernet, 10 BASE-T Resistive overlay, RS-232 connection (i 2000/i 2000SR) Standard PC-style 101-key system PS-2 interface
Host interface: Communications mode Communications device Baud rate options Interface reference document Processing module interface: c System i System
Printer specifications and requirements

The printer for the SCC (system control center) of the ARCHITECT System is provided by Abbott Laboratories. Printer specifications and requirements topics include: Printer general specifications, page 4-27 Printer electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-28
Printer general specifications

General specifications for the printer are presented in the following table. Table 4.36: Printer general specifications
Power cord length Parallel cable length 6' (1.8 m) 6' (1.8 m)
Section 4-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Printer electrical specifications and requirements

Electrical specifications and requirements for the printer are presented in the following table. Table 4.37: Electrical specifications and requirements - printer
AC power: North America Voltage: 110 or 120 10% VAC (90 - 132 VAC) Frequency: 60 Hz (47 - 63 Hz) International Voltage: 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 10% VAC (180 - 264 VAC) Frequency: 50 Hz (47 - 63 Hz) Circuit breaker that can be reset: North America International Outlet (one): North America International Power cord length NEMA 5-15 three prong (120 VAC, 15A) IEC 320 M grounded (220 - 240 VAC) 6' (1.8 m) 14 amp 12 amp
Bar code label requirements

Depending on the type of bar code label, requirements include information about guidelines, format, Sample ID length, label length, and placement. Bar code label requirements topics include: 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System), page 4-28 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32
1D reagent bar code requirements (c System)

Review the following information to ensure 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code labels meet the recommended guidelines and are properly placed on reagent cartridges. 1D reagent bar code label guidelines, page 4-29 1D reagent bar code label data format, page 4-30 1D reagent bar code label placement, page 4-32
Section 4-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1D reagent bar code label guidelines

Bar code label guidelines for 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code labels are presented in the following table. Table 4.38: 1D reagent bar code label guidelines
Component Printer type Description Printer with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI (dots per inch). Proper maintenance of the bar code printer is essential. NOTE: Laser and ink jet printers with resolution less than 300 DPI may not produce acceptable labels. Dot matrix printers are not recommended. Label stock Good quality white label stock. Black ink used for bar codes must be compatible with the label stock used. The labels are used in the reagent carousels which have high humidity and condensation levels. The labels should be water resistant. NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the background label must be the maximum possible. Contact your bar code label supplier for help in increasing the contrast. If the use of color on the label is desired, a color band may be used outside the bar code portion of the label. For optimal performance, it is recommended that only black bars be used on a white background for the bar code portion of the label. Bar code print quality Label print quality is an important factor affecting the ability of a bar code reader to correctly decode label information. Performance can be enhanced by using labels with an ANSI (American National Standards Institute) grade of A, B, or C. Although bar code labels with ANSI grades lower than C can provide valid reads, the number of "no reads" is higher and the possibility of misreads is increased. NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, "Bar Code Print Quality - Guideline," presents a standardized methodology for measuring and grading bar code print quality. It is good practice to evaluate all bar code labels according to this methodology. Contact your bar code label or print supplier for help in grading your labels. Commercially available verifier systems are also available to perform these evaluations. Symbology Length Height Interleaved 2 of 5 Maximum length of the printed bar code is 2.17" (55 mm) Minimum height of the printed bar code is 0.36" (9 mm)
Section 4-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.38: 1D reagent bar code label guidelines (continued)

Component Quiet zone Description The quiet zone is the distance from the left edge of the label to the first black bar and from the last black bar to the right edge of the label. Minimum quiet zone distance: 0.2" (5 mm) Density Ratio (wide to narrow bar) Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 12 Mils (0.012" or 0.3 mm) Minimum ratio: 2.5:1 Maximum ratio: 3:1
1D reagent bar code label data format

The 1D (one-dimensional) reagent bar code data format includes 18 digits (17 data digits and one checksum digit). A description of the data format is presented in the following table. Table 4.39: 1D reagent bar code label data format
Digit 1 to 5 Description Reagent name: A unique number assigned for each reagent. Range: 00000 - 99999 6 Cartridge size: Identifies the reagent cartridge size. Options are: 1 = 20 mL (bottle) 2 = Not available 3 = 100 mL (cartridge) 4 = 20 mL (cartridge) 5 = Small (55 mL cartridge) 6 = Large (90 mL cartridge) 7 = 70 mL (cartridge) 7 Reagent type: Identifies the reagent type. Options are: 1 = Reagent 1 2 = Reagent 2
Section 4-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 4.39: 1D reagent bar code label data format (continued)

Digit 8 Description Expiration date (year): Identifies the year the reagent expires. Options are: 3 = 2003 4 = 2004 5 = 2005 6 = 2006 7 = 2007 8 = 2008 9 = 2009 0 = 2010 1 = 2011 2 = 2012 9 to 10 Expiration date: Identifies the day of the year the reagent expires. Range: 00 - 52 00 = Expires at the end of the 7th day of the year 01 = Expires at the end of the 14th day of the year 51 = Expires at the end of the 364th day of the year 52 = Expires at the end of the last day of the year NOTE: If you enter a value greater than 52, the reagent expiration is not tracked. 11 to 13 Lot number: Identifies the unique reagent lot number. Range: 000 - 999 NOTE: The lot number displayed for the reagent is eight digits and includes the five digit reagent name and this three digit lot number. 14 to 17 Serial number: Identifies the unique serial number of the reagent cartridge. Range: 0000 - 9999 NOTE: Each cartridge for a single lot of reagent must have a unique numeric identifier. 18 Checksum: The checksum digit calculated for the bar code data. The checksum modulus is Mod 10.
NOTE: When you configure the user-defined reagent for the 1D bar code labeled reagent, the reagent name that you define must be
Section 4-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
identical to characters 1 to 5 of the bar code. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93.
1D reagent bar code label placement

You should affix the bar code label to the reagent cartridge in a "ladder" orientation where the printed bars are horizontal. To ensure the entire label is visible to the bar code reader when the reagent cartridge is loaded into the reagent supply center, do not place the bar code label lower than 10 mm from the bottom of the reagent cartridge. Place bar code labels on reagent cartridges as vertically straight as possible. If the vertical angle exceeds one degree, the bar code reader may have difficulty locating the required quiet zones. Figure 4.5: 1D reagent bar code label placement
Sample bar code label requirements

Review the following information to ensure sample bar code labels meet the recommended guidelines and are properly placed on sample tubes.
Section 4-32
Sample bar code label guidelines, page 4-33 Sample ID (identification) length, page 4-34 Sample bar code label length, page 4-34 Sample bar code label placement, page 4-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Performance characteristics and specifications Section 4 Sample bar code label guidelines
Guidelines for sample bar code labels are presented in the following table. Table 4.40: Bar code label guidelines
Component Printer type Description Printer with a minimum resolution of 300 DPI (dots per inch). Proper maintenance of the bar code printer is essential. NOTE: Laser and ink jet printers with resolution less than 300 DPI may not produce acceptable labels. Dot matrix printers are not recommended. Label stock Good quality white label stock. Black ink used for bar codes must be compatible with the label stock used. The printed labels should be clean and dry when they are presented to the bar code reader. NOTE: The contrast between the bars and the background label must be the maximum possible. Contact your bar code label supplier for help in increasing the contrast. If the use of color on the label is desired, a color band may be used outside the bar code portion of the label. For optimal performance, it is recommended that only black bars be used on a white background for the bar code portion of the label. Bar code print quality Label print quality is an important factor affecting the ability of a bar code reader to correctly decode label information. Performance can be enhanced by using labels with an ANSI (American National Standards Institute) grade of A, B, or C. Although bar code labels with ANSI grades lower than C can provide valid reads, the number of "no reads" is higher and the possibility of misreads is increased. NOTE: ANSI document X3.182-1990, "Bar Code Print Quality - Guideline," presents a standardized methodology for measuring and grading bar code print quality. It is good practice to evaluate all bar code labels according to this methodology. Contact your bar code label or print supplier for help in grading your labels. Commercially available verifier systems are also available to perform these evaluations. Symbology Symbologies allowed on the ARCHITECT System include: Code 39 Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 128 (Subsets A, B, and C)
Section 4-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.40: Bar code label guidelines (continued)

Component Quiet zone Description The quiet zone is the distance from the left edge of the label to the first black bar and from the last black bar to the right edge of the label. Minimum quiet zone distance: 0.25" (6.35 mm) Density Ratio (wide to narrow bar) Minimum density (narrow bar width) is 7.5 Mils (0.0075" or 0.19 mm) Minimum ratio: 2:1 Maximum ratio: 3:1
Sample ID (identification) length

The following factors affect the number of characters that can fit on a sample bar code label: Sample bar code label length, page 4-34 Sample bar code label placement, page 4-35 Symbology used Density Ratio Quiet zone
A maximum of 20 characters is allowed on the sample bar code label. However, the maximum number of readable characters may be less than 20 for some symbologies due to overall label length, narrow bar width, and ratio. A minimum of 2 characters is required for samples loaded on the c System sample carousel when using Code 128 symbology. IMPORTANT: When the bar code reader scans a bar code label with an SID containing >20 characters, only the first 20 characters are read. NOTE: If you print bar code labels (3 of 9, codabar, and I 2 of 5) with the checksum function enabled, a checksum character is added to the label. This character is usually added after the last character on the right and to the left of the stop character. The operator-readable portion of the label may or may not display this checksum character.
Sample bar code label length

Generally, a 51 mm label fits a 75 mm sample tube and a 76 mm label fits a 100 mm sample tube.
Section 4-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Performance characteristics and specifications Section 4 Sample bar code label placement
You should affix the bar code label to the sample tube in a "ladder" orientation where the printed bars are horizontal. Correctly labeled tube, page 4-35, shows an example of correct label placement. Incorrectly labeled tubes, page 4-36, shows examples of incorrect label placement. To ensure the entire label is visible to the bar code reader when the tube is loaded into the carousel, do not place the bar code label lower than 8 mm from the bottom of the sample tube. Place bar code labels on tubes as vertically straight as possible. If the vertical angle exceeds five degrees, the bar code reader may have difficulty locating the required quiet zones and the start/stop characters. The bar code label should not exceed the top of the tube. IMPORTANT: The operator is responsible for placing the correct bar code label on the sample tube to ensure proper sample identification. Figure 4.6: Correctly labeled tube Specifications and requirements
Legend: 1. Quiet zones 2. Minimum distance from bottom of sample tube: 8 mm
Section 4-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Figure 4.7: Incorrectly labeled tubes
Legend: 1. Angled placement 2. Edges peeled loose 3. Clear tape over label 4. Flap extending from label 5. Label extending beyond bottom of tube
Section 4-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ARM specifications and requirements

The ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory is optional for use with an i System. You may want to familiarize yourself with the specifications and requirements for the ARM, if your laboratory has chosen to use this accessory. This information is related to the proper installation and operation of the ARM to ensure optimal safety and performance requirements are met. ARM specifications and requirements topics include: ARM physical specifications, page 4-37 ARM clearance requirements, page 4-37 ARM electrical requirements, page 4-38 ARM electrical safety parameters, page 4-38 ARM water source requirements, page 4-39 ARM environmental requirements, page 4-39
ARM physical specifications

Physical specifications for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table. Table 4.41: ARCHITECT ARM accessory physical specifications
Dimensions: Height Width Depth Weight 28.3" (71.9 cm) 22.9" (58.2 cm) 17.8" (45.2 cm) 69 lbs. (31.3 kg)
ARM clearance requirements

Clearance requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table. Table 4.42: ARCHITECT ARM accessory clearance requirements
Left clearance (for tubing and fittings) Right clearance (for tubing and fittings) 12" (30.5 cm) 18" (45.7 cm)
Section 4-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 4
Table 4.42: ARCHITECT ARM accessory clearance requirements

Rear clearance (for access and airflow) Front clearance (for panel access) 20" (50.8 cm) 10" (25.4 cm)
ARM electrical requirements

Electrical requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table. Table 4.43: ARCHITECT ARM accessory electrical requirements
Line voltage 90-132 VAC / 180-264 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The ARM accessory ships with power cords and fuses for various power systems. Power cord type Current rating Fuses U.S.: NEMA 5-15P or equivalent Europe: CE E 7/7 or equivalent 1.5 amp maximum 2 time-lag, Type T, 5x20 mm, 250 V~, 1.0 amp 2 time-lag, Type T, 5x20 mm, 250 V~, 2.0 amp
ARM electrical safety parameters

Electrical safety parameters for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table. Table 4.44: ARCHITECT ARM accessory electrical safety parameters
Installation category Pollution degree II (Overvoltage category) 2
NOTE: Electrical safety parameters have no bearing on performance.
Section 4-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ARM water source requirements

Water source requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table. Table 4.45: ARCHITECT ARM accessory water source requirements
Purity NCCLS (National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards) Reagent Grade Type II water or better 8 to 100 psi 102 L/hr (1.7 L/minute) or greater if pressure exceeds 15 psig (103.425 Kpa) 132 L/hr (2.2 L/minute) or greater if pressure is 8-15 psig (55.16-103.425 Kpa) Temperature 15C to 37C (59C - 98.6F)
Pressure Flow rate
ARM environmental requirements

Environmental requirements for the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory are presented in the following table. Table 4.46: ARCHITECT ARM accessory environmental requirements
Operating environment: Temperature Humidity Storage environment: Temperature Humidity -25C to 65C 10% to 85% (non-condensing) RH (relative humidity) at 25C (77F) For indoor use only 15C to 30C 10% to 85% (non-condensing) RH (relative humidity) at 25C (77F)
Section 4-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5

Operating instructions <F=0>
Introduction
The flexibility of the ARCHITECT System accommodates many laboratory environments and workflows. Operating procedures are included for all system configurations. Before attempting to operate the system, you should be familiar with the hardware components of your system and the fundamental principles of the software user interface. See Use or function, page 1-1. Operating instructions topics include: System startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3 Describes how to start up, pause, shut down, cycle power to, and power off the system and its components. Consumable inventory management, page 5-24 Provides a description of the Supply status screen and instructions for performing consumable inventory management procedures. Reagent inventory management, page 5-61 Provides descriptions of the Reagent status and Reagent history screens and instructions for performing reagent inventory management procedures. Patient and control orders, page 5-110 Provides instructions for automated ordering of patient and control samples, descriptions of the Patient order and Control order screens and instructions for performing patient order and control order procedures. Sample management, page 5-170 Describes how to prepare, load, and unload samples, and how to initiate processing. Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release, page 5-222 Provides descriptions of the Results review and the QC result review screens and instructions for rerunning tests and releasing results. Patient and QC stored results, page 5-262
Section 5-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Provides descriptions of the Stored results and the Stored QC results screens and instructions on how to view and archive patient and QC results that have been released. Exception management, page 5-293 Provides a description of the Exception status screen and instructions for performing exception management procedures. Quality control analysis, page 5-309 Provides descriptions of Westgard rules, Levey-Jennings graph and QC reports screens, and instructions on quality control management. Report printing, page 5-333 Provides instructions for printing reports and describes the screens from which you can print each report.
Section 5-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System startup, pause, and shutdown

You may need to start up, pause, shut down, cycle power to, or power off the system and its components to: Load samples, reagents, and solutions Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures Replace components
System startup, pause, and shutdown topics include: SCC power off and power on, page 5-3 Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and pause, page 5-6 ARM power off and power on, page 5-19 Emergency shutdown, page 5-21 Long-term shutdown (i System), page 5-23
SCC power off and power on

You may need to power off and power on the SCC (system control center) to store configuration information or when indicated for component replacement or troubleshooting purposes. See specific procedures to determine if you must shut down the SCC. To resume normal operation, you must then Power on the SCC, page 5-3. SCC power off and power on procedures include: Power on the SCC, page 5-3 Power off the SCC, page 5-4 Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5
Power on the SCC

Perform this procedure to apply power to the SCC (system control center).
Power off the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-9
Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator NA
Section 5-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions
Section 5
To power on the SCC: 1. Verify the processing module power is off before applying power to the SCC. NOTE: If the processing module(s) power is on when you power on the SCC, communication is not properly initialized between the system components. 2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU (central processing unit) to turn on the SCC. To power on the processing module and/or sample handler, see Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.

System control center, page 1-8
Power off the SCC

Perform this procedure to shut down and power off the SCC (system control center) and to ensure that all data is stored before powering off the system. NOTE: The sample handler and processing module(s) are not functional when the system control center is off. To prevent flooding when your system is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not shut down the SCC if the ARM is in the process of filling the wash buffer reservoir. To cycle power to the SCC, see Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

To power off the SCC: 1. Select F3 - Shutdown on the Snapshot screen. A confirmation message displays. 2. Select OK to initiate shutdown. 3. Wait for the information window to display, and then simultaneously press the CTRL+ALT+DELETE keys on the keyboard.
Section 5-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Confirm Exit window displays. 4. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, and then select OK. 5. Wait for the information window to display, and then press and hold the power switch on the front of the CPU (central processing unit) to turn off power to the SCC. NOTE: The SCC may power off immediately, or it may take up to 10 seconds depending on the type of SCC you have.

Cycle power to the SCC

Perform this procedure to cycle power to the SCC (system control center) to reestablish communication to the system control center, to store configuration information, or when indicated for troubleshooting purposes. NOTE: The sample handler and processing module(s) are not functional when the system control center is off. To prevent flooding when your system is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not shut down the SCC if the ARM is in the process of filling the wash buffer reservoir.

To cycle power to the SCC: 1. Select F3 - Shutdown on the Snapshot screen. A confirmation message displays. 2. Select OK to confirm the shutdown. 3. Wait for the information window to display, and then simultaneously press the CTRL+ALT+DELETE keys on the keyboard. The Confirm Exit window displays.
Section 5-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
4. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, and then select OK. 5. Wait for the information window to display, and then press and hold the power switch on the front of the CPU (central processing unit) to turn off power to the SCC. NOTE: The SCC may power off immediately, or it may take up to 10 seconds depending on the type of SCC you have. 6. Turn off the power by: Moving down the power switch on the lower left rear of the processing module(s). 7. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. 8. Wait for the Snapshot screen to display. It may take several minutes to display. 9. Ensure the processing module(s) has been powered off for five minutes, and then move the power switch up to turn on power. To change the status of the processing module from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.

Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and pause
It may be necessary for you to remove power to the processing module(s) and sample handler to perform certain procedures. Cycling power involves powering off the processing module and sample handler followed by applying power. Once the power is on, you must perform a startup to attain a Ready status. You are required to pause the sample load queue to load samples on the SSH (standard sample handler), and you must pause the sample carousel (c System) to load samples in the carousel. You are required to pause the sample handler and the processing module to load reagents and solutions, and to perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures.
Section 5-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing module and sample handler cycle power, startup, and pause procedures include: Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7 Power off the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-9 Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12 Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13 Pause the processing module, page 5-14 Pause the RSH, page 5-15 Pause the sample carousel (c System), page 5-16 Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17 Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler

Perform this procedure to apply power to the processing module and/or sample handler.
Power on the SCC, page 5-3

Offline General operator NA
To power on the processing module and/or sample handler: 1. Ensure that the SCC (system control center) power is on and that the Snapshot screen displays. 2. Move the power switch on the lower left rear of the processing module up to the ON/| position to turn on the power. NOTE: In a single module system, powering on the processing module also turns on power to the sample handler. In a multi-module system, powering on the processing module farthest to the right (when facing the front of the system) powers on the sample handler.
Section 5-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.1: c 8000 power switch
Section 5-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.3: i 2000/i 2000SR power switch
To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.

Processing module (c System), page 1-25 Processing modules (i System), page 1-71
Power off the processing module and/or sample handler

Perform this procedure to power off the processing module and sample handler during component replacement and troubleshooting activities. To cycle power to the processing module and sample handler, see Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12. To power off the i System for more than two weeks, see Long-term shutdown (i System), page 5-23.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator NA
Section 5-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To power off the processing module and/or sample handler: 1. Determine which module to power off. IMPORTANT: To power off all processing modules in a multi-module system, you must turn the power to each processing module off. 2. Verify the processing module and/or sample handler are in Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. The processing module MUST be in one of these statuses to ensure that test processing is not interrupted. 3. Move the power switch on the lower left rear of the processing module down to the OFF/O position to turn off the power. NOTE: In a single module system, powering off the processing module also turns off power to the sample handler. In a multi-module system, powering off the processing module farthest to the right (when facing the front of the system) powers off the sample handler. Figure 5.4: c 8000 power switch
Section 5-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 5-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.6: i 2000/i 2000SR power switch

Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler

Perform this procedure to cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler when indicated for troubleshooting purposes, and to reestablish communication to the SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator NA
To cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler: 1. Determine the module to power off. 2. Verify the processing module and/or sample handler are in Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. The processing module MUST be in one of these statuses to ensure that test processing is not interrupted.
Section 5-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Move the power switch on the lower left rear of the processing module down to turn off the power. NOTE: In a single module system, powering off the processing module also turns off power to the sample handler. In a multi-module system, powering off the processing module farthest to the right (when facing the front of the system) powers off the sample handler. 4. Ensure that the SCC (system control center) power is on and that the Snapshot screen displays. 5. Ensure the processing module has been powered off for five minutes, and then move the power switch up to turn on the processing module and/or sample handler. To change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready, see Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.

Start up the processing module and/or sample handler

Perform this procedure to change the status of the processing module and/or sample handler from Stopped to Ready to: Initialize the processing module and/or sample handler Prepare for sample processing
Power on the SCC, page 5-3 Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7 Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status User access level Supplies Stopped General operator NA
Prerequisite
To start up the processing module and/or sample handler: 1. Select the processing module graphic and/or sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F5 - Start-up.
Section 5-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: For the i 2000 SSH (standard sample handler), you must wait for the processing module status to change from Offline to Stopped before initiating a start up. 2. Verify the status(es) when startup is complete: Ready or Warming (processing module) Ready (sample handler)
To initiate a run, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.

Processing modules, page 1-25
Pause the processing module

Perform this procedure to change the status of the processing module from Running to Ready to: Load reagents Load bulk solutions Perform maintenance or diagnostic procedures Perform component replacement
Pause the RSH, page 5-15 Pause the sample carousel (c System), page 5-16 Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17 Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18 Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status User access level Supplies Sample handler - All except Running Processing module - Running General operator NA
Prerequisite
To pause the processing module: 1. Verify the sample handler is not in the Running status. NOTE: If you do not pause the sample handler and wait for all scheduled tests to aspirate before you pause the processing module, all tests with a status of Scheduled become exceptions and are not processed.
Section 5-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Verify all tests have a status of Pending or Running. See View the status of ordered tests, page 5-154. 3. Select the desired processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F7 - Pause. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to pause the processing module. NOTE: If you are pausing a c System processing module, do not open the R1 and R2 reagent supply center covers until the access indicators on the processing module keypad illuminate. If you are pausing an i System processing module, do not open the module covers until the access indicator on the processing module keypad illuminates, indicating the status is Ready. To resume processing module operation, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206. To resume processing module operation, see Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.

Pause the RSH

Perform this procedure to pause the RSH (robotic sample handler) so you can: Remove a sample carrier from the priority bay or section when the amber indicator is illuminated Remove a carrier tray from a routine bay(s) or section(s) when the amber indicator is illuminated
You may also perform this procedure to pause the RSH prior to pausing a processing module(s) so that samples are not transported to the module(s). NOTE: When you pause the RSH, the sample handler status transitions from Running to Scheduled pause. The processing module completes aspirations for all scheduled tests and the RSH returns the carriers to their original locations. It may take up to 45 minutes for the sample handler to complete this process. If you do not initiate a run
Section 5-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
on the sample handler during that time, the sample handler status changes to Ready. To pause the processing module, see Pause the processing module, page 5-14.

Running General operator NA
To pause the RSH: 1. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F7 - Pause. A confirmation message displays. 2. Select OK to pause the RSH. The pause indicator illuminates on the RSH keypad, page 1-120. To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.

Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Unload samples (RSH), page 5-216
Pause the sample carousel (c System)

Perform this procedure to pause the sample carousel when the sample carousel access indicator is not illuminated. In the Paused status, you can: Load patient samples, calibrators, or controls for priority processing Remove samples when they are no longer needed NOTE: If a sample is moved while in the Paused status the following will occur: If a bar coded sample is moved to a new position on the sample carousel, original pending orders will be deleted the next time the carousel is scanned. If orders are added to a bar coded sample, the original pending orders are deleted and the orders added will be run.
Section 5-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

If a bar coded sample is moved to a position on the carousel previously occupied by a non-bar coded sample, any pending orders for the non-bar coded sample will be deleted the next time the carousel is scanned.
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample in the correct position.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Running General operator NA
To pause the sample carousel: 1. Locate the square sample carousel access indicator button next to the sample carousel. 2. Press and hold the button until the light blinks. The light blinks to indicate the sample carousel is in the process of pausing. The pause process completes when the sample probe wash solutions are no longer required for samples in process. 3. Verify the illuminated sample carousel access indicator is no longer blinking. To load samples and return to Running status, see Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188. To unload samples, see Unload samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-218.
Related information... Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000), page 1-33
Pause the sample load queue (SSH)

Perform this procedure to change the status of the SSH (standard sample handler) from Running to Load queue paused so you can: Load a sample carrier Priority load a sample carrier
You may also perform this procedure to pause the SSH prior to pausing a processing module(s) so that samples are not transported to the module(s).
Section 5-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: When you pause the sample load queue, the sample handler status transitions from Running to Load queue paused. The sample load queue stops routing any new carriers, but the processing queue and unload queue remain active for approximately 20 minutes after the last carrier is unloaded. If you do not initiate a run on the sample handler during that time, the sample handler status changes to Ready. To pause the processing module see, Pause the processing module, page 5-14.

To pause the sample load queue: 1. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F7 - Pause. A confirmation message displays. 2. Select OK to pause the SSH. The pause indicator illuminates on the sample handler keypad. To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.

Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191
Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000)

Perform this procedure to pause the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler so you can: Priority load a sample or calibrator Remove samples when they are no longer needed
You may also perform this procedure to pause the LAS carousel sample handler prior to pausing the processing module. NOTE: When you pause the LAS carousel sample handler, the sample handler status transitions from Running to Scheduled pause. The processing module completes aspirations for the current sample or for all scheduled calibrators. If you do not initiate a run on the sample handler during that time, the sample handler status changes to Ready.
Section 5-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To pause the processing module see, Pause the processing module, page 5-14.

To pause the LAS carousel sample handler: 1. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F7 - Pause. A confirmation message displays. 2. Select OK to pause the LAS carousel sample handler. The pause indicator illuminates on the sample handler keypad. NOTE: If you open the LAS carousel cover before the indicator illuminates, all tests in process on the carousel become exceptions and do not complete. To return to Running status, see Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.

Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203 Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler), page 5-220
ARM power off and power on

You may need to power off the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory to perform troubleshooting, and then power it back on. ARM power off and power on procedures include: Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20 Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20
Section 5-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Power off the ARM (i System)

Perform this procedure to power off the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory when indicated for troubleshooting purposes.
To power off the ARM: 1. Verify the ARM is not transferring buffer. The green indicator, located under the start key on the ARM keypad, flashes when wash buffer is pumped to the wash buffer reservoir in the processing module. 2. Move the power switch, located on the lower left side of the ARM, down to the "0" position.
Related information... ARM optional accessory (i System), page 1-109
Power on and initialize the ARM (i System)

Perform this procedure to power on and initialize the ARCHITECT ARM (Automated Reconstitution Module) accessory for automated buffer transfer.
To power on and initialize the ARM accessory: 1. Move the power switch, located on the lower left side of the ARM, up to the "|" position. A red indicator illuminates under the stop key on the ARM keypad. 2. Press the start key on the ARM keypad to initialize the ARM. A green indicator illuminates under the start key.

Section 5-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Emergency shutdown
When an unusual circumstance indicates that an emergency may exist, you should turn off power to the ARCHITECT System. Steps for turning off the power vary slightly based on whether you have a single or multi-module system, see: Perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system, page 5-21 Perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system, page 5-22
If your system is configured with the RSH (robotic sample handler), you must discard all sample cups and/or tubes on the sample carrier if a carrier is in the RSH carrier transport when you perform an emergency shutdown. When you perform an emergency shutdown, samples and the surrounding area may be contaminated by sample splashing as the carrier transport motor loses power. See Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708, for proper recovery information.
Perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system

Perform this procedure to stop the sample handler and processing module in a single module system. To perform an emergency shutdown on a single module system: 1. Press the emergency stop button for the processing module.
Section 5-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
2. Disconnect the main power cord at its receptacle.
Related information... Emergency shutdown, page 5-21
Perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system

Perform this procedure to stop the sample handler and processing module(s) in a multi-module system. To perform an emergency shutdown on a multi-module system: 1. Perform one or both of the following: Press the emergency stop button for the processing module farthest to the right when facing the front of the system. Power to the processing module and sample handler is turned off. And/or Press the emergency stop button for the desired processing module(s). Power to the processing module(s) is turned off.
Section 5-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Disconnect the main power cord for the processing module(s) at its receptacle. IMPORTANT: To remove power to all processing modules in a multi-module system, you must disconnect the main power cord for each processing module.
Related information... Emergency shutdown, page 5-21
Long-term shutdown (i System)

Whenever you shut down an ARCHITECT i System for more than seven days, you must perform diagnostic procedure 2135 Long Term Shutdown, page 10-675. This diagnostic procedure: Flushes all pumps and fluid lines with buffer, air, deionized water, and then air Removes all RVs
For instructions on how to perform this diagnostic procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. An internal decontamination must be performed prior to start up after a long-term shutdown. Contact your Area Customer Support for more information.
Section 5-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Consumable inventory management
Section 5

Always check consumable inventory before processing samples. Use the Supply status screen to check inventory. Consumable inventory management topics include: Supply status screen and views, page 5-24 ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management, page 5-31 c System procedures - consumable inventory management, page 5-32 i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - consumable inventory management, page 5-46
Supply status screen and views

From the Supply status screen you can view the status of supplies on board the system and the waste status. The view that displays is dependent on the processing module configuration of your system. Supply status screen and views topics include: Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24 Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27 Windows - Supply status screen, page 5-29
Supply status screen - c System view

From the c System view of the Supply status screen you can: View the volume and percent of bulk solutions View the volume and percent of onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers View the status of onboard solutions in the sample carousel View the status of liquid waste in the high-concentration waste bottle Access a window to update the status(es) of bulk solutions and onboard solutions NOTE: The system calculates supply volume and % remaining information based on tests required for samples that have been scanned by the sample handler. The two c System views of the Supply status screen are:
Section 5-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c 8000 view c 16000 view Consumable inventory management
Figure 5.7: Supply status screen - c 8000 view
Section 5-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.8: Supply status screen - c 16000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions, page Appendix E-119. To display these views of the screen, see Access the Supply status screen c System view, page 5-27.
Related procedures... Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32

Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33 Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39 Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41 Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System), page 5-44 Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-45
Section 5-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Access the Supply status screen - c System view

Perform this procedure to display the c System view of the Supply status screen.
To access the Supply status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the supply status button on the c 8000 or c 16000 processing module graphic. Select Supplies from the menu bar, and then select Supply status. The Supply status screen - c System view displays.

Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view

From the i System view of the Supply status screen you can: View the volume and percent of bulk solutions View the status of solid waste View the status of RVs (reaction vessels) Access a window to update the status(es) of bulk solutions, solid waste, and RVs NOTE: The system calculates supply volume and % remaining information based on tests required for samples that have been scanned by the sample handler.
Section 5-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.9: Supply status screen - i System view
For descriptions of these fields, see Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions, page Appendix E-119. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-29.
Related procedures... Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32

Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47 Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49 Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52 Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view

Perform this procedure to display the i System view of the Supply status screen.
Prerequisite Module status NA Any
Section 5-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

General operator NA
To access the Supply status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the supply status button on the desired i System processing module graphic. 1. Select Supplies from the menu bar, and then select Supply status. The Supply status screen - c System view displays for a standalone c System or an integrated system. OR The Supply status screen - i System view displays for a standalone or multi-module i System. 2. Select another Module option to display a different view. (optional)

Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27
Windows - Supply status screen

The window you can access from the Supply status screen is: Update supplies window - c System view, page 5-29 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-31
Update supplies window - c System view

From the c System view of the Update supplies window you can update supply information so the system can accurately track onboard supply inventory. The two c System views of the Update supplies window are: c 8000 view c 16000 view
Section 5-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.10: Update supplies window - c 8000 view
Figure 5.11: Update supplies window - c 16000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions, page Appendix E-120.
Related procedures... Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39
Section 5-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41 Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System), page 5-44
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view

From the i System view of the Update supplies window you can update supply information so the system can accurately track onboard supply inventory. Figure 5.12: Update supplies window - i System view
For descriptions of these fields, see Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions, page Appendix E-121.
Related procedures... Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49 Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52 Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57
ARCHITECT System procedures - consumable inventory management

The procedure that is common to both the c System and i Systems is Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32.
Section 5-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Verify supply and waste inventory

Perform this procedure before initiating sample processing to verify adequate supply inventory levels or when the supply status button on the processing module(s) graphic(s) displays a caution icon. NOTE: The status that displays reflects the inventory that remains after the system processes the samples that have been scanned by the sample bar code reader. You can create orders when inventory levels are insufficient. However, if inventory is not adequate when you initiate sample processing, tests become exceptions and are not processed.
Prerequisite
Access the Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-27 Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-29
To verify supply and waste inventory: 1. Select the desired Module option. The Supply status screen for the selected module displays. 2. View the inventory of supplies and waste.
Related information... Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24

Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27
c System procedures - consumable inventory management

c System consumable inventory management procedures include: Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33 Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35 Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-37 Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-38 Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39
Section 5-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41 Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System), page 5-44 Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-45
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System)

Perform this procedure to replace and update ICT Reference Solution, Acid Wash, or Alkaline Wash inventory when the bottle is empty or the solution is expired.
Access the Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-27

Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator ICT Reference solution Alkaline Wash Acid Wash
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See product-specific information under Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
To replace bulk solutions and update inventory: 1. Verify the new solution is within the expiration date listed on the label. DO NOT use the solution if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Open the supply center door. 3. Remove the used bottle from the weight platform, and then place the used bottle on the floor in front of the supply center.
Section 5-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
4. Verify the following: liquid or dried solution has not accumulated on the weight platform tray excess solution is not present in the bottles (volume is decreasing over time) bottles are not overflowing
If liquid or dried solution has accumulated on the tray, see Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System), page 10-559. If excess solution is present or bottles are overfilled, see Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System), page 10-560. 5. Remove the cap from the new bottle, and then place the bottle on the floor next to the used bottle. IMPORTANT: DO NOT pool partially filled bottles of bulk solutions. 6. Remove the cap and tubing from the used bottle. 7. Insert the tubing into the new bottle, and then press the cap firmly on the new bottle. 8. Place the new bottle in the correct orientation and the correct location on the weight platform, ensuring the bottle is securely seated. The correct bottle orientation is: Acid and Alkaline wash - bottle cap and opening in front
Section 5-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT Reference solution - bottle cap and opening in back
IMPORTANT: Results can be adversely affected if you do not load bulk solutions correctly 9. Discard the used bottle in accordance with the waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information. 10. Close the supply center door. 11. Select the Module 1 option on the Supply status screen. The c System view of the Supply status screen displays. 12. Select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 13. Select the appropriate Bulk solutions check box(es). 14. Select Done to update supply inventory. NOTE: The bulk solution inventory is updated to 100% remaining. Inaccurate tracking will result if a new bottle is not used.
Related information... ICT reference solution (c System), page 1-133

Alkaline wash (c System), page 1-134 Acid wash (c System), page 1-135 Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24 Update supplies window - c System view, page 5-29
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System)

Perform this procedure to prepare a 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash. Acid wash is an onboard solution used for washing probes.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator Acid Wash (bulk solution) Reagent Grade Type II water Appropriate reagent cartridge Sample cup
Section 5-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To prepare 0.5% acid wash solution: 1. Verify that the concentrated acid wash is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Mix 5 mL of acid wash with 995 mL of Reagent Grade Type II water. 3. Store the diluted solution in a container labeled with the name (0.5% acid wash) and the expiration date. NOTE: The expiration date of the prepared 0.5% solution of acid wash is the same as the concentrated acid wash. 4. Pour 0.5% acid wash into the appropriate container to be loaded on the processing module. 5. Label the container with the name (0.5% acid wash) and the expiration date. NOTE: The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed onboard the reagent supply centers is 30 days. The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed onboard the sample carousel is one day. To replace 0.5% acid wash in the reagent supply centers on the c 8000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39. To replace 0.5% acid wash in the reagent supply centers on the c 16000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41. To replace 0.5% acid wash in the sample carousel, see Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System), page 5-44.
Related information... Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136

Acid wash (c System), page 1-135
Section 5-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Prepare detergent A (c System)

Perform this procedure to prepare Detergent A. This detergent is an onboard solution used for washing probes and cleaning cuvettes.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator Detergent A Appropriate reagent cartridge Sample cup
To prepare Detergent A: 1. Verify detergent A is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Gently invert to ensure a homogeneous solution. 3. Pour detergent A into the appropriate container to be loaded on board the reagent supply center. 4. Label the container with the name (Detergent A) and expiration date. NOTE: The stability of detergent A when placed onboard the reagent supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label. The stability of detergent A when placed on board the sample carousel is one day. To replace detergent A on the c 8000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39. To replace detergent A on the c 16000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41. To replace detergent A in the sample carousel, see Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System), page 5-44.

Section 5-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System)

Perform this procedure to prepare a 10% dilution of Detergent B. This detergent is an onboard solution used for washing probes.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator Detergent B Reagent Grade Type II water Appropriate reagent cartridge
To prepare 10% Detergent B solution: 1. Verify detergent B is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Gently invert 4-5 times to ensure a homogeneous solution. 3. Mix 50 mL of detergent B with 450 mL of Reagent Grade Type II water. 4. Store the diluted solution in a container labeled with the name (10% Detergent B) and the expiration date. NOTE: The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B is 14 days. 5. Pour the 10% detergent B into the appropriate container to be loaded onboard the reagent supply center. 6. Label the container with the name (10% Detergent B) and the expiration date. NOTE: The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when placed onboard the reagent supply centers is 14 days. To replace detergent B on the c 8000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39. To replace detergent B on the c 16000 processing module, see Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41.
Section 5-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000)
Perform this procedure to replace and update onboard solution inventory in the reagent supply centers when the inventory is empty or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers may include a 0.5% dilution of acid wash, detergent A, or a 10% dilution of detergent B. To change the onboard solution locations, see Change the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33.
Prerequisite
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35 Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-37 Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-38 Access the Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-27
Ready or Scheduled pause General operator 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash Detergent A 10% dilution of Detergent B Appropriate reagent cartridge
To replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory: 1. Pour the appropriate solution into a reagent cartridge. NOTE: Onboard solutions located in positions E1 or E2 on the c 8000 processing module must be poured into a large cartridge (90 mL) only. 2. Label the container with the solution name and the expiration date. NOTE: The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed on board the reagent supply centers is 30 days.
Section 5-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
The stability of detergent A when placed on board the reagent supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label. The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when placed on board the reagent supply centers is 14 days. 3. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 4. Open the processing module cover. 5. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the reagent supply center. NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for reagent supply center 2 to become available. 6. Remove and replace the solutions in positions E1 or E2 on the c 8000 processing module by performing the following steps: (optional) Remove the empty or expired solution. Place the fresh solution in the assigned position.
7. Remove and replace the solution in the reagent supply centers by performing the following steps: (optional) NOTE: Position D1 in each reagent carousel on the c 8000 processing module is the only position that can be used for onboard solution storage. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the reagent supply center(s), and then open the cover(s). CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to access the position. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh solution in the position. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s) down until you hear a click.
Section 5-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

8. Discard the used cartridge in accordance with the waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information. 9. Close the processing center cover. 10. Select run to resume processing if the module status is Scheduled pause or perform the following steps to update supplies if the module status is Ready. To update supplies: a. Select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. b. c. Select the appropriate Reagent supply center check box(es). Select Done to update the supply information.
NOTE: The inventory of the solution indicates that the reagent cartridge is completely full. The inventory updates with the actual remaining volume when the solution is accessed during a run.
Related information... Acid wash (c System), page 1-135

Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Supply status screen - c 8000 view, page 5-25 Update supplies window - c 8000 view, page 5-30
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000)
Perform this procedure to replace and update onboard solution inventory in the reagent supply centers when the inventory is empty or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers may include a 0.5% dilution of acid wash, detergent A, or a 10% dilution of detergent B.
Section 5-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To change the onboard solution locations, see Change the onboard solution options (c 16000), page 2-34.
Prerequisite
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35 Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-37 Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-38 Access the Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-27
Ready or Scheduled pause General operator 0.5% dilution of Acid Wash Detergent A 10% dilution of Detergent B Appropriate reagent cartridge
To replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory: 1. Pour the appropriate solution into a reagent cartridge. 2. Label the container with the solution name and the expiration date. NOTE: The stability of the prepared 0.5% acid wash when placed on board the reagent supply centers is 30 days. The stability of detergent A when placed on board the reagent supply centers is the expiration date on the bottle label. The stability of the prepared 10% detergent B when placed on board the reagent supply centers is 14 days. 3. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 4. Open the processing module cover. 5. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the reagent supply center.
Section 5-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for reagent supply center 2 to become available. 6. Remove and replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply center(s) by performing the following steps: a. b. Open the reagent supply center cover(s). Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to access the position. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh solution in the position. Close the reagent supply center cover(s).
c. d.
7. Discard the used cartridge in accordance with the waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information. 8. Close the processing center cover. 9. Select run to resume processing if the module status is Scheduled pause or perform the following steps to update supplies if the module status is Ready. To update supplies: a. Select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. b. c. Select the appropriate Reagent supply center check box(es). Select Done to update the supply information.
NOTE: The inventory of the solution indicates that the reagent cartridge is completely full. The inventory updates with the actual remaining volume when the solution is accessed during a run.

Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29
Section 5-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Supply status screen - c 16000 view, page 5-26 Update supplies window - c 16000 view, page 5-30
Replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory (c System)
Perform this procedure to replace and update onboard solution inventory in the sample carousel when the sample cup or tube is empty or the solution is expired. Onboard solutions in the sample carousel may include 0.5% Acid Wash and Detergent A.
Prerequisite
Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35 Prepare detergent A (c System), page 5-37 Access the Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-27
Warming or Ready General operator 0.5% Acid Wash Detergent A Sample cups or tubes
To replace onboard solutions in the sample carousel and update inventory: 1. Pour the appropriate onboard solution into a sample cup or tube. A minimum of 500 L onboard solution is required. NOTE: The stability of onboard solutions in the sample carousel is one day. 2. Open the processing module cover. 3. Press the gray button on the front portion of the sample carousel cover, and then open the cover. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
4. Press the sample carousel advance indicator button (round) to advance the sample carousel to access the desired position(s).
Section 5-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Remove the empty or expired solution and place the fresh solution in the carousel as specified: 0.5% acid wash in position 31 Detergent A in position 32
IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct solution in the correct position. When you load sample cups or tubes, ensure that you have pushed them down completely into the sample carousel and that they are not tilted. 6. Close the sample carousel cover by pushing the cover down until you hear a click. 7. Discard used sample cups and/or tubes in accordance with the waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information. 8. Close the processing module cover. 9. Select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 10. Select the appropriate Sample carousel check box(es). 11. Select Done to update the supply inventory.

Onboard solutions (c System), page 1-136 Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24 Update supplies window - c System view, page 5-29 Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32 Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System)

Perform this procedure to empty the high-concentration waste bottle (optional component) when it reaches capacity.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies Check the liquid waste inventory in Supply status screen Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator Absorbent towels
Section 5-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
To empty the high-concentration waste bottle: 1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the waste bottle cap by unscrewing the locking ring and disconnecting the cable. 2. Place an absorbent towel next to the bottle to catch any spills from the bottle cap. 3. Unscrew the waste bottle from the cap, and ensure the tubing is not kinked. 4. Place the cap with the attached tubing on the absorbent towel. 5. Dispose of liquid waste in accordance with the waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information. CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The ARCHITECT c System high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full. Use care when handling the bottle to reduce the risk of injury.
6. Screw the cap onto the waste bottle, and ensure the tubing is not kinked. 7. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. NOTE: The Supply status screen updates automatically when you reconnect the float switch cable.
Related information... Optional components (c System), page 1-70

Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - consumable inventory management

i System consumable inventory management procedures include:
Section 5-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47 Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49 Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51 Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52 Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55 Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure to empty the solid waste container and to update the waste status. The solid waste container holds used RVs (reaction vessels).
Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-29
Any General operator Biohazard bag
To remove solid waste and update inventory: 1. Open the supply and waste center door.
Section 5-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
2. Lift the solid waste container over the stopper on the floor of the supply and waste center, and then slide the solid waste container out. The waste chute closes.
Section 5-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: The closed waste chute holds 50 RVs (reaction vessels). Therefore, if the processing module is running, you have approximately 15 minutes to empty the waste container. If the waste chute is full, the processing module status changes to Scheduled pause and the used RVs remain on the outer ring of the process path. 3. Remove the biohazard bag and discard the bag and its contents in a biohazard trash receptacle. 4. Install a new biohazard bag in the solid waste container. NOTE: The biohazard bag must fit snugly and be fully opened in the solid waste container to allow RVs to drop freely into the container. 5. Slide the solid waste container into the waste area, lift it over the stopper on the floor, and then push it firmly against the back wall to ensure the waste chute is open. 6. Select the appropriate Module option on the Supply status screen, and then select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 7. Select the Solid waste check box. 8. Select Done to update supplies.
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-31
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure to replenish and update RV (reaction vessel) inventory on the processing module(s). The maximum onboard storage capacity is 1200 RVs (sufficient inventory for approximately five hours of continuous operation).
Any General operator Reaction vessels
Section 5-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To replenish RVs and update inventory: 1. Open the RV hopper cover. 2. Add RVs by performing one of the following: Pour a partial bag of RVs into the RV hopper, estimating the quantity added. Pour a full bag of RVs (500) into the RV hopper.
NOTE: Do not overfill the hopper.
3. Close the RV hopper cover. 4. Select the appropriate Module option on the Supply status screen, and then select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 5. Select the appropriate RVs Added option. Five hundred is equal to one bag. One thousand is equal to two bags. Use Other for a partial bag. If you select Other, enter the estimated number of RVs. 6. Select Done to update RV inventory.
Related information... Reaction vessels (i System), page 1-146

Section 5-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Prepare wash buffer (i System)

Perform this procedure to prepare wash buffer from concentrate. You can prepare wash buffer ahead of time as long as its expiration date is not exceeded when in use. If your system is configured with an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory, see Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA NA General operator Concentrated Wash Buffer (1 L bottle) 10 L wash buffer preparation container Reagent Grade Type II water
To prepare wash buffer: 1. Verify that the wash buffer is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. NOTE: The expiration date of the prepared wash buffer is the expiration date on the wash buffer label. 2. Invert the concentrated wash buffer bottle several times to ensure a homogeneous solution. 3. Pour the concentrated wash buffer into the preparation container.
Section 5-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
4. Slowly add Reagent Grade Type II water into the preparation container until the liquid reaches the 10 L mark. NOTE: Add the water slowly to avoid foaming. Ensure that the liquid level is between the two solid lines on the preparation container. To load wash buffer, see Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Related information... Concentrated wash buffer (i System), page 1-145
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure to load wash buffer concentrate into the 25 liter onboard reservoir when your system is not configured with an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory or when the ARM is unavailable. A full reservoir holds sufficient inventory for approximately five hours of continuous operation. To replace the concentrated wash buffer container on the ARCHITECT ARM accessory, see Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55.
Prerequisite
Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51 Access the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-29
All except Offline, Initializing, and Maintenance General operator Prepared wash buffer (room temperature 15C 37C) Wash buffer transfer tubing Lint-free tissue Reagent Grade Type II water
To replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory: 1. Open the supply and waste center door. 2. Put the transfer tubing into the wash buffer preparation container. 3. Attach the wash buffer transfer tubing to the quick disconnect at the left side of the wash buffer reservoir.
Section 5-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Select the appropriate Module option on the Supply status screen, and then select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 5. Select the Add buffer check box. 6. Select Done. An information message displays.
7. Select OK to initiate buffer transfer. The Supply status screen displays with a Wash buffer status of FILL IN PROGRESS.
Section 5-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
8. Wait for the fill to complete, and then disconnect the wash buffer transfer tubing from the quick disconnect on the wash buffer reservoir.
9. Remove the tubing from the preparation container. 10. Drain any liquid remaining in the transfer tubing into a sink by raising the tubing above the level of the sink and depressing the connector in the end of the tubing. 11. Dry the outside of the tubing with a clean soft lint-free tissue, and then store the tubing in a clean, dry place.
Section 5-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

12. Close the supply and waste center door. 13. Rinse the wash buffer preparation container with Reagent Grade Type II water. 14. Prepare wash buffer so it is ready the next time you need to load wash buffer. (optional)
Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System)

Perform this procedure to load a Concentrated Wash Buffer container on the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator Concentrated Wash Buffer
To replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM: 1. Verify that the concentrated wash buffer is within the expiration date on the box label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Press the stop key on the ARM keypad. The red indicator beneath the stop key illuminates. 3. Disconnect the sensor cable [1] from the ARM.
Section 5-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
4. Disconnect the tubing [2]. 5. Twist the fitting to loosen the tubing assembly [4] and remove it from the container. 6. Place the tubing assembly into the tubing assembly holder [3]. 7. Remove the empty container from the ARM. 8. Remove the cardboard cutout from the full container and discard. 9. Position the full container on the ARM so that the cap is close to the white bracket [5]. 10. Remove the cap from the container. 11. Place the tubing assembly into the full container, and then twist the fitting to tighten. 12. Reconnect the sensor cable [1] and supply tubing quick disconnect fitting [2] to the ARM console. 13. Press the replace buffer key on the ARM keypad. NOTE: It is normal for a small amount of wash buffer to drain as the ARM primes itself before resuming operation. The stop indicator is no longer illuminated and the following occurs: The amber replace buffer indicator illuminates briefly while the sensor automatically recalibrates to "full."
Section 5-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The green start indicator illuminates steadily indicating the ARM is ready for operation. Buffer is automatically transferred to the buffer reservoir when the onboard remaining wash buffer is approximately 40%.
14. Discard the empty container. To initiate wash buffer transfer, see Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.

ARM connectors (i System), page 1-113 Concentrated wash buffer (i System), page 1-145
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Perform this procedure to replace and update Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solution inventory when the bottle is empty, has reached the onboard stability expiration date, or is expired.
Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator Pre-trigger solution Trigger solution
To replace pre-trigger and/or trigger and update inventory: 1. Verify that the new pre-trigger or trigger is within the expiration date listed on the label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. IMPORTANT: DO NOT pool partially filled bottles of pre-trigger or trigger. 2. Record the installation date in accordance with your current laboratory procedures.
Section 5-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
3. Add the number of days for onboard storage listed on the bottle label to the installation date. 4. Record this date (onboard expiration date) in accordance with your current laboratory procedures. NOTE: This date must not exceed the expiration date of the solution. 5. Open the supply and waste center door. 6. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out. NOTE: Use caution when handling the level sensors. Avoid bending the tubing connected to the cap. Avoid applying stress on the wiring and connectors. 7. Move the bottle to be replaced to the bottle exchange position in the middle of the tray. 8. Place the new bottle in the correct location in the tray, as indicated by the label on the tray. IMPORTANT: Results can be adversely affected if you do not load pre-trigger and trigger correctly. 9. Remove the cap from the new bottle and place it in the cap storage area at the front of the tray. 10. Remove the cap from the used bottle. The level sensor assembly is attached to the cap. 11. Place the level sensor and cap into the new bottle.
Section 5-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

12. Place the level sensor into the container with the arrow facing towards the front. 13. Tighten the cap. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. IMPORTANT: Results and inventory status can be adversely affected if you do not align the level sensor correctly. 14. Place the cap from the cap storage area on the used bottle, and then remove the bottle. 15. Discard the used bottle in accordance with the waste disposal procedures for your laboratory. See Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12, for additional information. 16. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray back into the module. 17. Close the supply and waste center door. 18. Select the appropriate Module option from the Supply status screen, and then select F2 - Update supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 19. Select the Pre-Trigger and/or Trigger check box(es). 20. Select Done to update the pre-trigger or trigger inventory.
Section 5-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: The pre-trigger and/or trigger inventory is updated to 100% remaining. Inaccurate tracking will result if a new bottle is not used.
Related information... Pre-trigger solution (i System), page 1-143

Trigger solution (i System), page 1-144 Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98 Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-31
Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System)

Perform this procedure to manually start transfer of buffer from the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory to an i System processing module. This procedure is required when an error condition occurs during buffer transfer.
All except Offline and Stopped General operator NA
To initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM: 1. Verify the ARM is in Ready status (green indicator under the Start key is illuminated). If not in Ready status, press the Stop key followed by the Start key on the ARM keypad. 2. Select the appropriate Module option on the Supply status screen, and then select F2 - Update Supplies. The Update supplies window displays. 3. Select the Add buffer check box. 4. Select Done. The updated Supply status screen displays.
Related information... Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-31 ARM optional accessory (i System), page 1-109
Section 5-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent inventory management

Always check reagent inventory before processing samples. Use the Reagent screens to manage reagent inventory. Reagent inventory management topics include: Reagent status screens, page 5-61 Reagent history screen, page 5-75 ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management, page 5-79 c System procedures - reagent inventory management, page 5-84 i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - reagent inventory management, page 5-102
Reagent status screens

From the Reagent status and Reagent status all screens you can view the status of reagents on board the system. The view that displays for the Reagent status screen is dependent on the processing module configuration of your system. Reagent status screen and views topics include: Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-61 Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64 Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-67 Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69 Windows - Reagent status screens, page 5-70
Reagent status screen - c System view

From the c System view of the Reagent status screen you can view information for reagents loaded on the reagent carousels, such as: Reagent location Assay name Calibration status Remaining tests Reagent status
A graphical representation of the reagent carousels indicates the location of the reagents and their statuses.
Section 5-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
You can also access windows to: Find a specific reagent Update the reagent inventory Print the Reagent Load Error report Print the Reagent Status report View detailed reagent information Assign locations for non-bar coded reagents Reset volume and stability for non-bar coded reagents
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. The two c System views of the Reagent status screen are: c 8000 view c 16000 view
Figure 5.13: Reagent status screen - c 8000 view
Section 5-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.14: Reagent status screen - c 16000 view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions, page Appendix E-110. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column R1, R2 ASSAY REMAINING TESTS CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS Sort description R1 carousel position in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Numerically is ascending order. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 and Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64.
Related procedures... Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79

Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80 Find a specific reagent, page 5-81 View reagent details, page 5-82
Section 5-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84 Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85 Load sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-88 Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91 Replace sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-93 Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96 Unload bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98 Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-100 Print a report, page 5-333
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view

Perform this procedure to display the c System view of the Reagent status screen.
To access the Reagent status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the reagent status button on the c 8000 or c 16000 processing module graphic. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent status. The Reagent status screen - c 8000 or c 16000 view displays.

Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-61
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view

From the i 2000/i 2000SR view of the Reagent status screen you can view information for reagents loaded on the reagent carousel, such as: Reagent location Assay name Calibration status
Section 5-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remaining tests Reagent status Reagent inventory management
A graphical representation of the reagent carousel indicates the location of the reagents and their statuses. You can also access windows to: Find a specific reagent Update the reagent inventory Print the Reagent Load Error report Print the Reagent Status report View detailed reagent information
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. Figure 5.15: Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions, page Appendix E-111.
Section 5-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column P ASSAY REMAINING TESTS CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS Sort description Carousel position in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Numerically is ascending order. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 and Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69.
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-66.
Related procedures... Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79

Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80 Find a specific reagent, page 5-81 View reagent details, page 5-82 Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84 Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-102 Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-105 Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106 Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-108 Print a report, page 5-333
Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view

Perform this procedure to display the i System view of the Reagent status screen.
To access the Reagent status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the reagent status button on the desired i System processing module graphic.
Section 5-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent status. The Reagent status screen - c System view displays for a standalone c System or an integrated system. OR The Reagent status screen - i System view displays for a standalone or multi-module i System. 2. Select another Module option to display a different view. (optional)

Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
Reagent status screen - View all view

From the View all view of the Reagent status screen you can see information for reagents loaded on all modules, such as: Assay name Reagent location, lot number, expiration date, and onboard stability Reagent and calibration status Remaining tests
You can also access windows to: Find a specific reagent Print the Reagent Load Error report Print the Reagent Status report View detailed reagent information
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data.
Section 5-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.16: Reagent status screen - View all view
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions, page Appendix E-112. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column M/P ASSAY and REAGENT LOT REMAINING TESTS and STABILITY CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS Sort description Module, and then carousel position in ascending order. Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically is ascending order. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 and Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69. First to last to expire.
EXP. DATE
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-69.
Related procedures... Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80

Find a specific reagent, page 5-81 View reagent details, page 5-82
Section 5-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Print a report, page 5-333 Reagent inventory management
Access the Reagent status screen - View all view

Perform this procedure to display the Reagent status screen - View all view.
To access the Reagent status screen - View all view: 1. Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent status. The Reagent status screen - c System view displays. This view displays for a standalone c System and an integrated system. OR The Reagent status screen - i System view displays. This view displays for standalone and multi-module i Systems. 2. Select the View all option. The Reagent status screen - view all view displays.
Related information... Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-61

Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64 Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-67
Descriptions of reagent statuses

You can use reagent status information to determine the status of each reagent and if there are problems with the reagent kits loaded on the system. The system displays one of the following reagent statuses for each reagent kit. When you select the REAGENT STATUS column heading, the reagent status sorts in the following order. Table 5.1: Reagent statuses
Status BC Fail Undefined Description The bar code on the reagent bottle is unreadable. The reagent configuration for a 1D bar code is not defined. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93.
Section 5-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Table 5.1: Reagent statuses (continued)

Status Load Error Description
c System:
The reagent is loaded in the wrong reagent supply center. For example, an R1 reagent is loaded in reagent supply center 2.
c 16000:
The reagent is loaded in the wrong carousel (inner versus outer) in a reagent supply center. For example, the ICT diluent is loaded in the R1 Inner (B-line) carousel when it should be loaded in the R1 Outer (A-line) carousel.
i System:
The reagent kit contains more than three bottles and is loaded in positions 25 and 1 on the reagent carousel. Missing Bottle Extra Bottle Mismatch (i System) The reagent kit is missing a required bottle. The detected bottle(s) is not part of a known reagent kit or insufficient bottles are loaded to create a kit. One or more detected bottles are not linked to the reagent kit. NOTE: Bottles in a reagent kit are linked together by the system software when they are scanned for the first time. The bottles must be kept together and cannot be used for another reagent kit. No Assay Empty LLS Error Expired Low Alert Overridden Mixing (i System) OK The reagent is not used by any assay file installed on the system. The reagent is empty. A liquid level sense error occurred during aspiration of the reagent. The reagent is expired or has exceeded the onboard stability time. The remaining volume of the reagent is below the configured number of tests for the low alert notification. The operator has overridden a reagent that is expired or has exceeded the onboard stability time. The reagent is mixing during run initialization to disperse the microparticles. The reagent is OK.
Windows - Reagent status screens

Windows you can access from the Reagent status screen include:
Section 5-70
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window, page 5-71 Assign location window (c System), page 5-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Find options (Reagent status) window, page 5-73 Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window, page 5-74 Print options window, page 5-346
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window

From the Details for reagent (Reagent status) window you can view reagent, assay, and component details for a reagent. This information allows you to address reagent inventory concerns. Figure 5.17: Details for reagent (Reagent status) window - c System
Section 5-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.18: Details for reagent (Reagent status) window - i System
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-113.
Related procedures... View reagent details, page 5-82
Assign location window (c System)

From the Assign location window, you can configure a location in the reagent supply centers for non-bar coded reagents. You can also unload non-bar coded reagents when inventory is depleted, expired, or space is needed for a different assay.
Section 5-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.19: Assign location window (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Assign location window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-114.
Related procedures... Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91

Load sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-88 Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-100
Find options (Reagent status) window

From the Find options (Reagent status) window you can search for specific reagent(s) on a single module by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Section 5-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.20: Find options (Reagent status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-115.
Related procedures... Find a specific reagent, page 5-81
Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window

From the Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window you can search for specific reagents on all modules by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Section 5-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.21: Find options (Reagent status - view all) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-115.
Related procedures... Find a specific reagent, page 5-81
Reagent history screen

From the Reagent history screen you can view historical information on reagent kits that have been used on the system, such as: Assay name Reagent location, lot number, onboard stability, and expiration date Reagent and calibration status Remaining tests
You can also access windows to: Find a specific reagent View detailed reagent information
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. The system stores information for up to 3000 reagent kits.
Section 5-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.22: Reagent history screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Reagent history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-116. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column M/P ASSAY and REAGENT LOT REMAINING TESTS and STABILITY CAL STATUS and REAGENT STATUS Sort description Module, and then carousel position in ascending order. Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 and Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69. First to last to expire.
EXP. DATE
To display this screen, see Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-77.
Related procedures... View reagent history details, page 5-83

Find a specific reagent, page 5-81
Section 5-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Access the Reagent history screen

Perform this procedure to display the Reagent history screen.
To access the Reagent history screen: Select Reagents from the menu bar, and then select Reagent history. The Reagent history screen displays.
Related information... Reagent history screen, page 5-75
Window - Reagent history screen

Windows you can access from the Reagent history screen include: Details for reagent (history) window, page 5-77 Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window, page 5-74
Details for reagent (history) window

From the Details for reagent (history) window you can view reagent, assay, and component details for a reagent. This information provides a historical perspective that is useful in a troubleshooting scenario.
Section 5-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.23: Details for reagent (history) window - c System
Figure 5.24: Details for reagent (history) window - i System
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-117.
Related procedures... View reagent history details, page 5-83

Find a specific reagent, page 5-81
Section 5-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ARCHITECT System procedures - Reagent inventory management

Procedures that are common to both the c System and the i System are: Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79 Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80 Find a specific reagent, page 5-81 View reagent details, page 5-82 View reagent history details, page 5-83 Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84
Verify reagent inventory on a single module

Perform this procedure before initiating sample processing to verify adequate reagent inventory or when the reagent status button on the processing module graphic displays a caution icon. NOTE: The status that displays reflects the inventory that remains after the system processes the samples that have been scanned by the sample bar code reader. You can create orders when inventory levels are insufficient. However, if inventory is not adequate when you initiate sample processing, tests become exceptions and are not processed. To verify reagent inventory on all modules, see Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80.
Prerequisite
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64 Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-66
To verify reagent inventory on a single module: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Reagent status screen. (optional) Reagent information for the selected module displays. 2. View reagent inventory.
Section 5-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To print a Reagent Status report or Reagent Load Error report, see Print a report, page 5-333.

Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64 Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69 Reagent Load Error Report, page Appendix A-71 Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR), page Appendix A-73
Verify reagent inventory on all modules

Perform this procedure before initiating sample processing to verify adequate reagent inventory or when the reagent status button on the processing module displays a caution icon. NOTE: The status that displays reflects the inventory that remains after the system processes the samples that have been scanned by the sample bar code reader. You can create orders when inventory levels are insufficient. However, if inventory is not adequate when you initiate sample processing, tests become exceptions and are not processed. To view reagent inventory on a single module system, see Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79.
Prerequisite
To verify reagent inventory on all modules: 1. Select the View all option on the Reagent status screen. The Reagent status screen - View all view displays. 2. View reagent inventory. To print a Reagent Status report or Reagent Load Error report, see Print a report, page 5-333.
Section 5-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64 Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-67 Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69 Reagent Load Error Report, page Appendix A-71 Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR), page Appendix A-73
Find a specific reagent

Perform this procedure to search for specific reagents by entering search criteria in one or more fields.
Prerequisite
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64 Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-66 Access the Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-69 Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-77
To find a specific reagent: 1. Select the appropriate Module option on the Reagent status screen. The reagent inventory for the selected module displays. 2. Select F3 - Find. The Find options (Reagent status) window displays. 3. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all data entry boxes except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the Reagent lot data entry box, all reagent lots starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345M100, 12346M100, and 12347M100.
Section 5-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: To display c System reagent(s) for a specific reagent carousel, you must enter a position in the P data entry box and select the R1 and/or R2 check box. If you do not enter a position (P), all reagents display. 4. Select Done to initiate the search. The Reagent status screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64 Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-67 Find options (Reagent status) window, page 5-73 Find options (Reagent status - View all or Reagent history) window, page 5-74 Reagent history screen, page 5-75
View reagent details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (Reagent status) window. From this window you can view detailed information for reagents.
Prerequisite
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64 Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-66 Access the Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-69
To view reagent details: 1. Select a Module option on the Reagent status screen. 2. Select the desired reagent(s) from the table or select F2 - Select all.
Section 5-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Select F7 - Details. The Details for reagent (Reagent status) window displays. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each reagent if you selected more than one. (optional) 5. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen. Reagent inventory management

Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64 Reagent status screen - View all view, page 5-67 Details for reagent (Reagent status) window, page 5-71
View reagent history details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for reagent (Reagent history) window. From this window you can view detailed information for reagents.
Access the Reagent history screen, page 5-77

To view reagent history details: 1. Select the desired reagent(s) from the table on the Reagent history screen or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for reagent (Reagent history) window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each reagent if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Reagent history screen.
Related information... Reagent history screen, page 5-75

Details for reagent (history) window, page 5-77
Section 5-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Scan the reagent carousel(s)

Perform this procedure to update reagent statuses by scanning the reagent kits currently on board the reagent supply centers.
Prerequisite
Warming or Ready General operator NA
To scan the reagent carousels: 1. Select the appropriate Module option. The Reagent status screen displays. 2. Select F4 - Scan to update reagent inventory. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button. The updated status displays on the Reagent status screen.

Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
c System procedures - reagent inventory management

c System reagent inventory management procedures include: Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85 Load sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-88 Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91 Replace sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-93 Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96 Unload bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98 Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-100
Section 5-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Load bar coded reagents (c System)

Perform this procedure to load new bar coded reagents into the reagent supply centers on the processing module. NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagents kits to a processing module controlled by a different SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite Check reagent inventory
Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64

Module status User access level Supplies Ready or Scheduled pause General operator Bar coded reagent kits Adapter, if required
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See the assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.
To load bar coded reagents: 1. Verify the expiration date of the reagent. DO NOT use the reagent if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Invert the reagent cartridge gently to ensure a homogenous solution. 3. Remove and discard the cap. 4. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 5. Open the processing module cover. 6. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the reagent supply center. NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for reagent supply center 2 to become available.
Section 5-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
7. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the reagent supply center cover(s), and then open the cover(s). CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module.
8. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to open positions. 9. Load the reagent cartridges into any open positions in the appropriate R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. For additional loading information, see Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System), page 5-87. NOTE: The 20 mL (cartridge), small (55 mL), and 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridges require an adapter. 10. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s) down until you hear a click. 11. Close the processing module cover. 12. Initiate or resume sample processing, or select F4 - Scan on the Reagent status screen to update reagent inventory.
Section 5-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on a processing module and the bar code reader scans the bar code label, the system software links individual R1 and R2 cartridges together as a kit. If the cartridges are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or Extra bottle displays. The system tracks onboard stability only when the reagent kit is on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you load a reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Reagent kits and components (c System), page 1-127 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000), page 1-154
Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System)

Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers depend on what item you are loading, what type of cartridge or bottle you are loading, and which c System processing module you are loading it on. The following tables describe the loading requirements: Table 5.2: Loading requirements for the c 16000 processing module
Item R2 reagent cartridge Requirement If the R1 reagent cartridge is loaded in (or assigned to) an A, B, or C segment in the outer carousel, then the R2 reagent cartridge must be loaded in (or assigned to) an A, B, or C segment in the outer carousel of the R2 supply center. If the R1 reagent cartridge is loaded in (or assigned to) the D segment in the inner carousel, then the R2 reagent cartridge must be loaded in (or assigned to) the D segment in the inner carousel of the R2 supply center. Sample diluent Must be loaded in both the outer (segment A, B, or C) and inner (segment D) carousels.
Section 5-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Table 5.2: Loading requirements for the c 16000 processing module

Item ICT sample diluent Requirement Must be loaded in an A, B, or C segment in the outer carousel of the R1 supply center.
New reagent cartridge Must be loaded on the same carousel (inner or outer) or bottle as the empty reagent cartridge or bottle. Recalibration of the assay is required when a replacement cartridge or bottle is placed in a different carousel.
Table 5.3: Loading requirements for a 20mL cartridge, small (55 ml) cartridge, or 20 mL bottle
Item Requirement
20 mL cartridge or 1. Load the reagent cartridge adapter into the reagent small (55 ml) cartridge supply center. 2. Insert the cartridge into the adapter and then set the cartridge completely. 20 mL bottle 1. Insert the 20 mL bottle into the 20mL reagent cartridge adapter from the bottom of the adapter. 2. Turn the bottle so the bar code label faces outward. 3. Load the bottle and adapter into the reagent supply center. 4. Ensure the bottle touches the bottom of the reagent supply center.
Load sample diluent(s) (c System)

Perform this procedure to load sample diluent(s) into reagent supply center 1 on the processing module. NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent kits to a processing module controlled by a different SCC (system control center).
Prerequisite
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric c System), page 2-92 Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System), page 2-94 Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64
Module status
Ready
Section 5-88
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

General operator Sample diluent Reagent cartridge Adapter, if required
To load sample diluent(s): 1. Select F6 - Assign location on the Reagent status screen. The Assign location window displays. 2. Select the desired sample diluent from the Reagent kits table. 3. Select the desired Reagent supply center 1 option, and then enter the desired location in the data entry box. 4. Select Add. The assigned position displays in the Reagent kits table. NOTE: For the c 16000 processing module, repeat steps 2 - 4 to assign a diluent to both the outer (segment A, B, or C) and the inner (segment D) carousels. 5. Note the displayed R1 cartridge size. 6. Verify the expiration date of the sample diluent. DO NOT use the sample diluent if the expiration date is exceeded. 7. Pour the sample diluent into the specified reagent cartridge type. 8. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 9. Label the container(s) with the name and expiration date. 10. Open the processing module cover. 11. Press the green button on the front portion of the reagent supply center 1 cover, and then open the cover. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module.
Section 5-89
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
12. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to the assigned location(s). 13. Place the cartridge into the assigned location(s) in reagent supply center 1. The 20 mL (cartridge) and small (55 mL) reagent cartridges require an adapter. When loading a 20 mL (cartridge) or small (55 mL) reagent cartridge: a. b. Load the small reagent cartridge adapter into the reagent supply center. Insert the cartridge into the adapter, and then seat the cartridge completely.
14. Close the reagent supply center cover by pushing the cover down until you hear a click. 15. Close the processing module cover. 16. Select Done on the Assign location window to return to the Reagent status screen.

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Assign location window (c System), page 5-72 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35
Section 5-90
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000), page 1-154
Load non-bar coded reagents (c System)

Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded reagents into the reagent supply centers on the processing module. NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent kits to a processing module controlled by a different system control center.
Prerequisite
Configure a user-defined sample diluent (photometric c System), page 2-92 Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System), page 2-94 Access the Reagent status screen - c System view, page 5-64
Ready General operator Reagent kits Reagent cartridges, if required Adapters, if required
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
To load non-bar coded reagents: 1. Select F6 - Assign location on the Reagent status screen. The Assign location window displays. 2. Select the desired reagent from the Reagent kits table. 3. Select the desired Reagent supply center 1 option, and then enter the desired location in the data entry box.
Section 5-91
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
For additional loading information for the c 16000 processing module, see Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System), page 5-87. 4. Select the desired Reagent supply center 2 option, and then enter the desired location in the data entry box. (optional) 5. Select Add. The assigned position(s) displays in the Reagent kits table. 6. Verify the expiration date of the reagent. DO NOT use the reagent if the expiration date is exceeded. 7. Invert the reagent cartridge gently to ensure a homogenous solution. 8. Remove and discard the cap. 9. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 10. Open the processing module cover. 11. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the reagent supply center cover(s), and then open the cover(s). CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module.
Section 5-92
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

12. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to the assigned location. 13. Load the reagent cartridges into the assigned location in the appropriate R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. For additional loading information, see Loading requirements for the reagent supply centers (c System), page 5-87. NOTE: The 20 mL (cartridge), small (55 mL), and 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridges require an adapter. 14. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s) down until you hear a click. 15. Close the processing module cover. 16. Select Done on the Assign location window to return to the Reagent status screen.

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Assign location window (c System), page 5-72 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000), page 1-154
Replace sample diluent(s) (c System)

Perform this procedure to replace sample diluents and to reset the sample diluent volume. NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent kits to a processing module controlled by a different SCC (system control center).

Ready or Scheduled pause
Section 5-93
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
General operator Sample diluents Reagent cartridge
To replace sample diluent(s): 1. Verify the expiration date of the sample diluent. DO NOT use the sample diluent if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Pour the sample diluent into a new reagent cartridge. 3. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 4. Label the container with the name and expiration date. 5. Open the processing module cover. 6. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the reagent supply center. NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for reagent supply center 2 to become available. 7. Press the green button on the front portion of the reagent supply center 1 cover, and then open the cover. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module.
Section 5-94
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

8. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to the assigned location(s). 9. Remove the empty cartridge and place the new cartridge into the assigned location in reagent supply center 1. IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) may be wet. Do not drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges. 10. Close the reagent supply center cover by pushing the cover down until you hear a click. 11. Close the processing module cover. 12. Select the desired sample diluent from the Reagent status table on the Reagent status screen, and then select F8 - Reset. A confirmation message displays. 13. Select OK. The updated remaining tests and reagent status display in the Reagent status table.

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55
Section 5-95
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128
Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System)

Perform this procedure to replace non-bar coded reagents and to reset the reagent volume and onboard stability. NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent kits to a processing module controlled by a different SCC (system control center).

Ready or Scheduled pause General operator Reagents
To replace non-bar coded reagents: 1. Verify the expiration date of the reagent. DO NOT use the reagent if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Invert the reagent cartridge gently to ensure a homogenous solution. 3. Remove and discard the cap. 4. Remove air bubbles, if they exist, with a clean applicator stick. 5. Open the processing module cover. 6. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the reagent supply center.
Section 5-96
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for reagent supply center 2 to become available. 7. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the reagent supply center cover(s), and then open the cover(s). CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module.
8. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to the assigned location(s). 9. Remove the empty cartridge(s) and place the new cartridge(s) into the assigned location(s) in the appropriate reagent supply center. IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) may be wet. Do not drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges. 10. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s) down until you hear a click. 11. Close the processing module cover.
Section 5-97
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
12. Select the desired non-bar coded reagent from the Reagent status table on the Reagent status screen, and then select F8 Reset. A confirmation message displays. 13. Select OK. NOTE: The updated remaining tests and reagent status display in the Reagent status table. The onboard stability timer restarts. To update the onboard stability timer you must perform a reset every time you load a new reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128
Unload bar coded reagents (c System)

Perform this procedure when reagents are depleted or have expired, or when you need room to add a different assay reagent kit in the reagent supply center.

Ready or Scheduled pause General operator NA
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See the assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.
Section 5-98
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To unload bar coded reagents: 1. Open the processing module cover. 2. Verify the R1 and/or R2 carousel advance key(s) on the processing module keypad are illuminated before accessing the reagent supply center. NOTE: If the module status is Scheduled pause, the keys illuminate as each reagent supply center becomes available. It may take up to five minutes after you pause the module for reagent supply center 2 to become available. 3. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the reagent supply center cover(s), and then open the cover(s). CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module. Reagent inventory management
4. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to provide access to the reagent(s). 5. Remove the reagent(s). IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) may be wet. Do not drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges.
Section 5-99
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
6. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s) down until you hear a click. 7. Close the processing module cover. 8. Initiate or resume sample processing, or select F4 - Scan on the Reagent status screen to update the reagent inventory. NOTE: Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you unload a reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the assay-specific package insert or reagent application sheet.

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Reagent cartridges (c System), page 1-128 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000), page 1-151 Reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000), page 1-154
Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System)

Perform this procedure to unload reagents when inventory is depleted or has expired, or when you need room to add a different assay reagent kit onto the processing module.

Ready General operator NA
Section 5-100
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To unload non-bar coded reagents: 1. Open the processing module cover. 2. Press the green or orange button on the front portion of the reagent supply center cover(s), and then open the cover(s). CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 processing module. Reagent inventory management
3. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent supply center to provide access to the reagent(s). 4. Remove the reagent(s). IMPORTANT: The outside of the cartridge(s) may be wet. Do not drip condensation into the other reagent cartridges. 5. Close the reagent supply center cover(s) by pushing the cover(s) down until you hear a click. 6. Close the processing module cover. 7. Select F6 - Assign location on the Reagent status screen. The Assign location window displays. 8. Select the desired reagent from the Reagent kits table.
Section 5-101
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
9. Select Unload. The assigned position no longer displays in the Reagent kits table. 10. Select Done to return to the Reagent status screen. NOTE: Onboard stability is no longer tracked for the removed reagent(s). To update the onboard stability timer you must perform an unload procedure every time you unload a reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29 Reagent supply centers (c 8000), page 1-35 Reagent supply centers (c 16000), page 1-55 Assign location window (c System), page 5-72
i 2000/i 2000SR procedures - reagent inventory management

i System reagent inventory management procedures include: Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-102 Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-105 Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106 Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-108
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure to prepare new reagent bottles before loading them on the processing module.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA NA General operator Reagent kits One septum per reagent bottle
Section 5-102
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See the assay-specific package insert.
To prepare new reagent bottles: 1. Verify the required assay reagent components are present. IMPORTANT: Do not mix reagent kit components from different reagent lots. Do not pool reagents. 2. Record the reagent lot numbers. NOTE: An ARCHITECT i System tracks only the reagent lot number from the reagent bottle. Record the lot numbers found on the reagent kit box prior to discarding the box. Also, record the reagent lot numbers from the reagent bottles. 3. Verify the reagent component is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 4. Ensure the reagent bottles are not leaking. 5. Invert the microparticle bottle gently 30 times to resuspend microparticles that may have settled during shipment. 6. Inspect the bottle to ensure microparticles are resuspended. If microparticles still adhere to the bottle or cap, continue to invert the bottle until the microparticles have been completely resuspended. IMPORTANT: DO NOT use if the microparticles do not resuspend. Contact your Area Customer Support. 7. Open the reagent bottle and discard the white cap. 8. Check each bottle for bubbles. If bubbles are present, remove them with a clean applicator stick.
Section 5-103
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
9. Wear clean gloves to prevent contamination, and then remove a septum from the bag. 10. Carefully seat the septum onto the top of the bottle. Ensure the reagent does not contaminate your gloves.
IMPORTANT: You MUST use septums to prevent reagent evaporation and contamination and to ensure reagent integrity. Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if septums are not used as instructed.
Section 5-104
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Once you have placed a septum on a reagent bottle, do not invert the bottle as this results in reagent leakage and may compromise assay results. Reagent bottles with septums installed must be stored UPRIGHT. Do not remove septums once they have been installed on reagent bottles. To load reagents, see Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Related information... Reagent kits and components (i System), page 1-138

Septums and replacement caps (i System), page 1-140 Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure to prepare used reagent bottles before loading them on the processing module.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator Reagent kits Septum as required
To prepare used reagent bottles: 1. Verify required assay reagent components are present. IMPORTANT: Do not pool reagents. 2. Verify the reagent component is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 3. Ensure reagent bottles have been stored upright. 4. Open the reagent bottles and discard the teal-colored replacement caps.
Section 5-105
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
5. Ensure reagent bottles have septums. To load reagents, see Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Related information... Reagent kits and components (i System), page 1-138

Septums and replacement caps (i System), page 1-140 Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure to load reagent bottles into the carousel. NOTE: To ensure correct reagent status tracking, do not move reagent kits to a processing module controlled by a different system control center. Do not open the i System processing center cover(s) while the processing module is in Running status. If you open the cover(s), all tests in progress become exceptions and results are not reported. The processing module status changes to Stopped.
Prerequisite
Prepare new reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-102 Prepare used reagent bottles (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-105 Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-66
Warming or Ready General operator Reagent kits (new or used)
To load reagents: 1. Open the front processing center cover and the reagent carousel cover. See the label on the inside of the reagent carousel to facilitate reagent loading.
Section 5-106
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
2. Place the black bottle with the yellow color band securely into the yellow ring (inner location). Ensure the bottle is not tilted and the reagent bar code faces the center of the reagent carousel. NOTE: If the reagent kit has more than three bottles, load the bottle designated with a #2 in the color band to the left of the same color-band bottle designated #1. 3. Place the bottle with the pink color band securely into the pink ring (middle location). Ensure the bottle is not tilted and the reagent bar code faces the center of the reagent carousel. 4. Place the bottle with the green color band securely in the green ring (outer location). Ensure the bottle is not tilted and the reagent bar code faces the center of the reagent carousel. 5. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the reagent carousel and provide access to additional open positions. (optional) 6. Close the reagent carousel cover and the front processing center cover. 7. Select F4 - Scan on the Reagent status screen to update reagent inventory. NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on a processing module and the bar code reader scans the bar code label, the system software links individual bottles together as a kit. If the bottles are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or Extra bottle displays.
Section 5-107
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you load a reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the assay-specific package insert.
Related information... Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77 Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-85
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Perform this procedure when reagents are depleted or expired, or when you need room to add a different assay reagent kit. WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
NOTE: Do not open the ARCHITECT i System processing center cover(s) while the processing module is in Running status. If you open the cover(s), all tests in progress become exceptions and results are not reported. The processing module status changes to Stopped.
Access the Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-66
Warming or Ready General operator Replacement cap (one for each bottle removed)
To unload reagents: 1. Open the front processing module cover and the reagent carousel cover. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
Section 5-108
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Press the carousel advance key on the processing module keypad to advance the carousel and to provide access to the reagent(s). 3. Place new teal-colored replacement caps on the bottles, covering the septums, and remove the bottles from the carousel. IMPORTANT: Always use replacement caps on used reagent bottles. Do not use the original bottle caps. Do not invert bottles with a septum and replacement cap, as this results in reagent leakage and may compromise assay results. Reagent bottles MUST be stored in an UPRIGHT position. Empty reagent kits may be discarded without the teal-colored replacement cap. 4. Close the reagent carousel cover and front processing module cover. 5. Select F-4 Scan on the Reagent status screen to update reagent inventory. NOTE: Once you place a new reagent(s) on a processing module and the bar code reader scans the bar code label, the system software links individual bottles together as a kit. If the bottles are not kept together, the reagent status of Missing bottle or Extra bottle displays. Onboard stability is tracked only when the reagent kit is on board the processing module. To update the onboard stability timer, you must perform a reagent scan every time you unload a reagent kit. For information on reagent onboard stability, see the assay-specific package insert. 6. Place the bottles UPRIGHT in refrigerated storage according to instructions in the assay-specific package insert. NOTE: For reagents stored off the system, it is recommended you store them in their original trays and boxes to ensure they remain upright.
Related information... Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-64
Septums and replacement caps (i System), page 1-140 Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77 Reagent carousel and bar code reader (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-85
Section 5-109
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient and control orders
Section 5

Patient and control orders are created automatically or by an operator. Patient and control orders topics include: Automated ordering, page 5-110 Patient order screens and views, page 5-113 Control order screen and views, page 5-134 Order status screen, page 5-150 Sample status screen, page 5-162
Automated ordering
Automated patient sample and control ordering is available using host computer download, host order query, or automated control ordering. Host computer download, page 5-110 Host order query, page 5-111 Automated control ordering, page 5-111 Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-112
Host computer download

Host computer download is the process of downloading sample orders from a host computer to the SCC (system control center). Depending on the type of sample handler: All sample handlers except an LAS (laboratory automated system) track - When the bar code reader scans a bar coded sample and the host has downloaded an order to the SCC, the system processes the test(s). LAS track - When the LAS system sends sample information to the SCC and the host has downloaded an order to the SCC, the system processes the test(s). RSH (robotic sample handler) - When the host computer sends a rerun order for a sample to the SCC and the sample has not been unloaded from the RSH, the system processes the test(s).
When the host downloads new orders, the Orders icon blinks. You can view the orders on the Order status screen.
Section 5-110
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: For automated ordering by host computer download, you must configure your system to communicate with a host computer. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
Host order query

Host order query is the process of downloading a sample order from a host computer to the SCC (system control center) after a request from the SCC. Depending on the type of sample handler: All sample handlers except an LAS (laboratory automation system) track - When a bar code reader scans a bar coded sample (sample identification number not configured as a control) and an order does not exist on the SCC, the SCC sends a query to the host computer. LAS track - When the LAS system sends sample information to the SCC and an order does not exist, the SCC sends a query to the host computer.
If the host computer has test requests for that sample it sends them. When a new order is downloaded the Orders icon blinks. You can view the order on the Order status screen. If the host computer has no orders for the sample (or no record of the sample) you are notified by a message on the System logs screen Temporary message log view. NOTE: For automated ordering by host order query, you must configure your system to communicate with a host computer with query. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. If the ARCHITECT System encounters three consecutive host time-out errors while waiting for a response from the host computer, the system communications setting "On with query" is turned off and the sample handler is paused. To continue using the query mode, you must reconfigure this setting. NOTE: If the host computer creates rerun orders, you must download the orders to the SCC. The SCC does not query for rerun orders.
Automated control ordering

Automated control ordering is the process the system uses to automatically order control tests by associating an SID (sample ID) with a predefined test(s). When a bar code is scanned and recognized as a configured control, the system automatically processes the test(s)
Section 5-111
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
configured for that SID. You can view the order on the Order status screen. NOTE: For automated control ordering, you must configure an SID for the control level. See Configure a bar code for a single analyte control level, page 2-178 or Configure a multiconstituent bar code SID, page 2-180.
Auto retest (patient samples)

Auto retest is the process the system uses to automatically generate rerun orders for patient tests (excluding controls and calibrators). For each test, the system can generate two automatic rerun orders. 1. The system compares test results to the configured retest rules starting with the first rule. When a result meets the retest criteria of a rule, the system generates a rerun order without evaluating further rules. You can view the tests scheduled for rerun on the Order status, Rerun status, and Sample status screens. The R (rerun) code is assigned to the test. If your system is configured with an RSH (robotic sample handler), you can configure the system to automatically reposition the sample(s) for retest. If your system is not configured for automatic repositioning, you must reload the sample(s) to be retested. If your system is configured with an SSH (standard sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system), you must reload the sample(s) to perform the auto retest. If you are using the sample carousel (c System), you must: Open the sample carousel cover. Reload the samples, if additional volume is required. Close the sample carousel cover.
2. The system compares retest results to the configured retest rules. If a retest result meets the retest criteria of a rule, the system generates a second rerun order. This rerun order displays and processes the same as the first. NOTE: If you manually rerun a test result or test exception, the system restarts the auto retest process and can generate two additional automatic rerun orders for each test. To configure retest rules, see Configure a retest rule, page 2-73.
Section 5-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Patient order screens and views

You use patient order screens and their views to create patient orders. Patient order screen and views topics include: Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-113 Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-115 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-116 Procedures - Patient order screen, page 5-118 Windows - Patient order screen and views, page 5-131
Patient order screen - Single patient view

From the single patient view of the Patient order screen you can create non-batch patient orders when: The system is not connected to a host computer The host computer is inoperable The LAS (laboratory automation system) track is inoperable A sample does not have a bar code label
You can also access windows to enter additional patient information and order assay options.
Section 5-113
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.25: Patient order screen - single patient view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions, page Appendix E-22. To display this screen, see Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-114.
Related procedures... Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118

Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view

Perform this procedure to display the single order view of the Patient order screen.
To access the Patient order screen - single order view: Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order. The Patient order screen - single order view displays.
Section 5-114
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related information... Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-113
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view

From the Batch (bar coded) view of the Patient order screen you can create patient batch orders for bar coded samples. NOTE: Batch ordering is not available if your system is configured with an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler. Batch processing is not available for the c System sample carousel. Batch samples placed on the carousel will not be processed as part of the batch. You can also access windows to change the batch name, add a comment for the batch order, and order assay options. To change the view to allow you to order a non-bar coded batch, see Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21. Figure 5.26: Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-24. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Patient order screen Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-116.
Section 5-115
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Related procedures... Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121
Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view

Perform this procedure to display the batch view of the Patient order screen.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies Batch ordering sample type configured to bar coded Any General operator NA
To access the Patient order screen - batch (bar coded) view: 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order. The Patient order screen - single order view displays. 2. Select the Batch option. The Patient order screen - Batch view displays.
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-115 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-116
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view

From the Batch (non-bar coded) view of the Patient order screen you can create patient batch orders for non-bar coded samples. You can also access windows to: Change the batch name Enter a comment for the batch order Order assay options
NOTE: Batch ordering is not available if your system is configured with an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample handler. Batch ordering is not available for the c System sample carousel. Batch samples placed on the carousel will not be processed as part of the batch.
Section 5-116
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To change the view to allow you to order a bar coded batch, see Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21. Figure 5.27: Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-25. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Patient order screen Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-117.
Related procedures... Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125
Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view

Perform this procedure to display the Batch view of the Patient order screen.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies Batch ordering sample type configured to non-bar coded Any General operator NA
To access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view:

Section 5-117
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Patient order. 2. The Patient order screen - Single patient view displays. 3. Select the Batch option. The Patient order screen - batch view displays.
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-115 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-116
Procedures - Patient order screen

Procedures you can perform from the Patient order screen and its related windows include: Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118 Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121 Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125 Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128
Create a patient order (single order)

Perform this procedure to create a manual patient order. To create batch orders, see: Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121 Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-114
To create a patient order (single order): 1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Patient order screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and results. (optional) 2. Select the carrier or carousel button, if displayed. 3. Enter a carrier or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if displayed.
Section 5-118
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Enter a position in the P data entry box, if displayed. NOTE: When using bar coded samples, steps 3 and 4 are not required. If a carrier and position are entered and the bar code on the sample is not seen, the system automatically uses the scanned C/P as the unique ID and the sample is processed as entered. 5. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box. NOTE: You can use the bar code scanner, if available, to scan the SID. When using the bar code scanner, Caps Lock on the keyboard must be off to prevent an incorrect read of the SID. IMPORTANT: To ensure tests processed include the correct information, confirm that your laboratory is not reusing the same SID prior to completion or deletion of previously pending orders. 6. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional) NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 7. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select an assay(s) from the Assays list. NOTE: If you selected the carousel button on a ci 8200 System, panel names that include ARCHITECT i System assays do not display. To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following: Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically orders the assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report these results. Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report the system-ordered constituent results. Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The system releases and reports all results.
Section 5-119
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
8. Select F2 - Sample details to enter patient information. (optional) The Details for sample window displays. a. Enter patient information in the appropriate data entry box(es) and/or select the appropriate Gender option.
NOTE: When entering a PID, enter only the details that are known to be accurate. If the information is not known, leave the data entry box empty. Never edit information previously entered. If you edit the PID, the software recognizes the PID as a different and unique patient. b. c. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient order screen.
9. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. (optional) The Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor. OR The Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor. a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. You cannot order replicates for calculated assays. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order.
Section 5-120
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

b. Patient and control orders
Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
NOTE: Overriding the system module scheduler may impact overall throughput. c. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 9a and 9b for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient order screen.
d.
10. Select F3 - Add order. To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152. To print the Order List Report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336. NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order List report.
Details for sample window, page 5-133 Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-132 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203
Create a patient order (batch, bar coded)

Perform this procedure to order the same test(s) on multiple patient samples. You can process batch orders on the standard or robotic sample handlers. If you have an RSH and/or sample carousel, you may order tests for priority processing on patient or control samples and load them in the priority bay or sample carousel while the batch order is processing.
Section 5-121
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
IMPORTANT: When running a bar coded batch you cannot: Load calibrators Load priority samples in the SSH Leave empty spaces in a carrier Load batch samples in a carrier with tests in process
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within the batch. If you add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is complete. To change the view to allow you to order a non-bar coded batch, see Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21. To create a single order for a patient sample, see Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to bar coded
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-116
Module status User access level Supplies Any General operator NA
To create a patient order (batch, bar coded): 1. Select the Order type: Batch option on the Patient order screen. The Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view displays. 2. Enter a starting sample ID in the Starting SID data entry box. 3. Enter an ending sample ID in the Ending SID data entry box. NOTE: Batch processing begins on the sample with the starting SID and continues until the sample with the ending SID is processed. All samples in between, regardless of sequence or SID, are included in the batch process. 4. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional)
Section 5-122
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 5. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select an assay(s) from the Assays list. NOTE: To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following: Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically orders the assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report these results. Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report the system-ordered constituent results. Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The system releases and reports all results.
6. Select F2 - Batch details to change the batch name or enter a comment. (optional) The Details for batch window displays. a. b. c. Enter a new batch name in the Batch name data entry box. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient order screen.
Section 5-123
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
d.
8. Select F3 - Add order. To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152. To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336. NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order List report.
Related information... Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, page 5-115
Details for batch window, page 5-133 Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-132 Order status screen, page 5-150
Section 5-124
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Batch processing, page 5-215 Patient and control orders
Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded)

Perform this procedure to order the same test(s) on multiple patient samples. You can process batch orders on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or SSH (standard sample handler). If you have an RSH and/or sample carousel, you may order tests for priority processing on patient or control samples and load them in the priority bay or sample carousel while the batch order is processing. IMPORTANT: When running a non-bar coded batch you cannot: Load calibrators Load priority samples in the SSH Leave empty spaces in a carrier Load batch samples in a carrier with tests in process
NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within the batch. If you add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is complete. To change the view to allow you to order a bar coded batch, see Change the batch sample ordering type, page 2-21. To create a single order for a patient sample, see Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118.
Prerequisite Batch ordering sample type configured to non-bar coded
Access the Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-117
To create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded): 1. Select the Order type: Batch option on the Patient order screen. The Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view displays.
Section 5-125
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
2. Enter the starting carrier ID in the Starting (C) data entry box. 3. Enter a position in the (P) data entry box. 4. Enter the starting SID (sample identification) in the Starting SID data entry box (maximum of nine numeric characters). The SID is assigned sequentially for each batch sample. 5. Enter the total number of samples in the batch order. This number cannot exceed 5000. NOTE: Batch processing begins on the sample with the starting carrier and position and continues until the total number of samples processed equals the number of samples entered. 6. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional) NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 7. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select an assay(s) from the Assays list. NOTE: To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following: Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically orders the assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report these results. Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report the system-ordered constituent results. Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The system releases and reports all results.
8. Select F2 - Batch details, to change the batch name or enter a comment. (optional) The Details for batch window displays. a. b. Enter a new batch name in the Batch name data entry box. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box.
Section 5-126
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c. Patient and control orders
Select Done to save your changes and return to the Patient order screen.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
d.
10. Select F3 - Add order. To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152. To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336.
Section 5-127
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order List report.
Related information... Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-116
Details for batch window, page 5-133 Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-132 Order status screen, page 5-150 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Batch processing, page 5-215
Add a test to a patient order

Perform this procedure to add a test(s) to a patient order. IMPORTANT: If you are adding a calculated assay you must delete existing constituent assay results for this sample if new constituent results are desired for the calculation. NOTE: You cannot add a test(s) to an order within a batch. If you add a test(s) to an order that is part of a batch order, the additional test(s) processes instead of the batch test(s). You must order additional tests separately and load the samples after the batch process is complete.
Prerequisite Original order status - Pending
Access the Patient order screen - Single patient view, page 5-114
To add a test to a patient order: 1. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box.
Section 5-128
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: You can use the bar code scanner, if available, to scan the SID. When using the bar code scanner, the Caps Lock key on the keyboard must be off to prevent an incorrect read of the SID. 2. Enter the value from the original order in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. 3. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select an assay(s) from the Assays list. NOTE: If you selected the carousel button on an integrated system, panel names that include both ARCHITECT c System and ARCHITECT i System assays or only i System assays do not display. To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following: Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically orders the assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report these results. Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report the system-ordered constituent results. Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The system releases and reports all results.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol.
Section 5-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
d.
5. Select F3 - Add order. NOTE: If you have an RSH (robotic sample handler) that is configured to automatically reposition samples for retest and the sample is still onboard, a confirmation message displays. Select Yes to have the system re-aspirate the sample. To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152. To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336. NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order List report.
Details for sample window, page 5-133 Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-132 Order status screen, page 5-150 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51
Section 5-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203 Patient and control orders
Windows - Patient order screen and views

Windows you can access from the Patient order screen include: Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-131 Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-132 Details for sample window, page 5-133 Details for batch window, page 5-133
Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view

From the manual dilution view of the Assay options (Patient order) window you can: Enter the desired number of replicates Override the system module scheduler and select a specific module for processing an order (multi-module i System)
Figure 5.28: Assay options (Patient order) window - manual dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Patient order) window Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-26.
Section 5-131
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5

Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121 Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125 Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128
Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view

From the automated dilution view of the Assay options (Patient order) window you can: Select an automated dilution factor other than the configured option Enter the desired number of replicates Override the system module scheduler and select a specific module for processing an order (multi-module i System)
Figure 5.29: Assay options (Patient order) window - automated dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Patient order) window Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-27.

Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121 Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125 Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128
Section 5-132
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Details for sample window

From the Details for sample window you can: Enter patient information such as patient ID, name, date of birth, and gender Enter comments for orders View previously entered patient information Patient and control orders
Figure 5.30: Details for sample window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for sample window field descriptions, page Appendix E-28.
Details for batch window

From the Details for batch window you can change the batch name and enter a comment for your batch order.
Section 5-133
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.31: Details for batch window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for batch window field descriptions, page Appendix E-29.
Related procedures... Create a patient order (batch, bar coded), page 5-121
Create a patient order (batch, non-bar coded), page 5-125
Control order screen and views

You use control order screens and their views to create control orders. Controls have the following characteristics: Require running, at all levels and for each assay, immediately after calibration to verify the newly-stored calibration curve on a specific processing module. Are run routinely to check a previously-stored active curve and to monitor system/assay performance.
For recommendations on routine control test frequency, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). IMPORTANT: Patient results can be compromised if you do not run controls and evaluate the results according to the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Control order screen and views topics include:
Section 5-134
Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-135 Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, page 5-137 Procedures - Control order screen, page 5-139 Windows - Control order screen and views, page 5-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Control order screen - Single analyte view

From the Single analyte view of the Control order screen you can create a control order when: The system is not connected to a host computer The host computer is inoperable The system is not configured to run bar coded control samples The control sample does not have a bar code label The control sample has a SID bar code label not currently configured on the system Patient and control orders
You can also access a window to order assay options. Figure 5.32: Control order screen - Single analyte view
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions, page Appendix E-29.
Section 5-135
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.33: Control order screen - Single analyte view (i 2000SR LAS)
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-31. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Control order screen Single analyte view, page 5-136.
Related procedures... Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139

Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-141
Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view

Perform this procedure to display the Single analyte view of the Control order screen.
To access the Control order screen - Single analyte view: 1. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Control order. The Control order screen - Multiconstituent view displays.
Section 5-136
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select the Order type: Single analyte option. The Control order screen - Single analyte view displays.
Related information... Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, page 5-137

Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-135
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view

From the Multiconstituent view of the Control order screen you can create a control order when: The system is not connected to a host computer The host computer is inoperable The system is not configured to run bar coded control samples The control sample does not have a bar code label The control sample has a SID bar code label not currently configured on the system
You can also access a window to order assay options. Figure 5.34: Control order screen - Multiconstituent view
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions, page Appendix E-32.
Section 5-137
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.35: Control order screen - Multiconstituent view (i 2000SR LAS)
For descriptions of these fields, see Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-33. To display this view of the screen, see Access the Control order screen Multiconstituent view, page 5-138.
Related procedures... Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143

Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-146
Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view

Perform this procedure to display the Multiconstituent view of the Control order screen.
To access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view: Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Control order.
Section 5-138
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The Control order screen - Multiconstituent view displays.
Procedures - Control order screen

Procedures you can perform from the Control order screen and its related windows include: Create a control order (single analyte), page 5-139 Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-141 Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143 Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS), page 5-146
Create a control order (single analyte)

Perform this procedure to create an order for a single analyte control when a host computer is not available or single analyte controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification). NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can perform this procedure. See Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176.
Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-136
Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for one control per module. General operator NA
To create a control order (single analyte): 1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample order and results. (optional) 2. Select the carrier or carousel button. 3. Enter a carrier or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if displayed. 4. Enter a position in the P data entry box. 5. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional)
Section 5-139
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 6. Select the desired assay from the Assays list. 7. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot. 8. Select the desired Levels check box(es). NOTE: All control levels selected must fit in one carrier/carousel. 9. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. (optional) The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor. OR The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor. a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for limitations on automated dilutions. The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
NOTE: Overriding the system module scheduler may impact overall throughput.
Section 5-140
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

c. Patient and control orders
Use the previous/next buttons to display each level if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 9a and 9b for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control order screen.
d.
Related information... Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-135
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-149 Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-149 Order status screen, page 5-150 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203
Create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS)

Perform this procedure to create an order for a single analyte control when a host computer is not available or single analyte controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification), or a bar code SID not currently configured will be used for the control order. NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can perform this procedure. See Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176.
Access the Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-136
Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for one control per module.
Section 5-141
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
General operator NA
To create a control order (single analyte - i 2000SR LAS): 1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and results. (optional) 2. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box. IMPORTANT: To ensure tests processed include the correct information, confirm that your laboratory is not reusing the same SID prior to completion or deletion of previously pending orders. 3. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional) NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 4. Select the desired assay from the Assays list. 5. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot. 6. Select the desired Levels check box(es). 7. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. (optional) The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor. OR The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor. a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for limitations on automated dilutions.
Section 5-142
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control order screen.
Related information... Control order screen - Single analyte view, page 5-135
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-149 Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-149 Order status screen, page 5-150 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51
Create a control order (multiconstituent)

Perform this procedure to create an order for a multiconstituent control when a host computer is not available or multiconstituent controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification). NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can perform this procedure. See Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179.
Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, page 5-138

Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for one control per module.
Section 5-143
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
General operator NA
To create a control order (multiconstituent): 1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and results. (optional) 2. Select the carrier or carousel button. 3. Enter a carrier or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if displayed. 4. Enter a position in the P data entry box. 5. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional) NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 6. Select the Control list button, and then select the desired control. 7. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot. 8. Select the desired Levels option. 9. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select the assay(s) from the Assays list. NOTE: If you select the carousel button, only the c System assays display for panels that include both c System and i System assays. To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following: Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically orders the assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report these results. Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report the system-ordered constituent results.
Section 5-144
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The system releases and reports all results.
10. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor. OR The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor. a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. You cannot order replicates for calculated assays. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. For c System ICT assays do not order more than 15 tests per sample for samples loaded in cups and/or tubes. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
NOTE: Overriding the system module scheduler may impact overall throughput. c. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 10a and 10b for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control order screen.
d.
11. Select F2 - Add order. To view orders, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152.
Section 5-145
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336. NOTE: The minimum sample volume information prints on the Order List report.

Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-149 Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-149 Order status screen, page 5-150 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203
Create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS)

Perform this procedure to create an order for a multiconstituent control when a host computer is not available or multiconstituent controls are not configured to use a bar code SID (sample identification), or a bar code SID not currently configured will be used for the control order. NOTE: You must configure controls in the system before you can perform this procedure. See Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179.
Access the Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, page 5-138

Any. If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the volume printed on the Order List report is for one control per module. General operator NA
To create a control order (multiconstituent - i 2000SR LAS): 1. Select the Sampling priority: STAT option on the Control order screen to display the "S" (STAT) code for the sample orders and results. (optional)
Section 5-146
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Enter the SID (sample identification) in the SID data entry box. 3. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box. (optional) NOTE: Not all assays support manual dilutions. An assay displays unavailable if you select manual dilution, and the assay does not support this type of dilution. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 4. Select the Control list button, and then select the desired control. 5. Select the Lot list button, and then select the desired lot. 6. Select the desired Levels option. 7. Select the desired panel(s) from the Panels list and/or select the assay(s) from the Assays list. To order a calculated assay, perform one of the following: Select only the calculated assay. The system automatically orders the assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report these results. Select the calculated assay and the desired constituent assay(s). The system automatically orders the additional constituent assays required to complete the calculation but does not release or report the system-ordered constituent results. Select the calculated assay and all its constituent assays. The system releases and reports all results.
8. Select F5 - Assay options to specify assay options. The Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view displays if you entered a manual dilution factor. OR The Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view displays if you did not enter a manual dilution factor. a. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the Dilution protocols/Number of replicates data entry box.
Section 5-147
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). The system software automatically selects one replicate for the default dilution protocol. You cannot order replicates for calculated assays. IMPORTANT: For ARCHITECT i System assays do not order more than 10 tests per sample for samples loaded in sample cups. The total number of tests per sample includes all assays, replicates, dilutions, and available reagent lots for the order. b. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 8a and 8b for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes and return to the Control order screen.
c.

Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-149 Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-149 Order status screen, page 5-150 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51
Windows - Control order screen and views

Windows you can access from the Control order screen include: Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view, page 5-149
Section 5-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view, page 5-149
Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view

From the manual dilution view of the Assay options (Control order) window you can: Enter the desired number of replicates Override the system module scheduler and select a specific module for processing an order (multi-module i System)
Figure 5.36: Assay options (Control order) window - manual dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-34.

Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143
Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view

From the automated dilution view of the Assay options (Control order) window you can: Select an automated dilution factor other than the configured option Enter the desired number of replicates Override the system module scheduler and select a specific module for processing an order (multi-module i System)
Section 5-149
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.37: Assay options (Control order) window - automated dilution view
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-35.

Create a control order (multiconstituent), page 5-143
Order status screen

From the Order status screen you can view information for patient, control, calibration, and rerun test orders, which includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, carousel ID/position, or LAS Sample name and identification number Assay name, status, and time of completion Processing codes
You can also delete a test from an order and access windows to: Find information for specific tests based on specified search criteria Print the Order List report and Order Status report View detailed test information Add a comment to an order
Section 5-150
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.38: Order status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Order status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-35. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position WTR (water)/0 No carrier or carousel/position SID, NAME, and ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order. If you did not enter a patient name, the test(s) with a blank name field displays last when the column sorts. First to last to complete. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 and Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
TIME STATUS and CODE
To display this screen, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152.
Section 5-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Related procedures... View the status of ordered tests, page 5-154

Find a specific test order, page 5-155 Print a report, page 5-333 Print the Order List report, page 5-336 View order or rerun status details, page 5-156 Add a comment to an order, page 5-157 Delete a test from a patient order, page 5-158
Access the Order status screen

Perform this procedure to display the Order status screen.
To access the Order status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the order status button on the processing module graphic. Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Order status. The Order status screen displays.

Order status screen, page 5-150 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Descriptions of test statuses

You can use test status information to determine the progress of an ordered test or to manage patient and control results. The system tracks one of the following test statuses for each ordered or completed
Section 5-152
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

test. When you select the STATUS column heading, the status sorts in the following order. Table 5.4: Test statuses
Status Pending Scheduled Description The test was ordered but the sample has not been scanned by the bar code reader. The test was assigned to a processing module when the sample was scanned by the bar code reader, but aspiration has not occurred. The aspiration for the test has occurred and the test is being processed. Batch order - the sample labeled with the starting SID of a batch order was scanned by the bar code reader. Calculated test - the tests required to calculate the result of a calculated test are being processed. Exception *Complete *Pending Transmission *Archived The test did not complete successfully due to an error. The test is complete. The test is complete but is waiting to be transmitted to the host. The test was archived (copied) to a CD.
Running In Process
*Pending Collation The test is complete, but the system is waiting for one of the following to occur prior to transmitting to the host: all tests associated with the SID to complete all tests associated with the SID on a particular processing module to complete
* Indicates you can use the find option in the Stored results screen to locate these statuses.
Descriptions of processing codes

You use processing code information to determine how a sample(s) was processed. The system displays one or more of the following processing codes, when applicable, for an ordered test or test result. When you select the CODE column heading, the codes sort in the following order. Table 5.5: Processing codes
Code S D M Description The sample is ordered as a STAT. The test is an automated dilution with a dilution factor >1, or an automated dilution that is not the first configured dilution. The sample is manually diluted.
Section 5-153
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Table 5.5: Processing codes (continued)

Code R * B C Description The test is a rerun. The test is an original result for a rerun. The test is part of a batch order. The test has a comment.
Procedures - Order status screen

Procedures you can perform from the Order status screen and its related windows include: View the status of ordered tests, page 5-154 Find a specific test order, page 5-155 View order or rerun status details, page 5-156 Add a comment to an order, page 5-157 Delete a test from a patient order, page 5-158
View the status of ordered tests

Perform this procedure to access the Order status screen. From this screen you can check the status of patient, control, calibration, and rerun test orders. To find specific test orders, see Find a specific test order, page 5-155.
To view the status of ordered tests: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the order status button on the processing module graphic. Select Orders on the menu bar, and then select Order status. The Order status screen displays. An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all the data on a screen or window. View the details window to see all of the data. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Order status screen, page 5-150 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Find a specific test order

Perform this procedure to search for a specific test order(s) by entering search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the Order status screen, page 5-152, or Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259
To find a specific test order: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Order or Rerun status screen. The Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all data entry boxes except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346, and 12347. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Order or Rerun status screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.
Section 5-155
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Related information... Order status screen, page 5-150

Rerun status screen, page 5-257 Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window, page 5-158 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
View order or rerun status details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window. From this window you can view details for orders and add comments.
Access the Order status screen, page 5-152,or Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259
To view order or rerun status details: 1. Select the desired orders from the table on the Order or Rerun status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each order if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Order status or Rerun status screen.

Rerun status screen, page 5-257 Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view, page 5-159 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view, page 5-160 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-161 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152
Section 5-156
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Add a comment to an order

Perform this procedure to add a comment to an order.
Access the Order status screen, page 5-152 or Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259
To add a comment to an order: 1. Select the desired order(s) from the table on the Order or Rerun status screen, or select F2 - Select All. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for order window displays. 3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. NOTE: For batch orders, if the batch status is In process, you cannot enter a comment for the batch order. You must enter a comment when the batch order is created or the batch status is pending. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each order if you selected more than one, and then enter a comment for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Rerun status screen, page 5-257 Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view, page 5-159 Sample status screen, page 5-162 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view, page 5-160 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-161
Section 5-157
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Delete a test from a patient order

Perform this procedure to delete a test(s) that no longer needs to be processed.
Access the Order status screen, page 5-152

Test status - Pending, In process Any General operator NA
To delete a test from a patient order: 1. Select the desired test(s) from the table on the Order status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F6 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. NOTE: If you delete a batch order, tests with a status of Running or Scheduled continue processing. Additional tests for the order do not process. 3. Select OK to delete the test(s).
Windows - Order status screen

Windows you can access from the Order status screen include: Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window, page 5-158 Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view, page 5-159 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view, page 5-160 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-161
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window

From the Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window you can search for specific test orders.
Section 5-158
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.39: Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-36.
Related procedures... Find a specific test order, page 5-155
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view
From the single order view of the Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window you can view detailed information for orders and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-159
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.40: Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window single order view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view field descriptions, page Appendix E-37.
Related procedures... View order or rerun status details, page 5-156

Add a comment to an order, page 5-157 View sample status details, page 5-167
Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view
From the batch (bar coded) view of the Details for order (Order status) window you can view information for bar coded batch orders and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-160
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.41: Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-39.

Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view
From the batch (non-bar coded) view of the Details for order (Order status) window you can view information for non-bar coded batch orders and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-161
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.42: Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-40.

Sample status screen

From the Sample status screen you can view information for patient, control, calibration orders, unreleased patient and control results, and exceptions, which includes: Sample name and identification number Sample location, identified by carrier ID/position, bay, carousel ID/position, or LAS Assay name and processing code Test status and time to completion or result, date and time of completion, and (where applicable) interpretation
You can also suspend processing on a sample, release a result, and access windows to:
Section 5-162
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Find information for specific samples based on specified search criteria Print the Sample Status report View detailed test information Add a comment to an order or result Rerun a test
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. Figure 5.43: Sample status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Sample status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-19.
Section 5-163
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
When accessing the Sample status screen, the information sorts by SID. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column SID and NAME C/P and BAY Sort description Alphanumerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position and bay CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position WTR (water)/0 No carrier or carousel/position ASSAY and CODES STATUS/RESULT These columns do not sort. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 and Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
To display this screen, see Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164.
Related procedures... View sample status, page 5-165

Find a specific sample, page 5-166 View sample status details, page 5-167 Add a comment to an order, page 5-157 Access a sample with tests in process (RSH), page 5-217 Print a report, page 5-333 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Rerun a test, page 5-231 Release a patient result, page 5-234
Access the Sample status screen

Perform this procedure to display the Sample status screen.
Section 5-164
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To access the Sample status screen: Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Sample status. The Sample status screen displays. Patient and control orders
Related information... Sample status screen, page 5-162

Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Procedures - Sample status screen

Procedures you can perform from the Sample status screen and its related windows include: View sample status, page 5-165 Find a specific sample, page 5-166 View sample status details, page 5-167 Access a sample with tests in process (RSH), page 5-217 Print a report, page 5-333 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Rerun a test, page 5-231 Release a patient result, page 5-234
View sample status

Perform this procedure to access the Sample status screen.
Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164

To view sample status: Select the desired sample from the SID Name column on the Sample status screen. The tests and codes display in the ASSAY and CODES column. The results and status display in the STATUS/RESULT column.
Section 5-165
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5

Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Find a specific sample

Perform this procedure to search for a specific sample(s) by entering search criteria in one or more fields.

To find a specific sample: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Sample status screen. The Find options (Sample status) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all data entry box(es) except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346, and 12347. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Sample status screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Find options (Sample status) window, page 5-168 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Section 5-166
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 View sample status details

Perform this procedure to display the Details... window. From this window you can view detailed information for orders, exceptions, and patient and QC results.

To view sample status details: 1. Select the desired sample from the SID Name column on the Sample status screen, and then select the desired assay(s) from the ASSAY and CODES column. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details... window displays. Information is dependent on the assay(s) you selected. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Sample status screen.

Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view, page 5-159 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view, page 5-160 Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-161 Details for exceptions window - data view (c System), page 5-301 Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-302 Details for exceptions window (i System), page 5-303 Details for exceptions window - calculated view, page 5-304 Details for exceptions window - control view, page 5-305 Details for exceptions window - calibrator view, page 5-307 Find options (Results review) window, page 5-235
Section 5-167
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view, page 5-236 Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System), page 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-238 Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System), page 5-239 Details for result (Results review) window (i System), page 5-240 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System), page 5-252 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-253 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System), page 5-254
Windows - Sample status screen

The windows you can access from the Sample status screen are: Find options (Sample status) window, page 5-168 Rerun options window, page 5-241
Find options (Sample status) window

From the Find options (Sample status) window you can search for specific samples by entering your search criteria in one or more fields. Figure 5.44: Find options (Sample status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-21.
Section 5-168
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related procedures... Find a specific sample, page 5-166
Section 5-169
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Sample management
Sample management consists of the activities associated with preparing and loading samples, initiating processing, and unloading samples. Sample management topics include: Sample requirements, page 5-170 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203 Initiating or resuming sample processing, page 5-205 Sample processing, page 5-207 Unloading samples, page 5-215
Sample requirements
Before you load samples onto the system, be sure you are familiar with the following: Sample cup and/or tube requirements, page 5-170 Sample volume requirements, page 5-172 Sample integrity, page 5-176 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32
Sample cup and/or tube requirements

The following sample cups and/or tubes are acceptable for use on the ARCHITECT System: ARCHITECT System sample cups (see Sample cup, page 5-171) ARCHITECT System sample cups used in conjunction with sample tubes Aliquot and primary sample tubes (see Aliquot and primary sample tube specifications, page 5-171)
For information on sample volume, see Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 5-170
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.45: Sample cup Sample management
Figure 5.46: Aliquot and primary sample tube specifications
Measurement 1. Height 2. Outside diameter 3. Inside diameter
Nominal 75 mm - 100 mm 10 mm - 16 mm NA
Extreme limits 72 mm - 102 mm 8.25 mm - 16.1 mm 7.75 mm minimum
NOTE: The sample cup, when used with sample tubes, shall be no greater than: 6 mm in height above the maximum tube specification of 102 mm for systems with the RSH (robotic sample handler) 12 mm in height above the maximum tube specification of 102 mm for systems with the SSH (standard sample handler)
Section 5-171
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
NOTE: Use of serum filters in sample tubes is acceptable if the opening (inside diameter) and the height of the filter meets the sample tube specifications.
Sample volume requirements

Sample volume requirement depend on the sample vessel type, the onboard sample storage conditions, and the assay(s) ordered. For sample cup and tube volume requirements, and the use of the sample gauge label, see: Sample cup volumes, page 5-172 Primary tube volumes, page 5-173 Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-174 Sample gauge label, page 5-174
For information on onboard sample storage conditions and the effect on sample evaporation, see Onboard sample storage, page 5-175. For assay-specific sample volume requirements, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
Sample cup volumes

The ARCHITECT System calculates the minimum sample cup volume required to test a sample as follows: c System (with sample saving mode on - recommended): 50 L (sample cup dead volume) + 8 L (over-aspiration volume) + combined sample volume of the ordered assays and replicates NOTE: For each assay that requires an onboard dilution or has a sample volume greater than 15 L, an additional 8 L over-aspiration volume is added for the sample probe wash that occurs. c System (with sample saving mode off): 50 L (sample cup dead volume) + combined sample volume of the ordered assays and replicates + over-aspiration volume (equal to 20% of the sample volume + 4 L for each ordered assay and replicate) i System:
Section 5-172
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management 50 L (sample cup dead volume) + combined sample volume of the ordered assays and replicates This volume is printed on the Order List report as "Minimum sample cup volume required:." NOTE: The minimum sample cup volume for controls and calibrators is valid for the reagent inventory on the processing module(s) in Running status at the time you order the sample. If the processing module(s) is not in Running status, the indicated volume is for one calibration/control per module. If the minimum sample cup volume is less than 150 L, you must priority load the sample to avoid concentration effects due to sample evaporation. If you do not priority load the sample, a minimum volume of 150 L is required. IMPORTANT: If you do not use adequate sample volume, reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed. To ensure accurate liquid level detection, do not fill the sample cups above the 1400 L mark. For sample volume information, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). IMPORTANT: If you load samples on the RSH (robotic sample handler) and the RSH is configured to automatically reposition samples for retest, you must ensure there is adequate sample volume to allow for retests. For information on sample volume requirements for primary or aliquot tubes, see Primary tube volumes, page 5-173 or Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-174.
Primary tube volumes

When using primary tubes, remove any tube closures and verify at least 8 mm of sample is available above the clot, gel separator, or plasma/red cell interface to avoid contamination of the sample during aspiration. Use the sample gauge label to verify adequate sample volume. See Sample gauge label, page 5-174. IMPORTANT: If you do not use adequate sample volume, reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed.
Section 5-173
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
For sample volume information, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). IMPORTANT: If you load samples on the RSH (robotic sample handler) and the RSH is configured to automatically reposition samples for retest, you must ensure there is adequate sample volume to allow for retests. For information on sample volume requirements for aliquot tubes or sample cups, see Aliquot tube volumes, page 5-174, or Sample cup volumes, page 5-172.
Aliquot tube volumes

When using aliquot tubes, remove any tube closures and verify adequate sample is present in the tube. Use the sample gauge label to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present in the tube. See Sample gauge label, page 5-174. IMPORTANT: If you do not use adequate sample volume, reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed. For sample volume information, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). IMPORTANT: If you load samples on the RSH (robotic sample handler) and the RSH is configured to automatically reposition samples for retest, you must ensure there is adequate sample volume to allow for retests. For information on sample volume requirements for primary tubes or sample cups, see Primary tube volumes, page 5-173, or Sample cup volumes, page 5-172.
Sample gauge label

You use the sample gauge (1 on the following illustration) to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present above the clot, gel separator, or plasma/red cell interface when using primary tubes. You also use the gauge to verify at least 8 mm of sample is present in an aliquot tube.
Section 5-174
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.47: Sample gauge on a sample carrier Sample management
Figure 5.48: Sample gauge on an LAS sample carousel (i 2000)
Onboard sample storage

The ARCHITECT System requires a minimum of 150 L for routine testing of controls and patient samples. This recommendation supports onboard sample storage for three hours under average laboratory conditions without observable concentration effects due to sample evaporation. Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if this recommendation is not followed.
Section 5-175
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
The following table describes the approximate amount of time required to decrease the weight of various starting sample volumes by 5% when measured in sample cups under different environmental conditions. The high and low temperatures (30C and 15C) were tested with low humidity. An environment of 25C and 45% RH (relative humidity) is considered representative of average laboratory conditions.
"Onboard" time (Hrs) 1 2 3 4 5 15C 15% RH 25C 45% RH 30C 15% RH 60 L 70 L 100 L 130 L 160 L 60 L 80 L 120 L 160 L 200 L 100 L 180 L 280 L 365 L 450 L
Sample integrity
For detailed specimen collection, preparation, and storage information, see Requirements for handling specimens, page 7-8, and the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
Loading samples (RSH)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the RSH (robotic sample handler) for routine, priority, or batch processing. Loading samples (RSH) procedures include: Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-176 Load samples for routine processing (RSH), page 5-179 Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181 Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-183 Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-185
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH)

Perform this procedure to load samples in sample carriers. To load samples in the sample carousel, see Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188.
Section 5-176
NA NA
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
General operator Samples Sample carriers
To load samples in sample carriers: 1. Verify the calibrators and controls, if loading, are within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators or controls if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Determine the minimum sample volume required in the sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. 3. Verify adequate sample volume above the separation point in a primary tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the following illustration). a. b. Hold the primary tube so that the separation point is level with the bottom of the sample gauge label. Verify the amount of sample above the separation point is at least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is adequate for one test.
4. Verify adequate sample volume in an aliquot tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the illustration).
Section 5-177
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management a. b.
Section 5
Hold the bottom of the aliquot tube level with the bottom of the sample gauge label. Verify the amount of sample in the aliquot tube is at least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is adequate for one test.
5. Print the Order List report to ensure that you load the samples in the correct C/P (carrier/position). See Print the Order List report, page 5-336. IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample in the correct position. NOTE: This step is optional when using bar code labels on samples for positive ID. 6. Place the sample in the sample carrier so that the bar code, if used, is visible in the sample bar code label window (1 on the following illustration) and the bar code fills the width of the window.
IMPORTANT: When you load sample cups and/or tubes, ensure that you have pushed them completely down into the sample carriers and that they are not tilted. Avoid splashing outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To load sample carriers, see Load samples for routine processing (RSH), page 5-179, or Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181.
Section 5-178
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
Related information... Sample cup and/or tube requirements, page 5-170

Sample integrity, page 5-176 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 Sample carriers, page 1-147 Sample gauge label, page 5-174 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51
Load samples for routine processing (RSH)

Perform this procedure to load samples in the routine bays of the RSH (robotic sample handler). NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115. To load samples in the priority bay, see Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181.
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-176

Ready or Running General operator Carrier trays
IMPORTANT: When transporting and loading sample carriers and carrier trays, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To load samples for routine processing: 1. Position the sample carrier(s) so that the carrier ID label(s) is at the front of the tray where the handle is located.
Section 5-179
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
2. Verify the sample carrier(s) sits flush with the bottom of the tray. 3. Verify the indicators below the desired bay are both off, which indicates the bay is available. 4. Place the carrier tray in front of the bay and align the tray with the alignment guides. 5. Push the carrier tray into the bay until the green indicator illuminates.
To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.
Related information... Sample carriers, page 1-147

Section 5-180
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier trays (RSH), page 1-148 RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR), page 5-208 Sample management
Load samples for priority processing (RSH)

Perform this procedure to load samples in the priority bay of the RSH (robotic sample handler). Samples that are loaded in the priority bay are pipetted before samples that are loaded in the routine bays. Batch processing is not available in the RSH priority bay. IMPORTANT: Verify calibrator(s) order status is Scheduled before you load controls in the priority bay to ensure the system does not process controls before the calibration completes. To view the calibrator order status, see Access the Order status screen, page 5-152. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115. To load samples in the routine bay(s), see Load samples for routine processing (RSH), page 5-179.

Ready or Running General operator NA
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
IMPORTANT: When transporting or loading sample carriers and carrier trays, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To load samples for priority processing: 1. Verify the indicators below the desired section are off, which indicates the section is available. 2. Position the sample carrier so that the carrier ID label is at the front of the RSH.
Section 5-181
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
3. Load the carrier into the priority section by pushing it in until the indicator illuminates. NOTE: You must physically place the carriers with calibrators in the sections in sequential order. Carriers are processed in the order they are placed on the sample handler, not by the position number. The indicator illuminates green when the processing module status is Running.
Section 5-182
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR), page 5-208 Sample management
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH)

Perform this procedure to load bar coded samples for batch processing in the RSH (robotic sample handler). Batch processing is not available in the RSH priority bay. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115. To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-185.

Ready or Running General operator Carrier trays with sample carriers loaded with samples
IMPORTANT: When transporting and loading sample carriers and carrier trays, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT load calibrators or controls within the batch. Also, do not leave an empty space(s) between samples as it will be identified as an invalid sample with error message 0120. To load bar coded samples for batch processing: 1. Locate the sample carrier that contains the sample with the starting SID (sample identification) that was entered in the batch order. 2. Position the carrier so the carrier ID label is located at the front of the tray where the handle is located.
Section 5-183
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
3. Load the carrier into the farthest position on the left side of the tray. 4. Load additional carriers, from left to right, until the tray is full or all samples are loaded. 5. Verify the carrier(s) sits flush with the bottom of the tray(s). 6. Repeat with additional trays (when more than one is needed) until all samples are loaded. 7. Ensure the sample with the ending SID is loaded at the end of all samples in the batch. 8. Verify the indicators below the routine bay farthest to the left are both off, which indicates the bay is available. 9. Place the carrier tray with the starting SID sample in front of the bay farthest to the left and align the tray with the alignment guides. 10. Push the carrier tray into the bay until the green indicator illuminates. 11. Repeat with additional trays (when more than one is needed) using the next bay to the right, until all samples are loaded.
Section 5-184
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management

Carrier trays (RSH), page 1-148 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR), page 5-208 Batch processing, page 5-215
Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH)

Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded samples for batch processing in the RSH (robotic sample handler). Batch processing is not available in the RSH priority bay. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the RSH. See RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115. To load bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load bar coded samples for batch processing (RSH), page 5-183.
Load samples in sample carriers (RSH), page 5-176.

Ready or Running General operator Carrier trays with sample carriers loaded with samples
Section 5-185
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
IMPORTANT: When transporting and loading sample carriers and carrier trays, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT: Load calibrators or controls within the batch Leave empty spaces between samples as they will be included in the total number of samples Load batch samples in a carrier with tests in process
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing: 1. Locate the sample carrier that contains the sample with the starting carrier and position entered in the batch order. 2. Position the carrier so the carrier ID label is located at the front of the tray where the handle is located.
3. Load the carrier into the farthest position on the left side of the tray. 4. Load additional carriers, from left to right, until the tray is full or all samples are loaded. 5. Verify the carrier(s) sits flush with the bottom of the tray(s).
Section 5-186
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
6. Repeat with additional trays (when more than one is needed) until all samples are loaded. 7. Ensure the number of samples loaded matches the number of samples in the order. 8. Verify the indicators below the routine bay farthest to the left are both off, which indicates the bay is available. 9. Place the carrier tray with the starting carrier and position in front of the bay farthest to the left and align the tray with the alignment guides. 10. Push the carrier tray into the bay until the green indicator illuminates. 11. Repeat with additional trays (when more than one is needed) using the next bay to the right, until all samples are loaded.

Carrier trays (RSH), page 1-148 RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR), page 5-208 Batch processing, page 5-215
Section 5-187
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Loading samples (sample carousel - c System)

You can load samples in the sample carousel for priority processing or when the RSH (robotic sample handler) is unavailable. Loading samples procedures include: Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188
Load samples and initiate sample processing (sample carousel - c System)

Perform this procedure to load patient samples, controls, and calibrators in the sample carousel. Samples loaded on the sample carousel are given priority over samples loaded on the RSH (robotic sample handler). NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the sample carousel. See Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32 or Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator NA
To load samples and initiate sample processing: 1. Open the processing module cover. 2. Verify that the sample carousel access indicator button (square), next to the carousel, is illuminated. If the indicator button is not illuminated, see Pause the sample carousel (c System), page 5-16. 3. Press the gray button on the front portion of the sample carousel cover, and then open the cover. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
Sample aspiration is paused for the RSH and the sample carousel.
Section 5-188
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
4. Verify the calibrators and controls, if loading, are within the expiration on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators or controls if the expiration date is exceeded. 5. Determine the minimum sample volume required in the sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. 6. Verify adequate sample volume above the separation point in a primary tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the following illustration). a. b. Hold the primary tube so that the separation point is level with the bottom of the sample gauge label. Verify the amount of sample above the separation point is at least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is adequate for one test.
Section 5-189
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
7. Verify adequate sample volume in an aliquot tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the illustration). a. b. Hold the bottom of the aliquot tube level with the bottom of the sample gauge label. Verify the amount of sample in the aliquot tube is at least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is adequate for one test.
8. Print the Order List report to ensure that you load the samples in the correct C/P (carousel/position). See Print the Order List report, page 5-336. IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample in the correct position. 9. Press the sample carousel advance indicator button (round) to advance the sample carousel to access the desired position(s). 10. Place the sample in the sample carousel so that the bar code, if used, is positioned to the outside of the carousel. IMPORTANT: When you load sample cups and/or tubes, ensure that you have pushed them completely down into the sample carousel and that they are not tilted. Avoid splashing outside of the sample cup and/or tube.
Section 5-190
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
11. Close the sample carousel cover to initiate sample processing by pushing the cover down until you hear a click. NOTE: If the processing module is running, sample aspiration resumes once you close the sample carousel cover. 12. Close the processing module cover.

Sample integrity, page 5-176 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 Sample carriers, page 1-147 Sample gauge label, page 5-174 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Sample carousel sample processing (c System), page 5-210
Loading samples (SSH)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the SSH (standard sample handler) for routine, priority, or batch processing. Loading samples (SSH) topics include: Load samples in sample carriers (SSH), page 5-192
Section 5-191
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Load samples for routine processing (SSH), page 5-194 Load samples for priority processing (SSH), page 5-197 Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-198 Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-201
Load samples in sample carriers (SSH)

Perform this procedure to load samples in sample carriers.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA NA General operator Samples Sample carriers
To load samples in sample carriers: 1. Verify the calibrators and controls, if loading, are within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators or controls if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Determine the minimum sample volume required in the sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. 3. Verify adequate sample volume above the separation point in a primary tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the following illustration). a. b. Hold the primary tube so that the separation point is level with the bottom of the sample gauge label. Verify the amount of sample above the separation point is at least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is adequate for one test.
Section 5-192
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
5. Print the Order List report to ensure that you load the samples in the correct C/P (carrier/position). See Print the Order List report, page 5-336. IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample in the correct position. NOTE: This step is optional when using bar code labels on samples for positive ID. 6. Place the sample in the sample carrier so that the bar code, if used, is visible in the sample bar code label window and the bar code fills the width of the window.
Section 5-193
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
IMPORTANT: When you load sample cups and/or tubes, ensure that you have pushed them completely down into the sample carriers and that they are not tilted. Avoid splashing outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To load sample carriers, see Load samples for routine processing (SSH), page 5-194, or Load samples for priority processing (SSH), page 5-197.

Sample integrity, page 5-176 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 Sample carriers, page 1-147 Sample gauge label, page 5-174 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211
Load samples for routine processing (SSH)

Perform this procedure to load samples in the sample load queue of either a single-lane or double-lane SSH (standard sample handler). To priority load samples, see Load samples for priority processing (SSH), page 5-197.
Section 5-194
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the SSH. See SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121.
Load samples in sample carriers (SSH), page 5-192

Ready or Load queue paused General operator Carriers loaded with samples
IMPORTANT: When transporting sample carriers, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To load samples for routine processing: 1. Verify the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17. 2. Position the sample carrier so that the Abbott the front of the processing module. is visible from
3. Place the sample carrier in the sample load queue by aligning the rail guides over the rails.
Section 5-195
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
NOTE: For multi-module i Systems, you first determine the active lane of the sample load queue, which is identified by the green indicator on the sample handler keypad. Then, you place the sample carrier in the appropriate lane, see Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196. To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.
Related information... SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121

Sample carriers, page 1-147 SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211
Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000)

For multi-module i Systems, the inside lane is the default active lane. Some events cause the outside lane to become the active lane. The following table shows the active lane defaults for the double load queue. Table 5.6: Double load queue lane defaults
Event Run key is selected and the status is Ready. Inside lane is empty. Twenty-five carriers have been transferred from the inside lane to the processing queue. Active lane Inside Outside Outside
Twenty-five carriers have been Inside transferred from the outside lane to the processing queue. Processing queue access door is opened while the sample handler is running. The sample handler status changes to Stopped. NOTE: Positive sample identification cannot be guaranteed when the processing queue access door is opened. All results for samples on the processing queue become exceptions. Stop key on the sample handler keypad Inside is pressed, and then startup and the run key are pressed. Inside
Section 5-196
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
Table 5.6: Double load queue lane defaults (continued)

Event Run key is selected when the module status is Load queue paused (not requested by the operator). Run key is selected when the module status is Load queue paused (requested by the operator). Active lane Inside
Lane that was active when the sample handler was paused.
Load samples for priority processing (SSH)

Perform this procedure to priority load sample carriers in the sample load queue of either a single-lane or double-lane SSH (standard sample handler). Samples that are priority loaded are pipetted first. To load sample carriers that do not need to be priority loaded, see Load samples for routine processing (SSH), page 5-194. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the SSH. See SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121.

Ready or Load queue paused General operator Carriers loaded with samples
IMPORTANT: When transporting sample carriers, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To priority load sample carriers: 1. Verify that the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17. 2. Press the reverse key on the sample handler keypad. 3. Position the sample carrier so that the Abbott the front of the processing module. is visible from
Section 5-197
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
4. Place the sample carrier in front of the carriers currently loaded in the sample load queue by aligning the rail guides over the rails. NOTE: For multi-module i Systems, place the sample carrier in the active lane of the sample load queue, which is identified by the green indicator on the sample handler keypad. For more information on the active lane, see Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196. To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.

Sample carriers, page 1-147 SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211
Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH)

Perform this procedure to load bar coded samples for batch processing in the sample load queue of either a single-lane or double-lane SSH (standard sample handler).
Section 5-198
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-201. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the SSH. See SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121.

Ready or Load queue paused General operator Carriers loaded with bar coded samples
IMPORTANT: When transporting sample carriers, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing DO NOT load calibrators or controls within the batch. Also, do not leave an empty space(s) between samples as it will be identified as an invalid sample with error message 0120. To load bar coded samples for batch processing: 1. Verify the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17. 2. Locate the sample carrier with the starting SID (sample identification) that was entered in the batch order. 3. Position the sample carrier so that the Abbott the front of the processing module. is visible from
Section 5-199
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
4. Place the sample carrier in the sample load queue by aligning the rail guides over the rails. NOTE: For multi-module i Systems, you first determine the active lane of the sample load queue, which is identified by the green indicator on the sample handler keypad. Then, you place the sample carrier in the appropriate lane, see Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196. 5. Load additional carriers behind the first carrier until all samples are loaded. 6. Ensure you loaded the sample with the ending SID at the end of the batch. To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.

Sample carriers, page 1-147 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211 Batch processing, page 5-215
Section 5-200
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Load non-bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH)
Perform this procedure to load non-bar coded samples for batch processing in the sample load queue of either a single-lane or double-lane SSH (standard sample handler). To load bar coded samples for batch processing, see Load bar coded samples for batch processing (SSH), page 5-198. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the SSH. See SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121.
Sample management

Ready or Load queue paused General operator Carriers loaded with non-bar coded samples
IMPORTANT: When transporting sample carriers, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. NOTE: When you load samples for batch processing, DO NOT: Load calibrators or controls within the batch Leave empty spaces between samples as they will be included in the total number of samples Load batch samples in a carrier with tests in process
To load non-bar coded samples for batch processing: 1. Verify the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the sample load queue (SSH), page 5-17. 2. Locate the sample carrier that contains the sample with the starting carrier and position that was entered in the batch order. 3. Position the sample carrier so that the Abbott the front of the processing module. is visible from
Section 5-201
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
4. Place the sample carrier in the sample load queue by aligning the rail guides over the rails. NOTE: For multi-module i Systems, you first determine the active lane of the sample load queue, which is identified by the green indicator on the sample handler keypad. Then, you place the sample carrier in the appropriate lane, see Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196. 5. Load additional carriers behind the first carrier until all samples are loaded. 6. Ensure the number of samples you loaded matches the number of samples in the batch order. To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206.

Sample carriers, page 1-147 SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211 Batch processing, page 5-215
Section 5-202
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)

Calibrators, controls, and patient samples are loaded on the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler for routine or priority processing. Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler) procedures include: Load samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203
Load samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)
Perform this procedure to load samples into the LAS (laboratory automation system) sample carousel and to load the carousel onto the carousel platform. NOTE: Before loading samples, ensure you are familiar with the components of the LAS carousel sample handler. See LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123. You can load patient samples, controls, and calibrators on the LAS sample carousel and they are given priority over samples loaded on the LAS track. NOTE: Calibrators can only be run on the LAS sample carousel.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Ready General operator Samples LAS sample carousel
To load samples and the carousel: 1. Verify the calibrators and controls, if loading, are within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use the calibrators or controls if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Determine the minimum sample volume required in the sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 5-203
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
3. Verify adequate sample volume above the separation point in a primary tube by using the sample gauge label (1 on the following illustration).
a. b.
Hold the primary tube so that the separation point is level with the bottom of the sample gauge label. Verify the amount of sample above the separation point is at least equivalent to the sample gauge label. This volume is adequate for one test.
5. Print the Order List report to ensure that you load the samples in the correct C/P (carousel/position). See Print the Order List report, page 5-336. IMPORTANT: You are responsible for loading the correct sample in the correct position. 6. Place the sample in the LAS sample carousel so that the bar code, if used, is positioned to the outside of the carousel.
Section 5-204
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
IMPORTANT: When you load sample cups and/or tubes, ensure that you have pushed them completely down into the carousel and that they are not tilted. When transporting the LAS sample carousel avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. 7. Verify the pause indicator on the sample handler keypad is illuminated. If the indicator is not illuminated, see Pause the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 5-18. 8. Open the carousel cover on the sample handler and place the carousel on the carousel platform. 9. Align the flat edge on the bottom of the carousel with the flat edge of the platform. NOTE: When the carousel is correctly aligned on the platform, position 3 is at the front of the module and you cannot easily turn the carousel. 10. Close the carousel cover. To initiate sample processing, see Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.

Sample integrity, page 5-176 Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123 LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000), page 5-213
Initiating or resuming sample processing

You must initiate or resume sample processing when: Orders have been created and samples have been loaded The processing module and/or sample handler have been paused
Procedures include: Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206 Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207
Section 5-205
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH)

Perform this procedure to process a run after ordering and loading samples or to resume sample processing after the module and/or sample handler have been paused.
Prerequisite
Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32 Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79 Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80 Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Module status
Processing module - Ready or Scheduled pause Sample handler - Ready, Scheduled pause (RSH), or Load queue paused (SSH)
General operator NA
To initiate or resume sample processing: 1. Initialize the processing module, if the status is not Running, by performing one of the following: Press the run key on each processing module keypad. Select the appropriate processing module graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen, and then select F8 - Run.
2. Initialize the sample handler, if the status is not Running, by performing one of the following: Press the run key on the sample handler keypad. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F8 - Run.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the processing queue access door(s) to remove or add samples. Positive sample identification cannot be guaranteed when a processing queue access door is opened. The sample processing queue bar code reader does not verify the sample tube bar code labels read by the load queue bar code reader. If an access door(s) is opened, all tests on samples on the processing queue become exceptions. In addition, all sample carriers on the processing queue are transferred to the sample unload queue.

Processing module keypad (c System), page 1-29
Section 5-206
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
Processing module keypad (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-77 RSH keypad, page 1-120 SSH keypad, page 1-122
Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)

Perform this procedure to initialize the processing module to Running status so you can process samples that are on the LAS (laboratory automation system) track. IMPORTANT: The sample pipettor cover must be installed prior to initiating sample processing. See i 2000 processing module, page 1-71.
Prerequisite
Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32 Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79 Verify reagent inventory on all modules, page 5-80 Access the Snapshot screen, page 1-20
Processing module - Ready or Scheduled pause General operator NA
To initiate or resume sample processing: Initialize the processing module by performing one of the following: Press the run key on each processing module keypad. Select the appropriate processing module graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen, and then select F8 - Run.
Once the processing module is in Running status, the i 2000 is ready to process samples presented at the LAS pipettor position. IMPORTANT: Do not open the LAS sample carousel cover without pausing the carousel. If you open the cover when the carousel is in Running status, all tests in process become exceptions.
Sample processing
Many kinds of sample processing activities take place between the time you load a sample(s) and when the sample(s) is aspirated. The progression of samples through the ARCHITECT System differs depending on your system configuration.
Section 5-207
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Sample processing topics include: Control sample processing, page 5-208 RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR), page 5-208 Sample carousel sample processing (c System), page 5-210 SSH sample processing (i 2000), page 5-211 LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000), page 5-213 Batch processing, page 5-215
Control sample processing

When multiple reagent kits are loaded on the system and the sampling process for a control order is ready to begin, the system determines which reagent kits to use depending on the configuration of your system. If your system is configured to run controls by: Lot (default) - QC will run only on one kit per lot per module Kit - QC will run on every kit per module
Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically run on one kit on one module (selected by the system software) regardless of the system configuration. To change the current control run configuration see Change the option for running controls for onboard reagent kits, page 2-37.
RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR)

After you load a sample(s) the sample handler moves the sample(s) to the aspiration location. The prioritization of samples on systems with an RSH (robotic sample handler) differs depending on your processing module configuration: On all ARCHITECT Systems: Carriers in the priority bay are processed first in the order they were inserted. Carrier trays in routine bays are then processed in the order they were inserted.
On an ARCHITECT integrated or c System, samples on the c System sample carousel take priority over the samples on the RSH. On an ARCHITECT integrated or i 2000SR System, samples with both STAT and routine immunoassays are routed to the STAT pipettor first.
Section 5-208
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
On an ARCHITECT integrated system samples with both clinical chemistry assay orders and immunoassay orders are routed to the first available module. If both processing modules are available, the system routes the orders to the c System first.
Figure 5.49: RSH sample processing
After you load samples onto the RSH and initiate a run: 1. The RSH carrier transport moves to the first carrier as determined by software prioritization, and then picks up a carrier. The RSH indicators turn amber to indicate the carriers are being accessed by the carrier transport. 2. The carrier transport moves the carrier to the RSH bar code reader where the carrier ID and sample ID(s) are read, and then the carrier returns to its original location. 3. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC for each sample on the carrier. If there are no orders and your system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host. 4. The carrier is moved to an available position on the carrier positioner if an order exists or a query returns a test order(s). If a location is not available on the positioner, the carrier remains at the bay until a positioner pocket becomes available. NOTE: Each processing module has a carrier positioner with four positions:
Section 5-209
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
On a c System positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample carriers from routine bays, position 3 is for sample carriers from priority bays, and position 4 is not used. On an i 2000SR positions 1 and 2 are designated for sample carriers accessed by the routine sample pipettor and positions 3 and 4 are for sample carriers accessed by the STAT sample pipettor.
5. The appropriate processing module sample pipettor aspirates the sample. 6. The carrier transport picks up the carrier and moves it to the next module or aspiration location, if necessary, and then moves it back to the routine bay or priority bay section. 7. The RSH indicators blink green when all samples within the routine or priority bay section are aspirated. If your system is configured to automatically reposition samples for reruns, the indicators remain amber until all reruns are aspirated. If you add or rerun tests for a sample before it is unloaded, the indicators for the bay or section change back to amber while the sample is re-aspirated.
Related information... Host order query, page 5-111

Host computer download, page 5-110 Automated control ordering, page 5-111 Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-112 RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115
Sample carousel sample processing (c System)

After you load a sample(s), the RSH (robotic sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) moves the sample(s) to the aspiration location. Samples on the c System sample carousel take priority over the samples on the RSH or LAS. After you load samples onto the sample carousel and initiate a run: 1. Each position is scanned sequentially.
Section 5-210
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
2. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC for each patient and control sample on the carousel. If there are no orders and your system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host. If an order has not been entered into the host system, the sample carousel moves to the next position. 3. If an order exists, the sample is aspirated before moving to the next carousel position. 4. Once all samples on the carousel are aspirated, samples on the RSH or LAS are processed.

Host computer download, page 5-110 Automated control ordering, page 5-111 Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-112 Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32
SSH sample processing (i 2000)

After you load a sample(s) the sample handler moves the sample(s) to the aspiration location. The progression of samples on systems with an SSH (standard sample handler) differs depending on the number of processing modules in your ARCHITECT i System configuration: Systems with one processing module have a single lane load and unload queue. Systems with more than one processing module have a double lane load and unload queue.
Section 5-211
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Figure 5.50: SSH sample processing
After you load samples onto the SSH and initiate a run: 1. The sample load queue moves the carriers to the sample load queue bar code reader. If your system is configured with a double lane load queue, the carriers on the active lane are moved first. 2. The sample load queue bar code reader reads the following bar code labels: Sample carrier ID Sample carrier position Sample tube bar code ID
3. The carriers are moved onto the processing queue. 4. The processing queue bar code reader reads the following bar code labels: Sample carrier ID Sample carrier position
5. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC for each sample on the carrier. If there are no orders and your system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host. If an order has not been entered into the host system, the carrier is moved to the sample unload queue. 6. The first sample with a test order is aspirated, or moved to another module for processing.
Section 5-212
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
NOTE: If your system is configured with more than one processing module, the system software determines which module processes the sample. 7. The bar code reader reads the next position. 8. The next sample is aspirated or moved to another module to be processed. This continues until all samples on the carrier are aspirated. 9. When sample processing is complete, the sample carrier is moved to the sample unload queue. If your system is configured with a double lane unload queue, carriers are moved from the left lane to the right lane as the queue fills.

Host computer download, page 5-110 Automated control ordering, page 5-111 Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-112 SSH - standard sample handler (i 2000), page 1-121 Double load queue lane defaults (i 2000), page 5-196
LAS sample handler sample processing (i 2000)

After you load a sample(s) the sample handler moves the sample(s) to the aspiration location. The progression of samples on the LAS (laboratory automation system) depends on whether samples are present on the LAS sample carousel.
Section 5-213
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Figure 5.51: LAS sample handler sample processing
After you load samples onto the LAS sample carousel and initiate a run: 1. The processing queue bar code reader reads the sample carousel ID. Samples placed on the LAS sample carousel take priority over samples on the LAS track. 2. If calibration orders are present on the carousel the positions are scanned to determine if there are patient or control bar code labeled samples present. 3. Calibrators are aspirated by the sample pipettor. 4. Each patient and control sample is scanned sequentially. 5. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC for each patient and control sample on the carousel. If there are no orders and your system is configured for host query, a query is sent to the host. If an order has not been entered into the host system, the carousel moves the next sample to the aspiration location. 6. If orders exist, the sample is aspirated before moving to the next carousel position. 7. Once all samples on the carousel are aspirated samples on the track are processed. When a sample is present on the track at the LAS pipettor position, the sample bar code is read by the processing queue bar code reader.
Section 5-214
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
8. The system software determines if an order is present on the SCC for each patient and control sample on the LAS track. If there are no orders, a query is sent to the host. If an order has not been entered into the host system, the next sample is moved into position. 9. If an order exists, the sample is aspirated.

Host computer download, page 5-110 Automated control ordering, page 5-111 Auto retest (patient samples), page 5-112 LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123
Batch processing
After you load samples the sample handler moves the samples to the sample bar code reader. NOTE: Batch processing is not available on the sample carousel (c System) or the RSH priority bays. For bar code labeled batch orders, the starting SID (sample ID) identifies the beginning of the batch run and the ending SID the end of the run. All bar coded samples loaded in between, regardless of SID or sequence, are processed as part of the batch. The batch is terminated when the ending SID is scanned. For non-bar code labeled batch orders, the starting carrier/position identifies the beginning of the batch run. All non-bar coded samples after the starting carrier/position are processed as part of the batch until the total number of samples equals the number entered. The only samples that may temporarily interrupt batch processing are patient or control samples loaded in the sample carousel (c System) or priority bay on the RSH (robotic sample handler). When loaded on any other sample handler, any samples loaded within the batch become exceptions and are not processed.
Unloading samples
To maintain continuous processing you should unload samples on a routine basis. Procedures include:
Section 5-215
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Unload samples (RSH), page 5-216 Access a sample with tests in process (RSH), page 5-217 Unload samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-218 Unload samples (SSH), page 5-219 Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler), page 5-220
Unload samples (RSH)

Perform this procedure to unload samples from the priority and/or routine bay(s) of the RSH (robotic sample handler) when they are no longer needed on the system. NOTE: Review the Exception status and Rerun status screens to determine if the sample(s) is still needed on the system. See Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295, or Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259.
Prerequisite Bay/section indicator: blinking green solid green alternating green/amber Module status User access level Supplies Any General operator NA
IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting sample carriers and carrier trays, do not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To unload samples: 1. Remove the sample carrier or carrier tray by performing one of the following: Lift the sample carrier out of the section when unloading from the priority bay. Grasp the carrier tray handle, and then lift up and pull the carrier tray out when unloading from the routine bay.
2. Remove the samples from the sample carrier.

Section 5-216
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
3. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container. 4. Store remaining samples according to laboratory guidelines.
Related information... RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115
Access a sample with tests in process (RSH)

Perform this procedure to suspend a bay on the RSH (robotic sample handler) when you need to immediately access a sample that is being processed. NOTE: When you suspend processing for a section and/or bay, the processing module stops aspirations on all samples associated with that location. Any scheduled tests not aspirated become exceptions and are not processed.

To access a sample with tests in process: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Sample status screen to locate the sample to be accessed. The Find options (Sample status) window displays. a. b. Enter the sample name, sample ID, and/or patient ID in the appropriate data entry boxes. Select Done to initiate the search. The Sample status screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. 2. Select the sample from the SID Name column, and then select F6 - Suspend. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to suspend processing. The RSH returns the carrier(s) to its original location. 4. Unload samples (RSH), page 5-216. To reload the sample(s), see Load samples for routine processing (RSH), page 5-179, or Load samples for priority processing (RSH), page 5-181.
Section 5-217
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
Find options (Sample status) window, page 5-168 RSH - robotic sample handler, page 1-115
Unload samples (sample carousel - c System)

Perform this procedure to unload samples from the sample carousel when they are no longer needed on the system. NOTE: Review the Exception status and Rerun status screens to determine if the sample(s) is still needed on the system. See Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295, or Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259.
IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting samples, do not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To unload samples: 1. Open the processing module cover. 2. Verify that the sample carousel access indicator button (square), next to the carousel, is illuminated. If the indicator button is not illuminated, see Pause the sample carousel (c System), page 5-16. 3. Press the gray button on the front portion of the sample carousel cover to open. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam.
Section 5-218
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
4. Press the sample carousel advance indicator button (round) to advance the sample carousel to access the desired position(s). 5. Remove the samples from the carousel. 6. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container. 7. Store remaining samples according to your laboratory guidelines. 8. Close the sample carousel cover by pushing the cover down until you hear a click. NOTE: Sample processing does not resume unless the sample carousel cover is closed. 9. Close the processing module cover.
Related information... Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 8000), page 1-33
Sample carousel and indicator lights (c 16000), page 1-53
Unload samples (SSH)

Perform this procedure to unload sample carriers and samples when the SSH (standard sample handler) unload queue is full or the samples are no longer needed on the system.
NA Any
Section 5-219
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Sample management
Section 5
General operator NA
IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting sample carriers, do not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To unload samples: 1. Lift the sample carrier carefully out of the sample unload queue. 2. Remove the samples from the sample carrier. 3. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container. 4. Store remaining samples according to laboratory guidelines.
Unload samples (LAS carousel sample handler)

Perform this procedure to unload an LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler and samples when the samples are no longer needed on the system.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Offline, Stopped, or Ready General operator NA
IMPORTANT: When unloading and transporting samples, do not splash sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To unload samples: 1. Open the LAS carousel cover, and then carefully lift the LAS carousel straight up from the LAS carousel platform.
Section 5-220
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample management
NOTE: You may remove samples from the LAS sample carousel without removing the carousel from the sample handler. Press the carousel advance key on the sample handler keypad to advance the LAS sample carousel to provide access to all positions. 2. Remove the samples from the sample carousel. 3. Dispose of sample cups in a biohazardous waste container. 4. Store remaining samples according to laboratory guidelines.
Related information... LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000), page 1-123
Section 5-221
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release
Section 5

Once patient and QC sample processing are complete, you can view the results to determine whether to release them or rerun the tests. Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release topics include: Patient results review and release, page 5-222 QC result review and release, page 5-242 Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review, page 5-257
Patient results review and release

Review patient results to determine whether to rerun the tests, release, or delete them. Patient results review and release topics include: Results review screen, page 5-222 Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 Procedures - Results review screen, page 5-226 Windows - Results review screen, page 5-235
Results review screen

From the Results review screen you can view information for unreleased patient results, which includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, carousel ID/position, or LAS Sample name and identification number Assay name and result Flags and codes
You can also release or delete a result and access windows to:
Section 5-222
Find information for specific tests based on specified search criteria Print the Absorbance Data report, Patient report, Result Details report, Results List report, and Sample report View detailed result information Add a comment to a result
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Rerun a test Patient and QC results review, rerun, and release
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. For results that have been released, see Stored results screen, page 5-262. Figure 5.52: Results review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Results review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-42. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column SID and NAME C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position No carrier or carousel/position SID, NAME, and ASSAY Alphanumerically in ascending order.
Section 5-223
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Column RESULT FLAG and CODE
Sort description Based on interpretation. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 and Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
To display this screen, see Access the Results review screen, page 5-224.
Related procedures... View all patient results, page 5-226

Find a specific patient result, page 5-227 Print a report, page 5-333 View patient result details, page 5-228 Add a comment to a patient result, page 5-229 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Rerun a test, page 5-231 Delete a patient result, page 5-233 Release a patient result, page 5-234 Cancel result transmission, page 5-268
Access the Results review screen

Perform this procedure to display the Results review screen.
To access the Results review screen: Select Results from the menu bar, and then select Results review. The Results review screen displays.
Related information... Results review screen, page 5-222

Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Section 5-224
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Descriptions of patient result flags

Flags provide additional information about a result and indicate that you may need to review the result. When a patient result has a flag, the information displays in red on the Results review and Stored results screens. The system displays one or more of the following result flags, when applicable, for a test result. When you select the FLAG column heading, the flags sort in the following order. Table 5.7: Patient result flags
Flag EDIT (c System) EXP* EXPC* (c System) A#1 (c System) Description The result was manually edited by the operator and was not calculated by the system. The result was measured using expired reagents, Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solutions. The result was calculated using an expired calibration curve. The result was calculated using the only read, out of all reads in the main read window, with measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range. This condition can occur when the result concentration is high or the sample is lipemic. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The result was calculated using only two reads, out of all reads in the main or flex read window, with measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range. This condition can occur when the result concentration is high or the sample is lipemic. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The result was calculated after the quality control failed for the same control name and control level. The flag continues to appear on subsequent results until the failed quality control result is rerun and the result is within acceptable limits. NOTE: Only Westgard rules configured as a failure produce a CNTL flag for a patient result. < or > FLEX (c System) LL or HH** The result is outside the dynamic or linear range. The result was calculated using the read data measured during the flex read time. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The result is outside the defined extreme range.
A#2 (c System)
CNTL*
Section 5-225
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Table 5.7: Patient result flags (continued)

Flag PSHH (c System ICT assays) Description The result may be affected by the ICT sample that was measured immediately prior to this sample because the result of the previous sample was above the extreme range. Rerun the sample to verify that there was no affect. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The result is outside the defined normal range.
LOW or HIGH**
* Indicates these flags carry over from a constituent result to a calculated result. ** Indicates a result is rounded to the reporting number of decimals for an assay, and then compared against the range.
Procedures - Results review screen

Procedures you can perform from the Results review screen and its related windows include: View all patient results, page 5-226 Find a specific patient result, page 5-227 View patient result details, page 5-228 Add a comment to a patient result, page 5-229 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Rerun a test, page 5-231 Delete a patient result, page 5-233 Release a patient result, page 5-234 Cancel result transmission, page 5-268
View all patient results

Perform this procedure to display the Results review screen. From this screen you can view information on unreleased patient results. To view information for released patient results, see View all stored patient results, page 5-265.
Prerequisite Module status NA Any
Section 5-226
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

General operator NA
To view all patient results: Select Results on the menu bar, and then select Results review. The Results review screen displays.

Find a specific patient result

Perform this procedure to search for specific unreleased patient results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the Results review screen, page 5-224

To find a specific patient result: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Results review screen. The Find options (Results review) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346, and 12347. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Results review screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar.
Section 5-227
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Find options (Results review) window, page 5-235 Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
View patient result details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for result window. From this window you can view details for unreleased patient results and add comments. To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for patient results, see View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230. To view details for released patient results, see View stored patient results details, page 5-266.

To view patient result details: 1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Results review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for result (Results review) window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Results review screen.

Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view, page 5-236
Section 5-228
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System), page 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-238 Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System), page 5-239 Details for result (Results review) window (i System), page 5-240 Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Add a comment to a patient result

Perform this procedure to add a comment to an unreleased patient result(s).

To add a comment to a patient result: 1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Results review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for result (Results review) window displays. 3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you selected more than one, and then enter a comment for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view, page 5-236 Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System), page 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System), page 5-239
Section 5-229
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Details for result (Results review) window (i System), page 5-240
View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System)
Perform this procedure to view the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result.
Prerequisite
Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164 Access the Results review screen, page 5-224 Access the Stored results screen, page 5-264 Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245 Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-280
To view the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result: 1. Select the desired photometric assay result(s) on the appropriate screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for result window - photometric - data view displays. 3. Select the graph button. The Details for result window - photometric - graph view displays. 4. Enter the desired range in the Y axis scale data entry boxes, and then select Rescale to change the absorbance scale. (optional) An updated view of the reaction graph displays. 5. Select Done to return to the previous screen. Your changes to the Y axis scale are not saved.

Results review screen, page 5-222 Stored results screen, page 5-262 QC result review screen, page 5-243 Stored QC results screen, page 5-278
Section 5-230
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System), page 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-238 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System), page 5-252 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-253 Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System), page 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-274 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c System), page 5-287 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-288
Rerun a test
Perform this procedure to rerun a patient test, control test, or an exception. If additional tests are required, you must create a new order. See Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128.
Prerequisite
Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164 Access the Results review screen, page 5-224 Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245 Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295
IMPORTANT: If you are rerunning a calculated assay for a patient sample, you must perform one of the following: Delete any pending constituent orders for the sample, and then create a new order for the calculated assay. OR Delete existing valid constituent results for this sample if new constituent results are desired for the calculation. Delete results for manually ordered constituents from either the Results review or Stored results screen.
Section 5-231
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Delete results for constituents automatically ordered by the system from the Results review, Stored results, or Exception status screen.
To rerun a test: 1. Retrieve the original sample and verify: Volume is sufficient. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Sample integrity is acceptable. See Sample integrity, page 5-176.
2. Return the sample to its position. 3. Select the desired test(s) on the appropriate screen. NOTE: You cannot rerun calibrator exceptions or calculated assay controls. 4. Select one of the following: F6 - Rerun from the Results review, QC result review, or Exception status screen. F7 - Rerun from the Sample status screen.
The Rerun options window displays. 5. Specify the desired rerun options. (optional) a. b. Select the carrier or carousel button, and then enter a carrier or carousel ID in the C data entry box, if displayed. Enter a position in the P data entry box.
NOTE: Steps 5a and 5b are not required if using a bar coded sample. c. Delete replicate values that are not required, and then enter the number of replicates for the desired dilution(s) in the Dilution protocols/number of replicates data entry box.
NOTE: You cannot run all assays with an automated dilution protocol. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). d. Select the Module selection: Manual option, and then select the appropriate module check box(es) to override the system module scheduler (multi-module i System).
Section 5-232
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: Overriding the system module scheduler may impact overall throughput. e. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 5a through 5d for each. (optional)
6. Select Done to save your changes and schedule the rerun. You can view the tests scheduled for rerun on the Order status, Rerun status, and Sample status screens. The R (rerun) code is assigned to the test(s). NOTE: If the sample is still onboard the RSH (robotic sample handler) and the RSH is configured to automatically reposition samples for retest, the system repositions and re-aspirates the sample automatically. To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336.

Results review screen, page 5-222 QC result review screen, page 5-243 Exception status screen, page 5-293 Rerun options window, page 5-241 Rerun options (QC result review) window, page 5-256 Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176 Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188 Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191 Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203
Delete a patient result

Perform this procedure to delete a patient result(s) that does not meet release requirements.

To delete a patient result:

Section 5-233
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Results review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F7 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to delete the result(s).

Stored results screen, page 5-262
Release a patient result

Perform this procedure to release a patient result(s) that has been reviewed.
Access the Sample status screen, page 5-164 Access the Results review screen, page 5-224
To release a patient result: 1. Select the desired patient result(s) or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F8 - Release to release the result(s). NOTE: The F8 - Release button is not available if any of the selected items on the Sample status screen are exceptions (red text) or released results (blue text). Deselect the exceptions and/or released results to make the button available. You can view result information on the Stored results screen. If your system interfaces with a host computer, the results transmit to the host and the number of tests pending transmission display on the LIS status button on the Snapshot screen. To cancel a result transmission, see Cancel result transmission, page 5-268.

Results review screen, page 5-222 Stored results screen, page 5-262
Section 5-234
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample status screen, page 5-162
Windows - Results review screen

Windows you can access from the Results review screen include: Find options (Results review) window, page 5-235 Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view, page 5-236 Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System), page 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-238 Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System), page 5-239 Details for result (Results review) window (i System), page 5-240 Rerun options window, page 5-241 Edit result window (c System), page 5-242
Find options (Results review) window

From the Find options (Results review) window you can search for specific unreleased patient results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields. For patient results that have been released, see Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-272.
Section 5-235
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.53: Find options (Results review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Results review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-43.
Related procedures... Find a specific patient result, page 5-227
Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view

From the calculated view of the Details for result (Results review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased calculated patient results and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-236
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.54: Details for result (Results review) window - calculated view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-44.
Related procedures... View patient result details, page 5-228

Add a comment to a patient result, page 5-229
Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System)

From the data view of the Details for result (Results review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased patient results and add comments. The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-237
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.55: Details for result (Results review) window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-45.

Add a comment to a patient result, page 5-229 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230
Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for result (Results review) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated absorbance data for unreleased patient results. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-238
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.56: Details for result (Results review) window - photometric - graph view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-47.

View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230
Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System)
From the sample interference index view of the Details for result (Results review) window you can view detailed information for patient results and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-239
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.57: Details for result (Results review) window - sample interference index view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-48.

Details for result (Results review) window (i System)

From the Details for result (Results review) window (i System) you can view detailed information for unreleased patient results and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-240
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.58: Details for result (Results review) window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-50.

Rerun options window

From the Rerun options window you can order a rerun for a patient test and change the following: Carrier ID and position or the carousel position Automated dilution factor Number of replicates Module for processing the test (multi-module i System)
Section 5-241
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.59: Rerun options window
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-51.
Related procedures... Rerun a test, page 5-231
Edit result window (c System)

From the Edit result window the system administrator can edit an assay result. Figure 5.60: Edit result window (c System)
QC result review and release

Review control results to determine whether to rerun the tests, release, or delete them. QC result review and release topics include:
Section 5-242
QC result review screen, page 5-243

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Procedures - QC result review screen, page 5-246 Windows - QC result review screen, page 5-251
QC result review screen

From the QC result review screen you can view information for unreleased control results, which includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, sample carousel ID/position, or LAS Control name, level, and identification number Assay name and result Flags
You can also release a control result and access windows to: Find information for specific tests based on specified search criteria Print the Absorbance Data report, QC Result Details report, and the QC Results List report View detailed control result information Add a comment to a control result Rerun a test
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. For control results that have been released, see Stored QC results screen, page 5-278.
Section 5-243
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.61: QC result review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC result review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-65. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position No carrier or carousel/position M SID, CONTROL NAME, LEVEL, and ASSAY RESULT FLAG Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. This column does not sort. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245.
To display this screen, see Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245.
Related procedures... View all control results, page 5-247

Section 5-244
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Find a specific control result, page 5-247 Print a report, page 5-333 View control result details, page 5-248 Add a comment to a control result, page 5-249 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Rerun a test, page 5-231 Release a control result, page 5-250 Cancel result transmission, page 5-268
Access the QC result review screen

Perform this procedure to display the QC result review screen.
To access the QC result review screen: Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select QC result review. The QC result review screen displays.
Related information... QC result review screen, page 5-243

Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Descriptions of quality control result flags

Flags provide additional information about a quality control result and indicate that you may need to review the result. When a control result has a flag, the information displays in red on the QC result review, Stored QC results, and QC summary review screens. The system displays one or more of the following quality control result
Section 5-245
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
flags, when applicable, for a quality control result. When you select the FLAG column header, the flags sort in the following order. Table 5.8: Quality control result flags
Flag Westgard rule Description The quality control result failed one or more Westgard rules. Each failed rule displays. See Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310. The quality control result was measured using expired reagents, Pre-Trigger, or Trigger Solutions. The quality control result was calculated using an expired calibration curve. The quality control result was calculated using the only read, out of all reads in the main read window, with measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The quality control result was calculated using only two reads, out of all reads in the main or flex read window, with measured absorbance within the defined absorbance range. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The quality control result is outside the dynamic or linear range. The quality control result was calculated using the read data measured during the flex read time. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562. The quality control result may be affected by the ICT sample that was measured immediately prior to this sample because the result of the previous sample was above the extreme range. Rerun the sample to verify that there was no affect. See Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562.
EXP EXPC (c System) A#1 (c System)
A#2 (c System)
< or > FLEX (c System)
PSHH (c System ICT assays)
Procedures - QC result review screen

Procedures you can perform from the QC result review screen and its related windows include: View all control results, page 5-247 Find a specific control result, page 5-247 View control result details, page 5-248 Add a comment to a control result, page 5-249 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230
Section 5-246
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Rerun a test, page 5-231 Release a control result, page 5-250
View all control results

Perform this procedure to display the QC result review screen. From this screen you can view information on unreleased control results. To view information for released control results, see View all stored control results, page 5-281. To view a summary of statistical data for controls, see View QC data summary, page 5-326.
To view all control results: Select QC-Cal icon from the menu bar, and then select QC result review. The QC result review screen displays.

Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153 Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310
Find a specific control result

Perform this procedure to search for specific unreleased control results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the QC result review screen, page 5-245

To find a specific control result: 1. Select F3 - Find on the QC result review screen. The Find options (QC result review) window displays.
Section 5-247
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields except position (p). Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346, and 12347. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The QC result review screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-251 Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153 Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310
View control result details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC result window. From this window you can view details for unreleased control results and add comments. To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for control results, see View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230. To view details for released control results, see View stored control result details, page 5-283.

Section 5-248
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To view control result details: 1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the QC result review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for QC result (QC result review) window displays. NOTE: A code C may display for a Levey-Jennings point comment and a QC result details comment. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the QC result review screen.

Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System), page 5-252 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-253 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System), page 5-254 Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153 Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310
Add a comment to a control result

Perform this procedure to add a comment to an unreleased control result(s).

To add a comment to a control result: 1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the QC result review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for QC result (QC result review) window displays.
Section 5-249
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you selected more than one, and then enter a comment for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System), page 5-252 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-253 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System), page 5-254
Release a control result

Perform this procedure to release a control result(s) that has been reviewed.

To release a control result: 1. Select the desired control result(s) from the table on the QC result review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F8 - Release to release the result(s). You can view result information on the Stored QC results screen and the Levey-Jennings graph screen. If your system interfaces with a host computer and is configured for transmitting approved QC results to the host, the results transmit to the host and the number of tests pending transmission display on the LIS (laboratory information system) status button on the Snapshot screen. To cancel result transmission, see Cancel result transmission, page 5-268.

Section 5-250
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC result review screen, page 5-243 Stored QC results, page 5-278
Windows - QC result review screen

Windows you can access from the QC result review screen include: Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-251 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System), page 5-252 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-253 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System), page 5-254 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view, page 5-255 Rerun options (QC result review) window, page 5-256
Find options (QC result review) window

From the Find options (QC result review) window you can search for specific unreleased control results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields. For control results that have been released, see Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-286.
Section 5-251
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.62: Find options (QC result review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-66.
Related procedures... Find a specific control result, page 5-247
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System)
From the data view of the Details for QC result (QC result review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased control results and add comments. The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-252
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.63: Details for QC result (QC result review) window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-67.
Related procedures... View control result details, page 5-248

Add a comment to a control result, page 5-249 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - photometric graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for QC result (QC result review) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated absorbance data for unreleased control results. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-253
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.64: Details for QC result (QC result review) window photometric - graph view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-68.

Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System)

From the i System view of the Details for QC result (QC result review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased control results and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-254
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.65: Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-70.

Add a comment to a control result, page 5-249
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view

From the calculated view of the Details for QC result (QC result review) window you can view detailed information for unreleased control results and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-255
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.66: Details for QC result (QC result review) window Calculated view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-71.

Add a comment to a control result, page 5-249
Rerun options (QC result review) window

From the Rerun options (QC result review) window you can order a rerun for a control test and change the following: Carrier ID and position or the carousel position Automated dilution factor Number of replicates Module for processing the test (multi-module i System)
Section 5-256
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.67: Rerun options (QC result review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-72.
Related procedures... Rerun a test, page 5-231
Patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review

A rerun is a test order created by the operator or automatically by the system. You use the Rerun status screen to review and manage patient results, QC results, and exceptions that are scheduled for rerun. Patient, QC, and exception rerun review topics include: Rerun status screen, page 5-257 Procedures - Rerun status screen, page 5-260
Rerun status screen

From the Rerun status screen you can view information for the tests scheduled for rerun and delete a rerun. These tests are ordered by the operator or created automatically by the system and display until the rerun is complete. NOTE: Tests scheduled for rerun also display on the Order status and Sample status screens. Information includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, carousel ID/position, or LAS Sample name and identification number
Section 5-257
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Assay name, status, and time of completion Processing codes
You can also access windows to: Find information for specific reruns based on specified search criteria Print the Rerun list report View detailed rerun information Add a comment to a rerun Delete a test scheduled for rerun
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. Figure 5.68: Rerun status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Rerun status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-108.
Section 5-258
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Column C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position No carrier or carousel/position SID, NAME, and ASSAY TIME STATUS and CODE Alphanumerically in ascending order. Last to first to complete. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 and Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
To display this screen, see Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259.
Related procedures... View the status of tests scheduled for rerun, page 5-260
Find a specific test order, page 5-155 Print a report, page 5-333 View order or rerun status details, page 5-156 Add a comment to an order, page 5-157 Delete a test from a rerun order, page 5-261
Access the Rerun status screen

Perform this procedure to display the Rerun status screen.
To access the Rerun status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the Reruns status button. Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Rerun status. The Rerun status screen displays.
Section 5-259
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5

Rerun status screen, page 5-257 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152
Procedures - Rerun status screen

Procedures you can perform from the Rerun status screen and its related windows include: View the status of tests scheduled for rerun, page 5-260 Find a specific test order, page 5-155 View order or rerun status details, page 5-156 Add a comment to an order, page 5-157 Delete a test from a rerun order, page 5-261
View the status of tests scheduled for rerun

Perform this procedure to access the Rerun status screen. From this screen you can view information for the tests scheduled for rerun and delete a rerun. These tests are ordered by the operator or created automatically by the system and display until the rerun is complete. NOTE: Tests scheduled for rerun also display on the Order status and Sample status screens.
To view the status of tests scheduled for rerun: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the Reruns status button. Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Rerun status. The Rerun status screen displays.

Rerun status screen, page 5-257
Section 5-260
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153 Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152
Delete a test from a rerun order

Perform this procedure to delete a test(s) that no longer needs to be rerun.
Access the Rerun status screen, page 5-259

Rerun order status - Pending Any General operator NA
To delete a test from a rerun order: 1. Select the desired test(s) from the table on the Rerun status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F6 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to delete the test(s).
Related information... Rerun status screen, page 5-257
Section 5-261
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Patient and QC stored results
Section 5

This subsection describes how to view and archive patient and QC results that have been released. Patient and QC stored results topics include: Patient stored results, page 5-262 Stored QC results, page 5-278
Patient stored results

Patient results that have been released remain in stored results until you archive or delete them, or system capacity is reached. See System capacities, page 4-6. Patient stored results topics include: Stored results screen, page 5-262 Procedures - Stored results screen, page 5-264 Windows - Stored results screen, page 5-271
Stored results screen

From the Stored results screen you can view information for released patient results, which includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, carousel ID/position, or LAS Sample name and identification number Assay name and result Flags and codes
You can also retransmit, archive, or delete a stored result and access windows to: Find information for specific stored results based on specified search criteria Print the Absorbance Data report, Patient report, Result Details report, Results List report, and the Sample report View detailed information for stored results
Section 5-262
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For results that have not been released, see Results review screen, page 5-222. Figure 5.69: Stored results screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Stored results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-52. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position No carrier or carousel/position SID, NAME, and ASSAY RESULT FLAG and CODE Alphanumerically in ascending order. Based on interpretation. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 and Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
To display this screen, see Access the Stored results screen, page 5-264.
Section 5-263
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Related procedures... View all stored patient results, page 5-265

Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-265 Print a report, page 5-333 View stored patient results details, page 5-266 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Retransmit a stored patient result to the host, page 5-267 Delete a stored patient result, page 5-269 Archive stored patient results, page 5-269 Cancel result transmission, page 5-268
Access the Stored results screen

Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen.
To access the Stored results screen: Select Results from the menu bar, and then select Stored results. The Stored results screen displays.
Related information... Stored results screen, page 5-262

Procedures - Stored results screen

Procedures you can perform from the Stored results screen and its related windows include: View all stored patient results, page 5-265 Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-265 View stored patient results details, page 5-266 Retransmit a stored patient result to the host, page 5-267
Section 5-264
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cancel result transmission, page 5-268 Delete a stored patient result, page 5-269 Archive stored patient results, page 5-269
View all stored patient results

Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen. From this screen you can view information on released patient results. To view information for unreleased patient results, see View all patient results, page 5-226.
To view all stored patient results: Select Results on the menu bar, and then select Stored results. The Stored results screen displays.

Find a specific stored patient result

Perform this procedure to search for specific released patient results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the Stored results screen, page 5-264

To find a specific stored patient result: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Stored results screen. The Find options (Stored results) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria.
Section 5-265
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346, and 12347. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Stored results screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-272 Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
View stored patient results details

Perform this procedure to display the Stored results screen. From this screen you can view details for released patient results. To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for patient results, see View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230. To view details for unreleased patient results, see View patient result details, page 5-228.

To view stored patient results details: 1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Stored results screen, or select F2 - Select all.
Section 5-266
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for result (Stored results) window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Stored results screen. Patient and QC stored results

Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view, page 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System), page 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-274 Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index view (c System), page 5-275 Details for result (Stored results) window (i System), page 5-276 Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Retransmit a stored patient result to the host

Perform this procedure to retransmit a released patient result(s) to the host.
Prerequisite

Must be configured for bidirectional host communications, see Configure host interface settings, page 2-6
To retransmit a stored patient result to the host: 1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Stored results screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F6 - Transmit to Host. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to transmit the result(s).
Section 5-267
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To cancel a transmission to the host computer, see Cancel result transmission, page 5-268.
Cancel result transmission

Perform this procedure to clear all results that are pending transmission to the host.

To cancel result transmission: 1. Select Host-Release mode from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure host - release mode window displays. 3. Select the Bidirectional host: Off option, and then select Done. A message displays when you have results that are pending transmission to the host. 4. Select OK to cancel result transmission. NOTE: If you select Cancel to leave the Bidirectional host on, the results pending transmission remain until transmission is successful. Results with a status of Pending Transmission go to a status of complete. Error message 8465, Host transmission canceled by the user is logged in the Message History log. NOTE: To resume host communication, you must reset the bidirectional host option.

Details for host - release mode window, page 2-41 Configure host - release mode window, page 2-40
Section 5-268
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Delete a stored patient result

Perform this procedure to delete a released patient result(s) that is no longer needed on the system.

Result is not pending transmission or pending collation Any General operator NA
To delete a stored patient result: 1. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Stored results screen, or select F2 - Select all. NOTE: Results with a status of pending transmission or pending collation cannot be deleted. Wait until the results have been transmitted or all results have been released before deleting them. 2. Select F7 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to delete the result(s).
Archive stored patient results

Perform this procedure to store released patient results on a CD to create a backup for long-term storage. NOTE: The results are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT System to retrieve the information.

Offline, Stopped, or Ready General operator CD-R (compact disk recordable) or Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk Recordable/ReWritable)
To archive stored patient results:
Section 5-269
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
1. Disable the screen timeout if the database is full and you are archiving a large amount of data. See Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26. (optional) 2. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW into the CD drive. NOTE: If an archive message displays, see Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-271. 3. Select the desired patient result(s) from the table on the Stored results screen, or select F2 - Select all. NOTE: You can also select F3 - Find to search for and select results. See Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-265. 4. Select F8 - Archive. The Archive results window displays. 5. Verify the CD drive read indicator light is off. 6. Deselect Delete records after archive check box. (optional) NOTE: If you choose to delete results, results with a status of Pending transmission or Pending collation are not deleted. 7. Select Done to archive the results. NOTE: An archive routinely takes less than four minutes, but with a full database it may take longer. You can cancel an archive when the system is collecting archive data and creating a temporary archive data file. A progress indicator displays with a Cancel button. You can cancel an archive prior to it being 50% complete. Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519 Data Archive Complete" message displays. 8. Select the refresh button, if available.

Archive results window, page 5-277
Section 5-270
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operating instructions Section 5 Descriptions of archive messages

The following table lists the archive messages and their meanings. Table 5.9: Descriptions of archive messages
Message Insufficient disk space for archive Description The disk does not have enough space to archive the requested record. See error code 0180. NOTE: A minimum of 40 megabytes of disk space is required to initiate an archive. No disk or incorrect disk type detected You did not place a disk in the CD drive. You used an incorrect disk type. You inserted the disk upside down. The archive disk is not a Recordable/ReWritable disk. See error code 0181. No CD drive is detected A CD-RW drive is not installed on the SCC. A cabling problem exists on the CD drive. The CD drive had a hardware failure. See error code 0182. CD drive is initializing You selected the Done button before initialization is complete. See error code 0183. The archive disk is not a Recordable/ReWritable disk. See error code 0184. NOTE: A CD that has been previously used to write information other than archive information cannot be used to archive additional information. Busy The CD is in the process of reading, writing, or initializing. See error code 0185.
The disk is read-only
Windows - Stored results screen

Windows you can access from the Stored results screen include: Find options (Stored results) window, page 5-272
Section 5-271
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view, page 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System), page 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-274 Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index view (c System), page 5-275 Details for result (Stored results) window (i System), page 5-276 Archive results window, page 5-277
Find options (Stored results) window

From the Find options (Stored results) window you can search for specific released patient results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields. For patient results that have not been released, see Find options (Results review) window, page 5-235. Figure 5.70: Find options (Stored results) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-53.
Related procedures... Find a specific stored patient result, page 5-265
Section 5-272
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view

From the calculated view of the Details for result (Stored results) window you can view detailed information for released patient results. NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length. Figure 5.71: Details for result (Stored results) window - calculated view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-54.
Related procedures... View stored patient results details, page 5-266
Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System)

From the data view of the Details for result (Stored results) window you can view detailed information for released patient results. The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected. NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-273
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.72: Details for result (Stored results) window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-56.

Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric - graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for result (Stored results) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated absorbance data for released patient results. NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-274
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.73: Details for result (Stored results) window - photometric graph view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-58.

Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index view (c System)
From the sample interference index view of the Details for result (Stored results) window you can view detailed information for released patient results. NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-275
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.74: Details for result (Stored results) window - sample interference index view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-59.
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System)

From the Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) you can view detailed information for released patient results. NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-276
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.75: Details for result (Stored results) window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-61.
Archive results window

From the Archive results window you can archive released patient results to a CD.
Section 5-277
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.76: Archive results window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-62.
Related procedures... Archive stored patient results, page 5-269
Stored QC results
QC results that have been released remain in stored results until you archive and delete them. Stored QC results topics include: Stored QC results screen, page 5-278 Procedures - Stored QC results screen, page 5-281 Windows - Stored QC results screen, page 5-286
Stored QC results screen

From the Stored QC results screen you can view information for released control results, which includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, carousel ID/position, or LAS Control name, level, and identification number Assay name and result Flags
Section 5-278
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

You can also retransmit or archive a stored control result and access windows to: Find information for specific tests based on specified search criteria Print the Absorbance Data report, QC Result Details report, and QC Results List report View detailed stored control result information
An ellipsis (...) displays when the system cannot display all data on a screen or a window. View the details window to see all data. For control results that have not been released, see QC result review screen, page 5-243. Figure 5.77: Stored QC results screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Stored QC results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-86.
Section 5-279
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Column C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position No carrier or carousel/position M SID, CONTROL NAME, LEVEL, and ASSAY RESULT FLAG Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. This column does not sort. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245.
To display this screen, see Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-280.
Related procedures... View all stored control results, page 5-281

Find a specific stored control result, page 5-282 Print a report, page 5-333 View stored control result details, page 5-283 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Retransmit a stored control result, page 5-284 Cancel result transmission, page 5-268 Archive stored control results, page 5-284
Access the Stored QC results screen

Perform this procedure to display the Stored QC results screen.
To access the Stored QC results screen:
Section 5-280
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select Stored QC results. The Stored QC results screen displays.
Related information... Stored QC results screen, page 5-278

Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Procedures - Stored QC results screen

Procedures you can perform from the Stored QC results screen and its related windows include: View all stored control results, page 5-281 Find a specific stored control result, page 5-282 View stored control result details, page 5-283 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Retransmit a stored control result, page 5-284 Archive stored control results, page 5-284
View all stored control results

Perform this procedure to display the Stored QC results screen. From this screen you can view information for released control results. To view information for unreleased control results, see View all control results, page 5-247.
To view all stored control results: Select QC - Cal icon from the menu bar, and then select Stored QC results. The Stored QC results screen displays.

Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245
Section 5-281
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153 Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310
Find a specific stored control result

Perform this procedure to search for specific released control results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the Stored QC results screen, page 5-280

To find a specific stored control result: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Stored QC results screen. The Find options (Stored QC results) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields except position (p). Example: If you enter 123* in the SID data entry box, all results starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345, 12346, and 12347. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Stored QC results screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-286 Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Section 5-282
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310
View stored control result details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window. From this screen you can view details for released control results and add comments. To view the assay reaction graph and absorbance data for control results, see View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230. To view details for unreleased control results, see View control result details, page 5-248.
Prerequisite

To view stored control result details: 1. Select the desired result(s) from the table on the Stored QC results screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each result if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Stored QC results screen.

Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c System), page 5-287 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-288 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System), page 5-289 Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Section 5-283
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Retransmit a stored control result

Perform this procedure to retransmit a released control result(s) to the host.
Prerequisite

Must be configured for bidirectional host communications, see Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
To retransmit a stored control result to the host: 1. Select the desired control result(s) from the table on the Stored QC results screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F6 - Transmit to Host. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to transmit the result(s). To cancel a transmission to the host computer, see Cancel result transmission, page 5-268.
Archive stored control results

Perform this procedure to store released control results on a CD to create a backup for long-term storage. NOTE: The results are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT System to retrieve the information.

Stopped, Warming, or Ready General operator CD-R (compact disk recordable) or Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk read/write)
To archive stored control results:
Section 5-284
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

1. Disable the screen timeout if the database is full and you are archiving a large amount of data. See Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26. (optional) 2. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW into the CD drive. NOTE: If an archive message displays, see Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-271. 3. Select the desired control results from the table on the Stored QC results screen, or select F2 - Select all. NOTE: You can also select F3 - Find to search for and select results. See Find a specific stored control result, page 5-282. 4. Select F8-Archive. The Archive QC results window displays. 5. Verify the CD drive read indicator light is off. 6. Deselect Delete records after archive check box. (optional) NOTE: If you delete QC results, the result values continue to be used in the cumulative module or system data. However, deleted QC results are deleted from the current Westgard analysis. Before deleting QC results, verify that all results you do not want included in the cumulative data have been excluded. See Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318. Once the archive is complete and the QC results have been deleted, you cannot access the result to exclude it. If you choose to delete results, results with a status of Pending transmission or Pending collation are not deleted. 7. Select Done to archive the results. NOTE: An archive routinely takes less than four minutes, but with a full database it may take longer. You can cancel an archive when the system is collecting archive data and creating a temporary archive data file. A progress indicator displays with a Cancel button. You can cancel an archive prior to it being 50% complete. Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519 Data Archive Complete" message displays. 8. Select the refresh button, if available. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.
Section 5-285
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5

Archive QC results window, page 5-291
Windows - Stored QC results screen

Windows you can access from the Stored QC results screen include: Find options (Stored QC results) window, page 5-286 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c System), page 5-287 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-288 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System), page 5-289 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated view, page 5-290 Archive QC results window, page 5-291
Find options (Stored QC results) window

From the Find options (Stored QC results) window you can search for specific released control results by entering your search criteria in one or more fields. The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected. For unreleased control results, see Find options (QC result review) window, page 5-251.
Section 5-286
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.78: Find options (Stored QC results) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-87.
Related procedures... Find a specific stored control result, page 5-282
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c System)

From the data view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window you can view detailed information for released control results. The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric or potentiometric) for the result selected.
Section 5-287
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.79: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-88.
Related procedures... View stored control result details, page 5-283

Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - photometric - graph view (c System)
From the photometric - graph view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated absorbance data for released control results.
Section 5-288
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.80: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window photometric - graph view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-90.

Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System)

From the i System view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window you can view detailed information for released control results.
Section 5-289
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.81: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-91.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - calculated view

From the calculated view of the Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window you can view detailed information for released control results.
Section 5-290
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.82: Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window calculated view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field descriptions, page Appendix E-92.
Archive QC results window

From the Archive QC results window you can archive released control results to a CD.
Section 5-291
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.83: Archive QC results window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive QC results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-93.
Related procedures... Archive stored control results, page 5-284
Section 5-292
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Exception management
An exception is a test order that failed to complete. Results are not reported and operator intervention is required. You use the Exception status screen to review and manage exceptions. When an exception(s) occurs: The Exceptions status button displays on the Snapshot screen and indicates the number of exceptions. You can select this button to display the Exception status screen. The Exceptions icon on the menu bar blinks to indicate new exceptions exist. You can select this icon, and then Exception status, to display the Exception status screen.
The exception management topic includes the Exception status screen, page 5-293.
Exception status screen

From the Exception status screen you can view information for patient, control, and calibration exceptions, which includes: Sample location, identified by sample carrier ID/position, carousel ID/position, or LAS Sample name and identification number Assay name Error code Module identifier
You can also transmit an exception to the host, delete an exception, and access windows to: Find information for specific exceptions based on specified search criteria Print the Exception Details, Exception Status, and Absorbance Data reports View detailed information for exceptions View probable causes and corrective actions for the error code Add a comment to an exception Rerun an exception
Section 5-293
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
NOTE: Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length. Figure 5.84: Exception status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Exception status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-97. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column C/P Sort description Alphanumerically in the following order: Carrier/position CRSL (carousel)/position LAS LAS carousel/position WTR (water)/0 No carrier or carousel/position SID, NAME, and ASSAY M ERROR CODE Alphanumerically in ascending order. Numerically in ascending order. Numerically in ascending order.
To display this screen, see Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295.
Section 5-294
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related procedures... View all exceptions, page 5-296
Find a specific exception, page 5-296 Print a report, page 5-333 View exception details, page 5-297 Add a comment to an exception, page 5-298 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230 Rerun a test, page 5-231 Transmit an exception to the host, page 5-299 Delete an exception, page 5-299 Exception management
Access the Exception status screen

Perform this procedure to display the Exception status screen.
To access the Exception status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the Exceptions status button. Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Exception status. The Exception status screen displays.

Exception status screen, page 5-293
Procedures - Exception status screen

Procedures you can perform from the Exception status screen include: View all exceptions, page 5-296 Find a specific exception, page 5-296 View exception details, page 5-297
Section 5-295
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Add a comment to an exception, page 5-298 Transmit an exception to the host, page 5-299 Delete an exception, page 5-299 Rerun a test, page 5-231
View all exceptions

Perform this procedure to display the Exception status screen. From this screen you can view a list of all tests that have failed to complete. To find specific exceptions, see Find a specific exception, page 5-296.
NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the Exceptions status button. To view all exceptions: Select Exceptions from the menu bar, and then select Exception status. The Exception status screen displays.

Find a specific exception

Perform this procedure to search for a specific exception(s) by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the Exception status screen, page 5-295

To find a specific exception: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Exception status screen. The Find options (Exception status) window displays.
Section 5-296
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria. NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all data entry boxes except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the Error code data entry box, all orders with an error code starting with 123 display. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Exception status screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.
Related information... Exception status screen, page 5-293

Find options (Exception status) window, page 5-300
View exception details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for exceptions window. From this window you can view detailed information for exceptions that you can use in troubleshooting.

To view exception details: 1. Select the desired exception(s) from the table on the Exception status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for exceptions window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each exception if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the Exception status screen.
Section 5-297
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5

Details for exceptions window - calculated view, page 5-304 Details for exceptions window - data view (c System), page 5-301 Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-302 Details for exceptions window (i System), page 5-303 Details for exceptions window - control view, page 5-305 Details for exceptions window - calibrator view, page 5-307
Add a comment to an exception

Perform this procedure to add a comment to an exception(s).

To add a comment to an exception: 1. Select the desired exception(s) from the table on the Exception status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for exceptions window displays. 3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. 4. Use the previous/next buttons to display each exception if you selected more than one, and then enter a comment for each. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes.

Details for exceptions window - calculated view, page 5-304 Details for exceptions window - data view (c System), page 5-301 Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-302 Details for exceptions window (i System), page 5-303
Section 5-298
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for exceptions window - control view, page 5-305
Transmit an exception to the host

Perform this procedure to transmit an exception(s) to the host when exceptions are managed on a host system.
Prerequisite

To transmit an exception to the host: 1. Select the desired exception(s) from the table on the Exception status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F8 - Transmit to Host to transmit the exceptions. Once the transmission completes, the exception(s) no longer displays on the Exception status screen. To cancel the exception transmission, see Cancel result transmission, page 5-268.
Delete an exception
Perform this procedure to delete an exception(s) that is no longer needed for troubleshooting.

To delete an exception: 1. Select the desired exception(s) from the table on the Exception status screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F7 - Delete. A confirmation message displays.
Section 5-299
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
3. Select OK to delete the exception(s). NOTE: Exceptions that are pending transmission or pending collation are not deleted until transmission completes.
Windows - Exception status screen

Windows you can access from the Exception status screen include: Find options (Exception status) window, page 5-300 Details for exceptions window - data view (c System), page 5-301 Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System), page 5-302 Details for exceptions window (i System), page 5-303 Details for exceptions window - calculated view, page 5-304 Details for exceptions window - control view, page 5-305 Details for exceptions window - calculated control view, page 5-306 Details for exceptions window - calibrator view, page 5-307
Find options (Exception status) window

From the Find options (Exception status) window you can search for specific exceptions by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Section 5-300
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.85: Find options (Exception status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-98.
Related procedures... Find a specific exception, page 5-296
Details for exceptions window - data view (c System)

From the data view of the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments. The information that displays depends on the assay type (photometric, potentiometric, or sample interference index) for the exception selected. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-301
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.86: Details for exceptions window - data view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-99.
Related procedures... View exception details, page 5-297

Add a comment to an exception, page 5-298 View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230
Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System)

From the photometric - graph view of the Details for exceptions window you can view the assay reaction graph and associated absorbance data for results. This view is not available for tests that are unable to complete all photometric measurements. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-302
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.87: Details for exceptions window - photometric - graph view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-100.

Details for exceptions window (i System)

From the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-303
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.88: Details for exceptions window (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-102.

Add a comment to an exception, page 5-298
Details for exceptions window - calculated view

From the calculated view of the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-304
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.89: Details for exceptions window - calculated view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-103.

Details for exceptions window - control view

From the control view of the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-305
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.90: Details for exceptions window - control view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window Control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-104.

Details for exceptions window - calculated control view

From the calculated control view of the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status screen. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-306
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.91: Details for exceptions window - calculated control view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window Calculated control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-106.

Details for exceptions window - calibrator view

From the calibrator view of the Details for exceptions window you can view detailed information for exceptions and add comments. NOTE: The title of this window is Details... when you access it from the Sample status window. Some data fields may not display all data if the data you entered is maximum character length.
Section 5-307
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.92: Details for exceptions window - calibrator view
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for exceptions window Calibrator view field descriptions, page Appendix E-107.

Section 5-308
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Quality control analysis

Quality control analysis is the process of monitoring control activity. The ARCHITECT System allows you to monitor control activity using standard Levey-Jennings graphs, Westgard rules, and QC data summaries. Control data includes both unreleased and released results. To help ensure quality results and maintain optimal system performance: Carefully follow all directions in the Operations Manual and the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Never use expired or contaminated consumables. Perform maintenance checks and calibration procedures as recommended. See Maintenance, page 9-2.
IMPORTANT: The system evaluates controls on an assay per control lot basis. If a control fails on one or multiple reagent kits, the control failure on the kit(s) does not prevent the kit(s) from being used. You need to evaluate and resolve any control issues before running patient samples. The quality control management topics include: Westgard rule application, page 5-309 Levey-Jennings graph screen, page 5-312 QC summary review screen, page 5-323 QC reports screen, page 5-330
Westgard rule application

When Westgard rules are configured, the ARCHITECT System compares a control result against the expected mean and standard deviation for the control level. Previous results for the same assay are considered. For information on configuring Westgard rules, see Configure a Westgard rule, page 2-181. For information on each of the rules, see Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310. For information on run definitions, see Westgard rule run descriptions, page 5-311.
Section 5-309
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Westgard rule descriptions

Westgard rules configured as a failure for an assay(s) produce a CNTL (control) flag for each patient result associated with the assay(s). The following table lists the Westgard rules in the order they are applied and provides a description of each. Table 5.10: Westgard rule descriptions
Westgard rule 1-3s 2-2s 1R 1M Description Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds the control limits of x + 3SD or x - 3SD. Control rule to test whether two consecutive control measurements for the same control material within the same run exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of the mean. Control rule to test whether two consecutive control measurements across control materials within the same run exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of the mean. The two control results must have different control level names. Control rule to test whether two consecutive control measurements for the same control material across two different runs exceed the same control limit of either x + 2SD or x - 2SD. Both results must fall on the same side of the mean. The previous consecutive control result can be obtained during any previous run. Control rule to test whether the range, or difference, between control measurements run within 30 minutes of each other exceeds 4SD. The two control results need not be consecutive. The current control result is compared against each control result, which is older than the current result, by 30 minutes or less. Each result must be greater than 2SD, but in opposite directions. Control rule to test whether four consecutive control measurements for the same control material exceed the same control limit of either x + 1SD or x - 1SD. All four control results must fall on the same side of the mean. The previous control results can be obtained during any run. Control rule to test whether four consecutive control measurements across control materials exceed the same control limit of either x + 1SD or x - 1SD. All four results must fall on the same side of the mean. The previous control results can be obtained during any run. (For this rule, both control results with the same or different control level names are considered.)
2-2s 1R xM
2-2s xR 1M
R-4s
4-1s 1M
4-1s xM
Section 5-310
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 5.10: Westgard rule descriptions (continued)

Westgard rule 10-x 1M Description Control rule to test whether 10 consecutive control measurements for the same control material fall on the same side of the mean. If a result falls on the mean, the rule does not fail. The previous control results can be obtained during any run. Control rule to test whether 10 consecutive control measurements across control materials fall on the same side of the mean. If a result falls on the mean, the rule does not fail. The previous control results can be obtained during any run. (For this rule, both control results with the same or different control level names are considered.) Control rule to test whether a control measurement exceeds the control limits of x + 2SD or x - 2SD.
10-x xM
1-2s
NOTE: To evaluate 1M (one material) rules, the system considers previous control results with the same control name, control level name, and control lot number. To evaluate xM (across materials) rules, the system considers previous control results with the same control name and control lot number but different control level names.
Westgard rule run descriptions

The following table describes Westgard rules run definitions. For information on configuring Run definitions, see Configure system control center window, page 2-48. Table 5.11: Westgard rules run definitions
Run definitions First Run Start Hour Description The system allows the user to define what a run is on a system-wide basis. Run is defined by specifying a start time (which hour) and a time period (how many hours per run). This is the time based run mode. The start hour is an integer between 0 and 23. The "Run Period" is used for Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, 4-1s xM.
Run Period Length The length of the "Run Period" in hours. The next Run Period begins Run Period Length hours after the current Run Period started. The run period is an integer between 1 and 24. If the 1 day period (24 hours) cannot be divided into equal time runs, the last run shall have the remaining hours. The Run Period is used for Westgard rules 2-2s 1R 1M, 2-2s 1R xM, 2-2s xR 1M, 4-1s 1M, 4-1s xM.
Section 5-311
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Levey-Jennings graph screen

From the Levey-Jennings graph screen you can view graphs and statistical data that reflect the criteria you specified on the QC selection window. A maximum of six Levey-Jennings graphs, three per page, displays. You can also access windows to: Change the criteria for the graph and data Include or exclude points from a graph View details for a selected point Print the Levey-Jennings report
Figure 5.93: Levey-Jennings graph screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-73.
Section 5-312
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

An explanation of the graph and statistical data elements on the Levey-Jennings graph screen follows. Table 5.12: Graph elements
Item MEAN + and - 1 SD (standard deviation) + and - 2 SD + and - 3 SD Cursor (yellow box) Points Normal (black) Westgard warnings (yellow) Westgard failures (red) Out of range (blue) Excluded (white) Description Represented by the center line of the graph and indicates the expected control mean. Represented by the first line above and below the mean (green area). Represented by the second line above and below the mean (yellow area). Represented by the third line above and below the mean (red area). Indicates the selected point. Use the Point cursor controls to move the cursor from one point to the next. Represent control results and are graphed in the order of completion. Points that fall within the defined control range and do not fail configured Westgard rules. Points that caused a warning condition based on the Westgard analysis. Points that failed Westgard analysis. Bar that indicates a control result that is outside of the control range. Points that have been excluded from the data calculation.
Table 5.13: Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements

Statistic fields MEAN SD LEVEL N Description The expected mean value as configured. The expected standard deviation value as configured. The control level name you selected. The number of control points for the selected level/lot/assay/module.
Section 5-313
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Table 5.13: Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements

Statistic fields COMPARISON MEAN Description The mean used to compare to the expected control mean. Information that displays is determined by your selections on the QC selection window. Options are: None - no comparison displayed Manufacturers - mean as configured Module cumulative - calculated for the selected assay/level/lot for the selected module System cumulative - calculated value for the selected assay/level/lot for all modules COMPARISON SD The SD (standard deviation) used to compare to the expected control SD. Information that displays is determined by your selections on the QC selection window. Options are: None - no comparison displayed Manufacturers - SD as configured Module cumulative - calculated for the selected assay/level/lot for the selected module System cumulative - calculated value for the selected assay/level/lot for all modules VISIBLE DATE RANGE The date range of the displayed points. As you navigate through the graph, the VISIBLE DATE RANGE changes to reflect the points you are viewing.
To display this screen, see Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315.
Related procedures... Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318
Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316 View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-319 Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-320 Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318 Recalculate Westgard analysis, page 5-320 Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337
Procedures - Levey-Jennings graph screen

Procedures you can perform from the Levey-Jennings graph screen include:
Section 5-314
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315 Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316 Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318 Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318 View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-319 Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-320 Recalculate Westgard analysis, page 5-320 Quality control analysis
Create a Levey-Jennings graph

Perform this procedure to create Levey-Jennings graphs that you can use to monitor control activity.
To create a Levey-Jennings graph: 1. Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select Levey-Jennings graph. The Levey-Jennings graph screen displays in the background with the QC selection window as the active window. 2. Select the desired Module option. NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results. The control information for the selected module displays. 3. Enter a date range in the Date range for calculation data entry box. NOTE: The default range includes one month prior to the current date. 4. Select the desired Comparison type option: None - Does not use a comparison method Manufacturers - Compares the expected mean and SD (standard deviation) to the manufacturers mean and SD configured for the control
Section 5-315
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Module cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD to the cumulative mean and SD of the processing module selected in step 2 System cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD to the cumulative mean and SD of all modules for a multi-module system
5. Select the desired assay from the Assay list. 6. Select the desired control name from the Control name list. 7. Select the desired control lot number from the Control lot list. 8. Deselect the desired Control level check boxes. (optional) NOTE: The default setting is all control level check boxes selected. 9. Select Done to create the graph. To view detailed information for a single control result, see View details for a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-319. To change the criteria for your graph, see Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316.
Related information... QC selection window, page 5-321

Levey-Jennings graph screen, page 5-312 Westgard rule application, page 5-309
Change a Levey-Jennings graph

Perform this procedure to redefine the criteria for a Levey-Jennings graph.
Prerequisite
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315 View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-328
To change a Levey-Jennings graph: 1. Select F2 - QC selection on the Levey-Jennings graph screen. The QC selection window displays.
Section 5-316
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select the desired Module option. NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results. The control information for the selected module displays. 3. Enter a date range in the Date range for calculation data entry box. NOTE: The default range includes one month prior to the current date. 4. Select the desired Comparison type option: None - Does not use a comparison method Manufacturers - Compares the expected mean and SD (standard deviation) to the manufacturers mean and SD configured for the control Module cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD to the cumulative mean and SD of the processing module selected in step 2 System cumulative - Compares the expected mean and SD to the cumulative mean and SD of all modules for a multi-module system Quality control analysis
5. Select the desired assay from the Assay list. 6. Select the desired control name from the Control name list. 7. Select the desired control lot number from the Control lot list. 8. Deselect the desired Control level check boxes. (optional) NOTE: The default setting is all control level check boxes selected. 9. Select Done to save your changes. The updated Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.
Related information... Levey-Jennings graph screen, page 5-312

QC selection window, page 5-321 Westgard rule application, page 5-309
Section 5-317
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Display the value for a Levey-Jennings point

Perform this procedure to display the result value and date for a specific point(s) on the Levey-Jennings graph screen.
Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315

To display the value for a Levey-Jennings point: 1. Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings graph screen. The point value and date display in the lower right corner of the screen. 2. Use the Point scroll buttons to select another point. (optional)
Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point

Perform this procedure to exclude a point or include a previously excluded point from the comparison mean and standard deviation. To recalculate Westgard rules, see Recalculate Westgard analysis, page 5-320.

To exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point: 1. Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings graph screen, and then select F5 - Details. The Point detail window displays. 2. Select the desired Include/exclude option. 3. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. NOTE: You must enter a comment to include or exclude a point. Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings point comment print on the QC Result Details report.
Section 5-318
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Select the Westgard re-evaluation check box to recalculate the Westgard analysis. (optional) 5. Select Done to save your changes. The updated Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.

Point detail window, page 5-322 Westgard rule application, page 5-309
View details for a Levey-Jennings point

Perform this procedure to display the Point detail window. From this window you can view detailed information for a control result.

To view details for a Levey-Jennings point: Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings graph screen, and then select F5 - Details. The Point detail window displays. To exclude a point on the Levey-Jennings graph, see Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318. To add a comment, see Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-320.

Point detail window, page 5-322 Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245 Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153
Section 5-319
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point

Perform this procedure to add a comment to a control point on a Levey-Jennings graph.

To add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point: 1. Select the desired Levey-Jennings point, and then select F5 Details. The Point detail window displays. 2. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. NOTE: Both the QC result comment and the Levey-Jennings point comment print on the QC Result Details report. 3. Select Done to save your changes.

Point detail window, page 5-322
Recalculate Westgard analysis

Perform this procedure to recalculate Westgard analysis after: Including or excluding a point Changing the configured expected mean and/or SD (standard deviation) settings
The analysis is repeated for all rules except 1-3s or 1-2s.


To recalculate Westgard analysis: 1. Select the desired point from the graph on the Levey-Jennings graph screen, and then select F5 - Details. The Point detail window displays.
Section 5-320
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Select the desired Include/exclude option. (optional) 3. Select the Westgard re-evaluation check box. 4. Select Done to save your changes. The updated Levey-Jennings graph screen displays.

Point detail window, page 5-322 Westgard rule descriptions, page 5-310 Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245
Windows - Levey-Jennings graph screen

Windows you can access from the Levey-Jennings graph screen include: QC selection window, page 5-321 Point detail window, page 5-322
QC selection window
From the QC selection window you specify the criteria used to create Levey-Jennings graphs and statistical data.
Section 5-321
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.94: QC selection window
For descriptions of these fields, see QC selection window field descriptions, page Appendix E-74.
Related procedures... Create a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-315

Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316
Point detail window

From the Point detail window you can view detailed information for a point on the Levey-Jennings graph screen. You can also: Include or exclude a point Recalculate the Westgard analysis Add a comment
Section 5-322
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.95: Point detail window Quality control analysis
For descriptions of these fields, see Point detail window field descriptions, page Appendix E-75.
Related procedures... Exclude or include a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-318

Recalculate Westgard analysis, page 5-320 Add a comment to a Levey-Jennings point, page 5-320
QC summary review screen

From the QC summary review screen you can view statistical data for all assay control levels, which includes: Assay name Control name, lot number, and level Number of control points Actual mean, SD, and %CV Expected mean and SD
You can also access windows to: Find information for specific assay controls based on specified search criteria Print the QC Analysis, QC Summary, and Levey-Jennings reports View detailed QC data
Section 5-323
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
View the Levey-Jennings graphs for a selected assay control level
Figure 5.96: QC summary review screen
For descriptions of these fields, see QC summary review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-95. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column M ASSAY CONTROL NAME/LOT Level N ACTUAL MEAN ACTUAL SD % CV EXPECTED MEAN EXPECTED SD Sort description Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Numerically in descending order. These columns do not sort.
Section 5-324
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table 5.14: QC summary review statistical data elements

Statistic fields N ACTUAL MEAN ACTUAL SD % CV Description The number of control points for the level/lot/assay/module used in the calculation. The mean calculated for the level/lot/assay for a processing module and specified date range. The SD calculated for the level/lot/assay for a processing module and specified date range. The percent coefficient of variation calculated for the level/lot/assay for a processing module and specified date range. The expected mean configured for the control level. The expected SD configured for the control level.
EXPECTED MEAN EXPECTED SD
When a control result has a flag, the QC summary information displays in red on this screen. Once a control result completes without a flag, the information displays in black. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245. To display this screen, see View QC data summary, page 5-326.
Related procedures... Find the summary for specific QC data, page 5-326
View QC data details, page 5-327 View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-328 Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337 Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-337 Print the QC Summary report, page 5-338
Procedures - QC summary review screen

Procedures you can perform from the QC summary review screen include: View QC data summary, page 5-326 Find the summary for specific QC data, page 5-326 View QC data details, page 5-327 View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-328
Section 5-325
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
View QC data summary

Perform this procedure to display the QC summary review screen. From this screen you can view a summary of control data.
To view QC data summary: 1. Select the QC-Cal icon from the menu bar and then select QC summary. The QC summary review screen displays. 2. Select the desired Module option. (optional) The control information for the selected module displays. 3. Enter a date range in the Date range: data entry box and then select the update button to update the data. (optional) NOTE: The default range includes one month prior to the current date.
Related information... QC summary review screen, page 5-323
Find the summary for specific QC data

Perform this procedure to search for specific QC data by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
View QC data summary, page 5-326

To find the summary for specific QC data: 1. Select F3-Find on the QC summary review screen. The Find options (QC summary review) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria.
Section 5-326
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: A wild card search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all data entry boxes except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the Error code data entry box, all orders with an error code starting with 123 display. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The QC summary review screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records. This button always displays as an active button.

Find options (QC summary review) window, page 5-328
View QC data details

Perform this procedure to display the Details for QC summary window. From this window you can view QC data details for a selected assay control level.

To view QC data details: 1. Select the desired assay control level(s) from the table on the QC summary review screen, or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Details for QC summary window displays. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay control level if you selected more than one. (optional) 4. Select Done to return to the QC summary review screen.

Details for QC summary window, page 5-329
Section 5-327
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
View an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph

Perform this procedure to display the Levey-Jennings graph screen. From this screen you can view the Levey-Jennings graph for a selected assay control level.

To view an assay control level Levey-Jennings graph: 1. Select the control level(s) for an assay from the table on the QC summary review screen. NOTE: The F7 - Graph button is not available if more than one assay control lot is selected on the QC summary review screen. 2. Select F7 - Graph. The Levey-Jennings graph screen displays. 3. Select F3 - QC summary to return to the QC summary review screen. (optional) To redefine the criteria for the Levey-Jennings graph, see Change a Levey-Jennings graph, page 5-316.

Levey-Jennings graph screen, page 5-312
Windows - QC summary review screen

Windows you can access from the QC summary review screen include: Find options (QC summary review) window, page 5-328 Details for QC summary window, page 5-329
Find options (QC summary review) window

From the Find options (QC summary review) window you can search for specific control data by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Section 5-328
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.97: Find options (QC summary review) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-95.
Related procedures... Find the summary for specific QC data, page 5-326
Details for QC summary window

From the Details for QC summary window you can view QC data details for the selected control level, which includes: Expected and Manufacturer mean and SD Actual (processing module specific) and System (all processing modules in an i System) data for a date range Module cumulative (processing module specific) and System cumulative (all processing modules in an i System) data
Section 5-329
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
Figure 5.98: Details for QC summary window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for QC summary window field descriptions, page Appendix E-96.
Related procedures... View QC data details, page 5-327
QC reports screen
From the QC reports screen you can specify the information to include in the QC Analysis, QC Summary, and Levey-Jennings reports, and print the reports. This information includes: Module Assay Date range
Section 5-330
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 5.99: QC reports screen Quality control analysis
For descriptions of these fields, see QC reports screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-94. To display this screen, see Access the QC reports screen, page 5-331.
Related procedures... Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337

Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-337 Print the QC Summary report, page 5-338
Access the QC reports screen

Perform this procedure to display the QC reports screen.
To access the QC reports screen: Select QC - Cal from the menu bar, and then select QC reports. The QC reports screen displays.
Section 5-331
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Section 5
To print the Levey-Jennings report, see Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337. To print the QC Analysis report, see Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-337. To print the QC Summary report, see Print the QC Summary report, page 5-338.
Related information... QC reports screen, page 5-330

Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44 QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61 QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-69
Section 5-332
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
Report printing
You can print screen images and reports generated by the ARCHITECT System. Your system may be configured to print some reports automatically. For example, the Procedure, Cal Curve Details, Sample, and Results List reports print upon completion of the related activity. Report printing procedures and topic include: Print a report, page 5-333 Print the Order List report, page 5-336 Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337 Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-337 Print the QC Summary report, page 5-338 Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month, page 5-339 Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340 Print a Procedure report, page 5-341 Print the Message History Log report, page 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, page 5-343 View a print job in the print queue, page 5-344 Delete a print job, page 5-345 Print a screen image, page 5-345 Windows - Report printing, page 5-346
Print a report
Perform this procedure to print a report. Reports are available from related screens. For example, you can print the Patient report from both the Results review and Stored results screens. You can print the Order List report from the Order status screen. Report availability is listed in the following table.
Section 5-333
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
NOTE: Your system may be configured to print some reports automatically. For more information see Configure report settings, page 2-7.
To print the... Access the... Results review screen Stored results screen QC result review screen Stored QC results screen Exception status screen
Absorbance Data Report (c System), page Appendix A-3
Assay Parameter Report (c System), page Appendix A-6 Assay Parameter Report (i System), page Appendix A-15 Cal Curve Details Report Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System), page Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-34 Cal Curve Summary Report, page Appendix A-37 Exception Details Report, page Appendix A-39 Exception Status Report, page Appendix A-42 Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44
Configuration screen
Calibration status screen Calibration history screen
Calibration status screen Calibration history screen Exception status screen
Levey-Jennings graph screen QC reports screen QC summary review screen Maintenance log screen System logs screen
Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-47 Message History Log Report, page Appendix A-49
Section 5-334
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
To print the...
Access the...
Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Order status screen Order Status Report, page Appendix A-53 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59 QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61 QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-69 QC Result Details Report, page Appendix A-64 QC Results List Report, page Appendix A-67 Reagent Load Error Report, page Appendix A-71 Result Details Report, page Appendix A-77 Results List Report, page Appendix A-80 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82
Results review screen Stored results screen Reagent status screen QC result review screen Stored QC results screen QC reports screen QC summary review screen Results review screen Stored results screen Maintenance screen Diagnostics screen
Rerun List Report, page Appendix A-75 Rerun status screen

Results review screen Stored results screen
Sample Status Report, page Appendix Sample status screen A-84 Temporary Message Log Report, page Appendix A-86
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator NA System logs screen
To print a report: 1. Select the item(s) to include in the report. (optional)
Section 5-335
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
NOTE: Items print in the order you select them with the exception of the Sample report. Sample reports are printed in order of SID. If you do not select a specific item(s), all items print. 2. Select F4 - Print. The Print options window displays. 3. Select the desired Print selection option. 4. Select the desired report from the Reports available list. 5. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 6. Select Done to print the report.
Related information... Print options window, page 5-346

Printed report examples, page Appendix A-1
Print the Order List report

Perform this procedure to print an Order List report to assist you in placing a sufficient amount of sample in the assigned position.
Access the Order status screen, page 5-152

Any, however, if the processing module is not in Running status the volume printed on the Order List report is for one calibration/control per module and does not account for multiple reagent lots and kits on a module. General operator NA
To print an Order List report: 1. Select F4 - Print on the Order status screen. The Print options window displays. 2. Select the Order List report option. 3. Select Done to print the report.

Print options window, page 5-346
Section 5-336
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
Print the Levey-Jennings report

Perform this procedure to print a Levey-Jennings report for a selected control.
Access the QC reports screen, page 5-331

To print a Levey-Jennings report for a selected control: 1. Select the desired Module option or for a multi-module i System the desired check box(es) on the QC reports screen. NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results. 2. Enter the starting and ending dates in the Date from and to data entry boxes. 3. Select the desired control(s) from the Controls list. 4. Select F3 - Print. The Print options window displays. 5. Select the desired report from the Reports available list. 6. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 7. Select Done to print the report.

Print options window, page 5-346 Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44 QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61 QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-69
Print the QC Analysis report

Perform this procedure to print a QC Analysis report for a selected control.

Any
Section 5-337
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
General operator NA
To print a QC Analysis report for a selected control: 1. Select the desired Module option or for a multi-module i System the desired check box(es) on the QC reports screen. NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results. 2. Enter the starting and ending dates in the Date from and to data entry boxes. 3. Select the desired control(s) from the Controls list. 4. Select F3 - Print. The Print options window displays. 5. Select the desired report from the Reports available list. 6. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 7. Select Done to print the report.

Print options window, page 5-346 Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44 QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61
Print the QC Summary report

Perform this procedure to print a QC Summary report for a selected control.

To print a QC Summary report for a selected control: 1. Select the desired Module option or for a multi-module i System the desired check box(es) on the QC reports screen. NOTE: Select module 5 for calculated results.
Section 5-338
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
2. Enter the starting and ending dates in the Date from and to data entry boxes. (optional) 3. Select the desired control(s) from the Controls list. 4. Select F3 - Print. The Print options window displays. 5. Select the desired report from the Reports available list. 6. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 7. Select Done to print the report.

Print options window, page 5-346 Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44 QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-69
Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month

Perform this procedure to print a Maintenance History report that includes the maintenance procedures (scheduled and/or performed) for a specified month. To print a report for all procedures, see Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340.
Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16

To print a Maintenance History report for a specified month: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance log screen. 2. Use the previous/next buttons to display the desired month. (optional) 3. Select F3 - Print. The Print options window displays. 4. Ensure the All items option is selected.
Section 5-339
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
5. Select Done to print the Maintenance History report for the selected month. NOTE: For procedures that were scheduled but not performed, 00.00.00 prints in the time column.
Related information... Maintenance log screen, page 9-14

Print options window, page 5-346 Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-47
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure

Perform this procedure to print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure for a specific month (scheduled and/or performed) stored on the system. The system stores procedures for the last three months. To print a report for a selected month, see Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month, page 5-339.

To print a Maintenance History report for all procedures: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance log screen. 2. Select the desired procedure. 3. Select F3 - Print. The Print options window displays. 4. Select the Selected items option. 5. Select Done to print the Maintenance History report. NOTE: For procedures that were scheduled but not performed, 00:00:00 prints in the time column.

Section 5-340
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
Print a Procedure report

Perform this procedure to: Print a Procedure report if your system is not configured to automatically print one after a maintenance procedure is performed Print a Procedure report after a diagnostic procedure is performed Reprint a Procedure report
For information on enabling automatic report printing, see Change the automatic report printing settings, page 2-22.
Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4, or Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-651
Stopped, Warming, Ready, or Maintenance General operator NA
To print a Procedure report: 1. Select the desired Module option. 2. Select the desired tab to display the maintenance or diagnostic procedures for that category. 3. Select a procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES or DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES list. (optional) NOTE: If you do not select a specific procedure, all available reports print for all performed procedures in the selected category. To print a Procedure report for a procedure currently in process, you must return to the Maintenance perform window. See Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9. 4. Select F4 - Print. The Print Options window displays. 5. Select the desired Print selection option. 6. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 7. Select Done to print the report.
Section 5-341
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
Related information... Maintenance screen, page 9-3
Diagnostics screen, page 10-650 Print options window, page 5-346 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59
Print the Message History Log report

Perform this procedure to print the Message History Log report.
Access the System logs screen, page 10-12

To print the Message History Log report: 1. Select the Log selection list button on the System logs screen, and then select Message history log. 2. Select the item(s) to include in the report. (optional) NOTE: Items print in the order you select them. If you do not select a specific item(s), all items print. 3. Select F4 - Print. The Print options window displays. 4. Select the desired Print selection option. 5. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 6. Select Done to print the report.
Related information... System logs screen, page 10-11

Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays

Perform this procedure to print an Assay Parameter report for selected assays.
Section 5-342
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
To print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, see Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, page 5-343.
To print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays: 1. Select the assay(s) to include in the report from the Assays list on the Configuration screen. NOTE: The Assay Parameter report prints in the order you select the assays. 2. Select F2 - Print. The Print options window displays. 3. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 4. Select Done to print the report.
Print options window, page 5-346 Assay Parameter Report (c System), page Appendix A-6 Assay Parameter Report (i System), page Appendix A-15
Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays

Perform this procedure to print an Assay Parameter report for all assays. To print an Assay Parameter Report for selected assays, see Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-342.
Section 5-343
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
To print an Assay Parameter report for all assays: 1. Select F2 - Print on the Configuration screen. The Print options window displays. 2. Enter the number of copies in the Number of copies data entry box. 3. Select Done to print the report.
Print options window, page 5-346 Assay Parameter Report (c System), page Appendix A-6 Assay Parameter Report (i System), page Appendix A-15
View a print job in the print queue

Perform this procedure to view the status of a print request that is in the print queue.

To view a print job in the print queue: 1. Select the Printer button on the Snapshot screen. The Printer window displays. 2. View the status of the desired print job in the Printer queue list. 3. Select Done to return to the Snapshot screen.

Printer window, page 5-347
Section 5-344
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Report printing
Delete a print job

Perform this procedure to delete a report that is printing or waiting to be printed.

To delete a print job: 1. Select the Printer button on the Snapshot screen. The Printer window displays. 2. Select the desired print job from the Printer queue list. 3. Select Delete to delete the print job. NOTE: When deleting a print request with a status of printing, wait until the printer starts printing the report before selecting Delete. 4. Select Done to return to the Snapshot screen.

Printer window, page 5-347
Print a screen image

Perform this procedure to print a screen image to preserve graphical or troubleshooting information such as: The Maintenance log A Levey-Jennings graph An alert and/or information message
NA Any General operator NA
To print a screen image: Access the desired screen image, and then simultaneously press the ALT+Print Screen keys on the keyboard.
Section 5-345
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Report printing
Section 5
The screen image prints. NOTE: General printing errors can occur when you attempt to print multiple screen images. Do not attempt to print more than three screen images at one time or to print a screen image while printing reports.
Windows - Report printing

Windows you can access include: Print options window, page 5-346 Printer window, page 5-347
Print options window

From the Print options window you can choose the report to print, specify the data to include, and enter the number of copies. Figure 5.100: Print options window
For descriptions of these fields, see Print options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-213.
Related procedures... Print a report, page 5-333

Print the Levey-Jennings report, page 5-337 Print the QC Analysis report, page 5-337 Print the QC Summary report, page 5-338 Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340 Print a Procedure report, page 5-341
Section 5-346
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Print the Message History Log report, page 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for specified assays, page 5-342 Print an Assay Parameter report for all assays, page 5-343 Report printing
Printer window
From the Printer window you can check the printer status and delete a print job. Figure 5.101: Printer window
For descriptions of these fields, see Printer window field descriptions, page Appendix E-214.
Related procedures... View a print job in the print queue, page 5-344
Delete a print job, page 5-345
Section 5-347
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration procedures Section 6

Calibration procedures <F=0>
Introduction
Prior to running patient and control samples you must calibrate your assay(s). Before attempting to calibrate the system you should be familiar with the hardware components of your system and the fundamental principles of the software user interface. See Use or function, page 1-1. Calibration topics include: Assay calibration, page 6-2 Provides descriptions of calibration methods and types and descriptions of the Calibration order screen with instructions for performing calibration order procedures. Calibration review, page 6-15 Provides descriptions of the Calibration status and Calibration history screens with instructions for viewing and archiving calibration curves.
Section 6-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration procedures
Assay calibration
Section 6
Assay calibration
Calibration is analyzing samples of known concentrations, recording the instrument response value(s), and plotting the measured value(s) against the known concentration to create a curve for evaluating unknown samples. Assay calibration topics include: Calibration guidelines, page 6-2 Calibration sampling rules, page 6-3 Calibration methods (photometric - c System), page 6-3 Calibration method (potentiometric - c System), page 6-4 Calibration methods (i System), page 6-4 Calibration types (c System), page 6-5 Calibration types (i System), page 6-8 Calibration curve storage, page 6-9 Calibration order screen, page 6-10
Calibration guidelines
After you install an assay(s) that requires a calibration, you must generate an active calibration curve. You do not need to recalibrate assays every time they are run; however, certain variables make recalibration necessary. For more information, see: Mandatory assay calibration, page 6-2 Optional assay calibration, page 6-3
NOTE: It is recommended that you run all levels of appropriate controls whenever you calibrate an assay.
Mandatory assay calibration

You must perform a calibration when:
Section 6-2
A new reagent lot number is used Documentation accompanying a new version of an existing assay file states calibration is required A new assay file that requires a calibration is installed The calibration curve has expired (c System)
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration procedures Section 6 Optional assay calibration

You may need to perform a calibration when: Assay control values are out of specification. For specific information regarding quality control, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Certain system maintenance/component replacement procedures are performed. Certain errors occur. To determine whether recalibration is necessary when an error occurs, see assay-specific error codes. Assay calibration
Calibration sampling rules

When multiple reagent lots for an assay are loaded on the system and the sampling process for a calibration order is ready to begin, the system determines the lots to calibrate using the following rules. For the ARCHITECT System: If all reagent lots for the assay do not currently have a calibration status of Active, the system calibrates all reagent lots loaded on the system. If all reagent lots for the assay currently have a calibration status of Active, the system recalibrates all reagent lots loaded on the system. If some reagent lots for the assay have a calibration status of Active and some do not, the system calibrates only the reagent lots loaded on the system without an active calibration.
For the c 16000 the calibration status is specific to one line. If a reagent with an Active calibration status is moved from one line (A or B line) to the other and then scanned, the calibration status for the reagent in its current location is No Cal. To avoid recalibration: do not move reagents from one line to another do not load on a different line when replacing reagents
Calibration methods (photometric - c System)

The c System calibration methods are methods used to measure absorbance values and to plot a calibration curve or cutoff value. One of six different mathematical methods is used to calculate results: Absorbance method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2
Section 6-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration
Section 6
Factor method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2 Linear method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-3 Logit-4 method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-5 Spline method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-6 Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-7
c System calibration methods are assay-specific and are defined in the assay parameter file. You define the calibration method for non-Abbott assays on the Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143.
Calibration method (potentiometric - c System)

A potentiometric calibration method is the method used for calculating ICT assays (electrolytes). Either serum or urine calibrators are used. Serum calibrators are a protein-based material with known concentrations of sodium (Na+), potassium (K+), and chloride (Cl-). Urine calibrators are aqueous-based and span a greater range of concentration. There are three components to the potentiometric method: Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-9 Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-10 Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-11
The mV (millivolts) measured by each electrode in the ICT module are plotted against the known concentration of electrolyte in the calibrator. The slope of the calibration is expressed as a percentage of the ideal slope. Electrolyte determinations are made at 37C; therefore, the ideal slope of the electrode is 100% (62mV/decade). NOTE: The potentiometric calibration method is assay-specific and is defined in the assay parameter file.
Calibration methods (i System)

Calibration methods are data reduction methods used by ARCHITECT i Systems to measure RLU (relative light unit) values and to plot a calibration curve or cutoff value. One of four different mathematical methods is used to calculate results:
Section 6-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay calibration
Point to point method (i System), page Appendix C-13 Linear regression method (i System), page Appendix C-13 4PLC methods (i System), page Appendix C-15 Cutoff assay method (i System), page Appendix C-17
i System calibration methods are assay-specific and are defined in the assay parameter file. You can view the method on the Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System), page 2-142. For more information on the mathematical methods, See i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-13.
Calibration types (c System)

Calibration types pertain to photometric assays only and indicate whether a calibration curve is created or adjusted. Two calibration types are available: Full calibration, page 6-5 Adjustment calibration, page 6-5
NOTE: See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for information on required calibration types.
Full calibration
A full calibration is the measurement of a reagent blank and all data points specified for an assay plotted against known concentrations to create a curve for evaluating unknown samples. The system software analyzes the data points on the Calibration - calibrators view of the Configure assay parameters window to generate the new calibration curve. NOTE: A full calibration is required to update the full calibration interval.
Adjustment calibration
An adjustment calibration is a new measurement of a blank and/or specific point(s) of a full calibration curve. For the 1-point and 2-point adjustment options the system software calculates a ratio comparing the new measurements to previously measured absorbances, adjusts all other calibrators using the calculated ratio, and then generates a new calibration curve.
Section 6-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration
Section 6
The following adjustment options are available on the Configure assay parameters window: None Blank adjustment, page 6-6 1-point adjustment, page 6-6 2-point adjustment, page 6-7
NOTE: You can perform either a full calibration or the designated adjustment calibration to update the adjustment calibration interval.
Blank adjustment
In a blank adjustment, the system reanalyzes the reagent blank only. The following table shows the process for adjusting the calibration curve with the new reagent blank data.
Step 1 2 Description The system performs the new measurement for the reagent blank. The value of the reagent blank absorbance obtained in the new measurement replaces the value obtained in the previous measurement. The curve adjusts up or down, based on the change in the reagent blank.
1-point adjustment
In a 1-point adjustment the system reanalyzes a single calibrator. The calibrator used is defined on the Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143. The
Section 6-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay calibration
following table shows the procedure for adjusting the calibration curve with the new calibrator data.
Step 1 2 Description The system performs the new measurement for the calibrator. A ratio calculates comparing the new and previous absorbance data.
3 4
All other calibrators (except the reagent blank) adjust using the calculated ratio. A new calibration curve generates using the data points after adjustment.
2-point adjustment
In a 2-point adjustment the system reanalyzes both the reagent blank and a single calibrator. The calibrator used is defined on the Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System), page 2-143. The following table shows the procedure for adjusting the calibration curve with the new calibrator data.
Step 1 2 Description The system performs the new measurement for the reagent blank and the calibrator. The value of the reagent blank absorbance obtained in the new measurement replaces the value obtained in the previous measurement. The curve adjusts up or down based on the change in the reagent blank.
Section 6-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration
Section 6
Step 4
Description A ratio calculates comparing the new and previous absorbance data.
5 6
All other calibrators (except the reagent blank) adjust using the calculated ratio. A new calibration curve generates using the data points after adjustment.
Calibration types (i System)

The calibration type indicates whether a new calibration curve is created, a master reference curve is adjusted, or a cutoff value is created for i System assays on a processing module. The type is defined in the assay parameter file and is assay-specific. The calibration types are as follows: Adjust calibration, page 6-8 Full calibration, page 6-9 Index calibration, page 6-9
NOTE: Calibration type is assay-specific. For a detailed description of the assay calibrator(s) and calibration type for each assay, see the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Adjust calibration
A calibration adjustment is a new measurement of 2 points of a master reference curve specified for an assay. This 2-point calibration generates a processing module-specific calibration curve for quantitative assays by adjusting the master calibration data.
Section 6-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay calibration
A 2-point calibration adjustment assay has master calibration data encoded within the 2D bar code on the microparticle bottle label. After you load a reagent kit on a processing module, the system performs a scan and stores master calibration data in the system software. The data stored is specific for the assay but must be adjusted to fit the specific processing module. Therefore, the operator must run two calibrators.
Full calibration
A full calibration is the measurement of 6 points specified for a quantitative assay plotted against known concentrations to generate a processing module-specific calibration curve for evaluating unknown samples.
Index calibration
An index calibration is the measurement of 1 point or 2 points specified for a qualitative assay and generates a processing module-specific index (cutoff). The system software uses the index value to generate all cutoff values defined for an index or screening assay.
Calibration curve storage

The ARCHITECT System stores active, inactive, and failed calibration curves. For more information on curve storage, see: Active calibration curve storage, page 6-9 Inactive calibration curve storage, page 6-10 Failed calibration curve storage, page 6-10
For more information on calibration curve statuses, see Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Active calibration curve storage

The system stores active curves as follows: Stores the processing module-specific calibration as the active curve for that reagent lot Replaces the previous calibration curve, which becomes inactive
Section 6-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration
Section 6
Automatically defaults to the active curve for the onboard reagent lot Stores one active curve for up to four different reagent lots for each assay on a processing module Replaces the oldest active curve if a fifth reagent lot calibrates successfully NOTE: You may manually fail an active calibration curve by selecting the Fail Curve button on the Calibration curve window.
Inactive calibration curve storage

The system stores the previous curve as inactive when a new calibration curve is generated for the reagent lot. Inactive curves are stored for up to 3 months.
Failed calibration curve storage

The system stores a failed calibration curve until an active curve or another failed curve is generated for the reagent lot. For details on how to resolve errors for failed curves, see assay-specific error codes.
Calibration order screen

From the Calibration order screen you can order assay calibrations and access a window to specify calibration options.
Section 6-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 6.1: Calibration order screen Assay calibration
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration order screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-76. To display this screen, see Access the Calibration order screen, page 6-11.
Related procedures... Create a calibration order, page 6-12
Access the Calibration order screen

Perform this procedure to display the Calibration order screen.
To access the Calibration order screen: Select Orders from the menu bar, and then select Calibration order. The Calibration order screen displays.
Related information... Calibration order screen, page 6-10
Section 6-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration
Section 6
Procedure - Calibration order screen

The procedure you can perform from the Calibration order screen is: Create a calibration order, page 6-12
Create a calibration order

Perform this procedure to order a calibration when one or more assays require a new calibration.
Enter a calibrator concentration (c System), page 2-77 Access the Calibration order screen, page 6-11
Any General operator Consecutively numbered carriers
To create a calibration order: 1. Select the carrier or carousel button on the Calibration order screen, if displayed. NOTE: When you select multiple assays, the software automatically assigns the calibrators in sequential carriers and/or positions: If you select carrier, the system does not increment to more than five sequential carriers. If you select carousel, the system does not increment beyond the last position in the sample carousel.
2. Enter a carrier ID or carousel ID (LAS carousel sample handler) in the C data entry box, if displayed. 3. Enter a position in the P data entry box, if displayed. 4. Select the desired assay(s) from the Assays list. 5. Select F5 - Assay options to specify calibration options. (optional) The Assay options (Calibration order) window displays. a. Enter a calibrator lot number in the Lot data entry box, and then enter a date in the Expiration date data entry box. (optional)
NOTE: The data entry box(es) display the last calibrator lot number and expiration date entered.
Section 6-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay calibration
This information displays on the Calibration curve window and in the Cal Curve Details report. b. c. Select the Calibration type list button, if displayed, and then select the calibration type (c System). (optional) Select the Manual option, and then select the desired Module selection check box (multi-module i System). (optional) Use the previous/next buttons to display each assay if you selected more than one, and then repeat Steps 5a - 5c for each. (optional) Select Done to save your changes and/or return to the Calibration order screen.
d.
e.
6. Select F2 - Add order to add the calibration order. Orders can be viewed from the Order status screen. To print the Order List report, see Print the Order List report, page 5-336. To load samples, see Loading samples (RSH), page 5-176, Loading samples (sample carousel - c System), page 5-188, Loading samples (SSH), page 5-191, or Loading samples (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-203.
Related information... Calibration order screen, page 6-10

Assay options (Calibration order) window, page 6-13 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51
Window - Calibration order screen

The window you can access from the Calibration order screen is the Assay options (Calibration order) window, page 6-13.
Assay options (Calibration order) window

From the Assay options (Calibration order) window you can: Enter a calibrator lot number and expiration date. This information displays on the Calibration curve window and in the Cal Curve Details report. Change the type of calibration to run (c System). Specify the processing module to use (multi-module i System).
Section 6-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Assay calibration
Section 6
Figure 6.2: Assay options (Calibration order) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-76.
Related procedures... Create a calibration order, page 6-12
Section 6-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
Calibration review
The assay calibration run must pass calibration verification before the system stores the calibration. The status of each calibration displays on the Calibration status and/or Calibration history screens. Calibration review topics include: Calibration verification, page 6-15 Calibration status screen, page 6-15 Calibration history screen, page 6-25
Calibration verification
After you process calibrators, the system verifies the results by comparing them to the assay-specific calibration parameter specifications. If the results of a calibration fall within the specified range for that assay, the new calibration curve replaces any previous calibration curve and the previous calibration curve status changes to inactive. If the results of a calibration do not fall within the specified range, then the new calibration curve is assigned a status of failed; if there is an existing calibration curve for that assay, it is not replaced. The assigned status of a calibration displays on the Calibration status and/or Calibration history screens and includes: Active - the values fall within the specifications. The system software calculates patient and control test results from this curve. Failed - the values fall outside of the specifications. If an active curve exists for a reagent lot, the system software calculates patient and control test results from the existing active curve. Inactive - this is an older, previously active curve that has been superseded by a more recent calibration. An inactive curve status displays only on the Calibration history screen.
Calibration status screen

From the Calibration status screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for each assay and reagent lot currently loaded on the system. You can also access windows to: Find information for specific calibrations based on specified search criteria
Section 6-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
View detailed calibration curve information Fail a calibration curve Override an expired calibration curve (c System) Print the Cal Curve Summary and Cal Curve Details reports
To view information about previously performed calibrations, see Calibration history screen, page 6-25. Figure 6.3: Calibration status screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-77. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column M ASSAY and REAGENT LOT CAL DATE / TIME and EXP DATE / TIME CAL STATUS Sort description Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Chronologically in descending order. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
To display this screen, see Access the Calibration status screen, page 6-17.
Section 6-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related procedures... View assay calibration status, page 6-29
Find a specific calibration, page 6-30 View calibration curve information, page 6-31 Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32 Print a report, page 5-333 Calibration review
Access the Calibration status screen

Perform this procedure to display the Calibration status screen.
To access the Calibration status screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the Calibration status button on the c 8000 processing module graphic. Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration status. The Calibration status screen displays.
Related information... Calibration status screen, page 6-15
Descriptions of calibration statuses

You can use calibration status information to determine the status of each calibration curve. The system displays one of the following
Section 6-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
calibration statuses for each calibration curve. The table below displays the calibration statuses in the order in which they sort. Table 6.1: Calibration statuses
Status Failed Description One of the following occurred: The calibration failed curve validity checks. The calibration did not complete successfully due to a hardware error. The user manually failed the calibration. Expired (c System The full or adjustment interval has been exceeded. only) No Cal One of the following occurred: The reagent lot was never calibrated. A parameter in a c System assay file was edited, which caused the system to delete the calibration curve. For the c 16000 the calibration status is specific to one line. This status occurs if a reagent with an Active calibration status is moved from one line (A or B) to the other and scanned. Overridden (c System only) In Process Active Inactive The operator has overridden an expired calibration. The calibration is currently in process. The calibration completed successfully and, for c System assays, the calibration is not expired. A previously active curve which was replaced by a new active curve. Inactive calibration curves display only on the Calibration history screen.
Windows - Calibration status screen

Windows and views of windows that you can access from the Calibration status screen include:
Section 6-18
Find options (Calibration status) window, page 6-19 Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views (c System), page 6-19 Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System), page 6-20 Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System), page 6-21 Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System), page 6-22 Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System), page 6-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System), page 6-24
Find options (Calibration status) window

From the Find options (Calibration status) window you can search for specific calibration records. Figure 6.4: Find options (Calibration status) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-77.
Related procedures... Find a specific calibration, page 6-30
Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views (c System)
From the factor, linear, and non-linear assay views of the Calibration curve window you can view information such as: Calibrator name and concentration Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered Calibrator absorbance for all replicates and the calibration factor(s) Corrected mean absorbance value Calibration curve graph (linear and non-linear views only)
You can also manually fail a curve(s) or override the curve expiration date.
Section 6-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
Figure 6.5: Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-78.
Related procedures... View calibration curve information, page 6-31

Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32
Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System)

From the use cal factor/blank assay view of the Calibration curve window you can view information from the reference assay such as: Reference assay name Calibrator name and concentration Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered Calibrator absorbance for all replicates and the calibration factor(s) Corrected mean absorbance value
Section 6-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
Figure 6.6: Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-79.

Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System)

From the potentiometric assay view of the Calibration curve window you can view information such as: Calibrator name and concentration Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered Calibrator mV (millivolt) response for all replicates and the calibration slope Calibration curve graph
You can also manually fail a curve(s) or override the curve expiration date.
Section 6-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
Figure 6.7: Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window Potentiometric assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-80.

Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System)

From the adjust assay view of the Calibration curve window you can view information such as: Calibrator name Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered Calibrator RLU (relative light units) response for all replicates, mean RLU, and the calibration adjustment ratio(s) Reference calibrator concentration, RLU response, and the fit curve RLU response for each calibrator
You can also manually fail a curve(s).
Section 6-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
Figure 6.8: Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-81.

Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System)

From the index assay view of the Calibration curve window you can view information such as: Calibrator name Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered Calibrator RLU (relative light units) response for all replicates, mean RLU, and cutoff value
Section 6-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
Figure 6.9: Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-83.

Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System)

From the full assay view of the Calibration curve window you can view information such as: Calibrator name and concentration Calibrator lot number and expiration date, if entered Calibrator RLU (relative light units) response for all replicates, mean RLU, and the fit curve RLU response for each calibrator
Section 6-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
Figure 6.10: Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System)
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-84.

Calibration history screen

From the Calibration history screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for current and previously performed calibrations. You can also access windows to: Find information for specific calibrations based on specified search criteria View detailed calibration curve information Fail a calibration curve Override an expired calibration curve (c System) Print the Cal Curve Summary and Cal Curve Details reports Archive calibration curve information
Section 6-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
Figure 6.11: Calibration history screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Calibration history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-85. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column M ASSAY and REAGENT LOT CAL DATE / TIME and EXP DATE / TIME CAL STATUS Sort description Numerically in ascending order. Alphanumerically in ascending order. Chronologically in descending order. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
To display this screen, see Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-27.
Related procedures... View assay calibration history, page 6-30

View calibration curve information, page 6-31 Find a specific calibration, page 6-30 Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32 Print a report, page 5-333
Section 6-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Archive calibration curves, page 6-33 Calibration review
Access the Calibration history screen

Perform this procedure to display the Calibration history screen.
To access the Calibration history screen: Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration history. The Calibration history screen displays.
Related information... Calibration history screen, page 6-25
Windows - Calibration history screen

Windows and views of windows that you can access from the Calibration history screen include: Find options (Calibration history) window, page 6-27 Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views (c System), page 6-19 Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System), page 6-20 Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System), page 6-21 Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System), page 6-22 Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System), page 6-23 Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System), page 6-24 Archive calibration curves window, page 6-28
Find options (Calibration history) window

From the Find options (Calibration history) window you can search for specific calibration records.
Section 6-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
Figure 6.12: Find options (Calibration history) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-77.
Related procedures... Find a specific calibration, page 6-30
Archive calibration curves window

From the Archive calibration curves window you can archive calibration curves to a CD. Figure 6.13: Archive calibration curves window
For descriptions of these fields, see Archive calibration curves window field descriptions, page Appendix E-85.
Section 6-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Related procedures... Archive calibration curves, page 6-33
Calibration review
Procedures - Calibration review

Procedures you can perform from the Calibration status and/or Calibration history screen and its related windows include: View assay calibration status, page 6-29 View assay calibration history, page 6-30 Find a specific calibration, page 6-30 View calibration curve information, page 6-31 Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32 Print a report, page 5-333 Archive calibration curves, page 6-33
View assay calibration status

Perform this procedure to display the Calibration status screen. From this screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for each assay and reagent lot currently loaded on the system. To find specific calibrations, see Find a specific calibration, page 6-30.
To view assay calibration status: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the CAL STATUS button on the c 8000 processing module graphic. Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration status. The Calibration status screen displays.
Related information... Calibration status screen, page 6-15

Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17
Section 6-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
View assay calibration history

Perform this procedure to display the Calibration history screen. From this screen you can view a summary list of the calibration statuses for current and previously performed calibrations. To find specific calibrations, see Find a specific calibration, page 6-30.
To view assay calibration history: Select QC-Cal from the menu bar, and then select Calibration history. The Calibration history screen displays.

Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17
Find a specific calibration

Perform this procedure to search for a specific calibration by entering your search criteria in one or more fields.
Access the Calibration status screen, page 6-17 Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-27
To find a specific calibration: 1. Select F3 - Find on the Calibration status or Calibration history screen. The Find options (Calibration status or Calibration history) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria.
Section 6-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
NOTE: A wildcard search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all data entry boxes except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the Reagent lot data entry box, all the reagent lots starting with 123 display. This list could include 12345M100, 12346M100, or 12347M100. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The Calibration status or Calibration history screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records.
Related information... Find options (Calibration status) window, page 6-19

Find options (Calibration history) window, page 6-27
View calibration curve information

Perform this procedure to display the Calibration curve window. From this window you can view detailed information for a calibration curve(s) such as: Calibrator name, concentration, lot number, and expiration date Calibrator curve data Calibration curve graph (c System - assay dependent)
Prerequisite
To view calibration curve information: 1. Select the desired calibration(s) from the table on the Calibration status or Calibration history screen, or select F2- Select all. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Calibration curve window displays. The view is dependent on the calibration(s) you selected. 3. Use the previous/next buttons to display each calibration if you selected more than one. (optional)
Section 6-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
4. Select Done to return to the Calibration status or Calibration history screen.
Related information... Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views (c System), page 6-19
Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System), page 6-20 Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System), page 6-21 Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System), page 6-22 Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System), page 6-23 Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System), page 6-24
Fail a calibration curve

Perform this procedure to fail an active calibration curve so that subsequent control or patient orders are not calculated from the curve.
To fail a calibration curve: 1. Select the desired calibration(s) from the table on the Calibration status or Calibration history screen. 2. Select F5 - Details. The Calibration curve window displays. 3. Select Fail Curve. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to fail the calibration curve. 5. Use the previous/next buttons to display each calibration if you selected more than one, and then repeat steps 3 and 4 for each. (optional) 6. Select Done to return to the Calibration status or Calibration history screen.
Section 6-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration review
Related information... Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views (c System), page 6-19
Calibration curve window - use cal factor/blank assay view (c System), page 6-20 Calibration curve window - potentiometric assay view (c System), page 6-21 Calibration curve window - adjust assay view (i System), page 6-22 Calibration curve window - index assay view (i System), page 6-23 Calibration curve window - full assay view (i System), page 6-24
Archive calibration curves

Perform this procedure to store calibration curves on a CD to create a backup for long-term storage. NOTE: The calibration curves are archived in a delimited ASCII format so you can import them into a spreadsheet. You cannot use the ARCHITECT System to retrieve the information.
Access the Calibration history screen, page 6-27

Offline, Stopped, or Ready General operator CD-R (compact disk recordable) or Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk Recordable/ReWritable)
To archive calibration curves: 1. Disable the screen timeout if the database is full and you are archiving a large amount of data. See Change the screen timeout setting, page 2-26. (optional) 2. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW into the CD drive. NOTE: If an archive message displays, see Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-271. 3. Select the desired calibration curves from the table on the Calibration history screen, or select F2 - Select all. NOTE: You can also select F3 - Find to search for and select calibration curves. See Find a specific calibration, page 6-30. 4. Select F8 - Archive.
Section 6-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Calibration review
Section 6
The Archive calibration curves window displays. 5. Verify the CD drive read indicator light is off. 6. Deselect Delete inactive curves after archive check box. (optional) NOTE: If you choose to delete calibration curves, curves with a status of Active are not deleted. 7. Select Done to archive the calibration curves. NOTE: An archive routinely takes less than four minutes, but with a full database it may take longer. You can cancel an archive when the system is collecting archive data and creating a temporary archive data file. A progress indicator displays with a Cancel button. You can cancel an archive prior to it being 50% complete. Do not navigate to a different screen or window until the "0519 Data Archive Complete" message displays. 8. Select the refresh button, if available.

Archive calibration curves window, page 6-28
Section 6-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operational precautions and limitations Section 7

Operational precautions and limitations <F=0>
Introduction
Operational requirements, precautions, and limitations are provided to ensure operator safety and accurate assay results. Not following these requirements or taking these precautions can impact system and assay performance and may cause damage to the system or adversely affect assay results. Operational precautions and limitations topics include: General requirements, page 7-2 Lists the requirements for system environment, maintenance, and troubleshooting to ensure proper system performance. Precautions and requirements for system operation, page 7-3 Lists the precautions you should take and the requirements you should follow before and during system operation. Requirements for handling consumables, page 7-5 Lists the requirements for storing and using consumables such as reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard solutions. Requirements for handling specimens, page 7-8 Lists the requirements for collecting, preparing, and storing specimens. Limitations of result interpretation, page 7-10 Discusses the other factors you should consider when interpreting patient test results.
Section 7-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Operational precautions and limitations

General requirements
Section 7
General requirements
You MUST follow these general ARCHITECT System requirements to help ensure proper system performance: Contact your Abbott representative to install your ARCHITECT System. Ensure the system is out of direct sunlight, heat and drafts, and away from any heat generating device. Exposure to heat and drafts can interfere with the ability of the system to maintain an operating temperature that is within the acceptable range. Maintain the required space on all sides of the system. For more information about space requirements, see System clearances, page 4-15. This space buffer is essential for: Adequate cooling of electrical components Accurate temperature control of the processing center Easy access for maintenance Easy access for disconnecting the power cord when required
Leave the system power on continuously unless instructed otherwise in a maintenance or troubleshooting procedure, or unless an emergency situation occurs. Perform maintenance procedures as recommended in Section 9, Service and maintenance. Do not attempt any maintenance or repairs that are not specified in documentation provided by Abbott Laboratories.
Section 7-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Precautions and requirements for system operation

You MUST take these precautions and follow these requirements when operating the ARCHITECT System. Failure to do so may cause damage to the system and may adversely affect test results. Precautions before operation Before you begin operating the system, you should: Read this manual thoroughly to understand full functionality of the system and associated hazards. Read the sections of the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) that are associated with: Warnings and precautions Safety precautions Handling precautions
Requirements before operation Before you begin operating the system, you should: Verify that supplies are loaded. Load c System reagents into the appropriate section of the reagent supply center. Load i System reagents, with septums installed, in the appropriate section of the reagent carousel. IMPORTANT: You must use septums to prevent reagent evaporation and to ensure reagent integrity. Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if you do not use septums as instructed in this manual and the assay-specific package insert. Once you have placed a septum on a reagent bottle, do not invert the bottle. Inverting the bottle results in reagent leakage and may compromise assay results. Do not remove septums once they have been installed on reagent bottles. Verify the c System ICT module is installed before running potentiometric assays.
Section 7-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 7
Precautions during operation While operating the system, take the following precautions: Keep all processing module and sample handler doors closed and covers in place unless instructed otherwise in a maintenance or troubleshooting procedure. Do not disconnect any electrical connection while the power is on. Shutdown the system control center if the main power source is interrupted. You have a maximum of ten minutes to perform the shutdown before losing backup power from the UPS (uninterruptible power supply). See Power off the SCC, page 5-4. Respond to system notifications relating to waste levels during processing. Dispose of all liquid waste according to local, state, and federal regulations. Stop the RSH (robotic sample handler) before losing power from the UPS (uninterruptible power supply) if the main power source to the processing module(s) is interrupted. Stop the RSH by performing one of the following: Press the stop key on the sample handler keypad. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop.
Discard all sample cups and/or tubes on the sample carrier if a carrier is in the RSH carrier transport when you perform an emergency shutdown. Samples and the surrounding area may be contaminated by sample splashing as the RSH carrier transport motor loses power. See Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708, for proper recovery information.
Section 7-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Requirements for handling consumables

You MUST follow these requirements when handling consumables to help ensure your safety and accurate assay results. See the manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet), the specific product label, or the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for detailed information. For a description of the hazard symbols, see Hazard symbols, page 8-6. Requirements for storage Follow these requirements for storing cuvettes, reaction vessels, sample cups, and reagent cartridges: Keep all consumables clean and free of dust. Store all consumables in their original containers so that you can obtain information such as expiration dates and lot numbers if necessary.
Follow these requirements for storing reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard solutions: Store reagents, calibrators, and controls according to directions in the manufacturer's documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Store bulk solutions and onboard solutions as instructed on their labels or in the product's documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Store i System reagents off the system in an UPRIGHT position according to the directions in the assay-specific package insert.
Contact your Abbott Customer Support if you receive reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, or onboard solutions that are in a condition contrary to the product's documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) or label recommendation, or that are damaged. Requirements for use Follow these requirements for using reaction vessels, sample cups, and reagent cartridges: Do not reuse or substitute. Abbott Laboratories cannot accept responsibility for system performance and assay results when consumables are reused or have been manufactured by anyone other than Abbott Laboratories.
Section 7-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 7
Use caution when handling to prevent contamination and operator exposure. Use within their specified dating periods. Consider all used reaction vessels, sample cups, and reagent cartridges as potentially infectious. Follow appropriate procedures for handling.
Follow these requirements for using reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard solutions: Do not substitute. Abbott Laboratories manufactures substances and components to rigidly controlled quality standards. Substitution of materials may affect ARCHITECT System performance, assay results, safety, and equipment life. Avoid excessive mixing or shaking of liquids to minimize formation of foam and bubbles. Do not pipette by mouth. Do not smoke, eat, drink, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses in areas where specimens, reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, or onboard solutions are handled. Use caution when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard solutions to prevent contamination and operator exposure. Wear clean gloves to avoid contamination and operator exposure when placing an uncapped reagent bottle or cartridge on the processing module. Wear clean gloves to avoid contamination and operator exposure when placing a septum on an uncapped i System reagent bottle or when handling a c System reagent cartridge. Do not invert the i System reagent bottle once you have placed a septum on it. Inverting the bottle results in reagent leakage and may compromise assay results. IMPORTANT: You must use septums to prevent reagent evaporation and contamination and to ensure reagent integrity. Reliability of assay results cannot be guaranteed if you do not use septums as instructed in this manual and the assay-specific package insert. Do not remove septums once they have been installed on reagent bottles. Verify that all necessary assay components are present in the kit when loading new reagents.
Section 7-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verify the lot number and expiration date of each reagent kit component before you load the components in the reagent supply centers. Do not use reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, and onboard solutions beyond their expiration dates. Do not use reagents on board the system beyond the maximum number of cumulative days as stated in the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Verify that bulk solutions and onboard solutions are loaded in the appropriate positions to ensure that results are not adversely affected. Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, or c System bulk and onboard solutions within a lot or between lots. Do not mix reagents, calibrators, controls, or Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution within a lot or between lots.
Section 7-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Requirements for handling specimens
Section 7

See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for detailed, assay-specific information about specimen collection, preparation, and storage. Consider all clinical specimens, reagents, controls, and calibrators that contain human-sourced materials as potentially infectious. Consider all system surfaces or components that have come in contact with human-sourced materials as potentially infectious. Refer to Biological hazards, page 8-7 for additional information. WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material.
Requirements for collection Follow these requirements for collecting specimens: Follow all usual precautions for collecting blood by venipuncture to avoid specimen hemolysis. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for the appropriate specimen type for each assay. NOTE: Only human specimens have been tested and approved for analysis on the ARCHITECT System. Performance has not been established using cadaver specimens or body fluids other than those specified in the Abbott product assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Verify the correct specimen type(s) is used. The ARCHITECT System does not verify specimen type.
Requirements for preparation and storage Follow these requirements for preparing and storing specimens: Ensure that serum specimens collected in tubes containing a gel separator have 8 mm of serum above the gel to avoid contamination of the specimen during pipetting. Inspect all samples for bubbles. Remove bubbles with a clean applicator stick prior to analysis. Use a new applicator stick for each sample to prevent cross contamination.
Section 7-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verify serum and plasma specimens are free of fibrin, red blood cells, or other particulate matter. Ensure that complete clot formation in serum specimens has taken place prior to centrifugation. Some specimens, especially those from patients receiving anticoagulant or thrombolytic therapy may exhibit increased clotting times. If the specimen is centrifuged before a complete clot forms, the presence of fibrin may cause erroneous results. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for sample volume information. Separate the serum or plasma from the clot, serum separator, or red blood cells prior to freezing. Mix and centrifuge patient samples after any freeze/thaw cycle or to remove red blood cells or particulate matter. See the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) for limitations and interfering substances. Avoid multiple freeze-thaw cycles. After you thaw a specimen, you MUST mix it thoroughly by low speed vortexing or by gently inverting it to ensure consistency in the results. Remove closures from specimen tubes prior to loading them on the sample handler. Minimize evaporation effects after you load samples on the system by processing them within the number of hours specified in the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). For detailed information on evaporation effects, see Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 7-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Limitations of result interpretation
Section 7
Limitations of result interpretation

Assay results MUST be used with other clinical data, for example, symptoms, other test results, patient history, clinical impressions, information available from clinical evaluation, and other diagnostic procedures. All data MUST be considered for patient care management. If assay results are inconsistent with clinical evidence, additional testing is suggested to confirm the result. The ARCHITECT System has been validated for its intended use. However, errors can occur due to potential operator errors and ARCHITECT System technology limitations.
Section 7-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Hazards <F=0>
Introduction
Attention to hazard and safety information minimizes the potential of harm to personnel and damage to the laboratory environment. Hazard and safety topics include: Operator responsibility, page 8-3 Provides guidance on using the ARCHITECT System as designed. Safety icons, page 8-4 Provides an illustration of each safety symbol and sample text associated with the symbol. Hazard symbols, page 8-6 Provides an illustration of each hazard symbol and a description along with its standard abbreviation. Biological hazards, page 8-7 Provides an overview of the biological hazards you may be exposed to and the precautions you should take to minimize exposure. Chemical hazards, page 8-9 Provides an overview of the chemical hazards you may be exposed to and the precautions you should take to minimize exposure. Spill clean-up, page 8-11 Provides guidelines for cleaning spills in accordance with established biosafety practices. Waste handling and disposal, page 8-12 Identifies the responsibilities for appropriate waste disposal. Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13 Provides information on decontaminating an ARCHITECT System and links to specific decontamination procedures. Electrical hazards, page 8-15 Provides an overview of precautions you should take to avoid personal injury or damage to the system from the electrical components.
Section 8-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Mechanical hazards, page 8-17 Provides an overview of the precautions you should take to avoid personal injury or damage to the system from the mechanical components. Physical hazards, page 8-19 Provides an overview of the precautions you should take to avoid physical injury when operating or moving the system.
Section 8-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Operator responsibility
Operator responsibility
You are responsible for using the ARCHITECT System only as designed. Operators must be trained before being allowed to operate the system. Failure to follow safe use instructions could cause injury to you, damage to the system, or adversely affect assay results. See Operational precautions and limitations, page 7-1.
Section 8-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Safety icons
Section 8
Safety icons
Safety icons are used in ARCHITECT System documentation and on ARCHITECT Systems to identify potentially dangerous conditions. You MUST recognize these icons and understand the type and degree of potential hazard. The following icons may be used with text or in lieu of text. If text accompanies the icon, it describes the nature of the hazard and is labeled with WARNING or CAUTION. WARNING is defined as a physical, mechanical, or procedural condition that could result in moderate to serious personal injury. CAUTION is defined as a condition that could result in minor injury or interfere with proper functioning of the system. Table 8.1: Safety icons and descriptions
Icon Description WARNING: Potential Biohazard Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. For more information, see Biological hazards, page 8-7. WARNING: Potential Biohazard Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. For more information, see Biological hazards, page 8-7. WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard Indicates the possibility of electrical shock if procedural or engineering controls are not observed. For more information, see Electrical hazards, page 8-15. CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Warns against direct viewing of the beam or reflections from the beam. For more information, see Laser light, page 8-19.
Section 8-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Table 8.1: Safety icons and descriptions (continued)
Icon Description WARNING: Hot Surface Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to hot surfaces. For more information, see Hot objects, page 8-21. WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to probes. For more information, see Probes and sharps, page 8-19. Identifies an activity that may present a safety-related hazard and advises you to consult the associated caution or warning instructions provided. Examples include: CAUTION: Lifting Hazard Identifies an activity where you may be required to lift or move a heavy object. For more information, see Heavy objects, page 8-21. CAUTION: Moving Parts Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to moving parts. For more information, see Mechanical hazards, page 8-17. CAUTION: Chemical Hazard Identifies an activity or area where you may be exposed to hazardous chemicals. For more information, see Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Safety icons
Section 8-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Hazard symbols
Section 8
Hazard symbols
ARCHITECT System product labeling may include one or more of the following hazard symbols. These symbols convey properties of the chemical or chemical mixture, and notify you that you should take precautions when working with the material. Always consult the specific package insert or MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) for further information. Table 8.2: Hazard symbols and descriptions
Symbol Description with standard abbreviation This symbol indicates that some component(s) of the product has irritant (Xi) properties. This symbol indicates that some component(s) of the product has harmful (Xn) properties. This symbol indicates that some component(s) of the product has corrosive (C) properties.
Section 8-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Biological hazards
Biological hazards
When performing the following activities you may be exposed to potentially infectious materials: Handling samples, reagents, calibrators, and controls Cleaning spills Handling and disposing of waste Moving the system Performing maintenance procedures Performing cleaning or decontamination procedures Performing component replacement procedures
The following information is presented to help you minimize the impact of this exposure. Precautions You should consider all clinical samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and used RVs (reaction vessels) that contain human-sourced material as potentially infectious. You should consider all system surfaces or components that have come in contact with human-sourced material as potentially infectious. No known test method can offer complete assurance that products derived from human-sourced material will not transmit infection. Therefore, all products derived from human-sourced materials and system components exposed to human-sourced materials should be considered potentially infectious. It is recommended that you handle all potentially infectious materials in accordance with the OSHA Standard on Bloodborne Pathogens1. You should use Biosafety Level 22 or appropriate biosafety practices3,4 for materials that contain or are suspected of containing infectious agents. Precautions include, but are not limited to the following: Wear gloves, lab coats, and protective eye wear when handling human-sourced material or contaminated system components. Do not pipette by mouth. Do not eat, drink, smoke, apply cosmetics, or handle contact lenses when handling human-sourced material or contaminated system components.
Section 8-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Biological hazards
Section 8
Clean spills of potentially infectious materials and contaminated system components with a detergent followed by an appropriate disinfectant, such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite or other suitable disinfectant. NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13. Decontaminate and dispose of all samples, reagents, and other potentially contaminated materials in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations.
If you are exposed to biohazardous or potentially infectious materials, you should seek medical attention immediately and take steps to cleanse the affected area: Eyes - Rinse with water for 15 minutes. Mouth - Rinse with water. Skin - Wash the affected area with soap and water. Puncture wound - Allow to bleed freely. Wash the affected area with soap and water.
1. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29 CFR Part 1910.1030, Occupational Exposure to Bloodborne Pathogens. 2. US Department of Health and Human Services. Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories, Fourth Edition. Washington, DC: US Government Printing Office, May 1999. 3. World Health Organization. Laboratory Biosafety Manual. Geneva: World Health Organization, 2004. 4. Sewell DL, Bove KE, Callihan DR, et al. Protection of Laboratory Workers from Occupationally Acquired Infections: Approved Guideline Third Edition. NCCLS Document M29-A3. Wayne, PA: Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute, 2005.
Section 8-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Chemical hazards
Chemical hazards
You may be exposed to hazardous chemicals when handling reagents, calibrators, controls, bulk solutions, or onboard solutions. Your exposure to hazardous chemicals is minimized by following instructions provided in the assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet) and on product-specific labels, and product-specific MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). Precautions In general, observe the following precautions when handling chemicals: Consult MSDS for safe use instructions and precautions. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. If contact with material is anticipated, wear impervious gloves, protective eye wear, and clothing. Maintain good housekeeping. Do not eat, drink, or store food and beverages in areas where chemicals are used. Seek medical attention if irritation or signs of toxicity occur after exposure.
Some products may contain sodium azide. Observe the following precautions when using products that contain sodium azide: Do not autoclave products containing sodium azide. Flush drains thoroughly with water after disposing of solutions containing sodium azide to prevent metal azides from forming on lead or copper pipes in laboratory plumbing. These azides can explode upon percussion, such as hammering. To remove contamination from old drains suspected of azide accumulation, the U.S. National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health recommends the following procedure: a. b. c. d. Siphon liquid from the trap using a rubber or plastic hose. Fill the trap with 10% sodium hydroxide solution. Allow the solution to stand in the trap for 16 hours. Flush the trap thoroughly with water.
Hazard symbols that appear on ARCHITECT System product labeling are accompanied by risk (R) and safety (S) numbers and represent risk and safety phrases defined by European Community Directives. The
Section 8-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Chemical hazards
Section 8
risk and safety phrases describe precautions you should use when working with a particular chemical or chemical mixture. For all (R) and (S) numbers that appear on product labeling, refer to the corresponding phrases in the assay-specific inserts. Other country-specific warning and precautions may be included on the labeling.
Section 8-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Spill clean-up
Spill clean-up
Clean spills in accordance with established biosafety practices and follow instruction in the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets). In general, safe work practices for cleaning spills include: 1. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment, such as gloves, eye wear, and lab coat. 2. Absorb the spill with absorbent material. 3. Wipe the spill area with detergent solution. 4. Wipe the area clean with an appropriate disinfectant such as 0.1% sodium hypochlorite. NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13.
Section 8-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Waste handling and disposal
Section 8
Waste handling and disposal

Each facility is responsible for labeling all waste containers and characterizing its waste stream to ensure waste is disposed of in accordance with the appropriate local, state, and federal regulations. Reagents, calibrators, and controls may contain thimersol or mercury and may be considered hazardous per applicable environmental regulatory agencies. See the manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet), the product-specific label, or the product-specific MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet). Check with your local sanitary district to determine limits for mercury in wastewater.
Section 8-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Decontamination procedure requirements

Always wear appropriate personal protective equipment (such as gloves, eye wear, and lab coat) while performing decontamination activities. Prior to servicing the ARCHITECT System you must: Decontaminate the exterior surfaces Clean and decontaminate probes, if present Remove all samples, reagents, controls, calibrators, and liquid consumables
Prior to shipment or relocation of the ARCHITECT System you must: Decontaminate the exterior surfaces Remove all samples, reagents, controls, calibrators, and liquid consumables
IMPORTANT: If you must ship the system to a new location, contact your Abbott field service representative for assistance. The Abbott field service representative will prepare the decontaminated system for shipment and install it at the new destination. The following components of the ARCHITECT System require decontamination.
Component Sample carrier Reference For information about decontaminating the sample carrier, see 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82. For information about decontaminating the system control center, see 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82. For information about decontaminating the processing module, see 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82. For information about decontaminating probes, see 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25. For information about decontaminating the supply and waste center, see 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82. For information about decontaminating system surfaces, see 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82.
Processing module external surfaces
Probes (c System)
Supply and waste center (i System)
ARCHITECT System / ARCHITECT ARM surfaces (i System)
Section 8-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Section 8
Component RSH (robotic sample handler)
Reference For information about decontaminating the RSH, see 6311 RSH Cleaning, page 9-77. For information about decontaminating the SSH, see 6010 Load Queue Cleaning, page 9-79, 6017 Unload Queue Cleaning, page 9-80, and 6020 Processing Queue Cleaning, page 9-80. For information about decontaminating the LAS Carousel, see 6022 LAS Carousel Cleaning, page 9-81. For information about decontaminating system surfaces, see 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82.
SSH (standard sample handler)
LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler High-concentration waste bottle (c System)
Decontamination procedures may require the use of diluted sodium hypochlorite. To calculate the parts of water required to mix with one part of manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite solution, use the following formula:
Where:
A B X = = = % of sodium hypochlorite solution desired % of sodium hypochlorite (active or available chlorine) in manufactured-supplied solution number of parts of water required to mix with one part of manufacturer-supplied sodium hypochlorite (active or available chlorine) solution
NOTE: The stability of the working solution is 30 days after preparation.
Section 8-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Electrical hazards
Electrical hazards
The ARCHITECT System does not pose uncommon electrical hazards to operators if it is installed and operated without alteration, and is connected to a power source that meets required specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19. Basic electrical hazard awareness is essential to the safe operation of any system. Only qualified personnel should perform electrical servicing. Elements of electrical safety include, but are not limited to the following: Inspect electrical cabling into and on the ARCHITECT System for signs of wear and damage. Use only approved power cords and electrical accessories, such as those supplied with the system, to protect against electric shock. Use a properly grounded electrical outlet of correct voltage and current handling capability. Determine and correct the cause of a blown fuse or thrown circuit breaker before attempting to resume operation of the system. Do not disconnect any electrical connection or service any electrical or internal components while the power is on. Unplug the ARCHITECT ARM accessory before cleaning, servicing, or performing system maintenance. Disconnect the power cord from the UPS (uninterruptible power supply) before servicing. Disconnect the processing module power cord before cleaning major liquid spills. Keep liquids away from all connectors of electrical or communication components. Do not touch any switches or outlets with wet hands. Keep the floor dry and clean under and around the ARCHITECT System. Use a ground fault circuit interrupter when working in a wet environment. Avoid spilling fluids in the electronics bay when using the ARCHITECT ARM accessory.
Section 8-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Electrical hazards
Section 8
Clean spilled fluids immediately.
Section 8-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Mechanical hazards
Mechanical hazards
The ARCHITECT System is an automated system that operates under computer control. As with most automated equipment, there is potential for injury and bodily harm from moving mechanical components whenever the system is in operation. The ARCHITECT System minimizes mechanical hazards by providing guards to protect against accidental contact with moving components, and encoding the software with safety features. The ARCHITECT System requires that you accurately position all samples, reagents, calibrators, controls, and cups and/or tubes on the system. It is very important that you correctly position sample cups and/or tubes, reaction vessels, and reagent containers before initiating any operation. Although the ARCHITECT System is equipped with safety features to stop the lowering of the probes, it is NEVER acceptable for you to reach into the processing module's working area when the system is in operating mode. Should your intervention be necessary during a run, you should interrupt the run according to instructions defined in Section 5, Operating instructions. During operation of the ARCHITECT System, you are potentially exposed to the following moving mechanical components: Sample and reagent arm(s) Pipettor(s) and probe(s) Sample handler RV load assembly Wash aspiration probe(s) Sample carousel Reagent supply center(s) Reaction carousel Mixer unit Cuvette washer ICT unit/probe
Basic elements of mechanical safety include, but are not limited to: Never bypass or override a safety device. Keep all protective covers and barriers in place.
Section 8-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Mechanical hazards
Section 8
Never perform manual tasks on the work surface of the system. Never allow any part of your body to enter a range of mechanical movement during system operation. Do not open the covers to the reagent supply center(s) and the c System sample carousel when the access indicator lights are not illuminated. If you open the covers when access is not indicated, the mechanical components do not stop moving immediately because the system attempts to return the components to their home positions. Do not wear articles of clothing or accessories that could catch on the system. Keep pockets free of items that could fall into the system. Use caution when performing adjustment, maintenance, cleaning, or repair procedures. Use caution when loading sample carriers into the sample handler. Use caution when loading the sample carousel on the c System processing module. Use caution when loading the LAS sample carousel on the i 2000 processing module. Use caution when loading reagents into the reagent supply center(s). Do not operate the ARCHITECT ARM accessory with the service doors open. Be aware that in the event of a system malfunction or an unexpected sequence of movements, reflex actions could occur, causing injury.
Section 8-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Physical hazards
Physical hazards
Safe practices should be observed to avoid injury when exposed to the following potential physical hazards. Probes and sharps Probes are sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious material. Avoid contact with the tips of probes. Although the ARCHITECT System is equipped with machine guarding features to stop the lowering of the probes, you should never reach into the processing module while it is operating. When handling the external waste pump (c System optional accessory), use proper personal protective equipment. Avoid contact with the sharp metal edge of the pump. The cuvette pair leaf springs (c 16000) are very sharp; handle cautiously to prevent injury. In general, minimize use of sharps and glassware. Use mechanical means to remove contaminated broken glassware. Dispose of sharps in an appropriately labeled, puncture-resistant, and leakproof container before treatment and disposal. Laser light
CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The bar code readers of the sample handler, c System carousel, and c 8000 reagent carousels use a low power, visible laser diode and emit laser light. Because of normal human aversion response such as blinking, eye movement, and so forth, these lasers normally do not present a hazard to eyes. Although momentary exposure to a CDRH Class 2 laser is not known to be harmful, failure to follow proper procedures may result in a potentially hazardous condition. Do not look into the aperture Do not remove the bar code reader covers or bypass interlocks Do not stare directly into the beam Do not place any optics into the beam
Section 8-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards
Physical hazards
Section 8
Only Abbott field service representatives should service the laser. The protective covers should only be removed by trained operators or Abbott field service representatives. The following laser caution labels are affixed to the ARCHITECT System: Figure 8.1: Manufacturer laser certification label
c System - affixed on the side wall of the processing module to the right of reagent supply center 1 (R1). i 2000/i 2000SR - affixed on the underside of the rear processing center cover.
Figure 8.2: System laser caution label
c 8000 - affixed on the covers for the reagent supply centers (R1 and R2) and the sample carousel. c 16000 - affixed on the sample carousel i System - affixed on the cover of the reagent carousel. RSH (robotic sample handler) - affixed near the bar code reader under the cover on the left side. SSH (standard sample handler) - affixed on the cover under the left processing queue access door.
Do not remove, damage, or obliterate any of the laser warning labels. If any of them become illegible, notify your Abbott field service representative to have them replaced.
Section 8-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Hazards Section 8
Physical hazards
Heavy objects The c System high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full. Use care when handling the bottle to reduce the risk of injury. The i System wash buffer reservoir is heavy and bulky when full. Perform 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 to empty the wash buffer reservoir prior to removing it from the system. Use proper lifting techniques when handling full bottles or containers of the following: c System high-concentration waste bottle i 2000/i 2000SR wash buffer reservoir
The system is heavy and has unsupported sections of the shell. Ensure that you have adequate help before attempting to move the system. Push only on solid sections of the housing; do not exert pressure on unsupported sections of the shell. Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ARCHITECT ARM accessory. Hot objects The lamp and lamp housing may be hot. Before replacing the lamp, turn off the power, and then allow the lamp and lamp housing to cool. Use temperature-resistant gloves if necessary. Trip hazards The ARCHITECT System is equipped with power cords and various computer connectors. To avoid a tripping hazard, ensure cords in high traffic areas are properly stowed.
Section 8-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Service and maintenance Section 9

Service <F=0> and maintenance
Introduction
Proper service and maintenance of your ARCHITECT System is one of the most important aspects of a complete quality assurance program. A thorough service and maintenance program: Minimizes down time Maintains records for inspection and accreditation Maintains optimal system operation to provide optimal test results
Service and maintenance topics include: Maintenance, page 9-2 Provides a description of all maintenance procedures, the software screens and windows associated with maintenance activities, associated graphics for some maintenance procedures, and step-by-step instructions for performing related procedures. Component replacement, page 9-83 Provides step-by-step instructions and graphics for replacing system components.
Section 9-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Service and maintenance

Maintenance
Section 9
Maintenance
The ARCHITECT System software provides a user-friendly interface for performing and tracking your maintenance activities. The Maintenance screen displays procedures that are scheduled to be performed. Once you initiate a procedure, step-by-step instructions walk you through its completion. Performance of a procedure is tracked in the online Maintenance log. Maintenance topics include: Maintenance suggestions, page 9-2 Maintenance screen, page 9-3 Maintenance log screen, page 9-14 Maintenance statuses, page 9-20 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Maintenance suggestions
Proper maintenance of your ARCHITECT System is important. These suggestions, which are especially useful for integrated and multi-module systems, are provided to help you determine efficient strategies for performing maintenance procedures and reducing downtime. When scheduling and performing maintenance procedures: Schedule maintenance procedures during times of slower workflow. Verify adequate supplies are on board the system, or available to load, prior to initiating a maintenance procedure. Perform procedures within the weekly, monthly, and quarterly maintenance categories on different shifts or days. To avoid having these procedures scheduled for the same day, perform some of them early to stagger the schedule. NOTE: You must complete all maintenance procedures on or before the day they are due. Use the additional graphics provided in the online help to assist you with performing maintenance procedures. Access Help? by selecting the help button on the Maintenance perform window, and then select one of the following hypertext links to view a list of available graphics:
Section 9-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics, page 9-42 c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics, page 9-52 i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics, page 9-72 RSH associated maintenance graphics, page 9-78
NOTE: Not all maintenance procedures have additional graphics.
Maintenance screen
From the Maintenance screen you can view information for maintenance procedures and initiate a procedure. You can also access windows to view version and detail information for each procedure, and print the Procedure report. The procedures display by module and by maintenance category: The To do tab displays procedures that are scheduled to be performed on a module from the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and Quarterly maintenance categories. Circles that precede the procedure name are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance category. The Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and As needed tabs display the non-scheduled procedures for a module and also show the: LAST PERFORMED: date and time a procedure was last performed OPERATOR ID: ID of the operator who last performed the procedure
The In process tab displays any procedure currently in process on the selected module and also shows the: PROCEDURE STATUS: Current status of the procedure in process TIME STARTED: time the procedure was started
Section 9-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Figure 9.1: Maintenance screen
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-127. To display this screen, see Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4.
Related procedures... View maintenance procedure information, page 9-5

Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6 Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks, page 9-8 Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9 View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10 Print a Procedure report, page 5-341 Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16
Access the Maintenance screen

Perform this procedure to display the Maintenance screen.
Section 9-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To access the Maintenance screen: Select System from the menu bar, and then select Maintenance. The Maintenance screen displays with the To do tab selected. Maintenance

Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Procedures - Maintenance screen

Procedures you can perform from the Maintenance screen and its related windows include: View maintenance procedure information, page 9-5 Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6 Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks, page 9-8 Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9 View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10 Print a Procedure report, page 5-341
View maintenance procedure information

Perform this procedure to display the Version details for procedure (maintenance) window. From this window, you can view information for a maintenance procedure prior to performing it. This information includes the version number, required module status, and required user access level.
Access the Maintenance screen, page 9-4

All except Maintenance General operator NA
To view maintenance procedure information: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen. The scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected module display on the To do tab. 2. Select the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, or As needed tab. (optional) The non-scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected category display.
Section 9-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
3. Select the desired procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES box, and then select F6 - Version. The Version details for procedure (maintenance) window displays.

Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, page 9-12 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Perform a maintenance procedure

Perform this procedure to do scheduled or non-scheduled maintenance on your ARCHITECT System. CAUTION: Moving Parts. Maintenance procedures may expose operators to moving parts that can potentially cause personal injury. Untrained operators should not perform these procedures.
Prerequisite(s) Module status User access level Supplies

Procedure dependent Procedure dependent Procedure dependent
To perform a maintenance procedure: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen. The scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected module display on the To do tab. 2. Select the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, or As needed tab. (optional) The non-scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected category display. 3. Select the desired procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES box, and then select F5 - Perform. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to perform the procedure. The Maintenance Perform window displays. A description of the procedure displays in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
Section 9-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
5. Select Proceed, and then follow the instructions in the INSTRUCTIONS box. You are prompted to enter information if the procedure requires additional data. 6. Enter the required information in the User input data entry box, and then select Continue.
Section 9-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
NOTE: You can select the Close window button at anytime to close the Maintenance Perform window to perform a maintenance procedure on another module or access other screens and windows. See Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks, page 9-8. 7. Select Activity to view the progress of the procedure. (optional) The activity of the module displays in the Activity list. To return to the Result list, select Results.
8. Select Print to print the Procedure report. (optional) 9. Select Done to return to the Maintenance screen.

Maintenance Perform window, page 9-11 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59
Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks

Perform this procedure to close the Maintenance Perform window when a maintenance procedure is in process. This allows you to
Section 9-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
perform a maintenance procedure on another module or to access other screens and windows.
Prerequisite(s) Module status User access level Supplies
Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6

Maintenance General operator NA
To perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks: 1. Select Close window on the Maintenance perform window. The Maintenance screen displays with the In process tab selected. 2. Select the desired Module option to perform another maintenance procedure. Or Access any other screen to perform another task. To return to an in-process maintenance procedure when user input is required or to complete the procedure, see Return to a maintenance procedure in process, page 9-9.

Maintenance Perform window, page 9-11 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Return to a maintenance procedure in process

Perform this procedure to return to the Maintenance Perform window of an in-process maintenance procedure. You must return to this window to provide user input, when required, or to complete the procedure.

Maintenance General operator NA
To return to a maintenance procedure in process: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen. The procedure displays on the In process tab.
Section 9-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
2. Select the procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES box, and then select F5 - Continue. The Maintenance Perform window for the selected in-process procedure displays. 3. Follow the instructions in the INSTRUCTIONS box.

Maintenance Perform window, page 9-11 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
View details for a maintenance procedure

Perform this procedure to display the Details for maintenance item window. From this window you can view information for a maintenance procedure that has been performed. This information includes the: Date the procedure was performed Procedure version used ID of the operator who performed the procedure Status of the procedure
All except Maintenance General operator NA
To view details for a maintenance procedure: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen. The scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected module display on the To do tab. 2. Select the Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, or As needed tab. (optional) The non-scheduled maintenance procedures for the selected category display. 3. Select the desired procedure from the MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES box, and then select F7 - Details. The Details for maintenance item window displays.
Section 9-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Details for maintenance item window, page 9-13 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20 Maintenance
Windows - Maintenance screen

Windows you can access from the Maintenance screen include: Maintenance Perform window, page 9-11 Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, page 9-12 Details for maintenance item window, page 9-13
Maintenance Perform window

From the Maintenance Perform window you can view information about an initiated procedure such as: Procedure category and name ID of the operator logged on to the system Status of the procedure Description of the procedure NOTE: The display of the Maintenance Perform window is dependent on the selected module, category, and procedure. You can then proceed with the procedure, close the window to perform a maintenance procedure on another module or access other screens and windows, or quit the procedure. For descriptions of maintenance procedures, see Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20. To view an associated maintenance graphic, see: c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics, page 9-42 c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics, page 9-52 i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics, page 9-72.
Section 9-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Figure 9.2: Maintenance Perform window
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance Perform window field descriptions, page Appendix E-128.
Related procedures... Perform concurrent maintenance procedures or other tasks, page 9-8
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window

From the Version details for procedure (maintenance) window you can view information for maintenance procedures including version number, required module status, and required user access level.
Section 9-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Figure 9.3: Version details for procedure (maintenance) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-129.
Related procedures... View maintenance procedure information, page 9-5
Details for maintenance item window

From the Details for maintenance item window you can view detailed information for maintenance procedures. If the procedure has been performed, this information includes the: Version of the procedure Date ID of the operator logged on to the system Status of the procedure when last performed NOTE: If a procedure has not been performed or you selected a procedure from the To do tab, only the procedure name displays. All other fields are blank.
Section 9-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Figure 9.4: Details for maintenance item window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for maintenance item window field descriptions, page Appendix E-129.
Related procedures... View details for a maintenance procedure, page 9-10.
Maintenance log screen

From the Maintenance log screen you can view information about procedures that have been performed. The system stores up to three months of data. You can also access windows to: Print the Maintenance History report Approve the Maintenance log View additional details for procedures Add a comment to a procedure
Section 9-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 9.5: Maintenance log screen Maintenance
For descriptions of these fields, see Maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-130. An explanation of the descriptive elements of the Maintenance log follows:
Item Colored circles Colored squares Solid (Completed) Description Are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance category tab. Are color-coded to match the appropriate maintenance category tab. Indicate procedures that have been performed and have a status of Completed. If the procedure is performed more than once a day, the status of the last performed procedure displays. Indicate procedures that are scheduled, are pending, did not complete successfully, or were not performed when scheduled. If the procedure is performed more than once a day, the status of the last performed procedure displays. Indicates the selected field in the procedure row and date column. Use the directional arrows to move the cursor from one procedure to the next and from one day to the next. Indicates a comment was entered for the procedure.
Shaded (Not completed)
Cursor
Section 9-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Item 2-9 >
Description Indicates the procedure was performed X times on that day. Indicates the procedure was performed more than nine times on that day.
To display this screen, see Access the Maintenance log screen, page 9-16.
Related procedures... Approve the Maintenance log, page 9-17

Add a comment to a maintenance procedure, page 9-17 Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month, page 5-339 Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340
Access the Maintenance log screen

Perform this procedure to display the Maintenance log screen.

To access the Maintenance log screen: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Maintenance screen. 2. Select F2 - Maint. Log. The Maintenance log screen for the selected module displays.

Maintenance log screen, page 9-14 Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20
Procedures - Maintenance log screen

Procedures you can perform from the Maintenance log screen and its related windows include: Approve the Maintenance log, page 9-17 Add a comment to a maintenance procedure, page 9-17 Print a Maintenance History report for a specified month, page 5-339
Section 9-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Print a Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, page 5-340
Approve the Maintenance log

Perform this procedure to approve the monthly Maintenance log. NOTE: The Maintenance log cannot be approved until the first day of the next month.

NA System administrator NA
To approve the maintenance log: 1. Use the previous/next buttons on the Maintenance log screen to display the desired month. 2. Select F4 - Approve. The Approve maintenance log window for the selected month displays. 3. Select the Approve log check box. 4. Select Done to approve the Maintenance log. The status of the monthly maintenance log changes from unapproved to approved, and displays the Operator ID, date, and time of approval.

Approve maintenance log window, page 9-18
Add a comment to a maintenance procedure

Perform this procedure to add a comment to a procedure listed in the Maintenance log. Comments are particularly useful when used to document why a procedure could not be completed when scheduled or why an as-needed procedure was performed.

Section 9-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
To add a comment to a maintenance procedure: 1. Use the previous/next buttons on the Maintenance log screen to select the desired month. 2. Use the up/down arrows to select the desired maintenance procedure. 3. Use the left/right arrows to select the desired date. 4. Select F5 - Details. The Details for maintenance log window for the selected procedure and date displays. 5. Enter a comment in the Comment data entry box. 6. Select Done to save your changes.
Related information... Details for maintenance log window, page 9-19

Maintenance log screen, page 9-14 Maintenance statuses, page 9-20
Windows - Maintenance log screen

Windows you can access from the Maintenance log screen include: Approve maintenance log window, page 9-18 Details for maintenance log window, page 9-19
Approve maintenance log window

From the Approve maintenance log window the system administrator can approve the Maintenance log.
Section 9-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 9.6: Approve maintenance log window Maintenance
For descriptions of these fields, see Approve maintenance log window field descriptions, page Appendix E-130.
Related procedures... Approve the Maintenance log, page 9-17
Details for maintenance log window

From the Details for maintenance log window you can view detailed information for a maintenance procedure (by date performed) and add a comment. NOTE: The data displayed is from the last time the procedure was performed on the selected date. Figure 9.7: Details for maintenance log window
For descriptions of these fields, see Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-131.
Section 9-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Related procedures... Add a comment to a maintenance procedure, page 9-17
Maintenance statuses
You can use maintenance status information to determine the status of each maintenance procedure. Table 9.1: Maintenance statuses
Status Scheduled Pending Completed User Canceled Failed Blank Running Waiting user response Stopped with errors Description A procedure is scheduled on a future date. A procedure is scheduled on the current date. The procedure is complete and for procedures that produce results, all results passed. You selected Quit prior to the procedure completing. The procedure produced an error or a failed result. The procedure has not been performed. The procedure is in process. The procedure in process requires user input. The procedure is complete but errors occurred during execution.
Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions

Maintenance procedures are grouped by module type and then by category. Each category is represented by a tab on the Maintenance screen. The To do tab displays the currently scheduled Daily, Weekly, Monthly, and Quarterly procedures for the selected module. The Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Quarterly, and As needed tabs display all procedures for the selected module. You can perform any of the listed procedures even if they are not currently scheduled. The In process tab displays any procedure currently in process on the selected module. Maintenance categories/procedures by module type include: Processing module - the type of processing module determines the categories and related procedures that are available. c System processing module maintenance categories, page 9-21 c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics, page 9-42
Section 9-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics, page 9-52 i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules maintenance categories, page 9-62 i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics, page 9-72
Sample handler - the type of sample handler determines the categories and related procedures that are available. RSH maintenance categories, page 9-76 RSH associated maintenance graphics, page 9-78 SSH maintenance categories, page 9-79 LAS carousel sample handler maintenance categories (i 2000), page 9-80
SCC maintenance categories, page 9-82
c System processing module maintenance categories

Maintenance procedures for the c System processing module are grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are available for the following categories: Daily maintenance description (c System processing module), page 9-21 Weekly maintenance description (c System processing module), page 9-24 Monthly maintenance description (c System processing module), page 9-27 Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing module), page 9-28 As-needed maintenance description (c System processing module), page 9-35
Daily maintenance description (c System processing module)

Daily maintenance is required on the processing module only. Perform these procedures daily: 6024 Check 1mL Syringes, page 9-22 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22 6070 Daily Maintenance, page 9-22
Section 9-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6024 Check 1mL Syringes Perform this daily maintenance procedure to ensure: The pump syringe connections on the wash solution pump do not leak The syringe plunger interiors do not show evidence of leakage
For the location of the wash solution pump see ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components, page 9-125 or ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203.
Estimated time 2 minutes Materials needed None Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6028 Check DI Water Purity Perform this daily maintenance procedure to check the required purity of the water supply to facilitate accurate patient results.
6070 Daily Maintenance WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to: Change water in bath Add Water Bath Additive Wash ICT probe with ICT Cleaning Fluid and ICT Reference Solution
Section 9-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Drain and fill ICT reference cup Maintenance
For preparation instructions see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System), page 9-23.
Estimated time 15 minutes Materials needed ICT Cleaning Fluid ICT sample diluent Water Bath Additive Required module status Warming or Ready
Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System) Perform this procedure to prepare a working solution of ICT Cleaning Fluid. The prepared ICT cleaning fluid is used in the 6070 Daily Maintenance procedure.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA NA NA ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution ICT Cleaning Fluid Pipette
To prepare ICT cleaning fluid: 1. Hold the ICT Lyophilized Cleaning Solution bottle right side up and tap on a flat surface before opening to remove excess material from the cap. 2. Remove the cap. 3. Add 12 mL of ICT cleaning fluid to the ICT lyophilized cleaning solution bottle. 4. Replace the cap and mix by gentle inversion. Document the date of preparation. NOTE: The prepared, capped ICT cleaning fluid is stable for 14 days when stored at 2C to 8C, but no longer than the expiration date. Prepare water bath additive (c System) Perform this procedure to prepare Water Bath Additive. The prepared additive is dispensed into the water bath during the 6070 Daily
Section 9-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Maintenance procedure to prevent and control microbial contamination.
Prerequisite System status User access level Supplies NA Any General operator Water bath additive Appropriate reagent cartridge
To prepare water bath additive: 1. Verify water bath additive is within the expiration date on the bottle label. DO NOT use if the expiration date is exceeded. 2. Gently invert to ensure a homogeneous solution. 3. Pour water bath additive into the appropriate container. 4. Label the container with the name (water bath additive) and expiration date. Review the container label for additional information.
Weekly maintenance description (c System processing module)

Weekly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing module only. Perform these procedures weekly: 6019 Check ICT Components, page 9-24 6021 Clean Mixers, page 9-25 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25 6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent, page 9-26 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing, page 9-26
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6019 Check ICT Components WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure: The ICT probe does not drip No bubbles are in the ICT tubing The pump syringe connections on the ICT aspiration pump and the ICT reference solution pump do not leak Maintenance
To view the associated graphic, see 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000), page 9-44 or 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000), page 9-54.
Estimated time 2 minutes Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
6021 Clean Mixers WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure mixers are free of protein buildup.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed 70% isopropyl alcohol Cotton swabs DI water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard. Probe Sharps Hazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to probes. See Probes and sharps, page 8-19.
Section 9-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure: The exterior of the sample and reagent probes are free of protein buildup. The probes are not damaged, leaking, or dripping.
Materials needed Detergent A Cotton swabs Reagent Grade Type II water Nozzle cleaning wire (optional) Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Estimated time 5 minutes
6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure cuvettes are free of protein buildup and reagent residue.
Estimated time 25 minutes Materials needed Detergent A Required module status Warming or Ready
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to ensure the high-concentration waste pump tubing is free of blockage. To view the associated graphic, see 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000), page 9-46 or 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000), page 9-56.
Section 9-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Monthly maintenance description (c System processing module)

Monthly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing module only. Perform these procedures monthly: 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27 6026 Check Syringes and Valves, page 9-28 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip, page 9-28
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6016 Check Dispense Components WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure: Air bubbles are not being introduced into the sample and/or reagent syringes or the sample and/or reagent tubing Probe and grounding wire screws are tight Reagent probe tubing is not discolored
Materials needed Large slotted screwdriver Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure nozzles are clean and clear of debris to facilitate optimal operation.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Nozzle cleaning wire Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6026 Check Syringes and Valves Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure the syringes, solenoid valves and their connections do not leak. To view the associated graphic(s), see 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000), page 9-47 or 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000), page 9-57.
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip Perform this monthly maintenance procedure to ensure ICT aspiration drain tip is free of debris and salt buildup. To view the associated graphic, see 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000), page 9-48 or 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000), page 9-58.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed Lint-free tissue DI water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Quarterly maintenance description (c System processing module)

Quarterly maintenance for the c System is required on the processing module only. Perform these procedures quarterly:
Section 9-28
1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29 6011 Clean Reagent Supply Centers, page 9-29 6013 Clean Sample Carousel/Area, page 9-30 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30 6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32 6304 Change 1 mL Syringes, page 9-32 6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33 6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves, page 9-33 6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-34 Maintenance
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 1003 Change Lamp WARNING: Hot Surface. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to hot surfaces. See Hot objects, page 8-21.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to change the lamp. For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000), page 9-99 or Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000), page 9-178.
Estimated time 15 minutes NOTE: Time does not include lamp warm up (30 minutes) Materials needed Lamp Slotted screwdriver Phillips screwdriver Gloves Lint-free tissue (optional) Ethanol (optional) Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6011 Clean Reagent Supply Centers CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to ensure reagent supply centers are free of debris and deposits.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed Lint-free tissue Required module status Warming or Ready
Section 9-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
6013 Clean Sample Carousel/Area WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to ensure sample carousel and carousel assembly are free of debris and dust.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed Lint-free tissue 0.1% sodium hypochlorite Reagent Grade Type II water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13. 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace sample syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2. For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
Section 9-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to prepare for operation on completion of sample syringe maintenance.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Required module status
Phillips screwdriver Stopped, Warming, or Slotted screwdriver Ready 10 mm wrench Cotton swabs Absorbent towel O-rings and seal tips 1 and 2
6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace wash solution syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2. For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-139 or Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-217. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, to prepare for operation on completion of wash solution syringe maintenance.
Section 9-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace reagent syringe o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2. For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to prepare for operation on completion of reagent syringe maintenance.
6304 Change 1 mL Syringes WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace 1 mL syringes on:

Section 9-32
ICT reference pump

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash solution pump ICT aspiration pump Maintenance
For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, to prepare for operation on completion of changing 1 mL syringes for ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, to prepare for operation on completion of changing 1 mL syringes for the wash solution pump.
Estimated time 15 minutes Materials needed Absorbent towel 1 mL syringes Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to replace ICT aspiration check valve. For graphics associated with this quarterly maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, to prepare for operation on completion of changing the ICT aspiration check valve.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Absorbent towel Required module status
Stopped, Warming, or ICT aspiration pump Ready check valve
6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to evaluate ICT reference solution check valves and ensure they are functioning. For graphics associated with evaluation instructions, see Evaluate the check valve (c System), page 10-701.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed Clamp or large hemostats Absorbent towel Beaker large enough to accommodate 1 mL syringes with check valves DI water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this quarterly maintenance procedure to: Check the high-concentration waste sensor Clean high-concentration waste sensor with a diluted bleach solution
Materials needed Absorbent towel Beaker large enough to accommodate high-concentration waste sensor 0.5% sodium hypochlorite Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13.
Section 9-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
As-needed maintenance description (c System processing module)

Perform these recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on the c System during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine operation when problems are observed: 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37 2129 Add Water Bath Additive, page 9-38 2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-38 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39 3525 Temperature Status, page 9-39 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature, page 9-40 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40 6053 Probe Water Wash, page 9-40 6054 Probe Acid Wash, page 9-40 6055 Detergent B Probe Wash, page 9-41 6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid, page 9-41 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set sample probe positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing occurs. For the associated graphic, see 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-49 or 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-59.
Estimated time 12 minutes Materials needed Cuvette segment alignment tool Tap water or saline Lint-free tissue Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. Carrier calibration tool (RSH) Pipettor calibration tool (LAS) SH bar code tool (LAS) Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set R1 probe positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing reagents with the R1 pipettor occurs.
Section 9-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
For the associated graphic, see 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-50 or 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-60.
Estimated time 7 minutes Materials needed R1 outer segment, 12 position, with pipettor calibration target Cuvette segment alignment tool Water Lint-free tissue Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to set R2 probe positioning for all positions where aspirating and dispensing reagents with the R2 pipettor occurs. For the associated graphic, see 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-51 or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-61.
Estimated time 6 minutes Materials needed R1 outer segment, 12 position, with pipettor calibration target Cuvette segment alignment tool Water Lint-free tissue Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 9-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
2129 Add Water Bath Additive CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to add Water Bath Additive to the water bath to prevent and control microbial contamination. Review the container label for additional information.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Water Bath Additive Required module status Warming or Ready
2131 Flush ICT Cup Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to: Drain ICT Reference Solution from the ICT reference solution cup Refill the ICT reference solution warming ring from the ICT reference solution bottle
Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
2132 Flush Water Lines Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to verify water is being flushed through the wash station tubing, sample probe tubing, R1 and R2 pipettor tubing, and R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
2134 Change Water Bath CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Section 9-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to drain water from water bath and then refill bath with water. Review the container label for additional information.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Water Bath Additive Required module status Warming or Ready
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to verify the following bulk solution tubings are free of air bubbles: ICT Reference Solution Alkaline Wash Acid Wash
Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
3525 Temperature Status Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to check the temperature status of the processing module under the following conditions: Taking temperature measurements required by your laboratory Troubleshooting certain error codes Starting up the system after a long-term shutdown
The system checks and displays the temperature status of the following processing module components: Water bath Reagent supply centers 1 and 2 Sample carousel Instrument interior
Materials needed None Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 9-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
3526 Check Water Bath Temperature CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to measure the temperature of the processing module water bath and compare the reading to an external thermometer for accuracy.
Thermometer (reading Stopped, Warming, or accuracy 0.5C at Ready 37C)
6052 Wash Cuvettes Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash all cuvettes with Alkaline Wash, Acid Wash, and water.
6053 Probe Water Wash Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the probes on the sample pipettor, R1 reagent pipettor, and R2 reagent pipettor with water.
6054 Probe Acid Wash CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the probes on the sample pipettor, R1 reagent pipettor, and R2 reagent pipettor with
Section 9-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
a 0.5% dilution of acid wash solution. See Prepare 0.5% acid wash solution (c System), page 5-35.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed 0.5% acid wash Required module status Warming or Ready
6055 Detergent B Probe Wash CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the probes on the sample pipettor, R1 reagent pipettor, and R2 reagent pipettor with a 10% dilution of detergent B. For preparation instructions, see Prepare 10% detergent B solution (c System), page 5-38.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed 10% detergent B Required module status Warming or Ready
6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to wash the ICT probe with cleaning fluid to ensure the ICT probe is free of protein buildup. For preparation instructions, see Prepare ICT cleaning fluid (c System), page 9-23.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed ICT Cleaning Fluid Required module status Warming or Ready
6063 Flush ICT Module Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the ICT module with ICT Reference Solution.
Section 9-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
6309 Change ICT Module Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to replace the ICT module. For graphics associated with this as-needed maintenance procedure, see component replacement procedure Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed ICT module Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6310 Clean cuvettes - manually CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to manually clean the cuvettes in the reaction carousel.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Slotted screwdriver Detergent A Cotton swabs Reagent Grade Type II water Gloves Clean, residue-free container to submerge cuvette segment Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
c 8000 processing module associated maintenance graphics

Maintenance procedure instructions are located in the INSTRUCTIONS box on the Maintenance Perform window. Occasionally graphics are required to illustrate a procedure, but they cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box. The following graphics are associated with c 8000 processing module maintenance:
Section 9-42
Daily maintenance
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 8000), page 9-43
Weekly maintenance 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000), page 9-44 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000), page 9-46
Monthly maintenance 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000), page 9-47 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000), page 9-48
As-needed maintenance 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-49 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-50 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000), page 9-51
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 8000)

View these daily maintenance procedure graphics to: Locate the wash solution pump 1 mL syringes Inspect the connections and interior of the 1 mL syringe for leaks
Legend: 1. 1 mL syringes for wash solution pump
Section 9-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. Connections 2. Syringe plunger interior
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 8000)

View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to: Check ICT tubing for bubbles Inspect the connections and interior of the ICT 1 mL syringes for leaks
Section 9-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. ICT tubing
Legend: 1. 1 mL syringes for ICT reference pump 2. 1 mL syringes for ICT aspiration pump
Section 9-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 8000)

View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to ensure the high-concentration waste pump tubing is free of blockage.
Section 9-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. Input tubing from cuvette washer 2. Output tubing to the high-concentrated waste T fitting 3. High-concentrated waste T fitting
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 8000)

View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to ensure the syringe, solenoid valves, and their connections do not leak.
Section 9-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. Syringes 2. Solenoid valves
Legend: 1. Solenoid valve connections
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 8000)

View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to locate the ICT drain tip.
Section 9-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000)

View this as-needed maintenance graphic to clean the appropriate calibration targets.
Section 9-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. Sample wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup) 2. Sample carousel calibration target 3. Carrier calibration tool target 4. Cuvette segment alignment tool target
1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 8000)

Section 9-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. R1 wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup) 2. Cuvette segment alignment tool target 3. R1 reagent supply center inner segment calibration target 4. R1 reagent supply center outer segment calibration target

Section 9-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. R2 wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup) 2. R2 reagent supply center segment calibration target 3. Cuvette segment alignment tool target
c 16000 processing module associated maintenance graphics

Maintenance procedure instructions are located in the INSTRUCTIONS box on the Maintenance Perform window. Occasionally graphics are required to illustrate a procedure, but they cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box. The following graphics are associated with c 16000 processing module maintenance: Daily maintenance 6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 16000), page 9-53
Weekly maintenance 6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000), page 9-54 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000), page 9-56
Section 9-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Monthly maintenance 6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000), page 9-57 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000), page 9-58 Maintenance
As-needed maintenance 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-59 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-60 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000), page 9-61
6024 Check 1 mL Syringes graphics (c 16000)

View these daily maintenance procedure graphics to: Locate the wash solution pump 1 mL syringes Inspect the connections and interior of the 1 mL syringe for leaks
Figure 9.8: Supply and pump center (front view)
Legend: 1. 1 mL syringes for wash solution pump
Section 9-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
6019 Check ICT Components graphic (c 16000)

View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to: Check ICT tubing for bubbles Inspect the connections and interior of the ICT 1 mL syringes for leaks
Section 9-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. ICT tubing
Figure 9.9: Pump center (rear view)
Legend: 1. 1 mL syringes for ICT aspiration pump 2. 1 mL syringes for ICT reference pump
Section 9-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing graphic (c 16000)

View this weekly maintenance procedure graphic to ensure the high-concentration waste pump tubing is free of blockage.
Section 9-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Legend: 1. Input tubing from cuvette washer 2. Output tubing to the high-concentrated waste
Maintenance
6026 Check Syringes and Valves graphic (c 16000)

View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to ensure the syringe, solenoid valves, and their connections do not leak.
Legend: 1. Syringes 2. Solenoid valves
Section 9-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. Solenoid valve connections
6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip graphic (c 16000)

View this monthly maintenance procedure graphic(s) to locate the ICT drain tip.
Section 9-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic (c 16000)

Section 9-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. Cuvette segment alignment tool target 2. Sample carousel calibration target 3. Carrier calibration tool target 4. Sample wash cup calibration target (to the right of the wash cup)

Section 9-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. R1 wash cup calibration targets 2. Cuvette segment alignment tool target 3. R1 reagent supply center inner segment calibration target 4. R1 reagent supply center outer segment calibration target

Section 9-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. R1 reagent supply center inner segment calibration target 2. R2 reagent supply center outer segment calibration target 3. R2 wash cup calibration targets 4. Cuvette segment alignment tool target
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules maintenance categories

Maintenance procedures for an i System processing module(s) are grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are available in the following categories: Daily maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 9-63 Weekly maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 9-63 As-needed maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 9-65
Section 9-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Daily maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

Daily maintenance is required on the processing module only. Perform the 6041 Daily maintenance procedure daily. To perform this maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6041 Daily Maintenance WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this daily maintenance procedure to: Clean and condition the sample pipettor probe Clean the probes, temperature tubing and sensors, and vacuum vessels in wash zone 1 and 2 Mix the microparticle bottles on the reagent carousel
Materials needed Maintenance cleaning bottle ARCHITECT Probe Conditioning Solution 0.5% sodium hypochlorite Required module status Warming or Ready
NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13.
Weekly maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

Weekly maintenance for an ARCHITECT i System is required on the processing module only. Perform these procedures weekly: 6012 Air Filter Cleaning, page 9-64 6014 Pipettor Probe Cleaning, page 9-64 6015 WZ Probe Cleaning - Manual, page 9-64
Section 9-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6012 Air Filter Cleaning Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to manually remove dust build-up from the air filters. Since the filter must be reinstalled dry, it is recommended you rotate between two filters to improve efficiency.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Air filters Tap water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6014 Pipettor Probe Cleaning WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean the outside of the pipettor probes to remove salt buildup.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Wash bottle with deionized water Cotton swabs Required module status Warming or Ready
6015 WZ Probe Cleaning - Manual WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Perform this weekly maintenance procedure to clean the outside of the wash zone probes and wash manifold to remove salt buildup.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Wash bottle with deionized water Cotton swabs Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
As-needed maintenance description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

Perform the recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on an i System during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine operation when problems are observed. Perform these procedures as needed: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2133 Air Flush, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 3520 Temperature Status, page 9-70 3530 Temperature Check - Manual, page 9-71 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to: Set sample probe positioning for all positions required for aspirating and dispensing specimens during processing Determine probe straightness Move the sample and STAT pipettor probes over the LAS track allowing you to observe probe positioning (i 2000SR LAS)
For the associated graphic, see 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-72.
Estimated time 7 minutes Materials needed Lint-free tissue Deionized water Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. RSH/SSH: Sample carrier Carrier calibration tool Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
i 2000 LAS:
LAS sample carousel LAS carousel calibration tool
i 2000SR LAS:
Pipettor calibration tool SH bar code tool
Section 9-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to: Set R1 probe positioning for all positions required for aspirating and dispensing reagents with the R1 pipettor during processing Determine probe straightness
For the associated graphic, see 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-73.
Estimated time 7 minutes Materials needed Cotton swab Deionized water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to: Set R2 probe positioning for all positions required for aspirating and dispensing reagents with the R2 pipettor during processing Determine probe straightness
For the associated graphic, see 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-74.
Estimated time 7 minutes Materials needed Cotton swab Deionized water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 9-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module) WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to: Set STAT probe positioning for all positions required for aspirating and dispensing reagents with the STAT pipettor during processing Determine probe straightness Move the sample and STAT pipettor probes over the LAS track allowing you to observe probe positioning (i 2000SR LAS)
For the associated graphic, see 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-75.
Estimated time 7 minutes Materials needed Lint-free tissue Deionized water Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. RSH: Sample carrier Carrier calibration tool Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
i 2000SR LAS:
Pipettor calibration tool SH bar code tool
Section 9-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
2130 Flush Fluids CAUTION: Chemical Hazard. This activity presents a chemical-related hazard. See Chemical hazards, page 8-9.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush wash buffer, Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions. NOTE: To flush wash buffer, inventory status must be greater than 50%. To verify sufficient wash buffer, see Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32.
Estimated time 5 minutes NOTE: Performing this procedure does not reset the clock for the automatic flush. Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
2133 Air Flush Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to flush the wash buffer, trigger, and pre-trigger lines with air.
Wash buffer transfer Warming or Ready tubing Wash buffer reservoir (empty)
2151 Prime Wash Zones Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to prime the wash zones by dispensing 100 L wash buffer into three RVs in both wash zone 1 and wash zone 2.
Section 9-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions by dispensing 300 L pre-trigger and 100 L trigger into two RVs at the pre-trigger/trigger manifold.
2185 Wash Buffer Unload Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to unload wash buffer from a processing module to an external container.
Wash buffer transfer Stopped, Warming, or tubing Ready Wash buffer reservoir (empty)
3520 Temperature Status Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to check the temperature status of the system under the following conditions: Taking temperature measurements required by your laboratory Troubleshooting certain error codes Starting up the system after a long term shutdown
Temperature status of the following system components is checked and displayed: Processing path Pre-Trigger Solution Trigger Solution Wash zones Reagent cooler
Estimated time 1 minute
Section 9-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
3530 Temperature Check - Manual Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to measure the temperature of the system when your laboratory requires external temperature measurement. RVs containing wash buffer are equilibrated in each of the six (6) process path zones during this procedure. In addition, tap water in the WZ probe maintenance water bottle is placed in the reagent cooler. When instructed, insert a thermometer probe to measure the temperature.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed External thermometer WZ probe maintenance water bottle NOTE: An external thermometer must be purchased separately to perform the temperature check. Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the inside and outside of the probes in wash zones 1 and 2 with sodium hypochlorite.
Estimated time 35 minutes Materials needed WZ probe maintenance water bottle Maintenance cleaning bottle Tap water or saline 0.25% sodium hypochlorite Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
NOTE: For information on diluting sodium hypochlorite, see Decontamination procedure requirements, page 8-13
Section 9-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules associated maintenance graphics

Maintenance procedure instructions are located in the INSTRUCTIONS box on the Maintenance Perform window. Occasionally graphics are required to illustrate a procedure, but they cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box. The following graphics are associated with i System processing module maintenance: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-72 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-73 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-74 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic, page 9-75
1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration graphic

Section 9-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. Calibration target, position 1 2. Calibration target, position 24 3. Sample wash station calibration target 4. Carrier calibration tool target
1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration graphic

Section 9-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. R1 wash station calibration target 2. Calibration target, position 2 3. Reagent carousel targets
1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration graphic

Section 9-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. R2 wash station calibration target 2. Calibration target, position 71 3. Reagent carousel targets (For i 2000, only the inner target is cleaned.) 4. Calibration target, position 48 (i 2000SR)
1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration graphic

Section 9-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Legend: 1. Calibration target, position 47 located outside the process path between the RV transport and the STAT vortexer (VTXST) 2. STAT wash station calibration target 3. Carrier calibration tool target
RSH maintenance categories

Maintenance procedures for the RSH (robotic sample handler) are grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are available in the following category: As-needed maintenance description (RSH), page 9-77
Section 9-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Service and maintenance Section 9 As-needed maintenance description (RSH)

Perform these recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on the RSH (robotic sample handler) during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine operation when problems are observed: 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77 6311 RSH Cleaning, page 9-77 Maintenance
To perform this maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 1119 Transport Calibration WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to align the carrier transport position with the bays and carrier positions.
6311 RSH Cleaning WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the tray bays, priority sections, carrier transport arm, carrier transport guard, and carrier positioner.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed 0.1% sodium hypochlorite DI water Cotton swabs Lint-free tissue Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 9-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
RSH associated maintenance graphics

Maintenance procedure instructions are located in the INSTRUCTIONS box on the Maintenance Perform window. Occasionally graphics are required to illustrate a procedure, but they cannot display in the INSTRUCTIONS box. The following graphic is associated with RSH (robotic sample handler) maintenance: 6311 RSH Cleaning graphics, page 9-78
6311 RSH Cleaning graphics

View these as-needed maintenance graphics to clean the carrier transport and/or carrier positioner(s)
Legend: 1. Transport arm 2. Transport guard
Section 9-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Legend: 1. Carrier positioner
SSH maintenance categories

Maintenance procedures for the SSH (standard sample handler) are grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are available in the following category: As-needed maintenance description (SSH), page 9-79
As-needed maintenance description (SSH)

Perform these recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on the SSH (standard sample handler) during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine operation when problems are observed: 6010 Load Queue Cleaning, page 9-79 6017 Unload Queue Cleaning, page 9-80 6020 Processing Queue Cleaning, page 9-80
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6010 Load Queue Cleaning WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Section 9-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the surfaces of the load queue conveyor belt.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed 0.1% sodium hypochlorite Lint-free tissue or gauze Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6017 Unload Queue Cleaning WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the surfaces of the unload queue conveyor belt.
6020 Processing Queue Cleaning WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the surfaces of the processing queue conveyor belt.
LAS carousel sample handler maintenance categories (i 2000)

Maintenance procedures for the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler are grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen.
Section 9-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Procedures are available in the following category: As-needed maintenance description (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 9-81 Maintenance
As-needed maintenance description (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)

Perform these recommended as-needed maintenance procedures on the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler during troubleshooting/diagnostics or during routine operation when problems are observed: 1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration, page 9-81 6022 LAS Carousel Cleaning, page 9-81
To perform a maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to allow you to visually align the i 2000 sample pipettor with the LAS (laboratory automation system) track.
Estimated time Minutes variable Materials needed LAS pipettor calibration tool SH bar code tool Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6022 LAS Carousel Cleaning WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to clean the i 2000 LAS (laboratory automation system) sample carousel.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed 0.1% sodium hypochlorite LAS carousel Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 9-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance
Section 9
SCC maintenance categories

Maintenance procedures for the SCC (system control center) are grouped by category (tab) on the Maintenance screen. Procedures are available for the following category: As-needed maintenance description (SCC), page 9-82
As-needed maintenance description (SCC)

Perform the 6038 External Decontamination as-needed maintenance procedure on the SCC (system control center) during routine operation when problems are observed. To perform this maintenance procedure, see Perform a maintenance procedure, page 9-6. 6038 External Decontamination WARNING: Potential Biohazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material. See Biological hazards, page 8-7.
Perform this as-needed maintenance procedure to decontaminate the following external surfaces: Supply and pump center (c System) Supply and waste center (i System) Sample handler accessories SCC (system control center) PM (processing module) external surface High-concentration waste bottle (c System) ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory (i System)
Materials needed Detergent Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
0.1% sodium NOTE: Time above hypochlorite reflects the time Lint-free tissue or required to apply the gauze appropriate disinfectant only.
Section 9-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Component replacement
Some system components may need to be replaced due to normal wear from daily operations. Your laboratory is responsible for maintaining an adequate supply of replacement parts. List numbers are provided in the procedures for guidance only and are subject to change. Contact your Abbott representative for the most current list numbers. Component replacement topics include: c 8000 component replacement, page 9-83 c 16000 component replacement, page 9-162 i 2000/i 2000SR component replacement, page 9-237 SCC component replacement, page 9-274
c 8000 component replacement

Component replacement for the c 8000 includes: ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center component replacement, page 9-83 ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump components replacement, page 9-124
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center component replacement

To replace processing center components, see: Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95 Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000), page 9-99 Replace a cuvette (c 8000), page 9-104 Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000), page 9-108 Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111 Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 Replace the sample carousel clip (c 8000), page 9-122
Section 9-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
See ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components, page 9-84, for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components

The following illustration shows the locations of the processing center components. Use this illustration when performing component replacement procedures. Figure 9.10: ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center map
Legend: 1. Sample carousel and cover 2. Sample pipettor 3. Reaction carousel 4. Lamp 5. Mixer unit 6. Cuvette washer 7. ICT unit 8. Reagent supply center 2 and cover 9. Reagent 2 pipettor 10. Reagent 2 onboard solution area 11. Reagent supply center 1 and cover 12. Reagent 1 pipettor 13. Reagent 1 onboard solution area
Section 9-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Service and maintenance Section 9 Replace the sample probe (c 8000)

NOTE: It is recommended that you record and track the date of sample probe installation to ensure you do not use the probe for longer than one year. Replacing the sample probe consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for sample probe removal, page 9-86 Remove the sample probe, page 9-86 Component replacement
Replacement Install the sample probe, page 9-87 Prepare for operation, page 9-88
Verification Calibrate the sample pipettor, page 9-88

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 20 minutes Slotted screwdriver Absorbent towel LN 01G48-03 - Sample probe LN 02J51-01 - Reagent/sample probe screw (optional)
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required Replacement parts
Section 9-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal

Steps 1. Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706. 2. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the sample pipettor over the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Remove the sample probe

Steps 1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2]. 2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample carousel area under the probe tip. 3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw [3]. 4. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand until the probe releases from the sample pipettor. 5. Loosen, do not remove, the screw [4] holding the sample probe grounding wire [5] in place. 6. Detach the grounding wire. 7. Gently disconnect the tubing [6] from the top of the probe [7]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the sample probe

Steps 1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new sample probe [2]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe. If the tubing is loose or if the probe has been replaced several times using the same tubing, it is recommended that you replace the sample probe tubing. 2. Position the sample probe on the alignment pins [3] and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the plate on the sample pipettor. 3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old sample probe and insert it into the new sample probe. Finger-tighten the screw [5] to secure the probe in place. 4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the slotted screwdriver. 5. Attach the new sample probe grounding wire [6] and tighten the screw [7]. 6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the sample pipettor to the home position. 7. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Prepare for operation

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. 2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the sample probe tubing and connections for leaks. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor cover. 4. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor shaft [2] until it snaps into place. The pipettor cover must be completely seated to ensure correct liquid level sense operation. 5. Reinstall the sample carousel (c System), page 10-707. Graphic / reference
Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. 2. Run quality control to verify operation. Graphic / reference
Replace reagent probes (c 8000)

Replacing the reagent probe(s) consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for reagent probe removal, page 9-89 Remove the reagent probe, page 9-90
Replacement Install the reagent probe, page 9-91 Prepare for operation, page 9-92
Verification
Section 9-88
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibrate the Reagent pipettor, page 9-92

The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 20 minutes Slotted screwdriver Absorbent towel LN 01G47-03 - Reagent probe LN 02J51-01 - Reagent/sample probe screw (optional)
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools required Replacement parts
Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal

Steps 1. Locate the reagent pipettor. NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components, page 9-84, for pipettor locations. Access the R1 pipettor from the front of the system. Access the R2 pipettor from the back of the system. 2. Remove the rack and the onboard solutions from the appropriate onboard solution area. 3. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor over the onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-89
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the reagent probe

Steps 1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover by gently squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the locking tabs, and lifting the pipettor cover [2]. 2. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip. 3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw [3]. 4. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand until the probe releases from the reagent pipettor. 5. Loosen, do not remove, the screw [4] holding the reagent probe grounding wire [5] in place. 6. Detach the grounding wire. 7. Gently disconnect the tubing [6] from the top of the probe [7]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-90
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the reagent probe

Steps 1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new reagent probe [2]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the reagent probe. If the tubing is loose or if the probe has been replaced several times using the same tubing, it is recommended that you replace the reagent probe tubing. 2. Position the new reagent probe [2] on the alignment pins [3] and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the plate on the reagent pipettor. 3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old reagent probe and insert it into the new reagent probe. Fingertighten the screw [5] to secure the probe in place. 4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the slotted screwdriver. 5. Attach the new reagent probe grounding wire [6] and tighten the screw [7]. 6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the reagent probe to the home position. 7. Remove the absorbent towel from the onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-91
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. 2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor cover. 4. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor shaft [2] until it snaps into place. The pipettor cover must be completely seated to ensure correct liquid level sense operation. 5. Replace the rack and onboard solutions to the appropriate onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Verification
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor

Steps 1. Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance procedure: 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37 2. Run quality control to verify performance. Graphic / reference
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000)

Replacing the sample probe tubing consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for sample probe tubing removal, page 9-93 Remove the sample probe tubing, page 9-94
Replacement Install the sample probe tubing, page 9-94 Prepare for operation, page 9-95
Section 9-92
Verification
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further verification is required.

Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required Replacement parts The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent towel LN 01G48-02 - Sample probe tubing
Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal

Steps 1. Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706 2. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the sample pipettor over the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-93
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the sample probe tubing

Steps 1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2]. 2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample carousel area under the probe tip. 3. Unscrew the tubing from the probe tubing connector [3]. Ensure the black o-ring inside the tubing connector stays in place. 4. Gently disconnect the tubing [4] from the top of the probe [5]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing

Steps 1. Attach the end of the new tubing [1] to the top of the sample probe [2]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe. 2. Verify the black o-ring is inside the probe tubing connector [3]. 3. Screw the opposite end of the tubing [4] into the tubing connector [3]. 4. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the sample pipettor to the home position. 5. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-94
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification
Steps Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further verification is required. Graphic / reference
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000)

Replacing the reagent probe tubing consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal, page 9-96 Remove the reagent probe tubing, page 9-97
Replacement Install the reagent probe tubing, page 9-98 Prepare for operation, page 9-99
Verification
Section 9-95
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent towel LN 01G47-02 - Reagent probe tubing
Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal

Steps 1. Locate the reagent pipettor. NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 8000 processing center components, page 9-84, for pipettor locations. Access the R1 pipettor from the front of the system. Access the R2 pipettor from the back of the system. 2. Remove the rack and the onboard solutions from the appropriate onboard solution area. 3. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor over the onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-96
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the reagent probe tubing
Steps 1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover by gently squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2]. 2. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip. 3. Gently disconnect the tubing [3] from the top of the probe [4]. 4. Gently disconnect the metal connector [5] from the reagent pipettor tubing [6]. Ensure the protective sleeve remains on the reagent pipettor tubing. Graphic / reference
Section 9-97
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing

Steps 1. Attach the end of the new tubing and metal connector [1] to the reagent pipettor tubing [2]. The tubing should be positioned as shown, with the metal connector on the left side and routed over the top of the loop. 2. Verify the metal connector [3] is inserted in the reagent pipettor tubing [4] and not just in the protective sleeve. 3. Attach the other end of the tubing [5] to the reagent probe [6]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The tubing should fit firmly in the reagent probe. 4. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the reagent pipettor to the home position. 5. Remove the absorbent towel from the onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-98
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. 2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor cover. 4. Press down on the end of the cover over the pipettor shaft [2] until it snaps into place.The cover must be completely seated to ensure correct liquid level sense operation. 5. Replace the rack and onboard solutions in the appropriate onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 8000)

Replacing the lamp or lamp plate consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-100 Remove the covers, page 9-101 Remove the terminal cable connections, page 9-101 Remove the lamp, page 9-102
Replacement Install the lamp plate and lamp, page 9-102 Install the terminal cables, page 9-103 Install the processing module cover, page 9-103 Prepare for operation, page 9-103
Verification
Section 9-99
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Run quality control, page 9-103
Power off the processing module. 15 minutes NOTE: Time does not include lamp warm up (30 minutes)
Prerequisite Estimated time required
Tools/materials required Replacement parts
Phillips screwdriver Gloves LN 09D45-02 - Lamp
WARNING: Hot Surface. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to hot surfaces. See Hot objects, page 8-21.
Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps IMPORTANT: Never remove the lamp or lamp plate with the processing module powered on. Power off the processing module by using the main circuit breaker located at the rear of the module. Graphic / reference
Section 9-100
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the covers
Steps WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to cool. NOTE: The lamp can be accessed from the back of the processing module. 1. Open the rear processing module cover. Locate the reaction carousel rear cover [1] located between the reagent 2 supply center [2] and the reaction carousel [3]. 2. Unscrew the thumbscrews [4] securing the cover in place and remove the cover. Graphic / reference
Remove the terminal cable connections

Steps 1. Locate the terminal block [1]. 2. Remove the transparent cover [2] from the terminal block by grasping both ends and lifting up. 3. Using the Phillips screwdriver, completely loosen the two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the terminal block. 4. Raise the screws [5] and lower the lamp cables [4] completely to allow you to disengage the cables from the bottom of the screws. Graphic / reference
Section 9-101
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the lamp

Steps WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to cool. 1. Completely loosen the top thumbscrew [1] on the lamp plate [2] in the housing. 2. Lift the lamp plate and loosen the other thumbscrew [3] to remove the lamp from the plate. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil on the glass surface of the lamp shortens the lamp life. The glass surface may be cleaned with ethanol, if necessary. 1. Insert the replacement lamp [1] fitting the pins [2] into the pin holes [3] on the lamp plate [4]. 2. Verify the filament [5] is perpendicular to the lamp plate [4]. 3. Tighten the thumbscrew [6] on the lamp plate while the lamp is fully inserted into the pin holes. 4. Insert the lamp assembly into the housing [7], pressing it against the leaf spring [8], and down into the housing. Ensure the lamp assembly is properly seated into the housing. 5. Verify the lamp cables [9] are through the slot behind the lamp and are not pinched by the lamp plate. 6. Tighten the thumbscrew [10] to secure the lamp in place. Graphic / reference
Section 9-102
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the terminal cables
Steps 1. Raise the screws [1] and insert the cables [2] under the screws. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the terminal block. 3. Wrap excess lamp cables and secure with white plastic clamp [5]. 4. Replace the transparent cover [6] on the terminal block. 5. Power on the processing module. The system control center power MUST be on prior to turning on the processing module to ensure proper initialization. 6. Check for stray light around lamp housing cover. Graphic / reference
Install the processing module cover

Steps 1. Replace the reaction carousel rear cover. 2. Close the rear processing module cover. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, to change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready. NOTE: The lamp must warm up 30 minutes prior to running assays. 2. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29, to document the lamp change in the Maintenance log. Graphic / reference
Verification
Run quality control

Steps Run quality control to verify performance. Graphic / reference
Section 9-103
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replace a cuvette (c 8000)

Replacing a cuvette consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove cuvette segment, page 9-105 Clean replacement cuvette, page 9-105 Remove the individual cuvette, page 9-106
Replacement Install the individual cuvette, page 9-107 Reinstall the cuvette segment, page 9-108
Verification Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 9-108
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Detergent A Lint-free absorbent towel Cotton swabs Slotted screwdriver Reagent Grade Type II water Container large enough to accommodate new cuvettes Gloves
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required
Replacement parts
LN 01G46-02 - Cuvette
Section 9-104
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Remove cuvette segment

Steps 1. Determine the cuvette number requiring replacement. 2. Identify the location of the cuvette on the reaction carousel. 3. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to rotate the carousel so that the cuvette to be replaced is at the front of the module. 4. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the two screws [1] located on the top of the cuvette segment until the segment can be removed from the reaction carousel. 5. Inspect all cuvettes in the segment and replace if damaged 6. Set the cuvette segment aside on a lint-free absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Clean replacement cuvette

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical reads. 1. Remove the new cuvette from the shipping container and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel. 2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the inside and outside of the new cuvette. 3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough Reagent Grade Type II water to completely submerge the new cuvette [2]. 4. Rinse the cuvette in the water to remove the Detergent A and drain any excess water from the cuvette. Graphic / reference
Section 9-105
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the individual cuvette

Steps NOTE: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical reads. 1. Remove the slotted screws [1] from the segment. 2. Gently press down on each tab [2] of the cuvette retaining cover [3] to separate the cover from the cuvette segment assembly [4]. 3. Grasp the cuvette segment with one hand and gently grasp the desired cuvette [5] with the other hand. Push up on the cuvette [5]. 4. Grasp the cuvette gently and once a portion of the cuvette is positioned above the top surface of the segment, pull it straight out. Graphic / reference
Section 9-106
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the individual cuvette

Steps 1. Insert the new cuvette [1] into the top of the cuvette segment. 2. Gently push the cuvette down while ensuring that it is guided into the rectangle-shaped depression [2] in the bottom of the cuvette segment. When the cuvette is correctly seated, the top of the cuvette is just below the top surface of the cuvette segment. 3. Slide the cuvette retaining cover onto the cuvette segment. 4. Verify each tab on the cuvette retaining cover is inserted into the holes on the top of the cuvette segment. 5. Position the clips [3] on the back of the cuvette retaining cover under the back edge of the cuvette segment [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-107
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Reinstall the cuvette segment

Steps 1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction carousel alignment pins [2]. 2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] into the segment. 3. Gently tighten the screws with the slotted screwdriver. Graphic / reference
Verification
Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move

Steps Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to verify the cuvette segment is installed properly. Graphic / reference
Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000)

Replacing a cuvette segment consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove cuvette segment, page 9-109 Clean replacement cuvette segment, page 9-110
Replacement Install the cuvette segment, page 9-111
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes
Section 9-108
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Tools/materials required
Detergent A Lint-free absorbent towel Cotton swabs Slotted screwdriver Reagent Grade Type II water Container large enough to accommodate new cuvettes Gloves
Replacement parts
LN 01G46-01 - Cuvette segment
Removal

Steps 1. Determine the cuvette segment requiring replacement. 2. Identify the location of the cuvette segment on the reaction carousel. 3. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to rotate the carousel so that the appropriate cuvette segment is at the front of the module. 4. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the two screws [1] located on the top of the cuvette segment until the segment can be removed from the reaction carousel. 5. Dispose of the cuvette segment. Graphic / reference
Section 9-109
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Clean replacement cuvette segment

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical reads. 1. Remove the new cuvette segment from the shipping container and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel. 2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the inside and outside of all of the cuvettes in the new cuvette segment. 3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough Reagent Grade Type II water to completely submerge the new cuvette segment [2]. 4. Rinse the cuvette segment in the water to remove the Detergent A and drain any excess water from the cuvettes. 5. Dry the top of the cuvette segment [3], especially the slotted edges [4], to remove any remaining water. Graphic / reference
Section 9-110
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the cuvette segment

Steps 1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction carousel alignment pins [2]. 2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] on the segment. 3. Gently tighten the screws with a slotted screwdriver. Graphic / reference
Verification

Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000)

Replacing the cuvette dry tip consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the cuvette washer assembly, page 9-112 Remove the cuvette dry tip, page 9-113
Replacement Install the cuvette dry tip and cuvette washer assembly, page 9-113 Prepare for operation, page 9-114
Verification
Section 9-111
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Wash the cuvettes, page 9-114
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Metric ruler Gloves LN 09D51-02 - Cuvette dry tip
Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly

Steps 1. Open the rear processing module cover. 2. Remove the cuvette washer cover [1] by unscrewing the thumbscrew [2]. 3. Loosen the black knurled knob [3] to the left of the cuvette washer until the cuvette washer assembly [4] can be lifted from the mounting bracket [5]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the cuvette dry tip
Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand interferes with the proper drying function of the tip. 1. Lift the cuvette washer assembly and rotate it so you can easily access the white cuvette dry tip. NOTE: The cuvette washer nozzles are attached to the black nozzle mounting plate. You do not need to remove any of the screws securing the wash nozzles to the mounting plate. 2. Remove the cuvette dry tip [1] by pulling it off the metal nozzle [2]. 3. Discard the used tip. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tip and cuvette washer assembly

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand interferes with the proper drying function of the tip. 1. Gently install the new cuvette dry tip, taking care to orient it properly. NOTE: The cuvette dry tip and the cuvette are both rectangular in shape. Install the dry tip so it fits into the cuvette. 2. Position the bottom of the cuvette dry tip 61 0.5 mm from the underside of the cuvette washer assembly [1]. 3. Position the cuvette washer assembly [2] on the alignment pins [3], and then tighten the black knurled knob [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-113
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Initiate Fuses/Motors diagnostic procedure 5142 Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 to home the cuvette washer assembly and reaction carousel. 2. Verify the rectangular orientation and alignment of the cuvette dry tip with the cuvette. NOTE: Wear gloves if adjustment to the cuvette dry tip is required. Residual oil from an ungloved hand interferes with the proper drying function of the tip. 3. Select L1 (down) on the processing module keypad or the Diagnostic perform window to move the washer assembly down. 4. Verify the alignment of the cuvette dry tip is correct and that it moves smoothly into the cuvettes. 5. Select L1 (up) to move the washer assembly up. 6. Select L4 (exit) to end the procedure. 7. Select Done on the Diagnostic perform window to complete the procedure. 8. Replace the cuvette wash cover [1], and then tighten the thumbscrew [2]. Graphic / reference
Verification
Wash the cuvettes

Steps Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40. Graphic / reference
Replace the mixer (c 8000)

Replacing the mixer consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the mixer, page 9-115
Replacement Install the mixer, page 9-116
Verification
Section 9-114
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 9-116
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes None LN 09D59-02 - Mixer
Removal
Remove the mixer

Steps 1. Open the rear processing module cover. 2. Locate the appropriate mixer. 3. Unplug the cable [1] by pinching the white connector [2]. 4. Loosen the black thumbscrew [3] on the top of the mixer assembly. 5. Remove the mixer [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-115
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the mixer

Steps 1. Orient the new mixer assembly [1] so that the flat side faces away from the mixer arm. 2. Align the positioning pins [2] on the top of the mixer with the holes on the mixer arm. Tighten the black thumbscrew [3] until the top of the mixer is flush with the mixer arm. 3. Attach the cable connector to the white connector [4] on the bottom of the mixer arm. NOTE: This connector is keyed and only goes in one way. 4. Fold the excess cable and fit it into the notch [5]. Graphic / reference
Verification
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test

Steps Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 10-659, to verify mixer function. Graphic / reference
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000)

Replacing the ICT module or probe consists of the following procedures: Removal
Section 9-116
Remove the covers, page 9-118 Remove the ICT module and probe, page 9-119
Replacement
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the ICT module and probe, page 9-121 Prepare for operation, page 9-122
Verification Calibrate ICT assays, page 9-122

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes NA LN 09D63-03 - ICT probe LN 09D28-03 - ICT module LN 09F93-02 - ICT o-ring (optional)
Section 9-117
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Remove the covers

Steps 1. Lift the rear cover on the processing module to access the ICT module and probe. 2. Locate the ICT unit. 3. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] and lift the cover [2] off the ICT unit. 4. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews [3] that secure the black plate [4] in place. 5. Remove the black plate [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-118
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the ICT module and probe
Steps 1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] on the side of the ICT holder [2] until the ICT module [3] can be lifted up. 2. Disconnect the black electrical connector [4] from the side of the module by pulling it straight out. 3. Verify the connector is completely free from the module. 4. Lift the ICT module [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module clear the ICT holder [2]. IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the probe, do not lift the ICT module and probe all the way out of the ICT holder. 5. Gently unscrew the ICT module [3], rotating it clockwise, to free it from the top connector [5]. 6. Lift the ICT module and probe straight up out of the ICT holder. 7. Unscrew the ICT probe holder [6] from the ICT module. 8. Inspect the ports of the ICT module. The black o-rings [7] MUST be present. IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings could affect patient results. 9. Discard the ICT module if replacing; otherwise, set it aside for use with the new ICT probe. 10.Remove the ICT probe [8] from the probe holder. 11.Discard the probe if replacing; otherwise set it aside for use with the new ICT module. Graphic / reference
Section 9-119
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Section 9-120
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the ICT module and probe
Steps 1. Remove the ICT module from the box, if replacing the ICT module. 2. Record the expiration date found on the ICT module box prior to discarding the box. It is recommended that you record and track this date to ensure you do not use the module on the c 8000 System beyond this date. Once you install the ICT module on the processing module, it is warranted for 15,000 samples or two months, whichever occurs first. 3. Disconnect and discard the plastic tubing attached to both ends of the ICT module. 4. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The black o-rings [1] MUST be present. IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings could affect patient results. 5. Align the ICT module so that the gap [2] between the side connectors is on top and the label [3] is right-side up. 6. Place the ICT probe [4] into the probe holder [5]. 7. Attach the probe holder and probe to the bottom of the ICT module (finger-tighten only). IMPORTANT: The o-rings may twist and obstruct the flow through the ICT module if this connection is overtightened. 8. Insert the ICT module [1] with the probe [2] into the ICT holder [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module are just above the top of the ICT holder [3]. 9. Rotate the ICT module [1] counterclockwise (finger-tighten only) to reattach the ICT module to the top port [4] and to the connector [5]. 10.Allow the ICT module [1] to seat fully down into the ICT holder [3] so that the connectors are aligned with the slot [6] in the ICT holder [3]. 11.Gently reconnect the black electrical connector [7] to the ICT module connectors. Ensure the ICT module is completely plugged into the connector. 12.Hold down the ICT module while tightening the side thumbscrew [8] until secure. Do not overtighten. The ICT module could be damaged.
Graphic / reference
Section 9-121
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41. 2. Inspect the tubing from the ICT module for bubbles. 3. Inspect the ICT probe to ensure it does not drip. If you observe bubbles or drips, see Processing module observed problems (c System), page 10-547. 4. Reattach the black plate [1] by securing it with the two thumbscrews [2] on the top. 5. Reattach the ICT unit cover [3] and tighten the thumbscrew [4] to secure. Graphic / reference
Verification
Calibrate ICT assays

Steps 1. Calibrate ICT assays. 2. Run quality control samples to verify calibration. Graphic / reference
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 8000)

Replacing the sample carousel clip consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the sample carousel clip, page 9-123
Replacement Replace the sample carousel clip, page 9-124
Verification
Section 9-122
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Load a sample tube, page 9-124
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Phillips screwdriver LN 04J45-01 - Sample carousel clip
Removal
Remove the sample carousel clip

Steps 1. Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706, from the processing module, and then remove any patient samples. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw [1] securing the sample carousel clip [2] in place. 3. Remove and discard the clip. Graphic / reference
Section 9-123
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Replace the sample carousel clip

Steps 1. Insert the new sample carousel clip [1] in the sample carousel using the four square alignment holes [2] on the bottom of the sample carousel to seat the clip in position. NOTE: The sample carousel clip only fits one way in the sample carousel. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to secure the clip to the bottom of the sample carousel using the new screw [3] provided. 3. Place the sample carousel on the processing module, ensuring the alignment holes fit over the alignment pins. Graphic / reference
Verification
Load a sample tube

Steps Load a sample tube in the sample carousel position where the carousel clip was replaced to verify proper installation of the clip. Graphic / reference
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump components replacement

You may need to replace certain supply and pump components due to normal wear from daily operations. The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions on replacing these components: Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 8000), page 9-134 Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000), page 9-136 Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-139
Section 9-124
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component), page 9-158 Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-160 See ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components, page 9-125, for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components

The following illustration shows the locations of the supply and pump center components. Use this illustration when performing maintenance and component replacement procedures. Figure 9.11: ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center
Legend: 1. ICT reference pump 2. Wash solution pump 3. Bulk solutions 4. Sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe drives
Section 9-125
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
5. ICT aspiration pump 6. Cuvette wash pump 7. Probe wash pump 8. High-concentration waste pump
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000)

Replacing the 1 mL syringes on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration pump, and wash solution pump consists of the following procedures. Removal Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced, page 9-127 Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-128 Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe, page 9-128
Replacement Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 9-129 Prepare for operation, page 9-129
Verification Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further verification is required. NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the 1 mL syringes in all three pumps.
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 20 minutes Absorbent towels LN 09D41-02 - 1 mL syringe NOTE: The same 1 mL syringe is used for the ICT reference pump, the ICT aspiration pump, and the wash solution pump.
Section 9-126
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. Open the pump center door. 2. Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced: ICT reference pump [1] Wash solution pump [2] ICT aspiration pump [3] Graphic / reference
Section 9-127
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe

Steps 1. Remove the clear plunger shield [1] by removing the two black knobs [2]. 2. Pull the 1 mL syringe [3] forward to remove it from the syringe holder. Graphic / reference
Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe

Steps 1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Unscrew the syringe assembly [1] from the check valve [2]. 3. Screw the new syringe assembly [1] onto the check valve [2]. NOTE: Be sure to replace the syringe and plunger (components of the syringe assembly) as a pair. Graphic / reference
Section 9-128
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield

Steps 1. Reinstall the syringe [1]. 2. Verify the plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3]. 3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and secure it with the black knobs [5]. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures to remove any air that may be present: 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, for the ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, for the wash solution pump 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. Graphic / reference
Verification
Section 9-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replace check valves (c 8000)

Replacing the check valves on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration pump, or wash solution pump consists of the following procedures. Removal Locate the check valve to be replaced, page 9-131 Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-131 Remove the check valve tubing, page 9-132
Replacement Replace the check valve, page 9-132 Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 9-133 Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 9-133 Prepare for operation, page 9-134
Verification Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further verification is required.
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent towel LN 09D35-02 - ICT Reference or ICT Aspiration Check Valve LN 09D34-02 - Wash Solution Check Valve NOTE: The ICT reference and aspiration pumps use the same list number. The wash solution pump uses a different list number. Ensure the correct part is used.
Section 9-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced

Steps 1. Open the supply center and pump center doors. 2. Locate the check valve to be replaced: ICT reference pump [1] Wash solution pump [2] ICT aspiration pump [3] Graphic / reference

Section 9-131
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the check valve tubing

Steps 1. Place absorbent towels under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Disconnect the top [1] and side [2] tubing from the check valve [3]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Replace the check valve

Steps 1. Unscrew the syringe body [1] from the check valve [2]. 2. Install the new check valve onto the syringe, and finger-tighten. Graphic / reference
Section 9-132
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reinstall the check valve tubing
Steps Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check valve [3]. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Reinstall the 1 mL syringe [1]. 2. Verify the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3]. 3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and tighten the black knobs [5] finger-tight. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-133
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures to remove any air that may be present: 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, for the ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, for the wash solution pump 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33, to document the ICT aspiration check valve replacement in the Maintenance log. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 8000)

Replacing the ICT reference solution filter consists of the following procedures: Removal Remove the ICT reference solution tubing, page 9-135 Remove the ICT reference solution filter, page 9-135
Replacement Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing, page 9-136
Verification Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155, page 9-136

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Absorbent towels LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution line filter
Section 9-134
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. The ICT reference solution filter is located at the end of the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle [1]. 2. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference solution bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Remove the ICT reference solution filter

Steps 1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached to the end of the ICT reference solution tubing [2]. 2. Discard the filter into the appropriate waste receptacle. Graphic / reference
Section 9-135
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing

Steps 1. Insert the new ICT reference filter [1] in the tubing connector [2]. 2. Insert the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the bottle. 3. Close the supply center door. Graphic / reference
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39. 2. Observe all connections to ensure there are no leaks. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Run quality control samples to verify performance. Graphic / reference
Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000)

Replacing the wash solution filter consists of the following procedures: Removal Remove the tubing, page 9-137 Remove the wash solution filter, page 9-138
Replacement Replace wash solution filter and tubing, page 9-138
Section 9-136
Verification
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155, page 9-139

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Absorbent towels LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution filter
Removal
Remove the tubing

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. Wash solution filters are located at the end of the tubing in the alkaline [1] and acid [2] wash solution bottles. 2. Remove the tubing from the wash solution bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Section 9-137
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the wash solution filter

Steps 1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached to the end of the wash solution tubing [2]. 2. Discard the filter in the appropriate waste receptacle. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing

Steps 1. Insert the new filter [1] in the tubing connector [2]. 2. Insert the tubing in the appropriate wash solution bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the bottle. 3. Close the supply center door. Graphic / reference
Section 9-138
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification

Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000)
Replacing the wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-141 Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-142 Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block, page 9-143 Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-143 Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-144
Replacement Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-145 Install the syringe plunger, page 9-145 Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield, page 9-146 Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-146 Install the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-147 Prepare for operation, page 9-147
Verification
Section 9-139
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Phillips screwdriver Slotted screwdriver 10 mm wrench Cotton swabs Absorbent towel
Replacement parts
LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring LN 09D37-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #1 LN 09D38-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #2
Section 9-140
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. 2. Locate the wash solution pump. 3. Loosen and remove the black knobs [1] securing the clear outer plunger shield [2]. 4. Remove the shield. Graphic / reference
Section 9-141
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing

Steps 1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Slide the 1 mL syringes [1] out of their drive block; do not disconnect them. 3. Unscrew the left-top grey knurled connection [2] from the top of the syringe block. NOTE: The tubing labeled 2, coming from the instrument, connects to the left-top connection [2]. The tubing labeled 3, coming from the instrument, connects to the right-top connection [3]. Do not interchange the tubing. 4. Unscrew the right-top grey knurled connection [3]. 5. Unscrew the grey knurled connections [4] from the front of the syringe block [5]. NOTE: The tubing coming from the 1 mL syringe on the left connects to the left-front connection. The tubing coming from the 1 mL syringe on the right connects to the right-front connection. Do not interchange the tubing. 6. Ensure the black seals remain in the syringe block when the grey knurled connections are disconnected. Graphic / reference
Section 9-142
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block
Steps 1. Remove the clear inner plunger shield [1] by removing the two Phillips screws [2] securing the shield. 2. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw [3] securing the clear syringe block [4] in place. The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed. 3. Pull the syringe block forward to allow the plungers to clear the syringe drive. 4. Lift the syringe block up to remove it from the module. 5. Identify the syringe needing the new o-ring and seal tips. Graphic / reference
Remove the syringe plunger

Steps 1. Use the 10 mm wrench to loosen the nut [1] securing the syringe plunger [2] on the bottom of the syringe block [3]. 2. Turn the nut by hand, once loosened, until the syringe plunger can be removed from the syringe block. Graphic / reference
Section 9-143
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

Steps The plunger assembly includes the following parts: O-ring [1] IMPORTANT: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe block when removing the plunger assembly. Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] Seal tip 1 [4] Spring [5] Nut [6] Plunger [7] Plunger flange [8] 1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except for spacer) if being replaced: O-ring [1] Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard Seal tip 1 [4] NOTE: Do not remove the spring. 2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab and dry the plunger completely with an absorbent towel if liquid is present. Graphic / reference
Section 9-144
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2

Steps 1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits above the spring, with the open side away from the spring. 2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1. 3. Install the seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer with the open side toward the spacer. 4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of the seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the syringe block. 5. Press lightly to push all the components together. Graphic / reference
Install the syringe plunger

Steps 1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block [1]. 2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into the syringe block until finger-tight. NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the spring, continue to tighten the nut. 3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2] securing the plunger [3]. Do not overtighten. Graphic / reference
Section 9-145
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield
Steps 1. Ensure a black seal remains in each of the tubing ports in the syringe block. 2. Hold the syringe block [1] so that the slotted screw [2] faces you. 3. Align the syringe block to the pins [3] on the syringe holder, verifying that both plunger flanges [4] are below the U-shaped holders. 4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins and tighten the screw by hand until finger-tight. Secure with a slotted screwdriver. 5. Attach the clear inner plunger shield [5] and tighten the Phillips screws [6]. Graphic / reference
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing

Steps 1. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2 from the 1 mL syringe to the left-front port [1]. 2. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2 coming from the instrument to the left-top port [2]. 3. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 3 from the syringe to the right-front port [3]. 4. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 3 from the instrument to the right-top port [4]. 5. Verify the 1 mL syringe tubing connections did not loosen during the removal and replacement procedure. 6. Reinstall the 1 mL syringes [5] into the syringe holder. 7. Ensure the plunger flange is below the U-shaped holder and that the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder. Graphic / reference
Section 9-146
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the clear outer plunger shield
Steps 1. Attach the clear outer plunger shield [1] and tighten the black knobs [2] until finger-tight. 2. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31, to document wash solution o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 replacement in the Maintenance log. Graphic / reference
Verification
Section 9-147
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000)
Replacing the sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 consists of the following procedures. Removal Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield, page 9-150 Remove the syringe bracket, page 9-150 Remove the syringe block, page 9-151 Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-151 Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-152
Replacement Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-153 Install the syringe plunger, page 9-153 Install the syringe block, page 9-154 Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield, page 9-154 Prepare for operation, page 9-155
Section 9-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Phillips screwdriver Slotted screwdriver 10 mm wrench Cotton swabs Absorbent towel
Replacement parts
LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring LN 09D37-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #1 LN 09D38-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #2 LN 09D53-02 - Reagent syringe o-ring LN 09D39-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #1 LN 09D40-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #2 NOTE: The o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2 for the sample and reagent syringes are different sizes. Be sure to install the correct part in the appropriate syringe.
Section 9-149
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. 2. Locate the appropriate syringe: Sample syringe [1] R1 syringe [2] R2 syringe [3] 3. Remove the two Phillips screws [4] securing the shield. 4. Remove the shield. [5] Graphic / reference
Remove the syringe bracket

Steps Remove the syringe bracket holding the syringe plunger to the drive block by removing the two Phillips screws [1] on the syringe bracket [2]. NOTE: Notice that these screws are shorter than the screws from the clear plunger shield. Do not interchange the two sets of screws. Graphic / reference
Section 9-150
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the syringe block
Steps 1. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw [1] securing the syringe block [2] in place. The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed. 2. Place an absorbent towel under the syringe drive to absorb any liquid. 3. Disconnect the tubing at the top [3] and side [4] of the syringe block by unscrewing the knurled connections. 4. Ensure the black seal remains in the syringe block once the tubing is disconnected. Graphic / reference

Section 9-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps The plunger assembly includes the following parts: O-ring [1] NOTE: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe block when removing the plunger assembly. Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] Seal tip 1 [4] Spring [5] Nut [6] Plunger [7] Plunger flange [8] 1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except for spacer) if being replaced: O-ring [1] Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard Seal tip 1 [4] NOTE: Do not remove the spring. 2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab and dry the plunger completely with an absorbent towel if liquid is present. Graphic / reference
Section 9-152
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement

Steps 1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits above the spring, with the open side away from the spring. 2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1. 3. Install seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer, with the open side toward the spacer. 4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the syringe block. 5. Press lightly to push all the components together. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block [1]. 2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into the syringe block until finger-tight. NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the spring, continue to tighten the nut. 3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2] securing the plunger [3]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-153
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Install the syringe block

Steps 1. Hold the syringe block [1] so that the slotted screw [2] faces you. 2. Ensure the black seals remain in place in each port and reconnect the tubing at the top and side [3] of the syringe block by screwing the knurled connections [3]. 3. Align the syringe block to the pins [4] on the syringe holder, verifying that the plunger flange is above the drive block [5]. Move any tubing out of the way. 4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins and tighten the screw [2] by hand until finger-tight. Secure the screw with a slotted screwdriver. Graphic / reference
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield

Steps 1. Attach the syringe bracket [1] to connect the drive block and syringe plunger. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install the screws [2]. NOTE: Verify the shorter screws are used in the bracket. Do not use the longer screws for the plunger shield. 3. Attach the clear plunger shield [3] by tightening the two (2) Phillips screws [4]. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the syringe drive. Graphic / reference
Section 9-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30, or 6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32, to document sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips in the Maintenance log. NOTE: Only perform this maintenance procedure if you replaced the o-ring and seal tips in both the R1 and R2 syringes. Graphic / reference
Verification
Steps Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further Verification is required. Graphic / reference
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000)

Replacing the pump poppet valve set on the cuvette wash pump, probe wash pump, and the high-concentration waste pump consists of the following procedures. Removal Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing, page 9-157 Remove the pump poppet valve, page 9-157
Replacement Replace the pump poppet valve, page 9-158 Prepare for operation, page 9-158
Section 9-155
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the pump poppet valve set in all three pumps.
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required The processing module must be in the Ready status. 10 minutes Clamp or large hemostats Absorbent towels Reagent Grade Type II water Replacement parts LN 09D36-02 - Pump poppet valve set NOTE: The same pump poppet valve set is used for all three pumps.
Section 9-156
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing

Steps 1. Open the supply center and pump center doors. 2. Locate the appropriate pump: Cuvette wash pump [1] Probe wash pump [2] High-concentration waste pump [3] 3. Clamp the flexible inlet tubing [4] of the pump containing the poppet valve. Graphic / reference
Remove the pump poppet valve

Steps 1. Place absorbent towels in the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Unscrew the top or side [1] elbow fitting securing the tubing to the pump connection. NOTE: It is recommended that the top and side poppet valves be replaced at the same time. 3. Remove the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] from the connection [2]. To remove the top poppet valve, it may be necessary to remove the side connector and push the top poppet valve up from the bottom. 4. Discard the valve and o-ring. Graphic / reference
Section 9-157
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve

Steps 1. Rinse the new poppet valve and o-ring with Reagent Grade Type II water. 2. Install the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] onto the connection [2] as illustrated. 3. Screw the top or side [1] elbow fitting to the connection [2]. 4. Finger-tighten the fitting at the pump connection. 5. Release the clamp on the flexible tubing. 6. Remove the absorbent towels from the pump area. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure. Graphic / reference
Verification
Steps Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further Verification is required. Graphic / reference
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component)

The high-concentration waste bottle is used to collect the high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit. Replacing this component consists of the following procedures. Removal
Section 9-158
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-159
Replacement
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-160
Verification Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen, page 9-160
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 10 minutes Absorbent towels LN 03E50-26 - High Concentration Waste Bottle
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The c System high-concentration waste bottle is heavy when full. Use care when handling the bottle to reduce the risk of injury.
Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle

Steps 1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch cable [2]. 2. Unscrew the high-concentration waste bottle from the cap. 3. Ensure the tubing is not kinked. 4. Carefully remove the tubing from the top of the waste bottle cap. 5. Discard the old bottle and cap in a biohazardous waste container. 6. Discard waste in accordance with the appropriate waste disposal regulations. Graphic / reference
Section 9-159
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle

Steps 1. Insert the tubing [1] into the new cap [2]. 2. Position the tubing just above, but not touching, the float switch [3]. 3. Screw the waste bottle onto the cap. 4. Ensure the tubing is not kinked. 5. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. 6. Ensure the waste bottle is labeled as waste. Graphic / reference
Verification
Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen

Steps Verify the correct volume of waste displays on the Supply status screen. Graphic / reference
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component)

The float switch cable is used to connect the float switch in the high-concentration waste bottle. Replacing this component consists of the following procedures. Removal Disconnect the cable, page 9-161
Replacement Connect the cable, page 9-162
Verification
Section 9-160
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verify waste volume on the Supply status screen, page 9-162

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Absorbent towel LN 03E50-31 - High Concentration Float Switch Cable
Removal
Disconnect the cable

Steps 1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch cable [2]. 2. Disconnect the other end of the float switch cable from the back of the module using the information in the previous step. Graphic / reference
Section 9-161
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Connect the cable

Steps 1. Connect one end of the replacement cable to the back of the module by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. NOTE: Both ends of the cable are identical. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-concentration waste bottle by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. Graphic / reference
Verification

c 16000 component replacement

Component replacement for the c 16000 includes: ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center component replacement, page 9-162 ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump components replacement, page 9-202
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center component replacement

To replace processing center components, see: Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164 Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167 Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171 Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174 Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000), page 9-178 Replace a cuvette (c 16000), page 9-183 Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000), page 9-186 Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189
Section 9-162
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192 Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194 Replace the sample carousel clip (c 16000), page 9-200 Component replacement
See ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components, page 9-163, for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components

The following illustration shows the locations of the processing center components. Use this illustration when performing component replacement procedures. Figure 9.12: ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center map
Legend: 1. Sample carousel and cover 2. Sample pipettor 3. Reaction carousel 4. Lamp 5. Mixer unit 6. Cuvette washer 7. ICT unit 8. Reagent supply center 2 and cover 9. Reagent 2 (A and B) pipettor(s) 10. Reagent supply center 1 and cover 11. Reagent 1 (A and B) pipettor(s)
Section 9-163
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replace the sample probe (c 16000)

NOTE: It is recommended that you record and track the date of sample probe installation to ensure you do not use the probe for longer than one year. Replacing the sample probe consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for sample probe removal, page 9-165 Remove the sample probe, page 9-165
Replacement Install the sample probe, page 9-166 Prepare for operation, page 9-167
Verification Calibrate the sample pipettor, page 9-167

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 20 minutes Slotted screwdriver Absorbent towel LN 01G48-03 - Sample probe LN 02J51-01 - Sample probe screw (optional)
Section 9-164
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for sample probe removal

Steps 1. Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706. 2. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the sample pipettor over the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Remove the sample probe

Steps 1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2]. 2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample carousel area under the probe tip. 3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw [3]. 4. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand until the probe releases from the sample pipettor. 5. Loosen, do not remove, the screw [4] holding the sample probe grounding wire [5] in place. 6. Detach the grounding wire. 7. Gently disconnect the tubing [6] from the top of the probe [7]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-165
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the sample probe

Steps 1. Attach the tubing [1] to the top of the new sample probe [2]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe. If the tubing is loose or if the probe has been replaced several times using the same tubing, it is recommended that you replace the sample probe tubing. 2. Position the sample probe on the alignment pins [3] and verify the probe plate [4] is flush with the plate on the sample pipettor. 3. Remove the probe screw [5] from the old sample probe and insert it into the new sample probe. Finger-tighten the screw [5] to secure the probe. 4. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the slotted screwdriver. 5. Attach the new sample probe grounding wire [6] and tighten the screw [7]. 6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the sample pipettor to the home position. 7. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-166
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification
Calibrate the sample pipettor

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. 2. Run quality control to verify operation. Graphic / reference
Replace reagent probes (c 16000)

Replacing the reagent probe(s) consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for reagent probe removal, page 9-168 Remove the reagent probe, page 9-169
Replacement Install the reagent probe, page 9-170 Prepare for operation, page 9-171
Verification
Section 9-167
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor, page 9-171
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 20 minutes Slotted screwdriver Absorbent towel LN 09D48-02 - Reagent Probe - R1A/R2B (L) LN 09D49-02 - Reagent Probe - R1B/R2A (r) LN 09D48-10 - Reagent probe screw (optional)
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools required Replacement parts
Removal
Prepare for reagent probe removal

Steps 1. Locate the reagent pipettor. NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components, page 9-163, for pipettor locations. Access the R1A [1] and R1B [2] pipettors from the front of the system. Access the R2A [3] and R2B [4] pipettors from the back of the system. 2. If the reagent pipettor is not over the wash cup, initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor. Graphic / reference
Section 9-168
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the reagent probe
Steps 1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover [1] by loosening the two screws [2] beneath the pipettor arm while gently lifting the cover. NOTE: The screws should only be loosened enough to allow for cover removal. Ensure the screws remain captive in the arm. 2. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip. 3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw [3]. 4. Loosen, do not remove, the probe screw [3] by hand until the probe releases from the reagent pipettor. 5. Gently disconnect the tubing [4] from the top of the probe [5]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-169
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the reagent probe

Steps 1. Determine which probe requires replacement and obtain the correct replacement part: LN09D48-02 R1A/R2B (L) must be used on the R1A [1] or R2B [2] pipettor LN09D49-02 R1B/R2A (r) must be used on the R1B [3] or R2A [4] pipettor 2. Attach the tubing [5] to the top of the new reagent probe [6]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the reagent probe. If the tubing is loose or if the probe has been replaced several times using the same tubing, it is recommended that you replace the reagent probe tubing. 3. Position the new reagent probe [6] on the alignment pins [7] and verify the probe plate [8] is flush with the plate on the reagent pipettor. 4. Remove the probe screw [9] from the old reagent probe and insert it into the new reagent probe. Finger-tighten the screw [9] to secure the probe in place. 5. Stabilize the pipettor and tighten the screw with the slotted screwdriver. 6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the reagent probe to the home position. 7. Remove the absorbent towel from the onboard solution area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-170
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. 2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or kinked below the pipettor cover. 4. Finger-tighten the screws [2] beneath the pipettor arm to attach the cover. Some gentle movement may be necessary to align the screws with the cover. Graphic / reference
Verification
Calibrate the Reagent pipettor

Steps 1. Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance procedure: 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37 2. Run quality control to verify performance. Graphic / reference
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000)

Replacing the sample probe tubing consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for sample probe tubing removal, page 9-172 Remove the sample probe tubing, page 9-173
Replacement Install the sample probe tubing, page 9-173 Prepare for operation, page 9-174
Verification
Section 9-171
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent towel LN 01G48-02 - Sample probe tubing
Removal
Prepare for sample probe tubing removal

Steps 1. Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706 2. Initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the sample pipettor over the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-172
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the sample probe tubing
Steps 1. Remove the sample pipettor cover by gently squeezing the squeeze points [1], to release the locking tabs, and lifting the cover [2]. 2. Place an absorbent towel in the sample carousel area under the probe tip. 3. Unscrew the tubing from the probe tubing connector [3]. Ensure the black o-ring inside the tubing connector stays in place. 4. Gently disconnect the tubing [4] from the top of the probe [5]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the sample probe tubing

Steps 1. Attach the end of the new tubing [1] to the top of the sample probe [2]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the sample probe. 2. Verify the black o-ring is inside the probe tubing connector [3]. 3. Screw the opposite end of the tubing [4] into the tubing connector [3]. 4. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to return the sample pipettor to the home position. 5. Remove the absorbent towel from the sample carousel area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-173
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Verification
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000)

Replacing the reagent probe tubing consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal, page 9-175 Remove the reagent probe tubing, page 9-176
Replacement Install the reagent probe tubing, page 9-177 Prepare for operation, page 9-178
Verification
Section 9-174
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required Replacement parts The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent towel Slotted screwdriver LN 09D48-05 - Tubing, Joint to R probe, R1 and 2A LD 09D49-05 - Tubing, Joint to R probe, R1 and 2B LN 09D48-10 - Reagent probe screw (optional)
Removal
Prepare for reagent probe tubing removal

Steps 1. Locate the reagent pipettor. NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 16000 processing center components, page 9-163, for pipettor locations. Access the R1 A and B pipettors from the front of the system. Access the R2 A and B pipettors from the back of the system. 2. If the reagent pipettor is not over the wash cup, initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660, to position the reagent pipettor. Graphic / reference
Section 9-175
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the reagent probe tubing

Steps 1. Remove the reagent pipettor cover [1] by loosening the two screws [2] beneath the pipettor arm while gently lifting the cover. NOTE: The screws should only be loosened enough to allow for cover removal. Ensure the screws remain captive in the arm. 2. Place an absorbent towel under the probe tip. 3. Use a slotted screwdriver to slightly loosen the probe screw [3]. Continue to loosen the probe screw by hand until the probe is released from the reagent pipettor arm. Do not completely remove the screw. 4. Gently disconnect the tubing from the top of the probe [4] and then remove the tubing from the black routing clips [5]. 5. Gently disconnect the tubing from the metal tubing connector [6]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-176
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the reagent probe tubing

Steps 1. Attach the end of the new tubing and metal connector [1] to the reagent pipettor tubing [2]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. 2. Begin routing the tubing by performing one of the following: For reagent pipettor R1B and R2B, route the tubing through the black routing clips [3] and [4]. Proceed to step 5. For reagent pipettor R1A and R2A, insert the tubing in the first black routing clip [3] at the metal connector. Proceed to step 3. NOTE: It is important to route the tubing as instructed to prevent crimping when the pipettor cover is replaced. 3. Route the tubing to the front end of the reagent arm and then loop it toward the back of the reagent arm being careful not to pinch the tubing. 4. Gently loop the tubing toward the front of the reagent arm and then route it through the second black routing clip [4]. 5. Attach the tubing [5] to the reagent probe [6]. NOTE: Do not flare or stretch the new tubing. The tubing should fit firmly on the reagent probe. 6. Position the probe [6] on the alignment pins [7] so that the probe plate is flush with the plate on the reagent pipettor arm. 7. Finger-tighten the screw [8] to hold the probe in place. Stabilize the pipettor arm and use the screwdriver to tighten the screw. 8. Complete the pipettors diagnostic procedure 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660 to return the reagent pipettor to the home position. 9. Remove the absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Section 9-177
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. 2. Visually inspect the probe for drips and inspect the reagent probe tubing and connections for leaks. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Gently replace the pipettor cover [1]. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or crimped below the pipettor cover. 4. Finger-tighten the screws [2] beneath the pipettor arm to attach the cover. Some gentle movement may be necessary to align the screws with the cover. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace the lamp or lamp plate (c 16000)

Replacing the lamp or lamp plate consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-179 Remove the covers, page 9-179 Remove the terminal cable connections, page 9-180 Remove the lamp, page 9-180
Replacement Install the lamp plate and lamp, page 9-181 Install the terminal cables, page 9-182 Install the processing module cover, page 9-182 Prepare for operation, page 9-182
Verification
Section 9-178
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Run quality control, page 9-182
Power off the processing module. 15 minutes NOTE: Time does not include lamp warm up (30 minutes) Tools/materials required Replacement parts Phillips screwdriver Gloves LN 09D45-02 - Lamp
WARNING: Hot Surface. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to hot surfaces. See Hot objects, page 8-21.
Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps IMPORTANT: Never remove the lamp or lamp plate with the processing module powered on. Power off the processing module by using the main circuit breaker located at the rear of the module. Graphic / reference
Remove the covers

Steps WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to cool. NOTE: The lamp can be accessed from the back of the processing module. 1. Open the rear processing module cover. Locate the reaction carousel rear cover [1] located between the reagent 2 supply center [2] and the reaction carousel [3]. 2. Remove the screws [4] securing the cover in place and remove the cover. Graphic / reference
Section 9-179
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the terminal cable connections

Steps 1. Locate the terminal block [1]. 2. Remove the transparent cover [2] from the terminal block by grasping both ends and lifting up. 3. Using the Phillips screwdriver, completely loosen the two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the terminal block. 4. Raise the screws [5] and lower the lamp cables [4] completely to allow you to disengage the cables from the bottom of the screws. Graphic / reference
Remove the lamp

Steps WARNING: Wait at least five minutes after turning the power off to allow the lamp and the lamp housing to cool. 1. Completely loosen the top thumbscrew [1] on the lamp plate [2] in the housing. 2. Lift the lamp plate and loosen the other thumbscrew [3] to remove the lamp from the plate. Graphic / reference
Section 9-180
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the lamp plate and lamp

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil on the glass surface of the lamp shortens the lamp life. The glass surface may be cleaned with ethanol, if necessary. 1. Insert the replacement lamp [1] fitting the pins [2] into the pin holes [3] on the lamp plate [4]. 2. Verify the filament [5] is perpendicular to the lamp plate [4]. 3. Tighten the thumbscrew [6] on the lamp plate while the lamp is fully inserted into the pin holes. 4. Insert the lamp assembly into the housing [7], pressing it against the leaf spring [8], and down into the housing. Ensure the lamp assembly is properly seated into the housing. 5. Verify the lamp cables [9] are through the slot behind the lamp and are not pinched by the lamp plate. 6. Tighten the thumbscrew [10] to secure the lamp in place. Graphic / reference
Section 9-181
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Install the terminal cables

Steps 1. Raise the screws [1] and insert the cables [2] under the screws. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive screws [3] securing the two lamp cables [4] on the terminal block. 3. Wrap excess lamp cables and secure with white plastic clamp [5]. 4. Replace the transparent cover [6] on the terminal block. 5. Power on the processing module. The system control center power MUST be on prior to turning on the processing module to ensure proper initialization. 6. Check for stray light around lamp housing cover. Graphic / reference
Install the processing module cover

Steps 1. Replace the reaction carousel rear cover. 2. Close the rear processing module cover. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, to change the status of the processing module and sample handler from Stopped to Ready. NOTE: The lamp must warm up 30 minutes prior to running assays. 2. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29, to document the lamp change in the Maintenance log. Graphic / reference
Verification
Run quality control

Steps Run quality control to verify performance. Graphic / reference
Section 9-182
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Service and maintenance Section 9 Replace a cuvette (c 16000)

Replacing a cuvette consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove cuvette segment, page 9-184 Clean replacement cuvette, page 9-184 Remove the individual cuvette pair, page 9-185 Component replacement
Replacement Install the individual cuvette pair, page 9-185 Reinstall the cuvette segment, page 9-186
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Detergent A Lint-free absorbent towel Cotton swabs Slotted screwdriver Reagent Grade Type II water Container large enough to accommodate new cuvettes Gloves
Replacement parts
LN 09D33-03 - Cuvette Pair Replacement Set
WARNING: Probe Stick Hazard. Probe Sharps Hazard. This is an activity or area where you may be exposed to sharps. See Probes and sharps, page 8-19.
Section 9-183
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal

Steps 1. Determine the cuvette number requiring replacement. 2. Identify the cuvette segment that contains this cuvette. 3. Identify the location of the cuvette segment on the reaction carousel. 4. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to rotate the carousel so that the cuvette to be replaced is at the front of the module. 5. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the two screws [1] located on the top of the cuvette segment [2] until the segment can be removed from the reaction carousel. 6. Inspect all cuvettes in the segment and replace if damaged. 7. Set the cuvette segment aside on a lint-free absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Clean replacement cuvette

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical reads. 1. Remove the new cuvette(s) from the shipping container and place them on a lint-free absorbent towel. 2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the inside and outside of the new cuvette(s). 3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough Reagent Grade Type II water to completely submerge the new cuvette(s) [2]. 4. Rinse the cuvette(s) in the water to remove the Detergent A and drain any excess water from the cuvette(s). Graphic / reference
Section 9-184
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the individual cuvette pair
Steps NOTE: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical reads. 1. Grasp the cuvette segment [1] and gently push up on the desired cuvette pair [2] to remove it from the segment. CAUTION: There is a leaf spring [3] between the two cuvettes. Be careful not to lose this leaf spring since no replacement spring is provided. WARNING: The spring is very sharp and should be handled with care. 2. Once a portion of the cuvette pair is raised above the top surface of the segment, grasp the cuvette pair gently and pull straight out. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the individual cuvette pair

Steps 1. Align the new cuvettes so the frosted sides of the cuvettes are facing each other. 2. Position the leaf spring between the frosted sides of the two cuvettes. The square end of the leaf spring [1] must be installed at the top of the cuvette pair [2]. WARNING: The spring is very sharp and should be handled with care. 3. Holding the spring between the cuvette pair, insert the cuvettes into the segment. 4. Gently push the cuvette pair down until the top of the cuvettes are just below the upper surface of the cuvette segment [3]. 5. Inspect the cuvettes to ensure the frosted sides are not visible and the bottoms are aligned with the other cuvettes. It may be necessary to press them gently against the bottom outside edge. Graphic / reference
Section 9-185
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Reinstall the cuvette segment

Steps 1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction carousel alignment pins [2]. 2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] into the segment. 3. Gently tighten the screws with the slotted screwdriver. Graphic / reference
Verification

Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000)

Replacing a cuvette segment consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove cuvette segment, page 9-187 Clean replacement cuvette segment, page 9-188
Replacement Install the cuvette segment, page 9-189
Section 9-186
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Detergent A Lint-free absorbent towel Cotton swabs Slotted screwdriver Reagent Grade Type II water Container large enough to accommodate new cuvettes Gloves
Replacement parts
LN 09D32-03 - Cuvette segment
Removal

Steps 1. Determine the cuvette segment requiring replacement. 2. Identify the location of the cuvette segment on the reaction carousel. 3. Perform carousels diagnostic procedure 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665, to rotate the carousel so that the appropriate cuvette segment is at the front of the module. 4. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the two screws [1] located on the top of the cuvette segment [2] until the segment can be removed from the reaction carousel. 5. Dispose of the cuvette segment. Graphic / reference
Section 9-187
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Clean replacement cuvette segment

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand may cause imprecise optical reads. 1. Remove the new cuvette segment from the shipping container and place it on a lint-free absorbent towel. 2. Wet a cotton swab with Detergent A and clean the inside and outside of all of the cuvettes in the new cuvette segment. 3. Fill a clean, residue-free container [1] with enough Reagent Grade Type II water to completely submerge the new cuvette segment [2]. 4. Rinse the cuvette segment in the water to remove the Detergent A and drain any excess water from the cuvettes. 5. Dry the top of the cuvette segment [3], especially the slotted edges [4], to remove any remaining water. Graphic / reference
Section 9-188
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the cuvette segment

Steps 1. Position the cuvette segment [1] on the reaction carousel alignment pins [2]. 2. Finger-tighten the slotted screws [3] on the segment. 3. Gently tighten the screws with a slotted screwdriver. Graphic / reference
Verification

Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000)

Replacing the cuvette dry tips consist of the following procedures. Removal Remove the cuvette washer assembly, page 9-190 Remove the cuvette dry tips, page 9-191
Replacement Install the cuvette dry tips and cuvette washer assembly, page 9-191 Prepare for operation, page 9-192
Verification
Section 9-189
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Wash the cuvettes, page 9-192
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Metric ruler Gloves LN 09D51-02 - Cuvette dry tips
Removal
Remove the cuvette washer assembly

Steps 1. Open the rear processing module cover. 2. Remove the cuvette washer cover [1] by unscrewing the thumbscrew [2]. 3. Loosen the black knurled knob [3] to the left of the cuvette washer until the cuvette washer assembly [4] can be lifted from the mounting bracket. Graphic / reference
Section 9-190
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the cuvette dry tips
Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand interferes with the proper drying function of the tip. 1. Lift the cuvette washer assembly and rotate it so you can easily access the white cuvette dry tip. NOTE: The cuvette washer nozzles are attached to the black nozzle mounting plate. You do not need to remove any of the screws securing the wash nozzles to the mounting plate. 2. Remove the cuvette dry tip(s) [1] by pulling it off the metal nozzle(s) [2]. 3. Discard the used tips. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the cuvette dry tips and cuvette washer assembly

Steps IMPORTANT: Wear gloves when you perform the following steps. Residual oil from an ungloved hand interferes with the proper drying function of the tips. 1. Gently install the new cuvette dry tips, taking care to orient them properly. NOTE: The cuvette dry tips and the cuvettes are both rectangular in shape. Install the dry tip(s) so they fit into the cuvettes. 2. Position the bottom of the cuvette dry tips 61 0.5 mm from the underside of the cuvette washer assembly [1]. 3. Position the cuvette washer assembly [2] on the alignment pins [3], and then tighten the black knurled knob [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-191
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Initiate Fuses/Motors diagnostic procedure 5142 Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 to home the cuvette washer assembly and reaction carousel. 2. Verify the rectangular orientation and alignment of the cuvette dry tips with the cuvettes. NOTE: Wear gloves if adjustment to the cuvette dry tips is required. Residual oil from an ungloved hand interferes with the proper drying function of the tips. 3. Select L1 (down) on the processing module keypad or the Diagnostic perform window to move the washer assembly down. 4. Verify the alignment of each cuvette dry tip is correct and that it moves smoothly into the cuvettes. 5. Select L1 (up) to move the washer assembly up. 6. Select L4 (exit) to end the procedure. 7. Select Done on the Diagnostic perform window to complete the procedure. 8. Replace the cuvette wash cover [1], and then tighten the thumbscrew [2]. Graphic / reference
Verification
Wash the cuvettes

Steps Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40. Graphic / reference
Replace the mixer (c 16000)

Replacing the mixer consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the mixer, page 9-193
Replacement Install the mixer, page 9-194
Verification
Section 9-192
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 9-194
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes None LN 09D59-02 - Mixer
Removal
Remove the mixer

Steps 1. Open the rear processing module cover. 2. Locate the appropriate mixer. 3. Unplug the cable [1] by pinching the white connector [2]. 4. Loosen the black thumbscrew [3] on the top of the mixer assembly. 5. Remove the mixer [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-193
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the mixer

Steps 1. Orient the new mixer assembly [1] so that the flat side faces away from the mixer arm. 2. Align the positioning pins [2] on the top of the mixer with the holes on the mixer arm. Tighten the black thumbscrew [3] until the top of the mixer is flush with the mixer arm. 3. Attach the cable connector to the white connector [4] on the bottom of the mixer arm. NOTE: This connector is keyed and only goes in one way. 4. Fold the excess cable and fit it into the notch [5]. Graphic / reference
Verification
Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test

Steps Perform reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure 3126 Mixer Vibration Test, page 10-659, to verify mixer function. Graphic / reference
Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000)

Replacing the ICT module or probe consists of the following procedures: Removal
Section 9-194
Remove the covers, page 9-196 Remove the ICT module and probe, page 9-197
Replacement
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the ICT module and probe, page 9-199 Prepare for operation, page 9-200
Verification Calibrate ICT assays, page 9-200

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes NA LN 09D63-03 - ICT probe LN 09D28-03 - ICT module LN 09F93-02 - ICT o-ring (optional)
Section 9-195
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Remove the covers

Steps 1. Lift the rear cover on the processing module to access the ICT module and probe. 2. Locate the ICT unit. 3. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] and lift the cover [2] off the ICT unit. 4. Loosen the two captive thumbscrews [3] that secure the black plate [4] in place. 5. Remove the black plate [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-196
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the ICT module and probe
Steps 1. Loosen the thumbscrew [1] on the side of the ICT holder [2] until the ICT module [3] can be lifted up. 2. Disconnect the black electrical connector [4] from the side of the module by pulling it straight out. 3. Verify the connector is completely free from the module. 4. Lift the ICT module [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module clear the ICT holder [2]. IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the probe, do not lift the ICT module and probe all the way out of the ICT holder. 5. Gently unscrew the ICT module [3], rotating it clockwise, to free it from the top connector [5]. 6. Lift the ICT module and probe straight up out of the ICT holder. 7. Unscrew the ICT probe holder [6] from the ICT module. 8. Inspect the ports of the ICT module. The black o-rings [7] MUST be present. IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings could affect patient results. 9. Discard the ICT module if replacing; otherwise, set it aside for use with the new ICT probe. 10.Remove the ICT probe [8] from the probe holder. 11.Discard the probe if replacing; otherwise set it aside for use with the new ICT module. Graphic / reference
Section 9-197
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Section 9-198
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the ICT module and probe
Steps 1. Remove the ICT module from the box, if replacing the ICT module. 2. Record the expiration date found on the ICT module box prior to discarding the box. It is recommended that you record and track this date to ensure you do not use the module on the c System beyond this date. Once you install the ICT module on the processing module, it is warranted for 15,000 samples or two months, whichever occurs first. 3. Disconnect and discard the plastic tubing attached to both ends of the ICT module. 4. Inspect the ports on the ICT module. The black o-rings [1] MUST be present. IMPORTANT: Running the system without the black o-rings could affect patient results. 5. Align the ICT module so that the gap [2] between the side connectors is on top and the label [3] is right-side up. 6. Place the ICT probe [4] into the probe holder [5]. 7. Attach the probe holder and probe to the bottom of the ICT module (finger-tighten only). IMPORTANT: The o-rings may twist and obstruct the flow through the ICT module if this connection is overtightened. 8. Insert the ICT module [1] with the probe [2] into the ICT holder [3] until the connectors on the side of the ICT module are just above the top of the ICT holder [3]. 9. Rotate the ICT module [1] counterclockwise (finger-tighten only) to reattach the ICT module to the top port [4] and to the connector [5]. 10.Allow the ICT module [1] to seat fully down into the ICT holder [3] so that the connectors are aligned with the slot [6] in the ICT holder [3]. 11.Gently reconnect the black electrical connector [7] to the ICT module connectors. Ensure the ICT module is completely plugged into the connector. 12.Hold down the ICT module while tightening the side thumbscrew [8] until secure. Do not overtighten. The ICT module could be damaged.
Graphic / reference
Section 9-199
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41. 2. Inspect the tubing from the ICT module for bubbles. 3. Inspect the ICT probe to ensure it does not drip. If you observe bubbles or drips, see Processing module observed problems (c System), page 10-547. 4. Reattach the black plate [1] by securing it with the two thumbscrews [2] on the top. 5. Reattach the ICT unit cover [3] and tighten the thumbscrew [4] to secure. Graphic / reference
Verification
Calibrate ICT assays

Steps 1. Calibrate ICT assays. 2. Run quality control samples to verify calibration. Graphic / reference
Replace the sample carousel clip (c 16000)

Replacing the sample carousel clip consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the sample carousel clip, page 9-201
Replacement Replace the sample carousel clip, page 9-202
Verification
Section 9-200
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Load a sample tube, page 9-202
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Phillips screwdriver LN 04J45-01 - Sample carousel clip
Removal
Remove the sample carousel clip

Steps 1. Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706, from the processing module, and then remove any patient samples. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to remove the screw [1] securing the sample carousel clip [2] in place. 3. Remove and discard the clip. Graphic / reference
Section 9-201
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Replace the sample carousel clip

Steps 1. Insert the new sample carousel clip [1] in the sample carousel using the four square alignment holes [2] on the bottom of the sample carousel to seat the clip in position. NOTE: The sample carousel clip only fits one way in the sample carousel. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to secure the clip to the bottom of the sample carousel using the new screw [3] provided. 3. Place the sample carousel on the processing module, ensuring the alignment holes fit over the alignment pins. Graphic / reference
Verification
Load a sample tube

Steps Load a sample tube in the sample carousel position where the carousel clip was replaced to verify proper installation of the clip. Graphic / reference
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump components replacement

You may need to replace certain supply and pump components due to normal wear from daily operations. The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions on replacing these components: Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204 Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207 Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 16000), page 9-212 Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000), page 9-214 Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-217
Section 9-202
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224 Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231 Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component), page 9-234 Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-236
See ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203, for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components

The following illustrations show the location of the supply and pump center components. Use these illustrations when performing maintenance and component replacement procedures. Figure 9.13: ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center (front view)
Legend: 1. Sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe drives 2. Probe wash pumps 3. Bulk solutions 4. Cuvette wash pump 5. Wash solution pump
Section 9-203
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Figure 9.14: ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center (rear view)
Legend: 1. ICT aspiration pump 2. ICT reference solution pump 3. High concentration waste pump
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000)

Replacing the 1 mL syringes on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration pump, and wash solution pump consists of the following procedures. Removal Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced, page 9-205 Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-206 Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe, page 9-206
Replacement Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 9-207 Prepare for operation, page 9-207
Section 9-204
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the 1 mL syringes in all three pumps.
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required Replacement parts The processing module must be in the Ready status. 20 minutes Absorbent towels LN 09D41-02 - 1 mL syringe NOTE: The same 1 mL syringe is used for the ICT reference pump, the ICT aspiration pump, and the wash solution pump.
Removal
Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced

Steps 1. Locate the 1 mL syringe to be replaced by performing one of the following: Wash solution syringes - Open the pump center right door on the front of the processing module. NOTE: See the front view illustration of the supply and pump center components for wash solution syringe location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. ICT aspiration or ICT reference pump syringes Open the ICT pump center access door on the rear of the processing module. NOTE: See the rear view illustration of the supply and pump center components for ICT aspiration or ICT reference pump syringe location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. Graphic / reference
Section 9-205
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Detach and replace the 1 mL syringe

Steps 1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Unscrew the syringe assembly [1] from the check valve [2]. 3. Screw the new syringe assembly [1] onto the check valve [2]. NOTE: Be sure to replace the syringe and plunger (components of the syringe assembly) as a pair. Graphic / reference
Section 9-206
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement

Steps 1. Reinstall the syringe [1]. 2. Verify the plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3]. 3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and secure it with the black knobs [5]. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures to remove any air that may be present: 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, for the ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, for the wash solution pump 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace check valves (c 16000)

Replacing the check valves on the ICT reference pump, ICT aspiration pump, or wash solution pump consists of the following procedures.
Section 9-207
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal Locate the check valve to be replaced, page 9-209 Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 9-209 Remove the check valve tubing, page 9-210
Replacement Replace the check valve, page 9-210 Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 9-211 Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 9-211 Prepare for operation, page 9-212
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent towel LN 09D35-02 - ICT Reference or ICT Aspiration Check Valve LN 09D34-02 - Wash Solution Check Valve NOTE: The ICT reference and aspiration pumps use the same list number. The wash solution pump uses a different list number. Ensure the correct part is used.
Section 9-208
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Locate the check valve to be replaced

Steps 1. Locate the check valve to be replaced by performing one of the following: Wash solution check valve - Open the pump center right door on the front of the processing module. NOTE: See the front view illustration of the supply and pump center components for wash solution pump check valve location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. ICT aspiration or reference pump check valve Open the ICT pump center access door on the rear of the processing module. NOTE: See the rear view illustration of the supply and pump center components for ICT aspiration or ICT reference pump check valve location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. Graphic / reference

Section 9-209
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Place absorbent towels under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Disconnect the top [1] and side [2] tubing from the check valve [3]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Replace the check valve

Steps 1. Unscrew the syringe body [1] from the check valve [2]. 2. Install the new check valve onto the syringe, and finger-tighten. Graphic / reference
Section 9-210
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check valve [3]. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Reinstall the 1 mL syringe [1]. 2. Verify the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3]. 3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and tighten the black knobs [5] finger-tight. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / reference
Section 9-211
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures to remove any air that may be present: 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, for the ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, for the wash solution pump 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve, page 9-33, to document the ICT aspiration check valve replacement in the Maintenance log. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace the ICT reference solution filter (c 16000)

Replacing the ICT reference solution filter consists of the following procedures: Removal Remove the ICT reference solution tubing, page 9-213 Remove the ICT reference solution filter, page 9-213
Replacement Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing, page 9-214
Verification Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155, page 9-214

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Absorbent towels LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution line filter
Section 9-212
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Remove the ICT reference solution tubing

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. The ICT reference solution filter is located at the end of the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle [1]. 2. Remove the tubing from the ICT reference solution bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Remove the ICT reference solution filter

Steps 1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached to the end of the ICT reference solution tubing [2]. 2. Discard the filter into the appropriate waste receptacle. Graphic / reference
Section 9-213
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Replace the ICT reference solution filter and tubing

Steps 1. Insert the new ICT reference filter [1] in the tubing connector [2]. 2. Insert the tubing in the ICT reference solution bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the bottle. 3. Close the supply center door. Graphic / reference
Verification

Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000)

Replacing the wash solution filter consists of the following procedures: Removal Remove the tubing, page 9-215 Remove the wash solution filter, page 9-216
Replacement Replace wash solution filter and tubing, page 9-216
Section 9-214
Verification
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2155, page 9-217

The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Absorbent towels LN 09D43-02 - Reference/wash solution filter
Removal
Remove the tubing

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. Wash solution filters are located at the end of the tubing in the alkaline [1] and acid [2] wash solution bottles. 2. Remove the tubing from the wash solution bottle and set it aside on an absorbent towel. Graphic / reference
Section 9-215
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the wash solution filter

Steps 1. Pull the filter [1] from the connector that is attached to the end of the wash solution tubing [2]. 2. Discard the filter in the appropriate waste receptacle. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Replace wash solution filter and tubing

Steps 1. Insert the new filter [1] in the tubing connector [2]. 2. Insert the tubing in the appropriate wash solution bottle, and ensure the tubing reaches the bottom of the bottle. 3. Close the supply center door. Graphic / reference
Section 9-216
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification

Replace wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000)
Replacing the wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-219 Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-219 Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block, page 9-220 Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-221 Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-221
Replacement Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-222 Install the syringe plunger, page 9-222 Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield, page 9-223 Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing, page 9-223 Install the clear outer plunger shield, page 9-224 Prepare for operation, page 9-224
Verification
Section 9-217
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement parts
LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring LN 09D37-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #1 LN 09D38-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #2
Section 9-218
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Remove the clear outer plunger shield

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. 2. Locate the wash solution pump. 3. Loosen and remove the black knobs [1] securing the clear outer plunger shield [2]. 4. Remove the shield. Graphic / reference
Disconnect the wash solution syringe block tubing

Steps 1. Place an absorbent towel under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Remove the 1 mL syringes [1] from the drive block; do not disconnect them. 3. Unscrew the left-top grey knurled connection [2] from the top of the syringe block. Use the towel to collect solution dripping from the tubing. NOTE: The tubing labeled 2, coming from the instrument, connects to the left-top connection [2]. The tubing labeled 3, coming from the instrument, connects to the right-top connection [3]. Do not interchange the tubing. CAUTION: Do not remove the Phillips [4] screws from the syringe block. If screws are removed contact your Area Customer Support. 4. Unscrew the right-top grey knurled connection [3]. Use the towel to collect solution dripping from the tubing. Graphic / reference
Section 9-219
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the clear inner plunger shield and syringe block

Steps 1. Disconnect the tubing [1] connecting the wash solution syringe block to the four 1 mL syringes from both sides of the syringe block. Use the towel to collect solution dripping from the tubing. 2. Remove the clear inner plunger shield [2] by removing the Phillips screw [3] securing the shield. 3. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw [4] securing the clear syringe block [5] in place. The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed. 4. Pull the syringe block [6] forward to allow the plungers [7] to clear the syringe drive [8]. NOTE: Some slight repositioning (front to back) may be required to allow the plungers to clear the drive [9]. 5. Lift the syringe block up to remove it from the module. NOTE: Do not bend the plungers on removal. 6. Identify the syringe needing the new o-ring and seal tips. Graphic / reference
Section 9-220
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Steps The plunger assembly includes the following parts: O-ring [1] IMPORTANT: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe block when removing the plunger assembly. Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] Seal tip 1 [4] Spring [5] Nut [6] Plunger [7] Plunger flange [8] 1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except for spacer) if being replaced: O-ring [1] Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard Seal tip 1 [4] NOTE: Do not remove the spring. 2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab and dry the plunger completely with an absorbent towel if liquid is present. Graphic / reference
Section 9-221
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement

Steps 1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits above the spring, with the open side away from the spring. 2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1. 3. Install the seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer with the open side toward the spacer. 4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of the seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the syringe block. 5. Press lightly to push all the components together. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block [1]. 2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into the syringe block until finger-tight. NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the spring, continue to tighten the nut. 3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2] securing the plunger [3]. Do not overtighten. Graphic / reference
Section 9-222
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the syringe block and attach the clear inner plunger shield
Steps 1. Ensure a black seal remains in each of the tubing ports [1] at the top of the syringe block. 2. Hold the syringe block [2] so that the slotted screw [3] faces you. 3. Align the syringe block to the pins [4] on the syringe holder, verifying that both plunger flanges [5] are below the U-shaped holders [6]. 4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins and tighten the screw [3] by hand until finger-tight. Secure with a slotted screwdriver. 5. Attach the clear inner plunger shield [7] and tighten the Phillips screw [8]. Graphic / reference
Connect the wash solution syringe block tubing

Steps 1. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 2 coming from the instrument to the left-top port [1]. 2. Connect the grey knurled connection labeled 3 from the instrument to the right-top port [2]. 3. Connect the 1 mL syringe tubing to the two side ports [3] on each side of the syringe block. The 1 mL syringe tubing can be connected to any of the four ports. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or crimped. 4. Verify the 1 mL syringe tubing connections did not loosen during the removal and replacement procedure. 5. Reinstall the 1 mL syringes into the syringe holder. 6. Ensure the plunger flange [4] is below the U-shaped holder and that the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder. Ensure the tubing is not pinched or crimped. Graphic / reference
Section 9-223
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Install the clear outer plunger shield

Steps 1. Attach the clear outer plunger shield [1] and tighten the black knobs [2] until finger-tight. 2. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance, page 9-31, to document wash solution o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 replacement in the Maintenance log. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000)
Replacing the sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 consists of the following procedures.
Section 9-224
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield, page 9-226 Remove the syringe bracket, page 9-226 Remove the syringe block, page 9-227 Remove the syringe plunger, page 9-227 Remove the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-228 Component replacement
Replacement Install the o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, page 9-229 Install the syringe plunger, page 9-229 Install the syringe block, page 9-230 Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield, page 9-230 Prepare for operation, page 9-231
Replacement parts
LN 09D52-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe o-ring LN 09D37-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #1 LN 09D38-02 - Sample/wash solution syringe seal tip #2 LN 09D53-02 - Reagent syringe o-ring LN 09D39-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #1 LN 09D40-02 - Reagent syringe seal tip #2 NOTE: The o-rings and seal tips 1 and 2 for the sample and reagent syringes are different sizes. Be sure to install the correct part in the appropriate syringe.
Section 9-225
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Locate the syringe and remove the plunger shield

Steps 1. Open the supply center door. 2. Locate the appropriate syringe: R1 A and B syringes [1] Sample syringe [2] R2 A and B syringes [3] 3. Remove the two Phillips screws [4] securing the shield. 4. Remove the shield. [5] Graphic / reference
Remove the syringe bracket

Steps Remove the syringe bracket holding the syringe plunger to the drive block by removing the two Phillips screws [1] on the syringe bracket [2]. NOTE: Notice that these screws are shorter than the screws from the clear plunger shield. Do not interchange the two sets of screws. Graphic / reference
Section 9-226
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the syringe block
Steps 1. Use the slotted screwdriver to loosen the slotted screw [1] securing the syringe block [2] in place. The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed. 2. Place an absorbent towel under the syringe drive to absorb any liquid. 3. Disconnect the tubing at the top [3] and side [4] of the syringe block by unscrewing the knurled connections. 4. Ensure the black seal remains in the syringe block once the tubing is disconnected. Graphic / reference

Section 9-227
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps The plunger assembly includes the following parts: O-ring [1] NOTE: The o-ring may have remained in the syringe block when removing the plunger assembly. Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] Seal tip 1 [4] Spring [5] Nut [6] Plunger [7] Plunger flange [8] 1. Remove the following. Set aside or discard (except for spacer) if being replaced: O-ring [1] Seal tip 2 [2] Spacer [3] - set aside, do not discard Seal tip 1 [4] NOTE: Do not remove the spring. 2. Dry the interior of the syringe barrel with a cotton swab and dry the plunger completely with an absorbent towel if liquid is present. Graphic / reference
Section 9-228
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement

Steps 1. Install seal tip 1 [1] onto the plunger so that it sits above the spring, with the open side away from the spring. 2. Install the spacer [2] so that it fits into the open side of seal tip 1. 3. Install seal tip 2 [3] on top of the spacer, with the open side toward the spacer. 4. Install the o-ring [4] so that it fits into the groove of seal tip 2. Do not push the o-ring out of alignment. The o-ring must sit flat against the inside of the syringe block. 5. Press lightly to push all the components together. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Install the plunger assembly into the syringe block [1]. 2. Tighten the nut [2] holding the plunger assembly into the syringe block until finger-tight. NOTE: The nut must be flush with the plunger assembly. If the nut binds when tightening, do not apply excessive force. Back the nut out a turn, and then, while pushing in to apply pressure against the spring, continue to tighten the nut. 3. Use the 10 mm wrench to further tighten the nut [2] securing the plunger [3]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-229
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Install the syringe block

Steps 1. Hold the syringe block [1] so that the slotted screw [2] faces you. 2. Ensure the black seals remain in place in each port and reconnect the tubing at the top and side [3] of the syringe block by screwing the knurled connections [3]. 3. Align the syringe block to the pins [4] on the syringe holder, verifying that the plunger flange is above the drive block [5]. Move any tubing out of the way. 4. Hold the syringe block against the alignment pins and tighten the screw [2] by hand until finger-tight. Secure the screw with a slotted screwdriver. Graphic / reference
Install the syringe bracket and plunger shield

Steps 1. Attach the syringe bracket [1] to connect the drive block and syringe plunger. 2. Use the Phillips screwdriver to install the screws [2]. NOTE: Verify the shorter screws are used in the bracket. Do not use the longer screws for the plunger shield. 3. Attach the clear plunger shield [3] by tightening the two (2) Phillips screws [4]. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the syringe drive. Graphic / reference
Section 9-230
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance, page 9-30, or 6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance, page 9-32, to document sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips replacement in the Maintenance log. NOTE: Only perform this maintenance procedure if you replaced the o-ring and seal tips in both the R1 and R2 syringes. Graphic / reference
Verification
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000)

Replacing the pump poppet valve set on the cuvette wash pump, probe wash pump, and the high-concentration waste pump consists of the following procedures. Removal Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing, page 9-232 Remove the pump poppet valve, page 9-233
Replacement Replace the pump poppet valve, page 9-233 Prepare for operation, page 9-233
Section 9-231
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
NOTE: The same procedure is used to replace the pump poppet valve set in all three pumps.
Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required The processing module must be in the Ready status. 10 minutes Clamp or large hemostats Absorbent towels Reagent Grade Type II water Replacement parts LN 09D36-02 - Pump poppet valve set NOTE: The same pump poppet valve set is used for all three pumps.
Removal
Locate the pump poppet valve and clamp the tubing

Steps 1. Locate the appropriate pump: Probe wash pumps Cuvette wash pump NOTE: See the front view illustration of the supply and pump center components for wash pump location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. 2. Open the supply center and pump center doors. 3. Clamp the flexible inlet tubing [1] of the pump containing the poppet valve. Graphic / reference
Section 9-232
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the pump poppet valve
Steps 1. Place absorbent towels in the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Unscrew the top or side [1] elbow fitting securing the tubing to the pump connection. NOTE: It is recommended that the top and side poppet valves be replaced at the same time. 3. Remove the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] from the connection [2]. To remove the top poppet valve, it may be necessary to remove the side connector and push the top poppet valve up from the bottom. 4. Discard the valve and o-ring. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Replace the pump poppet valve

Steps 1. Rinse the new poppet valve and o-ring with Reagent Grade Type II water. 2. Install the poppet valve [3] and o-ring [4] onto the connection [2] as illustrated. 3. Screw the top or side [1] elbow fitting to the connection [2]. 4. Finger-tighten the fitting at the pump connection. 5. Release the clamp on the flexible tubing. 6. Remove the absorbent towels from the pump area. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure. Graphic / reference
Section 9-233
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Verification
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component)

The high-concentration waste bottle is used to collect the high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit. Replacing this component consists of the following procedures. Removal Remove the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-235
Replacement Replace the high-concentration waste bottle, page 9-235
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 10 minutes Absorbent towels LN 03E50-26 - High Concentration Waste Bottle
Section 9-234
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Remove the high-concentration waste bottle

Steps 1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch cable [2]. 2. Unscrew the high-concentration waste bottle from the cap. 3. Ensure the tubing is not kinked. 4. Carefully remove the tubing from the top of the waste bottle cap. 5. Discard the old bottle and cap in a biohazardous waste bottle. 6. Discard waste in accordance with the appropriate waste disposal regulations. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Replace the high-concentration waste bottle

Steps 1. Insert the tubing [1] into the new cap [2]. 2. Position the tubing just above, but not touching, the float switch [3]. 3. Screw the waste bottle onto the cap. 4. Ensure the tubing is not kinked. 5. Reconnect the float switch cable by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. 6. Ensure the waste bottle is labeled as waste. Graphic / reference
Section 9-235
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Verification

Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component)

The float switch cable is used to connect the float switch in the high-concentration waste bottle. Replacing this component consists of the following procedures. Removal Disconnect the cable, page 9-237
Replacement Connect the cable, page 9-237
The processing module must be in the Ready status. 5 minutes Absorbent towel LN 03E50-31 - High Concentration Float Switch Cable
Section 9-236
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Disconnect the cable

Steps 1. Disconnect the float switch cable from the high-concentration waste bottle cap by unscrewing the locking ring [1] and disconnecting the float switch cable [2]. 2. Disconnect the other end of the float switch cable from the back of the module using the information in the previous step. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Connect the cable

Steps 1. Connect one end of the replacement cable to the back of the module by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. NOTE: Both ends of the cable are identical. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-concentration waste bottle by inserting the cable and tightening the locking ring. Graphic / reference
Verification

i 2000/i 2000SR component replacement

Component replacement for ARCHITECT i Systems includes:
Section 9-237
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement, page 9-238 i 2000/i 2000SR processing center component replacement, page 9-240 i 2000/i 2000SR supply and waste center component replacement, page 9-266
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement

Internal components' covers protect the internal components of the processing center. You remove covers to: Access the internal components Replace worn covers
See the ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers, page 9-238, for instructions.
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers

Internal components' covers are located in the following areas.
Section 9-238
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 9.15: Internal components' covers Component replacement
Legend: 1. Internal components cover 1 2. Internal components cover 2-3 3. Internal components cover 2-3 4. Internal components cover 4 5. Internal components cover 5 6. Internal components cover 6 7. Internal components cover 7 8. Internal components cover 8 (i 2000 System)
NOTE: Covers 4, 5, 6, and 7 are not interchangeable between the i 2000 processing module and the i 2000SR processing module. Pins located on the process path are used to secure covers 1, 4, 5, and 7 on both processing modules. Cover 6 (i 2000SR processing module) is also secured by pins. To remove the covers, gently pull up where the
Section 9-239
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
pin enters the hole on the cover. To replace, match the hole on the cover with the pin and gently place the cover in place. Thumbscrews are used to secure covers 2 and 3 on both modules. Cover 6 (i 2000 processing module) is also secured by a thumbscrew. To remove, loosen the thumbscrews and gently pull up. NOTE: The thumbscrews are secured to the cover. Cover 8 (i 2000 processing module) sits on the sample pipettor. To remove, gently pull the cover up and off the pipettor. NOTE: Each cover is labeled with a number on the inside of the cover. The number corresponds to a black number on the process path. Internal components cover 8 does not connect to the process path and does not have a corresponding number on the path.
i 2000/i 2000SR processing center component replacement

You may need to replace certain processing center components due to normal wear from daily operations. The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions on replacing these components: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244 Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255 Replace the waste arm probe/tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-264
Use the processing center map on the i System processing module for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Replacing the sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probe consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-242 Remove the probe, page 9-242
Section 9-240
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement Install the probe, page 9-243 Prepare for operation, page 9-243 Component replacement
Verification Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1111, 1112, 1113, or 1117, page 9-244
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 20 minutes Absorbent tissue #2 Phillips screwdriver (optional) LN 08C94-42 - Probe
Section 9-241
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the probe(s). 2. Locate the probe to be replaced on the appropriate pipettor. NOTE: See the processing center map on the i System processing module for pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or ST). 3. Verify the probe is over the wash station. To move the reagent probe over the wash station, perform modules diagnostic procedure 4080 Module Initialization, page 10-663. To move the sample or STAT probe over the wash station, initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671. Graphic / reference
Remove the probe

Steps 1. Place an absorbent tissue under the probe tubing connection. 2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the probe tubing from the probe [1]. 3. Loosen the screw (captive) on top of the probe clamp until you feel resistance [2]. NOTE: You can use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw. Loosening the screw beyond the point of resistance can cause the clip to come apart. 4. Push up on the blue button located under the boom arm [3]. 5. Swing the probe free of the clip. Lift the probe and remove it from the boom arm [4]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-242
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the probe

Steps 1. Slide the probe into the boom arm [1]. 2. Swing the probe to the probe clip and snap it in place under the clip [2]. 3. Tighten the screw (captive) on top of the probe clamp [3]. NOTE: A #2 Phillips screwdriver may be used to tighten the screw. Do not over-tighten as stripping may result. 4. Connect the probe tubing to the probe and finger tighten the probe fitting [4]. 5. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671, to return the sample or STAT pipettor to the park position. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or leaks are observed, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Remove the absorbent tissue. 4. Close the processing center cover(s). Graphic / reference
Section 9-243
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1111, 1112, 1113, or 1117

Steps Perform the appropriate as-needed maintenance procedure: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67, or 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 Graphic / reference
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Replacing the sample or reagent probe tubing consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-245 Remove the probe tubing, page 9-246
Replacement Install the probe tubing, page 9-247 Prepare for operation, page 9-247
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 10 minutes Absorbent tissue LN 08C94-49 - Tubing, Probe LN 03M77-49 - Probe Tubing, STAT
Section 9-244
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the probe(s). 2. Locate the probe tubing to be replaced on the appropriate pipettor. NOTE: See the processing center map on the i System processing module for pipettor locations (R1, R2, S, or ST). 3. Verify the probe is over the wash station. To move the reagent probe over the wash station, perform modules diagnostic procedure 4080 Module Initialization, page 10-663. To move the sample or STAT probe over the wash station, initiate pipettors diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671. 4. Access the probe tubing on the sample pipettor by removing its internal components cover, if present. Graphic / reference See System startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3. See ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement, page 9-238.
Section 9-245
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the probe tubing

Steps 1. Place an absorbent tissue under the probe tubing connection. 2. Loosen the metal fitting on the probe and remove the probe tubing from the probe [1]. 3. Drain any fluid from the probe tubing onto an absorbent tissue. 4. Unclip the probe tubing from the tubing routing clips [2]. 5. Place an absorbent tissue near the tubing connection at the pressure monitor [3]. 6. Remove the pressure monitor from the clips on the pipettor. 7. Disconnect the tubing connection at the pressure monitor [3]. 8. Remove the probe tubing from the module. Graphic / reference
Section 9-246
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the probe tubing

Steps 1. Support the boom arm when replacing the tubing to prevent it from moving. 2. Place the tubing into the routing clips [1]. NOTE: Orient the STAT probe tubing so that the green band is located near the probe. 3. Connect the probe tubing to the pressure monitor [2]. 4. Place the pressure monitor onto the clips on the pipettor. 5. Connect the opposite end of the probe tubing to the probe and finger tighten the probe metal fitting [3]. 6. Complete pipettors diagnostic procedure 1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671, to return the sample or STAT pipettor to the park position. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Remove the absorbent tissue. 4. Replace the internal components cover if you removed it from the sample pipettor. 5. Close the processing center cover(s). Graphic / reference
Section 9-247
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Verification
Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Your ARCHITECT i System has one of the following wash zone motor assemblies: P/N 78326 P/N 96251
To replace the wash zone probe, refer to the instructions for the appropriate motor assembly. Replacing the wash zone probe (motor assembly P/N 78326) consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-249 Remove the wash zone probe, page 9-250
Replacement Install the wash zone probe, page 9-251 Prepare for operation, page 9-251
Verification Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test, page 9-252 Perform calibration curve verification, page 9-252
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 45 minutes (includes running quality control samples) None LN 08C94-35 - Probe, WZ
Section 9-248
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the wash zone probe. NOTE: The rear processing center access panel must be opened to access wash zone 2 probes. 2. Locate the wash zone probe to be replaced on the appropriate wash zone. [1] See the processing center map on the i System processing module for wash zone locations (WZ1 or WZ2). 3. Remove the appropriate internal components cover(s), if present. See ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement, page 9-238. Graphic / reference
Section 9-249
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the wash zone probe

Steps 1. Remove the tubing from the wash zone probe by gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe and through the hole in the back of the wash zone motor assembly [1]. 2. Rotate the wash zone probe clip clockwise toward the process path [2]. 3. Lift the probe and remove it from the front of the wash zone motor assembly. Graphic / reference
Section 9-250
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the wash zone probe

Steps 1. Slide the probe into the wash zone motor assembly until it is fully seated. Pull up on the wash zone motor to raise it if the wash zone manifold interferes with the insertion of the probe. 2. Lift and rotate the probe clip counterclockwise until the notch in the clip sits over the wash zone probe [1]. 3. Slide the tubing through the hole in the back of the wash zone motor assembly and onto the wash zone probe until it passes the ridge on the probe [2]. NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the bend in the probe and the ridge. 4. Verify the wash zone probes enter the holes in the wash zone manifold by pressing down on the wash zone motor assembly. Graphic / reference

Steps 1. Replace the appropriate internal components cover(s), if previously removed. 2. Close the processing center cover(s). Graphic / reference
Section 9-251
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Verification
Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test

Steps Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test, page 10-672. Graphic / reference
Perform calibration curve verification

Steps Run all levels of controls to validate the active calibration curves prior to reporting patient results. Graphic / reference
Replacing the wash zone probe (motor assembly P/N 96251) consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-253 Remove the wash zone probe, page 9-253
Replacement Install the wash zone probe, page 9-254 Prepare for operation, page 9-254
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 45 minutes (includes running quality control samples) None LN 08C94-35 - Probe, WZ
Section 9-252
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the wash zone probe. NOTE: The rear processing center access panel must be opened to access wash zone 2 probes. 2. Locate the wash zone probe to be replaced on the appropriate wash zone. [1] Refer to the processing center map on the i System processing module for wash zone locations (WZ1 or WZ2). 3. Remove the appropriate internal components cover(s), if present. For information on removing the internal component covers, refer to ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers, page 9-238. Graphic / reference
Remove the wash zone probe

Steps 1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash zone clip located at the front of the wash zone motor assembly. Rotate the clip counterclockwise, [2] so the notch in the clip moves away from the wash zone probe [1]. 2. Perform one of the following depending on the probe you are replacing: Wash zone 1 Remove the wash zone tubing from the tubing guide, and then lift the probe and the attached tubing out of the wash zone motor assembly. Wash zone 2 Lift the probe and attached tubing out of the wash zone motor assembly. 3. Remove the tubing from the probe by gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe. Graphic / reference
Section 9-253
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the wash zone probe

Steps 1. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash zone probe until it passes the ridge on the probe. NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the bend in the probe and the ridge [2]. 2. Slide the probe in the wash zone motor assembly until it is fully seated. Pull up on the wash zone motor to raise it if the probes do not fit into the openings on the wash zone motor assembly. 3. Perform one of the following depending on the probe you are replacing: Wash zone 1 Place the tubing in the tubing guide. Wash zone 2 Check the tubing to ensure it is located on the right side of the wash zone motor assembly under the liquid waste arm. Probe 1 should be located on the right side of the post on top of the wash zone motor assembly. 4. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and rotate the clip clockwise toward the probes [1]. NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked position, ensure the probes are completely seated in the wash zone motor assembly. Graphic / reference

Section 9-254
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification


Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Your ARCHITECT i System has one of the following wash zone motor assemblies: P/N 78326 P/N 96251
To replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor, refer to the instructions for the appropriate motor assembly. Replacing the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (motor assembly P/N 78326) consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-256 Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly, page 9-257
Replacement Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly, page 9-258 Prepare for operation, page 9-258
Verification Perform fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test, page 9-259
Section 9-255
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Perform calibration curve verification, page 9-259
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 45 minutes (includes running quality control samples) None LN 08C94-87 - Tubing/Sensor, temp, WZ
Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the tubing. NOTE: The rear processing center access panel must be opened to access wash zone 2 temperature tubing/sensors. 2. Locate the wash zone temperature tubing/sensor to be replaced on the appropriate wash zone (WZ1 or WZ2) [1]. See the processing center map on the i System processing module for wash zone locations (WZ1 or WZ2). 3. Remove the appropriate internal components cover(s), if present. See ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement, page 9-238. Graphic / reference
Section 9-256
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly
Steps 1. Remove the tubing from the wash zone probe by gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe and through the hole of the wash zone motor [1]. 2. Disconnect the temperature sensor [2]. 3. Hold down the vacuum vessel with one hand. With the other hand, pull up on the tubing near the connection on the vacuum vessel [3]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-257
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

Steps Wash zone 1: 1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the vacuum vessel [1]. 2. Connect the temperature sensor [2]. 3. Slide the tubing through the hole in the back of the wash zone motor assembly and onto the wash zone probe until it passes the ridge on the probe [3]. NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the bend in the probe and the ridge. Wash zone 2: 1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the vacuum vessel [1]. 2. Connect the temperature sensor [2]. 3. Route the tubing from the vacuum vessel under the liquid waste arm to the back of the wash zone motor assembly [4]. 4. Slide the tubing through the hole in the back of the wash zone motor assembly and onto the wash zone probe until it passes the ridge on the probe [3]. NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the bend in the probe and the ridge. Graphic / reference

Section 9-258
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification


Replacing the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (motor assembly P/N 96251) consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-260 Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly, page 9-261
Replacement Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly, page 9-262 Prepare for operation, page 9-263
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 45 minutes (includes running quality control samples) None LN 08C94-87 - Tubing/Sensor, temp, WZ
Section 9-259
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the appropriate processing center cover(s) to access the tubing. NOTE: The rear processing center access panel must be opened to access wash zone 2 temperature tubing/sensors. 2. Locate the wash zone temperature tubing/sensor to be replaced on the appropriate wash zone (WZ1 or WZ2) [1]. Refer to the processing center map on the i System processing module for wash zone locations (WZ1 or WZ2). 3. Remove the appropriate internal components cover(s), if present. For information on removing the internal component covers, refer to ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR internal components' covers, page 9-238. Graphic / reference
Section 9-260
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly
Steps 1. Grasp the tab on top of the wash zone clip located at the front of the wash zone motor assembly. Rotate the clip counterclockwise so the notch in the clip moves away from the wash zone probe [1]. 2. Perform one of the following depending on the tubing/sensor you are replacing: Wash zone 1 Remove the wash zone tubing from the tubing guide, and then lift the probe and the attached tubing out of the wash zone motor assembly. Wash zone 2 Lift the probe and attached tubing out of the wash zone motor assembly. 3. Remove the tubing from the probe by gently pulling the tubing and sliding it from the probe. 4. Disconnect the temperature sensor [2]. 5. Hold down the vacuum vessel with one hand. With the other hand pull up on the tubing near the connection on the vacuum vessel [3]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-261
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly

Steps Wash zone 1: 1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the vacuum vessel [1]. 2. Connect the temperature sensor [2]. 3. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash zone probe until it passes the ridge on the probe. NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the bend in the probe and the ridge [3]. 4. Slide the probe in the wash zone motor assembly until it is fully seated. Pull up on the wash zone motor to raise it if the probes do not fit into the openings on the wash zone motor assembly. 5. Place the tubing in the tubing guide. 6. Grasp the tab on top of the clips and rotate clockwise toward the probes. NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked position, ensure the probes are completely seated in the wash zone motor assembly. Graphic / reference
Section 9-262
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Install the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor assembly (continued)
Steps Wash zone 2: 1. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the vacuum vessel [1]. 2. Connect the temperature sensor [4]. Route the tubing from the vacuum vessel under the liquid waste arm [2] to the right side of the wash zone motor assembly. 3. Push the wash zone tubing onto the wash zone probe until it passes the ridge on the probe. NOTE: The tubing should be halfway between the bend in the probe and the ridge [3]. 4. Slide the probe in the wash zone motor assembly until it is fully seated. (Probe 1 should be located on the right side of the post on top of the wash zone motor assembly.) If the probes do not fit into the openings on the wash zone motor assembly, lift the wash zone motor by pulling it up. 5. Grasp the tab on top of the clip and rotate the clip clockwise toward the probes. NOTE: If the clips do not rotate to their locked position ensure the probes are completely seated in the wash zone motor assembly. Graphic / reference

Verification

Section 9-263
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Replace the waste arm probe/tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Replacing the waste arm probe/tubing consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-265 Remove the waste arm probe tubing, page 9-265
Replacement Install the waste arm probe/tubing, page 9-266
Verification Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-266
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 10 minutes None LN 08C94-89 - Probe/tubing, waste arm
Section 9-264
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps 1. Lift the rear processing center cover to access the liquid waste arm. 2. Open the rear access panel. 3. Locate the waste arm probe and tubing on the liquid waste arm [1]. See the processing center map on the i System processing module for liquid waste arm location (A). Graphic / reference
Remove the waste arm probe tubing

Steps 1. If the liquid waste arm has a tubing routing clip, remove the liquid waste arm tubing from the routing clip [1]. 2. Rotate the waste arm probe clip clockwise [2]. 3. Lift the probe and remove it from the front of the liquid waste arm. 4. Hold down on the vacuum vessel with one hand. With the other hand, pull up on the waste arm tubing near the connection on the vacuum vessel [3]. 5. Remove the waste arm probe and tubing from the processing module. Graphic / reference
Section 9-265
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the waste arm probe/tubing

Steps 1. Slide the tubing on to the probe until it passes the ridge on the probe. NOTE: The tubing should be half way between the bend in the probe and the ridge. 2. Connect the tubing to the barb fitting on the vacuum vessel [1]. 3. Slide the probe into the liquid waste arm until it is fully seated. 4. Lift and rotate the probe clip counterclockwise until the notch in the clip sits over the probe [2]. 5. Place the tubing in the routing clip [3], if the liquid waste arm has a clip. Graphic / reference
Verification
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2151 Prime Wash Zones

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69. 2. Watch the vacuum vessel as the procedure runs and verify liquid is dispensed from the waste arm probe tubing to the vacuum vessel. 3. Close the processing center cover(s). Graphic / reference
i 2000/i 2000SR supply and waste center component replacement

You may need to replace certain supply and waste center components due to normal wear from daily operations. The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions on replacing these components: Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267 Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269 Replace the buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-272
Section 9-266
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

See Supply and waste center (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-98, for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Replacing the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-267 Remove the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, page 9-268
Replacement Install the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, page 9-268 Prepare for operation, page 9-269
Verification Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test, page 9-269
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 10 minutes Absorbent tissue LN 08C94-17 or LN 08C94-27 - Sensor, Level, Pre-Trigger LN 08C94-16 or LN 08C94-26 - Sensor, Level, Trigger
Removal
Prepare for removal

Steps Open the supply and waste center door. Graphic / reference
Section 9-267
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor

Steps 1. Slide the pre-trigger/trigger tray out. NOTE: Use caution when handling the level sensors. Avoid bending the tubing connected to the cap. Avoid applying stress on the wiring and connectors. 2. Disconnect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical connector [1]. 3. Use absorbent tissue to catch any spilled liquid and unscrew the tubing fitting from the level sense tube [2]. 4. Unscrew the level sensor cap [3]. 5. Remove the level sensor and wipe the outside of the assembly with an absorbent tissue. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor

Steps 1. Place the level sensor into the container with the arrow facing towards the front. 2. Tighten the cap [1]. NOTE: When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 3. Connect the pre-trigger or trigger electrical connector [2] on the processing module. NOTE: If you are using replacement part LN 08C94-26 or LN 08C94-27 for the first time you must connect the adapter provided to the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor cable on the cap prior to performing this step. 4. Connect the tubing fitting to the level sensor tube [3]. 5. Slide the tray into place. Graphic / reference
Section 9-268
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Close the supply and waste center door. Graphic / reference
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test

Steps Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test, page 10-677. Graphic / reference
Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Replacing the buffer level sensor consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-270 Remove the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-270 Remove the buffer level sensor, page 9-270
Replacement Install the buffer level sensor, page 9-271 Install the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-271 Prepare for operation, page 9-271
Verification Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test, page 9-272
The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 15 minutes None LN 08C94-15 or LN 08C94-25 - Sensor, Level, Buffer
Section 9-269
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The i System wash buffer reservoir is heavy when full. Use care when handling the container to reduce the risk of injury.
Removal
Prepare for removal

Remove the wash buffer reservoir

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70, if buffer volume is greater than 10 liters. 2. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer reservoir and slide it out. Place the reservoir outside the processing module on the floor. NOTE: Use caution when handling the level sensors. Avoid bending the tubing connected to the cap. Avoid applying stress on the wiring and connectors. Graphic / reference
Remove the buffer level sensor

Steps 1. Push on the white quick disconnect tab to remove the tubing [1]. 2. Disconnect the level sensor cable [2]. 3. Unscrew the cap [3]. 4. Remove the level sensor. Graphic / reference
Section 9-270
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Replacement
Install the buffer level sensor

Steps 1. Place the level sensor into the reservoir and tighten the cap [1]. 2. Snap the white quick disconnect into the tubing [2]. 3. Connect the level sensor cable [3] to the electrical connector on the processing module. NOTE: If you are using replacement part LN 08C94-25 for the first time you must connect the adapter provided to the buffer level sensor cable on the cap prior to performing this step. Graphic / reference
Install the wash buffer reservoir

Steps Graphic / reference
Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer reservoir See Consumable inventory management, and slide the reservoir into the processing module. page 5-24. NOTE: If you unloaded buffer to allow for the removal of the buffer reservoir from the processing module, add wash buffer. Completely fill the wash buffer reservoir to accurately track wash buffer inventory.

Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69, to remove any air that may be present. 2. Visually check for leaks while performing the flush. If you observe drips or leaks, repeat the installation procedure. 3. Close the supply and waste center door. Graphic / reference
Section 9-271
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Verification
Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test

Steps Perform solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure 3410 Level Sensors Test, page 10-677. Graphic / reference
Replace the buffer filter (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Replacing the buffer filter consists of the following procedures: Removal Prepare for removal, page 9-272 Remove the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-273 Remove the buffer filter, page 9-273
Replacement Install the buffer filter, page 9-274 Install the wash buffer reservoir, page 9-274 Prepare for operation, page 9-274
Verification Load wash buffer, page 9-274

The processing module must be in the Warming or Ready status. 15 minutes Absorbent tissue LN 08C94-28 - Filter, Buffer
CAUTION: Lifting Hazard. The i System wash buffer reservoir is heavy when full. Use care when handling the container to reduce the risk of injury.
Removal
Prepare for removal

Section 9-272
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the wash buffer reservoir
Steps 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70, if buffer volume is greater than 10 liters. 2. Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer reservoir and slide it out. Place the reservoir outside the processing module on the floor. Graphic / reference
Remove the buffer filter

Steps 1. Press down and out on the buffer filter bracket [1]. 2. Remove the filter from the holding feature in the frame of the supply and waste center. 3. Place an absorbent tissue under the buffer filter quick disconnects. 4. Disconnect the two grey quick disconnects at either end of the filter [2]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-273
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the buffer filter

Steps 1. Connect the buffer filter to the two grey quick disconnects [1]. 2. Place the buffer filter onto the holding feature in the frame of the supply and waste center. 3. Place the buffer filter bracket over the filter and press into place, securing the filter to the frame [2]. Graphic / reference
Install the wash buffer reservoir

Steps Grasp the hand holds on the side of the buffer reservoir and slide the reservoir into the processing module. Graphic / reference

Steps Close the supply and waste center door. Graphic / reference
Verification
Load wash buffer

Steps Load wash buffer to verify the buffer filter and tubing function properly and that no leaks occur. Graphic / reference See Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
SCC component replacement

You may need to replace certain SCC (system control center) components due to normal wear from daily operations.
Section 9-274
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The procedures that are common to both the c System and the i System are: Replace the keyboard, page 9-275 Replace the mouse, page 9-278 Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281 Replace the printer, page 9-285 Replace the speakers, page 9-288 Replace the touch-screen monitor, page 9-291
See System control center, page 1-8, for component locations when performing replacement procedures.
Replace the keyboard

Replacing the keyboard consists of the following procedures: Removal Power off the SCC, page 9-276 Remove the keyboard, page 9-277
Replacement Install the keyboard, page 9-277 Prepare for operation, page 9-278
Verification Verify keyboard operation, page 9-278

The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 10 minutes None LN 07D11-01 - Keyboard - English LN 07D11-20 - Keyboard - French LN 07D11-30 - Keyboard - German LN 07D11-40 - Keyboard - Italian LN 07D11-50 - Keyboard - Spanish LN 07D11-60 - Keyboard - Japanese
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of CPU (central processing unit) components.
Section 9-275
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Removal
Power off the SCC

For information about the SCC power off IMPORTANT: To prevent flooding when your system procedure, see System startup, pause, and is connected to an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic shutdown, page 5-3. Reconstitution Module) accessory, do not turn off the SCC if the ARM is in the process of filling the wash buffer reservoir. 1. Select Overview from the menu bar, and then select Snapshot. 2. Select F3 - Shutdown. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to initiate shutdown. 4. Wait for the information window to display, and then simultaneously press the Ctrl+Alt+Delete keys on the keyboard. The SCC Confirm Exit prompt displays. 5. Leave the Shutdown Computer option selected, and then select OK. 6. Wait for the information window to display indicating it is OK to turn off the power. 7. Press and hold the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn off power to the SCC. It may take up to 10 seconds for the SCC to power off.
Section 9-276
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the keyboard
Steps Disconnect the keyboard cable from the port on the back of the CPU [1]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the keyboard

Steps Connect the keyboard to the port on the back of the CPU [1]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-277
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

Steps 1. Power off the processing module(s). Graphic / reference
For information about the SCC power on procedure, see System startup, pause, and NOTE: You must power off the processing module(s) shutdown, page 5-3. prior to turning on the power to the SCC (system control center). If the processing module(s) power is on, communication is not properly initialized between the system components.
2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. 3. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen. 4. Power on the processing module(s).
Verification
Verify keyboard operation

Steps Verify proper keyboard functionality by using the keyboard to navigate through the screens. Graphic / reference
Replace the mouse

Replacing the mouse consists of the following procedures: Removal Power off the SCC, page 9-279 Remove the mouse, page 9-280
Replacement Install the mouse, page 9-280 Prepare for operation, page 9-281
Verification Verify mouse operation, page 9-281

The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 10 minutes None LN 07D01-99 - Mouse, SCC
Section 9-278
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of CPU (central processing unit) components. Removal
Power off the SCC

Section 9-279
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the mouse

Steps Disconnect the mouse cable from the port in the back of the CPU (central processing unit) [1]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the mouse

Steps Connect the mouse cable to the port in the back of the CPU (central processing unit) [1]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-280
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. 3. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen. 4. Power on the processing module(s).
Verification
Verify mouse operation

Steps Verify proper mouse functionality by using the mouse to navigate through the screens. Graphic / reference
Replace the network hub and cables

Replacing the network hub and cables consists of the following procedures: Removal Power off the SCC, page 9-279 Remove the network hub, page 9-283
Replacement Install the network hub, page 9-284 Prepare for operation, page 9-284
Verification Verify network hub operation, page 9-285

The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 10 minutes
Section 9-281
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
None LN 07D04-01 - Network Hub & Cables, AA LN 07D04-12 - Network Hub & Cables, AE LN 07D04-24 - Network Hub & Cables, AX LN 07D04-36 - Network Hub & Cables, AZ LN 07D04-48 - Network Hub & Cables, BJ NOTE: List numbers are specific to geographic locations. See SCC component list numbers, page Appendix D-15, for the appropriate list number for your area.
NOTE: Upgrades to the computer hardware may change the location of network hub components.
Section 9-282
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Removal
Power off the SCC

Remove the network hub

Steps 1. Power off the network hub if the network hub has a power button. 2. Unplug the network hub power cord from the wall outlet or UPS (uninterruptible power supply). 3. Disconnect the communication cables from the network hub [1]. Graphic / reference
Section 9-283
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Replacement
Install the network hub

Steps 1. Plug the new network hub power cord into the network hub [1]. 2. Connect the communication cables into the ports of the network hub [2]. NOTE: You can connect the cables to any position (1-8) on the network hub. 3. Plug the network hub into the wall outlet or UPS (uninterruptible power supply). Graphic / reference

2. Power on the network hub if the network hub has a power button. 3. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. 4. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen. 5. Power on the processing module(s).
Section 9-284
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Verification
Verify network hub operation

Steps 1. Verify the LEDs on the network hub are illuminated for the positions containing communication cables [1]. 2. Verify the status (Stopped, Warming, or Ready) of the processing module and the sample handler. 3. Repeat the removal and replacement procedure if the status remains Offline. An Offline status indicates the processing module and/or sample handler is not communicating correctly through the network hub. Graphic / reference
Replace the printer

Replacing the printer consists of the following procedures: Removal Power off the SCC, page 9-279 Remove the printer, page 9-287
Replacement Install the printer, page 9-287 Prepare for operation, page 9-288
Verification Verify printer operation, page 9-288

The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 10 minutes None NOTE: Multiple printers are available under different list numbers. The removal and replacement procedure is the same. If the replacement printer is a different model from the existing printer, contact your Area Customer Support to configure the printer after installation.
Section 9-285
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Power off the SCC

Section 9-286
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the printer
Steps 1. Power off the printer. NOTE: If the printer is an HP LaserJet 1200, go to Step 2. (The HP LaserJet 1200 does not have a power switch. It is powered on when connected to a power outlet.) 2. Unplug the printer power cord from the wall outlet. 3. Unscrew and disconnect the printer from the port on the back of the CPU [1]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the printer

Steps 1. Connect the printer cable to the printer. 2. Press the metal tabs toward the connector to secure the cable to the printer. NOTE: If the printer is an HP LaserJet 1200, you must remove a cover on the side of the printer to connect the printer cable to the printer. 3. Connect the printer power cord to the printer. 4. Connect the printer cable to the port on the back of the CPU. 5. Secure the cable to the CPU by screwing in the connector [1]. 6. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet. NOTE: If the SCC (system control center) is connected to a UPS (uninterruptible power supply), do not plug the printer into the UPS. Graphic / reference
Section 9-287
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. 3. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen. 4. Power on the processing module(s). 5. Power on the printer. NOTE: The HP LaserJet 1200 does not have a power switch. It is powered on when connected to a power outlet.
Verification
Verify printer operation

Steps Print a report to verify the printer is functioning properly. Graphic / reference
Replace the speakers

Replacing the SCC speakers consists of the following procedures: Removal Power off the SCC, page 9-279 Remove the speakers, page 9-290
Replacement Install the speakers, page 9-290 Prepare for operation, page 9-291
Verification
Section 9-288
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Prerequisite Estimated time required Tools/materials required Replacement parts The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 10 minutes None LN 07D05-11 - Speakers
Power off the SCC

Section 9-289
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
Remove the speakers

Steps Disconnect the speaker cable from the port on the back of the CPU (central processing unit) [1]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the speakers

Steps 1. Press down and out on the back panel of each speaker [1]. 2. Remove the cables located inside. 3. Insert two 1.5 V "C" batteries into each speaker [2]. 4. Replace the back panel on each speaker. 5. Connect the cable from the left speaker into the back of the right speaker (speaker containing power button) [3]. 6. Connect the speaker cable from the right speaker to the port on the back of the CPU (central processing unit) [4]. 7. Press in the power button on the right speaker. NOTE: A red power-on light illuminates. Graphic / reference
Section 9-290
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. An audible tone sounds when the speakers are installed correctly and powered on. 3. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen. 4. Power on the processing module(s).
Verification
Replace the touch-screen monitor

Replacing the touch-screen monitor consists of the following procedures: Removal Power off the SCC, page 9-279 Remove the monitor, page 9-293
Replacement Install the monitor, page 9-293 Prepare for operation, page 9-294
Verification Verify monitor operation, page 9-294

The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 20 minutes
Section 9-291
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9
None LN 07D03-17 - Monitor 17", Touchscreen
Power off the SCC

Section 9-292
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Remove the monitor
Steps 1. Press the power switch on the front of the monitor to power off the monitor. 2. Unplug the monitor power cord from the wall outlet or UPS (uninterruptible power supply). 3. Unscrew and disconnect the monitor cable from the port on the back of the CPU [1]. 4. Unscrew and disconnect the touch-screen cable from the port on the back of the CPU [2]. Graphic / reference
Replacement
Install the monitor

Steps 1. Connect the monitor cable to the port on the back of the CPU. Secure the cable to the CPU by screwing in the connector [1]. 2. Connect the touch-screen cable to the port on the back of the CPU. Secure the cable to the CPU by screwing in the connector [2]. 3. Connect the monitor power cord to the monitor [3]. 4. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet or UPS (uninterruptible power supply). Graphic / reference
Section 9-293
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 9

2. Press the power switch on the front of the CPU to turn on the SCC. 3. Press the power switch on the front of the monitor to turn on the monitor. 4. Wait until the SCC displays the Snapshot screen. 5. Power on the processing module(s).
Verification
Verify monitor operation

Steps 1. Verify the monitor displays the Snapshot screen. 2. Verify proper touch-screen functionality by using various navigation elements such as an icon, menu item, and a function bar button. 3. Contact your Area Customer Support if the touchscreen does not respond to the area you touch. Your touch-screen monitor may require calibration. Graphic / reference
Section 9-294
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10

Troubleshooting and diagnostics <F=0>
Introduction
Problems with your ARCHITECT System are characterized by symptoms. Troubleshooting tools, references, and suggested techniques are provided to help you trace the symptom(s) to one or more root causes. You can then perform the corrective actions to resolve the problem. Troubleshooting and diagnostic topics include: Approach to troubleshooting, page 10-2 Provides a general model for troubleshooting your ARCHITECT System. System logs screen, page 10-11 Provides a description of the software screen and window associated with system records of error-related messages Error codes, page 10-17 Lists possible error codes and their messages, and provides detailed information on probable causes and corrective actions. Observed problems, page 10-547 Lists symptoms you may observe and provides detailed information on probable causes and corrective actions. System diagnostics, page 10-650 Provides a description of all system diagnostic procedures, the software screens and windows associated with diagnostic activities, and step-by-step instructions for performing related procedures. Miscellaneous corrective action procedures, page 10-697 Includes procedures that are frequently provided as corrective actions for resolving error codes and/or observed problems.
Section 10-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics

Approach to troubleshooting
Section 10
Troubleshooting consists of implementing a practical, systematic approach to problem solving. This approach focuses on: Observing, recognizing, and categorizing symptoms Identifying the probable cause(s) Systematically eliminating each potential problem (from most likely to least likely)
The troubleshooting model that follows describes a five step approach to defining symptoms, identifying problems, and implementing solutions. When troubleshooting your ARCHITECT System, you should also include considerations appropriate to your specific environment. 1. Observe and recognize symptoms To properly analyze and correct a problem you must first identify the symptoms. Symptoms can be, but are not limited to: Error messages Observed problems, such as a noise, fluid leak, trend in controls, and so forth NOTE: If you are able to resolve the observed problem, no further action is required. 2. Categorize the symptom(s) By grouping like symptoms into categories, you automatically eliminate some problems as probable causes. Categories of symptoms include: System, see: System troubleshooting variables (c System), page 10-4 System troubleshooting variables (i System), page 10-5
Reagents, see: Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System), page 10-7 Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System), page 10-8
Operator troubleshooting variables, page 10-8 Environmental troubleshooting variables, page 10-9
Section 10-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Isolate the root cause and create a plan of action Based on the probable causes you identify, devise a plan that begins by addressing the most likely first and progresses to the least likely. By addressing one probable cause at a time you are able to isolate the resolution, and then reproduce the solution to a specific problem. Diagnostic resources and tools include: Error code and message ARCHITECT System Operations Manual and/or Help Section 10 Troubleshooting and diagnostics Appendix B Verification of ARCHITECT i System assay claims Section 4 Performance characteristics and specifications
System logs (Message history and Temporary) Levey-Jennings graph Diagnostic procedures Maintenance logs Maintenance procedures Reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet)
4. Resolve the problem Carefully perform the steps required to solve the problem. Problems are corrected by: Making adjustments, such as tightening connections or removing jams Calibrating system components or assays Replacing or repairing system components Running new controls
5. Verify the resolution worked Verify the symptoms no longer exist: Perform the appropriate verification procedure Check control values, if appropriate
Section 10-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
If you continue to observe the symptoms, perform the steps to resolve the next most likely problem. Repeat this process until the problem is resolved.
System troubleshooting variables (c System)

The system category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to system performance. Within this category, there are more specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s). System troubleshooting variables include: Fluidic subsystems, page 10-4 Optical subsystem, page 10-4 Hardware, page 10-5 Software, page 10-5 Consumables, page 10-5
Fluidic subsystems Fluidic subsystems consist of hardware components that control the precision and accuracy of liquid level sensing, aspiration, and dispense. Additionally, these components distribute the fluids used to wash the probes.
Examples Pipettors, probes, pressure monitors, syringes and valves, tubing, processing module circuit boards, pumps, and ICT unit Liquid level sense error messages (3000-3999), imprecise results, and/or erratic results
Symptoms
Optical subsystem The optical subsystem consists of hardware components and accessories that control concise and accurate optical readings.
Examples Symptoms Lamp, heat absorbing filter, lenses, cuvettes, water bath, optics unit Optical-read error messages (6000-6999) and/or shift in values
Section 10-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Hardware Hardware consists of the mechanical components that move consumables and samples through the system and distribute power and electrical signals.
Examples Symptoms Carousels, sensors, circuit boards, and bar code readers Homing failures, jams, step loss, and motor stalls (robotic and sensor error messages 5000-5999) and/or bar code reader error messages (4000-4999)
Software Software consists of computer instructions that interpret system and assay information, calculate results, and provide the interface for controlling the system hardware.
Examples Symptoms System, assay, maintenance, and diagnostic software Software error messages (9000-9999), cannot power on the SCC
Consumables Consumables are supplies that are required to run assays.

Examples Symptoms Sample cups, bulk solutions, reagent cartridges, and onboard solutions Imprecise results and/or erratic results
System troubleshooting variables (i System)

The system category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to system performance. Within this category, there are more specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s). System troubleshooting variables include: Fluidic subsystems, page 10-6 Optical subsystem, page 10-6 Hardware, page 10-6 Software, page 10-6 Consumables, page 10-7
Section 10-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Fluidic subsystems Fluidic subsystems are the hardware components that control the precision and accuracy of liquid level sensing, aspiration, and dispense. Additionally, these components distribute the fluids used to wash the probes.
Examples Pipettors, probes, LLS (liquid level sense) antennas, syringes and valves, dispensers, tubing, pumps, processing module circuit boards, and WAM (wash aspirate monitor) thermistors Liquid level sense error messages (3000-3999), imprecise results, and/or erratic results
Symptoms
Optical subsystem The optical subsystem consists of hardware components that control concise and accurate optical readings.
Examples Symptoms CMIA reader, shutter, and reader magnet Optical-read error messages (6000-6999) and/or shift in values
Hardware Hardware consists of the mechanical components that move consumables and samples through the system and distribute power and electrical signals.
Examples Symptoms Carousel, sensors, RV (reaction vessel) loader, circuit boards, and bar code readers Homing failures, jams, step loss, and motor stalls (robotic and sensor error messages 5000-5999) and/or bar code reader error messages (4000-4999)
Software Software consists of computer instructions that interpret system and assay information, calculate results, and provide the interface for controlling the system hardware.
Examples Symptoms System, assay, maintenance, and diagnostic software Software error messages (9000-9999), cannot power on the SCC
Section 10-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Consumables Consumables are supplies that are required to run assays.

Examples Symptoms Sample cups, bulk solutions, and RVs (reaction vessels) Imprecise results and/or erratic results
Reagent troubleshooting variables (c System)

The reagent category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to processing results. Within this category, there are more specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s). Reagent troubleshooting variables include: Reagent kits, page 10-7 Controls, page 10-7 Calibrators, page 10-7
Reagent kits Reagent kits contain the consumables that detect and/or measure specific analyte presence or concentration in samples.
Examples Symptoms Reagents, sample diluents, and pretreatments Control(s) out of range and/or trends and shifts in control and/or patient results
Controls Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that allow performance monitoring within a clinical range.
Examples Symptoms Analyte-specific and multiconstituent controls Control out of range, imprecise control results, and/or trends and shifts in control and/or patient results
Calibrators Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes used to create the calibration against which samples are measured.
Examples Symptoms Analyte-specific and multiconstituent calibrators Shift in control and patient values
Section 10-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Reagent troubleshooting variables (i System)

The reagent category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to processing results. Within this category, there are more specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s). Reagent troubleshooting variables include: Reagent kits, page 10-8 Controls, page 10-8 Calibrators, page 10-8
Reagent kits Reagent kits contain the consumables that detect and/or measure specific analyte presence or concentration in samples.
Examples Symptoms Antibody coated microparticles, conjugate, and assay-specific diluent Control(s) out of range and/or trends and shifts in control and/or patient results
Controls Controls are samples with known concentrations of analytes that allow performance monitoring within a clinical range.
Examples Symptoms Analyte-specific and multiconstituent controls Control out of range, imprecise control results, and/or trends and shifts in control and/or patient results
Calibrators Calibrators are samples with known concentrations of analytes used to create the calibration against which samples are measured.
Examples Symptoms Analyte-specific calibrators Shift in control and patient results
Operator troubleshooting variables

The operator category is a group of symptoms that relate to proper system operation and maintenance. Within this category, the actions
Section 10-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

of a single operator and/or the actions of multiple operators can result in a variety of symptoms.
Examples Symptoms A new user and a trained operator Bubbles in reagents or samples, particulate matter or fibrin in samples, general error messages (0001-0999), assay specific error messages (1000-1999), error code messages generated as a result of improper maintenance or component replacement
Environmental troubleshooting variables

The environmental category is a high level group of symptoms that relate to processing results. Within this category, there are more specific subcategories or variables. By tracing an error or problem to one of these variables, you can begin to isolate the probable cause(s). Environmental troubleshooting variables include: Physical requirements, page 10-9 Electrical requirements, page 10-9 Host interface components, page 10-10
Physical requirements Physical requirements identify the environmental conditions needed to ensure consistent system performance.
Examples Symptoms Room temperature and/or humidity, location, processing module and sample handler clearances, and water quality Temperature error messages (7000-7999) and/or inadequate airflow
Electrical requirements Electrical requirements identify the power requirements needed to ensure consistent system performance and optical readings.
Examples Symptoms Power outlet, voltages, and dedicated line Loss of power to the system
Section 10-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Host interface components Host interface components enable communication between the laboratory information system and the system control center.
Examples Symptoms Ports, cables, and connections Communication error messages (8000-8999)
Section 10-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System logs screen
System logs screen

From the System logs screen you can view (by module) the: Temporary message log - displays non-critical error-related messages that you can address, and then delete Message history log - displays and stores a record of error-related messages that you use to troubleshoot problems associated with system performance and/or results reporting
You can also access windows to print the Temporary Message Log and Message History Log reports, and find a specific message(s) in the system logs. Figure 10.1: System logs screen
For descriptions of these fields, see System logs screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-133. To sort columns on this screen, select the desired column heading. The information sorts as described in the following table.
Column DATE/TIME M ERROR CODE Sort description Chronologically in descending order Numerically in ascending order Numerically in ascending order
Section 10-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System logs screen
Section 10
To display this screen, see Access the System logs screen, page 10-12.
Related procedures... Review message logs, page 10-13

Find a specific message, page 10-13 View low level error messages, page 10-14 Delete a temporary message, page 10-15 Print a report, page 5-333
Access the System logs screen

Perform this procedure to display the System logs screen.
Prerequisite Module status Supplies NA Any NA
User access level General operator
To access the System logs screen: NOTE: You may also access this screen from the Snapshot screen by selecting the LIS, ARM, or LAS button. Select System from the menu bar, and then select System logs. The System logs screen displays.
Procedures - System logs screen

Procedures that can be performed from the System logs screen and its related windows include: Review message logs, page 10-13 Find a specific message, page 10-13 View low level error messages, page 10-14 Delete a temporary message, page 10-15 Print a report, page 5-333
Section 10-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Review message logs

Perform this procedure to display the System logs screen. From this screen you can view the Temporary message and Message history logs. To find specific messages, see Find a specific message, page 10-13. To view low level messages, see View low level error messages, page 10-14.
Prerequisite Module status Supplies NA Any NA
System logs screen
To review message logs: 1. Select System from the menu bar, and then select System logs. The System logs screen displays. 2. Select the Log selection list button, and then select the desired log. To print the Message History Report, see Print the Message History Log report, page 5-342. To print Temporary Message Log report, see Print a report, page 5-333.
Find a specific message

Perform this procedure to search for a specific message(s) in the system logs when necessary for troubleshooting.
Prerequisite Module status Supplies

Any NA
To find a specific message: 1. Select F3 - Find on the System logs screen. The Find options (System logs) window displays. 2. Select and/or enter your search conditions. You can narrow the results returned by entering/selecting more criteria.
Section 10-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System logs screen
Section 10
NOTE: A wildcard search allows you to type a partial entry followed by an asterisk (*) to begin a search when you do not know the entire entry. You can use the asterisk (*) wildcard character in all fields except position (P). Example: If you enter 123* in the Error code data entry box, all error codes starting with 123 display. This list could include 1234, 1235, or 1236. 3. Select Done to initiate the search. The System logs screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records.

Find options (System logs) window, page 10-15
View low level error messages

Perform this procedure to view additional error messages when necessary for troubleshooting. To find specific error messages, see Find a specific message, page 10-13.

Any NA
To view message details: 1. Select the Log selection list button on the System logs screen, and then select Message history log. 2. Select F3 - Find. The Find options window displays. 3. Select the Error level: Low check box. 4. Select Done to display the messages. The System logs screen displays with the text "Search results:" in the title bar. NOTE: Select the refresh button to display all records.
Section 10-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Find options (System logs) window, page 10-15 System logs screen
Delete a temporary message

Perform this procedure to delete a temporary message(s) after correcting the issue that caused the error.

Any NA
To delete a temporary message: 1. Select the desired message(s) from the table on the System logs screen or select F2 - Select all. 2. Select F5 - Delete. A confirmation message displays. 3. Select OK to delete the message(s).
Windows - System logs screen

Windows you can access from the System logs screen include: Find options (System logs) window, page 10-15 Print options window, page 5-346
Find options (System logs) window

From the Find options (System logs) window, you can search for specific item(s) in the logs by entering search criteria in one or more fields.
Section 10-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System logs screen
Section 10
Figure 10.2: Find options (System logs) window
For descriptions of these fields, see Find options (System logs) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-134.
Related procedures... Find a specific message, page 10-13
Section 10-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Error codes
Error codes are divided into ten sections that reflect the major categories in which errors may occur: General error codes (0001-0999), page 10-17 Assay specific error codes (1000-1999), page 10-113 Maintenance error codes (2000-2999), page 10-181 Level sense error codes (3000-3999), page 10-230 Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999), page 10-311 Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999), page 10-333 Optics error codes (6000-6999), page 10-411 Temperature error codes (7000-7999), page 10-420 Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999), page 10-440 Software error codes (9000-9999), page 10-477
General error codes (0001-0999)

The general error code category includes error codes between 0001-0999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
United States International 1-877-4ABBOTT (1-877-422-2688) Call your Area Customer Support representative.
NOTE: For corrective actions that involve hazardous activity refer to Hazards, page 8-1, for precautions you should take to minimize exposure and prevent personal injury or system damage. Hazard activities include but are not limited to: Replacing system probes Handling reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens Removing physical obstructions Changing the lamp Removing system waste
Section 10-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0102

Unable to perform requested operation, Processing Module not in correct status.
Probable cause Attempted one of the following when the processing module status did not allow the activity: Start up Reagent scanning Reagent carousel advance The first time run was selected for the processing Cycle power to the processing module and/or module, error code 4103 - "Reagent bar code sample handler, page 5-12. reader not responding" occurred during the Run initialization. Hardware failure: Reagent bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action Perform the activity when the processing module status changes.
Error code: 0104

Unable to perform requested operation, Sample Handler not in correct status.
Probable cause Attempted one of the following when the sample handler status did not allow the activity: Start up Pause Corrective action Perform the activity when the sample handler status changes.
Error code: 0105

Batch (x) terminated. Final sample is in a carrier and that carrier label cannot be read. x = Batch name
Probable cause Corrective action
A non-bar coded batch is in process and 5 or fewer 1. Determine the samples present in the sample samples remain to be identified. The bar code label carrier that were not processed. on the sample carrier cannot be read by the sample 2. Place a new batch order for these samples. ID bar code reader. The system assumes this carrier contains the last samples for the batch, 3. Place the samples into a different sample carrier. therefore the batch is terminated. 4. Refer to error code 4204, for corrective action, if error continues.
Section 10-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Error code: 0106

Unable to perform installation, a valid ARCHITECT CD is not in the CD drive.
Probable cause Software upgrade was attempted without the CD installed in the CD drive. Corrective action 1. Place the ARCHITECT CD into the drive. 2. Restart the software upgrade procedure.
Error codes
Error code: 0107

Unable to perform requested operation, Sample Handler or Processing Module not in correct status.
Probable cause Attempted one of the following when the processing module status did not allow the activity: Selected pause when the status is Stopped. Selected start up when the status is Running. Hardware failure: Keypad Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action Perform a different operation or wait until the module changes status.
Error code: 0108

Unload Queue at capacity, remove Sample Carriers.
Probable cause Unload queue is full of sample carriers. Hardware failure: Unload queue sensor Corrective action Remove carriers from the unload queue. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0109

Unable to process test, Processing Module not Running.
Probable cause User selected stop before processing began. Corrective action Start up the processing module when the reason for the stop no longer exists. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 0110

Unable to execute command, Processing Module or Sample Handler Stopped.
User selected stop for either the sample handler Start up the processing module and/or sample or processing module. handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. Communication or hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform requested operation, previously requested operation still in progress.
Probable cause System is currently performing a requested activity such as flush, reagent scan, or carousel advance. Corrective action Request the new activity when the current activity is complete.
Error codes
Error code: 0112

Unable to process test, Sample Handler Stopped.
Probable cause User selected stop. Corrective action Start up the sample handler when the reason for the stop no longer exists. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Hardware failure: Sample handler keypad Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Processing module stopped because of a previous hardware failure.
Error code: 0113

Unable to delete assay, at least one module is not in the correct status.
Probable cause Attempted to delete an assay while the processing module(s) are not in the correct status. Corrective action Delete the assay when the status for all processing modules is Stopped, Ready, or Offline.
Error code: 0114

Unable to process test, assay deleted.
Assay deleted, all pending orders for the assay are Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the sent to exceptions. samples sent to exceptions, if required.
Section 10-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0115

No assay found for reagent kit in position (x). x = Reagent carousel position
Probable cause The assay file required for the reagent kit is either not installed or it is not the correct version. The manually defined reagent name does not match the name, including capitalization, encoded in the bar code. Corrective action Install the correct assay file. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. Reconfigure the reagent name, see Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93.
Error code: 0116

Invalid order, missing Carrier/Carousel or Position.
Add order was selected when the information in Enter valid data in both the C (carrier/carousel) and either the carrier/carousel or position data entry box P (position) data entry boxes. was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0117

Invalid entry, no assays selected.
Probable cause Add order was selected when no assay was selected. Corrective action Select one or more assays.
Done was selected in the Select assays window Select one or more assays. with no assays selected.
Error code: 0118

Invalid order, missing Sample ID.
Probable cause Add order was selected before a sample ID was entered in the sample ID field. Corrective action Enter a sample ID in the SID data entry box.
Section 10-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Batch (x) deleted, batch (y) has been initiated. x = Name of deleted batch y = Name of overlapping batch
Error codes
A batch was in process when a carrier was loaded No corrective action is required. Remaining tests containing a sample that is defined as the start of a from the batch in process are deleted. Batch tests different batch. in process continue. Tests from the new batch start. To avoid future occurrences, do not start another batch until the batch in process terminates.
Error code: 0120

Invalid sample type detected in batch (y). Sample is in C/P (x). x = Carrier and position of sample y = Name of batch
When processing a non-bar coded batch, a When processing a non-bar coded batch, do not sample with a bar code was found for which there place bar coded samples within the batch unless were no tests ordered. tests are ordered for the sample. When processing a bar coded batch, a sample When processing a bar coded batch, do not place with no bar code was found for which there were non-bar coded samples within the batch unless no tests ordered. tests are ordered for the sample in the position. There are empty positions in a sample carrier during a bar coded batch. When processing a bar coded batch, do not leave open positions in the sample carrier.
Error code: 0121

Invalid order, Assay (x), number (y) is no longer installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted. 1. Delete the rerun test order. 2. Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the tests to be rerun, if required. The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted 1. Delete the rerun test order. and then reinstalled. 2. Reorder the test for rerun.
Section 10-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0122

No Reagent kits found during reagent scan.
Probable cause Processing module does not have any reagents, therefore the status cannot change to Running. Corrective action Load reagents on the specified processing module, and then select run.
Error code: 0123

Unable to fail calibration curve, Processing Module (x) Running. x = Processing module number (1-4)
Probable cause Attempted to fail an active calibration curve when the processing module status was Running. Corrective action 1. Pause the processing module, page 5-14. 2. Fail the desired calibration curve when the status is Ready. See Fail a calibration curve, page 6-32.
Error code: 0124

Ending Sample ID cannot be the same as the starting Sample ID.
Probable cause When creating a bar coded batch order, the same number was entered for both the starting and ending sample ID. Corrective action Change either the starting or the ending sample ID so they are not the same.
Error code: 0125

Invalid rerun request, missing Carrier/Carousel and Position for Sample ID (x). x = Sample ID
Probable cause Ordered a rerun for an unlabeled tube without entering carrier/carousel and position information. Corrective action Enter the carrier/carousel and position for the rerun sample.
Error code: 0126

Unable to delete order, test is in progress.
Probable cause Requested deletion of an order when the test is in process. Corrective action Delete the desired results when all tests for the sample are complete.
Section 10-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid order, Sample ID previously assigned to Patient ID (x). x = Patient ID
Probable cause Entered an order for a sample ID already associated with a different patient ID. Corrective action 1. Verify the patient ID associated with the sample ID is correct for all orders. 2. Enter the correct sample ID. NOTE: Patient ID is optional and is entered on the Details for sample window.
Error codes
Error code: 0128

Invalid rerun request, Assay (x), number (y) no longer installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted. 1. Delete the rerun test order. 2. Reinstall the assay and create new orders for the tests to be rerun, if required. The assay file for the test to be rerun was deleted 1. Delete the rerun test order. and then reinstalled. 2. Reorder the test for rerun.
Error code: 0129

The end time (x) is earlier than the start time for the specified date (y). x = The end time y = The date of the start time
Specified incorrect date and time in a Find window. Enter a correct date and time.
Error code: 0130

Invalid entry, (x) not within range (y - z). x = Value entered y = Minimum range value z = Maximum range value
Probable cause Value entered was not within the specified range. Corrective action Enter a value within the specified range. NOTE: Some data entry boxes may also be left blank.
Section 10-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0131

Invalid entry, user input (x) for character (y). x = User input y = Number of characters from left in data entry box
Probable cause Character in the position specified is missing or incorrect. Corrective action Enter the correct value for the specified position.
Error code: 0132

Unable to install procedure (x), an equal or higher version already exists. x = Procedure name
Probable cause The same or higher version of the procedure is already installed. Corrective action No corrective action required if the request was made in error. To install a lower version, delete the procedure and then install the desired version. See Install or delete a maintenance or diagnostic procedure file, page 2-218.
Error code: 0133

Unable to install (x) procedure, system software version not compatible. x = Procedure name
Probable cause The procedure requires a newer version of ARCHITECT System software. Corrective action Upgrade the ARCHITECT System software to the appropriate version and reinstall the procedure. (Contact your Area Customer Support.)
Error code: 0134

Procedure (x) does not exist. x = Procedure number
Probable cause Wrong procedure number entered when deleting a procedure. Corrective action Enter a valid number for the procedure you are deleting.
Error code: 0135

Unable to install software. Processing Module is not in the correct status.
Probable cause Processing module status is Running, Scheduled pause, Initializing, or Scanning. Corrective action Install the software when the processing module status is Stopped, Offline, Ready, or Warming.
Section 10-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform procedure, Module (x) not in the correct status. x = Module number (0-4)
Error codes
The specified processing module or sample handler Refer to the Version details for procedure is not in the correct status to perform the procedure. (diagnostics) window, page 10-656, to determine the status required for performing the procedure.
Error code: 0137

Unable to perform (x) procedure, insufficient user access. x = Procedure name
The current user does not have access sufficient to Use a logon with the access required to execute the execute the selected procedure. procedure.
Error code: 0138

Unable to approve maintenance log, insufficient user access.
The current user does not have access sufficient to Log on with system administrator access. See Log approve a maintenance month. on (system administrator), page 1-23.
Error code: 0139

Unable to modify approval status for a previously approved maintenance log.
Probable cause Requested an approval status update for a maintenance month that is already approved. Corrective action Select the correct month, and then select F4 Approve.
Error code: 0140

Unable to approve, no maintenance activity.
Probable cause Requested an approval status change for a month with no maintenance activity. Corrective action Select the correct month, and then select F4 Approve.
Error code: 0141

Unable to approve current month.
Requested an approval status for the current month Select the correct month, and then select F4 or a future month. Approve.
Section 10-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0142

Unable to install software, host transmission is in process.
Probable cause Results are transferring to the host. Software cannot be installed during this process. Corrective action Install the software when the transmission is complete.
Error code: 0143

Unable to process test, no reagent kits eligible on the selected Processing Module.
Probable cause The required reagent kit is not available on the selected processing module. All of the reagent kits on the module for the assay are either empty, expired, or not calibrated. Corrective action Verify reagent inventory for the assay. See Verify reagent inventory on a single module, page 5-79.
Error code: 0144

Invalid order, manual dilution factor is inconsistent with previous order for Sample ID (x). x = Sample ID
Probable cause A manual dilution was requested for a sample ID that already has an order using a different manual dilution. Corrective action 1. Order the test using the same manual dilution. 2. Assign another sample ID to the new dilution, if a different manual dilution is required.
Error code: 0145

Missing entry, Level name required.
Probable cause The control level name is not entered in the required field. Corrective action Enter a control level name.
Error code: 0146

Missing entry, Lot no. required.
Probable cause A control lot number is not entered in the required field. Corrective action Enter the control lot number.
Section 10-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid entry, control Level name already exists for this lot.
Probable cause The entered control level name already exists for this lot. Corrective action Enter a unique control level name.
Error codes
Error code: 0148

Invalid entry, control Lot no. already exists for this assay.
Probable cause A duplicate lot number was entered. Corrective action Enter a unique control lot number for the control.
Error code: 0149

Invalid request, unable to delete default control lot.
Probable cause Attempted to delete the default control lot. Corrective action 1. Define a new control lot as the default. 2. Delete the desired control lot.
Error code: 0150

Invalid request, select another lot, then specify it as default.
Attempted to deselect the current default control lot. Select another control lot and define it as the default lot.
Error code: 0151

Missing entry, Expected mean required.
Probable cause The expected mean value is not entered. Corrective action Enter the expected mean value.
Error code: 0152

Missing entry, Expected 1 SD required.
Probable cause The expected 1 SD value is not entered. Corrective action Enter the expected 1 SD value.
Section 10-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0153

Missing entry, Carrier/Carousel ID required.
Add order was selected when the information in the Enter valid data in the carrier/carousel field. carrier/carousel field was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0154

Missing entry, Position required.
Add order was selected when the information in the Enter valid data in the position field. position field was missing or incorrect.
Error code: 0155

Unable to delete assay (x), it is part of a batch order on the system. x = Assay name
Probable cause The assay is part of a batch order with a status of Pending. Corrective action To delete the assay without processing the batch, delete the batch and then delete the assay. To process the batch, delete the assay when the batch is complete.
Error code: 0156

Invalid entry, bar code SID must be unique.
Probable cause The specified bar code SID is used for another control level in the same control lot or for another control. Corrective action Enter a unique bar code SID.
Error code: 0157

Invalid entry, day entered must be valid for the month and year specified.
Probable cause The day of the month entered in the field is not correct for the month and year specified. Corrective action Enter the correct day for the month and year specified.
Error code: 0158

Invalid entry, month entered must be in the range (1 - 12).
Probable cause The month entered is outside the range 1 - 12.
Section 10-30
Corrective action Enter a month from 1 - 12.

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid entry, year entered must be in range (1800 - 9999).
Error codes
The year entered is outside the range 1800 - 9999. Enter a year from 1800 - 9999.
Error code: 0160

Invalid entry, hour entered must be within range (0 - 23).
Probable cause The hour entered is outside the range 0 - 23. Corrective action Enter an hour from 0 - 23.
Error code: 0161

Invalid entry, minute entered must be within range (0 - 59).
Probable cause The minutes entered is outside the range 0 - 59. Corrective action Enter a value for minutes from 0 - 59.
Error code: 0162

System backup canceled, insufficient disk space for (x). x = File name
There is not enough disk space to perform a backup Contact your Area Customer Support. Please procedure. provide information specifying the operation you were attempting to perform when this error occurred.
Error code: 0164

Invalid request, select at least one restore option.
Probable cause Done was selected without selecting a restore option (module calibrations, system configuration, or database). Corrective action Select at least one option from the Restore options list, and then select Done. To exit without performing a restore, select Cancel.
Section 10-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0166

Batch (x) deleted. Batch was in process when the SCC was shut down. x = Batch name
The batch was in process when the SCC was 1. Determine why the SCC was shutdown and shutdown. All samples with a Scheduled or Running correct the cause. status go to exceptions. 2. Rerun the tests in exceptions. 3. Order another batch for the remaining samples.
Error code: 0167

Invalid order, Carrier/Carousel and Position required for previously ordered Sample ID (x). x = Sample ID
Probable cause The same sample ID was found in one or more carrier/carousel positions and the carrier/carousel position was not specified for the test order. Corrective action Specify the carrier/carousel ID and position for each aliquot loaded when using multiple aliquots of the same sample ID.
Error code: 0168

Invalid entry, end date is earlier than the start date.
Probable cause The end date entered is earlier than the start date. Corrective action Enter the correct date range.
Error code: 0169

Procedure not performed on selected day.
Probable cause Details was selected from a Maintenance log for a date when the procedure was not run. Corrective action Select a date when the procedure was run, and then select F5 - Details.
Section 10-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Samples (x) were not processed in batch (y). Unable to read carrier label. x = Range of Sample IDs that were not processed y = Batch name
Error codes
A non-bar coded batch is in process and the bar 1. Determine the samples present in the sample code label on the sample carrier can not be read by carrier that were not processed. the sample ID bar code reader. The system 2. Place a new batch order for these samples. assumes this carrier contains 5 samples for the batch, increments the sample ID by 5 samples, and 3. Place the samples into a different sample carrier. does not process these samples. 4. Refer to error code 4204, for corrective action, if error continues.
Error code: 0171

Invalid shutdown request, at least one module is currently Running.
Probable cause Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot screen when the status of at least one module was Running. Corrective action 1. Pause the sample handler and all processing modules with a status of Running. See System startup, pause, and shutdown, page 5-3. 2. Shutdown the system when the status of all modules is Ready. Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot screen when the status of at least one module was Scheduled pause. 1. Wait until the status of the sample handler and all processing modules changes to Ready, or select the sample handler and/or processing module graphic, and then select Stop. 2. Shutdown the system when the status of all modules is Ready or Stopped. Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot screen when the status of at least one module was Maintenance. 1. Wait until all maintenance procedures are complete, or select the sample handler and/or processing module graphic, and then select Stop. 2. Shutdown the system when the status of all modules is Ready or Stopped. Shutdown the system when the ARM completes Shutdown was selected from the Snapshot screen while the ARM (Automatic Reconstitution buffer transfer. Module) was transferring buffer to the wash buffer reservoir.
Section 10-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0172

No assay found for reagent kit in section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause The assay file required for the reagent kit is either not installed or it is not the correct version. Corrective action Install the correct assay file. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Error code: 0173

System restore canceled, backup version (x) and current software version (y) are incompatible. x = Software version when backup was created y = Current software version
Probable cause Attempted to restore a backup with a database created with a different system software version number. Corrective action Select a backup created with the current version of system software.
Error code: 0174

Invalid order for Sample ID (x), Assay (y) disabled. x = Sample ID y = Assay name
Order was received with an assay that is disabled or 1. Change the availability of the assay when the patient disabled. reason for disabling the assay is corrected. See Change the availability of an assay, page 2-109. 2. Reorder the test.
Error code: 0175

Attempted to operate an un-initialized assembly (x). x = Mechanism name
Probable cause Hardware failure for mechanism indicated. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid order, no control levels selected.
Probable cause Add order was selected when no control level was selected. Corrective action Select one or more control levels.
Error codes
Error code: 0177

Invalid order, Sample ID (x) exists for a different type of order (patient, calibrator, control or batch). x = Existing Sample ID
Probable cause The sample ID is already in use for an existing calibrator, control, patient, or batch order. Corrective action Assign a different sample ID for the order being created.
Error code: 0178

Unable to process test, Sample ID (x) currently configured as a control bar code SID. x = Sample ID
Probable cause A patient order was created using a previously assigned control bar code SID. Corrective action Re-order the test using a unique sample ID.
Error code: 0179

Data archive failed, previous archive still in progress.
Probable cause Another archive was selected before the current archive was complete. Corrective action Request the new archive when the current archive is complete.
Error code: 0180

Unable to archive, insufficient disk space.
Probable cause There is not enough space on the disk to archive the selected records. Corrective action Select fewer records to archive or insert a new disk.
Section 10-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0181

Unable to archive, no disk or incorrect disk type detected.
Probable cause A disk wasn't placed in the CD drive. An incorrect disk type was used. The disk is inserted upside down. Corrective action Place a disk in the CD drive. Use a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk. Turn the disk over and insert it in the drive.
Error code: 0182

Unable to archive, no CD drive detected.
Probable cause Software error The CD-RW drive is not installed on the SCC. Hardware failure: Cables on the CD drive have a poor connection CD drive Power cable Ribbon cable Corrective action
Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5

Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0183

Unable to archive, CD drive is initializing.
Probable cause Done was selected before initialization was complete. Corrective action 1. Select OK on the archive message, and then wait until initialization is complete. 2. Select Done to continue archiving.
Error code: 0184

Unable to archive, disk is read-only.
Probable cause A CD-ROM disk was left in the drive. Corrective action
Remove the CD-ROM disk and insert a CD-R or Example: ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM, non-formatted CD-RW disk. ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostic CD-ROM Use archive disk for archive only.
The archive CD disk was used for procedures other than archive.
Section 10-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to archive, Processing Module is not in the correct status.
Probable cause Processing module status is Running, Scheduled pause, Initializing, or Scanning. Corrective action Perform the archive when the processing module status is Stopped, Offline, or Ready.
Error codes
Error code: 0186

Unable to archive, archive device is in use.
Probable cause The archive device is in the process of reading, writing, or initializing. Corrective action Archive results when the device is ready.
Error code: 0187

Data archive failed, duplicate archive file name found.
Probable cause Archive disk is used on multiple SCC systems which have the same ARCHITECT System number. A write error occurred on an earlier archive attempt and could not be erased. An archive was performed before and after a restore was performed. Corrective action Verify the ARCHITECT System number matches the label on the SCC. If the number is not correct, contact your Area Customer Support. Use a different disk and archive. Use a different disk and archive.
Error code: 0188

Data archive failed, CD tray is open.
Probable cause After the CD drive was initialized, the CD tray was opened. Corrective action Close CD tray and start archive procedure.
Error code: 0189

Data archive failed, no disk found in drive.
Probable cause A disk wasn't placed in the CD drive. Corrective action Place a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk in the CD drive.
Section 10-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0190

Data archive failed, incorrect disk type detected.
Probable cause An incorrect disk type was used. The disk is inserted upside down. Corrective action Use a CD-R disk or non-formatted CD-RW disk. Turn the disk over and insert it in the drive.
Error code: 0191

Data archive failed, error reading/writing to disk.
Probable cause CD disk is dirty. CD disk is defective. Hardware failure: CD drive Corrective action Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and handling procedures. Use new disk. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0192

Data archive failed, error verifying archive data on disk.
Probable cause CD disk is defective. Hardware failure: CD drive Corrective action Use new disk. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0193

Unable to archive, no archive data found. Refresh screen then select data to archive.
Probable cause The screen was not refreshed before F8 - Archive was selected. Corrective action Select the refresh button, and then repeat the archive procedure. See Archive stored patient results, page 5-269 or Archive stored control results, page 5-284.
Error code: 0194

Unable to process test, invalid product type.
Probable cause Reagent bottles for a STAT test are incorrectly loaded on an i 2000. Corrective action Load the reagent bottles on an ARCHITECT System with STAT test capability.
Section 10-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to delete assay (x), pending orders exist for this assay. x = Assay name
Probable cause Attempted to delete an assay when pending or running orders exist for the assay. Corrective action Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders are complete before trying to delete the assay.
Error codes
Error code: 0197

Missing entry, formula required.
A valid formula is not entered for a calculated assay. Enter a valid formula for the calculated assay.
Error code: 0198

Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is a constituent of a calculated assay. x = Assay name
Probable cause Attempted to delete an assay that is a constituent for a calculated assay. Corrective action Delete or edit the calculated assay before deleting the constituent assay.
Error code: 0199

Unable to process test from sample carousel, invalid Processing Module for assay type.
Probable cause A sample was loaded on the sample carousel with i System assays ordered. Corrective action Place the sample on the robotic sample handler to run the i System assays.
Error code: 0200

A two position reagent kit loaded in positions 25 and 1.
Bottles from a two-position reagent kit are loaded in Load the reagents in sequential positions. positions 25 and 1 (not sequentially).
Section 10-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0201

No bottle found where expected in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error report. x = Position in which the bottle was missing y = Location in which the bottle was missing
Probable cause There is no bottle in the indicated position and carousel where expected. Corrective action Load the correct bottle with the kit in the correct position.
Label on a bottle in the indicated position cannot Turn the reagent bottle to expose a different area of be read. the bar code to the reader.
Error code: 0202

The reagent kit in position (x) has expired or exceeded the stability time. x = Reagent carousel position
Probable cause The indicated reagent is expired or has exceeded the onboard stability time. Corrective action Load a new, in-date reagent kit. See Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85, Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96, or Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Error code: 0203

Unable to change configuration, Processing Module is not in the correct status.
Probable cause The processing module status is Running, Scheduled pause, Initializing, or Scanning. Corrective action Perform required configuration changes when the processing module status is Offline, Stopped, Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 0204

Unable to process test, no Reagent kits available to run test on assigned Processing Module.
Probable cause The processing module does not have adequate reagent on board to run the requested test. All of the reagent kits on the module for the assay are either empty, expired, or not calibrated. Corrective action Load the required reagent kit. See Load reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-106.
Section 10-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wrong lot, component or serial number in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error report. x = Position in which the bottle was detected y = Location in which the bottle was detected
Probable cause A bottle with the wrong lot number, component ID, or serial number is loaded in the indicated position and carousel. Corrective action Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct position.
Error codes
Error code: 0206

Bottle mismatch in position (x) on (y) carousel, bottle is already part of another Reagent kit. x = Position in which the bottle was detected y = Location in which the bottle was detected
Probable cause A bottle in the indicated position is already part of another reagent kit. Corrective action 1. Print the reagent load error report to determine the kit causing the error. 2. Load the correct bottles for the reagent kit or load a new reagent kit.
Error code: 0207

Calibration version mismatch for reagent kit in position (x). x = Reagent carousel position
Probable cause Calibration version for the reagent kit on the processing module does not match the currently installed assay. Corrective action 1. Load a reagent kit matching the currently installed assay version. NOTE: Deplete the supply of reagents for the old assay before installing the new assay. 2. Install the new assay file when the current supply of reagents is depleted. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Section 10-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0208

Reagent Carousel scan error, refer to Reagent status screen for details.
Bottle mismatch, extra bottle is in the carousel, or 1. View the reagent status screen and correct the the required bottle is missing. indicated problem. 2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0000 category error codes, if the cause is not obvious. Reagent bottle not loaded properly. Label cannot be read on a bottle. The bar code reader requires calibration. Reseat the reagent bottle. Clean the bottle label. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675.
Error code: 0209

Number of unreleased patient results reached limit. New orders will not be accepted.
Probable cause The number of unreleased results has reached the limit. Corrective action Delete or release results, QC, exceptions, or pending orders before placing new orders.
Error code: 0210

Selected Carrier/Carousel and Position in use by another Sample ID (x), enter an available C/P. x = Sample ID
Probable cause The carrier/carousel and position is in use by another sample. Corrective action Enter a carrier/carousel and position number that is not currently in use.
Section 10-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test(s), Sample ID (x) does not match scanned sample ID (y). x = Sample ID ordered y = Sample ID on sample tube at the bar code reader
Error codes
A carrier/carousel and position were assigned for 1. See the Order status screen, page 5-150, for a sample ID, then a different sample was placed carrier/carousel and position assignment. into this carrier/carousel and position. 2. Place the correct sample tube into the carrier/carousel position. Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689, if you have a standard sample handler. Perform 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685, if you have a robotic sample handler.
Error code: 0212

Run request denied. Solid Waste Container not present.
Probable cause Waste container was not present in a processing module when run was selected. Corrective action Replace the solid waste container.
Error code: 0213

Batch is in process. Remaining unprocessed samples will be added to the batch unless you manually delete the batch.
Probable cause A batch was in process when the sample handler was paused or the SCC was shutdown. Corrective action If you want the batch to continue, no corrective action is required. When you select run for the sample handler, batch processing continues. If you do not want the unprocessed samples remaining on the sample handler to be added to the current batch, delete the batch before restarting the sample handler.
Error code: 0214

Pause Load Queue before pressing reverse key.
Probable cause User selected reverse while the sample handler status is Running. Hardware failure: Keypad Corrective action Pause the sample handler before pressing the reverse key. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0215

Motor command aborted, operator requested Stop.
Unable to complete motor command, user selected Start up the processing module and/or sample stop. handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists.
Error code: 0216

Unable to process test, operator requested Stop or Processing Queue access door opened.
User selected stop for the sample handler before Start up the sample handler when the reason for the sample was aspirated. the stop no longer exists. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13 Processing queue access door was opened before the sample was aspirated. Close the door and restart the run.
Error code: 0217

Unable to process test, specified Processing Module not available.
Probable cause User specified a test be processed on a specific module, but the module is unable to process the test for one of the following reasons: There are no reagent kits present for the assay. Load reagents for the assay. All of the reagents kits on the module for the 1. Replace empty or expired reagents. assay are either empty, expired, or not calibrated. 2. Order a calibration for the assay if a calibration is not already in process. The module does not have sufficient supplies to run the assay. 1. Replace empty or expired supplies. 2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 2000 category error codes, if the cause is not obvious. The module status is not Running. 1. Select run for the processing module. 2. Wait for the processing module status to change to Running before processing tests. Corrective action
Section 10-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause STAT protocol percentage set to None in the module configuration screen. Processing module stopped because of a previous hardware failure.
Corrective action Select a STAT protocol percentage of Low, Medium, or High. See Change the STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR), page 2-36. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0218

Unable to process test, no Processing Modules available.
Probable cause User specified that the system automatically assign the test to a module, but none of the modules are able to process the test for one of the following reasons: There are no reagent kits for the assay present on any of the modules with a status of Running. All of the reagents kits for the assay on all the modules in the Ready or Running status are either empty, expired, or not calibrated. None of the modules with a status of Running have sufficient supplies to run the assay. Load reagents for the assay. 1. Replace empty or expired reagents. 2. Order a calibration for the assay if a calibration is not already in process. 1. Replace empty or expired supplies. 2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 2000 category error codes, if the cause is not obvious. No modules have a status of Running. 1. Select run for a processing module. 2. Wait for the processing module status to change to Running before processing tests. Processing modules are stopped because of a previous hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Corrective action
Section 10-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0219

Run request denied, at least one module must be Running.
Probable cause Selected run for the sample handler when no modules have a status of Running. Corrective action Select run for a processing module.
Error code: 0220

Unable to perform requested operation, Processing Module not in correct status.
Probable cause The processing module is not in the correct status to perform the requested activity. Corrective action Establish the correct module status, and then repeat the activity.
Error code: 0221

Invalid order, selected quality control levels do not all fit onto Carrier/Carousel (x). x = Carrier/Carousel ID
Probable cause The number of control levels ordered exceeds the number of available positions on the carrier/carousel. When requested with one control order, multiple control levels all must be run in one carrier/carousel. Corrective action 1. Order fewer control levels for the selected carrier/carousel. 2. Create a new order for the remaining control levels on a new carrier/carousel.
Error code: 0222

Invalid entry, serial number (x) already exists. x = Serial number currently in system
Probable cause A serial number was entered that already exists in the SCC. Corrective action Enter a valid serial number. Example: i201099
Error code: 0223

Invalid password for (x), enter correct password. x = User logon name
Probable cause An invalid password was entered for the user who logged on. Corrective action Enter the correct password.
Section 10-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid entry, the Sample Handler serial number must be 7 characters.
Probable cause A sample handler serial number was entered that did not contain 7 characters. Corrective action Enter the sample handler serial number in the correct format. Example: SH01175
Error codes
Error code: 0225

Invalid entry, date entered must be in range January 1, 1970 to February 5, 2036.
Probable cause The date entered is outside the range January 1, 1970 - February 5, 2036. Corrective action Enter the correct date within the range January 1, 1970 - February 5, 2036.
Error code: 0226

Unable to perform Unload, Wash Buffer reservoir empty.
Probable cause Wash buffer container is already empty. Wash buffer transfer tubing is not properly connected or is crimped. Hardware failure: Buffer level sensor connection is loose Buffer level sensor failed Corrective action No corrective action is required. Reconnect all tubing and repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0227

Invalid entry, Manual dilution factor not within range of (2 - 999).
Probable cause A manual dilution factor less than 2 or greater than 999 was entered. Corrective action Enter a value from 2 - 999.
Error code: 0228

Invalid request, Manual dilution must be defined before selecting assay(s).
Probable cause Assays for a patient or control order were selected before the manual dilution factor was entered. Corrective action Define the manual dilution option prior to selecting assays for a patient order. Enter a value in the Sample manual dilution factor data entry box, and then select the desired assays from the Assays list.
Section 10-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0229

Unable to perform Automatic Flush for (x), system door open. x = Inventory item
Probable cause A door or cover is open on the processing module. Hardware failure: Sensors Corrective action Close the door or cover when the reason for opening no longer exists. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0230

Duplicate Carrier (x) detected. x = Carrier ID
Probable cause Sample carrier cannot be re-used while tests are still in process. Corrective action Wait until tests are complete before re-using a sample carrier.
Error code: 0231

Reagent carousel cover has been open for 30 minutes, close cover or remove reagents.
Probable cause Reagent carousel cover has been open for more than 30 minutes. Corrective action Close the reagent carousel cover. Or
Unload reagents (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-108.
Error code: 0232

Override for cover interlocks configured to On, all tests will be sent to exception.
Probable cause Override for cover interlocks is set to on in the module configuration screen. Corrective action 1. Status message. No corrective action is required. All tests become exceptions. The PMT does not read with covers open. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support, if results are desired.
Error code: 0233

Unable to delete control, order(s) are pending for this Lot no. and Level.
Attempted to delete a control level when orders are Archive all QC results for the control level before pending for this level. deleting the level.
Section 10-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid order, starting Sample ID is missing.
Probable cause The starting sample ID field is empty. Corrective action Enter a valid starting sample ID.
Error codes
Error code: 0235

Unable to delete control level, result(s) exist for this Lot no. and Level.
Attempted to delete a control level when orders are 1. Archive stored control results, page 5-284, with pending or results exist for this level. Delete records after archive check box selected. 2. Delete all pending orders for the control level.
Error code: 0236

Invalid request, Processing Module not in the correct status for backup or restore.
Probable cause Attempted to create a backup or restore when the status of one or more modules is Running. Corrective action 1. Pause all modules. Pause the sample handler and Pause the processing module, page 5-14. 2. Repeat the backup or restore procedure, when the processing module status is Ready.
Error code: 0237

Invalid automatic system backup request, Processing Module status must be Stopped or Ready.
Probable cause Feature not available at this time. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0238

Invalid order, ending Sample ID is missing.
Probable cause The ending sample ID field is empty. Corrective action Enter a valid ending sample ID.
Section 10-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0239

Run request denied, Processing Module hardware failure.
Probable cause A previous hardware failure is preventing the Run initialization. Module status changes to Stopped. Corrective action 1. Wait until all tests in process are completed. 2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0240

Run request denied, Sample Handler hardware failure.
Probable cause User selected run after a hardware failure. Corrective action 1. Wait until the sample handler is Stopped. 2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. NOTE: If the hardware failure is not corrected and run is selected again for the sample handler, no error message is displayed and the sample handler status does not change to Running.
Error code: 0241

Invalid entry, date of birth must be today's date or earlier.
Probable cause A birth date later than today's date was entered. Corrective action Enter a valid birth date.
Section 10-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Bottle mismatch in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y), bottle is part of another Reagent kit. x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was detected y = RSH section number
Probable cause A bottle in the indicated position is already part of another reagent kit. Corrective action Load the correct bottles for the reagent kit or load a new reagent kit.
Error codes
Error code: 0243

Unable to change configuration, (x) not in the correct state. x = Sample handler or modules.
Probable cause Attempted to configure settings while the sample handler status is Running, or configure assays while a processing module status is Running. Corrective action 1. Pause the sample handler or Pause the processing module, page 5-14. 2. Perform the required configuration when the module status is Ready.
Error code: 0244

Version mismatch for reagent kit in position (x). x = Reagent carousel position.
Probable cause The Reagent Configuration Version of the onboard reagent kit is not the expected value. NOTE: This error occurs if Clinical Investigation reagents or assay files are used. Clinical Investigation reagent bottles contain the text Investigational Use Only. Clinical Investigation assay files Cal Version parameter is 0 (zero). Corrective action Load the expected kit or assay file.
Error code: 0245

Invalid entry. The value for (x) must be less than the value for (y). x = Field with invalid entry y = Field with invalid entry
Minimum must be less than the value for maximum. Enter a number for parameter (x) that is less than parameter (y).
Section 10-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0246

Invalid entry. The value for (x) must be less than or equal to the value for (y). x = Field with invalid entry y = Field with invalid entry
Probable cause Minimum range must be less than or equal to the value for maximum range. Corrective action Enter a value for parameter (x) that is less than or equal to parameter (y).
Error code: 0247

Invalid entry. One or more fields are empty. Enter valid data.
Probable cause One or more data fields are empty. Corrective action Enter valid data in the empty fields.
Error code: 0248

Input out of range.
The number entered is outside the specified range. Enter a number within the acceptable range.
Error code: 0249

Invalid entry, the Processing Module serial number must be in the correct format.
Probable cause Processing module serial number entered is not in the correct format. Corrective action Enter the processing module serial number in the correct format.
Error code: 0250

The starting Sample ID plus the number of samples exceeds the maximum Sample ID: (x) allowed. x = Maximum Sample ID allowed
Probable cause No orders can be added in a non-bar coded batch order type for patient orders because the ending sample ID number is greater than 999,999,999. Corrective action Re-enter a valid starting sample ID that is less than the maximum sample ID number allowed. The rule is: starting SID + number of samples must be less than or equal to the maximum sample ID number allowed. The maximum sample ID must be less than or equal to 9 characters. The maximum number of samples allowed in a non-bar coded batch is 5000.
Section 10-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration canceled, calibrator detected during a batch run.
Probable cause A calibrator was identified at the sample ID bar code reader when a batch was in process. The batch continues processing. Corrective action Wait until the batch has finished processing before running calibrators. Or Terminate the batch in process then run the calibration, if a calibration is required immediately.
Error codes
Error code: 0252

Duplicate Sample ID (x) detected in the batch (y), sample is ignored. x = Sample ID y = Batch name
Probable cause In a bar coded batch, a sample was detected with the same sample ID as a sample already in process. Corrective action Rerun the ignored sample.
Error code: 0253

Duplicate Sample ID detected at (x) in batch (y). No batch orders are created. x = Carrier and Position of sample y = Batch name
Probable cause In a non-bar coded batch one of two situations occurred: The batch contains the same sample ID as a bar coded sample detected during the batch. Two non-bar coded batches have overlapping sample IDs and neither of the sample IDs have completed processing. Corrective action Order and run the batch tests for the sample at the carrier and position indicated in the message.
Error code: 0254

Unable to process control (x), ID is assigned to more than one control for assay (y). x = Control ID y = Assay name
The same bar code SID number is assigned to two Delete the ID number for controls that are not used different levels within the same control lot number. or assign a different ID number to the new controls.
Section 10-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0255

Batch Sample ID (x) not processed, unable to read bar code in C/P: (y). x = Batch name y = Carrier and Position
Probable cause The carrier position number cannot be read by the bar code reader. Corrective action Place a new batch order for the samples that are not processed.
Error code: 0256

Invalid entry. The LAS serial number must be 8 characters and in the correct format.
Probable cause The LAS serial number is entered incorrectly. It must be 8 characters and in the correct format. Corrective action Enter the LAS serial number with 8 characters and in the correct format. Example: LAS00102
Error code: 0257

Invalid order, starting carousel position plus number of calibrators cannot exceed 20.
The number of calibrator levels exceeds the number Create a new order for the calibration. of available positions on the LAS carousel. Example: When creating a 2-point Adjust calibration order, the starting position cannot be position 20.
Error code: 0258

C/P (x) already in use and is ignored in batch (y). An additional position will be added to batch. x = Carrier and position of the sample. y = Batch name
A sample carrier, in which tests were still in process, 1. Create a patient order (single order), was used to load a sample for a non-bar coded page 5-118, for the sample not included in the batch. The position is not included in the batch and batch. an additional position is added to the end of the batch to complete the defined number of samples. If 2. Delete the additional batch sample result, if generated and not required. See Delete a patient a sample is in the added position, results are result, page 5-233. generated.
Section 10-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid entry, SID field must not start with zero in a non-bar coded batch order.
Probable cause In a non-bar coded batch order the Sample ID was started with a zero. Corrective action Enter a number (1-9) as the first digit in the SID data entry box.
Error codes
Error code: 0260

Invalid entry, Sample ID length cannot exceed 20 characters.
Probable cause The sample ID in a patient order is greater than 20 characters long. Corrective action Enter a sample ID with 20 characters or less.
Error code: 0261

Invalid entry, Sample ID length cannot exceed 9 characters in a non-bar coded batch order.
Probable cause The sample ID in a non-bar coded batch order is greater than 9 numeric characters. Corrective action Enter a sample ID with 9 numeric characters or less.
Error code: 0262

The reagent kit in section (x) has expired. x = RSH section number
Probable cause The indicated reagent is expired. Corrective action Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
Error code: 0263

A panel with the same name exists on the system. Choose a different panel name.
Probable cause A panel with the same name exists. Corrective action Enter a different panel name.
Error code: 0264

A panel name must be defined and a panel type must be selected before a panel can be configured.
Probable cause A panel name was not entered and/or a panel type was not selected. Corrective action Enter a panel name or select a panel type.
Section 10-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0265

A panel should have at least 2 assays selected.
Probable cause A panel was configured with less than 2 assays. Corrective action Select 2 or more assays when configuring a panel.
Error code: 0266

Invalid entry, at least one dilution replicate must be entered.
Probable cause The number of replicates was not entered for an automated or manual dilution. Corrective action Enter a number from 1-10 in the replicates field for an automated or manual dilution.
Error code: 0267

The reagent kit in section (x) has exceeded stability time. x = RSH section number
Probable cause The indicated reagent has exceeded the onboard stability time. Corrective action Load a new, in-date reagent kit.
Error code: 0268

Carrier pick attempt failed at bay (x) section (y). x = Bay number y = Section number
Carrier is inserted backwards in the tray or priority Reposition the carrier in the tray or priority position. position. Carrier is damaged. Rerun the sample in a different carrier. The insertion sensor is tripped when you dropped Reposition the carrier in the priority section. a carrier back into the priority bay during removal. Hardware failure: Section carrier detect sensor Carrier transport flex board Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0269

The reagent kit in section (x) has expired and exceeded stability time. x = RSH section number
The indicated reagent is expired and has exceeded Load a new, in-date reagent kit. the onboard stability time.
Section 10-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Insufficient consecutive positions available for calibration order. (x) sample positions required. x = Number of sample positions required for the calibration order
Probable cause For carriers: The number of positions required for the calibration order exceeds the maximum number of positions in five consecutive carriers. 1. Deselect assays from the calibration order to decrease the number of calibrators required for the order. 2. Create a new calibration order for the deselected assays. The starting carrier ID plus the number of samples for calibration exceeds the range (C001-C999) for the carrier. Starting carrier ID cannot be greater then 995. For carousels: The number of positions required for the 1. Deselect assays from the calibration order to calibration order exceeds the number of available decrease the number of calibrators required for positions on the carousel. the order. 2. Create a new calibration order for the deselected assays. Re-enter a valid starting carrier ID. Start with a carrier with a lower number. Corrective action
Error codes
Error code: 0271

Invalid entry, missing draw date or draw time.
In the patient demographics field, draw date or draw Enter draw date and draw time or leave both empty. time is empty.
Error code: 0272

Draw date must be greater than January 1, 1970 and less than the current system time.
Probable cause A draw date earlier than January 1, 1970 was entered in the patient demographics field. A draw date and time was entered with the current date but with the time later than the current time defined for the system. Corrective action Enter a draw date greater than January 1, 1970. Enter a draw time that is less than the current system time.
Section 10-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0273

Priority carrier in bay (x) section (y) was removed before access was granted. x = Bay number y = Section number
A priority carrier was removed before the access Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing indicator was activated. module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. The insertion sensor is tripped when you dropped Reposition the carrier in the priority section. a carrier back into the priority bay during removal. Hardware failure: Carrier/tray sensor Unit detect board Sensor interface board Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0274

Tray in bay (x) was removed before access was granted. x = Bay number
Probable cause A tray was removed before the access indicator was activated. A tray is defective. Hardware failure: Carrier/tray sensor Sensor interface board Corrective action Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Replace tray. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0275

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution inventory empty.
Probable cause ICT Reference Solution bottle is empty. Corrective action Load a new bottle and update the inventory. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33. NOTE: ICT Reference Solution can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming. The supplies screen was not updated when the ICT Reference Solution bottle was replaced. Update the inventory. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33.
Section 10-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
ICT Reference Solution bottle was removed from 1. Seat the bottle correctly on the weight platform. the weight platform during the run. 2. Update the inventory. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0276

Invalid selection, a maximum of four constituent assays can be used in the formula.
Probable cause Selected more than four constituent assays for a calculated assay. Corrective action Select four or less assays for the calculated assay.
Error code: 0277

Selected carrier/carousel and position in use by another control order for SID (x). Enter an available C/P. x = Sample ID
Probable cause Carrier/carousel and position is in use by another control order. Corrective action Enter a carrier/carousel and position number that is not currently in use.
Error code: 0278

User defined reagent kit in position (x) was unassigned, bar coded cartridge scanned in same position. x = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause A bar coded reagent cartridge is loaded in a position in which a non-bar coded reagent was manually assigned. Corrective action 1. If the non-bar coded reagent was moved to a different position, assign the new position. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91. 2. If the non-bar coded reagent is no longer onboard, no action is required until the reagent is loaded again. At that time, assign a new position.
Section 10-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0279

Invalid number of cartridges detected for (x) carousel segment (y) during reagent scan. x = Carousel y = Segment
Probable cause Hardware failure: Mislabeled reagent segment Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0280

Reagent kit in position (x) on carousel (y) is missing a required bottle. Print reagent load error report. x = Reagent segment and position y = Reagent carousel
The R1 reagent is onboard but the R2 reagent is Load both the R1 and R2 reagent cartridges. not loaded, or the R2 reagent is onboard and the NOTE: For the c 16000 processing module R1 reagent is not loaded. ensure the R1 and R2 cartridges are both loaded in either the outer (A-line) or inner (B-line) carousels. The R1 or R2 reagent is already linked to a different kit. Replace with a new unused cartridge if a reagent cartridge was used in a previous reagent kit.
A reagent with a 1D (one-dimensional) bar code Delete the manually configured kit. Delete a reagent label matches a manually configured reagent kit. kit (c System), page 2-123. A manually configured reagent kit requires the R1 and R2 reagent to have the same serial number.
Error code: 0281

Reagent kit in location (x) has component(s) loaded in wrong carousel(s). x = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause The reagent cartridge was placed in the wrong reagent supply center. For the c 16000 processing module, the ICT diluent was placed in the wrong carousel. Corrective action Move the reagent cartridge to the correct reagent supply center. Move the ICT diluent cartridge to the outer (A-line) carousel of the R1 reagent supply center.
Section 10-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid selection, each reagent supply center position must have different solution.
Probable cause The same onboard solution is selected for more than one reagent supply center position on the Configure reagents - supplies screen. Corrective action Select a different onboard solution option for each reagent supply center position.
Error codes
Error code: 0283

A control with the same name already exists. Choose a different multiconstituent control name.
Probable cause The multiconstituent control name entered is already in use. Corrective action Enter a different control name.
Error code: 0284

Unable to add control level, all data not defined for assays. Define data or delete assay.
Probable cause The manufacturer mean and SD and/or expected mean and SD are not defined for one or more assays. Corrective action Enter values for the manufacturer mean and SD and for the expected mean and SD for all assays.
Error code: 0285

Invalid entry, the RSH serial number must be 8 characters and in the correct format.
Probable cause The RSH serial number is entered incorrectly. It must be 8 characters and start with RSH. Corrective action Enter the RSH serial number with 8 characters and in the correct format. Example: RSH00103
Error code: 0286

Carrier detected in bay (x) section (y). x = Bay number y = Section number
A carrier was placed in a priority section that was Remove the carrier from the priority section. not available. Hardware failure: Section carrier detect sensor failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0287

Invalid batch order, Sample ID (x) already defined for batch (y). x = Sample ID y = Batch name
The starting sample ID for the bar coded batch Enter a unique starting sample ID for the batch matches the starting sample ID of an existing batch order. on the system.
Error code: 0288

Selected Carrier/Carousel and Position in use by batch (x). Enter an available C/P. x = Batch name
Probable cause The starting carrier ID and position for the non-bar coded batch matches the starting carrier ID and position for an existing batch on the system. Corrective action Enter a unique starting carrier ID/position for the batch order.
Error code: 0289

Unable to process test, sample removed from system.
Probable cause The carrier or tray was removed from the RSH before the test or retest was aspirated. Corrective action Replace the sample on the RSH and rerun the exception.
Error code: 0290

Unable to process test, no sample diluent available.
Probable cause The required sample diluent is not loaded. The required sample diluent is empty. Corrective action
Load sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-88. Replace sample diluent(s) (c System), page 5-93.
Error code: 0291

Unable to process test, sample handler not in the correct status.
The sample handler status is not Scheduled pause Start up the sample handler. See Start up the or Running. processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
Section 10-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The reagent bottle in position (x) on carousel (y) has an undefined reagent name (z). x = Reagent carousel segment and position y = Reagent carousel z = Scanned reagent name (first 5 digits of the bar code)
Probable cause A new reagent with a 1D (one-dimensional) bar code label was loaded and scanned before the new reagent was configured. The reagent name defined for a reagent is not identical to the first 5 digits of the 1D bar code label. Corrective action Configure the new reagent before scanning the 1D bar code. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93. 1. Configure the reagent ensuring the reagent name is identical to the first five digits of the 1D bar code label. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric - c System), page 2-93. 2. Delete the incorrectly defined reagent, if desired. See Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122 The 1D bar code label did not print correctly and Reprint the 1D bar code labels ensuring the first five the first 5 digits do not match the first 5 digits of digits are identical to the defined reagent name. the defined reagent name.
Error codes
Error code: 0293

Carrier detected in section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause A carrier was placed in a section that was not available. Hardware failure: Section carrier detect sensor Corrective action Remove the carrier from the section. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0294

Carrier pick attempt failed at section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause Carrier is inserted backwards in the section. Carrier is damaged. Hardware failure: Rail guide sensor Corrective action Reposition the carrier in the section. Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0295

Carrier in section (x) was removed before access was granted. x = RSH section number
Probable cause A carrier was removed before the access indicator was activated. A carrier is not seated in the section. Corrective action Restart the RSH. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler. Remove and reseat the carrier. Restart the RSH. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: Section carrier detect sensor
Error code: 0296

Carrier pick attempt failed at reagent carousel position (x). x = Reagent carousel position
Probable cause Reagent carrier is not seated correctly in the reagent carousel. Carrier is damaged. Hardware failure: Rail guide sensor Corrective action Remove the reagent carrier and perform a startup on the RSH. Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0297

Processing module stopped, RV unloader removed.
RV unloader was removed during initialization or Ensure that the RV unloader is placed in the unload while the system was running. position. Hardware failure: RV unloader sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Request canceled, Sample Handler failure.
Probable cause Hardware failure occurred on a sample handler mechanism during initialization. Corrective action 1. Wait until the sample handler is Stopped. 2. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. NOTE: If the hardware failure is not corrected and run is selected again, no error message is displayed and the module status does not change to Running.
Error codes
Error code: 0299

No bottle found in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was missing y = RSH section number
There is no bottle in the indicated reagent carrier Load the correct bottle with the kit in the correct position where expected. reagent carrier position. Label on a bottle in the indicated reagent carrier Turn the reagent bottle to expose a different area of position cannot be read. the bar code to the reader.
Error code: 0300

Run request denied, hardware failure.
Probable cause Hardware failure on a mechanism. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0301

Unable to process test, hardware failure.
Probable cause Hardware failure on an item unique to either a one-step test or two-step test. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0302

Unable to process test, hardware failure or the user pressed Stop.
Probable cause User selected stop. Corrective action
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists.
1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 0304 error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Hardware failure
Error code: 0303

Unable to process test, hardware failure or inventory item limited.
Probable cause The processing module status changed to Scheduled pause before this test arrived at the module. This happened for one of the following reasons: User selected pause. Restart the processing module or sample handler when the reason for the pause no longer exists. Corrective action
Section 10-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause An inventory item is limited on the module.
Corrective action Review the Supplies status screen. Add and update the supplies. See Verify supply and waste inventory, page 5-32. NOTE: Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded when the processing module is in any status except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
A hardware failure occurred.
1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0304

(x) failure. x = Mechanism name
Probable cause Hardware failure for the mechanism indicated. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0305

The One Step assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.
Hardware failure on an item required for processing 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 a one-step assay. error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0306

The Two Step assay is disabled due to a hardware failure.
Hardware failure on an item required for processing 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 a two-step assay. error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Attempted to operate an un-initialized assembly (x). x = Mechanism name
Probable cause Hardware failure for mechanism indicated. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error codes
Error code: 0308

The (x) assay is disabled due to a hardware failure. x = Assay type
Hardware failure on an item required for processing 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 the specified assay type. error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0310

Unable to process test, sample pipettor failed at sample cup/tube.
Test is not processed due to sample pipettor that 1. Start up the processing module to remove the is left in the sample cup or tube due to: probe from the sample cup or tube. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, User selected stop for the processing module. page 5-13. Or 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve Damaged pipettor. any hardware failure, if the error continues. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0311

Unable to process test, sample handler component failed.
A sample handler component failed and the sample 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 could not be delivered to the aspiration location. error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0314

Control point excluded.
User excluded a control point, data is logged to QC Status message. No corrective action is required. log.
Error code: 0315

Control point excluded by system.
Probable cause System excluded a control point, data is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, lamp failure.
Probable cause An optics or lamp error occurred before or during processing of this test. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 6500 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 6500 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error codes
Error code: 0351

Unable to process test, water bath level low or temperature out of range.
Probable cause Water bath level or temperature error occurred while processing the test. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any water bath level or temperature error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any water bath level or temperature category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 0352

Unable to process test due to previous processing module error.
Probable cause The test was not processed due to a previous failure on the processing module. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0353

System is configured to run in exhibition mode.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Corrective action
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CPU board is configured for Exhibition Mode. hardware failure.
Error code: 0400

Control point excluded by system, outside (x) standard deviation limit. x = Standard deviation limit.
Probable cause Control point excluded. The value is outside the system configured standard deviation limit, data is logged to QC log. Corrective action 1. Verify the correct level was run. 2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range (c System), page 10-567 or Controls out of range (i System), page 10-577, for corrective action. 3. Rerun the same control level(s) after performing corrective action.
Error code: 0401

System QC inhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y). x = Assay name y = Processing module number (1-4)
Error code: 0402

Westgard rule (x) enabled for Assay (y). x = Name of Westgard rule y = Assay name
Probable cause A Westgard rule was enabled for the specified assay, information is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Westgard rule (x) disabled for Assay (y). x = Name of Westgard rule y = Assay name
Probable cause A Westgard rule was disabled for the specified assay, information is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error codes
Error code: 0404

Westgard rule (x) for Assay (y) changed to Failure. x = Name of Westgard rule y = Assay name
A Westgard rule was changed from Warning to Status message. No corrective action is required. Failure for the specified assay, information is logged to QC log.
Error code: 0405

Westgard rule (x) assay (y) changed to Warning. x = Name of Westgard rule y = Assay name
Probable cause A Westgard rule was changed from Failure to Warning for the specified assay, information is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0406

Control configuration, original data.
Probable cause The control configuration was edited for a defined control level, information is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0407

Control configuration, current data.
Probable cause The control configuration was edited for a defined control level, information is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0408

Control point included.
Probable cause User included a control point, data is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0409

Units changed for Assay (x) number (y). Existing QC values will be excluded from the QC data plot. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Status message. No corrective action is required. The unit used to report results for the indicated assay was changed. All QC results for the previous units will be excluded from the QC data Levey-Jennings plot. Excluded data is not used during Westgard analysis.
Error code: 0411

System QC uninhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y). x = Assay name y = Processing module number (1-4)
Error code: 0412

Operator inhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y). x = Assay name y = Processing module number (1-4)
Error code: 0413

Operator uninhibits Assay (x) on Processing Module (y). x = Assay name y = Processing module number (1-4)
Section 10-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Westgard Warning (x) received for control. x = Assay name, control name, control level, Westgard rule symbolic name.
Probable cause The control received a Westgard Warning flag. Corrective action 1. Review QC results for specified control. 2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range (c System), page 10-567, or Controls out of range (i System), page 10-577, for corrective action. 3. Rerun the same control level(s) after performing corrective action.
Error codes
Error code: 0415

System QC excludes result, Westgard rule (x) was activated. x = Name of Westgard rule
Error code: 0416

Westgard Failure (x) received for control. x = Assay name, control name, control level, Westgard rule symbolic name.
Probable cause The control received a Westgard failure flag. Corrective action 1. Review QC results for specified control. 2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range (c System), page 10-567 or Controls out of range (i System), page 10-577, for corrective action. 3. Rerun the same control level(s) after performing corrective action.
Error code: 0418

Lot (x) for control (y) is the default lot. x = Default control lot number y = Control name
Probable cause Control configuration was edited for a defined control level, information is logged to QC log. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0419

Westgard Run Specification changed.
Changed the Westgard time limit definition for a Status message. No corrective action is required. Run. Action performed by an Abbott Representative at the request of the customer.
Error code: 0420

Westgard failure auto-exclusion feature enabled.
Probable cause Changed the Westgard failure auto-exclusion from FALSE to TRUE. Action performed by an Abbott Representative at the request of the customer. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0421

Westgard failure auto-exclusion feature disabled.
Probable cause Changed the Westgard failure auto-exclusion from TRUE to FALSE. Action performed by an Abbott Representative at the request of the customer. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0422

Control result outside (x) standard deviation auto-exclusion feature enabled. x = Standard Deviation limit
Changed the Westgard Standard Deviation Limit or Status message. No corrective action is required. changed the statistical accumulation criteria from FALSE to TRUE. Action performed by an Abbott Representative at the request of the customer.
Error code: 0423

Control result outside (x) standard deviation auto-exclusion feature disabled. x = Standard Deviation limit
Changed the Westgard Standard Deviation Limit or Status message. No corrective action is required. changed the statistical accumulation criteria from TRUE to FALSE. Action performed by an Abbott Representative at the request of the customer.
Section 10-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reduction of lot or level limits not allowed.
Probable cause Changed the Westgard control configuration limits to a smaller size. Action performed by an Abbott Representative at the request of the customer. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error codes
Error code: 0500

Operator requested Stop on Sample Handler.
Probable cause Unable to complete the motor command because user selected stop. Corrective action Start up the sample handler when the reason for the stop no longer exists. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
Error code: 0501

Power On Self Test (POST) starting on module (x). x = Module Number (0-4)
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) are starting on the indicated module. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0502

Optics values modified.
The optics values for linearity or normalization were Status message. No corrective action is required. modified by the user.
Error code: 0503

System Control Center (SCC) shutdown.
Probable cause System control center shutdown correctly. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action required.
Section 10-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0504

User (x) logged on. x = User name
Probable cause The indicated user successfully logged on the system control center. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0505

Configuration changes take effect next time SCC is started.
Probable cause Edited serial port configuration. Corrective action
Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, for new configuration to take effect.
Error code: 0506

Retest rule (x) for Assay number (y) was deleted because an assay required for this rule was deleted. x = Name of retest rule y = Assay number
Probable cause An assay required for the retest rule was deleted. Corrective action Reinstall the deleted assay and re-define the rule, if the retest rule is required.
Error code: 0507

Decimal separator changed from (x) to (y). Make sure your host system, if configured, supports this number format. x = Previously used separator y = New separator
Probable cause The symbol used as the decimal separator was changed from the SCC Configuration screen. NOTE: Data generated prior to this change does not have the new format. All data generated after this change uses the new format. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Batch (x) deleted, unreleased results are at the limit. x = Name of Batch
Probable cause The number of unreleased results is at the maximum. Corrective action Release or delete unreleased patient results, quality controls, and exceptions currently on the system.
Error codes
Error code: 0509

Unreleased patient results are at 90 percent of capacity. Release patient results or delete patient exceptions.
Probable cause Unreleased results are at 90% of the system capacity. Corrective action Release or delete unreleased patient results, quality controls, and exceptions currently on the system.
Error code: 0510

System backup complete.
Probable cause The system backup procedure is complete. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0511

Thousands separator changed from (x) to (y). Make sure your host system, if configured, supports this number format. x = Previously used separator y = New separator
Probable cause The symbol used as the thousands separator was changed using the SCC Configuration screen. NOTE: Data generated prior to this change does not have the new format. All data generated after this change uses the new format. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0512

System (x) restore complete. x = Name of backup
Probable cause The requested restore was complete. Corrective action Status message. Contact your Area Customer Support if the backup data was not restored.
Error code: 0513

User manually failed calibration curve.
Probable cause User manually failed a calibration curve. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0514

Control (x) excluded by system, outside (y) standard deviation limit. x = Control name, control level, assay name y = Standard Deviation limit
Probable cause Control point excluded. The value is outside the system configured standard deviation limit, data is logged to QC log. Corrective action 1. Verify the correct level was run. 2. See Observed Problems, Controls out of range (c System), page 10-567 or Controls out of range (i System), page 10-577, for corrective action. 3. Rerun the same control level(s) after performing corrective action.
Error code: 0515

Control (x) excluded by system, Westgard rule (y) activated. x = Control name, control level name, assay name y = Rule name
Auto-exclusion feature is active and a control point Status message. No corrective action is required. failed the specified Westgard rule. The control point is not used in statistical analysis.
Section 10-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

It will take (x) minutes to pause the modules. Are you sure you want to pause the selected modules? x = Number of minutes
Error codes
User selected pause for a processing module while Select OK to pause the processing module. test were scheduled or running. Or Select Cancel if you do not want to pause the processing module.
Error code: 0517

System time and/or date setting was changed.
Probable cause The system time, date or daylight savings settings were changed. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0518

Avoid loading calibrators, QC, priority samples or leaving empty spaces in a carrier when running a non-bar coded batch.
Probable cause Informational message telling the user to avoid loading calibrators, controls, priority samples, or leaving empty spaces in a carrier when running a non-bar coded batch. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0519

Data archive complete.
The requested data archive procedure successfully Status message. No corrective action is required. completed.
Error code: 0520

System language changed to (x) by user (y). x = Language y = User ID
Probable cause The system language was changed on the system control center configure screen. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0521

Data archive canceled.
Probable cause The Cancel button on the progress bar was selected while archiving data. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0522

Retest rule (x) for Assay number (y) was modified because an assay required for this rule was deleted. x = Retest rule number y = Assay number
Probable cause An assay required for the retest rule was deleted. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0523

For module configuration changes to take effect, the SCC will shutdown.
Probable cause A change to the module configuration was made. The system automatically shuts down. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0524

Incomplete module configuration, system shutting down.
Probable cause The Cancel button was selected on the initial module configuration screen. Corrective action 1. Repeat the initial module configuration after rebooting the system. 2. Select Done.
Error code: 0525

An automatic screen refresh has been performed.
Probable cause The screen was automatically refreshed due to a 2 hour period of inactivity. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Empty tray detected in bay (x). x = The number of the bay containing the empty tray
Probable cause An empty tray was loaded in the bay. Hardware failure: Carrier/Tray sensor Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 0527

Number of Unreleased Control Results reached limit. New orders will not be accepted.
Probable cause The number of unreleased control results has reached the limit. Corrective action Delete or release QC results, exceptions, or pending orders.
Error code: 0528

Unreleased Control Results are at 90 percent of capacity. Release Control Results or delete exceptions.
Unreleased control results are at 90% of the system Delete or release unreleased control results and capacity. exceptions currently on the system.
Error code: 0529

c System module powered ON.
Probable cause The user powered on the module or the module powered on after a power failure. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0530

Suspend processing for sample (x). x = Sample ID
Probable cause Suspend was selected for a sample that was pending. Corrective action 1. Select OK to suspend the sample. 2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights to signal that the sample is available to remove.
Section 10-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0531

No test orders found for Carrier (x), Position (y). x = Carrier ID or CRSL y = Carrier or carousel position
Probable cause A bar coded tube scanned by the sample handler did not have pending test orders. Corrective action Place an order for the sample in the carrier.
Error code: 0532

Suspend request denied, sample not present.
Probable cause The sample was removed from the system. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0534

Suspend processing for sample (x) on bay (y). x = Sample ID y = Bay number
Probable cause Suspend was selected for a sample in process on the RSH. Corrective action 1. Select OK to suspend the sample. 2. Wait until the RSH indicator lights signal that the sample is available to remove.
Error code: 0535

Number of calibrator tests reached limit. New Calibration orders will not be accepted.
Probable cause The number of unreleased calibrator results has reached the limit. Corrective action Delete calibrator exceptions or pending orders, or wait until in-process calibrations complete.
Error code: 0536

No database found. A new database will be created. Wait for the snapshot screen to display (up to 20 minutes).
No database exists, a new database will be created. Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Improper shutdown on SCC. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on RSH carrier transport.
Probable cause Main power source to the SCC was interrupted causing an improper shutdown. Corrective action 1. Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s). If the carrier is located on the RSH carrier, see Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708. 2. Determine the cause of the power interruption and resolve.
Error codes
Error code: 0538

RSH has gone offline. Discard samples in carrier if carrier is located on carrier transport.
Probable cause Main power source to the RSH was interrupted while the module status was Scheduled pause or Running. Corrective action 1. Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708. 2. Determine the cause of the power interruption and resolve. 3. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
Section 10-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0539

(y) will not be recalculated unless you delete the existing (x) results for this sample prior to rerunning. x = Constituent assay names y = Calculated assay name
Probable cause One or more of the required constituents are present on the system with valid results and the calculated assay has been added to an order(s). Corrective action If new constituent results are desired: Delete any pending constituent orders for the sample, and then create a new order for the calculated assay. OR Delete existing valid constituent results for this sample if new constituent results are desired for the calculation. Delete results for manually ordered constituents from either the Results review or Stored results screen. Delete results for constituents automatically ordered by the system from the Results review, Stored results, or Exception status screen.
Error code: 0540

Dilution for Assay number (y) was modified or deleted. Retest rule (x) may become invalid. x = Retest rule number y = Assay number
Probable cause An assay dilution used in a retest rule was deleted from the assay parameter file. Corrective action Review the configured retest rules to determine if a change to an existing retest rule or a new retest rule is desired. See View the assay retest rule settings, page 2-100.
Error code: 0542

Unable to process test, reagent kit is unavailable.
User selected a reagent kit to be unloaded that had Load the required reagent kit. scheduled tests in process.
Section 10-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) number (y) definition has been changed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause An assay parameter was edited. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error codes
Error code: 0545

Calculated Assay (x) number (y) was created. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause A calculated assay was automatically created during assay installation. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0546

Panel (x) was created. x = Panel name
Probable cause A panel name was automatically created during assay installation. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0547

Retest rule for Assay (x) number (y) was created. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause A retest rule was automatically created during assay installation. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0550

Cuvette washing not completed, hardware failure or user pressed Stop. Promptly perform the Wash cuvettes procedure.
Probable cause User selected stop. Corrective action Restart the run that was in process as soon as the reason for the stop no longer exists. Or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, if the run will not be restarted immediately. The cuvettes should not be left dirty for extended periods of time. Hardware failure. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. 4. If the run will not be restarted immediately, perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, as soon as the instrument is operational. The cuvettes should not be left dirty for extended periods of time.
Error code: 0551

Units changed for CC Assay (x) number (y). Existing QC values will be excluded from the QC data plot. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Status message. No corrective action is required. The unit used to report results for the indicated assay was changed. All QC results for the previous units will be excluded from the QC data Levey-Jennings plot. Excluded data is not used during Westgard analysis.
Section 10-88
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Update of c System module CPU firmware complete. Cycle the module power to complete the update process.
Probable cause The system has completed the upgrade of the c System module CPU firmware that was required during the upgrade of the ARCHITECT System software. Corrective action
Error codes
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Error code: 0553

Update of c System module DAQ firmware complete. Cycle the module power to complete the update process.
Probable cause The system has completed the upgrade of the c System module DAQ firmware that was required during the upgrade of the ARCHITECT System software. Corrective action
Error code: 0554

User-defined reagent kit in location (x) was unloaded, new segment type was scanned. x = Reagent carousel segment and position
A new reagent supply center segment was scanned Define a new position for the non-bar coded reagent. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c with fewer positions than the previous segment in the location. A non-bar coded reagent was System), page 5-91. assigned to a position that no longer exists.
Error code: 0555

c System CPU firmware update required. Do not perform any module tasks until completion message appears (up to 20 min).
Probable cause An upgrade of the c System module CPU firmware is in process. Corrective action Do not perform any activity on the module including the following which send commands to the CPU board: Pressing any keypad or sample carousel buttons Opening or removing any carousel covers Emptying the high-concentration waste bottle A message displays when the upgrade is complete. Wait for the message before performing any activity.
Section 10-89
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0556

c System DAQ firmware update required. Do not perform any module tasks until completion message appears (up to 20 min).
Probable cause An upgrade of the c System module DAQ firmware is in process. Corrective action Do not perform any activity on the module including the following, which send commands to the DAQ board: Pressing any keypad or sample carousel buttons Opening or removing any carousel covers Emptying the high-concentration waste bottle Wait for the message indicating the upgrade is complete.
Error code: 0600

Unable to install (x) number (y) as correlation assay, primary assay with same or higher version exists. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Feature not currently available. Corrective action No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0601

Unable to install (x) number (y) as correlation assay, primary assay does not exist. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Feature not currently available. Corrective action No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0602

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, a higher version of the assay is already installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Attempted to install an older assay version when a newer assay version is already installed on the system. Corrective action If the older assay version is required: 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version. 2. Install the older assay version. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Section 10-90
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay with a higher calibration version already installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Attempted to install an older assay version when a version with a higher calibration version is already installed on the system. Corrective action If the older assay version is required: 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version. 2. Install the older assay version. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Error codes
Error code: 0604

Unable to install assay, at least one module is not in the correct status.
Probable cause Attempted to install an assay while the processing module(s) are not in the correct status. Corrective action Install the assay when the status for all processing modules is Stopped, Ready, or Offline. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Error code: 0605

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay with same version is already installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Attempted to install an assay when the same version is already installed on the system. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0606

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Higher reagent version already installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Attempted to install an assay whose reagent configuration version is less than that of the installed assay. Corrective action If the older assay version is required: 1. Delete the most recently installed assay version. 2. Install the older assay version. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Section 10-91
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0607

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. The module does not support this assay type. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Attempted to install a stat assay on the i 2000. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 0608

Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid module configuration. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Attempted to install an assay not supported by the module configuration. Corrective action Configure the system with the appropriate module(s) and reinstall the assay.
Error code: 0609

Primary wavelength cannot be the same as the Secondary wavelength.
The primary wavelength cannot be the same as the Select a different primary or secondary wavelength secondary wavelength. or select the option of "None" for the secondary wavelength.
Error code: 0610

Reaction check Read time A or Read time B not defined.
Probable cause A Reaction check option is selected on the Configure assay parameters window - General Validity check view, but the Read time A and/or Read time B is not defined. Corrective action Define a range for both the Read time A and B settings or select the Reaction check option of "None".
Error code: 0611

Invalid R1 or R2 reagent volume. (Range: 20-345 L)
A value outside the limit of 20-345 L is entered for Enter a value between 20-345 L. the R1 or R2 reagent volume.
Section 10-92
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid R1 or R2 Water volume. (Range: 45-300 L, or field can be blank)
Error codes
A value outside the limit of 45-300 L is entered for Enter a value between 45-300 L or leave the field the R1 or R2 water volume. blank for undiluted reagents.
Error code: 0615

Invalid total dilution volume. Sum of Sample, Diluent, and Water volumes must total 100-360 L.
Probable cause The combined sample, diluent, and water volume defined for a sample or calibrator dilution is less than 100 L or greater than 360 L. At least 100 L is required to ensure complete mixing and 360 L is the volume limit of the cuvette. Corrective action Change the entries in the Sample, Diluent, and/or Water volume data entry boxes so the combined volume is 100-360 L.
Error code: 0616

Diluent volume must be defined if Diluted sample and/or Water volume are defined.
A Diluted sample or Water volume is defined for a Enter a value between 20-345 L for the Diluent sample or calibrator dilution, but the Diluent volume volume or leave the Diluted sample and Water is not defined. volume fields blank for undiluted samples.
Error code: 0617

Assay name already exists, enter a different name.
Probable cause The assay name entered is already used for another assay parameter file. Corrective action Enter a unique assay name.
Error code: 0618

Assay number already exists, enter a different assay number.
Probable cause The assay number entered is already used for another assay parameter file. Corrective action Enter a unique assay number.
Section 10-93
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0619

Undefined dilution selected as Default dilution. Select a different dilution as default.
The dilution option selected as the default does not Select a different dilution option as the default, or have sample or diluent volumes defined. define the volumes for the selected option.
Error code: 0620

For the selected calculated assay, the retest assays are not used for calculation if original results exist.
Probable cause A calculated assay was selected for the retest assay when the retest rule was configured. Corrective action
A retest rule may include a calculated assay and other assays, but should not include the original When a calculated assay is ordered as a result of a assay for retest. Examples: retest rule, any existing original results for the constituent assays are used to calculate the result. Correct retest rule Total PSA to retest to Free PSA and PSA ratio Incorrect retest rule Total PSA to retest to Total PSA, Free PSA and PSA ratio
Error code: 0621

Invalid Assay Number. Assay Number for user-defined assays must be 2000 - 2999.
Probable cause A user-defined assay can only be defined with an assay number between 2000-2999. Corrective action Enter an assay number between 2000-2999.
Section 10-94
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Last required read value (x) must be greater than or equal to the last read defined for all read times. x = Read point value defined in the last required read field
Error codes
One of the following read times is defined with a Change the last required read to a read point equal read point larger than the read point defined for the to or greater than the largest read point defined for last required read. all the read times. Main read time Blank read time Flex read time Color correction read time Reaction check - Read time A Reaction check - Read time B
Error code: 0623

Reagent name already exists, enter a different name.
Probable cause The reagent name entered is already used for another reagent. Corrective action Enter a unique reagent name.
Error code: 0624

Missing entry, Reagent name required.
Probable cause The reagent name was not defined for a new reagent configuration. Corrective action Enter a unique reagent name.
Error code: 0625

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, reference Photometric assay does not exist. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Attempted to install a sample interference index 1. Install the desired reference photometric assay. assay before installing the photometric assay that is Example: HILref or AST used as a reference (for example, HILref or AST). 2. Install the sample interference index assay.
Section 10-95
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0626

Missing entry, Serial number required.
Probable cause The serial number was not defined for a new reagent kit configuration. Corrective action Enter a serial number.
Error code: 0627

Serial number already exists for this lot number, enter a different Serial number.
Probable cause The serial number entered is already used for the reagent lot. Corrective action Enter a unique serial number for the reagent lot.
Error code: 0628

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay name already exists for a different assay. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause An assay parameter file with the same name but a different assay number already exists. Corrective action Rename or delete the assay with the same name prior to installing the new assay.
Error code: 0629

Sum of Sample, R1, and R2 volumes must be 160-360 L. If R2 is used, Sample and R1 volume must be greater than 100 L.
Probable cause The combined sample and reagent volumes defined for a sample or calibrator dilution is less than 160 L or greater than 360 L The combined sample and R1 volumes defined for two reagent assay is less than 100 L. Corrective action Change the Sample (or Diluted sample) volume, R1 volume, R1 Water volume, R2 volume, and/or R2 Water volume so the combined volume is 160-360 L. Change the Sample (or Diluted sample) volume, R1 volume, and/or R1 Water volume so the combined volume is equal to or greater than 100 L.
Error code: 0630

Calibrator set name already exists, enter a different name.
Probable cause The calibrator name entered is already used for another calibrator set. Corrective action Enter a unique calibrator name.
Section 10-96
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Lot number already exists for a different reagent, enter a unique lot number.
Probable cause The lot number entered is already used for a reagent. Corrective action Enter a unique lot number for the reagent.
Error codes
Error code: 0632

A sample diluent must be specified when a Diluent volume is defined.
Probable cause A Diluent volume is defined for a sample or calibrator dilution, but a diluent is not selected. Corrective action Select the Diluent list button, and then select the desired sample diluent from the list.
Error code: 0634

Diluted sample volume must be defined if Diluent volume is defined.
A Diluent volume is defined for a sample or Enter a value between 2.0-15.0 L for the Diluted calibrator dilution, but the Diluted sample volume is sample volume or leave the Diluent volume field not defined. blank for undiluted samples.
Error code: 0635

Unable to save assay, missing parameter. Verify all assay parameters are defined.
Probable cause A required parameter is not defined. Corrective action Verify all required assay parameters are defined.
Error code: 0636

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, reagent name exists for a different reagent or sample diluent. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause The reagent name defined for the assay being installed is used for a different reagent or sample diluent already defined on the system. The assay installation does not complete. Corrective action Perform one of the following prior to installing the assay: Edit the assay to be installed with a unique reagent name. Delete or edit the reagent or sample diluent already defined on the system.
Section 10-97
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0637

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, sample diluent name exists for a reagent. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Perform one of the following prior to installing the The sample diluent name defined for the assay being installed is used for a reagent already defined assay: on the system. The assay installation does not Edit the assay to be installed with a unique complete. sample diluent name. Delete or edit the reagent already defined on the system.
Error code: 0638

Missing entry, Lot Number required.
Probable cause The lot number was not defined for a new reagent kit configuration. Corrective action Enter a lot number.
Error code: 0639

Interpretation categories must be defined consecutively starting with the first row.
Probable cause An interpretation row was skipped when defining interpretation names. Corrective action Define interpretations consecutively starting with the first row.
Error code: 0640

Same calibrator selected for more than one level, calibrator concentrations must be the same.
Probable cause Entered different concentrations for the same calibrator level. Corrective action Enter the same concentration for each use of the calibrator level.
Error code: 0641

Reagent Lot contains non-alphanumeric characters.
Probable cause The reagent lot entered contains a space or other non-alphanumeric character. Corrective action Remove the space and make sure the reagent lot contains only alphanumeric characters.
Section 10-98
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) number (y) installation error, assay is already installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Attempted to import an assay when the same assay If the new assay is required: is already installed on the system. 1. Delete the assay file currently installed. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. 2. Import the new assay file.
Error code: 0643

Dilution Protocols must be defined in consecutive order starting from the first dilution.
Probable cause The sample dilution protocols were not defined consecutively. The first and/or second row was left undefined. Corrective action Define the dilution protocols in the correct order starting from the first row. Do not leave a row empty and define a row below it.
Error code: 0644

Sample probe wash type converted to Maximum Wash for Assay (x) number (y). x = Assay name y = Assay number
The sample probe wash changed from Optimized No corrective action required. throughput (c 8000 only) to Maximum wash (c 8000 For more information see Descriptions of import and c 16000) for an assay file exported and then status messages, page Appendix E-159. imported between an ARCHITECT c 8000 and c 16000 System.
Error code: 0645

One or more wavelengths were changed for Assay (x) number (y). x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause A wavelength was changed for an assay file exported and then imported between an ARCHITECT c 8000 and c 16000 System. Corrective action No corrective action required. For more information see Descriptions of import status messages, page Appendix E-159.
Section 10-99
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0700

Run request denied, Processing Module cover open.
Probable cause A processing module cover is open. Hardware failure: Cover sensor Corrective action Close all covers, and then select run. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0701

Processing Module Stopped, cover opened.
A processing module cover was opened during a Close the cover and restart the run. run. Hardware failure: Cover sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0702

Reagent scan canceled, Reagent Carousel Cover opened.
Probable cause Reagent carousel cover is open. Hardware failure: Cover sensor Corrective action Close the cover and repeat the scan. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0703

Request canceled, Reagent Carousel Cover is open.
Probable cause Reagent carousel cover is open. Hardware failure: Cover sensor Corrective action Close the reagent carousel cover. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-100
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Run request denied, Processing Queue access door open module (x), close door and press Run. x = Processing module number (1-4)
Probable cause Processing queue access door is open on the sample handler. Hardware failure: Sensor Corrective action Close the processing queue access door. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 0705

Processing Queue access door opened on Processing Module (x). x = Processing module number (1-4)
Probable cause A processing queue access door was opened Corrective action 1. Close the processing queue access door. 2. Start up the sample handler if status is Stopped. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Hardware failure: Sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0706

Run request denied, LAS Carousel cover is open. Close cover and press Run.
Probable cause LAS carousel cover is open. Hardware failure: LAS carousel cover sensor Corrective action Close the LAS carousel cover and select run. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0707

LAS Carousel cover opened.
Probable cause LAS carousel cover was opened while the LAS carousel status was Running or Scheduled pause. Hardware failure: LAS carousel cover sensor Corrective action 1. Close the LAS carousel cover. 2. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-101
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0708

Run request denied, RSH cover(s) open. Close cover(s) and press Run.
Probable cause An RSH cover was open when starting a run. Hardware failure: RSH cover access sensor Corrective action Close the RSH cover and select run. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0709

RSH stopped, cover opened.
Probable cause An RSH cover(s) was opened while the sample handler status was Running, Scheduled pause, or Initializing. Corrective action 1. Close the RSH cover. 2. Start up the sample handler. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: RSH cover access sensor
Error code: 0710

Reagent supply center cover is open.
Probable cause A reagent supply center cover is open: When attempting to initiate a run. During a run when the access light on the keypad is not illuminated. When attempting a reagent scan. Corrective action 1. Close the reagent supply center covers. 2. Restart the run or perform another reagent scan.
Error code: 0711

Sample carousel cover is open.
Probable cause The sample carousel cover is open: When attempting to initiate a run. During a run when the sample carousel access indicator (square) is not illuminated. Sample carousel cover sensor did not detect that 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access indicator button. If the button is not illuminated, the cover was closed. select the button to pause the sample carousel. 2. Open and then firmly close the sample carousel cover.
Section 10-102
Corrective action 1. Close the sample carousel cover. 2. Restart the run.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Startup request denied, Processing Module cover open.
Probable cause The processing module cover was open when start up was selected. Hardware failure: Cover sensor Corrective action Close the processing module cover. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 0713

Startup request denied, RSH cover(s) open. Close cover(s) and press Startup.
Probable cause An RSH cover(s) was open when start up was selected. Corrective action 1. Close the RSH cover. 2. Start up the sample handler. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Hardware failure: RSH cover access sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0714

Startup request denied, LAS Carousel cover is open.
The LAS carousel cover was open when start up Close the LAS carousel cover. was selected. Hardware failure: LAS carousel cover sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0800

Unable to perform requested operation, remove carrier(s) from carrier positioner(s).
Carriers are present on the carrier positioner while Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport attempting to perform a start up for the RSH. and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708. Carriers may be present because a user selected stop while the RSH was running, power to the processing module(s) and RSH was interrupted, or the RSH was stopped due to hardware failure.
Section 10-103
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0801

Unable to save edits when orders exist for the selected assay (x). x = Assay name
Probable cause Attempted to edit an assay when pending or running orders exist for the assay. Corrective action Delete the pending orders or wait until the orders are complete before trying to edit the assay.
Error code: 0802

Carrier in carrier transport arm. Please remove.
The RSH was stopped and a carrier was detected Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport in the transport arm. and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708. The RSH may be stopped because a user selected stop while the RSH was running, power to the processing module(s) and RSH was interrupted, or the RSH was stopped due to hardware failure. Hardware failure: Rail guide sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0803

Unable to delete assay (x), it is being referenced by another assay (y). x = Assay name of the assay to be deleted y = Assay name of the assay that is referring to assay to be deleted
Probable cause The assay to be deleted is referenced in another photometric or sample interference assay file. Corrective action Perform one of the following to the assay that is referring to the assay to be deleted: Delete the assay. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. For a photometric assay, select the Use Cal Factor from the list button, and then select a different assay. For a sample interference assay, select the Reference photometric assay list button, and then select a different assay.
Section 10-104
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to delete reagent until all kits are deleted and any assay file defined to use this reagent is edited.
Probable cause Reagent kits are defined for the reagent. The reagent is defined for use in an assay parameter file. Corrective action Delete all reagent kits prior to deleting the reagent. Contact your Area Customer Support. Perform one of the following prior to deleting the reagent: Change the Reagent parameter in the assay to use a different reagent. Delete the assay that uses the reagent. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Error codes
Error code: 0805

Unable to configure, a reagent is currently assigned to position D1.
Probable cause A bar coded reagent was scanned or non-bar coded reagent was assigned in position D1 of reagent supply center 1 and/or 2. Corrective action Unload the reagent in position D1 prior to configuring an onboard solution into the position. See Unload bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98 or Unload non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-100.
Error code: 0806

Unable to use (x) inventory in position (y), bar coded reagent found in the same location. x = Inventory item y = Reagent carousel segment and position
A bar coded reagent was scanned in position D1 of 1. Unload the reagent in position D1. See Unload the reagent supply center. bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-98. 2. Load expected onboard solution in position D1. See Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39 or Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41.
Section 10-105
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0808

Unable to perform requested operation, cuvette segment alignment tool was not removed.
Probable cause The cuvette segment alignment tool was not removed after performing a pipettor calibration procedure. Corrective action Remove the cuvette segment alignment tool and replace the cuvette segment into the position.
Water is present on the slotted edges of a cuvette Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment. segment. Cuvette tab is broken. Hardware failure. Optics trigger sensor
Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000), page 9-108 or Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000), page 9-186.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0809

Unable to change level, level has not been added.
Probable cause A multiconstituent control level was not added before the user tried to create another level. Corrective action Add the multiconstituent control level before selecting another level.
Error code: 0810

Unable to change lot number, level for current lot has not been added.
Probable cause Attempted to edit the lot number for a multi-constituent control before adding the control level. Corrective action Add the control level for the current lot before trying to change the lot number.
Error code: 0811

Unable to delete assay (x), it is being referenced by another assay. x = Assay name of the assay to be deleted
Probable cause Attempted to delete an assay that is referenced in another assay parameter file. Corrective action Delete or edit the assay file that is referencing the assay before deleting the assay.
Section 10-106
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is a constituent of a calculated assay (y). x = Assay name y = Calculated assay name
Probable cause Attempted to delete an assay that is defined as a constituent of a calculated assay. Corrective action Delete or edit the calculated assay before deleting the constituent assay.
Error codes
Error code: 0813

Unable to process test, carrier cannot be transported.
Probable cause The carrier could not be picked up from either a tray section or carrier positioner pocket due to: Carrier is inserted backwards in the tray or priority Reposition the carrier in the tray or priority position. position. Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Rerun the sample in a different carrier. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77. Corrective action
Error code: 0815

Unable to process test, carrier ID/position bar code read error at aspiration point.
Probable cause If error occurs for one carrier: Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Use a different carrier, if error continues. If error occurs for multiple carriers: Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure: Bar code reader Corrective action
Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-697.

Error code: 0816

Unable to process test, sample suspend requested.
Suspend was selected on the Sample status screen Rerun the sample. and the sample becomes an exception and is not processed.
Section 10-107
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0817

Unable to suspend processing, sample located on sample carousel.
Suspend was selected on the Sample status screen 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access for a sample processing on the sample carousel. indicator button. 2. If the button is not illuminated, select the button to pause the sample carousel or wait until the sample carousel is finished processing all the samples before accessing the sample.
Error code: 0818

Unable to suspend processing, sample has not been scanned by the RSH.
Probable cause Suspend was selected for a sample that was not scanned by the RSH. Corrective action Wait until the sample is identified before attempting to suspend the sample.
Error code: 0819

Unable to suspend processing, sample handler not in correct status.
Suspend was selected for a sample when the RSH Sample access is allowed unless the RSH status is status is not Running or Scheduled pause. Running or Scheduled pause.
Error code: 0820

Unable to suspend processing, batch is in process.
Probable cause Suspend was selected for a sample when batch was in process. Corrective action Wait until the batch is completed or delete the batch.
Error code: 0821

Unable to suspend processing, blank calibrator sample selected.
Probable cause Suspend was selected for a water blank calibrator sample. Corrective action Select a different calibrator level located on the RSH.
Section 10-108
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to delete calibrator set, calibrator is used by an assay.
Probable cause The calibrator set is defined for use in an assay parameter file. Corrective action Perform one of the following prior to deleting the calibrator set: Change the Calibrator set parameter in the assay to use a different calibrator set. See Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88. Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set. See Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123, and Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122.
Error codes
Error code: 0823

Unable to reduce number of calibrator set levels.
Attempted to reduce the number of calibrator set You must perform one of the following prior to levels for a calibrator when an assay parameter file reducing the number of levels for the calibrator set: is configured to use the larger number of levels. Edit the assay parameters of any assay using the calibrator set to use fewer levels of the set. See Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88. Change the Calibrator set parameter in the assay to use a different calibrator set. See Configure a photometric assay (c System), page 2-88. Delete the assay that uses the calibrator set. See Delete a reagent kit (c System), page 2-123, and Delete a reagent (c System), page 2-122.
Error code: 0824

You have selected too many results. Select no more than (x) results for each Absorbance report print request. x = Maximum number of results
Probable cause More than 1000 results were selected when attempting to print an Absorbance report. Corrective action Select less than 1000 results when printing an Absorbance report and try again.
Section 10-109
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0825

Unable to perform the selected procedure, another procedure is already in process on the module.
Probable cause Attempted to perform a diagnostic procedure or a new maintenance procedure on a module that already has a maintenance procedure in process. Corrective action Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in process is complete before starting a diagnostic procedure or a new maintenance procedure.
Error code: 0826

Unable to perform the selected procedure, a required module is being used by another procedure already in process.
Probable cause Attempted to perform a maintenance procedure on a module that is being used by a maintenance procedure in process on another module. Corrective action Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in process is complete before starting a new maintenance procedure.
Error code: 0827

Unable to perform diagnostic procedures while module is in the Maintenance state.
Probable cause Attempted to perform a diagnostic procedure on a module that has a maintenance procedure in process. Corrective action Wait until the maintenance procedure currently in process is complete before starting a diagnostic procedure.
Error code: 0828

Unable to unload reagent carrier, RSH sections full.
Probable cause Carriers are loaded in every RSH section. Hardware failure: Carrier sensor Corrective action Remove a carrier from an RSH section to make room to unload the reagent carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 0829

Unable to load reagent carrier, all reagent carousel positions full.
Probable cause Reagent carriers are loaded in every reagent carousel position. Hardware failure: Reagent carrier detect sensor
Section 10-110
Corrective action Unload a reagent carrier for an assay that is no longer required for testing to make room to load the reagent carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Request canceled, RV unloader is not detected.
Probable cause RV unloader was not detected during initialization. RV unloader is not seated correctly. Hardware failure: RV unloader sensor Corrective action Ensure that the RV unloader is placed in the unload position. Reseat the RV unloader. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 0831

Unable to perform requested operation, remove carrier from aspiration area.
Remove the sample carrier(s) from the carrier A carrier is present in the aspiration area while transport and aspiration area. attempting to perform a Startup on the RSH. A carrier may be present because a user selected stop while the RSH was running, power to the processing module and RSH was interrupted, or the RSH was stopped due to hardware failure.
Error code: 0900

Wrong lot, component or serial number in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was detected y = RSH section number
Probable cause A bottle with the wrong lot number, component ID, or serial number is loaded in the indicated reagent carrier position and RSH section. Corrective action 1. Print the reagent load error report. 2. Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct position.
Error code: 0901

Calibration version mismatch for reagent kit in section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause Calibration version for the reagent kit in the RSH section indicated does not match the currently installed assay. Corrective action 1. Load a reagent kit matching the currently installed assay version. NOTE: Deplete the supply of reagents for the old assay before installing the new assay. 2. Install the new assay file when the current supply of reagents is depleted. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214.
Section 10-111
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 0902

Version mismatch for reagent kit in section (x). x = RSH section number
The Reagent Configuration Version of the reagent Load the expected kit or assay file. kit in the RSH section indicated is not the expected value. NOTE: This error occurs if Clinical Investigation reagents or assay files are used. Clinical Investigation reagent bottles contain the text Investigational Use Only. Clinical Investigation assay files Cal Version parameter is 0 (zero).
Error code: 0903

Reagent kit in location (x) has R1 and R2 components loaded on different reagent lines. x = Reagent carousel segment and position
A reagent kit with 2 cartridges (R1 and R2) has Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the cartridges loaded on different lines (outer and inner) same line in both the R1 and R2 reagent supply in the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. centers. Choose one of the following options: Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the outer (A-line) carousel of R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. Load the reagent cartridges for the assay on the inner (B-line) carousel of R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Error code: 0904

Reagent carrier in section (x) is a 500 test kit. x = RSH section number
Probable cause A 500 test reagent kit was loaded on the system. Corrective action Remove the 500 test reagent kit.
Section 10-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unload the two carrier reagent kit in sections (x) before trying to reload. x = RSH section number
Probable cause One reagent carrier of a two carrier kit was removed from the load/unload area. A two carrier reagent kit's on board stability has been overridden and one reagent carrier has been removed from the load/unload area. Corrective action Remove both carriers of a two carrier reagent kit before reloading the reagent kit on the system. Remove both carriers of a two carrier reagent kit from the load/unload area and reload them.
Error codes
Error code: 0906

Reagent packs for Assay (x) loaded on both reagent lines. x = Assay
Probable cause Reagent packs for the same assay were found on both the outer (A-line) and inner (B-line) carousels for the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers. Corrective action Load reagent cartridges for the same assay on the same line, either outer (A-line) or inner (B-line), in the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Error code: 0909

Invalid entry. The value for Low Linearity must not be less than 0.
Probable cause A value less than zero was entered. Corrective action Enter a value above zero.
Error code: 0910

Invalid entry. The value for High Linearity must be less than (x) for dilution description 1. x = Assay default High Linearity
Probable cause A value greater than the assay default High Linearity was entered. Corrective action Enter a value lower than the assay default High Linearity.
Assay specific error codes (1000-1999)

The assay specific error code category includes error codes between 1000-1999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Section 10-113
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1000

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Cal 1 or Cal 2 final read is below specifications. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Wrong Cal 1 or Cal 2 used for the assay calibration. Corrective action If other assays are performing without error, place fresh Cal 1 and Cal 2 into sample cup ensuring they are for the correct assay and are placed in the correct positions.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See were switched. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69. Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low.
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57.
Section 10-114
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Pre-trigger and trigger bottles were replaced while processing tests, so air may have been aspirated instead of reagent.
Corrective action Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70
Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger pumps Pre-trigger or trigger valves Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are loose Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 1001

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too high for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Calibrators are not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct positions. Open new calibrator bottles. Load new reagent bottles.
Error code: 1002

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too low for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-115
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1003

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too high for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1004

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, final read too low for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1005

Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the lowest calibrator.
Probable cause RLU read is outside the specification for the ascending curve assay. If error occurs on one sample: Normal for some non-reactive samples. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert. 2. Rerun the sample. 3. Source another sample. 4. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve. Corrective action
Section 10-116
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Sample handling error.
Corrective action 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert. 2. Rerun the sample. 3. Source another sample.
If error occurs for more than one sample: Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See were switched. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69. 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69. Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low.
Section 10-117
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pre-trigger or trigger bottles were replaced while Perform the following as-needed maintenance processing tests so air may have been aspirated procedures: instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69, 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70. Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger pumps Pre-trigger or trigger valves Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are loose Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1006

Unable to process test, background read failure.
Probable cause Ambient light level is too high. Corrective action 1. Move the processing module or block it from direct sunlight. 2. Ensure all system panels are properly installed. Optics linearity and/or Normalization values are not entered correctly on the Configure modules window. Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger or pumps Pre-trigger or trigger valves Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are loose DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Dirty light pipes CMIA reader Update the Configure modules window with the correct values from the optics assembly. See Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52, or Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-118
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, activated read failure.
Probable cause Wrong Cal 1 or Cal 2 is used for the assay calibration. Corrective action If other assays are performing without error, place fresh Cal 1 and Cal 2 into sample cup ensuring they are for the correct assay and are placed in the correct positions.
Error codes
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See were switched. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69. Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low. Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is expired.
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57.
Pre-trigger or trigger bottles were replaced while Perform the following as-needed maintenance processing tests, so air may have been aspirated procedures: instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Optics linearity and/or Normalization values are not entered correctly on the Configure modules window. Update the Configure modules window with the correct values from the optics assembly. See Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52 or Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54.
Section 10-119
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Ambient light level is too high.
Corrective action 1. Move the processing module or block it from direct sunlight. 2. Ensure all system panels are properly installed.
Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger valve Pre-trigger or trigger pumps Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are loose Pre-trigger or trigger level sensor is broken Dirty light pipes Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 1008

Unable to process test, final read failure.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See were switched. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Section 10-120
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low. Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is expired. Pre-trigger and trigger bottles were replaced while processing tests, so air may have been aspirated instead of reagent.
Corrective action
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57.
Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69, 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70
Optics linearity and/or Normalization values are not entered correctly on the Configure modules window. Ambient light level too high.
Update the Configure modules window with the correct values from the optics assembly. See Configure modules window (i 2000), page 2-52 or Configure modules window (i 2000SR), page 2-54. 1. Move the processing module or block it from direct sunlight. 2. Ensure all system panels are properly installed.
Hardware failure: Pre-trigger and trigger valve Pre-trigger and trigger pumps Pre-trigger and trigger tubing connections are loose Pre-trigger and trigger level sensor is broken Dirty light pipes Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 1009

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) result is not available. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause A constituent result was deleted before other constituents of a calculated result completed. The constituent result was flagged outside the linear range of the assay. One of the constituent results became an exception. Corrective action Reorder the constituent assay. Rerun the constituent assay with manual or automatic dilution, if available. Determine the cause of the exception, correct and rerun the sample.
Section 10-121
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1050

Unable to calculate result, absorbance collection error.
Probable cause Lamp is not performing as expected. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1051

Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded optical limits.
Probable cause Sample concentration is too high. Corrective action Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Ultra-centrifuge the sample and rerun the infranatant. For details on sample integrity, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42.
Sample is lipemic.
Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Section 10-122
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Cuvette washer is not functioning properly.
Corrective action 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Hardware failure.
Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111 or Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189.
Error code: 1052

Unable to calculate result, endpoint absorbance reads are unstable.
Probable cause Debris in the water bath incubator. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29.
Section 10-123
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Dispense system is not performing correctly. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1053

Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity failure.
Probable cause Sample concentration is too high. Corrective action Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty. Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Debris in the water bath incubator.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38.
Section 10-124
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause R2 pipettor is out of alignment. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water.
Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1054

Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure.
Probable cause If error occurs for patient or control samples: Sample concentration is too high. Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). NOTE: View the reaction graph to confirm the high sample concentration. See View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230. Sample interferences (e.g., hemolysis, lipemia, etc.). Visually inspect the sample for possible interference due to hemolysis, icterus, and/or turbidity and perform one of the following: Redraw and rerun the sample if interference is present. Rerun the sample if no interference is observed. NOTE: You may use the Sample interference indices to determine increased interference levels, or you may view the reaction graph to confirm abnormal absorbance readings during the Blank read time (compare to normal result with this error). See View the reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), page 5-230. High anticoagulant to plasma ratio (i.e., sample tube is improperly filled). Redraw the sample into a sufficiently-filled anticoagulant tube or use a serum sample. For specimen collection and handling information, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Corrective action
Section 10-125
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause If error occurs for calibration samples: Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly Calibrators are not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. If error occurs for all samples: Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct positions. Open new calibrator bottles. Load new reagent bottles. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29.
Error code: 1055

Unable to calculate result, Flex read absorbance invalid for calibration.
Probable cause Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Open new calibrators or reagents. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1056

Unable to calculate result, absorbance below calibration curve lower limit.
Probable cause Sample concentration is too low. Calibration curve is not optimal. Corrective action Rerun the sample. Recalibrate the assay.
Section 10-126
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is damaged. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle.
Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.
Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new reagent(s). Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1057

Unable to calculate result, the Last required read in reference assay (x) number (y) must be defined as 5. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause The reference photometric assay selected in the sample interference assay file does not have the Last required read setting defined as 5. Corrective action Change the last required read setting in the reference assay to a value of 5.
Error code: 1100

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-127
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1101

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal B x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1102

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1103

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-128
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1105

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1106

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1107

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation between reference and fit curve too large for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1108

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Cal B/Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1109

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Cal B/Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Log: Logit slope exceeds maximum parameter. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1111

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, Log: Logit slope is below minimum parameter. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1112

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, RMSE too large. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-131
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1113

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, minimum upper curve asymptote exceeded. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1114

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, maximum lower curve asymptote exceeded. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1115

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, minimum lower curve asymptote exceeded. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-132
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to calculate result, index formula error, parameter to LOG function.
Error codes
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See were switched. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 for i 2000/i 2000SR. Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low.
Section 10-133
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pre-trigger or trigger bottles were replaced while Perform the following as-needed maintenance processing tests, so air may have been aspirated procedures: instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger valve Pre-trigger or trigger pumps Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are loose Pre-trigger or trigger level sensor is broken Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1117

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, intercept out of range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1118

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, maximum upper curve asymptote exceeded. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-134
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, curve validity check failed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1120

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1121

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-135
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1122

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1123

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit response too low for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1124

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Cal 1/Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-136
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Cal 1/Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1126

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too small for Calibrators. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1127

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, ratio too large for Calibrators. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-137
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1150

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, insufficient calibrator replicates. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Required number of replicates for a calibrator failed Review exceptions to determine the reason for the to complete due to an error. failed calibrator replicate(s). Refer to the corrective action for the specific error.
Error code: 1151

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, convergence error. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Remove air bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Select the Reaction mode list button on the Configure assay parameters window - General Reaction Definition view, and then select the appropriate reaction mode. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Reaction mode is incorrectly defined.
Dispense system is not performing correctly. Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Error code: 1152

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, maximum curve fit too large. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Dispense system is not performing correctly. Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27.
Section 10-138
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1153

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, Slope is too low. x = Assay name y = Assay number
ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> two months after installation Change ICT Module, page 9-42. or > 15,000 samples). Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes.
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings. See Replace the ICT correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Tighten the connections at the top and side of each check valve in the ICT reference solution pump. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump and ICT aspiration pump.
ICT reference solution tubing is not connected correctly. ICT check valves are not connected correctly.
ICT check valves are not functioning. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pumps are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pumps are leaking.
Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207.
Reseat the 1 mL syringes.
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
Section 10-139
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause ICT module is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1154

Unable to calculate result, convergence error.
The sample absorbance is on the border between Rerun the sample. two segments of a Spline calibration curve and the system cannot confirm the correct segment was used for calculation. An invalid Spline calibration curve was generated. Recalibrate the assay.
Error code: 1155

Unable to calculate result, calibration curve allows multiple solutions.
Probable cause An invalid Spline calibration curve was generated. Corrective action Recalibrate the assay.
Error code: 1156

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, slope is outside of defined range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> two months after installation Change ICT Module, page 9-42. or > 15,000 samples). Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes.
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Tighten the tubing connections at the top and side of each check valve in the ICT reference solution pump.
ICT reference solution tubing is not connected correctly.
Section 10-140
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause ICT check valves are not connected correctly.
Corrective action Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump and ICT aspiration pump.
ICT check valves are not functioning. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pumps are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pumps are leaking. ICT module is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1200

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1201

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal B. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-141
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1202

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1203

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1204

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-142
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1206

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1207

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal B. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-143
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1208

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1209

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1210

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-144
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1212

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1213

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too low for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-145
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1214

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1215

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, concentration too high for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1216

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-146
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal B. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1218

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1219

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-147
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1220

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1221

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1222

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal B. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1224

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1225

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-149
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1226

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1227

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1228

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-150
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too low for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1230

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1231

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, fit concentration too high for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1232

Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the highest calibrator.
Probable cause RLU read is outside the specification for the descending curve assay. If error occurs on one sample: Sample concentration is too high. Dilute the sample and rerun. See the Sample Dilution Procedures in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert. 1. See the Limitations of the Procedure in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert. 2. Redraw and rerun the sample if interference is present. Sample handling error. 1. Follow the sample handling instructions in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert. 2. Rerun the sample. 3. Source another sample. If error occurs for more than one sample: Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. See were switched. Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 for i 2000/i 2000SR. Pre-trigger or trigger solution volume is too low. Corrective action
Sample contains an interfering substance.
Section 10-152
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pre-trigger or trigger bottles were replaced while Perform the following as-needed maintenance processing tests, so air may have been aspirated procedures: instead of reagent. For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger pumps Pre-trigger or trigger valves Pre-trigger or trigger tubing connections are loose Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1250

Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest calibrator.
Probable cause Sample concentration is too high. Corrective action Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Ultra-centrifuge the sample and rerun the infranatant. For details on sample integrity, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
Sample is lipemic.
Section 10-153
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1251

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, concentration out of range for ICT index. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Wrong index calibrator was used for calibration. Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct positions. Open new calibrator bottles.
Index calibrator is not performing as expected.
Index concentration or index range is incorrectly Define the correct Index concentration and Index defined. range on the Configure assay parameters Calibration window.
Section 10-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1301

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal B. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1302

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-155
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1303

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1304

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1305

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-156
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range failed for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1307

Error code: 1308

Section 10-157
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1309

Error code: 1310

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range too large Cal A to Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1311

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, range too small Cal A to Cal F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-158
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL A. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1313

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL B. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1314

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL C. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-159
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1315

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL D. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1316

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL E. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1317

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL F. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-160
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1319

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, deviation too large for CAL 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1320

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for Cal 1. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Calibrator 1 failed the CV specification defined in the assay settings. Corrective action 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. 2. Repeat calibration. 3. See Observed Problems, Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562 or Sample results observed problems (i System), page 10-575, for corrective action, if error continues.
Section 10-161
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1321

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for Cal 2. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Calibrator 2 failed the CV specification defined in the assay settings. Corrective action 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. 2. Repeat calibration. 3. See Observed Problems, Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562 or Sample results observed problems (i System), page 10-575, for corrective action, if error continues.
Error code: 1322

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, CV too large for a Calibrator. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause One of the calibrator replicates (A-F) failed the CV specification defined in the assay settings. Corrective action 1. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. 2. Repeat calibration. 3. See Observed Problems, Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562 or Sample results observed problems (i System), page 10-575, for corrective action, if error continues.
Error code: 1323

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) result is out of specified range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause A constituent result was outside of the constituent range specified in the calculated assay file. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-162
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to calculate result, result exceeds numerical limits.
Probable cause A calculated result cannot be computed because the result exceeds the numerical limit of the software. Corrective action Modify the calculated result formula or constituent assay ranges. See Configure a calculated assay, page 2-84.
Error codes
Error code: 1350

Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within absorbance range.
Probable cause Sample concentration is too high. Corrective action Dilute the sample and rerun. For the dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Ultra-centrifuge the sample and rerun the infranatant. For details on sample integrity, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle.
Sample is lipemic.
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is damaged. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new reagent(s). Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42.
Section 10-163
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1351

Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.
Sample is lipemic.
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is damaged.
Section 10-164
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty. Cuvette washer is not functioning properly.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new reagent(s). Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Error code: 1352

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibrator deviation too large. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Bubbles in the calibrator sample cup. Dispense system is not performing correctly. Corrective action Remove any bubbles in the sample cup using a clean applicator stick for each calibrator. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27.
Section 10-165
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1353

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibration factor out of range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Calibrator concentration values are incorrectly defined. Corrective action Review the Configure assay parameters Calibration - Calibrators window for the assay to verify the correct values for the lot number used. Refer to the calibrator-specific value sheet for the correct calibrator values. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents.
Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Calibrators were onboard too long. Dispense system is not performing correctly. Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected.
Section 10-166
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Expected cal factor or expected cal factor tolerance% values need to be re-evaluated.
Corrective action Perform the following steps, if it becomes necessary to re-evaluate the expected cal factor for your laboratory: 1. Collect Cal factor values from multiple calibration curves, or review calibration curve details reports for recent historical curves. (A thorough study requires multiple cartridges and multiple reagent lots.) During this collection period, be sure the control values run against those Cal factors are in range and do not display trends or shifts. 2. Average the acceptable Cal factors and enter the mean in the expected cal factor field on the Configure assay parameters - Calibration Validity checks window. 3. If the average expected cal factor is correct and the control values have been in range, consider slightly increasing the expected cal factor tolerance%.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 1354

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, defined Span out of range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Bubbles in the calibrator sample cup. Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Dispense system is not performing correctly. Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Corrective action Remove any bubbles in the sample cup using a clean applicator stick for each calibrator. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-167
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1355

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, Blank absorbance out of range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Water quality is below specifications (if the blank Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check calibrator is defined to use water). DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Calibrator is not performing as expected (if the blank calibrator is defined to use a zero concentration calibrator rather than water). Reagent is not performing as expected. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Open new calibrator bottles.
Open new reagent(s). Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty. Cuvette washer is not functioning properly.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Debris in the water bath incubator.
Section 10-168
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water.
Corrective action Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1356

Unable to calculate calibrator result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.
Probable cause Bubbles for foam on the surface of the reagent. Corrective action Remove the bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle.
Reagent probe is damaged. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents. Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42.
Section 10-169
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1400

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, inadequate number of replicates. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1401

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure did not receive results for all calibrator levels. x = Assay name y = Assay number
No results for all replicates of one or more calibrator Review exceptions to determine the reason for the levels. failed calibrator replicate(s). Refer to the corrective action for the specific error.
Section 10-170
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, calibrators incorrectly loaded. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Calibrators are not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Wash buffer not correctly prepared. Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct positions. Open new calibrator bottles. Load new reagent bottles. 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70. 2. Remove the buffer reservoir and rinse with type II water. 3. Replace buffer reservoir and load new wash buffer.
Error codes
Error code: 1403

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, unable to generate calibration curve. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Unable to converge points on calibration curve. Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Calibrators are not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes ensuring they are placed in the correct positions. Open new calibrator bottles. Load new reagent bottles. Corrective action
Section 10-171
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1404

Unable to calculate result, assay is not calibrated.
Probable cause No Active calibration currently stored for the assay and no assay calibration in process. Patients run after a failed calibration cannot be calculated if there is no previously stored calibration data. Corrective action 1. Run assay calibration before running samples. Always priority load carriers containing calibrators. 2. Refer to specific assay calibration report or calibration detail screen to determine reason for the failed calibration. 3. Refer to the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 1405

Calibrator out of order, calibration failed.
Probable cause Carriers loaded out of order. Corrective action Load the carriers in sequential order. In the robotic sample handler priority bay or section, you must physically place the carriers in the positions in sequential order. Carriers are processed in the order they are placed on the sample handler, not by position number. The carriers arrived at the aspiration position out Reorder the calibration. of order due to robotic sample handler routing. A bar code label was detected in a position in which there was a calibrator order. Bar code reader detecting sample cups. Load the calibrators in the ordered positions ensuring there are no bar codes on the calibrator cups or tubes. Use clean sample cups. Do not write on the sample cups or use tape or labels on the sample cups.
Section 10-172
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration canceled, processing interrupted between carriers containing calibrators.
Error codes
1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 1407

Unable to process test, constituent assay (x) number (y) is disabled. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause An assay used for computing a calculated assay was disabled. Corrective action The assay should be enabled prior to processing a calculated result which uses the assay as a constituent.
Error code: 1408

Unable to calculate result, constituent assay (x) number (y) does not support manual dilution. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Order the calculated assay for a patient sample that A calculated assay was ordered on a manually diluted patient sample. The calculated assay has a is undiluted or that uses an automated dilution constituent assay which does not support a manual protocol. dilution.
Section 10-173
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1450

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 1451

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, invalid mathematical calculation occurred. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Wrong calibrator was used, or the calibrator was Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or loaded incorrectly. tubes. Dispense system is not performing correctly. Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents.
Error code: 1452

Unable to calculate result, invalid mathematical calculation occurred.
Probable cause Sample concentration is too low. Calibration curve is not optimal. Bubbles for foam on the surface of the reagent. Corrective action Rerun the sample. Recalibrate the assay. Remove the bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle.
Reagent probe is damaged. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Lamp is not performing as expected.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29.
Section 10-174
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Reagent is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Open new reagent(s). Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1453

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, assay configuration error. x = Assay name y = Assay number
The combined sample and reagent volume is less Verify the combined volume defined for: than 160 L at a defined read time. Sample (or Diluted sample) R1 reagent R1 water is greater than or equal to 160 L, if the assay uses a read point less than 17 for any defined read time. An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify the settings on the Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-127.
Error code: 1454

Unable to calculate result, assay configuration error.
The combined sample and reagent volume is less Verify the combined volume defined for: than 160 L at a defined read time. Sample (or Diluted sample) R1 reagent R1 water is greater than or equal to 160 L, if the assay uses a read point less than 17 for any defined read time. An assay setting is defined incorrectly. Verify the settings on the Windows - Configuration screen - Assay settings view, page 2-127.
Section 10-175
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1455

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibrator out of order. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause Wrong calibrator was used or the calibrator was loaded incorrectly. Calibrator concentration values are incorrectly defined. Corrective action Place fresh calibrators into clean sample cups or tubes. Review the Configure assay parameters Calibration - Calibrators window for the assay to verify the correct values for the lot number used. Refer to the calibrator specific value sheet for the correct calibrator values. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new calibrators or reagents. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Dispense system is not performing correctly. Lamp is not performing as expected. Calibrators or reagents are not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Error code: 1456

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, no calibration curve available for adjustment. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Probable cause No active full calibration curve currently stored for the assay. An adjustment calibration cannot be performed if there is no previously stored full calibration curve. Corrective action 1. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, and then select Calibration type: Full. 2. Create an adjustment type calibration order when the full calibration is complete, if desired.
Error code: 1457

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, calibration curve full interval has expired. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Adjustment calibration order failed because the full 1. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, and then calibration interval has expired or the full calibration select Calibration type: Full. failed. 2. Create an adjustment type calibration order when the full calibration is complete, if desired.
Section 10-176
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay (x) Number (y) calibration failure, did not complete results for all calibrator levels. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 1461

Unable to recalculate result, assay does not exist.
Assay was deleted since the original result was run. Install the assay and create new test orders for the sample, if required.
Error code: 1462

Unable to edit result, assay does not exist.
Probable cause Assay was deleted since the original result was generated. Corrective action Install the assay and create new test orders for the sample, if required.
Error code: 1463

Unable to recalculate result, a reaction definition assay parameter was edited.
Probable cause An assay parameter setting was edited making recalculation of the result invalid (ex. Primary wavelength or Sample volume) Corrective action Rerun the sample.
Error code: 1464

Unable to recalculate a result that is a constituent of a calculated result.
Probable cause The system prevents recalculation of a result used for computing a calculated result. Corrective action Rerun the sample.
Section 10-177
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 1465

Unable to edit a result that is a constituent of a calculated result.
Probable cause The system prevents editing of a result used for computing a calculated result. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 1500

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, correlation coefficient is out of range. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 1600

Unable to calculate result, mV reading outside measurable range of ICT Unit.
Probable cause Black electrical connector for the ICT module is loose or not connected. Corrective action Reseat the connection. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings. See Replace the ICT correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Tighten the tubing connections at the top and side of each check valve in the ICT reference solution pump. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump and ICT aspiration pump.
ICT check valves are not functioning. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pumps are not seated correctly.
Section 10-178
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pumps are leaking.
Corrective action
ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> two months after installation Change ICT Module, page 9-42. or > 15,000 samples). ICT module is not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1601

Unable to calculate result, ICT reference solution voltage drift error.
Probable cause Black electrical connector for the ICT module is loose or not connected. Corrective action Reseat the connection. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-42. > 15,000 samples). ICT module is not performing as expected. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42.
Section 10-179
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
The ICT Reference Solution is not performing as 1. Replace the ICT Reference Solution bottle. See expected. Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-38. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 1602

Unable to calculate result, ICT reference solution voltage out of range.
Section 10-180
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Maintenance error codes (2000-2999)

The maintenance error code category includes error codes between 2000-2999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Error code: 2000

Solid waste chute full. Install empty waste container, update supplies and press Run.
Probable cause The solid waste chute is full. This chute is designed to hold approximately 50 used RVs (reaction vessels) while the waste container is removed for emptying. Hardware failure: Waste chute sensor board #7 Corrective action
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47.
Section 10-181
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2001

RV Hopper empty, add RVs, update supplies and press Run.
Probable cause No RVs (reaction vessels) in the RV Hopper. RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV hopper. Corrective action
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49.

1. Stir the RVs in the hopper. 2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14, if error continues. When the status is Ready, remove RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
Hardware failure: RV Hopper sensor
Error code: 2003

(x) inventory discrepancy, update supplies and press Run. x =Inventory item
Probable cause For i System: Expected inventory does not match the available 1. Check the physical inventory level of the item inventory. against the reported inventory shown on the Supply status screen. 2. Update supplies on the Update supplies window as required. Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution RVs (reaction vessels) Wash buffer Corrective action
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
During manual buffer transfer, not enough buffer Fill the buffer reservoir until the icon shows full. was transferred to trip the full sensor. Hardware failure: Cables to the pre-trigger, trigger, or wash buffer level sensors are loose Level sensor For c System: Expected inventory does not match the available 1. Check the physical inventory level of the item inventory. against the reported inventory shown on the Supply status screen. 2. Update supplies on the Update supplies window as required. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-182
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Alkaline Wash Acid Wash ICT Reference Solution Hardware failure: Sensor cable to the weight platform is loose Weight platform sensor
Corrective action
Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33.
Error code: 2004

(x) inventory is close to empty, update supplies. x =Inventory item
Probable cause For i System: The indicated inventory item is low. Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution RVs (reaction vessels) Wash buffer Solid waste RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV hopper. Corrective action
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52. Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47.
1. Stir the RVs in the hopper. 2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14 if error continues. When the status is Ready, remove RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
For c System: The indicated inventory item is low. Alkaline Wash Acid Wash ICT Reference Solution
Section 10-183
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2006

(x) inventory has exceeded on-board stability, update supplies. x =Inventory item
Probable cause Onboard stability for either Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution is exceeded. Corrective action
NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming.
Error code: 2007

Unable to process test, insufficient supplies.
Probable cause The available inventory for Pre-Trigger and/or Trigger Solution, wash buffer, or RVs (reaction vessels) is not sufficient to complete the test order. Corrective action Load the required inventory items on the system and update inventory. NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded when the processing module is in any status except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline. 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper. 2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14, if error continues. When the status is Ready, remove RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV hopper.
Error code: 2008

Unable to process test, Pre-Trigger expired.
Probable cause Onboard stability for Pre-Trigger Solution is exceeded. Corrective action Load a new bottle of pre-trigger. See Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming.
Section 10-184
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, Trigger expired.
Probable cause Onboard stability for Trigger Solution is exceeded. Corrective action Load a new bottle of pre-trigger. See Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming.
Error codes
Error code: 2010

Empty reagent kit in position (x). x =Reagent carousel position
Probable cause Reagent carousel contains an empty reagent kit in the indicated position. Corrective action Load a new reagent kit or continue processing samples with the other reagent kits on the module. NOTE: Reagents can only be loaded when the processing module status is Ready.
Error code: 2011

Extra reagent bottle detected in position (x) on (y) carousel. Print reagent load error report. x = Position in which extra bottle was detected. (1-25 for i System; A1-D20 for c System) y = Location in which extra bottle was detected. (Inner, Middle, or Outer ring for i System; R1 or R2 for c System)
Probable cause For c System: The R1 and R2 reagent cartridges onboard are not the same lot number. For i System: An extra bottle not belonging to the reagent kit in Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct this position was detected by the system. position. Load R1 and R2 reagent cartridges with the same lot number. Corrective action
Section 10-185
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2012

Extra reagent bottle detected in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which extra bottle was detected y = RSH section number
Probable cause An extra bottle not belonging to the reagent kit in this reagent carrier position was detected by the system. Corrective action 1. Print the reagent load error report. 2. Load the correct bottle for the kit in the correct position.
Error code: 2013

Empty reagent kit in section (x). x =RSH section number
Reagent carrier contains an empty reagent kit in the Load a new reagent kit. RSH section indicated.
Error code: 2014

Inventory discrepancy between hardware and software, update supplies.
Error code: 2015

Insufficient or expired inventory, update supplies.
Error code: 2017

(x) inventory full, empty the container. x = Inventory item
Probable cause The waste container is full or the inventory was not updated the last time the container was emptied. Corrective action
Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47.
Section 10-186
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform procedure, insufficient supplies on Processing Module (x). x = Processing module (1-4)
Probable cause The available inventory for Pre-Trigger and/or Trigger Solution, wash buffer, or RVs (reaction vessels) is not sufficient to complete the requested procedure. RVs are bridged above the sensor in the RV hopper. Corrective action Load the required inventory items on the system and update inventory.
Error codes
1. Stir the RVs in the hopper. 2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14, if error continues. When the status is Ready, remove RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
Error code: 2019

(x) inventory empty, update supplies. x = Inventory item
Probable cause For i System: The indicated inventory item is empty or the supplies status screen was not updated when the inventory item was added. Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution RVs (reaction vessels) Wash buffer Solid waste Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger sensor Wash buffer sensor RV sensor For c System: Corrective action
Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52. Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47.
Section 10-187
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
The indicated inventory item is empty or the Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c supplies status screen was not updated when the System), page 5-33. inventory item was added. Alkaline Wash Acid Wash ICT Reference Solution Hardware failure: Weight platform sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2020

Inventory error, review Supplies status screen.
Probable cause One or more inventory items are low or empty. Corrective action Load the required inventory items on the system and update inventory. NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming. Wash buffer can be loaded when the processing module is in any status except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline. RVs (reaction vessels) are bridged above the sensor in the RV hopper. 1. Stir the RVs in the hopper. 2. Pause the processing module, page 5-14, if error continues. When the status is Ready, remove RVs from the RV hopper then reload them.
Error code: 2021

Solid waste pan full. Install empty solid waste container, update supplies and press Run.
The limit has been exceeded for the number of RVs 1. Remove the solid waste and update inventory. to drop into the solid waste pan while the waste 2. After the tests in process have completed, container has been removed for emptying. remove the solid waste container and clean the solid waste pan.
Error code: 2050

(x) inventory low. x = Inventory item
Probable cause The indicated bulk solution inventory is low. Corrective action
Section 10-188
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) inventory empty, update supplies. x = Inventory item
Probable cause The indicated bulk solution is empty. The supply status was not updated when the solution was added. Hardware failure: Weight platform sensor cable has a poor connection Weight platform not adjusted properly Weight platform sensor Corrective action
Error codes

Update the inventory of the solution. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2054

High concentration waste container is Full.
Probable cause The high-concentration waste bottle is full. The high-concentration waste bottle float switch is dirty. Float switch cable has a poor connection. Float switch cable failed. Corrective action
Empty the high-concentration waste bottle (c System), page 5-45.

Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-34. Reseat the float switch cable to the module and to the high-concentration waste bottle.
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-160 for the c 8000 processing module or Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-236 for the c 16000 processing module. Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component), page 9-158 for the c 8000 processing module or Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component), page 9-234 for the c 16000 processing module.
Float switch failed.
Section 10-189
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2100

Wash Buffer reservoir full, ignored fill request.
Wash buffer container was full when a request to Do not attempt to add wash buffer if wash buffer fill was made. container is full. NOTE: Wash buffer can be loaded when the processing module is in any status except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline. Hardware failure: Buffer level sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2101

Wash Buffer transfer canceled, Processing Module stop requested.
Probable cause Wash buffer transfer canceled because of a processing module stop. Corrective action 1. Start up the processing module. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. 2. When processing module status is Ready, load wash buffer.
Error code: 2102

Unable to prime Wash Buffer transfer pump, transfer canceled.
Probable cause Wash buffer container is empty. Corrective action
Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
NOTE: Wash buffer can be loaded when the processing module is in any status except Initializing, Stopped, or Offline.
Wash buffer transfer tubing is not connected. Hardware failure: Buffer level sensor
Reconnect the wash buffer transfer tubing to the quick disconnect fitting. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-190
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Wash Buffer transfer timed out, transfer canceled.
Probable cause Wash buffer transfer tubing is crimped. Wash buffer transfer tubing is not connected properly. Hardware failure: Transfer pump Corrective action Reposition the wash buffer transfer tubing. Reconnect the transfer tubing. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 2104

Unable to perform automatic Flush, (x) is low. x = Inventory item
Probable cause The indicated inventory item is empty or the supplies screen was not updated when the inventory item was added. Pre-Trigger or Trigger Solution Corrective action
NOTE: Pre-trigger and trigger can only be loaded when the processing module status is Stopped, Ready, or Warming.
RVs (reaction vessels) or wash buffer Solid Waste Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger sensor Wash buffer sensor RV sensor
Replenish RVs and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-49. Remove solid waste and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-47.
Error code: 2200

(x) procedure failed, refer to Activity window for details. x = Procedure name
Probable cause A system error message occurred. Corrective action Refer to corrective action for the error indicated in the Activity list on the Maintenance Perform or Diagnostic perform window.
Criteria for acceptance specified in the procedure If there is no error in the Activity list, the criteria for was not met. acceptance specified in the maintenance or diagnostic procedure was not met.
Section 10-191
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2201

(x) procedure canceled by user. x = Procedure name
Probable cause User selected Quit while performing a procedure. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 2202

(x) procedure report not available. x = Procedure name
Probable cause Requested to print a report for a procedure not performed on the selected module. Corrective action Select a different module or perform the procedure for the selected module, and then select print.
Error code: 2300

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel cover is closed.
The sample carousel cover was closed during the Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 procedure. Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35, and do not close the sample carousel cover unless instructed to do so in the procedure. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2301

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 carousel cover is closed.
Probable cause The reagent carousel cover was closed during the calibration procedure. Corrective action Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, and do not close the reagent carousel cover unless instructed to do so in the procedure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-192
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel cover is closed.
Probable cause The reagent carousel cover was closed during the calibration procedure. Corrective action Repeat as-needed maintenance procedure 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37, and do not close the reagent carousel cover unless instructed to do so in the procedure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Hardware failure.
Error code: 2303

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel homing failed.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the sample carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2304

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 outer carousel homing failed.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the reagent 1 outer carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2305

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 inner carousel homing failed.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the reagent 1 inner carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-193
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2306

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel homing failed.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the reagent 2 carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2307

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor homing error. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the pipettor. Probe is damaged. Perform the appropriate probe replacement procedure: Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2308

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, error while moving Sample carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the sample carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2309

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 1 outer carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the reagent 1 outer carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-194
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 1 inner carousel.
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the reagent 1 inner carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2311

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the reagent 2 carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2312

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor horizontal movement error. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2313

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor error while moving down. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is preventing the pipettor Look for and remove any physical obstruction. from moving down.
Section 10-195
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Probe is damaged.
Corrective action Perform the appropriate probe replacement procedure: Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 2314

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor error while moving up. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Probe is damaged. Perform the appropriate probe replacement procedure: Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2315

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel rotation error.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the sample carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-196
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 outer carousel rotation error.
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the reagent 1 outer carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2317

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, reagent 1 inner carousel rotation error.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction. the reagent 1 inner carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2318

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 carousel rotation error.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstruction the reagent 2 carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2319

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded sample carousel target vertical range.
Probable cause Sample carousel is not seated properly. Sample carousel is not present. Corrective action Reseat the sample carousel properly on the alignment pins. Place the sample carousel in position.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft.
Section 10-197
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164.
Error code: 2320

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the properly. alignment pins. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2321

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded sample handler target vertical range.
Probable cause Carrier calibration tool is not present. Carrier calibration tool is not seated properly. Corrective action Place the carrier calibration tool in the carrier. Reseat the carrier calibration tool in the carrier.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor.
Section 10-198
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2322

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-199
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2323

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, exceeded outer carousel target vertical range.
Probable cause The segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 is not present or does not have the calibration target. The segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 is not seated properly. Corrective action Install a segment with the calibration target into position A of reagent supply center 1. Reseat the segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 on the alignment pins.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2324

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, exceeded inner carousel target vertical range.
Probable cause The segment in position D of reagent supply center 1 is not present. The segment in position D of reagent supply center 1 is not seated properly. Corrective action Install a segment into position D of reagent supply center 1. Reseat the segment in position D of reagent supply center 1 on the alignment pins.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft.
Section 10-200
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Error code: 2325

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target vertical range.
Error code: 2326

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded carousel target vertical range.
Section 10-201
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2327

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-202
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range.
Error codes
Error code: 2329

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-203
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2330

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 2331

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded cuvette target horizontal range. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-204
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, exceeded wash cup target horizontal range. x = Pipettor name
Error codes
Error code: 2333

(x) pipettor calibration failed probe straightness check. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Probe is damaged. Perform the appropriate probe replacement procedure: Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164 Or Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167 Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-205
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2334

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, cuvette segment alignment tool not found. x = Pipettor name
Probable cause The cuvette segment alignment tool was not installed. Corrective action Install the cuvette segment alignment tool when instructed to do so in the procedure.
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the properly. alignment pins. Water is present on the slotted edges of the cuvette segment alignment tool. Hardware failure. Remove the cuvette segment alignment tool and dry the slotted edges before reinstalling it to repeat the procedure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2335

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample carousel target not found.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-206
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.
Error codes
Error code: 2337

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-207
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2338

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, outer carousel target not found.
Error code: 2339

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, inner carousel target not found.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-208
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Corrective action
Error code: 2340

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, cuvette target not found.
Error code: 2341

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, carousel target not found.
Section 10-209
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2342

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, unable to determine target position.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Carrier calibration tool is not present. Carrier calibration tool is not seated properly. Place the carrier calibration tool in the carrier. Reseat the carrier calibration tool in the carrier.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is damaged. Sample probe is dirty. Hardware failure.
Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-210
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, incorrect segment A type found in outer carousel.
Probable cause A reagent segment without a calibration target was detected in position A of reagent supply center 1. The segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 is not seated properly. Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure. Corrective action Install a segment with the calibration target into position A of reagent supply center 1. Reseat the segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 on the alignment pins.
Error codes

Error code: 2344

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, incorrect segment A type found in carousel.
Probable cause A reagent segment without a calibration target was detected in position A of reagent supply center 2. The segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 is not seated properly. Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure. Corrective action Install the segment with the calibration target in position A of reagent supply center 2. Reseat the segment in position A of reagent supply center 1 on the alignment pins.

Error code: 2345

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, water bath level low. x = Pipettor name
Probable cause DI water system failure. Corrective action 1. Turn on the water supply. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. System power was off. Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: Module is not level Level sensor is dirty or failed
Section 10-211
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2346

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at sample carousel.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Liquid level sense board (threshold voltage is hardware failure. out of range) Liquid level sense cable Liquid level sense board Loose connector on SMC board
Error code: 2347

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-212
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure:
Corrective action Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
Error code: 2348

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the properly. alignment pins. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
Error code: 2349

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at sample handler.
Section 10-213
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2350

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette. x = Pipettor name
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the properly. alignment pins.
Section 10-214
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Error code: 2351

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-215
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2352

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at outer carousel.
Error code: 2353

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at inner carousel.
Section 10-216
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2354

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at cuvette. x = Pipettor name
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the properly. alignment pins.
Section 10-217
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2355

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at wash cup. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-218
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at carousel.
Error codes
Error code: 2357

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at sample carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the sample pipettor. of the sample pipettor. Probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Section 10-219
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2358

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup.
Error code: 2359

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette.
Error code: 2360

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at sample handler.
Error code: 2361

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the reagent pipettor. of the reagent pipettor.
Section 10-220
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Corrective action
Error code: 2362

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the reagent pipettor. of the reagent pipettor. Probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Error code: 2363

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at outer carousel.
Error code: 2364

Unable to perform Reagent 1 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at inner carousel.
Section 10-221
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2365

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at cuvette. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 2366

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at wash cup. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 2367

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at carousel.
Error code: 2368

Unable to perform Sample pipettor calibration, sample handler target not found.
Section 10-222
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is dirty. Sample probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error code: 2369

Unable to perform (x) pipettor calibration, pipettor is not properly aligned with cuvette target. x = Pipettor name
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
The cuvette segment alignment tool is not seated Reseat the cuvette segment alignment tool on the properly. alignment pins. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Reagent 2 pipettor requires manual alignment. hardware failure.
Section 10-223
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2370

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 outer carousel homing failed.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Remove any obstruction from the area of movement the reagent 2 outer carousel. of the carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2371

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, reagent 2 inner carousel homing failed.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Remove any obstruction from the area of movement the reagent 2 inner carousel. of the carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 2372

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 outer carousel.
Error code: 2373

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, error while moving Reagent 2 inner carousel.
Section 10-224
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, Reagent 2 inner carousel rotation error.
Error codes
Error code: 2375

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, Reagent 2 outer carousel rotation error.
Error code: 2376

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded outer carousel target vertical range.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the pipettor. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover ensuring the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.

Section 10-225
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2377

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, exceeded inner carousel target vertical range.
Probable cause The segment in position D of reagent supply center 2 is not present. The segment in position D of reagent supply center 2 is not seated properly. Corrective action Install a segment with the calibration target into position D of reagent supply center 2. Reseat the segment in position D of reagent supply center 2 on the alignment pins.

Error code: 2378

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, outer carousel target not found.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the pipettor. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover ensuring the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-226
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure.
Corrective action

Error code: 2379

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, inner carousel target not found.

Error code: 2380

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, incorrect segment A type found in outer carousel.
Probable cause A 15-position reagent segment was detected in position A of reagent supply center 2. The segment in position A of reagent supply center 2 is not seated properly. Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure. Corrective action Install a segment with the calibration target into position A of reagent supply center 2. Reseat the segment in position A of reagent supply center 2 on the alignment pins.

Section 10-227
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 2381

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at outer carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the pipettor. of the pipettor. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover ensuring the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.

Error code: 2382

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, LLS error occurred at inner carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the pipettor. of the pipettor.
Section 10-228
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover ensuring the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is dirty. Reagent probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.

Error code: 2383

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at outer carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the reagent pipettor. of the reagent pipettor. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure.

Error code: 2384

Unable to perform Reagent 2 pipettor calibration, pipettor movement restricted at inner carousel.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Remove any obstruction from the area of movement of the reagent pipettor. of the reagent pipettor. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure.

Section 10-229
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Level sense error codes (3000-3999)

The level sense error code category includes error codes between 3000-3999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Error code: 3000

Unable to process test, Liquid not found for (x) at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Location
Probable cause For sample pipetting: A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor connection. Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe clip, then perform one of the following fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672, for the sample pipettor 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-661, for the STAT pipettor Corrective action
Section 10-230
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
Probe is damaged.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Hardware failure: Liquid level sense and Z cable Antenna board or cables have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Reagent bottle is empty.
Replace empty reagents.
WZ probe maintenance water bottle was filled Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed with DI water instead of tap water or saline during maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe a procedure. maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap water or saline: NOTE: Do not use DI water for these procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71
Section 10-231
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause WZ probe maintenance water bottle was over-filled with tap water or saline during a procedure.
Corrective action Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap water or saline: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71
Maintenance cleaning bottle was overfilled with Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed sodium hypochlorite solution during a procedure. maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of sodium hypochlorite solution: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6041 Daily Maintenance, page 9-63 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71 WZ probe maintenance water bottle was not loaded or was not loaded in the correct position during a procedure. Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of tap water or saline: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71 Maintenance cleaning bottle was not loaded or was not loaded in the correct position during a procedure. Repeat one of the following daily or as-needed maintenance procedures, ensuring the WZ probe maintenance water bottle is 1/2 to 3/4 full of sodium hypochlorite solution: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6041 Daily Maintenance, page 9-63 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71 Pipettor probe clip is loose. Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor connection. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe clip, then perform one of the following fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672, for the sample pipettor Probe is out of alignment. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Section 10-232
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the R1 or R2 pipettor probe. See Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Hardware failure: Liquid level sense and Z cable Antenna board or cables have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3001

Unable to process test, liquid not found for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x). x = Sample carousel position
Probable cause A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample probe is dirty.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft.
Section 10-233
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Sample probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35.
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. greater than one year. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Liquid level sense board (threshold voltage is hardware failure. out of range) Liquid level sense cable Liquid level sense board SMC board has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 3002

Unable to process test, liquid not found for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause No reagent cartridge present or the cartridge is empty. Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Corrective action Load reagents or replace empty reagents. Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent cartridge from seating against the bottom of the carousel. For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down against the bottom of the carousel. Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is dirty. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Reagent probe is damaged. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36.
Section 10-234
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board
Corrective action Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3003

Unable to process test, liquid not found for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Section 10-235
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3004

Unable to process test, liquid not found for sample pipettor at sample carrier.
Probable cause A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Sample probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35.
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or greater than one year. Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-236
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, liquid not found for reagent 1 pipettor.
Probable cause No reagent cartridge present or the cartridge is empty. Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Corrective action Load reagents or replace empty reagents. Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent cartridge from seating against the bottom of the carousel. For reagents using the 20 mL (bottles) cartridge in the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down against the bottom of the carousel. Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is dirty. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error codes
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Reagent probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36.
Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-237
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3006

Unable to process test, liquid not found for reagent 2 pipettor.
Section 10-238
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, Liquid too low for (x) at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Location
Probable cause For sample pipetting: A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor connection. Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe clip, then perform the following fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672, for the sample pipettor 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-673, for the STAT pipettor. Probe is out of alignment. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Corrective action
Error codes
Section 10-239
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Hardware failure: Liquid level sense and Z cable Antenna board or cables have a poor connection or failed. Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Reagent bottle is empty. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor connection.
Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Replace empty reagents. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe clip, then perform one of the following fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672
Probe is out of alignment.
Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Section 10-240
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the R1 or R2 pipettor probe. See Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Hardware failure: Liquid level sense and Z cable Antenna board or cables have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3051

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (y) at (x). x = Pipettor name y = Location
Probable cause For sample pipetting: Too much sample in cup or tube. Probe is dirty. Pipettor probe clip loose. Probe is out of alignment. Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Wipe the exterior of the sample probe with a lint free tissue dampened with DI water. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 Corrective action
Section 10-241
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Hardware failure:
Corrective action
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR)
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Liquid on reagent bottle septum. 1. Verify reagent bottle is not over filled. 2. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Probe is dirty. Pipettor probe clip loose. Wipe the exterior of the probe with a lint free tissue dampened with DI water. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
Section 10-242
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Hardware failure: Pressure monitor cables have a poor connection Pipettor pressure monitor board Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3052

Unable to process test, liquid too low for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x). x = Sample carousel position
Probable cause A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample probe is dirty. Corrective action Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-243
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or greater than one year. Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3053

Unable to process test, liquid too low for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause No reagent cartridge present or the cartridge is empty. Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Corrective action Load reagents or replace empty reagents. Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent cartridge from seating against the bottom of the carousel. For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down against the bottom of the carousel. Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-244
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Error code: 3054

Unable to process test, liquid too low for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause No reagent cartridge present or the cartridge is empty. Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Corrective action Load reagents or replace empty reagents. Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent cartridge from seating against the bottom of the carousel. For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down against the bottom of the carousel. Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-245
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3055

Unable to process test, liquid too high for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x). x = Sample carousel position
Probable cause Too much sample in cup or tube. Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. greater than one year. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-246
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Corrective action Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent cartridge from seating against the bottom of the carousel. For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down against the bottom of the carousel. Reagent probe is dirty. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error codes
Section 10-247
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3057

Unable to process test, liquid too high for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause Reagent cartridge is not seated properly. Corrective action Verify there is nothing preventing the reagent cartridge from seating against the bottom of the carousel. For reagents using the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge in the adapter, verify the bottle was pressed down against the bottom of the carousel. Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Reagent probe is damaged. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37.
Error code: 3058

Unable to process test, liquid too low for sample pipettor at sample carrier.
Probable cause A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample probe is dirty. Corrective action Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-248
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. greater than one year. Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board Perform daily maintenance procedure 6028 Check DI Water Purity, page 9-22. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3059

Unable to process test, liquid too high for sample pipettor at sample carrier.
Probable cause Too much sample is in cup or tube. Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Load a properly filled sample cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. greater than one year.
Section 10-249
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3060

Unable to process test, liquid too high for reagent 1 pipettor.
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is dirty. Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-250
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, liquid too high for reagent 2 pipettor.
Error codes
Error code: 3100

Liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Location
Probable cause For sample pipetting: Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carrier so that it is not tilted. Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Tighten probe tubing connections finger tight.
Section 10-251
Corrective action
Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carrier. Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
Probe is damaged.
Probe tubing is damaged.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Antenna board Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR)
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Liquid on the reagent septum. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Tighten the probe clip finger tight.
Section 10-252
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Tighten probe tubing connections finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Probe is damaged.
Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Antenna board Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Section 10-253
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3101

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for sample pipettor at sample carousel position (x). x = Sample carousel position
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carousel so that it is not tilted. Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carousel. Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Sample probe is dirty.
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or greater than one year. Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Sample probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Sample probe tubing is damaged.
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Water quality is below specifications. Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board threshold voltage is out of range Liquid level sense cable is defective Liquid level sense board is defective Loose connector on SMC board
Section 10-254
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is dirty. Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error codes
Pipettor cover, probe screw, or probe ground wire 1. Remove the pipettor cover. screw is loose. 2. Tighten the probe screw and the probe ground wire screw with a slotted screwdriver. 3. Replace the pipettor cover and ensure the cover is seated firmly on the end above the pipettor shaft. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Reagent probe is damaged. Reagent probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36.
Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing. See Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
Reagent probe tubing is damaged.
Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
Section 10-255
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3103

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for (x) pipettor at position (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is dirty. Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Section 10-256
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for sample pipettor at sample carrier.
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on top of the liquid. Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the sample using a clean disposable pipette applicator stick. Reposition the sample cup or tube in the carrier so that it is not tilted. Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Error codes
Sample cup or tube is tilted in the carrier. Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Sample probe is dirty.
Sample probe is damaged or has been in use for Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or greater than one year. Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Sample probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Sample probe tubing is damaged.
Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Section 10-257
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3105

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for reagent 1 pipettor.
Section 10-258
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to process test, liquid contact broken during aspiration for reagent 2 pipettor.
Error codes
Section 10-259
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3200

Unable to process test, maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for a reagent.
Probable cause Consecutive liquid level sense, aspiration or movement restriction errors detected for the indicated pipettor. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000 or 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message to determine the specific error with the R1 or R2 pipettor. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 3000 or 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. NOTE: After the cause has been corrected and the system status is Ready, Perform one of the following to remove the reagent pack LLS error status: Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84. Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206 or Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.
Section 10-260
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for reagent located in position (x) on carousel (y). x = Position in which the error occurred (A1 - D20 for c System; 1 - 25 for i System) y = Location in which the error occurred (R1 or R2 for c System; inner, middle, or outer ring for i System)
Probable cause Consecutive liquid level sense, aspiration or movement restriction errors detected for the indicated pipettor in the indicated position. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000 or 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message to determine the specific error with the R1 or R2 pipettor. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 3000 or 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. NOTE: After the cause has been corrected and the system status is Ready, perform one of the following to remove the reagent pack LLS error status: Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84. Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206 or Initiate or resume sample processing (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000), page 5-207.
Error codes
Error code: 3202

Maximum number of LLS errors exceeded for reagent located in (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which the error occurred y = RSH section number
Probable cause Consecutive liquid level sense, aspiration or movement restriction errors detected for the indicated reagent carrier position. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000 or 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message to determine the specific error with the pipettor. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 3000 or 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-261
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3300

High or low pressure detected on (x). x = Pipettor name
Probable cause For sample pipetting: Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Probe is out of alignment. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 Tubing connections are loose. Hardware failure: Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or have failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Antenna board Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Liquid on the reagent septum Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Corrective action
Section 10-262
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Tubing connections are loose. Hardware failure:
Tighten tubing connections finger tight.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Antenna board Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3350

Unable to process test, aspiration error for (x) at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Location
Probable cause For sample pipetting: A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Corrective action
Section 10-263
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
Probe is damaged.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244.
Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR)
Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Liquid on the reagent septum. Reagent bottle is empty. Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Replace empty reagents.
Section 10-264
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Probe is damaged.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Pipettor pressure monitor cables have a poor hardware failure. connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor board Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Section 10-265
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3351

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), output enable bit value. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3352

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), invalid syringe start. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3353

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), pressure discord score. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause For sample pipetting: A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Corrective action
Section 10-266
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
Probe is damaged.
Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting: Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Liquid on the reagent septum. Reagent bottle is empty.
Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Replace empty reagents.
Section 10-267
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
Probe is damaged.
Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Section 10-268
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), foam detection failure. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error codes
Error code: 3355

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), incomplete aspiration. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3356

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), clot score. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause For sample pipetting: A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Corrective action
Section 10-269
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
Probe is damaged.
Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting:
Section 10-270
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Liquid on the reagent septum. Reagent bottle is empty. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Replace empty reagents. Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67 Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Probe tubing is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244 Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Section 10-271
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3357

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), shape conform score. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause For sample pipetting: A sample cup or tube is not present. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots in the sample. Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment. Ensure sample cup or tube is present. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Remove bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Transfer the sample to a new sample cup or tube. Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Probe tubing is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244 Corrective action
Section 10-272
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 10 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 4 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 11 in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (STAT) in the upper card cage (i 2000SR) For reagent pipetting:
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent Remove bubbles or foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick for each bottle. Liquid on the reagent septum. Reagent bottle is empty. Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Pipettor probe clip is loose. Probe is out of alignment. Place a new septum on all reagent bottles. Replace empty reagents. Tighten tubing connections finger tight. Tighten the probe clip finger tight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67 Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Section 10-273
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Probe tubing is damaged.
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244
Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Pipettor pressure monitor Pipettor syringe Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 8 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 6 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Indexer board has a poor connection or failed in: Slot 9 (R1) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR) Slot 7 (R2) in the upper card cage (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 3358

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), back end average pressure. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-274
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), front end and back end average pressure correlation. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error codes
Error code: 3360

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), communication failure. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-275
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3361

High pressure detected on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for pipette, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause Probe for the specific pipettor is obstructed. Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3362

Low pressure detected on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-276
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), invalid detail status code. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error codes
Error code: 3364

Aspiration error on liquid level sense board (x), output enable bit number. x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-277
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3365

(x) disabled, maximum number of aspiration errors exceeded. x = Pipettor name
Probable cause Communication or hardware failure. Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed (S = slot 10, R1 = slot 8, R2 = slot 6, STAT = slot 4) Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed (S = slot 10, R1 = slot 8, R2 = slot 6, STAT = slot 4) Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 3375

Unable to process test, aspiration error occurred.
Probable cause Bubbles, foam, or fibrin clots present in the sample. Corrective action Remove bubbles or foam using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Remove fibrin clots using an applicator stick, or recentrifuge the sample. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Sample cup or tube not seated properly in sample Ensure sample cup or tube is pushed completely carrier or sample carousel. down into the sample carrier or sample carousel. Sample probe is obstructed. Sample probe is out of alignment. Sample probe is damaged. Sample probe tubing is damaged. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35.
Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85 or Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164. Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Transfer the sample to a new cup or tube.
Drop of liquid on the side of the sample cup or tube.

Section 10-278
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Drop of liquid on the end of the probe. Hardware failure: PM Sensor defective PM sensor cable disconnected PM board defective
Corrective action Tighten tubing connection finger tight. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3376

Unable to process test, dispense error occurred.
Error code: 3377

Unable to process test, wash error occurred.
Probable cause Sample probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Corrective action Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Sample probe is damaged. Sample probe tubing is damaged.
1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
Water source supply was interrupted.
Air bubbles are present in the water source supply tubing.
1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
Hardware failure: Probe wash pump Tubing damaged PM sensor PM sensor cable disconnected PM board
Section 10-279
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3378

Unable to initialize run, wash error occurred.
Probable cause Sample probe tubing connections are loose or leaking. Corrective action Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92 or Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171.
Sample probe is damaged. Sample probe tubing is damaged.
1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
Hardware failure: Probe wash pump Tubing damaged PM sensor PM sensor cable disconnected PM board
Error code: 3500

Pressure monitoring failure on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause Communication or hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-280
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Software error.
Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 3501

LLS Command timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause Communication or hardware failure. Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Software error Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Section 10-281
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3502

LLS data read timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Probable cause Communication or hardware failure. Hardware failure: Cables to the pressure monitor board for the pipettor indicated have a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Pressure monitor board for the indicated pipettor has a poor connection or failed Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 3503

LLS data write timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-282
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Pressure Monitoring timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error codes
Error code: 3505

Pressure Monitoring data read timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-283
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3506

Pressure Monitoring data write timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3507

Invalid timeout bit on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-284
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Communication failure on liquid level sense board for (x). x = Pipettor name
Error codes
Error code: 3550

Self test failure on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3551

Self test failure on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-285
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3552

No response from liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3553

Invalid address detected on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3554

Self test timeout on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3556

Self test failed on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-286
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

POST failed on Liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error codes
Error code: 3574

PM code invalid at end of dispense.
Probable cause Communication failure with PM board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 3575

DI water tank is empty.
Probable cause Water source supply was interrupted. Corrective action 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not crimped or blocked. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23.
Section 10-287
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Air bubbles are present in the water source supply tubing.
Corrective action 1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
Hardware failure: Supply water tubing is disconnected Incoming On/Off valve failure Float sensor is disconnected or defective AC/DC driver board is defective AC/DC controller board is defective
Error code: 3576

DI water tank, timeout during automatic fill.
Probable cause Water source supply was interrupted. Corrective action 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not crimped or blocked. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See c System processing module water and liquid waste specifications and requirements, page 4-23. 1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Hardware failure: Supply water tubing is disconnected Incoming On/Off valve failure Float sensor is disconnected or defective AC/DC driver board is defective AC/DC controller board is defective Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-288
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

DI water tank not filling.
Probable cause Water source supply was interrupted. Corrective action 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not crimped or blocked. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19. 1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Hardware failure: Supply water tubing is disconnected Incoming On/Off valve failure Float sensor is disconnected or defective AC/DC driver board is defective AC/DC controller board is defective Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 3578

DI water tank, timeout during initialization.
Probable cause Water source supply was interrupted. Corrective action 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not crimped or blocked. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Section 10-289
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Air bubbles are present in the water source supply tubing.
Corrective action 1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
Hardware failure: Supply water tubing is disconnected Incoming On/Off valve failure Float sensor is disconnected or defective AC/DC driver board is defective AC/DC controller board is defective
Error code: 3579

Internal Low concentration waste tank is full.
Probable cause Drainage or overflow tubing is crimped. Waste tubing is too high. Hardware failure: Drain line is plugged Float switch is defective Corrective action Reposition the drainage and overflow tubing so there are no crimps. Adjust the waste tubing so it is less than 4 inches (100 mm) from the ground. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 3580

PM board not in ready mode.
Error code: 3581

PM board does not respond.
Section 10-290
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

PM board POST error.
Error codes
Error code: 3583

PM board not in ready mode to request PM software version.
Error code: 3584

PM board does not respond to request for PM software version.
Error code: 3585

PM board not in ready status during seek.
Error code: 3586

PM board not in ready status beginning aspiration.
Section 10-291
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3587

PM board not in ready status ending aspiration.
Error code: 3588

PM board not in ready status before dispense.
Error code: 3589

PM board not in ready status at start of dispense.
Error code: 3590

PM board not in ready status at end of dispense.
Error code: 3591

PM board not in ready status before wash.
Section 10-292
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

PM board not in ready status at start of wash.
Error codes
Error code: 3595

PM board not in ready status at end of wash.
Error code: 3596

PM board not responding at end of aspiration.
Error code: 3597

PM board not responding at end of dispense.
Error code: 3598

PM board not responding at end of wash.
Section 10-293
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3599

PM code invalid at end of aspiration.
Error code: 3600

PM code invalid at end of wash.
Error code: 3601

Invalid data terminator received from Liquid Level Sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 3602

(x) liquid level sense antenna verification failure. x = Pipettor name
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any The liquid level sense antenna indicated in the hardware failure. message is not responding.
Section 10-294
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

POST passed, Liquid level sense board (x), version (y). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10 - i 2000/i 2000SR), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4) y = Firmware revision
Error codes
Power on self tests (POST) passed on the indicated Status message. No corrective action is required. liquid level sense board.
Error code: 3604

PM board not in ready status at beginning of seek.
Error code: 3700

Unable to process test, (x) wash aspiration error for probe(s) (y). x = Wash Zone y = Probe number
Probable cause If error occurs on one sample: Fibrin or clots in the sample. If error occurs on multiple samples: Poor tubing connections to the wash zone probes. Temperature sensor connected to wrong probe tubing. Wash zone probe obstructed. Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the indicated wash zone. Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to the correct probe. 1. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71. 2. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick. Corrective action
Section 10-295
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed.
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255.
Poor tubing connections to the vacuum vessels. Reseat the tubing connection at the vacuum valve of the vacuum vessel. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any DC driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed (i 2000/i 2000SR) Wash zone manifold valve failure If error occurs after daily maintenance: Processing module status is in the Warming status. Repeat daily maintenance once the processing module is in the Ready status.
Error code: 3701

(x) disabled, maximum number of wash aspiration errors exceeded. x = Wash Zone name
Probable cause Error 3700 occurred shortly before or at the same time as this message. Determine the specific probe(s) 1, 2, or 3 experiencing the 3700 error message. Poor tubing connections to the wash zone probes. Temperature sensor connected to wrong probe tubing. Wash zone probe obstructed. Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the indicated wash zone. Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to the correct probe. 1. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71. 2. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248. Corrective action
Section 10-296
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed.
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255.
Poor tubing connections to the vacuum vessels. Reseat the tubing connection at the vacuum valve of the vacuum vessel. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any DC driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed (i 2000/i 2000SR) Wash zone manifold valve failure
Error code: 3702

Wash water supply warning (x), decreased flow detected, (y/z). x = Wash cup name y = Measured water flow rate z = Minimum flow rate
Fluctuation or a slight decrease in water wash flow. No corrective action required.
Error code: 3703

Unable to process test, wash water supply failure (x), (y/z). x = Wash cup name y = Measured water flow rate z = Minimum flow rate
Probable cause Wash water supply is restricted or requires adjustment. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support.
Error code: 3840

(x) timeout during rotation. x = High concentration waste pump name
Probable cause Hardware failure. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-297
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3841

(x) homing failure. x = High concentration waste pump name
Error code: 3850

(x) timeout while moving to upper limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error code: 3851

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving (x) to upper limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error code: 3852

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving (x) to upper limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error code: 3853

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving (x) to upper limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Section 10-298
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) timeout while moving to lower limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error codes
Error code: 3855

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving (x) to lower limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error code: 3856

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving (x) to lower limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error code: 3857

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving (x) to lower limit. x = Probe wash pump name
Error code: 3858

Cuvette wash pump timeout while moving to upper limit.
Section 10-299
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3859

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3860

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3861

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3862

Cuvette wash pump timeout while moving to lower limit.
Error code: 3863

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to lower limit.
Section 10-300
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to lower limit.
Error codes
Error code: 3865

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette wash pump to lower limit.
Error code: 3866

Cuvette wash pump timeout while homing.
Error code: 3867

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.
Error code: 3868

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.
Error code: 3869

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing Cuvette wash pump.
Section 10-301
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3870

Wash solution pump timeout while moving to upper limit.
Error code: 3871

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Wash solution pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3872

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3873

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3874

Wash solution pump timeout while moving to lower limit.
Section 10-302
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving Wash solution pump to lower limit.
Error codes
Error code: 3876

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Wash solution pump to lower limit.
Error code: 3877

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Wash solution pump to lower limit.
Error code: 3878

Wash solution pump timeout while homing.
Error code: 3879

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing Wash solution pump.
Error code: 3880

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing Wash solution pump.
Section 10-303
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3881

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing Wash solution pump.
Error code: 3882

High concentration waste pump timeout while moving to upper limit.
Error code: 3883

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving High concentration waste pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3884

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving High concentration waste pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3885

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving High concentration waste pump to upper limit.
Error code: 3886

High concentration waste pump timeout while moving to lower limit.
Section 10-304
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving High concentration waste pump to lower limit.
Error codes
Error code: 3888

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving High concentration waste pump to lower limit.
Error code: 3889

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving High concentration waste pump to lower limit.
Error code: 3890

High concentration waste pump timeout while homing.
Error code: 3891

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing High concentration waste pump.
Section 10-305
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3892

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing High concentration waste pump.
Error code: 3893

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing High concentration waste pump.
Error code: 3894

Sample syringe drive timeout during movement.
Error code: 3895

Sample syringe drive homing failure.
Error code: 3896

(x) syringe drive timeout during movement. x = Syringe drive name
Section 10-306
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) syringe drive homing failure. x = Syringe drive name
Error codes
Error code: 3898

(x) syringe drive timeout during movement. x = Syringe drive name
Error code: 3899

(x) syringe drive homing failure. x = Syringe drive name
Error code: 3900

The Processing Module is (x), inlet valve cannot be opened for ARM buffer transfer. x = Processing module status
Probable cause User manually requested buffer transfer and the processing module is not in the correct status for receiving buffer from the ARM. Corrective action See Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Section 10-307
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 3901

(x) failed: (y). x = Type of request y = Text that describes the failure
Probable cause The ARM cannot respond to the SCC request to transfer buffer to a processing module. Corrective action Refer to Observed Problems in this section, for the text in the last field of the ARM error code: A to D timeout (ARM), page 10-628 ARM accessory is stopped, page 10-629 ARM decontamination mode aborted, page 10-629 ARM message not sent, page 10-630 Calibration check failure (ARM), page 10-633 Checksum failure (ARM), page 10-633 Communication timeout (ARM), page 10-634 Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM), page 10-635 Decontamination is in process (ARM), page 10-635 Flood condition (ARM), page 10-636 Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-631 High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-637 Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646 Invalid ARM error code, page 10-638 Invalid ARM status code, page 10-639 Invalid format of ARM message "message string", page 10-640 System flush is in process (ARM), page 10-645 Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-632 Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-641 Meter handshaking failure (ARM), page 10-642 Motor stall (ARM), page 10-643 Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646 SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM), page 10-644
Section 10-308
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x): (y) x = Type of message y = Text that describes the failure Error codes
Section 10-309
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
The ARM is not able to respond to a request to Refer to Observed Problems in this section, for the transfer buffer to a processing module, because it is text in the last field of the ARM error code: not in the correct status. A to D timeout (ARM), page 10-628 ARM accessory is stopped, page 10-629 ARM decontamination mode aborted, page 10-629 ARM message not sent, page 10-630 Calibration check failure (ARM), page 10-633 Checksum failure (ARM), page 10-633 Communication timeout (ARM), page 10-634 Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM), page 10-635 Decontamination is in process (ARM), page 10-635 Flood condition (ARM), page 10-636 Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-631 High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-637 Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646 Invalid ARM error code, page 10-638 Invalid ARM status code, page 10-639 Invalid format of ARM message "message string", page 10-640 System flush is in process (ARM), page 10-645 Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-632 Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-641 Meter handshaking failure (ARM), page 10-642 Motor stall (ARM), page 10-643 Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646 SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM), page 10-644 Reagent segments (c 16000), page 1-153
Section 10-310
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to configure Wash Buffer transfer to automatic, ARM port error.
Error codes
The ARM RS-232 cable was not connected when Connect the RS-232 cable to the SCC port then the SCC was configured to automatic wash buffer configure the SCC to automatic wash buffer transfer. transfer. Another cable is connected to the port used for the ARM RS-232 cable. The SCC hyperterminal program is running. Reseat the RS-232 cable connection to the SCC port and to the ARM. Contact your Area Customer Support.
Error code: 3904

ARM turned off, SCC communication to a Processing Module failed.
Probable cause Buffer was transferring to a processing module when communication to the SCC failed. Corrective action 1. Determine why the communication failed between the SCC and the processing module and correct the cause. 2. Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12. 3. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 4. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20.
Bar code reader error codes (4000-4999)

The bar code reader error code category includes error codes between 4000-4999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
NOTE: For corrective actions that involve hazardous activity refer to Hazards, page 8-1, for precautions you should take to minimize exposure and prevent personal injury or system damage. Hazard activities include but are not limited to: Replacing system probes Handling reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens
Section 10-311
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Removing physical obstructions Changing the lamp Removing system waste
Error code: 4000

Unable to read reagent bar code in position (x) on (y) carousel. x = Position in which the unreadable bar code was detected. (1-25 for i System; A1-D20 for c System) y = Location in which the unreadable bar code was detected. (Inner, Middle, or Outer ring for i System; R1 or R2 for c System)
Probable cause Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Condensation on reagent bottle bar code label. Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Reagent bottle not loaded properly. Bar code reader window is dirty. For c System: 1D reagent bar code label has an invalid checksum. Hardware failure. For i System: Reagent bar code reader requires calibration. Reagent bar code reader was not calibrated correctly. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675. Repeat bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675, and ensure the bar code calibration tools are not tilted and the bar codes face the center of the reagent carousel. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. See 1D reagent bar code label data format, page 4-30. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action Clean the label. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue. Load a new reagent kit. Reseat the reagent bottle.
Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-697, if error occurs with multiple reagent bottles.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 4001

Unable to read reagent 1 bar code in position (x). x = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Condensation on reagent bottle bar code label. Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Corrective action Clean the label. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue. Load a new reagent kit.
Section 10-312
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
The bar code label on the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge Reposition the 20 mL cartridge in the adapter so it is not facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center. Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure.

Error code: 4002

Unable to read reagent 2 bar code in position (x). x = Reagent carousel segment and position

Error code: 4003

Unable to read reagent 1 bar code.

Error code: 4004

Unable to read reagent 2 bar code.
Probable cause Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Condensation on reagent bottle bar code label. Reagent bottle bar code is damaged Corrective action Clean the label. Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue. Load a new reagent kit.
Section 10-313
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action

Error code: 4005

Unable to read segment ID bar code on reagent carousel 1 segment (x). x= Reagent carousel segment
Probable cause Segment bar code label is dirty. Bar code reader window is dirty. Segment bar code label is damaged. Corrective action Clean the label.

Replace the reagent carousel segment.
Communication failure with the reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or reader. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4006

Unable to read segment ID barcode on reagent carousel 2 segment (x). x= Reagent carousel segment
Probable cause Segment bar code has too much condensation. Segment bar code label is dirty. Bar code reader window is dirty. Segment bar code label is damaged. Hardware failure. Corrective action Wipe the label with a clean lint-free tissue. Clean the label.

Replace the reagent carousel segment. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-314
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

User-defined reagent kit in location (x) was unloaded, bar code read error in same position. x= Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause A bar coded reagent cartridge was detected in a position in which a non-bar coded reagent was manually assigned. Corrective action 1. If the non-bar coded reagent was moved to a different position, assign the new position. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91. 2. If the non-bar coded reagent is no longer onboard, no action is required until the reagent is loaded again. At that time, assign a new position.
Error codes
Error code: 4008

Unable to read reagent bar code in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Position in which the unreadable bar code was detected y = RSH section number
Probable cause Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Reagent bottle not loaded properly. Hardware failure. Corrective action Clean the label. Load a new reagent kit. Reseat the reagent bottle. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4100

Termination character not received from Reagent bar code reader.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Reagent bar code reader Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4101

Invalid checksum received from Reagent bar code reader.
Section 10-315
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4102

Invalid command sent to Reagent bar code reader.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Reagent bar code reader Controller board in slot 14 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4103

Reagent bar code reader not responding.
Communication failure with the Reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or reader. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure: Reagent bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4104

Acknowledge command not received from Reagent bar code reader.
Error code: 4105

POST failed, Reagent bar code reader.
Communication failure with the Reagent bar code Cycle power to the processing module and/or reader. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure: Reagent bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4106

POST passed, Reagent Bar code Reader (x). x = Firmware Version.
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the reagent bar code reader. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-316
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to read bar code label at Carrier (x) Position (y). x = Carrier ID y = Position
Probable cause If error code 4203 occurred at the same time, the carrier label cannot be read. If there is no other error code, the sample label cannot be read. A cup or tube is not in position. A bar code label is not on the sample tube. Tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. No corrective action is required. Place a bar code label on the sample tube. Place the tube in the carrier so the bar code is visible through the slot. Corrective action
Error codes
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. Sample cup or tube is scratched or dirty. 1. Clean the sample cup or tube. 2. Replace if damaged. Bar code label does not meet specifications. System bar code configuration does not match bar code label. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32 for guidelines. Edit the bar code configuration as required for the bar code label symbology. See Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28, Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29, or Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689, if you have a standard sample handler or 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685, if you have a robotic sample handler. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration.
Hardware failure: RSH bar code reader or sample load queue bar code reader
Section 10-317
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4201

Unable to read Carrier ID (x) at Load Queue bar code reader, samples will not be processed. x = Carrier ID
Probable cause Carrier ID read at the processing queue bar code reader but was unable to be read at the load queue bar code reader. Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues. Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Hardware failure: Load queue SID bar code reader Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 4202

Carrier position numbers detected out of sequence on Carrier (x). x = Carrier ID
Probable cause Carrier mis-labeled. Corrective action Use a different carrier.
Load queue bar code reader requires calibration. 1. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-689. 2. Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689, if 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-689, failed. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4203

Unable to read Position number (x) on Carrier at the Load Queue bar code reader. x = Position
Probable cause Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. Corrective action 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues.
Section 10-318
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Hardware failure: Load queue SID bar code reader
Corrective action Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4204

Unable to read Carrier ID at Sample ID bar code reader.
Probable cause Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. Corrective action 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues. Sample ID bar code reader requires calibration. Hardware failure: Sample ID bar code reader Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4205

Unable to read carrier ID (x) at RSH bar code reader. x = Carrier ID
Probable cause Carrier bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. Corrective action 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues. Bar code reader requires calibration. Hardware failure: Sample ID bar code reader Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4206

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in bay (x) section (y). x = Bay number y = Section number
Probable cause If error occurs for one carrier: Carrier bar code label is wet or dirty. Carrier bar code is damaged. Clean and dry the carrier bar code label. Use a different carrier.
Section 10-319
Corrective action
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause If error occurs for more than one carrier: Bar code reader window is dirty. Bar code reader requires calibration. Hardware failure: Bar code reader
Corrective action

Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4207

Unable to read Carrier ID for carrier in section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause If error occurs for one carrier: Carrier bar code label is wet or dirty. Carrier bar code is damaged. If error occurs for more than one carrier: Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure: Bar code reader Clean and dry the carrier bar code label. Use a different carrier. Corrective action

Error code: 4208

Invalid Sample ID scanned by the Sample ID bar code reader. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.
Probable cause The sample ID contains an invalid character. Corrective action Use valid characters only. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
Section 10-320
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to read position number (x) on Carrier at the (y). x = Position number y = Bar code reader
Probable cause Carrier bar code label is damaged or dirty. Corrective action 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues. Hardware failure: Processing queue bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 4301

Unable to read Carrier ID at the (x) on module (y). x = Bar code reader y = Processing module number (1-4)
Probable cause Carrier bar code label is damaged or dirty. Corrective action 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues. Hardware failure: Processing queue bar code reader. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4302

Invalid Carrier ID detected at (x) on module (y). x = Bar code reader y = Processing module number (1-4)
Probable cause Carrier bar code label is damaged or dirty. Corrective action 1. Clean the carrier bar code label. 2. Place carrier on the load queue. 3. Use a different carrier, if error continues. Hardware failure: Processing queue bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-321
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4400

Sample ID bar code reader not responding.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Controller board has a poor connection or failed (ci System/i System - slot 3 in the upper card cage, c System - slot 2 in lower card cage) RSH bar code reader or sample load queue bar code reader Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4401

Invalid checksum received from sample ID bar code reader.
Probable cause Hardware failure: RSH bar code reader or sample load queue bar code reader Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4402

Termination character not received from sample ID bar code reader.
Error code: 4403

Sample ID bar code reader not detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: RSH bar code reader or sample load queue bar code reader Controller board has a poor connection or failed (ci System/i System - slot 3 in the upper card cage, c System - slot 2 in lower card cage) Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-322
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid command sent to sample ID bar code reader.
Error codes
Error code: 4405

Sample ID bar code reader communication error.
Error code: 4406

Unable to perform read, sample ID bar code reader in use.
Error code: 4407

Invalid configuration for sample ID bar code reader.
Section 10-323
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4408

POST failed, sample ID bar code reader.
Probable cause Communication failure with the sample ID bar code reader. Hardware failure: Controller board has a poor connection or failed (ci System/i System - slot 3 in the upper card cage, c System - slot 2 in lower card cage) RSH bar code reader or sample load queue bar code reader Corrective action
Error code: 4409

POST passed, sample ID bar code reader, version (x). x = Firmware version
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed for the sample load queue bar code reader or RSH bar code reader. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 4410

Timing sequence error detected with RSH bar code reader.
Probable cause RSH bar code reader calibration was not performed. Hardware failure: RSH bar code reader Corrective action Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4411

Invalid checksum received from the bar code reader.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Bar code reader Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-324
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid command sent to the bar code reader.
Error codes
Error code: 4413

Bar code reader communication error.
Error code: 4414

Bar code reader not detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Bar code reader Controller board has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4415

Termination character not received from the bar code reader.
Error code: 4416

Unable to perform read, bar code reader in use.
Section 10-325
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4417

Invalid configuration for the bar code reader.
Error code: 4418

Reagent bar code reader communication error.
Error code: 4419

Invalid configuration for reagent bar code reader.
Error code: 4420

Unable to perform read, reagent bar code reader in use.
Error code: 4500

(x) not responding on Processing Module (y). x = Bar code reader y = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Communication failure with the bar code reader. Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-326
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) in use. x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error codes
Communication failure with the processing queue Cycle power to the processing module and/or bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure: Processing queue bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4502

Invalid reader number (x) requested for Processing Queue bar code reader. x = Reader number
Error code: 4503

Invalid configuration on Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error code: 4504

Processing Queue barcode reader (x) communication error. x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Communication failure with the processing queue Cycle power to the processing module and/or bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-327
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4505

Invalid checksum received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error code: 4506

Termination character not received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error code: 4507

Invalid terminator received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error code: 4508

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) not detected. x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Section 10-328
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid reader address received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error codes
Error code: 4510

Invalid command received from Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Error code: 4511

Processing Queue bar code reader (x) not responding. x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Communication failure with the processing queue Cycle power to the processing module and/or bar code reader sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure: Controller board in slot 3 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Processing queue bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4520

POST passed, Processing Queue Bar code Reader (x) version (y). x = Processing module number (1 - 4) y = Firmware version
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the processing queue bar code reader. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Section 10-329
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4530

POST failed, Processing Queue bar code reader (x). x = Processing module number (1 - 4)
Communication failure with the processing queue Cycle power to the processing module and/or bar code reader. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure: Controller board in slot 3 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Processing Queue bar code reader Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4600

Unable to read carousel ID at Processing Queue bar code reader.
Probable cause Carousel is not present. Carousel ID label is not on the carousel. The carousel is not seated correctly. Corrective action Place carousel on the LAS carousel platform. Apply a carousel ID label to the carousel. Seat the carousel correctly.
Carousel bar code label is damaged, wet, or dirty. 1. Clean the carousel bar code label or replace the label if damaged. 2. Place carousel on the LAS carousel platform. 3. Use a different carousel, if error continues. Processing queue bar code reader (used to read Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure the LAS carousel) requires calibration. 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration, page 10-692. Hardware failure: Processing queue bar code reader. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 4601

LAS bar code read failed for SID (x). x - Sample ID
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. Sample tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. Position the tube in the carrier so the bar code is visible.
Section 10-330
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Bar code label does not meet specifications.
Corrective action 1. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32, for guidelines. 2. Contact your LAS vendor.
Hardware failure: Processing queue bar code reader
Error code: 4602

LAS bar code read mismatched for SID (x). x = Sample ID ordered
Probable cause The bar code read by the LAS did not match the SID data ordered. The wrong tube is at the aspiration point. 1. Rerun the sample. 2. Contact your LAS vendor. Corrective action
Error code: 4800

Unable to read Sample ID at sample carousel position (x). x = Sample carousel position
Probable cause If error occurs on one sample: Tube is not correctly positioned in the carousel. Place the tube in the carousel so the bar code is visible through the slot. Corrective action
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. Bar code label does not meet specifications. If error occurs with multiple samples: System bar code configuration does not match bar code labels. Edit the bar code configuration as required for the bar code label symbology. See Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28, Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29, or Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32, for guidelines.
Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure.

Section 10-331
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 4801

Unable to read Sample ID at sample carousel.
Probable cause If error occurs on one sample: Tube is not correctly positioned in the carousel. Place the tube in the carousel so the bar code is visible through the slot. Corrective action
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. Bar code label does not meet specifications. If error occurs with multiple samples: System bar code configuration does not match bar code labels. Edit the bar code configuration as required for the bar code label symbology. See Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28, Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29, or Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32, for guidelines.
Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure.

Error code: 4900

(x) bar code reader Power On Self Test failure. x = Sample Carousel, Reagent 1, or Reagent 2
Probable cause Communication failure with bar code reader. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 4901

(x) bar code reader failure (port initialize error). x = Sample Carousel, Reagent 1, or Reagent 2
Section 10-332
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) bar code reader failure. x = Sample Carousel, Reagent 1, or Reagent 2
Error codes
Error code: 4906

(x) bar code reader parity error. x = Sample Carousel, Reagent 1, or Reagent 2
Probable cause For sample carousel: Tube is not correctly positioned in the carousel. Place the tube in the carousel so the bar code is visible through the slot. Corrective action
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. Bar code label does not meet specifications. System bar code configuration does not match bar code labels. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32, for guidelines. Edit the bar code configuration as required for the bar code label symbology. See Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28, Change the sample bar code settings for code 39, page 2-29, or Change the sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, page 2-30. Clean the label. Load a new reagent kit.
For Reagent 1 or 2: Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged.
The bar code label on the 20 mL (bottle) cartridge Reposition the 20 mL cartridge in the adapter so it is not facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center. For all bar code readers: Bar code reader window is dirty. Hardware failure.

Robotic and sensor error codes (5000-5999)

The robotic and sensor error code category includes error codes between 5000-5999.
Section 10-333
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Error code: 5000

(x) movement restricted at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Location
Probable cause For sample pipetting: Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in the carrier. Probe is out of alignment. Remove stopper from sample tube. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into sample carrier and is positioned straight. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Corrective action
Section 10-334
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor connection.
Corrective action Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe clip, then perform one of the following fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672 for the sample pipettor 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-673 for the STAT pipettor
Sample carrier is damaged. Hardware failure:
Use a different carrier.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Indexer board has a poor connection or failed hardware failure. Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense and Z cable failure Pipettor
For reagent pipetting: Reagent bottle cap was not removed. Reagent bottle is empty. Vacuum vessel tubing obstructing probe. Reagent bottle is not seated correctly in the reagent carousel. Probe is out of alignment. Remove the cap from the reagent bottle, and then install septum. Replace empty reagents. Adjust vacuum vessel tubing so the pipettor does not touch it when washing the probe. Reseat the reagent bottle in the carousel. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67 Probe is damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Section 10-335
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Liquid level sense and Z cable has a poor connection.
Corrective action Tighten the screw holding the cable to the probe clip, then perform one of the following fluidics/wash diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672
Hardware failure: Liquid level sense board has a poor connection or failed Indexer board has a poor connection or failed Liquid level sense and Z cable Pipettor
Error code: 5001

Sample Pipettor probe may be in sample cup/tube on Processing Module (x) due to prior hardware failure. x = Processing module number (1-4)
Probable cause Sample pipettor failure occurred on the specified processing module that could possibly leave the probe inside the sample cup or tube. Corrective action 1. Start up the processing module to remove probe from sample cup or tube. Do not perform start up on the sample handler at the same time. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. 2. Perform a start up on the sample handler when processing module status is Ready. 3. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000 or 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 4. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 3000 or 5000 category error codes. 5. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-336
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample pipettor timeout during vertical movement.
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the sample pipettor in the cuvette dispense or wash cup positions. Sample probe is out of alignment. Hardware failure. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5003

Sample pipettor vertical homing failure.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the sample pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5004

Sample pipettor timeout during horizontal movement.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the sample pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5005

Sample pipettor horizontal homing failure.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the sample pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-337
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5006

(x) pipettor timeout during vertical movement. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the reagent 1 pipettor in the cuvette dispense or wash cup positions. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Hardware failure. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5007

(x) pipettor vertical homing failure. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the reagent 1 pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5008

(x) pipettor timeout during horizontal movement. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the reagent 1 pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5009

(x) pipettor horizontal homing failure. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-338
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) pipettor timeout during vertical movement. x = Pipettor name
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the reagent 2 pipettor in the cuvette dispense or wash cup positions. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Hardware failure. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5011

(x) pipettor vertical homing failure. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the reagent 2 pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5012

(x) pipettor timeout during horizontal movement. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 5013

(x) pipettor horizontal homing failure. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-339
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5014

Sample pipettor movement restricted at sample carousel position (x). x = Sample carousel position
Probable cause Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in the carousel. Sample carousel cover is not seated properly. Corrective action Remove stopper from sample tube. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into the sample carousel and is positioned straight. Reseat the sample carousel cover.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the sample pipettor. Sample probe is out of alignment. Sample probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35.
Error code: 5015

(x) pipettor movement restricted at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Probable cause Cap not removed from a reagent cartridge. Reagent cartridge and/or adapter is not seated correctly. Empty reagent cartridge. Carousel cover is not seated properly. Corrective action Remove cap from reagent bottles. Reseat the reagent cartridge and/or adapter. Replace the reagent. Reseat the carousel cover.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the reagent pipettor. Non-bar coded reagent is not loaded or is not loaded in the correct position. Reagent probe is out of alignment. Reagent probe is damaged. Hardware failure. Load the non-bar coded reagent in the correct assigned position. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36.
Section 10-340
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) pipettor movement restricted at (y). x = Pipettor name y = Reagent carousel segment and position
Error codes
Error code: 5017

Unable to perform horizontal movement, sample pipettor not in up position.
The sample pipettor was physically pushed down 1. Select the processing module graphic, and from its vertical home position. then select Stop. 2. Start up the processing module when the status is Stopped. See Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the sample pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5018

Sample pipettor movement restricted at sample carrier.
Probable cause Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Corrective action Remove stopper from sample tube. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 10-341
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in the carrier.
Corrective action Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into the sample carrier and is positioned straight.
Error code: 5019

Unable to process test, (x) pipettor movement restricted. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 5020

Unable to process test, (x) pipettor movement restricted. x = Pipettor name
Section 10-342
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Error code: 5021

Sample pipettor movement restricted at LAS.
Probable cause Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in the carousel. Corrective action Remove stopper from sample tube. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into the carousel and is positioned straight.
Error code: 5022

Sample pipettor movement restricted at dilution cuvette position.
Section 10-343
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5023

Sample pipettor movement restricted.
Probable cause Stopper not removed from the sample tube. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in the carrier or carousel. Corrective action Remove stopper from sample tube. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Ensure sample cup or tube is fully seated into sample carrier or carousel and is positioned straight.
Error code: 5024

Unexpected SMC status after (x) movement. x = Hardware component
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the pipettor. Probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35, 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36, or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure. Communication failure with SMC board. Hardware failure.
Section 10-344
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample Pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected.
Probable cause Communication failure with SMC board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error codes
Error code: 5026

(x) pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 5027

(x) pipettor (vertical) did not stop as expected. x = Pipettor name
Error code: 5100

(x) disabled, maximum number of errors exceeded. x = Name of mechanism taken offline
Probable cause For vortexer: Hardware failure: Cable for the specified vortexer has a poor connection or failed Vortexer in the indicated position DC Driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card cage has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-345
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause For other motors: Hardware failure: Cable for the specified motor has a poor connection or failed DC Driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 5101

(x) did not disengage from RV. x = Vortexer number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Cable for the specified vortexer has a poor connection or failed Vortexer in the specified position DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5102

Unable to process test, failure on (x). x = Mechanism name
Probable cause Intermittent failure with the specified mechanism. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 or 7000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 or 7000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-346
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) did not mix RV for required time. x = Vortexer number
Error codes
Error code: 5104

(x) did not reach required speed. x = Vortexer number
Error code: 5105

(x) did not engage with RV. x = Vortexer number
Section 10-347
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5106

Process path jam was detected and a recovery was successfully performed. Process path may require servicing. NOTE: Frequent occurrences of this error code may indicate a pending hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Probable cause An RV (reaction vessel) was jammed in the process path track. RVs are damaged or have an irregular shape. Hardware failure. Corrective action A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV. No further action required. A recovery was performed to clear the jammed RV. No further action required. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5151

Reaction carousel timeout during rotation.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the reaction carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5152

Reaction carousel homing failure
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the reaction carousel. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5153

Reagent 1 outer carousel timeout during rotation.
Section 10-348
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent 1 outer carousel homing failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5155

Reagent 1 inner carousel timeout during rotation.
Error code: 5156

Reagent 1 inner carousel homing failure.
Error code: 5157

Reagent 2 carousel timeout during rotation.
Error code: 5158

Reagent 2 carousel homing failure.
Section 10-349
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5159

Sample carousel rotation error from (x) to (y). x = Start position y = Destination
Error code: 5160

Sample carousel failure.
Error code: 5161

Reagent 1 outer carousel rotation error from (x) to (y). x = Start position y = Destination
Error code: 5162

Reagent 1 outer carousel failure.
Section 10-350
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent 1 inner carousel rotation error from (x) to (y). x = Start position y = Destination
Error codes
Error code: 5164

Reagent 1 inner carousel failure.
Error code: 5165

Reagent 2 carousel rotation error from (x) to (y). x = Start position y = Destination
Error code: 5166

Reagent 2 carousel failure.
Section 10-351
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5167

Cuvette tab not detected at cuvette (x). x = Cuvette #
Probable cause Water is present on the slotted edges of the cuvette segment. Cuvette tab is broken. Hardware failure. Corrective action Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
Error code: 5168

Cuvette tab not detected.
Probable cause Water is present on the slotted edges of the cuvette segment. Cuvette tab is broken. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Error code: 5169

Optics trigger sensor auto adjustment value (x) out of range. x = Trigger value
Probable cause Water is present on the slotted edges of the cuvette segment. Cuvette tab is broken. Corrective action Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
Section 10-352
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Error code: 5170

Sample carousel timeout during rotation.
Error code: 5171

Sample carousel homing failure.
Error code: 5172

Optics trigger sensor auto adjustment error.
Probable cause Water is present on the slotted edges of the cuvette segment. Cuvette tab is broken. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Dry off the slotted edge of the cuvette segment.
Section 10-353
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5173

Unable to complete reagent scan.
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying the operation you were attempting to perform when this error occurred.
Error code: 5174

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in position (x) on carousel (y). The bottle will not be used. x = Position in which the bottle was detected y = Location in which the bottle was detected
Probable cause Reagent bar code reader requires calibration. The reagent carousel is slipping and the same bottle was scanned twice. Corrective action Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5175

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in position (x) on carousel (y). The bottle will not be created. x = Reagent segment and position y = Reagent carousel
Probable cause A user printed reagent bar code was created with the same lot number and serial number as a reagent already scanned on the system. Corrective action Remove the duplicate bottle and recreate the reagent bar code with a unique serial number.
Error code: 5176

No carrier detected at reagent carousel position (x). x = Reagent carousel position number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Reagent carrier detect sensor
Section 10-354
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier detected in reagent carousel position (x). x = Reagent carousel position number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Reagent carrier detect sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5178

Reagent carrier detect sensor failed.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Reagent carrier detect sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5179

Duplicate reagent bottle detected in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which the bottle was detected y = RSH section number
Probable cause Bar code reader requires calibration. Corrective action Perform bar code readers diagnostic procedure.
Error code: 5180

Unable to load reagent carrier from section (x) due to a previous mechanism failure. x = RSH section number
Probable cause A mechanism failure prevented loading of the reagent carrier. Corrective action Restart the RSH.
Error code: 5181

Unable to unload reagent carrier from reagent carousel position (x) due to a previous mechanism failure. x = Position number on the reagent carousel
Probable cause A mechanism failure prevented unloading of the reagent carrier. Corrective action Restart the RSH.
Section 10-355
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5182

Carrier not detected in reagent carousel position (x). x = Position number on the reagent carousel
Probable cause Carrier is damaged. Hardware failure: Reagent carrier detect sensor Carrier detect sensor Corrective action Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5183

Reagent 2 outer carousel failure.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Remove any obstruction from the area of movement the reagent 2 outer carousel. of the carousel. Hardware failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5184

Reagent 2 inner carousel failure.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Remove any obstruction from the area of movement the reagent 2 inner carousel. of the carousel. Hardware failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5185

Reagent 2 outer carousel rotation error from (x) to (y). x = Start position y = Destination
Section 10-356
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent 2 inner carousel rotation error from (x) to (y). x = Start position y = Destination
Error codes
Error code: 5187

Reagent 2 outer carousel homing failure.
Error code: 5188

Reagent 2 inner carousel homing failure.
Error code: 5189

Reagent 2 outer carousel timeout during rotation.
Section 10-357
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5190

Reagent 2 inner carousel timeout during rotation.
Error code: 5200

RV detected below drop point when none was expected.
Probable cause An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV transport. Corrective action 1. Remove the RV transport shield. 2. Remove RV from the RV loader drop point on the RV transport. 3. Replace the RV transport shield. 4. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed RV loader drop point sensor is dirty or dusty RV loader drop point sensor board
Section 10-358
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

RVs have not been picked up for an extended period of time.
Probable cause RVs (reaction vessels) are blocking the access path to the RV loader wheel. Corrective action 1. Open the RV access door and stir the RVs in the hopper by hand. 2. Wait until all tests in process are complete if the RVs are still not picked up, and then Pause the processing module, page 5-14. 3. Remove all RVs from the hopper, when the processing module status is Ready. 4. Inspect the path to the RV loader wheel and remove any RVs. 5. Place RVs back into the Hopper. Hardware failure: RV loader wheel missing fingers CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5202

Drop point sensor on RV Loader failed.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed RV loader drop point sensor is dirty or dusty RV transport drop point sensor board
Error code: 5203

RV Loader Transport assembly depleted of RVs.
Probable cause There are no RVs (reaction vessels) in the hopper. Corrective action Add reaction vessels to the RV loader hopper.
Section 10-359
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause The hopper baffle is not attached to the RV loader. Hardware failure: RV loader RV loader wheel is missing fingers RV HOP LVL SNSR W104 cable underneath the hopper has a poor connection
Corrective action Secure the baffle on the hopper to the RV loader. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5204

RV load verification sensor failure detected.
Probable cause An RV (reaction vessel) is jammed at the load point in the RV transport. Corrective action 1. Remove RV transport shield. 2. Remove all RVs from the RV transport. 3. Replace the RV transport shield. 4. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Hardware failure: RV transport drop point sensor board CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5205

RV detected in Process Path when attempting to load a new RV.
Probable cause Hardware failure: RV sensor Corrective action 1. If error is infrequent, it is probably due to an occasional failure to move a clean RV into the processing path. No corrective action is required. 2. If error is frequent, it is probably due to an intermittent sensor problem. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-360
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

No RV detected at drop point.
Error codes
RV fell off the orienter wheel before reaching the If this occurs infrequently (three times a day or less) chute. no corrective action is required. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed RV sensor cable has a poor connection RV sensor
Error code: 5208

Unable to process test, RVs are not available.
RVs (reaction vessels) blocking the access path 1. Open the RV access door and stir the RVs in the to the RV loader wheel. hopper by hand. 2. Wait until all tests in process are complete if the RVs are still not picked up, and then Pause the processing module, page 5-14. 3. Remove all RVs from the hopper, when the processing module status is Ready. 4. Inspect the path to the RV loader wheel and remove any RVs. 5. Place RVs back into the Hopper. RV pickers are broken off the RV loader wheel. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5209

No RV detected in process path after RV load attempt.
Probable cause RV loader chute is not in position to load RVs. Hardware failure: RV present sensor Corrective action Reseat the RV loader chute into the wash zone manifold. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-361
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5210

RV detected in process path when no RV was expected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: RV present sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5211

An RV could not be loaded in the allotted time.
Probable cause Hardware failure: RV pickup assembly RV picker sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5251

Wash Buffer Transfer sensor failed, transfer canceled.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Air sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5252

Wash buffer level sensor disconnected.
Probable cause Wash buffer level sensor cable has a poor connection. Wash buffer level sensor failed. Corrective action Reconnect the buffer level sensor. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269 Hardware failure: Buffer level sensor cable Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-362
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) vacuum failure during aspiration. x = Wash Zone name
Error codes
Tubing/sensor at probe on one of the wash zones Reseat the wash zone tubing onto each probe one has a poor connection. at a time. Wash zone probe obstructed. 1. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach, page 9-71 2. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Tubing/sensor for one of the wash zones was obstructed or failed. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255 Wash zone probe is dirty. Hardware failure: Vacuum filter Vacuum valve Vacuum vessel drain valve Vacuum pump Clean the exterior of the probes on the wash zone indicated in the error message. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5301

Vacuum system failure.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Tubing to vacuum vessel is obstructed Vacuum tubing Vacuum vessel drain vessel Vacuum valve Vacuum pump Vacuum filter Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-363
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5302

Vacuum initialization failed, vacuum sensor.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Vacuum vessel Vacuum vessel drain valve Vacuum valve Vacuum sensor has a poor connection Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5303

Vacuum system failure, vacuum too low.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Vacuum low pressure sensor Vacuum pump Heater cooler board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5304

Vacuum system failure, liquid too high.
Probable cause External waste tubing is crimped. Liquid waste quick disconnect is not connected. Hardware failure: Waste pump Heater cooler board Corrective action Reposition the external waste tubing so there are no crimps. Connect the liquid waste quick disconnect. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5305

Liquid too high in vacuum accumulator.
Probable cause NOTE: Processing module will go to paused if running tests. Liquid waste is full. Empty liquid waste container. Liquid waste tubing is not connected at the quick Reconnect the liquid waste container tubing at the disconnect. quick disconnect. Liquid waste tubing is crimped or obstructed. External waste tubing is obstructed. Remove any obstructions. Remove any obstructions. Corrective action
Section 10-364
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Run request denied, liquid too high in vacuum accumulator. Wait (x) minute(s) and try again.
Error codes
Attempted to run a test when there is still too much Wait the designated amount of time before trying to liquid in the vacuum accumulator. initiate a run.
Error code: 5307

Liquid waste high pressure condition detected.
Probable cause Liquid waste is full. Corrective action Empty liquid waste container.
Liquid waste tubing is not connected at the quick Reconnect the liquid waste container tubing at the disconnect. quick disconnect. Liquid waste tubing is crimped or obstructed. External waste tubing is obstructed. Remove any obstructions. Remove any obstructions.
Error code: 5350

POST failed, Indexer board (x). x = Board number 0 = slot 11, 1 = slot 9, 2 = slot 7, 3 = slot 5
Probable cause Communication failure between the processing module and the SCC. Hardware failure: Indexer board in the indicated position in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action
Error code: 5351

DC Drive I/O board not present.
Probable cause Communication failure between the processing module and the SCC. Hardware failure: DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action
Section 10-365
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5352

POST passed, DC Driver I/O board.
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the DC Driver I/O board. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 5353

POST failed, DC Driver I/O board.
Probable cause Communication failure between the processing module and the SCC. Hardware failure: DC Driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action
Error code: 5354

Controller board failed.
Probable cause Communication failure between the processing module and the SCC. Hardware failure: Corrective action
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Module controller board in the upper card cage hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed Sample handler controller board in slot 3 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed (i 2000/i 2000SR)
Error code: 5355

Controller board register reset failure.
Section 10-366
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System Stopped, I/O communication error.
Error codes
Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Communication failure with PM board. Hardware failure:
Error code: 5357

Digital I/O interrupt failure.
Probable cause Generic 6000 or 8000 error code. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 6000 or 8000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 6000 or 8000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 5358

POST passed, Controller board version (x). x = Version number
Power on self tests (POST) passed on the controller Status message. No corrective action is required. board.
Section 10-367
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5359

POST failed, Controller board.
Error code: 5360

Controller board checksum failed.
Error code: 5361

POST passed, Motor Indexer board (x) version (y). x = Board number y = Firmware revision
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Motor indexer board. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 5362

False interrupt generated on bit (x). x = Digital I/O bit number
A false signal is sent to a sensor, the sensor is read This message is used to aid in troubleshooting and determined to be in the correct state. The electronic noise on the system. No corrective action message is ignored. is required.
Section 10-368
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

DC Driver I/O board overcurrent failure.
Error codes
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any DC driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 5364

POST passed, Sensor Interface Board.
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the Sensor Interface Board. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 5365

POST failed, Sensor Interface Board.
Probable cause Communication failure with Sensor Interface Board. Hardware failure: Sensor Interface Board Corrective action
Error code: 5366

Sensor Interface Board not present.
Probable cause Communication failure with Sensor Interface Board. Hardware failure: Sensor Interface Board Corrective action
Error code: 5370

DAQ failure, invalid interrupt.
Probable cause Communication failure with DAQ board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-369
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5371

Invalid command received by the AC/DC controller board from the CPU board.
Probable cause Communication failure with CPU board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 5372

Timeout: AC/DC board busy.
Probable cause Communication failure with AC/DC board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 5373

AC/DC controller board failure.
Error code: 5374

Communication error between SMC and CPU board.
Probable cause Communication failure between SMC and CPU board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 5375

Disk On Chip failure.
Section 10-370
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System memory check error for main CPU.
Error codes
Error code: 5377

DAQ backup memory error.
Error code: 5378

Communication error between DAQ board and CPU board.
Communication failure between DAQ board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or CPU board. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5379

Communication error between SMC board and CPU board.
Communication failure between SMC board and Cycle power to the processing module and/or CPU board. sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5380

Communication error between AC/DC board and CPU board.
Probable cause Communication failure between AC/DC board and CPU board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-371
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5381

Communication error between PM board and CPU board.
Probable cause Communication failure between PM board and CPU board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 5382

Initialization error for AC/DC board.
Error code: 5383

Initialization error for SMC board.
Error code: 5384

c System CPU floppy disk error.
Error code: 5385

Initialization error for DAQ board.
Section 10-372
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Step loss detected for (x). x = Hardware component
Probable cause For pipettors: A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the pipettor. Probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35, 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Error codes
Hardware failure. For other components:
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the component. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5387

Acknowledge command not received from RSH distribution board.
Probable cause Hardware failure: RSH distribution board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5388

Invalid checksum received from RSH distribution board.
Error code: 5389

Termination character not received from RSH distribution board.
Section 10-373
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5390

Invalid command sent to RSH distribution board.
Error code: 5391

RSH distribution board command timeout.
Error code: 5392

Communication error between SM AC/DC board and CPU board.
Probable cause Communication failure between the SM AC/DC board and CPU board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 5393

Initialization error for SM AC/DC board.
Communication failure with the SM AC/DC board. Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-374
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Load or Unload Transfer assembly or multi-module Load Queue Gate failed to transfer Sample Carrier.
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions of the load or unload queue (load queue gate for found in the load queue, unload queue or load multi-module systems). queue gate (multi-module only). Hardware failure: Load transfer sensor board failure Unload transfer sensor board failure Unload transfer motor failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5402

Unable to move carrier into Unload Queue.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions of the load or unload queue (load queue gate for found in the load queue, unload queue or load multi-module systems). queue gate (multi-module only). Hardware failure: Unload queue transfer assembly Micro switch Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5403

Outer Load Queue or Outer Unload Queue not available.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Outer lane of the load queue or the unload queue Corrective action 1. If the outer load queue is not working, continue processing samples by placing sample carriers on the inner load queue. 2. If the outer unload queue is not working, remove sample carriers from the inner unload queue more frequently to avoid filling the queue with sample carriers. 3. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-375
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5404

Solenoid (x) failed. x = Sample Handler solenoid name or Processing Module solenoid number (32 = RV Load Diverter Shutter, 36 = RV Unload Diverter, 42 = RV Load Diverter, 34 = STAT RV Diverter)
Selected start up for the i 2000 SSH when the Wait for the processing module status to change to processing module status has not completed the Stopped before initiating a start up on the i 2000 transition from Offline to Stopped. SSH. Hardware failure: Specified solenoid on sample handler or processing module DC driver I/O board in the card cage has a poor connection or failed. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5405

Sample Handler (x) failed. x = Mechanism name
Probable cause Hardware failure: Sample handler Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 5406

Carrier jammed on Unload Transfer assembly.
A physical interference is blocking the movement 1. Remove carrier from the processing queue at the of the carrier to the unload queue. unload transfer. 2. Look for and remove any physical obstructions on the processing queue. Hardware failure: Unload queue sensor failure Processing module skin alignment Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-376
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sensor (x) blocked by sample carrier. x = Sensor name
Probable cause Sample carrier is blocking the sensor. Corrective action 1. Remove sample carrier from the sample handler area where the indicated sensor is located. 2. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13. Hardware failure: Sensor connector cable not connected Sensor failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5408

Carrier transport not aligned with tray section.
Probable cause Carrier transport not aligned. Hardware failure: Section align sensor Carrier transport drive belt slipped Carrier transport motor Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5409

Step loss detected on (x) actual (expected), (y). x = Stepper motor name y = Actual and expected interrupt counts
Probable cause For carrier transport motors: Carrier transport not aligned. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77 Hardware failure: Carrier transport drive belt slipped Carrier transport X, Z, or Theta motor Carrier transport pulley assembly For carrier positioner motors: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-377
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Carrier positioner not aligned.
Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77. 2. After performing 1119 Transport Calibration, you must also perform the appropriate procedure for a c System processing module or i 2000SR processing module: c System - Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. i 2000SR - Perform as-needed maintenance procedures1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65, and 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68.
Hardware failure: Carrier positioner obstruction (c System/i 2000SR) Carrier positioner align sensor (c System/i 2000SR) Carrier positioner motor (c System/i 2000SR)
Error code: 5410

Carrier pick attempt failed at positioner pocket (x) module (y). x = Carrier positioner pocket y = Processing module number
Probable cause Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Corrective action Rerun the sample in a different carrier. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77.
Error code: 5411

Theta transport alignment error.
Probable cause Theta transport not aligned. Hardware failure: Carrier transport theta motor Carrier transport theta home sensor Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-378
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

No carrier detected in bay (x) section (y). x = Bay number y = Section number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Section carrier detect sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5413

Transport Z not aligned.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Carrier transport Z home sensor Carrier transport Z motor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5414

Carrier removed from carrier transport arm.
Carrier came off the carrier transport arm due to 1. Remove the carrier from the RSH. an obstacle in the path. 2. Clear any obstacles. Hardware failure: Rail guide sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5415

No carrier in carrier transport arm.
Carrier came off the carrier transport arm due to 1. Remove the carrier from the RSH. an obstacle in the path. 2. Clear any obstacles. Hardware failure: Rail guide sensor Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-379
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5416

No carrier detected in positioner pocket (x) module (y). x = Pocket on carrier positioner y = Processing module number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Carrier positioner carrier detect sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5417

(x) sensor failure. x = sensor
Probable cause Hardware failure: An RSH sensor has failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5418

Interrupt count discrepancy on (x), actual (expected), (y). x = Stepper motor name y = Actual and expected interrupt counts
Movement of the carrier positioner did not return the Status message. No corrective action is required. expected interrupt count.
Section 10-380
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier transport not aligned with carrier positioner.
Probable cause Carrier transport not aligned. Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77. 2. After performing 1119 Transport Calibration, you must also perform the appropriate procedure for a c System processing module or i 2000SR processing module: c System - Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. i 2000SR - Perform as-needed maintenance procedures1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65, and 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68. Hardware failure: Carrier positioner align sensor failure Carrier positioner motor failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5420

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at bay (x) section (y). x = Bay number y = Section number
Carrier is inserted backwards in the tray or priority Reposition the carrier in the tray or priority position. position. Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Rerun the sample in a different carrier. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77.
Error code: 5421

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at positioner pocket (x) module (y). x = Carrier positioner pocket y = Processing module number
Probable cause Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Corrective action Rerun the sample in a different carrier. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1119 Transport Calibration, page 9-77.
Section 10-381
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5422

Solenoid (x) failed to extend. x = Solenoid name
Probable cause Hardware failure: Specified solenoid or verification sensor on sample handler or processing module DC driver I/O board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5423

Solenoid (x) failed to retract. x = Solenoid name
Error code: 5424

Solenoid (x) failed to remain in the last commanded position.
Error code: 5425

Unknown carrier type detected in section (x), remove carrier. x = RSH section number
Probable cause Carrier is inserted too slowly into the section. Carrier is not fully inserted in the section. Carrier is damaged. Corrective action Select OK to the error message. No further corrective action is required. Reposition the carrier in the section or use a different section. Use a different carrier.
Section 10-382
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Carrier pick attempt failed at aspiration area. Remove sample carrier when RSH and processing Module are Stopped.
Probable cause Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Corrective action Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5427

No carrier detected at aspiration area.
Probable cause Carrier is damaged. Hardware failure: Rail guide sensor Corrective action Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5428

No carrier detected in section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Section carrier detect sensor Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5429

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at section (x). x = RSH section number
Probable cause Carrier is inserted backwards in the section. Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Corrective action Reposition the carrier in the section. Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5430

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at aspiration area.
Probable cause Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Corrective action Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-383
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5431

Carrier pick required multiple attempts at reagent carousel position (x). x = Reagent carousel position number
Probable cause Reagent carrier is not seated correctly in the reagent carousel. Carrier is damaged. Carrier transport is not aligned. Corrective action Remove the reagent carrier and perform a Startup on the RSH. Use a different carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5435

Sample carrier in aspiration area, remove carrier when modules are in the Stopped status.
A sample carrier is present in the aspiration area. A Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport user selected stop while the RSH was running or a and aspiration area. hardware failure occurred.
Error code: 5436

Unable to verify carrier type in section (x), remove carrier.
Probable cause A carrier is not seated in the section. Hardware failure: Load - Unload board sensor Corrective action Remove and reseat the carrier. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5501

Sample Handler Stopped, hardware failure.
Probable cause Sample handler stopped because of a previous hardware failure. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-384
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) blown. x = Fuse name
Probable cause Hardware failure: Fuse Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5503

Step loss detected on (x), actual (expected), y. x = Stepper motor name y = Actual and (expected) steps
Probable cause Air is in tubing. Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 , for the affected dispense pump (wash buffer, pre-trigger, or trigger). 2. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 for the affected dispense pump. Hardware failure: Dispense pump Tubing crimped or clogged Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5504

Invalid position for (x). x = Hardware component
Probable cause Communication failure with SMC, CPU, or DAQ board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-385
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5505

Keypad communication failure.
Probable cause Communication failure with keypad or DAQ board. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 5506

Water bath level low.
Probable cause System power was off. Corrective action Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: Module is not level Level sensor is dirty or defective
Error code: 5507

Water bath drain time exceeded.
Probable cause Water bath drain tubing is crimped. External drain is obstructed. Hardware failure: Level sensor is dirty or defective Corrective action Uncrimp the drain tubing. Clear the obstruction from the external drain. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-386
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Water bath fill time exceeded.
Probable cause Water source supply was interrupted. Corrective action 1. Verify the water source supply is functioning. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Water source supply is restricted. 1. Verify tubing from the water source is not crimped or blocked. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Incoming DI water pressure is too low. Increase the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19. 1. Check the tubing connections. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Hardware failure: Module is not level Supply water tubing is disconnected Level sensor is dirty or defective AC/DC driver board is defective AC/DC controller board is defective Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 5512

Unexpected sensor status for DI water tank.
Error code: 5513

DI water tank overflow detected.
Probable cause Incoming DI water pressure is too high. Corrective action Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Maintenance is being performed on the DI water Do not operate the system while the DI water system. system is undergoing cleaning or maintenance. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-387
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5514

Degasser pressure high.
Probable cause Incoming DI water has a high gas content. Hardware failure. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5515

Unexpected sensor status after (x) movement. x = Hardware component
Probable cause For pipettors: A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the pipettor. Probe is out of alignment. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35, 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Hardware failure. For other components:
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the component. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5516

(x) did not stop as expected. x = Hardware component
Error code: 5517

Backplane +12V fuse blown.
Section 10-388
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Backplane -12V fuse blown.
Error codes
Error code: 5519

Error code: 5520

Error code: 5600

ICT aspiration pump timeout while moving to upper limit.
Error code: 5601

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to upper limit.
Error code: 5602

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to upper limit.
Section 10-389
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5603

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to upper limit.
Error code: 5604

ICT aspiration pump timeout while moving to lower limit.
Error code: 5605

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to lower limit.
Error code: 5606

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to lower limit.
Error code: 5607

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving ICT aspiration pump to lower limit.
Section 10-390
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT aspiration pump timeout while homing.
Error codes
Error code: 5609

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down not activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.
Error code: 5610

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.
Error code: 5611

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while homing ICT aspiration pump.
Error code: 5612

ICT reference solution pump timeout during movement.
Error code: 5613

Unexpected sensor status (not activated) while moving ICT reference solution pump.
Section 10-391
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5614

ICT unit timeout during vertical movement.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the ICT unit. Hardware failure: ICT probe is out of alignment Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5615

ICT unit vertical homing failure.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the ICT unit. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5616

ICT unit timeout during horizontal movement.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the ICT unit. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5617

ICT unit horizontal homing failure.
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the ICT unit. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-392
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ICT measurement failure for (x). x = Analyte
Error codes
ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> two months after installation Change ICT Module, page 9-42. or > 15,000 samples). Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5619

ICT offset adjustment error for (x). x = Analyte(s)
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Replace or reseat the o-rings. See Replace the ICT correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Tighten the tubing connections at the top and side of each check valve in the ICT reference solution pump. Tighten the check valve connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump and ICT aspiration pump.
Reseat the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump and the ICT reference solution pump.
ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> two months after installation Change ICT Module, page 9-42. or > 15,000 samples). ICT module is not performing as expected. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42.
Section 10-393
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Error code: 5620

Unexpected ICT unit vertical home status at ICT reference solution cup.
Error code: 5621

Unexpected ICT unit horizontal home status at ICT reference solution cup.
Error code: 5622

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution cup not filling.
Probable cause The ICT reference solution bottle is empty, but the weight platform failed to detect it. Corrective action 1. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve the weight platform failure. ICT reference solution tubing is not connected correctly. ICT reference solution tubing is crimped or damaged. Tighten the tubing connections at the top and side of each check valve in the ICT reference solution pump. 1. Inspect the tubing. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if any damage is observed.
Section 10-394
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause ICT check valves are not connected correctly. ICT check valves are not functioning.
Corrective action Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump.
1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Reseat the 1 mL syringes. are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5623

Unable to process test, ICT reference solution not aspirated.
A single flush did not remove all air from the ICT Flush the ICT reference solution tubing by reference solution tubing after you replaced the performing as-needed maintenance procedure ICT reference bottle. 2131 Flush ICT Cup, page 9-38. ICT module 0-rings are missing or not seated correctly. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT probe is damaged. Replace or reseat the o-rings. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module. Replace the ICT probe. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. 1. Inspect the tubing. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if any damage is observed. ICT check valves are not connected correctly. ICT check valves are not functioning. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump.
ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly.
ICT reference solution tubing is crimped or damaged.
1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Reseat the 1 mL syringes. are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT reference solution pump Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-395
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5650

Cuvette washer timeout while moving to upper limit.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the cuvette washer. Black knob holding cuvette washer is loose. Dry tip on cuvette washer is out of alignment. Tighten the black knob. Align the cuvette dry tip. See, Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111 or Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 5651

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 5652

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-396
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
Error codes
Error code: 5654

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the cuvette washer. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5655

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
Error code: 5656

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-397
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5657

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to upper limit.
Error code: 5658

Cuvette washer timeout while moving to lower limit.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 5659

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Error code: 5660

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-398
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Error codes
Hardware failure.
Error code: 5662

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Error code: 5663

Unexpected sensor status (Only Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Error code: 5664

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Section 10-399
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5665

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Cuvette washer to lower limit.
Error code: 5666

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK not activated) while moving cuvette washer to lower limit.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 5667

Unexpected sensor status (Down activated and Down OK not activated) during Cuvette washer step down movement.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-400
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Mixer timeout while moving to upper limit.
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the movement 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions. of the mixer unit. 2. Replace any bent mixers. See Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5701

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Error code: 5702

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Error code: 5703

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Section 10-401
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5704

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Error code: 5705

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Error code: 5706

Unexpected sensor status (Down and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Error code: 5707

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to upper limit.
Error code: 5708

Busy status: AC/DC board.
Section 10-402
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Mixer timeout while moving to lower limit.
Probable cause Bent mixer blade. Corrective action Replace the mixer. See Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192.
Error codes
Error code: 5710

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK not activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Error code: 5711

Unexpected sensor status (only Up activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Error code: 5712

Unexpected sensor status (only Down activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Section 10-403
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5713

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Error code: 5714

Unexpected sensor status (only Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Error code: 5715

Unexpected sensor status (Up and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Error code: 5716

Unexpected sensor status (Up, Down, and Down OK activated) while moving Mixer to lower limit.
Error code: 5717

Vibration error, (x). x = Mixer name
Error code: 5718

Vibration error, (x). x = Mixer name
Section 10-404
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) timeout during rotation. x = Mixer name
Error codes
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the mixer unit. 2. Replace any bent mixers. See Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5720

(x) homing failure. x = Mixer name
Error code: 5721

(x) timeout during rotation. x = Mixer name
Section 10-405
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
A physical interference is blocking the rotation of 1. Look for and remove any physical obstructions. the mixer unit. 2. Replace any bent mixers. See Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5722

(x) homing failure. x = Mixer name
Error code: 5900

Step loss detected on (x). x = Motor name
Probable cause For RV loader transport motor: An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV transport. For process path motor: An RV is jammed in the process path. For pipettors: A physical interference is blocking the up/down movement of the pipettor. Look for and remove any physical obstructions around the specified pipettor, and if no obstruction is found, then perform one of the following pipettors diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1100 Pipettor Test, page 10-670 Clear the RV jam in the process path. Clear the RV jam at the load point on the RV loader transport. For the required steps, see observed problem RV loader jams (i System), page 10-562. Corrective action
Section 10-406
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Corrective action Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67
An empty sample tube is loaded. For wash zones: Probes are not inserted into the manifold.
Remove the empty sample tube. If weekly maintenance was recently done, press the wash zone motor assembly down so the probes are inserted into the manifold.
For all motors: A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the device. Communication or hardware failure. Power to the module fluctuated. Hardware failure: Sensor is dirty or dusty Sensors have a poor connection or failed Motor and/or cables have a poor connection or failed Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed Indexer board has a poor connection or failed Fuse
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12
Contact your Area Customer Support. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5901

Motor command timeout on device (x). x = Device name
Probable cause For RV loader transport motor: An RV is jammed at the load point in the RV transport. For process path motor: An RV is jammed in the process path. For sample pipetting:
Section 10-407
Corrective action Clear the RV jam at the load point on the RV loader transport. For the required steps, see observed problem RV loader jams (i System), page 10-562. Clear the RV jam in the process path.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Probe is out of alignment.
Corrective action Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
For reagent pipetting: Empty reagent bottle. Probe is out of alignment. Replace the reagent. Perform one of the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 (i 2000/i 2000SR) 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67 (i 2000/i 2000SR) For all motors: A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the device. Communication or hardware failure. Power to the module fluctuated. Hardware failure: Sensor is dirty or dusty Sensors have a poor connection or failed Motor and/or cables have a poor connection or failed Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed Indexer board has a poor connection or failed Fuse
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12
Section 10-408
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Stepper motor (x) not present. x = Motor number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Communication failure with indexer board Corrective action 1. Verify the jumper placement is correct, if the indexer board was recently replaced. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure, if error continues.
Error codes
Error code: 5903

Motor command error, device (x) failed to respond. x = Motor number or indexer number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Motor or indexer board in the specified position has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5904

(x) homing failure. x = Motor name
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Homing sensor cable in the indicated position hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed Indexer board has a poor connection or failed Motor driver board has a poor connection or failed
Section 10-409
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 5905

Motor (x) is not initialized. x = Motor name
1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
The specified motor stopped due to a module stop.
Error code: 5906

Automatic Prime failed, affected mechanism disabled.
Probable cause Prime failed for one of the following: Wash zone Pre-Trigger Trigger dispense pumps Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 5000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 5000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 5907

Automatic Flush failed.
A flush operation failed due to a hardware failure or 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0229, inventory failure. 0304, or 2104 error codes. 2. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-410
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Command on motor (x) detected fluid or over travel. x = Motor number
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Hardware failure.
Error code: 5909

Stepper motor encoder (x) not present. x = Stepper Motor Encoder number
Probable cause Hardware failure: Communication failure with indexer board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 5910

Invalid absolute encoder (x) position value. x = Encoder name
Probable cause Hardware failure: Absolute encoder or cabling Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Optics error codes (6000-6999)

The Optics error code category includes error codes between 6000-6999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
NOTE: For corrective actions that involve hazardous activity refer to Hazards, page 8-1, for precautions you should take to minimize exposure and prevent personal injury or system damage. Hazard activities include but are not limited to: Replacing system probes
Section 10-411
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Handling reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens Removing physical obstructions Changing the lamp Removing system waste
Error code: 6000

Zero read detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Optics assembly CMIA optics board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 6050

Optics check failed, Run initialization canceled.
Probable cause Optics linearity and/or normalization values are not entered correctly on the Configure modules window. Hardware failure: CMIA reader Corrective action Update the configures module windows with the correct values from the optics assembly. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 6051

CMIA Optics board not responding.
Probable cause Communication or hardware failure. Hardware failure: Corrective action
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 6100

CMIA Optics board failed.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed
Section 10-412
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

POST passed, CMIA Optics board.
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the CMIA optics board. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error codes
Error code: 6102

Register read back failure, CMIA Optics board.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA Optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed Controller board in slot 14 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 6103

Optics timer interrupt failure, Controller board.
Probable cause Communication or hardware failure. Hardware failure: Controller board in slot 14 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action
Error code: 6200

POST failed, CMIA Optics board.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA Optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed
Section 10-413
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 6300

Register reset failure, CMIA Optics board.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any CMIA Optics board in slot 12 in the upper card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed Controller board in slot 14 in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 6500

DAQ board failure.
Error code: 6501

Optics system error, lamp failure.
Probable cause Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Water bath level is low. Hardware failure. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-414
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Optics system error, lamp intensity too high.
Probable cause Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 6503

Optics system error, lamp intensity too low.
Error code: 6504

Optics system error, transmittance above maximum range.
Section 10-415
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 6505

Photometer conversion error.
Error code: 6506

Cuvette integrity check failed on cuvette (x). x = Cuvette #
Probable cause Cuvette is dirty. Cuvette is damaged. Corrective action Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42.
Replace a cuvette (c 8000), page 9-104, Replace a cuvette (c 16000), page 9-183, Replace a cuvette segment (c 8000), page 9-108 or Replace a cuvette segment (c 16000), page 9-186.
Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Debris in the water bath incubator. Water or wash solutions are not aspirated or dispensed correctly into the reaction cuvettes. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-416
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, monochromatic check.
Probable cause Debris in the water bath incubator. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Error codes
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 6511

Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, monochromatic check.
Probable cause Debris in the water bath incubator. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-417
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 6512

Optics system warning, fluctuation detected, bichromatic check.
Probable cause Lamp in use for > 3 months. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. Debris in the water bath incubator. R2 pipettor is out of alignment. R2 probe is damaged. Lamp is not performing as expected. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Section 10-418
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause
Corrective action
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Reaction carousel is not aligned with the light hardware failure. path Optics assembly incorrectly grounded to chassis DC lamp power supply
Error code: 6513

Optics system failure, fluctuation above maximum range, bichromatic check.
Probable cause Lamp in use for > 3 months. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. Debris in the water bath incubator. R2 pipettor is out of alignment. R2 probe is damaged. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37.
Section 10-419
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Lamp is not performing as expected. Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to the pressure of the incoming water.
Corrective action Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19.
Bubbles in the water bath incubator due to a high Contact your Area Customer Support. gas content of the incoming water. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Reaction carousel is not aligned with the light hardware failure. path Optics assembly incorrectly grounded to chassis DC lamp power supply
Error code: 6516

Optics system failure, ADC above maximum range at lamp check.
Probable cause Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Temperature error codes (7000-7999)

The temperature error code category includes error codes between 7000-7999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
NOTE: For corrective actions that involve hazardous activity refer to Hazards, page 8-1, for precautions you should take to minimize
Section 10-420
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
exposure and prevent personal injury or system damage. Hazard activities include but are not limited to: Replacing system probes Handling reagents, calibrators, controls, and specimens Removing physical obstructions Changing the lamp Removing system waste
Error code: 7000

Temperature stability failed, channel (x). x = Channel number
Probable cause Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature within specifications. x = 28 (For Ambient): Room temperature is out of specification. For Pre-Trigger or Trigger x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Heater-specific tubing Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable has a poor connection For Process path: x = 4 (zone 1) x = 5 (zone 2) x = 8 (zone 3 ) x = 9 (zone 4) x = 12 (zone 5) x = 13 (zone 6) Hardware failure: Process path thermistor for the specific heater zone has a poor connection or failed Process path heater x = 7 (For Reagent cooler): Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Modify room temperature to be within specification. Corrective action
Section 10-421
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Hardware failure: Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor connection [i 2000/i 2000SR] Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR] For Wash Zone: x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone buffer heater has a poor connection Wash zone buffer heater For Wash Zone temperature sensor: Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 6 (probe 1) x = 10 (probe 2) x = 14 (probe 3) Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 18 (probe 1) x = 22 (probe 2) x = 26 (probe 3) Hardware failure: Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure Wash zone tubing sensor For all channels: Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Temperature controller board in the card cage hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 7001

Temperature failed channel (x). x = Channel number
Probable cause Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature within specifications. x = 28 (For Ambient): Room temperature is out of specification. Modify room temperature to be within specification. Corrective action
Section 10-422
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause For Pre-Trigger or Trigger: x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Heater-specific tubing Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable has a poor connection For Process path: x = 4 (zone 1) x = 5 (zone 2) x = 8 (zone 3) x = 9 (zone 4) x = 12 (zone 5) x = 13 (zone 6) Hardware failure: Process path thermistor for the specific heater zone has a poor connection or failed Process path heater x = 7 (For Reagent cooler): Hardware failure: Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor connection [i 2000/i 2000SR] Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR] For Wash Zone: x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone buffer heater has a poor connection Wash zone buffer heater For Wash Zone temperature sensor:
Section 10-423
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 6 (probe 1) x = 10 (probe 2 ) x = 14 (probe 3) Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 18 (probe 1) x = 22 (probe 2) x = 26 (probe 3 ) Hardware failure: Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure Wash zone tubing sensor For all channels: Hardware failure:
Error code: 7002

Channel (x) below minimum temperature. x = Channel number
Probable cause Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature within specifications. x = 28 (For Ambient): Room temperature is out of specification. For Pre-Trigger or Trigger: x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Heater-specific tubing Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable has a poor connection For Process path: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Modify room temperature to be within specification. Corrective action
Section 10-424
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause x = 4 (zone 1) x = 5 (zone 2) x = 8 (zone 3) x = 9 (zone 4) x = 12 (zone 5) x = 13 (zone 6) Hardware failure: Process path thermistor for the specific heater zone has a poor connection or failed Process path heater x = 7 (For Reagent cooler): Hardware failure: Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor connection [i 2000/i 2000SR] Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR] For Wash Zone: x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone buffer heater has a poor connection Wash zone buffer heater For Wash Zone temperature sensor: Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 6 (probe 1) x = 10 (probe 2) x = 14 (probe 3) Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 18 (probe 1) x = 22 (probe 2) x = 26 (probe 3) Hardware failure: Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure Wash zone tubing sensor
Section 10-425
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause For all channels: Hardware failure: Temperature controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 7003

Temperature alarm from channel (x), reading (y). x = Channel number y = Temperature in thousandths of degrees C
Probable cause Temporary out of range condition. Corrective action No corrective action is required. If the out of range condition continues, error code 7000 occurs.
Error code: 7004

(x) operation canceled, temperature failure. x = Mechanism name
Probable cause Hardware failure: Pre-trigger or trigger heater Wash zone heater Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13,for any 7000 category error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 7000 category error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Error code: 7005

Unable to process test, temperature not within range, channel (x). x = Channel number
Probable cause Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature within specifications. x = 28 (For Ambient): Room temperature is out of specification. For Pre-Trigger or Trigger: Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Corrective action
Section 10-426
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Heater-specific tubing Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable has a poor connection For Process path: x = 4 (zone 1) x = 5 (zone 2) x = 8 (zone 3) x = 9 (zone 4) x = 12 (zone 5) x = 13 (zone 6) Hardware failure: Process path thermistor for the specific heater zone has a poor connection or failed Process path heater x = 7 (For Reagent cooler): Hardware failure: Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor connection [i 2000/i 2000SR] Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR] For Wash Zone: x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone buffer heater has a poor connection Wash zone buffer heater For Wash Zone temperature sensor:
Section 10-427
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 6 (probe 1) x = 10 (probe 2) x = 14 (probe 3) Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 18 (probe 1) x = 22 (probe 2) x = 26 (probe 3) Hardware failure: Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure Wash zone tubing sensor For all channels: Hardware failure:
Error code: 7006

Channel (x) above maximum temperature. x = Channel number
Probable cause Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature within specifications. x = 28 (For Ambient): Room temperature is out of specification. For Pre-Trigger or Trigger: x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Heater-specific tubing Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable has a poor connection For Process path: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Corrective action
Section 10-428
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause x = 4 (zone 1) x = 5 (zone 2) x = 8 (zone 3) x = 9 (zone 4) x = 12 (zone 5) x = 13 (zone 6) Hardware failure: Process path thermistor for the specific heater zone has a poor connection or failed Process path heater x = 7 (For Reagent cooler): Hardware failure: Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor connection [i 2000/i 2000SR] Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR] For Wash Zone: x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone buffer heater has a poor connection Wash zone buffer heater For Wash Zone temperature sensor: Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 6 (probe 1) x = 10 (probe 2) x = 14 (probe 3) Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 18 (probe 1) x = 22 (probe 2) x = 26 (probe 3) Hardware failure: Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure Wash zone tubing sensor
Section 10-429
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause For all channels: Hardware failure:
Corrective action
Error code: 7007

Temperature failure channel (x), cannot reach Ready status. x = Channel number
Probable cause Specified heater is not able to maintain temperature within specifications. x = 28 (For Ambient): Room temperature is out of specification. For Pre-Trigger or Trigger: x = 17 (Pre-Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 16 (Trigger - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Heater-specific tubing Heater and/or heater thermistor specific cable has a poor connection For Process path: x = 4 (zone 1) x = 5 (zone 2) x = 8 (zone 3) x = 9 (zone 4) x = 12 (zone 5) x = 13 (zone 6) Hardware failure: Process path thermistor for the specific heater zone has a poor connection or failed Process path heater x = 7 (For Reagent cooler): Hardware failure: Refrigerator temperature cable has a poor connection [i 2000/i 2000SR] Refrigerator temperature sensor [i 2000/i 2000SR] For Wash Zone: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Corrective action
Section 10-430
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause x = 21 (Wash Zone 1 - i 2000/i 2000SR) x = 24 (Wash Zone 2 - i 2000/i 2000SR) Hardware failure: Thermistor cable for the specific wash zone buffer heater has a poor connection Wash zone buffer heater For Wash Zone temperature sensor: Wash Zone 1 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 6 (probe 1) x = 10 (probe 2) x = 14 (probe 3) Wash Zone 2 temperature sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR): x = 18 (probe 1) x = 22 (probe 2) x = 26 (probe 3) Hardware failure: Wash zone-specific temperature sensor failure Wash zone tubing sensor For all channels: Hardware failure:
Error code: 7008

Run request denied, temperature stability failure.
Probable cause User selected run after a temperature stability failure occurred. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-431
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 7100

Acknowledge command not received from Temperature Controller board.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Temperature controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 7102

Invalid response received from Temperature Controller board.
Error code: 7103

Temperature controller mode not correct.
Error code: 7104

Temperature Controller board not responding.
Section 10-432
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid Temperature Controller board response.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Temperature controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 7107

Unable to communicate to Temperature Controller board for channel (x). x = Channel number
Error code: 7108

Temperature Controller board not initialized.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Temperature controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed Power supply Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 7109

Temperature Controller board not communicating.
Error code: 7110

Reagent cooler control error detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Reagent cooler Heater cooler board
Section 10-433
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 7200

POST failed, Temperature Controller board.
Error code: 7201

POST passed, Temperature Controller board, version (x). x = Firmware revision
Probable cause Power on self tests (POST) passed on the temperature controller board. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 7501

Water bath temperature below minimum range.
Water in water bath is not circulating because the Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily system was idle for an extended period of time. Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. System was just powered on. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Water bath is filling after an extended idle time.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 7502

Water bath temperature above maximum range.
Probable cause Room temperature is too high. Hardware failure. Corrective action Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-434
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Temperature detector failure, water bath temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.
Probable cause System was just powered on. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Hardware failure.
Error code: 7504

Temperature detector failure, water bath temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.
Error code: 7505

Sample carousel temperature below minimum range.
Probable cause Room temperature is too low. Hardware failure. Corrective action Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 7506

Sample carousel temperature above maximum range.
Probable cause System was just powered on. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Close the carousel cover. Install the carousel cover. Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Carousel cover is open. Carousel cover is not installed. Room temperature is too high. Hardware failure.
Section 10-435
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 7507

Temperature detector failure, sample carousel temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.
Error code: 7508

Temperature detector failure, sample carousel temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 7509

Reagent 1 supply center temperature below minimum range.
Error code: 7510

Reagent 1 supply center temperature above maximum range.
Probable cause System was just powered on. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Close the carousel cover. Install the carousel cover. 1. Cover the reagent supply center. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes.
Carousel cover is open. Carousel cover is not installed. Numerous reagent cartridges were just loaded into the reagent supply center.
Section 10-436
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Room temperature is too high. Hardware failure.
Corrective action Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 7511

Temperature detector failure, reagent 1 supply center temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.
Error code: 7512

Temperature detector failure, reagent 1 supply center temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.
Probable cause System was just powered on. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within 5 minutes. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 7513

Reagent 2 supply center temperature below minimum range.
Error code: 7514

Reagent 2 supply center temperature above maximum range.
Probable cause System was just powered on. Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Close the carousel cover.
Carousel cover is open.
Section 10-437
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Carousel cover is not installed. Numerous reagent cartridges were just loaded into the reagent supply center.
Corrective action Install the carousel cover. 1. Cover the reagent supply center. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes.
Room temperature is too high. Hardware failure.
Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 7515

Temperature detector failure, reagent 2 supply center temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.
Error code: 7516

Temperature detector failure, reagent 2 supply center temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 7517

Internal temperature below minimum range.
Section 10-438
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Internal temperature above maximum range.
Error codes
Error code: 7519

Temperature detector failure, internal temperature exceeded lower detectable limit.
Error code: 7520

Temperature detector failure, internal temperature exceeded upper detectable limit.
Error code: 7521

Run request denied, water bath temperature is out of range.
Water in water bath is not circulating because the Perform daily maintenance procedure 6070 Daily system was idle for an extended period of time. Maintenance, page 9-22 or as-needed maintenance procedure 2134 Change Water Bath, page 9-38. System was just powered on. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19, to verify the temperature returns to specifications within five minutes. Modify room temperature to be within specifications. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Water bath is filling after an extended idle time.
Room temperature is too high. Hardware failure.
Section 10-439
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Computer hardware error codes (8000-8999)

The computer hardware error code category includes error codes between 8000-8999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Error code: 8000

Power supply AC failed.
Probable cause User cycled power to the processing module. Power fluctuated. Corrective action Restart the Processing module after the module power is restored. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information that describes the failure. Hardware failure: Power supply Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8001

Power supply over voltage.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Power supply Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-440
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Power supply under voltage.
Probable cause User cycled power to the processing module. Power fluctuated. Corrective action Restart the Processing module after the module power is restored. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information that describes the failure. Hardware failure: Power supply Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 8003

Power supply over temperature.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Power supply Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8004

UNICODE data could not be sent to (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause Hardware failure: Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8005

Communication error reading data from port (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause Hardware failure: Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-441
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8006

Unable to process tests, Processing Module (x). x = Description of failure
Probable cause User cycled power to the processing module. Power from the UPS fluctuated. Corrective action Restart the processing module after the module power is restored. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying the failure description. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: Power Supply
Error code: 8007

Board error (x). x = Description of failure
Probable cause Inadequate ventilation underneath instrument. Corrective action Remove any objects from underneath the processing module that may be blocking free flow of air to the card cage. Clean the card cage air filter. (Contact your Area Customer Support.) Close the card cage door. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Card cage filter is dirty. Card cage door is open. Hardware failure: Card cage fan DC Driver I/O board with fault LED lit Motor driver board
Error code: 8008

Motor driver over temperature.
Probable cause Inadequate ventilation underneath instrument. Corrective action Remove any objects from underneath the Processing module that might be blocking the free flow of air to the card cage. Clean the card cage air filter. (Contact your Area Customer Support.) Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Card cage filter is dirty. Hardware failure: Card cage fan DC Driver I/O board with fault LED lit Motor driver board
Section 10-442
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Power board fault condition detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Motor driver board DC driver I/O board Heater cooler board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Error code: 8010

RSH distribution board CPLD fault condition detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Cable from carrier transport board to RSH distribution board has poor connection or failed RSH distribution board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8011

RSH load/unload board LED fault condition detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: LEDs on RSH load/unload board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8012

RSH load/unload board sensor fault condition detected.
Probable cause Hardware failure: Sensors on RSH load/unload board Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-443
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8050

Unable to open (x) port for (y). x = Serial port (COM1 - COM10) y = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure. or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter For ARM: Hardware failure: Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor connection or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter For LAS: Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LAS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure. or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 8053

Failed opening CLI serial port.
Probable cause Serial port configuration. Hardware failure: LIS cables have a poor connection or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter Corrective action See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more information. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8054

CLI communication error.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-444
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to write (x) file to designated drive. x = File name
Probable cause Floppy disk is not in drive. Floppy disk is write protected. Floppy disk is not formatted. Floppy disk is defective. Software error Corrective action Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive. Ensure the write protect tab on the floppy disk is in the correct position. Format the floppy disk or use a disk that is already formatted. Use a new floppy disk. If not writing to a floppy disk when this error occurs, contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error codes
Hardware failure: Floppy drive Hard drive
Error code: 8101

Failure in compression of log file.
Probable cause Floppy disk is not in drive. Floppy disk is not formatted. Floppy disk is defective or is not blank. Corrective action Insert the floppy disk in the floppy drive. Format the floppy disk or use a disk that is already formatted. Use a new floppy disk.
Error code: 8102

ASCII data could not be sent to (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure. or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter For ARM: Corrective action
Section 10-445
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Hardware failure: Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor connection or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter For LAS: Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LAS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure. or failed Digiboard or External multiport serial adapter
Error code: 8103

Field (x) in section (y) truncated for printing. x = Field name y = Report section name
The data entered in the data entry box is too long to Print a screen image if a hard copy is required. print.
Error code: 8104

Print job for (x) canceled by the user. x = Report name
Probable cause User cancelled a print job. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 8105

A printer error has occurred.
Probable cause A printer error occurred. Corrective action Refer to the printer documentation for assistance.
Error code: 8107

Printer out of paper.
Probable cause Printer is out of paper. Printer is offline. Printer is not connected. Corrective action Add paper to the printer. Change the printer status to online. Connect the printer cable to the SCC printer port.
Section 10-446
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Printer status unavailable at this time.
Probable cause Printer is not available. Corrective action 1. Verify the printer is plugged in, on, and ready. 2. Verify the cable from the SCC to the printer is connected. 3. Refer to the printer documentation if printer is still unavailable.
Error codes
Error code: 8115

(x) printer not properly installed. x = Default printer name
Probable cause Configured printer is not installed properly or does not exist. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying the operation you were attempting to perform when this error occurred.
Error code: 8150

Invalid Host order, Sample ID (x) already exists. x = Sample ID
The system received an order from the host and the If this error occurs frequently without obvious order already exists. The new order from the host is explanation, check the function of the host interface. ignored by the system.
Error code: 8151

Invalid Host cancel, Sample ID (x) does not exist. x = Sample ID
If this error occurs frequently without obvious The system received a cancellation request from the host on a test order and the order does not exist explanation, check the function of the host interface. in the database. The cancellation request from the host is ignored by the system.
Section 10-447
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8152

Orders received for Sample ID (x) did not match the Sample ID sent to the Host. x = Sample ID
Probable cause The sample ID returned from the host did not match the sample ID queried for by the system because: The host is responding to a previous query, which Increase the host query timeout value. See has timed out on the system. Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. The host sent an order not requested by the system. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about communications. Corrective action
Error code: 8153

Invalid Host order, no quality control information for Assay (x) number (y). x = Assay name y = Assay number
The system received a QC order for an assay from Use the Control configuration screen to configure a the host but a control is not configured for the assay. control for the requested assay, and then download The order from the host is ignored by the system. the order from the host. See Configure a new single analyte control, page 2-176 or Configure a new multiconstituent control, page 2-179.
Error code: 8154

Invalid Host order for Sample ID (x), specified dilution for Assay number (y) not found. x = Sample ID y = Assay number
Probable cause The system received a test order from the host requesting an undefined dilution. The order from the host is ignored by the system. Corrective action Order a dilution available for the specified assay. Dilution Name is case sensitive, verify the host dilution name is exactly the same as the Dilution Name in the SCC.
Section 10-448
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid Host order for Sample ID (x), Assay number (y) not installed. x = Sample ID y = Assay number
Probable cause The system received a test order from the host requesting an assay that is not installed. The assay number is incorrectly defined in the host. Corrective action Install the requested assay. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. Correct the assay number in the host system.
Error codes
Error code: 8156

Error detected when parsing record (x) from (y). x = Record string or field string y = Remote system
Probable cause An error was detected when parsing an ASTM record received. The record may not utilize the delimiters correctly. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 8158

Required data (x) is missing from message received from (y). x = Component string y = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Section 10-449
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8159

Incoming frame from (x) is too long. <NAK> has been sent. x = Remote system
Probable cause Frame received exceeds ASTM length limit. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Corrective action
Error code: 8160

Field (x) received from (y) is not repeatable. x = Field name y = Remote system
Probable cause Data field in a record received contains an illegal repeat delimiter. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 8161

(x) sent illegal record type (y). The remainder of the message will be ignored. x = Remote system y = Record text
Probable cause Record received is an invalid record type not defined by the ASTM E1394 Standard. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. Corrective action
Section 10-450
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause For ARM: Software error.
Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 8162

(x) sent record (y) which contained an incorrect sequence number. x = Remote system y = Record received
Probable cause Message received contained a record which was out of sequence. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 8163

Host sent record (x) for a negative query response. x = Record received
Probable cause Record received from the host contains an invalid query response. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual.
Error code: 8165

(x) sent record (y) which contained an improper level transition. x = Remote system y = Record received
Probable cause Message received contained a record which caused an improper message hierarchy level transition. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. Corrective action
Section 10-451
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause For ARM: Software error.
Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 8166

Invalid ASTM record (x) in test order message. x = Record name
Test order message received from the host contains Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard an unacceptable ASTM record. Acceptable records Interface RS-232 Manual. in a test order message: Header, Patient, Test Order, Comment, and Terminator records.
Error code: 8169

Invalid message sent by (x). x = Remote system
Error code: 8170

Negative query response for Sample ID (x) received after a host query timeout. x = Sample ID
Probable cause Negative query response message contained a SID which was different than the one contained in the earlier issued query message. The host is responding to a previous query, which Increase the host query timeout value. See has timed out on the system. Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. A query message was never issued to the Host. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about communications. Corrective action
Section 10-452
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Host query time-out exceeded for Sample ID (x). x = Sample ID
Error codes
The host did not respond to the query message Increase the host query timeout value. See within the time period specified in the configuration. Configure host interface settings, page 2-6.
Error code: 8173

Message received from (x) did not end with a terminator record. x = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol. Hardware failure: Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any or failed hardware failure. For ARM: Hardware failure: Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor connection or failed Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 8174

Record (x) received from (y) did not terminate in a carriage return. x = Record string y = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message was received from the host. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual. Corrective action
Section 10-453
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Cabling was not properly shielded or was too long. For ARM: Software error.
Corrective action Use shorter or shielded cable.
Error code: 8175

Length of data (x) received from (y) exceeded specified maximum length. x = Component string y = Remote system
Error code: 8176

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a numeric value. x = Data field y = Remote system
Section 10-454
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Data field (x) received from (y) must be an alphanumeric value. x = Data field y = Remote system
Error codes
Error code: 8178

Data field (x) received from (y) must be an alpha value. x = Data field y = Remote system
Error code: 8179

Invalid host order for Sample ID (x), Assay number (y) status type does not exist. x = Sample ID y = Assay number
Probable cause The system received a test order from the host for an assay that is not installed. The assay is not installed. The assay number is incorrectly defined in the host. Install the requested assay. See Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. Correct the assay number in the host system. Corrective action
Section 10-455
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8180

Required field (x) was not populated by (y). x = Field name y = Remote system
Probable cause Mandatory ASTM field was blank in the message received. The remainder of the message is ignored by the system. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 8181

Invalid host order, incorrect birth date (y) for Sample ID (x). x = Sample ID y = Birth date
Probable cause The system received an order from the host containing a birth date later than the current date. Corrective action Correct the birth date in the host system, and then re-send the order.
Error code: 8182

Unsupported character received from the host in a record. Original: (x), Translated: (y). x = Input string y = Output string
Probable cause Record received from the host containing a character not supported in the ASI Code page. This character is translated as the copyright symbol ((c) or code 0169). Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual. Acceptable characters are defined in the ASI Code page for ARCHITECT table.
Section 10-456
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unsupported character sent to the host in a record. Original: (x), Translated: (y). x = Input string y = Output string
Probable cause Record sent to the host containing a character not supported in the ASI Code page. This character is translated as the registered mark ((c) or code 0174). Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual. Acceptable characters are defined in the ASI Code page for ARCHITECT table.
Error codes
Error code: 8184

Invalid message type sent by LAS.
Probable cause The LAS sent out an unknown message type. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector P4) has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 8185

Invalid <ACK> or <NAK> message length sent by LAS.
Probable cause The system received an invalid <ACK> or <NAK> message length by LAS. LAS sent incorrect message length. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 8186

Invalid Sample ID length sent by LAS. Sample ID length cannot be zero.
The system received a sample ID from the LAS with Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory a length of zero. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Section 10-457
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8187

Invalid Sample ID length sent by LAS. Sample ID length cannot be greater than 20 characters.
The system received a sample ID from the LAS with Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory a length greater than 20 characters. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8188

Invalid Sample ID sent by the LAS. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.
Probable cause The system received a sample ID from the LAS containing an invalid character. Corrective action Use valid characters only. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
Error code: 8189

Invalid message sent by LAS. Message exceeded maximum length.
The system received a message from the LAS that Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory exceeded the maximum allowable length. Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8190

Invalid SID (x) sent by LAS. x = Sample ID
Probable cause The system received an invalid sample ID from the LAS. Corrective action Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8191

Invalid message sent by LAS.
Probable cause System bar code configuration does not match bar code label. Hardware failure: Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector P4) has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your LAS vendor. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-458
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Invalid formatted bar code read: (x) sent by LAS for SID (y). x = Bar code read data y = Sample ID
Probable cause The system received an invalid SID from the LAS bar code reader. Corrective action Contact your LAS vendor.
Error codes
Error code: 8193

Invalid host order, incorrect draw date (x) for Sample ID (y). x = Sample draw date y = Sample ID
Probable cause Host order received containing a draw date later than the current date. Corrective action Correct the draw date in the host, then resend the order from the host.
Error code: 8194

Invalid Sample ID sent by the LIS. The Sample ID contains an invalid character.
Probable cause An invalid character was encoded in a host download or query response. Corrective action Use valid characters only. Valid characters are defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
Error code: 8250

Invalid frame number received from (x). <NAK> has been sent. x = Remote system
Probable cause Record received did not contain the frame in sequence. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Corrective action
Section 10-459
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8251

Received <NAK> for outgoing frame from (x). x = Remote destination name
Probable cause For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Corrective action
Error code: 8252

No terminating <CR> in received frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent. x = Remote system
Probable cause Frame received did not terminate in a carriage return. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Corrective action
Error code: 8253

Invalid checksum received in incoming frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent. x = Remote system
Section 10-460
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Restricted character in message text from (x). <NAK> has been sent. x = Remote system
Error codes
Error code: 8255

No terminating <LF> in received frame from (x). <NAK> has been sent. x = Remote system
Probable cause Frame received did not contain a terminating line feed. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Corrective action
Error code: 8256

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a printable string. x = Data field y = Remote system
Section 10-461
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8257

Data field (x) received from (y) must be a valid date. x = Data field y = Remote system
Error code: 8258

Record (x) was received in message from (y) prior to a required header record. x = Record string which was received as the first record of the message y = Remote system
Probable cause Message received without the Header record as the first record of the message. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 8259

Record received from (x) contained an invalid field (y). x = Remote system y = Field name
Section 10-462
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) sent an unsupported record type (y). The record will be ignored. x = Remote system y = Record received
Probable cause Record received was a valid ASTM format but is not supported by the system. For host: Unsupported record or message received from the host. For ARM: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual. Corrective action
Error codes
Error code: 8261

Negative query received for Sample ID (x), in Carrier/Position (y). x = Sample ID y = Carrier or CRSL and Position number
The sample ID has not been entered into the host Enter the sample ID and test order(s) for the sample computer. ID into the host computer. There are no ARCHITECT System test orders for Enter the test order(s) for the sample ID into the the specified sample ID. host computer. Host computer is not functioning properly. SID (sample identification) is truncated.
Create a patient order (single order), page 5-118.

See Sample ID is truncated, page 10-620.
Error code: 8262

Invalid Message ID sent by LAS.
Probable cause The system received an invalid message ID from the LAS. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Section 10-463
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8263

Invalid Recovery Type sent by LAS.
Probable cause The SCC is unable to re-initialize communication due to LAS message containing Invalid Recovery Type. Corrective action 1. Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See Verify LAS communications, page 10-714. 2. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor, if error continues.
Error code: 8264

Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Check sent by LAS.
Probable cause The system received an invalid Cyclical Redundancy Check. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8265

Invalid message sent by LAS. LAS message length mismatch.
The LAS sent a message to the system that did not Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory match what the system expected. The message is Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact ignored. your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8266

The <ACK> message sequence number sent by LAS does not match outgoing message sequence number.
The <ACK> message sequence number sent by the Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory LAS does not match the outgoing sequence Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact number. The message is ignored. Previous your LAS vendor. message is resent by the system.
Section 10-464
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The <NAK> message sequence number sent by LAS does not match outgoing message sequence number.
Error codes
Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory The system received a <NAK> sequence number that did not match the sequence number sent to the Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact LAS. The message is ignored. Previous message is your LAS vendor. resent by the system.
Error code: 8268

Received <NAK> from LAS for outgoing message.
Probable cause Not able to interpret message sent from the SCC. The message is ignored. Previous message is resent by the system. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8269

Message sequence number sent by LAS is out of order.
Probable cause The system received a sequence number from the LAS that does not match the expected sequence number. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8270

Unexpected <ACK> or <NAK> message sent by LAS.
Probable cause Unexpected <ACK> or <NAK> message sent by LAS. The message is ignored. Corrective action Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8271

Invalid checksum sent by LAS.
Probable cause The system received an invalid checksum. Corrective action Contact your LAS vendor.
Section 10-465
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8272

A message was received from the LAS before the previous message was complete.
A message was received from the LAS that was out Contact your LAS vendor. of order.
Error code: 8273

The LAS detected an internal error.
Probable cause The LAS detected an internal error. Corrective action Contact your LAS vendor.
Error code: 8274

Result for Sample ID (x), Assay Number (y) could not be transmitted to the Host. x = Sample ID y = Assay number
Probable cause Communication failure. Host is not configured for the expected result format. Corrective action Retransmit the result. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual.
Error code: 8350

Maximum number of query timeouts exceeded. Host query mode disabled.
Probable cause Three consecutive timeouts received while requesting orders from the host. The host port is disabled after this error. Host did not respond within the time period configured. Incorrect baud rate on host port. Increase host query timeout value. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more information. Corrective action
Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed
Section 10-466
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) connection cannot be established because of contention. x = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Both systems request a connection at the same time by sending an <ENQ> and this creates contention. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual. Corrective action
Error codes
Error code: 8353

Maximum retries exceeded for outgoing frame sent to (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause Unable to send frame to the remote system, because the remote system sends a negative acknowledgment <NAK> for the frame received. For host: Incorrectly formatted record or message received Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard from the host. Interface RS-232 Manual. Checksum is invalid. Frame is not received in sequence. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code. Corrective action
For ARM: Communication failure.
Section 10-467
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8354

(x) connection cannot be established, no response was received. x = Remote system
Probable cause For host: Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Incorrect baud rate on host port. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more information. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol. Corrective action
Message response is incorrectly defined for the host. Hardware failure:
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific code.
Error code: 8355

Time out on frame sent to (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause System timed out waiting for confirmation that the remote system received a frame. The connection is terminated by the system. For host: Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Message response is incorrectly defined for the host. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol. Corrective action
Section 10-468
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Hardware failure:
Corrective action
Error code: 8356

Query for sample ID (x) has been deleted. x = Sample ID
Probable cause Host is busy or not responding. Corrective action 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Host query option was turned off due to a Re-enable the Bidirectional host option in system previous communication failure or was turned off settings. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. by the user. Incorrect baud rate on host port. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more information. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed
Error code: 8357

Unable to transmit results to Host, Host access turned off.
Probable cause System attempted to transmit approved results but the host is turned off Host is not responding or is turned off. Bidirectional host option is turned off. Turn on the host interface and re-transmit the data. Re-enable the Bidirectional host option in system settings. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. Corrective action
Section 10-469
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8358

Time out on incoming frame from (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause System timed out waiting to receive a frame. The connection is terminated by the system. For host: Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Message response is incorrectly defined for the host. Hardware failure: Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol. Corrective action
Error code: 8359

Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS.
Probable cause The LAS did not respond within the designated time period. The connection is terminated by the system. LAS response time is too slow. Hardware failure: Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector P4) has a poor connection or failed Optimize the LAS response timeout value. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-470
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts and/or LAS <NAK> messages exceeded.
Probable cause The LAS did not respond to the outgoing message. Communication failed. The system received an invalid checksum. Corrective action Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
Error codes
Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.

Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual and/or contact your LAS vendor. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8361

LAS message communication error.
Probable cause System is unable to send a message to the LAS. The LAS did not respond to the outgoing message. The SCC is not configured correctly for the LAS settings. LAS response time is too slow. The system received an invalid checksum. Hardware failure: Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector P4) has a poor connection or failed Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See Verify LAS communications, page 10-714. Reconfigure the serial port parameter settings. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more information. Optimize the LAS response timeout value. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System Laboratory Automation System Interface Manual. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Error code: 8362

Time out on message sent from LAS.
Probable cause The connection between the SCC and the LAS was terminated. LAS not responding. Hardware failure: Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector P4) has a poor connection or failed Contact your LAS vendor. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action
Section 10-471
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8363

(x) connection cannot be established, remote system is busy. x = Remote system
Probable cause System attempted to connect with the remote system, but the remote system was busy and responded with a <NAK>. For host: Host is busy. For ARM: Communication failure. Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, a error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific error code. Wait for host system to become available. Corrective action
Error code: 8364

The maximum number of connection attempts has been reached for (x). x = Remote system
Probable cause Multiple failures while attempting to establish communication with the remote system. For host: Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Incorrect baud rate on host port. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Configure serial ports window, page 2-64, for more information. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol. Corrective action
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC (COM5, Connector P3) hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed Condition may be temporary, if so, no corrective action is required. If condition is not temporary, a error code 3901 occurs. Follow the corrective action for this specific error code.
Section 10-472
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(x) port disabled. x = Remote system
Probable cause The communication port is disabled due to multiple failures while attempting to establish communication with the remote system. For host: Host is busy or not responding. 1. Verify the host system is functional. 2. Re-enable host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Incorrect baud rate on host port. 1. Reconfigure the host baud rate. See Change the LIS serial port settings, page 2-31. 2. Re-enable the Bidirectional host option, after correcting the baud rate. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. Message response is incorrectly defined for the host. Hardware failure: Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about the ASTM protocol. Corrective action
Error codes
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Cable from LIS to SCC has a poor connection hardware failure. or failed Re-enable the Wash buffer transfer option for automatic buffer transfer, after the ARM is functional. See Configuration screen - System settings view, page 2-4. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
For ARM: ARM is busy or not responding
Hardware failure: Cable from ARM to SCC has a poor connection or failed
Section 10-473
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8458

Unable to accept test orders from Host.
Probable cause System has reached unreleased result capacity, regardless if you are connected to a host or not. This includes unreleased patient and QC results, test orders, and exceptions. Corrective action 1. If configured for host, release patient and QC results. 2. Delete or release exceptions or pending orders below 10% of maximum capacity. (Currently, maximum capacity is 6,500, therefore 90% = 5,850). Once unreleased patient results, QC results, and exceptions are released or deleted, the system accepts test orders from the host. NOTE: If not configured for a host, this message should be ignored.
Error code: 8459

Test orders may be downloaded from the Host.
Probable cause The number of unreleased patient and QC results, pending orders, and exceptions was reduced to a level that is 10 percent below the maximum capacity. Corrective action No corrective action is required. Test orders from the host are accepted if the feature is enabled in the system configuration.
Error code: 8460

Unable to process backup or restore request, host transfer in process.
Probable cause Backup or restore selected when data is transferring to the host. Corrective action Wait until all host transfers are complete, or Cancel result transmission, page 5-268, before performing the backup or restore procedure.
Error code: 8462

Negative query response for Sample ID (x), did not match the Sample ID sent to the host. x = Sample ID
Probable cause The sample ID returned from the host did not match the sample ID queried for by the system. The host is responding to a previous query, which Increase the host query timeout value. See has timed out on the system. Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. The host sent an order not requested by the system. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual for information about communications. Corrective action
Section 10-474
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to change configuration, host transmission is in process.
Probable cause Host transmission was in process while attempting to configure a new processing module. Corrective action Wait until all host transfers are complete, or Cancel result transmission, page 5-268, before configuring the new processing module.
Error codes
Error code: 8464

LAS initialization communication failed.
Communication failure between the SCC and the Re-initialize communication with the LAS. See LAS. Verify LAS communications, page 10-714. Serial port settings configured on SCC do not match LAS configured settings. LAS is inoperable. Hardware failure: Cable from LAS to SCC (COM6, Connector P4) has a poor connection or failed 1. Verify/reconfigure the serial port settings. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Contact your LAS vendor. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8465

Host transmission canceled by the user.
Probable cause User cancelled result transmission to the host. Corrective action Status message. No corrective action is required.
Error code: 8466

Incoming connection from (x) has been rejected, unreleased result capacity has been reached on the system. x = Remote system
Probable cause The number of unreleased results is at the maximum. Corrective action Release or delete unreleased patient results, quality control results, and exceptions currently on the system.
Error code: 8550

Unable to process test; power supply + 5 V failure.
Section 10-475
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 8551

Unable to process test; power supply - 15 V failure.
Error code: 8552

Error code: 8553

Error code: 8554

Unable to process test; power supply + 11.5 V failure.
Probable cause Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Hardware failure. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 8555

Section 10-476
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Software error codes (9000-9999)

The software error code category includes error codes between 9000-9999. If the corrective actions listed under the error code in question do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Error code: 9000

Call Abbott. Invalid command.
Error code: 9001

Call Abbott. Parameter (x) out of range. x = CLI parameter number
Section 10-477
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9002

Missing Failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), Test ID (y). x = Work order child type y = Test ID
Probable cause An operation could not be performed on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Previous hardware failure.
Error code: 9003

Missing Failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), not a test or a work order. x = Work order child type
Probable cause An operation could not be performed on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. Corrective action
Section 10-478
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Previous hardware failure.
Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Software error.
Error code: 9004

Call Abbott. CLI parser error.
Error code: 9005

Call Abbott. Destination module not found.
Error code: 9006

Call Abbott. Software error, CLI Parser error.
Section 10-479
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9007

Call Abbott. CLI Parser, unknown error.
Error code: 9008

Call Abbott. CLI Parser, stack overflow.
Error code: 9009

Concurrency of (x) exceeded. x = Mechanism name
Probable cause An operation could not be performed on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Corrective action
Section 10-480
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(y) preventing (x) from operating. x = Mechanism experiencing failure y = Mechanism causing failure
Probable cause An operation could not be performed on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any 0304 error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Corrective action
Error codes
Error code: 9011

Previous lockstep operations were not complete when new lockstep operation was scheduled.
Probable cause An operation could not be performed on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Corrective action
Section 10-481
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9012

Call Abbott. Unknown / pSOS+ error number (x) received by IT domain. x = Error message
Error code: 9013

Call Abbott. Invalid bit number (x). x = Bit number
Error code: 9014

Call Abbott. Invalid module type requested.
Error code: 9015

Call Abbott. Required command argument was not specified.
Error code: 9016

Call Abbott. Request denied, experiment not found.
Section 10-482
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. TCB Command, memory allocation error.
Error codes
Error code: 9018

Call Abbott. CLI command, incorrect increment/resolution parameter (x). x = Parameter number
Error code: 9019

Call Abbott. TCB command, invalid parameter (x). x = Count variable
Error code: 9020

Call Abbott. An Invalid OMS command sent to motor indexer device (x). x = Motor or indexer board number
Error code: 9021

Call Abbott. Invalid command for module.
Section 10-483
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9022

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense command on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 9023

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense board status bit on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 9026

Call Abbott. Digital I/O bit (x) interrupt in use. x = Bit number
Error code: 9027

Microparticle Dispersion Mechanism is active, unable to execute request.
Error code: 9028

Call Abbott. Digital I/O bit (x) interrupt not in use. x = Bit number
Section 10-484
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. A CLI command initiated while the instrument was in a status not permitting such commands.
Error codes
Error code: 9030

Call Abbott. Unknown error category number (x) received by IT domain. x = Error number
Error code: 9031

Call Abbott. Invalid liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 9032

Call Abbott. Invalid pressure monitor command on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 9033

Call Abbott. Invalid command sent to liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Section 10-485
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9034

Call Abbott. Sample Handler status does not allow execution of command.
Error code: 9035

Call Abbott. Invalid pressure monitor command on liquid level sense board (x). x = Board number for Pipettor, 0 = S (slot 10), 1 = R1 (slot 8), 2 = R2 (slot 6), 3 = STAT (slot 4)
Error code: 9037

Invalid Temperature Controller command.
Error code: 9038

Call Abbott. Invalid flow/clog detection channel (x). x = Channel number
Error code: 9039

Call Abbott. Invalid temperature channel (x). x = Temperature channel number
Section 10-486
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Mechanism command sent to invalid destination.
Error codes
Error code: 9041

Missing failure response detected in work hierarchy, child work type (x), parent work type (y). x = Child work type y = Parent work type
Probable cause Could not perform an operation on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Section 10-487
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9042

The lockstep operation detected a timing error.
Probable cause Could not perform an operation on the indicated device due to a conflict with another device. User selected stop while a module was in Running status. This message may occur several times. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the reason for the stop no longer exists. 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0304 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Look for any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 3. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes that occurred at the same time as the 0304 error code. 4. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. For STAT assays: Software error. Repeat the test, see Rerun a test, page 5-231. Corrective action
Error code: 9043

Call Abbott. Command error, not yet implemented.
Error code: 9044

Call Abbott. Set_module CLI command failed.
Section 10-488
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The lockstep operation detected a timing failure.
Error codes
Error code: 9046

Call Abbott. Motor command error on motor indexer device (x), parameter error. x = Motor number or indexer board number
Error code: 9047

Call Abbott. Motor command sent to motor (x) and it was still processing a previous command. x = Motor number
Section 10-489
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9048

Call Abbott. Motor mailbox error on motor indexer device (x). x = Motor number or indexer number
Error code: 9049

Call Abbott. Invalid context used to load the motor data table.
Error code: 9050

Call Abbott. Solenoid task not created, call back cannot be executed.
Error code: 9051

Call Abbott. O/S Error.
Error code: 9052

Call Abbott. O/S ISR Error.
Section 10-490
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Software error.
Error codes
Error code: 9054

File (x) not found. x = File name
Probable cause Incorrect information entered when installing an assay file or maintenance or diagnostic procedure. Software error, when the error occurs at the beginning of the procedure. Corrective action Enter the correct information.
Error code: 9055

Call Abbott. Invalid OMS command sent to motor indexer device (x). x = Motor number or indexer board number
Error code: 9056

Call Abbott. Invalid DEBUG command parameter.
Error code: 9057

Call Abbott. Run request denied, at least one module must be Running.
Section 10-491
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9058

The lockstep operation detected a timing error.
Error code: 9059

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), Carrier ID or Position are invalid. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9061

Discrepancy during report generation for parameter (x) in report (y). x = Parameter number y = Report name
Section 10-492
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Read interval of 0 msec. sent to data reduction.
Error codes
Error code: 9063

Reporting database access error, table (x). x = Database table write error
Probable cause For x = generic framework error: Software error. For x = any other error: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action
Error code: 9064

Call Abbott. Unable to print report.
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying the report you were attempting to print when the error occurred.
Error code: 9065

Unable to print report, field (x) data in (y) not present. x = Field name y = Report section name
Requested report is missing information required to Perform the procedure before attempting to print a generate the report. report.
Error code: 9066

Unable to generate report, error accessing data.
Probable cause Software reporting error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying the report you were attempting to print when the error occurred.
Section 10-493
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9068

Call Abbott. Unable to print (x), print job failed. x = Report name
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying the report you were attempting to print when the error occurred.
Error code: 9069

Call Abbott. Unknown error (x) detected in Instrument Control. x = Error number
Error code: 9070

Call Abbott. Error occurred while attempting Automatic Prime.
Error code: 9071

Run-time error encountered while running (x) procedure. x = Procedure name
Error code: 9073

Call Abbott. Software error, unable to open database. (No backup database exists)
Probable cause The database is corrupted. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Section 10-494
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Software error, unable to open database. (Backup database exists)
Probable cause The database is corrupted. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error codes
Error code: 9075

System backup or restore canceled, unknown file access failure for (x). x = Description of file
Probable cause Software error: Hard drive is full File system on hard drive is corrupt Hardware failure: Hard drive Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9076

Call Abbott. System backup canceled, system file (x) missing. x = Description of file
Error code: 9077

Unable to communicate to Sample Handler or Processing Module, error (x), (y). x = Architecture error number y = String associated with architecture error
Probable cause For x = 37: Processing module is powering on. Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Wait until the power on is complete and the module status is Stopped. Reconnect the Ethernet cable. See Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281. Corrective action
Section 10-495
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Probable cause Network hub is turned off.
Corrective action 1. Turn on the power switch to the network hub. 2. Cycle power to the processing module and to the sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Network hub power cord is disconnected.
1. Connect the power cord to the network hub and plug into a UPS or wall outlet. 2. Cycle power to the processing module and to the sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Network hub failure. Communication failure between the SCC and a processing module or sample handler. Hardware failure: For x = 82: Processing module is powering on. Communication failure between the SCC and a processing module or sample handler. Hardware failure:
Replace the network hub. See Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281. Cycle power to the processing module and to the sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Indexer board has a poor connection or failed. hardware failure. Wait until the power on is complete and the module status is Stopped. Cycle power to the processing module and to the sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12.
Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any Module controller board in the upper card cage hardware failure. has a poor connection or failed Sample handler controller board in the upper card cage has a poor connection or failed
For x = any other number: Processing module is powering on. Communication failure between the SCC and a processing module or sample handler. Hardware failure. Wait until the power on is complete and the module status is Stopped. Cycle power to the processing module and to the sample handler. See Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Please provide the error information displayed in the error message.
Section 10-496
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Run request denied, Sample Handler must be Ready.
Error codes
Error code: 9079

Unable to perform procedure, module (x) incorrect module type. x = Module number
Error code: 9080

Process Path Index response not received when expected. Attempting to initiate response.
Probable cause Software status message. Corrective action No corrective action is required.
Error code: 9081

Data archive failed, error (x). x = Error message
Probable cause CD disk is dirty CD disk is defective Hardware failure: CD drive Corrective action Clean disk. Refer to the CD cover for cleaning and handling procedures. Use a new disk. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9082

Call Abbott. Data archive failed, error writing data to hard drive.
Probable cause The C drive is out of disk space. Hardware failure: Hard drive Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-497
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9083

Call Abbott. Unknown c System System Error (x). x = Error code number/status
Hardware failure: CPU board DAQ board
Error code: 9084

Processing module received an invalid sample order from the SCC.
Error code: 9085

c System CPU software error.
Probable cause Hardware failure: CPU board has a poor connection or failed Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9086

Connection error between SCC and processing module.
Probable cause Power is turned off to the module. Processing module is powering on. Communication failure. Corrective action
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.

Wait until power on is complete and processing module status is Stopped.
Cycle power to the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-12, if the module stopped running as a result of the error.
Reconnect the Ethernet cable. See Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281. Turn on the power switch to the network hub.
Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Network hub is turned off.
Section 10-498
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Probable cause Network hub power cord is disconnected. Hardware failure: CPU board has a poor connection or failed
Corrective action Connect the power cord to the network hub and plug into a UPS or wall outlet. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9087

Communication error between SCC and processing module.
Probable cause Power is turned off to the module. Processing module is powering on. Communication failure. Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Network hub is turned off. Network hub power cord is disconnected. Hardware failure. Corrective action
Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.

Wait until power on is complete and processing module status is Stopped.
Reconnect the Ethernet cable. See Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281. Turn on the power switch to the network hub. Connect the power cord to the network hub and plug into a UPS or wall outlet. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9088

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid number (x). x = Solenoid number
Error code: 9089

Call Abbott. Invalid DC motor number (x). x = DC motor number
Section 10-499
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9090

Call Abbott. Invalid DC motor speed.
Error code: 9091

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid duty cycle value.
Error code: 9092

Call Abbott. Software error, unsolicited sample complete received by module (x). x = ID of the processing module with the software defect
Error code: 9093

Call Abbott. Unknown error exporting assay file (x). Error code (y). x = Assay number y = Error code
Probable cause Hardware failure: Floppy drive Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error while formatting or writing to the floppy disk. Use a new floppy disk.
Section 10-500
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Unknown assay file.
Error codes
Error code: 9095

Call Abbott. Reagent bottle timeout, response not received within 30 seconds of run initialize.
A new reagent supply center segment was loaded Scan the reagent carousel(s), page 5-84, prior to with fewer positions than the previous segment and initiating the run. a manual reagent scan was not performed prior to initiating the run. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9096

Error message received from c System (x). x = Error code number and statuses
Probable cause Low level informational message displaying the error number received from the c System processing module. Corrective action
Review message logs, page 10-13, for an error code that occurred at the same time as this message.
Error code: 9097

Call Abbott. Invalid optical read data received from c System module.
Section 10-501
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9098

Call Abbott. Unable to calculate result, optical read data not received from c System module.
Error code: 9099

Call Abbott. Excessive scheduling locksteps detected.
Probable cause Too many tests ordered for the carrier. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9100

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) Calibration failure, too many calibrators. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9101

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) Calibration failure, unknown math model. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-502
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Calibrator response for lot (x) has a value that is equal to or less than zero. x = Reagent lot number
Error codes
Error code: 9103

Call Abbott. Calculation error, divide by zero.
Error code: 9104

Call Abbott. Unable to calculate cutoff/index for Assay (x) number (y). x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9105

Call Abbott. Invalid variable in index formula for Assay (x) number (y). x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-503
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9107

Assay (x) Number (y) Calibration failure, memory allocation error. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9108

Call Abbott. Unable to perform scan, experiment reagent kit(s) exist.
Error code: 9109

Call Abbott. Reference Cal Curve for Assay number (x) with cal version (y) deleted, no assay exists. x = Assay number y = Calibration version
Error code: 9110

Call Abbott. (x) does not exist. x = Mechanism name
Section 10-504
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Module specified for the experiment reagent kit in position (x) does not exist. x = Reagent carousel position
Error codes
Error code: 9113

Call Abbott. Unable to process calibration, Reference Cal Curve missing.
Error code: 9200

Call Abbott. Duplicate reagent kit size code found in the system file for size code (x). x = Size code
Error code: 9201

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for reagent kit size maps.
Error code: 9202

Call Abbott. Parser error, value specified in the parser formula does not exist.
Section 10-505
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9203

Call Abbott. Unable to create reagent bottles, one of the lists has a zero length.
Error code: 9204

Call Abbott. Invalid bar code in position (x) on (y) carousel. x = Position in which the invalid bar code was detected. (1-25 for i System; A1 - D20 for c System) y = Location in which the invalid bar code was detected. (Inner, Middle, or Outer ring for i System; R1 or R2 for c System)
Error code: 9205

Call Abbott. No pack size exists for a scanned reagent kit with size code (x). x = Size code on the reagent kit
Section 10-506
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unrecognized bar code version or format in position (x) on (y) carousel. x = Position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected. (1-25 for i System; A1 - D20 for c System) y = Location in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected. (Inner, Middle, or Outer ring for i System; R1 or R2 for c System)
Probable cause For c System only: A reagent cartridge with an invalid ID or Abbott AEROSET (version 1) bar code was loaded. 1. Remove the label from the reagent. 2. Configure a reagent and reagent kit. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric c System), page 2-93, and Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System), page 2-94. 3. Manually assign a position for the reagent. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91. A user printed reagent bar code has invalid information for one of the parameters encoded into the bar code. For all systems: Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Recreate the bar code verifying all parameter specifications. See 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System), page 4-28. Corrective action
Error codes
Error code: 9207

Call Abbott. No reagent kits found.
Error code: 9208

Call Abbott. A no assay, load error, mismatch or bad master lot experiment reagent pack loaded.
Section 10-507
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9210

Position not defined for detergent B solution in the sample carousel.
Error code: 9211

Position not defined for ICT cleaning fluid in the sample carousel.
Position information was not sent from the SCC 1. Initiate a run (it is not necessary to have any to the module after cycling power to the module. orders). See Initiating or resuming sample processing, page 5-205. 2. Wait for the processing module status to change to Running. 3. Select the processing module graphic, and then select F6 - Stop. 4. Wait for the processing module status to change to Stopped, and then select F5 - Start-up. 5. Restart the desired procedure. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Section 10-508
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in the sample carousel.
Error codes
Error code: 9213

Position not defined for detergent B solution in R1 supply center.
Probable cause The solution was not configured in an onboard solution position for the reagent supply center. Corrective action Configure the solution into a position. See Change the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33 or Change the onboard solution options (c 16000), page 2-34
Error code: 9214

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in R1 supply center.
Probable cause The solution was not configured in an onboard solution position for the reagent supply center. Corrective action Configure the solution into a position. See Change the onboard solution options (c 8000), page 2-33 or Change the onboard solution options (c 16000), page 2-34.
Section 10-509
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9215

Position not defined for detergent A solution in R1 supply center.
Error code: 9216

Position not defined for detergent B solution in R2 supply center.
Error code: 9217

Position not defined for 0.5 percent acid wash solution in R2 supply center.
Error code: 9218

Position not defined for detergent A solution in R2 supply center.
Section 10-510
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Position not defined for water bath additive in R2 supply center.
Error codes
Unable to read segment ID bar code on reagent 1. Review message logs for error code 4006. carousel. 2. Perform the corrective action for this error code. Position information was not sent from the SCC 1. Initiate a run (it is not necessary to have any to the module after cycling power to the module. orders). See Initiating or resuming sample processing, page 5-205. 2. Wait for the processing module status to change to Running. 3. Select the processing module graphic, and then select F6 - Stop. 4. Wait for the processing module status to change to Stopped, and then select F5 - Start-up. 5. Restart the desired procedure. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9220

Position not defined for detergent A solution in the sample carousel.
Section 10-511
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9221

Unrecognized bar code version or format in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected. y = RSH section number
Error code: 9222

Call Abbott. Invalid bar code in the (x) reagent carrier position in section (y). x = Reagent carrier position in which the unrecognized bar code version was detected. y = RSH section number
Error code: 9223

Reagent kit is unavailable.
Error code: 9300

Call Abbott. Value required for Assay (x) parameter (y) is not specified. x = Assay name y = Assay parameter
Section 10-512
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Unable to delete assay (x), the assay is part of a loaded experiment. x = Assay name
Error codes
Error code: 9302

Call Abbott. Parameter out of range Assay number (x) status (y). x = Assay number y = Assay status
Error code: 9303

Call Abbott. Invalid value in unit formula for assay (x) number (y). x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9304

Assay (x) installation error, system software version not compatible. x = Assay name
Probable cause The assay can only be used with a later version of System software. The software must be upgraded before the assay can be run. The assay being imported can only be used with a later version of System software. Corrective action Install required system software. Contact your Area Customer Support. For Abbott assays install the assay from the ARCHITECT System Assay CD-ROM. For more information see Install or delete an assay file, page 2-214. For user-defined assays see Configuring user-defined assays, page 2-83.
Section 10-513
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9305

Call Abbott. Unable to delete assay, assay number (x) does not exist. x= Assay number
Error code: 9306

Call Abbott. No assays found.
Error code: 9307

Call Abbott. Calibration Curve specified in experiment already exists for lot number (x). x = Lot number
Error code: 9308

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), dilution protocol not defined for the assay. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Section 10-514
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), specified assay is not installed. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error codes
Error code: 9310

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. A required reagent does not exist for bottle type. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9311

Call Abbott. Syntax error detected in system file (x), section (y). x = File name y = Section where error occurred
Error code: 9312

Call Abbott. (x) procedure contains invalid inventory usage specification. x = Procedure name
Section 10-515
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9313

Call Abbott. Procedure (x) contains a range error. x = Procedure name
Error code: 9314

Call Abbott. No procedures found.
Error code: 9315

Call Abbott. Value required for calculated assay (x) number (y), is not specified. x = Name of the calculated assay y = Number of the calculated assay
Error code: 9320

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, sample volume out of range.
Error code: 9321

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, reagent volume out of range.
Section 10-516
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total sample volume out of range.
Error codes
Error code: 9323

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total R1 volume out of range.
Probable cause Previous level sense or hardware error. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000 or 5000 category error codes that occurred just prior to this message. 2. Perform the corrective action for the error code. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9324

Processing module received invalid assay parameters from the SCC, total R2 volume out of range.
Probable cause Previous level sense or hardware error. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 3000 or 5000 category error codes that occurred just prior to this message. 2. Perform the corrective action for the error code. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error code: 9325

Call Abbott. Unable to create retest rule (x), dilution(s) do not exist in DAT file. x = Dilution name
Section 10-517
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9326

Call Abbott. Unable to create (x), number of characters cannot exceed (y). x = Name of the panel or assay y = Maximum number of characters
Error code: 9327

Call Abbott. Unable to create (x), number (y). Assay number must be in the range 3000 to 3099. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9328

Call Abbott. Parameter specified for (x) was out of range. x = Name of component which contains the range parameter
Error code: 9400

Call Abbott, Sample Handler Run request denied, experiment exists. Use the run_exp CLI command.
Section 10-518
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to delete, specified reagent kit does not exist.
Probable cause FSR only. (Incorrect data typed when deleting the Buffer Run assay. Must enter SN and lot number from the Microparticle bottle.) Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error codes
Error code: 9402

Unable to execute CLI commands, insufficient access level.
Error code: 9403

Call Abbott. Wash Aspirate integrity compromised when initiating a wash aspirate from a non-park position.
Error code: 9404

Call Abbott. Toggle ARM transfer failed.
Error code: 9405

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier detected in aspiration area.
Section 10-519
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9406

Call Abbott. Invalid context used to load the DC motor solenoid data table.
Error code: 9410

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier detected on carrier positioner pocket (y) module (x). x = Processing module number y = Carrier positioner pocket
Error code: 9413

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier pick attempt failed.
Error code: 9414

Unable to execute CLI command, unexpected carrier detected.
Error code: 9418

Unable to execute CLI command, no carrier detected.
Section 10-520
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Module (x) is offline. x = Module number
Error codes
Error code: 9421

Module (x) has been reserved for execution. x = Module that has been reserved
Error code: 9422

Module (x) is executing a command and is unavailable. x = Module that is busy executing another command
Error code: 9424

Unable to execute CLI command, carrier verification failure detected.
Error code: 9451

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid device referenced.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-521
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9452

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid command received.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9453

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid parameter length.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9454

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid parameter 1 received.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9455

Unable to execute CLI command, invalid device position.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-522
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to execute CLI command, device not recognized.
Error codes
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9457

Unable to execute CLI command, unspecified command.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9458

Unable to execute CLI command, module not in correct status.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9459

Unable to execute CLI command, multiple commands.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-523
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9460

Unable to execute CLI command, device busy.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9461

Unable to execute CLI command, file error.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9462

Unable to execute CLI command, no sample handler order.
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9463

Unable to execute CLI command, sample present on sample handler.
Hardware failure.
Section 10-524
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Unable to execute CLI command, incomplete sample order.
Error codes
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9465

(x) error occurred while executing CLI command. x = Error code number/status
Hardware failure.
Error code: 9466

Unable to execute CLI command, carousel not homed.
Error code: 9467

Unable to execute CLI command, PM board communication error.
Section 10-525
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9468

Unable to execute CLI command, sample pipettor movement restricted.
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the sample pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9469

Unable to execute CLI command, (x) pipettor movement restricted. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the reagent 1 pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9470

Unable to execute CLI command, (x) pipettor movement restricted. x = Pipettor name
A physical interference is blocking the movement Look for and remove any physical obstruction. of the reagent 2 pipettor. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Error code: 9500

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay modules.
Error code: 9501

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay module configurations.
Section 10-526
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for assay module wedge maps.
Error codes
Error code: 9505

Call Abbott. Error parsing ALD system file for LLS Error default.
Error code: 9506

Call Abbott. Invalid parameter received by (x). x = Mechanism name
Error code: 9507

Call Abbott. Motor system file corrupt.
Error code: 9508

Call Abbott. Motor system file not found.
Section 10-527
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9509

Call Abbott. System file error, NA found in section (x). x = Keyword section header name
Error code: 9510

Call Abbott. Error parsing system file (x). x = File name
Error code: 9511

Call Abbott. Module (x) specified in this procedure does not exist in current system configuration. x = Module number
Error code: 9512

System backup failed, see Message History log.
Probable cause Backup failed while attempting to backup one or more individual files. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any 0162, 0237, 9075, or 9076 error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-528
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Reporting database error.
Error codes
Error code: 9514

Call Abbott. Duplicate configuration file entry in keyword section (x). x = Keyword section
Error code: 9515

Call Abbott. System Parameters.ini file not found or corrupt.
Error code: 9516

Call Abbott. Solenoid system file corrupt.
Error code: 9600

Call Abbott. Load request denied, module in load list (x) line (y) not configured for system. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Section 10-529
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9601

Call Abbott. Load request denied, experiment (x) already loaded. x = Experiment file name
Error code: 9602

Call Abbott. Experiment file error, no load list files found.
Error code: 9603

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), reagent kit not defined in experiment file. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9604

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), calibrator order type is inconsistent with other calibrators. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Section 10-530
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), first calibrator order missing for calibration. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error codes
Error code: 9606

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), module assignment required when reagent kit specified. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9607

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), selected carrier and position in use by another sample. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9608

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), location not specified for first calibrator. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Section 10-531
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9609

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), specified reagent kit is not valid for assay. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9610

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), missing a required calibrator order. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9611

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), calibrator order type invalid for the assay. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9612

Call Abbott. Load list (x) line (y), module or kit specified inconsistent with other calibrator orders x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Section 10-532
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Invalid Control order, assay not configured. Load list (x), line number (y). x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error codes
Error code: 9615

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), illegal kit location. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9616

Call Abbott. Load request denied, illegal kit location (x) in experiment file. x = Illegal reagent position
Error code: 9617

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), specified assay is invalid for module. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Section 10-533
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9618

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), number of replicates greater than 5. x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9619

Call Abbott. Invalid assay ordered on processing module in load list (x) line (y). x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9620

Call Abbott. Specified reagent pack invalid for the module specified in load list (x) line (y). x = Load list name y = Load list line number
Error code: 9621

Call Abbott. Load request denied, load list (x) line (y), number of replicates is 0. x = Load list name y = Load list line number.
Section 10-534
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Syntax error in file (x). x = File name
Probable cause For c System: Attempted to export an assay with a negative value defined for a normal or extreme range. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Corrective action Edit the normal or extreme range before exporting.
Error codes
For i System: Software error.
Error code: 9701

Call Abbott. Syntax error detected in assay file with assay number (x) and status (y). x = Assay number y = Assay status
Error code: 9702

Call Abbott. (x) procedure contains a syntax error. Refer to scripting log. x = Procedure name
Error code: 9703

Syntax error in formula.
Probable cause Calculated assay formula is incorrect. Corrective action Correct the formula for the Calculated assay. Ensure all selected assays are included in the assay formula.
Section 10-535
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9800

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error, not a quantitative assay. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9801

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration method specified. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9802

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration validity error specification. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9803

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Quantitative adjuster level already exists. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-536
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Duplicate parameter weighting term. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 9808

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid interpretation category. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9810

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Duplicate interpretation specification. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9811

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Calibrator adjusters have equal concentration. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-537
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9813

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid default dilution. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9814

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid calibration dilution. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9815

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Incorrect number of calibrator replicates. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9816

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Units do not match specifications. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-538
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Adjuster conc. does not match calibrator conc. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 9818

Call Abbott. File (x) installation error, checksum failure. x = File name
Probable cause For c System: Attempted to import an assay that was modified or corrupted on the floppy disk. Software error. Corrective action Re-export the assay from the original system and use the new file to repeat the import procedure. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
For i System: Software error.
Error code: 9819

Call Abbott. File (x) installation error, parameter specified in the file was out of range. x = File name
Linearity parameter (c System) in an imported file Edit the linearity parameters to be within is out of range. -999,999.0000 to 999,999.000 prior to exporting the assay file.
Section 10-539
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9821

Call Abbott. Lot number with a different reagent configuration exists. Cannot install lot (x). x = Lot number
Error code: 9822

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Assay with different result type already installed. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9823

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. No adjusters present for calibration type ADJUST. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9824

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. No calibrators present. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Section 10-540
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Not enough bottles in reagent kit. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error codes
Error code: 9826

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Invalid interpretation cutoff type. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9828

Call Abbott. Assay (x) number (y) installation error. Reagent kit size does not exist. x = Assay name y = Assay number
Error code: 9830

CPU firmware update failure (TFTP).
Section 10-541
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9831

DAQ firmware update failure (TFTP).
Error code: 9832

DAQ firmware update failure (handling main CPU).
Error code: 9833

DAQ firmware update failure (Data file format).
Error code: 9834

Call Abbott. Update of c System module CPU firmware did not complete successfully.
Error code: 9835

Call Abbott. Unable to perform automatic update of c System module CPU, missing file list.
Section 10-542
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Update of c System module DAQ firmware did not complete successfully.
Error codes
Error code: 9837

Call Abbott. Unable to perform automatic update of c System module DAQ, missing file list.
Error code: 9838

Call Abbott. CPU firmware configuration does not match application firmware.
Error code: 9900

Call Abbott. Exception number (x). System shutting down. Error data (y). x = Software architecture exception number y = Supplemental exception data provided with some software architecture exceptions
Probable cause SCC shutdown due to an error or corrupted file. Corrective action 1. Press ALT + PRINT SCREEN on the keyboard to obtain a printout of the specific information on the screen. 2. Power off the SCC, page 5-4. 3. Wait five minutes. 4. Power on the SCC, page 5-3. 5. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the processing module status is Stopped. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Section 10-543
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9901

Call Abbott. User access level error, unable to locate system file. General user and Admin access only.
Error code: 9902

Call Abbott. The server process is currently not running. Perform a shutdown and restart.
Probable cause SCC shutdown due to an error. Software error. Corrective action

Error code: 9903

Call Abbott. Server process is currently running. Perform a shutdown and restart.
Probable cause SCC shutdown due to an error. Software error. Corrective action

Error code: 9904

Call Abbott. O/S LLS/PM ISR Error.
Error code: 9905

Call Abbott. Invalid sample data received during data processing.
Section 10-544
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Call Abbott. Fatal Architecture Exception on SCC. The error has been logged. The application will now shutdown.
Probable cause SCC shutdown due to an error or corrupted file. Corrective action 1. Press ALT + PRINT SCREEN on the keyboard to obtain a printout of the specific information on the screen. 2. Power off the SCC, page 5-4. 3. Wait five minutes. 4. Power on the SCC, page 5-3. 5. Start up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13, when the processing module status is Stopped. Software error. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Error codes
Error code: 9907

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid ramp time value.
Error code: 9908

Call Abbott. Invalid solenoid ramp duty cycle value.
Error code: 9909

Call Abbott. Invalid scheduler input detected.
Section 10-545
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Error codes
Section 10
Error code: 9910

Call Abbott. Unable to process test, invalid carrier ID.
Section 10-546
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Observed problems
Observed problems provides information on problems that may occur with an ARCHITECT System, ARCHITECT c System, ARCHITECT i System, and ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module), and the corrective action steps you can follow to help resolve the problem. Observed problem topics include: Processing module observed problems (c System), page 10-547 Processing module observed problems (i System), page 10-560 Sample results observed problems (c System), page 10-562 Sample results observed problems (i System), page 10-575 Sample handler observed problems, page 10-607 SCC observed problems, page 10-609 Peripheral devices observed problems, page 10-626
If performing the corrective actions do not resolve the problem, contact your Area Customer Support representative at:
Processing module observed problems (c System)

Observed problems for the c System processing module include: 1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System), page 10-548 Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing the assay (c System), page 10-549 Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a reagent scan was performed (c System), page 10-549 Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System), page 10-550 Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System), page 10-551 Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System), page 10-552 High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System), page 10-552 ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak (c System), page 10-552 ICT probe leaks (c System), page 10-553
Section 10-547
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Lamp is not on (c System), page 10-553 Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System), page 10-554 Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise, page 10-554 No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System), page 10-555 Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System), page 10-555 No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System), page 10-556 Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System), page 10-556 Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System), page 10-556 Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System), page 10-557 Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System), page 10-557 Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System), page 10-558 Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System), page 10-558 Samples are loaded in the sample carousel, but are not processed (c System), page 10-559 Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System), page 10-559 Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System), page 10-560
1 mL wash solution syringe leaks (c System)

This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT c System.
Probable cause Syringe is not tightened at the check valve connection. Syringe plunger is damaged. Check valve is defective. Tubing is crimped or damaged. Corrective action Tighten the connection.
Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204. Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207.
Section 10-548
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Assay using the Factor calibration mode is disabled after importing the assay (c System)
Probable cause The Blank calibrator level is undefined after importing the assay. Corrective action 1. Access the Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view, page 2-67. 2. Select the assay from the Assays list, and then select F6 - Configure. The Configure assay parameters window General view displays. 3. Select the Calibration option. The Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view displays. 4. Select the Blank Calibrator level list button, and then select the desired option. 5. Enter the concentration for the Blank calibrator level. 6. Select the Volumes option. The Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Volumes view displays. 7. Enter the volumes for the Blank calibrator level. 8. Select the General option. The Configure assay parameters window General view displays. 9. Select the Assay availability list button, and then select the Enabled option. 10.Select Done to save your changes.
Bar coded reagents do not appear on the Reagent status screen after a reagent scan was performed (c System)
Probable cause Reagent bottle bar code label is dirty. Reagent bottle bar code label is damaged. Bar code reader window is dirty. Corrective action Clean the label. Load a new reagent kit. See Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85.
Section 10-549
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause A reagent cartridge with an invalid 1D (one dimensional) reagent bar code was loaded.
Corrective action 1. Remove the label from the reagent. 2. Configure a reagent and reagent kit. See Configure a user-defined reagent (photometric c System), page 2-93 and Configure a user-defined reagent kit (photometric - c System), page 2-94. 3. Assign a position for the reagent. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91. For information about valid 1D reagent bar codes, see 1D reagent bar code requirements (c System), page 4-28.
Bar code label on a 20 mL (bottle) cartridge is not Reposition the 20 mL bottle in the adapter so it facing the bar code reader. faces the outside of the reagent supply center. A communication failure occurred with the reagent bar code reader. Hardware failure.
Bubbles in ICT module tubing (c System)

Probable cause The ICT reference solution bottle is empty, but the weight platform failed to detect it. Corrective action 1. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve the weight platform failure. ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace correctly. the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Replace the ICT probe. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump.
ICT probe is damaged.
ICT check valves are not connected correctly. ICT check valves are not functioning.
Section 10-550
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause
Corrective action
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Reseat the 1 mL syringes. ICT reference solution pump are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or ICT reference solution pump are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204. Hardware failure: Solenoid Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Bubbles in sample/reagent probe tubing (c System)

Probable cause Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. Corrective action 1. Tighten the side and top tubing connections to the syringe body. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Probe tubing is damaged. Replace the tubing between the probe and the connector on top of the pipettor. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95 or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174. Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips. See Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed.
Hardware failure: Degasser Solenoid
Section 10-551
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Bubbles in the sample/reagent syringes (c System)

Probable cause Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. Corrective action 1. Tighten side and top tubing connections to the syringe body. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed. Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips. See Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure: Degasser Solenoid
High-concentration waste not aspirated from cuvettes (c System)

Probable cause Obstruction is present in the high-concentration waste nozzle. High-concentration waste pump poppet valve was installed incorrectly. Corrective action Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. Repeat Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231 and ensure the valve orientation is correct.
High-concentration waste pump poppet valve has Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), failed. page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes leak (c System)

Probable cause ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes are damaged. Corrective action Replace the ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump syringes that are damaged. See Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the syringe connections to the check valve or tubing ICT aspiration or ICT reference solution pump. are loose.
Section 10-552
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 ICT probe leaks (c System)

Observed problems
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the ICT probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Replace ICT probe. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
Lamp is not on (c System)

Probable cause Cable terminals were not securely connected to the terminal block when the lamp was replaced. Corrective action Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29, and ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in the terminal block. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29.
Lamp is out.
Section 10-553
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Liquid around the top of the cuvettes after washing (c System)

Probable cause Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. Corrective action 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Reagent probe is damaged. Reagent probe is out of alignment.
Replace the cuvette dry tip (c 8000), page 9-111 or Replace the cuvette dry tips (c 16000), page 9-189. Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-36 or 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-37. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Hardware failure.
Mixer is bent or is making an unexpected noise

Probable cause Mixer is installed incorrectly or is out of alignment and hitting the side of the cuvette. Corrective action
Replace the mixer (c 8000), page 9-114 or Replace the mixer (c 16000), page 9-192.
Section 10-554
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 No alarm when high-concentration waste is full (c System)
Probable cause Float switch cable has a poor connection. Corrective action Reconnect the float switch cable to the module and the high-concentration waste bottle. See Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-160 for the c 8000 processing module or Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-236 for the c 16000 processing module. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 6307 Check/Clean HC Waste Sensor, page 9-34.
Observed problems
Float switch is dirty. Float switch cable has failed.
Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-160 for the c 8000 processing module or Replace the float switch cable (c System optional component), page 9-236 for the c 16000 processing module. Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component), page 9-158 for the c 8000 processing module or Replace the high-concentration waste bottle (c System optional component), page 9-234 for the c 16000 processing module.
Float switch has failed.
Non-bar coded reagents not recognized (c System)

Probable cause A position was not assigned for the non-bar coded reagent. Corrective action Assign a position for the reagent. See Load non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-91.
Section 10-555
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
No water in reagent supply center 1 (c System)

Probable cause System DI water source is not functioning. Corrective action 1. Check the DI water system. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. 3. Check for water delivery to the reagent supply center. Cuvette wash pump poppet valve has failed.
Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Hardware failure: DI water cuvette wash Cuvette wash pump bellows
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate (c System)

Probable cause Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate. Corrective action
Sample/reagent probe is damaged/clogged (c System)

Probable cause Particulate matter in the sample is causing obstruction in the probe. Sample or reagent probe is damaged. Corrective action Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25. Replace the damaged probe. See Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85, Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164, Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88 or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167.
Section 10-556
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Sample/reagent probe tubing leaks (c System)

Observed problems
Sample or reagent pipettor tubing is damaged or Replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe stretched. tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171, Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95, or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174. Probe is obstructed. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25.
Sample/reagent probe leaks or drips (c System)

Probable cause Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed. Corrective action Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips. See Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224. Replace the tubing between the probe and the connector on top of the pipettor. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171, Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95, or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174. 1. Tighten the side and top tubing connections to the syringe body. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Probe wash poppet valve has failed.
Tubing connection to the syringe is loose.
Section 10-557
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Sample/reagent solenoid valve leaks (c System)

Probable cause Hardware failure: Tubing is damaged Solenoid valve Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Tubing connection to the solenoid valve is loose. Tighten the tubing connection at the solenoid valve.
Sample/reagent syringe leaks (c System)

Probable cause Tubing connection to the syringe is loose. Corrective action 1. Tighten side and top tubing connections to the syringe body. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38. Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed. Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips. See Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224.
O-ring is not seated correctly or is missing in the Reseat or replace the o-ring. See Replace sample incoming water line connection at the side of the or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe. syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224. Tubing connector is defective. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-558
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Samples are loaded in the sample carousel, but are not processed (c System)
Samples were loaded and scanned before orders 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access were created for the samples. indicator button. If the button is not illuminated, select the button to pause the sample carousel. 2. Open and close the sample carousel cover to rescan the carousel. Sample carousel cover sensor did not detect that 1. Verify the status of the sample carousel access the cover was closed. indicator button. If the button is not illuminated, select the button to pause the sample carousel. 2. Open and then firmly close the sample carousel cover. No bar code label on the sample tube. Tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. Place a bar code label on the sample tube. Place the tube in the carrier so the bar code is visible through the slot.
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. System bar code configuration does not match bar code label. Bar code label does not meet specifications. Edit the bar code configuration as required for the bar code label symbology. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32, for guidelines.
Solution/dried solution under bulk solution bottles (c System)

Probable cause Solution was spilled by the operator. Bulk solution bottle is damaged. Corrective action Clean the spill. Clean the spill, and then replace the bulk solution bottle. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33.
Wash valve failure occurred allowing solution and Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any water to flow back into the bottle. hardware failure.
Section 10-559
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Wash solution is not being used (level not falling over time) (c System)
Probable cause Wash solution filter is obstructed. Corrective action
Replace the wash solution filter (c 8000), page 9-136 or Replace the wash solution filter (c 16000), page 9-214.
Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Cuvette washer nozzle is obstructed. Hardware failure: Wash solution valve failure
Processing module observed problems (i System)

Observed problems for the i 2000 processing module include: 2050 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 10-560 Bar code read failure occurs after instrument has been powered off (i System), page 10-561 Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System), page 10-561 RV loader jams (i System), page 10-562 Wash buffer volume did not update (i System), page 10-562
2050 WZ Aspiration Test failure (i 2000/i 2000SR)

This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT i System.
Probable cause Temperature sensor connected to wrong probe tubing. Poor tubing connections to the wash zone. Incorrect tubing/sensor cable connections. Wash zone probe obstructed. Wash zone temperature sensor obstructed. Corrective action Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to the correct probe. Reconnect tubing to the affected probe(s) for the indicated wash zone. Reconnect the wash zone tubing/sensor cable to the correct probe. See Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248. See Replace the wash zone temperature tubing and sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-255.
Section 10-560
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause
Corrective action
Poor tubing connections to the vacuum vessels. Reseat the tubing connection at the vacuum valve of the vacuum vessel. Hardware failure: Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any DC driver I/O board in slot 7 in the lower card hardware failure. cage has a poor connection or failed Wash zone manifold valve failures Wash zone dispense pump motor failure
Bar code read failure occurs after instrument has been powered off (i System)
Probable cause Condensation is present on the inside lens of the reagent bar code reader due to temperature fluctuations in the reagent cooler. Corrective action Allow the reagent bar code reader to equilibrate to proper temperature when the processing module is powered on. NOTE: Allow 2 hours for the reagent bar code reader to return to normal and the condensation to clear before trying to run. Do not try to disassemble the bar code reader and clean the lens.
Black powder observed in reagent carousel area (i System)

Wearing of the brass wheel on the outer carousel is Replace the septum if black powder is visible on the occurring. reagent septum. If you only observe black powder in the reagent carousel area no corrective action is required. Wearing is expected and does not impact hardware or assay performance.
Section 10-561
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
RV loader jams (i System)

RVs (reaction vessels) have jammed in the RV 1. Remove the RV from the transport. loader and process path at the RV insertion point. NOTE: Use only a cotton swab(s) or plastic forceps. DO NOT use metal tools, which can damage the RV loader. 2. Use canned air or vacuum to remove any debris from the transport. 3. Perform a start up on the processing module. NOTE: If the RV cannot be removed with the processing module powered on, then power off the processing module. Manually rotate the RV wheel away from the jammed RV, and then follow steps 1, 2, and 3 above. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Wash buffer volume did not update (i System)

Probable cause The wash buffer reservoir was not filled to the top sensor when using the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory. Corrective action Load wash buffer until the wash buffer reservoir is full.
Sample results observed problems (c System)

Sample results observed problems for the c System include: A#1 Result flag, page 10-563 A#2 Result flag, page 10-565 All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100 mmol/L (c System), page 10-566 Controls out of range (c System), page 10-567 Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System), page 10-568 Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System), page 10-568
Section 10-562
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System), page 10-569 Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System), page 10-569 Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System), page 10-569 Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System), page 10-570 Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System), page 10-570 Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System), page 10-570 Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System), page 10-571 Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System), page 10-573 FLEX Result flag, page 10-575 PSHH Result flag, page 10-575
A#1 Result flag

Sample is lipemic.
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is damaged.
Section 10-563
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Lamp is not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty. Cuvette washer is not functioning properly.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new reagent(s). Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Section 10-564
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 A#2 Result flag

Observed problems
Sample is lipemic.
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent probe is damaged. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced.
Lamp is not performing as expected. Reagent is not performing as expected. Cuvettes are dirty.
Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Open new reagent(s). Perform 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42.
Section 10-565
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
All ICT results have similar values, Na = 140 / K = 4.0 / Cl = 100 mmol/L (c System)
ICT module o-rings are missing or are not seated Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT correctly. module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly. Finger tighten the probe to the ICT Module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Replace the ICT probe. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump.
ICT check valves are not connected correctly. ICT check valves are not functioning.
Section 10-566
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause
Corrective action
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Reseat the 1 mL syringes. ICT reference solution pump are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or ICT reference solution pump are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204.
Controls out of range (c System)

Controls are expired or have exceeded open vial Open new controls. stability. For information on multiconstituent control open vial stability, see the multiconstituent control package insert. Controls were stored improperly. Controls were improperly reconstituted. Open new controls. If controls require reconstitution verify condition of diluent, water, or pipettors. For information on multiconstituent control reconstitution, see the multiconstituent control package insert. A change to the system has occurred: New bulk solutions were loaded Component was replaced Instrument was calibrated 1. Verify bulk solutions were loaded correctly if new bulk solutions were recently loaded. 2. Verify components were replaced correctly if components were recently replaced. 3. Recalibrate the assay. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Wrong control lot was used. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. 1. Use the correct control lot for the established control ranges. 2. Establish new control ranges, as required, if a new lot of control was used. Scheduled maintenance is due. Calibration curve is not optimal. Assay parameter file has changed. Perform all required maintenance. Recalibrate the assay. 1. Update settings if they are incorrect. 2. If assay file is updated, recalibrate the assay. Cuvette washer is malfunctioning. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27.
For more information on troubleshooting to resolve this problem, see:
Section 10-567
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System), page 10-568 Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System), page 10-569 Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System), page 10-570 Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System), page 10-570 Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System), page 10-571 Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System), page 10-573
Depressed concentration - ICT results entire run (c System)

ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-42. > 15,000 samples). ICT module is not performing as expected. Dispense system is not performing correctly. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27.
Depressed concentration - ICT results single assay (c System)

Probable cause Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Corrective action Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 10-568
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Depressed concentration - K+ results single assay (c System)
Probable cause Cuvettes are dirty. Corrective action Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent, page 9-26.
Observed problems
Depressed concentration - photometric results entire run (c System)

Probable cause Dispense system is not performing correctly. Lamp was not seated correctly when replaced. Corrective action Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6016 Check Dispense Components, page 9-27. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Sample probe is damaged. Sample probe is out of alignment. Hardware failure: DAQ board Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Depressed concentration - photometric results single assay (c System)

Probable cause Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Calibration curve is not optimal. Reagent is not performing as expected. Corrective action Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Recalibrate the assay. 1. Open new reagent(s). 2. Recalibrate the reagent(s), if required.
Section 10-569
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Water bath temperature is too low.
Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature, page 9-40. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure if temperature is out of range.
Hardware failure
Elevated concentration - ICT results entire run (c System)

ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-42. >15,000 samples). ICT module is not performing as expected. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42.
Elevated concentration - ICT results single assay (c System)

ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-42. >15,000 samples). ICT module is not performing as expected. Hardware failure Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Elevated concentration - photometric results single assay (c System)

Probable cause Calibration curve is not optimal. Reagent is not performing as expected. Corrective action Recalibrate the assay. 1. Open new reagent(s). 2. Recalibrate the reagent(s), if required.
Section 10-570
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Water bath temperature is too high.
Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature, page 9-40. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure if temperature is out of range.
Sample or reagent carryover from a user-defined Perform sample and reagent carryover studies for assay occurred. any user-defined assay and create appropriate SmartWash definitions. Hardware failure Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Erratic results, poor precision - ICT results (c System)

Probable cause Scheduled maintenance is due. Corrective action Perform the scheduled maintenance.
Sample contains fibrin clots or particulate matter. 1. Examine samples for fibrin or other large particles. 2. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick or centrifuge samples. Sample was not collected and/or prepared correctly. 1. Follow the specimen collection and handling instructions in the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 2. Rerun the sample. 3. Source another sample if not resolved. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. ICT module o-rings are missing or not seated correctly. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Reseat or replace the o-rings. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194.
1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Reseat the 1 mL syringes. ICT reference solution pump are not seated correctly. 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump or in the Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 8000), page 9-126 or ICT reference solution pump are leaking. Replace the 1 mL syringes (c 16000), page 9-204. ICT module is expired or has exceeded time or Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 sample warranty (> 2 months after installation or Change ICT Module, page 9-42. >15,000 samples).
Section 10-571
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause ICT module is not performing as expected. ICT check valves are not connected correctly. ICT check valves are not functioning. ICT probe is not connected correctly. ICT aspiration tubing is not connected correctly.
Corrective action Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6309 Change ICT Module, page 9-42. Tighten the connections to the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump.
Finger tighten the ICT probe to the ICT module. Tighten the tubing connections at the top of the ICT module and at the top of the 1 mL syringes in the ICT aspiration pump. Replace the ICT probe. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. Reseat the connection. See Replace the ICT module or probe (c 8000), page 9-116 or Replace the ICT module or probe (c 16000), page 9-194. Perform weekly maintenance procedure 6023 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes, page 9-25. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. Replace the damaged probe. See Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85, Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164, Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88, or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167. Replace the ICT reference solution bottle. See Replace bulk solutions and update inventory (c System), page 5-33.
Black electrical connector for the ICT module is loose. Sample or reagent probe is partially obstructed. Sample probe is out of alignment. Sample or reagent probe is damaged.
ICT Reference Solution is not performing as expected.
ICT sample diluent is not performing as expected. 1. Open new cartridge of ICT sample diluent. 2. Recalibrate the ICT assays. Hardware failure: ICT aspiration tubing ICT aspiration pump Cuvette washer DAQ board AC/DC driver board Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-572
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Erratic results, poor precision - photometric results (c System)
Probable cause Scheduled maintenance is due. Corrective action Perform the scheduled maintenance.
Observed problems
Sample contains fibrin clots or particulate matter. 1. Examine samples for fibrin or other large particles. 2. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick or centrifuge samples. Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the sample. Sample was not collected and/or prepared correctly. Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample with a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. 1. Follow the specimen collection and handling instructions in the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet). 2. Rerun the sample. 3. Source another sample if not resolved. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Syringe seal(s) and/or o-ring have failed. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Replace the syringe o-ring and seal tips. See Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 8000), page 9-148 or Replace sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2 (c 16000), page 9-224. Tighten the tubing connections or replace the tubing. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171, Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95, or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174.
Probe tubing connections are loose or leaking.
Reagent probe tubing is discolored or contains precipitate. Probe tubing is damaged.
Replace the tubing between the probe and the connector on top of the pipettor. See Replace the sample probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-92, Replace the sample probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-171, Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 8000), page 9-95, or Replace the reagent probe tubing (c 16000), page 9-174. 1. Tighten the side and top tubing connections to the syringe body. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2132 Flush Water Lines, page 9-38.
Section 10-573
Tubing connection to the syringe is loose.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Sample or reagent probe is partially obstructed. Probe wash pump poppet valve has failed.
Debris is in the water bath incubator.
Bubbles are in the water bath incubator due to the Decrease the incoming DI water pressure to within pressure of the incoming water. specifications. See Electrical specifications and requirements, page 4-19. Bubbles are in the water bath incubator due to a Contact your Area Customer Support. high gas content. Sample probe is out of alignment. Sample or reagent probe is damaged. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-35. Replace the damaged probe. See Replace the sample probe (c 8000), page 9-85, Replace the sample probe (c 16000), page 9-164, Replace reagent probes (c 8000), page 9-88, or Replace reagent probes (c 16000), page 9-167. Repeat quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. Ensure the lamp is seated correctly against the lamp plate and in the housing. Ensure the lamp cables are secured by the screws in terminal block. Lamp is not performing as expected. Cuvette washer is not functioning properly. Perform quarterly maintenance procedure 1003 Change Lamp, page 9-29. 1. Perform monthly maintenance procedure 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles, page 9-27. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6052 Wash Cuvettes, page 9-40, and observe the cuvette washer nozzles for hanging drops or leaks. If drops or leaks are observed for the high-concentration waste nozzle, replace the high-concentration waste pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231. If drops or leaks are observed for any of the other nozzles, replace the cuvette wash pump poppet valve. See Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 8000), page 9-155 or Replace the pump poppet valve set (c 16000), page 9-231.
Section 10-574
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Cuvette dry tip is damaged. Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the reagent. Reagent is not performing as expected.
Corrective action
Remove all bubbles and foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick. 1. Open new reagent(s). 2. Recalibrate the reagent(s), if required.
Cuvettes are dirty. Cuvette segment screws are loose. Cuvette is damaged. Hardware failure: Mixer malfunction Cuvette Washer malfunction Optics DAQ board AC/DC driver board
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually, page 9-42. Tighten the cuvette segment screws with a screwdriver.
Replace a cuvette (c 8000), page 9-104 or Replace a cuvette (c 16000), page 9-183.
FLEX Result flag

Probable cause Sample concentration is high. Corrective action Evaluate the result before reporting. The sample can be diluted and rerun. For the dilution protocol, see the reagent manufacturer's assay-specific documentation (such as a package insert or reagent application sheet).
PSHH Result flag

The ICT sample run immediately before this sample Rerun the sample to verify there was no effect from had a concentration greater than the extreme the previous sample. range.
Sample results observed problems (i System)

Sample results observed problems for the i System include:
Section 10-575
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift (i System), page 10-576 Controls out of range (i System), page 10-577 Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System), page 10-578 Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System), page 10-581 Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System), page 10-582 Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System), page 10-587 Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System), page 10-590 Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System), page 10-592 Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System), page 10-594 Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System), page 10-599 Erratic assay results (i System), page 10-603
Calibration curves stable for less than 30 days - control drift (i System)
To minimize the frequency of calibration adopt one Control values for some assays are drifting out of the QC range. Under a combination of the following of the following options: operating conditions microparticles may adhere to the sides of the reagent bottle: A microparticle bottle with low testing frequency is used. Or Reagents are stored onboard. Or The instrument is in continuous run mode. Remove, on a daily basis, the assay specific microparticle bottle from the processing module and hand swirl to resuspend the adhered microparticles. Reposition the bottle. NOTE: You must be careful when moving and swirling the bottle so microparticles do not come in contact with the septum. Remove the assay specific reagent pack from the processing module at the completion of testing.
Section 10-576
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Controls out of range (i System)

Observed problems
Controls are expired or have exceeded open vial Open new controls. stability. For information on multiconstituent control open vial stability, see the multiconstituent control package insert. Controls were stored improperly. Controls were improperly reconstituted. Open new controls If controls require reconstitution verify condition of diluent, water, or pipettors. For information on multiconstituent control reconstitution, see the multiconstituent control package insert. A change to the system has occurred: New bulk solutions were loaded Component was replaced Instrument was calibrated 1. Verify bulk solutions were loaded correctly if new bulk solutions were recently loaded. 2. Verify components were replaced correctly if components were recently replaced. 3. Recalibrate the assay. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Wrong control lot was used. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. 1. Use the correct control lot for the established control ranges. 2. Establish new control ranges, as required, if a new lot of control was used. Scheduled maintenance is due. Calibration curve is not optimal. Perform all required maintenance. Recalibrate the assay.
For more information on troubleshooting to resolve this problem, see: Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System), page 10-582 Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System), page 10-587 Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System), page 10-594 Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System), page 10-599 Erratic assay results (i System), page 10-603
Section 10-577
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Depressed concentration - entire run, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System)
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Section 10-578
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Trigger solution was used instead of Concentrated Wash Buffer.
Corrective action 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 (i 2000/i 2000SR) to unload any wash buffer remaining in the buffer reservoir. 3. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system. 4. Rinse buffer reservoir with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water. 5. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water and then dry. 6. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared wash buffer. 7. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
Wash zone manifold is leaking.
1. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around wash manifold valves and/or fittings. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
Pipettor or wash zone manifold tubing connections are loose. Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or leaking.
Tighten the pipettor and/or wash zone manifold tubing connections. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269.
Bubbles are in wash buffer tubing.
Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248.
Section 10-579
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Wash zone probes are bent or damaged.
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248.
Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is inadequate.
1. Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed.
Probe is obstructed.
1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Hardware failure: Vortexer
Section 10-580
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Depressed concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System)
Probable cause Trigger Solution was used instead of Concentrated Wash Buffer. Corrective action 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 (i 2000/i 2000SR) to unload any wash buffer remaining in the buffer reservoir. 3. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system. 4. Rinse buffer reservoir with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water. 5. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water and then dry. 6. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared wash buffer. 7. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69 Wash zone manifold is leaking. 1. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around wash manifold valves and/or fittings. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed. Tubing connections are loose. Tubing is kinked. Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or leaking. Tighten the tubing connections. Contact your Area Customer Support if tubing needs to be replaced. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269 Bubbles are in wash buffer tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
Section 10-581
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248. Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is inadequate. 1. Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed. Hardware failure: Vortexer Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Depressed concentration - single point, direct assay, with decreased RLUs (i System)
Probable cause Reagent was stored incorrectly. Corrective action Use a reagent kit that was stored under the correct conditions. See the ARCHITECT assay-specific package insert. Remove all foam and bubbles from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick.
Bubbles or foam are on surface of reagent.
Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagent thoroughly before placing septums on the reagent bottle. NOTE: If brown microparticle build-up is observed on the septum, discard reagent. Reagent is contaminated. Load a new reagent kit.
Section 10-582
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause
Corrective action
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69. Trigger solution was used instead of Concentrated Wash Buffer. 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 (i 2000/i 2000SR) to unload any wash buffer remaining in the buffer reservoir. 3. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system. 4. Rinse buffer reservoir with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water. 5. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water and then dry. 6. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared wash buffer. 7. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
Section 10-583
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Pre-trigger or trigger sensor is cracked.
Corrective action Perform one of the replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
Bubbles are in tubing.
Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70
Tubing connections are loose. Tubing is kinked. Pre-trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate.
Tighten the tubing connections. Contact your Area Customer Support if tubing needs to be replaced. Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2004 Pre-Trigger Check, page 10-683 2005 Trigger Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed.
Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around wash manifold valves and/or fittings. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or leaking.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Section 10-584
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Corrective action Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed.
Probe is dirty or partially clogged.
1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe is damaged.
Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe is not positioned correctly.
Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68
Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the sample. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate.
Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 10-585
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Pipettor probes are not straight.
Corrective action 1. Perform pipettor diagnostic procedure 1155 Probe Straightness Test, page 10-671. 2. Replace the probe if the probe is not straight. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Syringe assembly or valve is leaking.
Check for salt crystals and/or liquid around all syringes and/or valve. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
Pipettor aspiration or dispense is insufficient.
Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2001 Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-682 2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR), page 10-684 2002 R1 Pipettor Check, page 10-682 2003 R2 Pipettor Check, page 10-682 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed.
R1 or R2 probe is obstructed.
1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe. See Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
R1 or R2 pipettor probe is not positioned correctly. Wash zone manifold is not properly seated on process path. Hardware failure: CMIA Optics reader Vortexer
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 or 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67. Contact your Area Customer Support. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-586
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Depressed concentration - single point, indirect assay, with increased RLUs (i System)
Probable cause Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the sample. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Sample cup or tube was not properly placed in the sample carrier or LAS carousel. Probe is not positioned correctly. Corrective action Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample using a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172. Reseat the sample cup or tube. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 R2 pipettor tubing connections are loose. R2 pipettor tubing connections are broken. Tighten all R2 pipettor tubing connections.
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240, if tubing connections are broken.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around the R2 syringe assembly or valve. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
R2 pipettor is not positioned correctly. R2 syringe assembly or valve is leaking.
Wash zone manifold is not properly seated on process path.
Contact your Area Customer Support.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70
Section 10-587
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Level sensor is not installed correctly.
Corrective action 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Trigger solution was used instead of Concentrated Wash Buffer.
1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 (i 2000/i 2000SR) to unload any wash buffer remaining in the buffer reservoir. 3. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system. 4. Rinse buffer reservoir with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water. 5. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water and then dry. 6. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared wash buffer. 7. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
Pre-trigger or trigger sensor is cracked.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the pre-trigger or trigger level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-267
Bubbles are in pre-trigger or trigger tubing.
Tubing connections are loose. Tubing is kinked.
Tighten the tubing connections. Contact your Area Customer Support if tubing needs to be replaced.
Section 10-588
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Pre-trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate.
Corrective action Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2004 Pre-Trigger Check, page 10-683 2005 Trigger Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed.
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed. Hardware failure: Vortexer Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-589
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Elevated concentration - entire run, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System)
Probable cause Trigger Solution was used instead of Concentrated Wash Buffer. Corrective action 1. Measure the pH of the prepared wash buffer. If it is not within the 7.0 to 7.6 range, go to Step 2. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2185 Wash Buffer Unload, page 9-70 (i 2000/i 2000SR) to unload any wash buffer remaining in the buffer reservoir. 3. Remove the buffer reservoir from the system. 4. Rinse buffer reservoir with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water. 5. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water and then dry. 6. Replace buffer reservoir, and then load prepared wash buffer. 7. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69 Wash zone manifold is leaking. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around wash manifold valves and/or fittings. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed. Wash buffer dispense is inadequate. Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or leaking. Tighten the pipettor and wash zone manifold tubing connections. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269 Bubbles are in wash buffer tubing. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2151 Prime Wash Zones, page 9-69
Section 10-590
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause
Corrective action
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed. Hardware failure: Vortexer Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-591
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Elevated concentration - entire run, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System)
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 for i 2000/i 2000SR.
Section 10-592
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Pipettor or wash zone manifold tubing connections are loose. Buffer level sensor assembly is cracked or leaking.
Tighten the pipettor and/or wash zone manifold tubing connections. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the buffer level sensor (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-269
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Section 10-593
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Corrective action Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Probe is obstructed.
1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Hardware failure: Vortexer
Elevated concentration - single point, direct assay, with increased RLUs (i System)
Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagent thoroughly before placing septums on the reagent bottle. NOTE: If brown microparticle build-up is observed on the septum, discard reagent. Reagent is contaminated. Load a new reagent kit.
Section 10-594
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Septums were not installed on the reagent bottles.
Corrective action 1. Discard the open reagent kit. 2. Load new reagents. 3. Ensure septums are properly installed.
Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57. 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Section 10-595
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Section 10-596
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in wash zone motor assembly.
Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Wash zone probes are bent or damaged.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Section 10-597
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Probe is dirty or partially clogged.
Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe is damaged.
R2 pipettor tubing connections are loose. R2 pipettor tubing connections are broken.
Tighten all R2 pipettor tubing connections.
Replace sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-244, if tubing connections are broken.
Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around the R2 syringe assembly or valve. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
R2 pipettor is out of alignment. R2 syringe assembly or valve is leaking.
Wash zone manifold is not properly seated on process path. Hardware failure: Vortexer
Section 10-598
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Elevated concentration - single point, indirect assay, with decreased RLUs (i System)
Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagents thoroughly before placing septums on the reagent bottle. NOTE: If brown microparticle build-up is observed on the septum, discard reagent. Reagent is contaminated. Load a new reagent kit. Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Section 10-599
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Pre-trigger or trigger sensors are cracked.
Section 10-600
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Pre-Trigger or trigger dispense is inadequate.
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in wash zone motor assembly.
Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Wash zone probes are bent or damaged.
Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248
Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer if insufficient volume is dispensed.
Section 10-601
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause Probe is dirty or partially clogged.
Corrective action 1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240
Probe is damaged.
Syringe assembly or valve is leaking.
Check for salt crystals and/or liquid on or around the R1 and R2 syringe assembly or valve. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
R1 or R2 probe has an obstruction.
1. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 and observe that pipettors dispense liquid and no leaks or bubbles are observed in tubing. 2. Replace the appropriate probe. See Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240.
Wash zone manifold is not properly seated on process path. Hardware failure: CMIA reader Vortexer
Section 10-602
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Erratic assay results (i System)

Probable cause Reagent was stored incorrectly. Corrective action Use a reagent kit that was stored under the correct conditions. See the ARCHITECT assay-specific package insert for reagent kit storage conditions. Remove all bubbles and foam from the surface of the reagent using a clean applicator stick.
Observed problems
Reagent was not properly mixed before loading. Mix the reagent thoroughly before placing septums on the reagent bottle. NOTE: If brown microparticle build-up is observed on the septum, discard reagent. Reagent is contaminated. Septums were not installed on the reagent bottles. Load a new reagent kit. 1. Discard the open reagent kit. 2. Load a new reagent. 3. Ensure septums are properly installed. Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions were loaded in 1. Rinse the floats with DI water, and then dry. the wrong positions or the tubing assemblies 2. Load new bottles of pre-trigger and trigger. were switched. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace pre-trigger and/or trigger solution and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-57 3. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger, page 9-70 Level sensor is not installed correctly. 1. Adjust the level sensor in the pre-trigger or trigger bottle so the arrow faces toward the front. When the level sensor is correctly installed, the electrical connector is on the right and the tubing is on the left. 2. Perform as-needed maintenance procedure 2130 Flush Fluids, page 9-69.
Section 10-603
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Section 10-604
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Wash zone probes are not properly seated in the Reseat the wash zone probes. Refer to one of the wash zone motor assembly. following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash zone probes are bent or damaged. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace the wash zone probe (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-248 Wash buffer dispense at the wash zones is inadequate. Perform the following precision diagnostic procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed. Sample was not collected and/or prepared correctly. 1. Follow the specimen collection and handling instructions in the ARCHITECT assay-specific package insert. 2. Rerun the sample. 3. Source another sample if not resolved. Sample volume in the sample cup or tube was inadequate. Place adequate sample in the cup or tube. See Sample volume requirements, page 5-172.
Section 10-605
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause
Corrective action
Sample contains fibrin clots or particulate matter. 1. Examine samples for fibrin or other large particles. 2. Remove fibrin clots with a clean applicator stick or centrifuge samples. Bubbles or foam are on the surface of the sample. Probe tip is bent or damaged. Remove all bubbles or foam from the sample with a clean disposable pipette or applicator stick. Replace the appropriate probe as required. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Pipettor probes are not straight. 1. Perform pipettor diagnostics procedure 1155 Probe Straightness Test, page 10-671. 2. Replace the probe if the probe is not straight. Perform one of the following replacement procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Replace sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 9-240 Probe is not positioned correctly. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration, page 9-65 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR processing module), page 9-68 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration, page 9-67 Water quality is poor. Syringe assemblies or valves are leaking. Ensure the water quality is Reagent Grade Type II water. Check for salt crystals and/or liquid around all syringes or valves. Contact your Area Customer Support if crystals or liquid are observed.
Section 10-606
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause
Corrective action
Wash buffer dispense of pipettors is inadequate. Perform precision diagnostic procedure 2001 Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-682, 2002 R1 Pipettor Check, page 10-682, 2003 R2 Pipettor Check, page 10-682, or 2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR), page 10-684. Contact your Area Customer Support if insufficient volume is dispensed. Hardware failure: Vortexer Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Sample handler observed problems

Observed problems for the sample handlers include: Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted, page 10-607 Sample handler will not go to Running status, page 10-608 Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a test (RSH), page 10-608 Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed, page 10-609
Section 10-607
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Power to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted

This problem may be observed for any sample handler on an ARCHITECT System.
Probable cause Main power source to the processing module(s) and sample handler is interrupted. Corrective action For systems with an RSH (robotic sample handler): 1. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708 2. Determine the cause of the power interruption and resolve. 3. Perform Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7. For systems with a SSH (standard sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler. 1. Determine the cause of the power interruption and resolve. 2. Perform Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
Sample handler will not go to Running status

This problem may be observed for any sample handler on an ARCHITECT System.
Probable cause Run was selected for the sample handler, but a hardware failure was not corrected from the last run. Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code.
Section 10-608
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Sample is not automatically re-aspirated after adding or rerunning a test (RSH)

This problem may be observed for the RSH (robotic sample handler) on an ARCHITECT System.
Probable cause The sample was removed from the RSH. The RSH status changed to Ready or Stopped before adding or rerunning a test. Corrective action Reinsert the carrier or tray. 1. Initiate or resume sample processing (RSH and SSH), page 5-206. 2. Reinsert the carrier or tray. The RSH is not configured to automatically reposition samples for retest. Different patient demographic information was entered when creating the order for additional tests. Change the automatic repositioning setting. See Change automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), page 2-28. 1. Delete and reorder the test, if the patient demographics were entered in error. NOTE: Do not enter patient demographic information when adding tests to a sample. See Add a test to a patient order, page 5-128. 2. Assign another sample ID to the order, if the sample is from a different patient. A different Sample manual dilution factor was entered when creating the order for additional tests. 1. Delete and reorder the test using the same manual dilution. 2. Assign another sample ID to the new dilution, if a different manual dilution is required. The option to not automatically re-aspirate from Reinsert the carrier or tray. the sample was selected when the confirmation message displayed after adding new tests for the sample. The same sample ID was found in one or more Specify the carrier/carousel ID and position for each aliquot loaded when using multiple aliquots of the carrier/carousel positions and the carrier/carousel position was not specified for the same sample ID. test order. The host computer sent an action code with the order that indicated to the SCC to create a new order instead of adding to an existing order. Refer to the ARCHITECT System Abbott Standard Interface RS-232 Manual.
Section 10-609
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Sample tubes in a carrier are scanned, but are not processed

This problem may be observed for the retest or standard sample handler on an ARCHITECT System.
Probable cause No bar code label on the sample tube. Tube is not correctly positioned in the carrier. Corrective action Place a bar code label on the sample tube. Place the tube in the carrier so the bar code is visible through the slot.
Sample tube bar code label is dirty or damaged. Clean the sample bar code label or replace if damaged. System bar code configuration does not match bar code label. Bar code label does not meet specifications. Edit the bar code configuration as required for the bar code label symbology. See Sample bar code label requirements, page 4-32, for guidelines.
SCC observed problems

Observed problems for the SCC (system control center) include:
Section 10-610
"&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte control name, page 10-611 All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or R2 checkbox on the Find options window, page 10-611 All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the Extra Bottle status, page 10-612 Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for results windows, page 10-612 Bi-directional host communication is not working, page 10-612 c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Stopped, page 10-613 c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Ready, page 10-613 c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but tests are not processing, page 10-613 C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report, page 10-614 Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message window), page 10-614 Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as expected, page 10-614 Gray screen displays during an archive, page 10-614
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full", page 10-615 Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed, page 10-615 Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online documentation, page 10-616 Keyboard fails to respond, page 10-617 LAS (laboratory automation system) communication - Unable to communicate, page 10-617 Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column, page 10-617 Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items, page 10-617 Many error messages are displayed, page 10-618 Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing message displays, page 10-618 Order Status report does not print all the codes, page 10-618 Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding, page 10-619 QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not print on the QC Analysis report, page 10-619 Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings time arrives, page 10-619 Result column does not sort as expected, page 10-620 Results did not display or print, page 10-620 Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception is not removed from the screen, page 10-620 Sample ID is truncated, page 10-620 SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen, page 10-621 Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance, page 10-621 Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly, page 10-621 Slow screen response, page 10-622 Software Architecture Exception 38 displays, page 10-622 Software Architecture Exception 50 displays, page 10-622 Tests remain in Pending Transmission status, page 10-623
Section 10-611
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped status, page 10-623 Tests remain in Scheduled status, page 10-623 Touchscreen monitor display is blank, page 10-624 Touchscreen monitor fails to respond, page 10-625 Unable to delete results, page 10-625 Unable to find specific patient or QC results, page 10-625 Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently, page 10-625 UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated, page 10-626
"&" character appears as an underline when defining a single analyte control name
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System.
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Do not use the "&" character when defining control names.
All reagent kits display after performing a search by selecting the R1 or R2 checkbox on the Find options window
Probable cause The R1 or R2 checkbox was selected on the Reagent status Find options window without entering a position in the Position data entry box. The R1 and R2 checkboxes are only functional if a position is entered, and they determine if the system searches in one or both carousels when searching for a specified position. Corrective action Enter a position in the Position data entry box before selecting the R1 or R2 checkboxes on the Reagent status Find options window.
All reagent kits display after performing a search for only kits with the Extra Bottle status
The option to find reagent kits with the Extra Bottle Select one other Reagent status checkbox along status using Reagent status Find options window is with Extra Bottle, and the system correctly finds not working correctly. reagent kits with either status.
Section 10-612
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Bay number and sample carousel position display on the Details for results windows
The original test order was run on the RSH and the No corrective action is required. retest order was run on the sample carousel.
Bi-directional host communication is not working

Probable cause Failure occurred with either the host or the SCC (system control center). Corrective action 1. Refer to the probable cause and corrective action for the error code observed. 2. Re-enable bi-directional host communications. See Configure host interface settings, page 2-6. 3. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Stopped

This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ci System or c System.
Probable cause Ethernet cable is not connected or has a poor connection. Corrective action 1. Verify the Ethernet cable is connected at the module and at the hub. See Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. NOTE: If this occurs on an integrated system, wait until all i 2000SR tests are complete before cycling the power. Ethernet hub is turned off. 1. Verify the Ethernet hub is turned on. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. NOTE: If this occurs on an integrated system, wait until all i 2000SR tests are complete before cycling the power. Software error.

NOTE: If this occurs on an integrated system, wait until all i 2000SR tests are complete before cycling the power.
Section 10-613
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen does not go to Ready

Probable cause With no tests processing, it may take up to one minute after pause is selected for the c System processing module to change from Running to Ready status. Corrective action No corrective action is required.
c System processing module status on Snapshot screen is Running, but tests are not processing
Probable cause Software error. Corrective action

NOTE: If this occurs on an integrated system, wait until all i 2000SR tests are complete before cycling the power.
C/P information is not printed on the Rerun list report

The C/P information does not print on the Rerun list View the C/P information on the Rerun status, Order status, or Sample status screen. report if you are using the robotic sample handler with the automatically reposition samples for retest option selected.
Section 10-614
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Dr Watson error, on tapisrv.exe (file name in middle of message window)

Probable cause Modem is not connected. Corrective action 1. Reseat the RS-232 cable connected from the modem to P2 connector on the SCC. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 3. Contact your Area Customer Support, if the modem will not be used, for instructions to change pcANYWHERE startup from automatic to manual. Modem is not turned on. 1. Turn on the modem. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5.
Error code column on the Exception status screen does not sort as expected
The Error code column sorts by an internal software Sort using a different column or use the Find error code number rather than by the visible error options window to search for a specific error code. code number. See Find a specific exception, page 5-296.
Gray screen displays during an archive

Probable cause Screen timeout is activated while an archive is in process. Corrective action No corrective action is required. Allow the archive to complete.
icwserver.exe error Message "Address space is full"

Probable cause Software error. Corrective action 1. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Section 10-615
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Intel Active Monitor System Alert! message is displayed

This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System when using the SCC Intel Active Monitor software to monitor voltage, fan speeds, and temperature status of the SCC.
Probable cause Voltage (x) has gone outside of its recommended range x = specific voltage Vents in the SCC have become blocked, restricting airflow to the fans. 1. Remove any obstacles preventing adequate airflow around the SCC. 2. Remove dust or foreign objects from vents. Hardware failure 1. Document the message displayed. 2. Select Close or select View Details and then Exit. You may continue to operate the system. 3. Create a system software backup, page 2-212. 4. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6004 Copy backup software, page 10-693. 5. If this message reoccurs, contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Fan (x) has stopped or slowed x = fan 1 or fan 2 An obstacle is preventing the SCC fan from spinning. Hardware failure Remove any objects obstructing the fan that prevent it from spinning. 1. Document the message displayed. 2. Select Close or select View Details and then Exit. You may continue to operate the system. 3. Create a system software backup, page 2-212. 4. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6004 Copy backup software, page 10-693. 5. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Your system has exceeded its recommended maximum temperature The SCC fan(s) have slowed or stopped. Remove any objects obstructing the fan that prevent it from spinning. Corrective action
Section 10-616
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause The SCC is in a location that is not allowing optimal airflow.
Corrective action Ensure there is proper airflow in and around your SCC. Ensure your SCC is not located near walls or in corners. If vents in the SCC become blocked, airflow to the fans may be restricted. Modify room temperature to be within specifications. See Environmental specifications and requirements, page 4-26. 1. Document the message displayed. 2. Select Close or select View Details and then Exit. You may continue to operate the system. 3. Create a system software backup, page 2-212. 4. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6004 Copy backup software, page 10-693. 5. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Room temperature is out of specifications.
Hardware failure
Internet Explorer Script Error displayed when using the online documentation
The Print button on the Help window was selected, Select No on the Internet Explorer Script Error and then the Close button was selected before the message. Print window displayed. Allow the print dialog window to display and complete the steps for printing prior to closing the Help window.
Keyboard fails to respond

Probable cause Keyboard cable is loose or disconnected. Corrective action 1. Reseat or reconnect the keyboard cable. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 3. Verify keyboard operation. Keyboard has failed.
Replace the keyboard, page 9-275.
Section 10-617
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
LAS (laboratory automation system) communication - Unable to communicate

Probable cause Cable from the LAS to the SCC (COM6, connector P4 has a poor connection). LAS is temporarily down. Corrective action Reseat the P4 cable. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710. Re-initialize communication. See Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
Maintenance history report prints with 00:00:00 in the Time column

Probable cause A Maintenance History report was printed for a procedure that had not been performed. Corrective action No corrective action is required. When the procedure has been performed, print the report. The time the procedure was performed appears on the report.
Maintenance log contains blank spaces for Daily Maintenance items

Probable cause A maintenance procedure was initiated on one day and completed the following day. Corrective action Avoid performing a maintenance procedure if it will not complete on the same day.
Many error messages are displayed

Some error conditions can generate a large number 1. Press and hold the Enter key on the keyboard of error messages. until all messages close. 2. Review recent messages in the Message history log. See Review message logs, page 10-13. NOTE: You must review messages to ensure you do not overlook a different error condition.
Section 10-618
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Non-system disk or disk error message displays or NTLDR is missing message displays
Probable cause A floppy disk is in the floppy drive during the powering on of the SCC. Corrective action Remove the floppy disk and follow the instructions on the screen.
Order Status report does not print all the codes

Probable cause More than three codes are associated with the order. The Order Status report prints up to three codes for each order. Corrective action Review the appropriate window for a listing of all codes: Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - single order view, page 5-159. Details for order (Order status) window - batch (bar coded) view, page 5-160. Details for order (Order status) window - batch (non-bar coded) view, page 5-161.
Progress indicator is blank and the software is not responding

Results/exceptions were released or deleted and No corrective action is required. the software did not remove them from the A progress indicator displays until the process is screen. complete. It may take up to 15 minutes. After the process is complete, results or exceptions no longer display on the screen. Previously released or deleted results/exceptions No corrective action is required. were selected for release or deletion. A progress indicator displays until the process is complete. It may take up to 15 minutes. After the process is complete results or exceptions no longer display on the screen. For additional information see Observed problem: Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception is not removed from the screen, page 10-620.
Section 10-619
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
QC data does not appear on the Levey-Jennings graph and does not print on the QC Analysis report
Probable cause Assay result units were changed. Or Module serial number was changed. Corrective action No corrective action is required. To capture all QC data print the QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61 prior to: Editing or configuring assay result units Editing or configuring the module serial number
Reagent and calibration curve stability expires when daylight savings time arrives
Probable cause Reagent and calibration stabilities are not tracked with daylight savings time transitions. Corrective action 1. Load a new reagent kit. See Load bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-85 or Replace non-bar coded reagents (c System), page 5-96. 2. Create a calibration order, page 6-12, for the assay.
Result column does not sort as expected

The result column sorts by interpretation. If a result No corrective action is required. does not have an interpretation, the data in the Do not sort by results if the results do not contain result column is not consistently sorted. interpretations.
Results did not display or print

When creating an order or adding a test(s) to an Create the order or add the test(s) by selecting both order, a calculated assay was selected without the constituent assays and the calculated assay. selecting the constituent assays. Constituent assay results that were processing Create a new patient order or add the test(s) by for a calculated assay order met the criteria for a selecting all tests desired for display or print. retest rule configured to run another assay.
Section 10-620
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Results or exceptions are deleted or released and the result or exception is not removed from the screen
Probable cause The time needed to update the information on the screen is longer than the time needed to delete or release the results from the database. Corrective action No corrective action is required. Select the Refresh button to update the information on the screen.
Sample ID is truncated
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT System when using codabar bar code labels that do not contain checksums. IMPORTANT: When using codabar bar code labels with checksums disabled, a SID (sample identification) may be truncated. For example, an actual SID of 123456 is shortened to 1234. When using variable SID lengths and a SID is truncated, a result(s) may be attached to an incorrect SID for which an order exists. To eliminate this: Enable checksums Or
Probable cause Bar code reader misinterprets bar code label.
Use fixed lengths SIDs

Corrective action Place tube in carrier so the bar code fills the width of the window. Use labels that meet guidelines. See Sample bar code label guidelines, page 4-33. Enable checksums. See Change the sample bar code settings for codabar, page 2-28.
SCC does not boot to the Snapshot screen

Probable cause Software error. Corrective action Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information specifying errors that were received. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
The database is corrupt.
Section 10-621
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Shutdown screen displays during concurrent maintenance

Probable cause Software error. Corrective action 1. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Shutdown screen displays unexpectedly

Probable cause Software error. Corrective action 1. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 2. Perform utilities diagnostic procedure 6009 Log Utilities, page 10-694 to collect system logs. 3. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Slow screen response

Probable cause Database is close to capacity. Corrective action Archive results or delete stored results.
Software Architecture Exception 38 displays

Probable cause Ethernet cable has a poor connection. Network hub is turned off. Corrective action Reconnect the Ethernet cable. See Replace the network hub and cables, page 9-281. 1. Turn on the power switch to the network hub. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Network hub power cord is disconnected. 1. Connect the power cord to the network hub and plug into a UPS or wall outlet. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. Hardware failure. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Section 10-622
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Software Architecture Exception 50 displays

Probable cause Software error Corrective action 1. Obtain a screen image of the software error, see Print a screen image, page 5-345. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 3. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Observed problems
Tests remain in Pending Transmission status

Probable cause Software error Corrective action 1. Reconfigure the host communication to off. See Cancel result transmission, page 5-268. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 3. Contact your Area Customer Support. Please provide information about the operation you were attempting to perform when the error occurred.
Tests remain in Running status and the module will not go to Stopped status
Probable cause Communication is lost between the SCC and the processing module. Corrective action
Tests remain in Scheduled status

Probable cause Software error. Corrective action

NOTE: Wait until all tests processing are complete before cycling the power.
c 8000 processing module specific:
Section 10-623
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Probable cause LLS (liquid level sense) error occurred with an onboard solution.
Corrective action
Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 8000), page 5-39 or Replace onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and update inventory (c 16000), page 5-41.
i 2000SR processing module specific:

After the sample bar code was read and before all Change the processing module status to Stopped tests were aspirated, one of the following occurred: to change the test status to Exception. Processing module was paused LAS became inoperable 1. Stop the processing module by performing one of the following: Press the stop key on the processing module keypad. Select the processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop. 2. Delete the exceptions, see Delete an exception, page 5-299. 3. Start up the processing module, seeStart up the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-13.
The message "The location (x) has a bar coded kit. Do you still want to assign this location?" displays when assigning a location for a non-bar coded reagent.
A bar coded reagent is in the position entered for 1. Locate an empty position. the non-bar coded reagent. 2. Enter this position for the non-bar coded reagent A bar coded reagent was removed but the reagent carousel was not rescanned to update the availability of the position entered. 1. Select OK to allow the system to assign this location for the non-bar coded reagent. 2. Verify the position is empty.
Touchscreen monitor display is blank

Probable cause Power was turned off to the monitor. Monitor power cable is unplugged. Monitor data cable is unplugged. Corrective action Power on the monitor. Plug in the monitor power cable. Plug in the monitor data cable. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710.
Section 10-624
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Monitor has failed. Hardware failure: Monitor port failure on CPU
Corrective action
Replace the touch-screen monitor, page 9-291

Touchscreen monitor fails to respond

Probable cause Touch-screen connector is loose or disconnected. Corrective action 1. Reseat or reconnect the touch-screen connector. See Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710. 2. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5. 3. Verify the touch-screen operation. Monitor has failed. Hardware failure: Monitor not calibrated
Replace the touch-screen monitor, page 9-291.

Unable to delete results

Results are being transmitted to the host. Result No corrective action is required. status is "Pending Transmission". Wait until transmission is complete, and then delete the results. Transmission was requested when the system is 1. Reconfigure the host communication to off. A configured for host communication but a host message displays. computer is not connected. Result status is 2. Select OK to clear results waiting to be sent to "Pending Transmission". the host, and then delete results. The host mode is set to collate and not all of the No corrective action is required. Release or delete results have been released. Result status is the associated SIDs, and then delete the result. "Pending Collation".
Unable to find specific patient or QC results

Probable cause The find was performed using time only and the time range spanned two days. Corrective action Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval.
Section 10-625
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
Undefined fields for assay parameters display and print differently

Probable cause Undefined fields for assay parameters may display as zero or are blank. Corrective action No corrective action is required.
UPS (uninterruptible power supply) is activated

Main power source to the processing module(s) and For system with an RSH (robotic sample handler): sample handler is interrupted. 1. Stop the sample handler by performing one of the following: Press the stop key on the sample handler keypad. Select the sample handler graphic on the Snapshot screen, and then select F6 - Stop. NOTE: You have a maximum of ten minutes to stop the RSH before losing backup power from the UPS. 2. Perform one of the following procedures: For i 2000/i 2000SR: Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708 3. Determine the cause of the power interruption and resolve. 4. Perform Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7. 5. For systems with a SSH (standard sample handler) or LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler: Determine the cause of the power interruption and resolve. Perform Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
Section 10-626
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Peripheral devices observed problems

Observed problems for ARCHITECT System peripheral devices are grouped by: ARCHITECT ARM observed problems, page 10-626 Printer observed problems, page 10-646
ARCHITECT ARM observed problems

Observed problems for the ARCHITECT ARM include: A to D timeout (ARM), page 10-628 ARM accessory is not functioning, page 10-628 ARM accessory is stopped, page 10-629 ARM decontamination mode aborted, page 10-629 ARM message not sent, page 10-630 Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-631 Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low conductivity) illuminated (ARM), page 10-632 Calibration check failure (ARM), page 10-633 Checksum failure (ARM), page 10-633 Communication timeout (ARM), page 10-634 Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM), page 10-635 Decontamination is in process (ARM), page 10-635 Flood condition (ARM), page 10-636 High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-637 Invalid ARM error code, page 10-638 Invalid ARM status code, page 10-639 Invalid format of ARM message "message string", page 10-640 Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-641 Meter handshaking failure (ARM), page 10-642 Motor stall (ARM), page 10-643 SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM), page 10-644 Reagent segments (c 16000), page 1-153
Section 10-627
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10
System flush is in process (ARM), page 10-645 Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646 Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM), page 10-646
A to D timeout (ARM)
This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory.
A temporary failure to receive data from the A to 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. D converter occurred. 2. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 3. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. Hardware failure: Main board Sensor board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
ARM accessory is not functioning

Probable cause A failure occurred on the ARM and cannot be corrected without a service call. Corrective action 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-628
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 ARM accessory is stopped

Probable cause The replace buffer key was not pressed after replacing a buffer container. Corrective action 1. Press replace buffer on the ARM keypad to bring the ARM to Ready status. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. The stop key on the ARM keypad was pressed. Hardware failure: Keypad Press the stop key, and then the start key on the ARM keypad. 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Observed problems
ARM decontamination mode aborted

Probable cause Decontamination procedure was stopped in mid-cycle. Corrective action 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 2. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 3. Flush the ARM, page 10-711. 4. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55. 5. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Section 10-629
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 ARM message not sent

Probable cause SCC cannot connect to the ARM.
Corrective action 1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710, and to the ARM. 2. Press the stop key, and then the start key on the ARM keypad. 3. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 4. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 5. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. 6. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, if error continues.
Move the RS-232 cable so it is not near the power EMF (electromagnetic fields) interference is affecting the RS-232 data cable because it is too cord. close to the power cord. Hardware failure: Main board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-630
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Buffer quality error indicator - up arrow (high conductivity) illuminated (ARM)

Probable cause Concentrated wash buffer is contaminated. Concentrated wash buffer was received frozen and not properly mixed before use. Corrective action
Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55.

Perform the following steps to mix the buffer: 1. Clean and dry a 3 inch (8 cm) magnetic stirrer. 2. Open the concentrated wash buffer container. 3. Place the magnetic stirrer into the concentrated wash buffer container. 4. Position the container onto the center of a magnetic stirrer with a top plate dimension of at least 7 inches by 7 inches (17.7 cm by 17.7 cm). 5. Adjust the mixing speed to the highest possible setting, and then mix for a minimum of 20 minutes. 6. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Hardware failure: Pump Conductivity sensor Sensor board Pressure sensor
1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-631
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Buffer quality error indicator - down arrow (low conductivity) illuminated (ARM)
Probable cause AxSYM buffer was placed on ARM instead of Concentrated Wash Buffer. Or Concentrated wash buffer is contaminated.
Corrective action 1. Remove the buffer container. 2. Rinse the float with Reagent Grade Type II or deionized water and then dry. 3. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55.
Concentrated wash buffer was frozen and not properly mixed before use.
Perform the following steps to mix the buffer: 1. Clean and dry a 3 inch (8 cm) magnetic stirrer. 2. Open the concentrated wash buffer container. 3. Place the magnetic stirrer into the concentrated wash buffer container. 4. Position the container onto the center of a magnetic stirrer with a top plate dimension of at least 7 inches by 7 inches (17.7 cm by 17.7 cm). 5. Adjust the mixing speed to the highest possible setting, and then mix for a minimum of 20 minutes. 6. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Hardware failure: Pump Conductivity sensor Sensor board Pressure sensor
Section 10-632
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Calibration check failure (ARM)

Probable cause Hardware failure: Main board Sensor board Corrective action 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Observed problems
Checksum failure (ARM)

Handshaking sequence failed between two circuit 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. boards. 2. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 3. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. Hardware failure: Main board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-633
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Communication timeout (ARM)

Probable cause ARM accessory is turned off.
Corrective action 1. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
SCC did not receive a response from the ARM.
1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710, and to the ARM. 2. Press the stop key, and then the start key on the ARM keypad. 3. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 4. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 5. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. 6. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, if error continues.
EMF (electromagnetic fields) interference is Move the RS-232 cable so it is not near the power affecting the RS-232 data cable because it is too cord. close to the power cord. Hardware failure: Main board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-634
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Concentrated wash buffer empty (ARM)

Probable cause Concentrated wash buffer container has less than 100 mL remaining. Corrective action 1. Replace concentrated wash buffer on the ARM (i System), page 5-55. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. Hardware failure: Wash buffer tubing assembly Sensor board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Observed problems
Decontamination is in process (ARM)

Probable cause ARM decontamination procedure is in process. Corrective action 1. Wait until ARM decontamination is complete. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Section 10-635
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Flood condition (ARM)

This problem may be observed on an ARCHITECT ARM accessory.
Probable cause
Corrective action
Fluid leaked from the concentrated wash buffer 1. Adjust the gravity drain waste tubing to ensure it container and the gravity drain tube is crimped or is not crimped and allows the waste to drain not properly positioned. freely. Shutdown was selected from the SCC (system Perform the following prior to shutting down the control center) while the ARM was in the process SCC: of filling the wash buffer reservoir. 1. Select the supply status button on the Snapshot screen. 2. Verify FILL IN PROGRESS does not display next to the wash buffer icon. If FILL IN PROGRESS displays wait until the process is complete and an update of the supplies has occurred. ARM fluidics system has an internal leak. Or Hardware failure: Flood detector Main board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-636
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
High outlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM)

Probable cause SCC (system control center) or processing module has closed the inlet valve causing the outgoing wash buffer pressure to exceed 15 psi (103 Kpa). Corrective action 1. Review message logs, page 10-13, for any error codes that occurred at the same time as this message. 2. View low level error messages, page 10-14, if you do not find any error codes. 3. Perform the corrective action for the specific error code. Hardware failure: Pressure sensor Sensor board Processing module 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-637
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Invalid ARM error code

Probable cause A communication problem has occurred.
Section 10-638
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Invalid ARM status code

Probable cause A communication problem has occurred. Corrective action 1. Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710, and to the ARM. 2. Press the stop key, and then the start key on the ARM keypad. 3. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 4. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 5. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. 6. Cycle power to the SCC, page 5-5, if error continues. Move the RS-232 cable so it is not near the power EMF (electromagnetic fields) interference is affecting the RS-232 data cable because it is too cord. close to the power cord. Hardware failure: Main board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Observed problems
Section 10-639
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Invalid format of ARM message "message string"

Probable cause A communication problem has occurred.
Section 10-640
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Low inlet pressure indicator illuminates (ARM)

External water supply pressure dropped below 8 Increase external water supply pressure. psi (55 Kpa) and 2.2 LPM flow rate. Tubing from the external water supply to the ARM 1. Correct pinch in tubing or replace tubing from is pinched. external water supply to the ARM. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. Hardware failure: Pressure sensor 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-641
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Meter handshaking failure (ARM)

Probable cause
Corrective action
Handshaking sequence failed between two circuit 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. boards. 2. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 3. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. Hardware failure: Main board Sensor board 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-642
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Motor stall (ARM)

Probable cause External water supply was turned off. Corrective action 1. Turn on the external water supply. 2. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 3. Disconnect the water inlet tubing. See ARM connectors (i System), page 1-113, for location of the tubing connection. 4. Hold the end of the tubing over a sink or container, and then press the connector at the end of the tubing until water flows out. 5. Flush the tubing for 2-3 minutes to ensure all air is cleared from the water system. 6. Release the connector at the end of the tubing, and then reconnect the tubing to the ARM. 7. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 8. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. External water supply is restricted. 1. Correct pinch in tubing or replace tubing from external water supply to the ARM. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60. External water supply pressure dropped below 8 Increase external water supply pressure. psi (55Kpa) and 2.2 LPM flow rate. Hardware failure: Internal tubing from valve block to pump Pump Stepper motor board Power supply valve block 1. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. 2. Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711, to manual while waiting for service assistance. 3. Prepare wash buffer (i System), page 5-51, as required. 4. Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Observed problems
Section 10-643
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 SCI (serial communication interface) process timeout (ARM)

Probable cause Temporary communication error in the ARM.
Corrective action 1. Power off the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 2. Power on and initialize the ARM (i System), page 5-20. 3. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Hardware failure: Main board Sensor board
Sensor cable disconnected (ARM)

Probable cause Sensor cable on the concentrated wash buffer tubing assembly is not properly connected. Corrective action 1. Reconnect the sensor cable from the concentrated wash buffer tubing assembly to the ARM. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Section 10-644
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Probable cause Tubing assembly is not calibrated.
Corrective action 1. Calibrate the ARM level sense, page 10-712. 2. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Hardware failure: Wash buffer tubing assembly Sensor board
System flush is in process (ARM)

Probable cause ARM flush procedure is in process. Corrective action 1. Wait until the flush procedure is complete. 2. Press the start key on the ARM keypad to bring the ARM to Ready status. 3. Initiate wash buffer transfer from the ARM (i System), page 5-60.
Section 10-645
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Temperature indicator illuminates (ARM)

Probable cause Temperature of the external water supply is not within the range 15-37C.
Corrective action 1. Adjust the temperature of the external water supply to be within the range 15-37C. 2. Contact your Area Customer Support if the temperature of the external water supply is within the range 15-37C.
Hardware failure: Temperature sensor Sensor board
Water quality error indicator illuminates (ARM)

Probable cause Water supply does not meet Reagent Grade Type II specification. Or Tubing from water supply is contaminated. Or External water supply is contaminated. Hardware failure: Inlet cell Valve 1 Valve block Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure. Corrective action 1. Correct the water quality or contamination problem with the external water supply. 2. Flush the ARM, page 10-711.
Printer observed problems

Observed printer problems include:
Section 10-646
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History Report, page 10-647 Print window displays behind the Help window, page 10-647 Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the online documentation, page 10-648 Print on reports is too light to read, page 10-648 Report will not print, page 10-648 Sample report does not print, page 10-649 Windows printer error displays, page 10-649
Incomplete comment printed on the Maintenance History Report

Probable cause The comment was more than 255 characters in length. Corrective action
Limit the comment length to 255 characters or view the comment on the Details for maintenance log The Details for maintenance log window allows you window. to enter 275 characters, but the Maintenance History Report only prints 255 characters.
Print window displays behind the Help window

The option Print the selected heading and all No corrective action is required. To print: subtopics was selected on the Print Topics window. 1. Minimize the Help window. 2. Select Print on the Print Window. 3. Select the ARCHITECT System Operations Manual icon to restore the Help window.
Section 10-647
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Observed problems
Section 10 Print is cut off at the bottom of the page when printing from the online documentation
Probable cause HTML functionality does not support page breaks.
Corrective action No corrective action is required. Compare the information on the printout to the information on the screen.
Print on reports is too light to read

Probable cause Printer cartridge is empty. Printer head is damaged. Corrective action Replace printer cartridge. Contact your Area Customer Support to resolve any hardware failure.
Report will not print

Report was initiated while a print screen request No corrective action is required. was printing. Wait until the print screen has printed to avoid having problems with printed reports. Printer is out of paper. Paper tray is open. Printer is disconnected or not powered on. Paper is jammed. Failed print job is in the printer queue. Add paper to the printer. Close the paper tray. Verify the printer is plugged in, on, and ready. Clear the paper jam. Select the Printer status icon on the Snapshot screen, and then delete the failed print job in the printer queue. Replace the printer cartridge.
Printer cartridge is damaged or heat stressed.
Section 10-648
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Sample report does not print

Probable cause The system is configured to print reports automatically and all tests associated with the sample are not complete or not released. Corrective action No corrective action is required. Access the Sample status screen to verify the status of all tests ordered for the sample. Wait until all tests are complete or released and the report will print.
Observed problems
Windows printer error displays

Probable cause Error occurred with the printer. Corrective action 1. Select Cancel on the Printers Folder message to respond to the printer error. NOTE: Do not select the Retry button. 2. Resolve the printer problem. 3. Reprint the report.
Section 10-649
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
System diagnostics
Diagnostic procedures allow you to check the status of assemblies and mechanisms in reaction to certain hardware malfunctions on your ARCHITECT System. The ARCHITECT System software provides a user-friendly interface for performing diagnostic activities. The Diagnostic screen displays the available diagnostic procedures. Once you initiate a procedure, step-by-step instructions walk you through its completion. System diagnostics topics include: Diagnostics screen, page 10-650 Provides a description of the software screens and windows associated with diagnostic activities and step-by-step instructions for performing related procedures. Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-657 Provides a description of all diagnostic procedures.
Diagnostics screen
From the Diagnostics screen you can initiate a diagnostic procedure. You can also access windows to view information for a procedure prior to performing it and print the Procedure report. The procedures display by module and by category (tab). Each tab on the screen displays the procedures available for the selected module.
Section 10-650
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 10.3: Diagnostics screen System diagnostics
For descriptions of these fields, see Diagnostics screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-131. To display this screen, see Access the Diagnostics screen, page 10-651.
Related procedures... View diagnostic procedure information, page 10-652

Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653 Print a Procedure report, page 5-341
Access the Diagnostics screen

Perform this procedure to display the Diagnostics screen.
To access the Diagnostics screen: Select System from the menu bar, and then select Diagnostics. The Diagnostics screen displays with the Reaction Mechanisms tab selected.
Section 10-651
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-657
Procedures - Diagnostics screen

Procedures you can perform from the Diagnostics screen and its related windows include: View diagnostic procedure information, page 10-652 Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653 Print a Procedure report, page 5-341
View diagnostic procedure information

Perform this procedure to display the Version details for procedure (Diagnostics) window. From this window you can view information for a diagnostic procedure prior to performing it. This information includes the version number, required module status, and required user access level.

To view diagnostic procedure information: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Diagnostics screen. The diagnostic procedures for the selected module display on the Reaction Mechanisms tab. 2. Select a different tab to display the diagnostic procedures for that category. (optional) The diagnostic procedures for the selected category display. 3. Select the desired procedure from the DIAGNOSTICS PROCEDURES box, and then select F6 - Version. The Version details for procedure window displays.

Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window, page 10-656 Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-657
Section 10-652
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 Perform a diagnostic procedure

Perform this procedure to: Install assays Install procedures Verify component replacement procedures Diagnose hardware malfunctions System diagnostics
NOTE: Before you perform a specific procedure, be sure you are familiar with the purpose of the procedure and are aware of the required materials and module statuses. CAUTION: Moving Parts. Diagnostic procedures may expose operators to moving parts that can potentially cause personal injury. Untrained operators should not perform these procedures.

Procedure dependent Procedure dependent Procedure dependent
To perform a diagnostic procedure: 1. Select the desired Module option on the Diagnostics screen. The diagnostic procedures for the selected module display on the Reaction Mechanisms tab. 2. Select a different tab to display the diagnostic procedures for that category. (optional) 3. Select the desired procedure from the DIAGNOSTICS PROCEDURES list, and then select F5 - Perform. A confirmation message displays. 4. Select OK to perform the procedure. The Diagnostic perform window displays. A description of the procedure displays in the INSTRUCTIONS box.
Section 10-653
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
5. Select Proceed, and then follow the instructions in the INSTRUCTIONS box. You are prompted to enter information if the procedure requires additional data. 6. Enter the required information in the User input data entry box, and then select Continue.
7. Select Activity to view the progress of the procedure. (optional) The activity of the module displays in the Activity list. To return to the Result list, select Results.
Section 10-654
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
8. Select Print to print the Procedure report. (optional) 9. Select Done to return to the Diagnostics screen.

Diagnostic perform window, page 10-655 Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-657
Windows - Diagnostic screen

Windows you can access from the Diagnostic screen include: Diagnostic perform window, page 10-655 Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window, page 10-656
Diagnostic perform window

From the Diagnostic perform window you can initiate a procedure. NOTE: The display of the Diagnostic perform window is dependent on the selected module, category, and procedure.
Section 10-655
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
Figure 10.4: Diagnostic perform window
For descriptions of these fields, see Diagnostic perform window field descriptions, page Appendix E-132.
Related procedures... Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window

From the Version details for procedure window you can view information for diagnostic procedures such as: Procedure category and name Current version Required module status Required user access level
Section 10-656
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure 10.5: Version details for procedure window System diagnostics
For descriptions of these fields, see Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-133.
Related procedures... View diagnostic procedure information, page 10-652
Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions

Diagnostic procedures are grouped by module type, and then by category. Each category is represented by a tab on the Diagnostics screen. Diagnostic categories/procedures by module type include: Processing module - the type of processing module determines the categories and related procedures that are available. c System processing module diagnostic categories, page 10-658 i 2000/i 2000SR System processing module diagnostic categories, page 10-667
Sample handler - the type of sample handler determines the categories and related procedures that are available. RSH diagnostic categories, page 10-684 SSH diagnostic categories, page 10-688 LAS carousel sample handler diagnostic categories (i 2000), page 10-691
SCC diagnostic categories, page 10-693
Section 10-657
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
c System processing module diagnostic categories

Diagnostic procedures for the c System processing module are grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in the following categories: Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-658 Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-659 Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-660 Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-661 Module diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-662 Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing modules), page 10-663 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-663 Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-664 Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-665 Precision diagnostics description (c System processing module), page 10-666
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (c System processing module)

One reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure, 3126 Mixer Vibration Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing a reaction mechanism component or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with reaction mechanisms. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653.
Section 10-658
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3126 Mixer Vibration Test Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test the vibration function of Mixer 1 and 2 at low and high frequencies.
Pipettor diagnostics description (c System processing module)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing pipettor components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with pipettors: 1151 Probe Alignment Test, page 10-659 1161 Probe Move, page 10-660 5405 Crash Sensor Test, page 10-660
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 1151 Probe Alignment Test Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the probe to individual locations, allowing visual observation of the probe position in the wash cup and carousel positions.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Sample cups Reagent cartridges Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. Sample carrier (RSH) Sample tube (LAS) Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 10-659
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
1161 Probe Move Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the sample pipettor to the sample carousel and the reagent pipettors to the onboard solution areas in preparation for component replacement.
Estimated time Time variable Materials needed None Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
5405 Crash Sensor Test Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test the pipettor probe crash sensor for all pipettors.
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (c System processing module)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing liquid level sense or wash components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with liquid level sense or wash components: 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-661 3625 Pipettors LLS Test, page 10-661
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653.
Section 10-660
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the sample probe to detect liquid in the sample carrier.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed Tap water or saline Sample cups Additional materials vary depending on sample configuration. Sample carrier (RSH) Sample tube (LAS) SH bar code tool (LAS) Required module status Warming or Ready
3625 Pipettors LLS Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the sample probe and reagent probes (R1 and R2) to detect liquid in the wash cups and carousel positions.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed DI water 20 mL sample 2-90 mL reagent cartridges Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Bar code reader diagnostics description (c System processing module)

CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for the c 8000 sample and reagent carousel covers and the c 16000 sample carousel cover. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing a bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with bar code readers:
Section 10-661
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
3206 Reagent Bar Code Test, page 10-662 3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test, page 10-662
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3206 Reagent Bar Code Test Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers to read reagent cartridge bar code labels at any position on the R1 and R2 reagent supply centers.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Bar coded reagent cartridges Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the sample carousel bar code reader to read the sample carousel ID and bar coded sample tubes at any position on the sample carousel.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Bar coded sample tubes Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Module diagnostics description (c System processing module)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with processing module components or the keypad: 3720 Keypad Test, page 10-662 4080 Module Initialization, page 10-663
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3720 Keypad Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the processing module keypad function.
Section 10-662
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
NOTE: You cannot test the run, carousel advance, and stop keys on the keypad during this procedure.
4080 Module Initialization Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a processing module initialization.
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (c System processing modules)

One solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure, 3400 Interlock Sensors Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing solenoids, or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with solenoids and sensors. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3400 Interlock Sensors Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test all the interlock sensors: R1 reagent supply center cover, R2 reagent supply center cover, sample carousel cover, and RSH (robotic sample handler) covers.
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (c System processing module)

Perform the 5142 Wash Station Up/Down, page 10-664 diagnostic procedure when replacing the cuvette dry tip or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the wash station motor.
Section 10-663
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 5142 Wash Station Up/Down Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to check the up and down function of the cuvette wash assembly and to visually check the cuvette wash nozzles and dry tip for alignment.
Optic/temperature diagnostics description (c System processing module)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing optics or temperature components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with optics or temperature: 1000 Absorbance Reads, page 10-664 1008 Optics Total Test, page 10-664 1010 Cuvette Integrity Test, page 10-665
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 1000 Absorbance Reads Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to take wavelength reads for a user-defined sample. You can select the number of read cycles, delay in seconds between read cycles, and the primary and/or secondary wavelengths.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed DI water Sample Calibrated pipette Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
1008 Optics Total Test Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to test the variability in the optics reads throughout a 30 or 33 read test. You can perform one or all of the following optics tests: Quick test
Section 10-664
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Dark current test Shutter test
Materials needed DI water Calibrated pipette Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
System diagnostics
Estimated time 10-30 minutes depending on option chosen
1010 Cuvette Integrity Test Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to verify cuvettes meet acceptance criteria for sample testing.
Carousel diagnostics description (c System processing module)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing sample, reagent, or reaction carousel components, or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with carousels: 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move, page 10-665 3011 Reagent / Sample Carousel Home, page 10-666
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3010 Reaction Carousel Home / Move Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test the reaction carousel movement, home the carousel, and check for step loss.
Section 10-665
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
3011 Reagent / Sample Carousel Home Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test R1 and R2 reagent supply centers and sample carousel movement, home R1 and R2 reagent supply centers and sample carousel, and check for step loss.
Precision diagnostics description (c System processing module)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing fluidics components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with precision and accuracy: 2043 Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-666 2044 R1 Pipettor Check, page 10-667 2045 R2 Pipettor Check, page 10-667
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 2043 Sample Pipettor Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing accuracy of the sample pipettor using a calibrated manual pipette.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Sample cups Calibrated pipette capable of dispensing 20 L Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. Sample carrier (RSH) Sample tube (LAS) Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 10-666
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
2044 R1 Pipettor Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing accuracy of the R1 pipettor using a calibrated manual pipette.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline 10 sample cups 1 large (90 mL) reagent cartridge 10 small (55 mL) or large (90 mL) reagent cartridges, as appropriate Calibrated pipette capable of dispensing 100 L Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
2045 R2 Pipettor Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing accuracy of the R2 pipettor using a calibrated manual pipette.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline 10 sample cups 1 large (90 mL) reagent cartridge 10 small (55 mL) or large (90 mL) reagent cartridges, as appropriate Calibrated pipette capable of dispensing 100 L Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
i 2000/i 2000SR System processing module diagnostic categories

Diagnostic procedures for an i System processing module(s) are grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available for the following categories:
Section 10-667
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-668 Pipettor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-670 Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-671 Syringe/pump diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-674 Bar code reader diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-674 Module diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-675 Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i System processing modules), page 10-677 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-678 Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-680 Carousel diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-680 Precision diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules), page 10-681
Reaction mechanism diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing components associated with RVs (reaction vessels) or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with RV mechanisms: 3115 Vortexer Test, page 10-669 3125 Hopper Level Sensor Test, page 10-669 3150 Diverter Test, page 10-669 5220 RV Sensors Test, page 10-669 8000 Unload RVs, page 10-670 8010 Reverse RV Loader Wheel, page 10-670
Section 10-668
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3115 Vortexer Test Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test vortexer function.
3125 Hopper Level Sensor Test Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test RV hopper level sensors.
Estimated time 1 minute Materials needed None Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
3150 Diverter Test Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test the wash zone, RV unloader, RV load, RV load shutter, and STAT (i 2000SR) diverter sensors.
Estimated time 1 minute Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
5220 RV Sensors Test Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to test each RV loader sensor function. You load one RV (reaction vessel) and it passes through each of the RV loader sensors. The system tests each sensor with and without an RV in its path. The system tests the following RV loader sensors: RV load diverter, RV drop point sensor, RV load point sensor, process path insertion point sensor, RV hopper level sensor, RV load diverter shutter sensor, and STAT diverter sensor (i 2000SR).
Section 10-669
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
8000 Unload RVs Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to remove fluid from the RVs (reaction vessels) in the outer process path track and unload them.
8010 Reverse RV Loader Wheel Perform this reaction mechanisms diagnostic procedure to reverse the RV loader wheel to allow removal of a jammed RV.
Pipettor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing pipettor components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with pipettors: 1100 Pipettor Test, page 10-670 1155 Probe Straightness Test, page 10-671 1160 Pipettor Move, page 10-671 5400 Crash Sensor Test, page 10-671
To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 1100 Pipettor Test Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test pipettor movement and check for motor step loss.
Section 10-670
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
1155 Probe Straightness Test Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to check probe straightness of the R1, R2, sample, and STAT (i 2000SR) pipettors.
Estimated time 2-5 minutes Materials needed Cotton swab Deionized water Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
1160 Pipettor Move Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to move the sample or STAT (i 2000SR) pipettor to the wash station in preparation for component replacement.
5400 Crash Sensor Test Perform this pipettors diagnostic procedure to test the pipettor probe crash sensor for the sample, R1, R2, or STAT (i 2000SR) pipettors.
Fluidic/wash diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing liquid level sense or wash zone components, or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with liquid level sense or wash zones: 1170 Wash Station Test, page 10-672 2050 WZ Aspiration Test, page 10-672 3600 LLS Test, page 10-672 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test, page 10-673 3800 Pressure Monitoring Test, page 10-673
Section 10-671
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
6037 WZ Probe Straightness, page 10-673
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 1170 Wash Station Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the R1 and R2 wash station function.
2050 WZ Aspiration Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test wash zone aspiration. The wash zone dispenses and aspirates buffer from 15 RVs (reaction vessels)-5 RVs per wash aspiration position.
3600 LLS Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the probe to detect liquid for the following locations: RV2, RV24, RV48 (i 2000SR), and the reagent carousel outer, middle, or inner ring.
Estimated time 6 minutes Materials needed WZ Probe maintenance water bottle Tap water Required module status Warming or Ready
Section 10-672
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3610 Sample Handler LLS Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the sample or STAT (i 2000SR) probe to detect liquid in the sample carrier, LAS sample carousel, or from a sample cup on the LAS track.
Estimated time 3 minutes Materials needed Sample cup Sample tube Tap water or saline Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. Sample carrier (RSH/SSH) LAS sample carousel (i 2000) Required module status Warming or Ready
3800 Pressure Monitoring Test Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the pressure monitoring boards and transducers for the sample, R1, R2, or STAT (i 2000SR) pipettors.
Estimated time 30 minutes per pipettor Materials needed Required module status
Warming or Ready Required materials depend on the pipettor tested and may include: WZ probe maintenance water bottle Sample carrier Sample tube Tap water
6037 WZ Probe Straightness Perform this fluidics/wash diagnostic procedure to visually check the straightness of the wash zone probes.
Section 10-673
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
NOTE: You should run diagnostic procedure 2050 WZ Aspiration Test after completing this test.
Syringe/pump diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

One syringe/pump diagnostic procedure, 2110 Syringes and Pumps Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing a syringe or pump component or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with syringes or pumps. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 2110 Syringes and Pumps Test Perform this syringes/pumps diagnostic procedure to test operation of all pumps, syringes, and their sensors.
Estimated time 1 minute Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
Bar code reader diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing the reagent bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the bar code reader: 3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-675 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration, page 10-675
Section 10-674
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the reagent bar code reader. NOTE: Only the first 20 characters of each bar code display.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Bar code calibration tool Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate positions for reagent bottles.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Bar code calibration tool (2) Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Module diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when preparing for a long-term shutdown or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the vacuum or keypad: 2135 Long Term Shutdown, page 10-675 3175 Vacuum System Test, page 10-676 3700 Keypad Test, page 10-676 4080 Module Initialization, page 10-676
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 2135 Long Term Shutdown Perform this modules diagnostic procedure in preparation for long term shutdown of the ARCHITECT System. This procedure flushers all
Section 10-675
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
pumps and fluidic lines with buffer, air, deionized water, and then air, and removes all RVs (reaction vessels).
Estimated time 19 minutes Materials needed Wash buffer reservoir Wash buffer transfer tubing Deionized water Required module status Warming or Ready
3175 Vacuum System Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the vacuum system, vacuum vessels, and drain valves.
Estimated time 5 - 13 minutes depending on option chosen Materials needed None Required module status Warming or Ready
3700 Keypad Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the processing module keypad function. NOTE: You cannot test the run, carousel advance, and stop keys on the keypad during this procedure.
4080 Module Initialization Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a processing module initialization.
Section 10-676
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (i System processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing solenoids and sensors or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with solenoids or sensors: 3400 Interlock Sensors Test, page 10-677 3410 Level Sensors Test, page 10-677 5131 WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test, page 10-677 5132 Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T Valve Test, page 10-678 5133 Other Valves & Diverter Test, page 10-678
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3400 Interlock Sensors Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test all interlock sensors: front and rear processing center covers, right and left processing queue access doors (SSH), LAS carousel cover (LAS), RSH covers (RSH), reagent carousel cover, and waste chute sensor.
3410 Level Sensors Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test wash buffer, pre-trigger, and trigger level sensors.
5131 WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test wash zone 1 and 2 valves, and R1 and R2 wash station valves.
Section 10-677
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
5132 Syringe/Vacuum/PT/T Valve Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the syringe valves, wash zone vacuum/drain valves, and pre-trigger/trigger valves.
5133 Other Valves & Diverter Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the following solenoids and valves: Wash station vacuum/drain valve Wash zone diverter RV unload solenoid RV load diverter Air sensor STAT diverter (i 2000SR)
Estimated time 1 minute
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing fuses or motors or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with fuses or motors: 5100 PP & Carousel Motor Tests, page 10-679 5110 Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests, page 10-679 5120 Pump Motor Tests, page 10-679 5700 Fuse Status, page 10-679
Section 10-678
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
5100 PP & Carousel Motor Tests Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the process path, outer carousel, inner carousel, middle carousel, wash zone 1, wash zone 2, shutter, RV loader wheel, and RV loader transport motors.
5110 Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the sample pipettor theta and Z, R1 pipettor theta and Z, R2 pipettor theta and Z, STAT pipettor theta and Z (i 2000SR), sample syringe, R1 syringe, R2 syringe, and STAT syringe (i 2000SR) motors.
5120 Pump Motor Tests Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the pre-trigger, trigger, R1 wash station, R2 wash station, wash zone 1, wash zone 2, sample pipettor, R1 pipettor, R2 pipettor, and STAT pipettor pump (i 2000SR) motors.
5700 Fuse Status Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to display the status of +5, +12, and -12 volt fuses.
Section 10-679
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10 Optic/temperature diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing optics or temperature components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with optics or temperature: 1020 Optics Background, page 10-680 1030 Shutter, page 10-680
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 1020 Optics Background Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to determine the optics background reading. The system takes three readings; first with no RV (reaction vessel), second with an empty RV, and third with Pre-Trigger Solution in the RV. NOTE: The system does not use normalization and linearity parameters during this procedure. Raw counts must be between 3 RLU - 500 RLU.
1030 Shutter Perform this optics/temperature diagnostic procedure to verify correct shutter operation.
Carousel diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

One carousels diagnostic procedure, 3000 Reagent Carousel Test, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing the reagent carousel or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the reagent carousel. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653.
Section 10-680
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3000 Reagent Carousel Test Perform this carousels diagnostic procedure to test the reagent inner and outer carousel movement and check for step loss.
Precision diagnostics description (i 2000/i 2000SR processing modules)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing fluidics components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with precision and accuracy: 2001 Sample Pipettor Check, page 10-682 2002 R1 Pipettor Check, page 10-682 2003 R2 Pipettor Check, page 10-682 2004 Pre-Trigger Check, page 10-683 2005 Trigger Check, page 10-683 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check, page 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check, page 10-683 2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR), page 10-684
Section 10-681
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
2001 Sample Pipettor Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of the sample pipettor.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Calibrated manual pipettor (capable of pipetting 50 L) Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. Sample cup (RSH/SSH) Sample carrier (RSH/SSH) LAS sample carousel (i 2000) Sample tube (i 2000SR LAS) Required module status Warming or Ready
2002 R1 Pipettor Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of the R1 pipettor.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Calibrated manual pipettor (capable of pipetting 50 L) Required module status Warming or Ready
2003 R2 Pipettor Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of the R2 pipettor.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Calibrated manual pipettor (capable of pipetting 50 L)
Section 10-682
Required module status Warming or Ready
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
2004 Pre-Trigger Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of Pre-Trigger Solution.
2005 Trigger Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of Trigger Solution.
2006 Wash Zone 1 Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of the wash zone 1 manifold.
2007 Wash Zone 2 Check Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to visually check the dispensing precision and accuracy of the wash zone 2 manifold.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Calibrated manual pipettor (capable of pipetting 400 L)
Section 10-683
Required module status Warming or Ready
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR) Perform this precision diagnostic procedure to measure the dispensing precision and accuracy of the STAT pipettor.
Estimated time 10 minutes Materials needed Saline Calibrated manual pipettor (capable of pipetting 50 L) Additional materials vary depending on sample handler configuration. Sample cup (RSH) Sample carrier (RSH) Sample tube (i 2000SR LAS) Required module status Warming or Ready
RSH diagnostic categories

Diagnostic procedures for the RSH (robotic sample handler) are grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in the following categories: Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-684 Module diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-685 Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-687 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH), page 10-687
Bar code reader diagnostics description (RSH)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing RSH (robotic sample handler) bar code readers or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with bar code readers: 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-685
Section 10-684
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-685 System diagnostics
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate positions for sample ID bar codes.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Sample carrier Load queue bar code tool Required module status Warming or Ready
3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test the sample bar code reader.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Sample carrier SH bar code tool or bar coded tube Required module status Warming or Ready
Module diagnostics description (RSH)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing RSH (robotic sample handler) components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the sample handler: 3317 RSH Test, page 10-686 3710 Keypad Test, page 10-686 4090 Sample Handler Initialization, page 10-686 5507 RSH Indicator Lights Test, page 10-686
Section 10-685
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
3317 RSH Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the RSH (robotic sample handler) and bar code reader.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Sample carrier (up to 67) Bar coded sample tube (optional) Saline (c System) Required module status Warming or Ready
3710 Keypad Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test RSH (robotic sample handler) keypad function.
4090 Sample Handler Initialization Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a sample handler initialization.
5507 RSH Indicator Lights Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the RSH (robotic sample handler) indicator lights.
Section 10-686
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Solenoid/sensor diagnostics description (RSH)

You may need to perform the following procedures when replacing RSH (robotic sample handler) sensors or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with sensors. 3323 RSH Section Test, page 10-687 3401 Section/Bay Sensors Test, page 10-687 5506 RSH Sensor Test, page 10-687
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3323 RSH Section Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the ability of the RSH (robotic sample handler) carrier transport to pick up a carrier from a specific location and return it to that location.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Sample carrier Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
3401 Section/Bay Sensors Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the carrier/tray sensors for priority and routine bays.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Sample carriers Sample trays Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
5506 RSH Sensor Test Perform this solenoids/sensors diagnostic procedure to test the carrier transport and carrier positioner sensors.
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (RSH)

One fuses/motors diagnostic procedure, 5501 RSH Motor Tests, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when replacing
Section 10-687
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
sample handler motors or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with sample handler motors. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 5501 RSH Motor Tests Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the following motors: carrier transport X, carrier transport theta, carrier transport Z, and carrier positioner.
SSH diagnostic categories

Diagnostic procedures for the SSH (standard sample handler) are grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in the following categories: Bar code reader diagnostics description (SSH), page 10-688 Module diagnostics description (SSH), page 10-689 Fuse/motor diagnostics description (SSH), page 10-690
Bar code reader diagnostics description (SSH)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing SSH (standard sample handler) bar code readers or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with bar code readers: 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration, page 10-689 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-689
Section 10-688
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
3220 SH Bar Code Calibration Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate positions for sample ID bar codes.
Estimated time 2 minutes Materials needed Sample carrier Required module status Warming or Ready
3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to test load queue and processing queue bar code readers. The bar code reader checks the bar code width and compares the beginning of the bar code label against the calibration point.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed Sample carrier SH bar code tool or bar coded tube (optional) Required module status Warming or Ready
Module diagnostics description (SSH)

You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing SSH (standard sample handler) components or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the sample handler: 3315 Sample Handler Test, page 10-689 3710 Keypad Test, page 10-690 4090 Sample Handler Initialization, page 10-690
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 3315 Sample Handler Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test the operation of the SSH (standard sample handler) and bar code readers. Two options are available: Verify Calibration and Cycle Carriers - tests the load queue and processing queue bar code readers, verifies the calibration of the load queue bar code reader, and cycles carriers to test the operation of the SSH.
Section 10-689
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
Cycle Carriers - cycles carriers to test the operation of the SSH.
Materials needed Sample carrier Required module status
Estimated time Verify Calibration and Cycle Carriers: 5 minutes
Stopped, Warming, or SH bar code tool or Ready bar coded sample tubes Sample carrier Stopped, Warming or Ready
Cycle Carriers: 2 minutes
3710 Keypad Test Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to test SSH (standard sample handler) keypad function.
4090 Sample Handler Initialization Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a sample handler initialization.
Fuse/motor diagnostics description (SSH)

One fuses/motors diagnostic procedure, 5500 SH Motor Tests, is available for the SSH (standard sample handler). You may need to perform this procedure when replacing sample handler motors or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with sample handler motors. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653.
Section 10-690
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
5500 SH Motor Tests Perform this fuses/motors diagnostic procedure to home the following motors: load queue, load transfer, unload transfer, unload queue, processing queue, and star wheel.
LAS carousel sample handler diagnostic categories (i 2000)

Diagnostic procedures for the LAS (laboratory automated system) carousel sample handler are grouped by category (tab) on the Diagnostics screen. Procedures are available in the following categories: Bar code reader diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler i 2000), page 10-691 Module diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler i 2000), page 10-692
Bar code reader diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler - i 2000)
You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when replacing the LAS carousel sample handler bar code reader or diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the bar code reader: 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration, page 10-692 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Test, page 10-692
Section 10-691
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration Perform this bar code readers diagnostic procedure to calibrate the i 2000 processing queue bar code reader to the LAS carousel.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed LAS sample carousel SH bar code tool Required module status Warming or Ready
3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Test Perform this bar code readers procedure to test the processing queue bar code reader's ability to read the i 2000 LAS sample carousel ID and bar code tubes.
Estimated time 5 minutes Materials needed LAS sample carousel SH bar code tool or bar coded tube Required module status Warming or Ready
Module diagnostics description (LAS carousel sample handler i 2000)

One modules diagnostic procedure, 4090 Sample Handler Initialization, is available. You may need to perform this procedure when diagnosing error messages or observed problems associated with the sample handler. To perform this procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 4090 Sample Handler Initialization Perform this modules diagnostic procedure to perform a sample handler initialization.
Section 10-692
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Troubleshooting and diagnostics Section 10 SCC diagnostic categories

Diagnostic procedures for the SCC (system control center) display on the Utilities tab on the Diagnostics screen. You may need to perform the following diagnostic procedures when installing assays and procedures or diagnosing error messages or observed problems: 6004 Copy backup software, page 10-693 6008 Controller Configuration, page 10-694 6009 Log Utilities, page 10-694 6029 Assay Information, page 10-694 6114 Install/Delete Assays, page 10-695 6115 Install/Delete Procedures, page 10-695 6116 Update 6115 Procedure, page 10-695 6500 MAC Hardware Address, page 10-696 System diagnostics
To perform a procedure, see Perform a diagnostic procedure, page 10-653. 6004 Copy backup software Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to copy a system software backup to a CD or to replace a backup on your SCC (system control center) with one on a CD. NOTE: Performing this procedure does not backup the system software. To backup system information, see Create a system software backup, page 2-212.
Estimated time Time variable Materials needed Blank or appendable CDR/CDRW or a CD containing a backup Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 10-693
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
6008 Controller Configuration Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to configure the processing module and sample handler controller board after you replace the board or upgrade your software.
6009 Log Utilities Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to retrieve current logs, copy the database to CD, or copy archived logs to CD.
Estimated time Time variable Materials needed Materials vary depending on the option selected. Required materials may include: CD-R (compact disk recordable) or Unformatted CD-RW (compact disk read/write) One or more floppy disks Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6029 Assay Information Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to print: A complete list of all assays installed on the ARCHITECT System to verify the most current assay version is in use. The list contains the assay number, assay name, and version. Immunoassay calibrator bar code labels (i 2000SR LAS) A ranges of numeric SID bar code labels
Materials needed Required module status
Bar code labels may Stopped, Warming, or be required depending Ready on option selected.
Section 10-694
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
6114 Install/Delete Assays NOTE: Requires system administrator logon. Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install all or selected assays. You also use this procedure to delete selected assays.
ARCHITECT c System Stopped, Warming, or Ready CD-ROM or ARCHITECT i System CD-ROM
6115 Install/Delete Procedures NOTE: Requires system administrator logon. Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install all or selected maintenance and diagnostic procedures. You also use this procedure to delete selected maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
Estimated time 2 minutes Materials needed ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostic CD-ROM Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
6116 Update 6115 Procedure NOTE: Requires system administrator logon. Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to install an updated version of diagnostic procedure 6115 Install/Delete Procedures, when required.
Estimated time 2 minutes Materials needed ARCHITECT System Maintenance and Diagnostic CD-ROM Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 10-695
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

System diagnostics
Section 10
6500 MAC Hardware Address Perform this utilities diagnostic procedure to determine the MAC (media access control) address of the secondary network interface card installed in an SCC (system control center).
Estimated time < 1 minute Materials needed None Required module status Stopped, Warming, or Ready
Section 10-696
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Miscellaneous corrective action procedures

Corrective action procedures are: A series of steps recommended to resolve a probable cause(s) associated with an error message or observed problem Common to more than one error code or observed problem
Miscellaneous corrective action procedures topics include: Processing module corrective action procedures, page 10-697 Sample handler corrective action procedure, page 10-708 SCC corrective action procedure, page 10-710 ARM corrective action procedures, page 10-710 LAS corrective action procedure, page 10-714
Processing module corrective action procedures

Procedures that are often recommended as corrective actions for resolving error messages and/or observed problems associated with the processing module(s) include: Clean the bar code reader window, page 10-697 Enable or disable the ICT module (c System), page 10-700 Evaluate the check valve (c System), page 10-701 Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706 Reinstall the sample carousel (c System), page 10-707
Clean the bar code reader window

Perform this procedure to clean the bar code reader window when suggested by the corrective action of an error code. This procedure includes the steps to clean the bar code reader window in the: RSH (robotic sample handler) Sample carousel (c System) Reagent supply center(s) (c System) Reagent carousel (i System)
NA Warming or Ready
Section 10-697
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
General operator Soft, lint-free tissue or lens paper Deionized water
CAUTION: Class 2 Laser radiation when open. Avoid eye exposure to light. Do not stare into the beam. Class 2 Laser radiation when open for all processing modules except the c 16000 reagent carousels. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
To clean the bar code reader window: 1. Open the processing module cover(s) (not required for RSH). 2. Access the bar code reader window.
For the... RSH Sample carousel (c System) Perform the following... Open the first cover on the left side of the RSH.
Remove the sample carousel (c System), page 10-706.
Section 10-698
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

For the... Reagent supply center(s) (c System)
Perform the following... a. Remove the reagent carousel cover. b. Remove the outer segment located at the front of the reagent supply center. c. Select the R1 or R2 carousel advance button to move the empty position to the back of the reagent supply center where the bar code reader window is located.
Reagent carousel (i System)
a. Use the #2 screwdriver to remove the three non-captive screws that hold the reagent carousel cover in place. NOTE: Use caution when removing screws; they are not secured to the carousel cover. b. Remove the reagent carousel cover by using the handle and lifting the cover up and out of the module. NOTE: Be careful not to damage the other parts when removing the cover. c. Remove reagent kits located on the left side of the reagent carousel to allow access to the bar code reader window.
3. Locate the bar code reader window on the desired processing module and/or RSH. 4. Gently wipe the bar code reader window with a moistened lint-free tissue. 5. Dry the bar code reader(s) window with a lint-free tissue. 6. Prepare for operation.
For the... RSH Sample carousel (c System) Reagent supply center(s) (c System) Perform the following... Close the RSH cover.
Reinstall the sample carousel (c System), page 10-707

a. Select the R1 or R2 carousel advance button to move the empty position to the front of the reagent supply center. b. Replace the outer segment. c. Replace the carousel cover.
Reagent carousel (i System)
a. Reload any reagent kits that were removed. b. Install the reagent carousel cover, and then tighten the three non-captive screws.
Section 10-699
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
7. Close the processing module cover(s), if opened. To verify the bar code reader is functioning properly, perform one of the following bar code readers diagnostic procedures: 3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-685 3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test, page 10-662 3206 Reagent Bar Code Test, page 10-662, 3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test, page 10-675,

Sample carousel (c 8000), page 1-32 Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52 Reagent hardware components (c 8000), page 1-34 Reagent hardware components (c 16000), page 1-54 Reagent hardware components (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 1-84
Enable or disable the ICT module (c System)

Perform this procedure to enable or disable the ICT module. You disable the module to prevent the system from processing potentiometric assays when a performance issue occurs. After you resolve the issue you enable the module to allow the system to process the assays.

To enable or disable the ICT module: 1. Select Modules from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure modules window displays. 3. Select the desired ICT Module Installed option. 4. Select Done to save your changes.
Section 10-700
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Configure modules window (c System), page 2-50
Evaluate the check valve (c System)

Evaluating the check valve consists of the following procedures: Removal Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 8000), page 10-702 Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 16000), page 10-702 Remove the plunger shield and the 1 mL syringe, page 10-703 Remove the check valve tubing, page 10-703
Replacement Evaluate the check valve, page 10-704 Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 10-704 Reinstall the 1 mL syringe and plunger shield, page 10-705 Prepare for operation, page 10-705
The processing module must be in the Offline, Stopped, Warming, or Ready status. 15 minutes Container large enough to accommodate the syringes with check valves installed DI water Absorbent towel
Prerequisite Time required Tools required
Replacement parts
NA
Section 10-701
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Removal
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 8000)

Steps Locate the check valve to be evaluated: ICT reference pump Wash solution pump ICT aspiration pump NOTE: See ARCHITECT c 8000 supply and pump center components, page 9-125. Graphic / Reference
Locate the check valve to be evaluated (c 16000)

Steps 1. Locate the check valve to be replaced by performing one of the following: Wash solution check valve - Open the pump center right door on the front of the processing module. NOTE: See the front view illustration of the supply and pump center components for wash solution pump check valve location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. ICT aspiration or reference pump check valve Open the ICT pump center access door on the rear of the processing module. NOTE: See the rear view illustration of the supply and pump center components for ICT aspiration or reference solution pump check valve location, ARCHITECT c 16000 supply and pump center components, page 9-203. Graphic / Reference
Section 10-702
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Steps 1. Remove the clear plunger shield [1] by removing the two black knobs [2]. 2. Pull the 1 mL syringe [3] forward to remove it from the syringe holder. Graphic / Reference

Steps 1. Place absorbent towels under the pump area to absorb any liquid. 2. Disconnect the top [1] and side [2] tubing from the check valve [3]. Graphic / Reference
Section 10-703
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Replacement
Evaluate the check valve

Steps 1. Place the check valve end [1] into a container of Reagent Grade Type ll water [2]. 2. Pull and push the plunger [3] several times to cycle water through the valve. 3. Place a finger over the side port [4] while you pull the plunger. If you can draw water into the syringe, the check valve must be replaced. See Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207. 4. Place a finger over the top port [5] while you push the plunger. If you can push water out of the syringe, the check valve must be replaced. See Replace check valves (c 8000), page 9-130 or Replace check valves (c 16000), page 9-207. 5. Reinstall the check valve tubing, page 10-704, if the check valve does not need to be replaced. Graphic / Reference

Steps 1. Reattach the top [1] and side [2] tubing to the check valve [3]. Graphic / Reference
Section 10-704
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Steps 1. Reinstall the 1 mL syringe [1]. 2. Verify that the syringe plunger flange [2] is below the U-shaped holder and the bottom of the syringe barrel is in the groove at the bottom of the syringe holder [3]. 3. Reinstall the clear plunger shield [4] and tighten the black knobs [5] finger-tight. 4. Remove the absorbent towel from the pump area. Graphic / Reference

Steps 1. Perform the following as-needed maintenance procedures to remove any air that may be present: 6063 Flush ICT Module, page 9-41, for the ICT reference and ICT aspiration pumps 2155 Flush Bulk Solutions, page 9-39, for the wash solution pump. 2. Check for leaks while performing the flush. If drips or leaks are observed, see Processing module observed problems (c System), page 10-547. Graphic / Reference
Verification
Steps Verification occurs during preparation for operation. No further verification is required. Graphic / Reference
Section 10-705
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Remove the sample carousel (c System)

Perform this procedure to remove the sample carousel to perform a maintenance procedure or troubleshoot a problem with the processing module.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Warming or Ready General operator NA
To remove the sample carousel: 1. Verify that the sample carousel access indicator light (square) is illuminated. 2. Remove the sample carousel cover by pulling the lever and lifting the cover. [1]
3. Carefully lift the sample carousel straight up from the sample carousel platform.
Section 10-706
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

IMPORTANT: When transporting the sample carousel, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. To reinstall the carousel, see Reinstall the sample carousel (c System), page 10-707.

Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52
Reinstall the sample carousel (c System)

Perform this procedure to reinstall the sample carousel.
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Warming or Ready General operator NA
To reinstall the sample carousel: IMPORTANT: When transporting the sample carousel, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. 1. Place the sample carousel on the carousel platform. 2. Align the carousel by rotating it until it is seated on the alignment pins. NOTE: When the sample carousel is correctly aligned on the carousel platform you cannot manually turn the carousel. 3. Replace the sample carousel cover by pulling the lever [1], aligning the tab [2], and then releasing the lever.
Section 10-707
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10

Sample carousel (c 16000), page 1-52
Sample handler corrective action procedure

A procedure that may be recommended as a corrective action for resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the RSH (robotic sample handler) is Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH), page 10-708.
Remove sample carrier(s) from the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) (RSH)
Perform this procedure to remove sample carrier(s) from the RSH (robotic sample handler) carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) after power is interrupted to the processing module(s).
Prerequisite Module status User access level Supplies NA Offline General operator NA
Section 10-708
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

To remove sample carrier(s) from the RSH (robotic sample handler) carrier transport and carrier positioner(s): 1. Lift the RSH bay covers and observe the carrier transport and carrier positioner(s) for the presence of a sample carrier(s). NOTE: If there are no carrier(s) on the carrier transport or positioner(s), no further action is required.
2. Remove the carrier(s) carefully by lifting them up and out of their location. IMPORTANT: When removing or transporting sample carriers, avoid splashing sample outside of the sample cups and/or tubes. 3. Close the RSH bay covers. To resume processing: If a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) was powering the system and the RSH was stopped prior to the loss of power, no further action is required.
Section 10-709
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
If power was lost prior to stopping the RSH the samples in the sample carrier on the carrier transport and the surrounding area may have been contaminated by sample splashing as the RSH carrier transport motor loses power. Discard all sample cups and/or tubes in this carrier. Perform as-needed maintenance procedures 6311 RSH Cleaning, page 9-77, to decontaminate the carrier transport and 6038 External Decontamination, page 9-82, to clean the sample carrier.
SCC corrective action procedure

A procedure that is often recommended as a corrective action for resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the SCC (system control center) is Reseat cables to the SCC, page 10-710.
Reseat cables to the SCC

Perform this procedure to reseat the cables to the SCC (system control center) when communication timeout errors occur and/or when suggested by the corrective action of an error code.
Power off the SCC, page 5-4

NA General operator NA
To reseat cables to the SCC: 1. Locate the desired cable(s) on the Network hub and CPU back panel, page 1-10. 2. Disconnect, and then reconnect the cable(s). 3. Power on the SCC, page 5-3. NOTE: Do not proceed to the next step until the system control center displays the Snapshot screen. 4. Power on the processing module and/or sample handler, page 5-7.
ARM corrective action procedures

Procedures that are often recommended as corrective actions for resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the
Section 10-710
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory include: Change the wash buffer transfer option, page 10-711 Flush the ARM, page 10-711 Calibrate the ARM level sense, page 10-712
Change the wash buffer transfer option

Perform this procedure to change the wash buffer transfer option from automatic to manual when troubleshooting an ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory failure or as instructed by the corrective action of an error code or observed problem. After you resolve the problem, change the wash buffer transfer option back to automatic.

To change the wash buffer transfer option: 1. Select Reagents - Supplies from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure reagents - supplies window displays. 3. Select the desired Wash buffer transfer option. 4. Select Done to save your changes.

Configure reagents - supplies window, page 2-44
Flush the ARM

Perform this procedure to flush the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory when poor inlet water quality is indicated on the ARM keypad.
All except Offline and Stopped
Section 10-711
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
General operator NA
To flush the ARM: 1. Verify the ARM is in Ready status. If not, press the stop key on the ARM keypad followed by the start key. 2. Select F2 - Update Supplies on the Supply status screen. The Update supplies window displays. 3. Select the Add Buffer check box. 4. Select Done to initiate buffer transfer. The Update supplies window displays. NOTE: The ARM automatically flushes once you initiate buffer transfer. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 until buffer is successfully transferred to the processing module.
Related information... ARM keypad (i System), page 1-111

Supply status screen and views, page 5-24 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-31
Calibrate the ARM level sense

Perform this procedure to calibrate the level sense of the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) accessory when you install a new tubing assembly or there is too much buffer in the cubitainer when empty is indicated on the ARM keypad.
To calibrate the ARM level sense: 1. Press the stop key on the ARM keypad. 2. Disconnect the sensor cable. [1]
Section 10-712
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Disconnect the tubing. [2]
4. Remove the tubing assembly [3] from the concentrated wash buffer cubitainer and place it in the tubing assembly holder. [4] 5. Remove the wash buffer cubitainer [5] from the ARM. 6. Remove the tubing assembly from the tubing assembly holder. 7. Reconnect the sensor cable. 8. Hold the tubing assembly in a vertical position, and then press the replace buffer key. The amber replace buffer indicator beneath the replace buffer key flashes. NOTE: If the tubing assembly is not held vertically the ARM level sense calibration will not be accurate. 9. Disconnect the sensor cable while the indicator continues to flash. 10. Replace the wash buffer cubitainer. 11. Place the wash buffer tubing assembly in the concentrated wash buffer, and then twist the fitting to tighten. 12. Reconnect the sensor cable [1] and supply tubing quick disconnect fitting [2] to the ARM. To transfer concentrated wash buffer to the processing module, see Replenish wash buffer manually and update inventory (i 2000/i 2000SR), page 5-52.
Section 10-713
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Section 10
Related information... ARM keypad (i System), page 1-111
LAS corrective action procedure

A procedure that is often recommended as a corrective action for resolving error messages and observed problems associated with the LAS (laboratory automated system) is Verify LAS communications, page 10-714.
Verify LAS communications

Perform this procedure to change the standard LAS (laboratory automation system) timeout settings and re-initialize communications when you are setting up the LAS or when one of the following error codes occurs: 8263- Invalid recovery type sent by the LAS 8359- Time out exceeded on message sent to LAS 8360- Maximum number of consecutive LAS message timeouts and/or LAS <NAK> messages exceeded 8361- LAS message communication error 8464- LAS initialization communication failed
To verify LAS communications: 1. Select Sample handler from the System categories list on the Configuration screen. 2. Select F6 - Configure. The Configure sample handler window displays. 3. Select the Send communications message to LAS check box to send a re-initialize communications message to the LAS. 4. Select Done to send a communications message to the LAS. A confirmation message displays. 5. Select OK to save your changes and send a communications message to the LAS.
Section 10-714
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard), page 2-59
Section 10-715
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix A
Printed report examples
Introduction
The following printed reports are generated by the ARCHITECT System: Absorbance Data Report (c System), page Appendix A-3 Assay Parameter Report (c System), page Appendix A-6 Assay Parameter Report (i System), page Appendix A-15 Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System), page Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), page Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System), page Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), page Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), page Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), page Appendix A-34 Cal Curve Summary Report, page Appendix A-37 Exception Details Report, page Appendix A-39 Exception Status Report, page Appendix A-42 Levey - Jennings Report, page Appendix A-44 Maintenance History Report, page Appendix A-47 Message History Log Report, page Appendix A-49 Order List Report, page Appendix A-51 Order Status Report, page Appendix A-53 Patient Report, page Appendix A-55 Procedure Report, Basic, page Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, page Appendix A-59 QC Analysis Report, page Appendix A-61 QC Result Details Report, page Appendix A-64 QC Results List Report, page Appendix A-67 QC Summary Report, page Appendix A-69 Reagent Load Error Report, page Appendix A-71 Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR), page Appendix A-73
Appendix A-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Printed report examples Appendix A

Rerun List Report, page Appendix A-75 Result Details Report, page Appendix A-77 Results List Report, page Appendix A-80 Sample Report, page Appendix A-82 Sample Status Report, page Appendix A-84 Temporary Message Log Report, page Appendix A-86
Appendix A-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Absorbance Data Report (c System)

Use this report to troubleshoot assay results.
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number:
Appendix A-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Assay number: Shows the number defined for the assay. 7. Name: Shows the name of the patient or control. 8. Module: Shows the module number on which the assay was run. 9. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the module on which the assay was run. 10. C / P: Shows the carrier or carousel (CRSL) ID and position for the sample. 11. Result: Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. 12. Units: Shows the units for the result. 13. Flags: Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. 14. Code: Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 15. Cuvette: Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the result. 16. Primary wavelength and Secondary wavelength: Shows the primary and secondary wavelengths used to measure the assay concentration. 17. Point (column): Shows the read points 1 through 33. 18. Primary (column): Shows the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary wavelength. 19. Secondary (column): Shows the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary wavelength.
Appendix A-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

20. Primary - Secondary (column): Shows the difference in absorbance of the primary wavelength minus the secondary wavelength. 21. F---F: Indicates the photometric points included in the flex read time window for the assay. 22. M-----M: Indicates the photometric points included in the main read time window for the assay.
Appendix A-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay Parameter Report (c System)
Appendix A

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your configured assay parameters.
Appendix A-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay type:
Appendix A-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the assay processing protocol type defined for the assay. Options are: Photometric Potentiometric Sample Interference Index
6. Assay number: Shows the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. 7. Assay availability: Shows the availability of the assay for ordering. Options are: Enabled Disabled Patient Disabled
8. Assay version: Shows the version number of the assay. 9. Cal version: Shows the calibration version of the assay. 10. Reaction mode: Shows the mathematical model used to determine the concentration of the assay in the sample. Options are: End up End down Rate up Rate down 11. Main read time: Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the main read time. 12. Primary wavelength: Shows the primary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration. 13. Flex read time: Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric read points for the flex read time. 14. Secondary wavelength:
Appendix A-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the secondary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration. 15. Color correction read time: Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the color correction read time. 16. Last read required: Shows the last read (1-33) required for test calculation so the result can be calculated sooner than the entire ten minute protocol. 17. Blank read time: Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for the blank read time. 18. Absorbance range: Shows the upper and lower limit of absorbance within which all reads for a sample should measure. If any read is outside the absorbance limits during main or flex time reads, the data is not used to calculate the result. 19. Sample blank type: Shows the type of sample blank configured for the assay. Options are: None Self
20. Blank assay: This feature is not available at this time. 21. Reagent: Shows the reagent used for the assay. 22. R1 reagent volume: Shows the R1 reagent volume the module dispenses into the cuvette. 23. R2 reagent volume: Shows the R2 reagent volume the module dispenses into the cuvette. 24. R1 water volume: Shows the volume of water the module dispenses along with the R1 reagent when concentrated reagents are used. 25. R2 water volume: Shows the volume of water the module dispenses along with the R2 reagent when concentrated reagents are used. 26. R1 dispense mode: Shows the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense R1 reagents. 27. R2 dispense mode: Shows the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense R2 reagents. 28. Diluent name:
Appendix A-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the sample diluent the module uses for the assay. 29. Diluent dispense mode: Shows the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense sample diluent reagents. 30. Dilution name (column): Shows the name(s) of the dilutions defined for the assay. 31. Sample volume (column): Shows the volume of the sample to be aspirated from the sample cup or tube for the dilution. 32. Diluted sample volume (column): Shows the volume of diluted sample to be aspirated from the cuvette for the dilution. 33. Diluent volume (column): Shows the volume of the diluent to be aspirated from the cuvette for the dilution. 34. Water volume (column): Shows the volume of water to be dispensed along with the diluent when concentrated diluents are used for the dilution. 35. Dilution factor (column): Shows the sample dilutions the system calculated based on the volumes you specified. 36. Reaction check type: Shows the reaction check type defined for the assay. Options are: End Subtraction End Ratio Rate Subtraction Rate Ratio None
37. Read time A range: Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for read time A. 38. Read time B range: Shows the starting (1-33) and ending (1-33) photometric points for read time B. 39. Calculation limit: Shows the lower and upper limits for the acceptable range for the calculated results of the comparison of the two read times. 40. Minimum absorbance:
Appendix A-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the minimum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for absorbance readings within the main read time. 41. Rate linearity %: Shows the allowable percent variation in the change in absorbance measured during the first three reads as compared to the last three reads in the main and flex read time. 42. Maximum absorbance variation: Shows the maximum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for absorbance readings within the main read time. 43. Calibration method: Shows the calibration method defined for the assay. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit 4 Spline Use Cal Factor / Blank
44. Use cal factor from: Shows the assay to be referenced for calibration information to be used for result calculation. 45. Factor: Shows the factor used to calculate the concentration of a result for the assay. 46. Full interval hours: Shows the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration curve is valid. 47. Adjustment interval hours: Shows the amount of time, in hours, that the adjustment calibration curve is valid. 48. Adjustment type: Shows the type of adjustment calibration defined for the assay. Options are: None Blank 1 Point 2 Point
49. Adjustment level: Shows the calibrator level(s) used for the 1-point or 2-point adjustment calibration.
Appendix A-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

50. Expected cal factor: Shows the expected target value for the cal factor assay when the system calculates the calibration curve. 51. Default ordering type: Shows the default calibration ordering type for the assay if the Calibration type: Adjust type is defined. 52. Expected cal factor tolerance %: Shows the percent tolerance from the expected target value for the Cal factor that is allowed when the system calculates the calibration curve. 53. Blank absorbance range: Shows the upper and lower limits for the acceptable blank absorbance range if a data check is desired. 54. Span: Shows the calibrator level used to perform the calibration data check. 55. Span absorbance range: Shows the upper and lower limits for the acceptable absorbance range if a span check is desired. 56. Maximum curve fit: Shows the maximum limit of the sum of the absolute values of the difference between the approximated absorbance of the calculated calibration curve and the measured absorbance. 57. Calibrator set name: Shows the name defined for the calibrator set. 58. Replicates: Shows the number of calibrator replicates the system uses when calculating the calibration curve. 59. Cal level (column): Shows the name configured for each calibrator level for the assay. 60. Concentration (column): Shows the concentration value configured for each calibrator level for the assay. 61. Sample volume (column): Shows the sample volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay. 62. Diluted sample volume (column): Shows the diluted sample volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay. 63. Diluent volume (column): Shows the diluent volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay. 64. Water volume (column): Shows the water volume configured for each calibrator level for the assay.
Appendix A-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
65. Smart wash: Shows the SmartWash parameters configured for the assay. 66. Linearity range: Shows the linearity range defined for the assay. 67. Flag range specifications: Shows the age and gender-specific normal and extreme flags specified for the assay. 68. Interpretation Parameters: Shows the interpretation parameters defined for the assay. 69. Result concentration units: Shows the result concentration units configured for the assay. 70. Correlation factor: Shows the correlation factor configured if the result required calculation to match another system. 71. Result decimal places: Shows the number of digits specified to the right of the decimal for the result concentration units. 72. Intercept: Shows the intercept configured if the result requires a calculation to match another system.
Appendix A-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Assay Parameter Report (i System)

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your configured assay parameters.
Appendix A-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Name: Shows the name of the assay.
Appendix A-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

5. Assay type: Shows the assay processing protocol type defined for the assay. Options are: Two step 18 - 4 One step 25 Two step 4 - 4 One step 11
6. Assay number: Shows the number defined for the assay. 7. Pretreatment option: Shows the pretreatment option the system uses in the assay protocol. 8. Assay version: Shows the version number of the assay. 9. Assay availability: Shows the availability of the assay for ordering. Options are: Enabled Disabled Patient Disabled
10. Cal version: Shows the calibration version of the assay. 11. Assay status: Shows the assay status defined for the assay. Options are: 12. Type: Shows the assay type defined for the assay. Options are: Full Adjust Index Primary Correlation
13. Calibration method: Shows the calibration method defined for the assay. Options are: Point to Point Linear Regression
Appendix A-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
4PLC X 4PLC Y Cutoff
14. Adjustment method: Shows the adjustment method defined for the assay. Options are: Linear Transformation Parameter adjustment Ratio techniques (Ratio A, Ratio AB, Adjustment) Curve shape
15. Replicates: Shows the number of calibrator replicates the system uses when calculating the calibration curve. 16. Standard concentrations (column): Shows the concentrations for the standard calibrators (A - F) defined for the assay. 17. Adjustors (column): Shows the concentrations for the adjustor calibrators defined for the assay. 18. Manual dilution: Shows the availability of using the manual dilution option for the assay. 19. Default dilution: Shows the default dilution configured for the assay. 20. Result concentration units: Shows the result concentration units configured for the assay. 21. Dilution ranges: Show the dilution names and ranges specified for the assay. 22. Flag range specifications: Shows the age and gender-specific normal and extreme flags specified for the assay. 23. Interpretation parameters: Shows the interpretation parameters defined for the assay. 24. Result concentration units: Shows the result concentration units configured for the assay. 25. Result decimal places: Shows the number of digits specified to the right of the decimal for the result concentration units.
Appendix A-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System)

Use this report as a hardcopy record of your assay calibration details. You can configure this report to print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report.
Appendix A-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
2. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 6. Reagent lot: Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration. 8. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 9. Cal status: Shows the status of the calibration. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated. 11. Cal date: Shows the date the calibration completed. 12. Cal time: Shows the time the calibration completed. 13. Cal type: Shows the type of calibration performed. 14. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 15. Calibrator lot: Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. 16. Curve expiration date / time: Shows the expiration date and time for the full and/or adjust calibration curve. 17. Lot expiration: Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot number used to calibrate the assay. 18. Cal ID (column): Shows the name for each calibrator. 19. Concentration / Units (column): Shows the concentration and units for the result.
Appendix A-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

20. Cal mV (column): Shows the median millivolt value for each calibrator level. 21. Slope (column): Shows the percent response of the ICT (integrated chip technology) module for the low and high calibrators. 22. Rep. 1 mV (column): Shows the millivolt value for replicate 1. 23. Rep. 2 mV (column): Shows the millivolt value for replicate 2. 24. Rep. 3 mV (column): Shows the millivolt value for replicate 3.
Appendix A-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System)
Appendix A

Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed.
Appendix A-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 6. Reagent lot: Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration. 8. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 9. Cal status: Shows the status of the calibration. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated. 11. Cal date: Shows the date the calibration completed. 12. Cal time: Shows the time the calibration completed. 13. Calibration method: Shows the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. 14. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 15. Cal type: Shows the type of calibration performed. 16. Curve expiration date / time: Shows the expiration date and time for the full and/or adjust calibration curve. 17. Calibrator lot: Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. 18. Lot expiration: Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot. 19. Cal ID (column): Shows the name for each calibrator. 20. Concentration / Units (column): Shows the concentration value for each level of calibrator as defined in the assay parameters.
Appendix A-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
21. Cal absorbance (column): Shows the median absorbance value for the calibrator levels. 22. Cal factor (column): Shows the calibration factor for the calibrator levels. 23. Rep. 1 absorbance (column): Shows the absorbance value for replicate 1. 24. Rep. 2 absorbance (column): Shows the absorbance value for replicate 2. 25. Rep. 3 absorbance (column): Shows the absorbance value for replicate 3.
Appendix A-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor/Blank (c System)

Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report.
Appendix A-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
2. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 6. Reagent lot: Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration. 8. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 9. Cal status: Shows the status of the calibration. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated. 11. Cal date: Shows the date the calibration completed. 12. Cal time: Shows the time the calibration completed. 13. Calibration method: Shows the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. 14. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 15. Cal type: Shows the type of calibration performed. 16. Curve expiration date/time: Shows the expiration date and time for the full and/or adjust calibration curve. 17. Calibrator lot: Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. 18. Lot expiration: Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot. 19. Reference assay: Shows the name of the assay from which the calibration data is referenced when the calibration method is Use Cal factor / Blank.
Appendix A-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

20. Cal ID (column): Shows the name for each calibrator. 21. Concentration / Units (column): Shows the concentration value for each level of calibrator as defined in the assay parameters. 22. Cal absorbance (column): Shows the median absorbance value for the calibrator levels. 23. Cal factor (column): Shows the calibration factor for the calibrator levels. 24. Rep. 1 absorbance (column): Shows the absorbance value for replicate 1. 25. Rep. 2 absorbance (column): Shows the absorbance value for replicate 2. 26. Rep. 3 absorbance (column): Shows the absorbance value for replicate 3.
Appendix A-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System)
Appendix A

Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Operator ID:
Appendix A-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 6. Reagent lot: Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration. 8. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 9. Cal status: Shows the status of the calibration. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated. 11. Cal date: Shows the date the calibration completed. 12. Cal time: Shows the time the calibration completed. 13. Cal type: Shows the type of calibration performed. 14. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 15. Calibrator lot: Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. 16. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot number used to calibrate the assay. 17. Cal 1 ratio and Cal 2 ratio: Shows the ratios for the calibration adjustment. 18. Cal ID (column): Shows the name for each calibrator. 19. Mean RLU (column): Shows the mean RLU (relative light unit) for the calibrator replicates. 20. Rep. 1 RLU (column):
Appendix A-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the RLU value for replicate 1. 21. Rep. 2 RLU (column): Shows the RLU value for replicate 2. 22. Concentration / Units (column): Shows the concentration value for each level of calibrator as defined in the assay parameters. 23. Ref. Cal RLU (column): Shows the reference (master cal) data read from the 2-D bar code label. 24. Fit curve RLU: Shows the fit curve RLU data for each concentration.
Appendix A-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System)

Appendix A-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 6. Reagent lot: Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration. 8. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 9. Cal status: Shows the status of the calibration. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated. 11. Cal date: Shows the date the calibration was completed. 12. Cal time: Shows the time the calibration was completed. 13. Cal type: Shows the type of calibration performed. 14. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 15. Calibrator lot: Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. 16. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot number used to calibrate the assay. 17. Cal ID (column): Shows the name for each calibrator. 18. Concentration / Units (column): Shows the concentration value for each level of calibrator as defined in the assay parameters. 19. Fit curve RLU (column): Shows the fit curve RLU (relative light unit) data for each concentration. 20. Mean RLU (column): Shows the mean RLU data for the calibrator replicates.
Appendix A-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

21. Rep. 1 RLU (column): Shows the RLU values for replicate 1. 22. Rep. 2 RLU (column): Shows the RLU values for replicate 2.
Appendix A-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System)
Appendix A

Appendix A-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 6. Reagent lot: Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the reagent kit used for the calibration. 8. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 9. Cal status: Shows the status of the calibration. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was calibrated. 11. Cal date: Shows the date the calibration completed. 12. Cal time: Shows the time the calibration completed. 13. Cal type: Shows the type of calibration performed. 14. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 15. Calibrator lot: Shows the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. 16. Expiration date: Shows the expiration date of the calibrator lot number used to calibrate the assay. 17. Cal ID (column): Shows the name for each calibrator. 18. Mean RLU (column): Shows the mean RLU (relative light unit) for the calibrator replicates. 19. Rep. 1 RLU (column): Shows the RLU value for replicate 1. 20. Rep. 2 RLU (column): Shows the RLU value for replicate 2.
Appendix A-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
21. Rep. 3 RLU (column): Shows the RLU value for replicate 3.
Appendix A-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Cal Curve Summary Report

Use this report to quickly identify reagent lots with an expired calibration or no calibration.
Appendix A-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Module (column): Shows the module on which the reagent lot was calibrated. 5. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 6. Reagent lot (column): Shows the lot number of the reagent. 7. Cal status (column): Shows the calibration status of the reagent lot. 8. Cal date / time (column): Shows the date and time the reagent lot was calibrated. 9. Cal expiration date / time (column): Shows the date and time the calibration curve expires for the reagent lot. (c System)
Appendix A-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Exception Details Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system.
Appendix A-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System.
4. Name: Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator. 5. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Assay: Shows the name of the assay. 7. Patient ID: Shows the ID assigned to the patient. 8. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 9. Draw date / time: Shows the date and time the sample was drawn. 10. Module/Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the exception was generated. This field is blank when the test cannot be assigned to or processed on a module. 11. Sample comment: Shows the comment entered for the test. 12. Cal. lot: Shows the calibrator lot number for the calibration used to calculate the result. 13. Cal. date / time: Shows the calibration date and time for the reagent lot used to calculate the result. 14. Reagent master lot: Shows the reagent master lot for the calibration used to calculate the result. 15. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 16. Date completed: Shows the date the exception completed. 17. Location: Shows the location associated with the patient. 18. Time completed: Shows the time the exception completed. 19. Doctor: Shows the name of the patient's doctor. 20. Operator ID:
Appendix A-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 21. C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
22. Dilution (column): Shows the dilution used for the test. 23. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 24. Abs. (column): Shows the absorbance value for the test. 25. Cuvette (column): Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the exception. 26. Error code / Description (column): Shows the error code number and description.
Appendix A-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Exception Status Report
Appendix A

Appendix A-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
5. SID (column): Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Name (column): Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator for the order. 7. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 8. Module (column): Shows the module that generated the test exception. This field is blank when the test cannot be assigned to or processed on a module. 9. Error code (column): Shows the numeric error code for the exception and the message text that describes the error that occurred.
Appendix A-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Levey - Jennings Report
Appendix A

Use this report as a hardcopy record of QC data.
Appendix A-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay Name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Module: Shows the module number on which the controls were run. 6. Control Name: Shows the name of the control. 7. Module Serial Number: Shows the serial number of the module on which the controls were run. 8. Control Level: Shows the level of the control. 9. Date Range: Shows the date range selected for the Levey - Jennings report. 10. Control Lot Number: Shows the lot number of the control. 11. Control Expiration Date: Shows the expiration date of the control. 12. Calculation Type: Shows the calculation type, which includes cumulative data for both the module and the system. 13. Date / Time (column): Shows the date and time for each control result. 14. Results (column): Shows the results for each control. Results with an asterisk are excluded from the calculations. 15. Reagent Lot Number: Shows the lot number for the reagent kit used to run the control. 16. Flags: Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245. 17. 2SD: Shows 2 SD (standard deviation) for the control data. 18. 1SD: Shows 1 SD (standard deviation) for the control data. 19. Mean: Shows the mean for the control data. 20. EXPECTED: Shows the expected mean and standard deviation configured.
Appendix A-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
21. MANUFACTURER: Shows the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured. 22. MODULE CUMULATIVE: Shows the module cumulative data for the control run on the specified module. 23. SYSTEM CUMULATIVE: Shows the system cumulative data for the control run on the system. This data is the same as the module cumulative data when there is only one module. 24. MODULE DATA FOR DATE RANGE: Shows the module data calculated for the specified module and date range. 25. SYSTEM DATA FOR DATE RANGE: Shows the system data calculated for the date range. This data is the same as the module data for date range when there is only one module.
Appendix A-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Maintenance History Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of the maintenance performed on your system.
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Module no.: Shows the module on which the maintenance procedure was performed.
Appendix A-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. Approval status: Shows the status of approval for the maintenance log. 4. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the module on which the maintenance procedure was performed. 5. Approval date: Shows the date of approval for the maintenance log. 6. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed. 7. Approved by: Shows the ID of the operator who approved the maintenance log. 8. Category: Shows the maintenance category of the procedure. 9. Procedure: Shows the name of the maintenance procedure. 10. Date (column): Shows the date the maintenance procedure was performed. 11. Time (column): Shows the time the maintenance procedure was performed. 12. Operator ID (column): Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed. 13. Status (column): Shows the status of the maintenance procedure. 14. Comments: Shows the comments entered for the maintenance procedure.
Appendix A-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Message History Log Report

Appendix A-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Date (column): Shows the date the error/message was generated. 5. Time (column): Shows the time the error/message was generated. 6. Module (column): Shows the module that generated the error/message. 7. Error code / Message text (column): Shows the numeric error code for the exception and the message text that describes the error that occurred.
Appendix A-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Order List Report
Order List Report

Use this report to aid in loading samples.
Appendix A-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Order List Report
Appendix A
NOTE: This field is blank for pending orders that have not been assigned a carrier or carousel position. 5. SID (column): Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Name (column): Shows the name of the patient, control, or calibrator for the order. 7. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a sample processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. NOTE: Only sample processing codes (M and S) will print. 8. Minimum sample volume (column): Shows the minimum sample cup volume required to process the test.
Appendix A-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Order Status Report
Order Status Report

Use this report to check the status of an order.
Appendix A-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Order Status Report
Appendix A
NOTE: This field is blank for pending orders that have not been assigned a carrier or carousel position. 5. SID (column): Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Name (column): Shows the name of the patient, control and level, or calibrator for the order. 7. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 8. Status (column): Shows the current status of the test ordered. 9. Time (column): Shows the time the test with a status of Running will complete (in 24 hour format). 10. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Appendix A-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Patient Report
Patient Report
Use this report as a hardcopy patient record.
Legend: 1. Report header: Shows the configured report header information. 2. Name: Shows the name of the patient. 3. Gender:
Appendix A-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Patient Report
Appendix A
Shows the gender of the patient. 4. Patient ID: Shows the ID assigned to the patient. 5. Birthdate: Shows the patient's birthdate. 6. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 7. Draw date / time: Shows the date and time the sample was drawn. 8. Location: Shows the location associated with the patient. 9. Doctor: Shows the name of the patient's doctor. 10. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 11. Result (column): Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. 12. Units (column): Shows the units for the result. 13. Flags (column): Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. 14. Range (column): Shows the normal / therapeutic range of the assay, if configured. 15. Date Completed / Time completed: Shows the date and time the result completed.
Appendix A-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Procedure Report, Basic

Use this report as a hardcopy record of a maintenance or diagnostic procedure performed on your system. You can configure this report to print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Procedure: Shows the name of the procedure.
Appendix A-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. Procedure version: Shows the version of the procedure. 4. Date: Shows the date the procedure was performed. 5. Module no.: Shows the number of the module on which the procedure was performed. 6. Time: Shows the time when the procedure was performed. 7. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the module on which the procedure was performed. 8. Status: Shows the status of the procedure. 9. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed. 10. Results: Shows the results of the procedure.
Appendix A-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Procedure Report, Columnar

Use this report as a hardcopy record of a maintenance or diagnostic procedure performed on your system. You can configure this report to print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Procedure: Shows the name of the procedure.
Appendix A-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. Procedure version: Shows the version of the procedure. 4. Date: Shows the date the procedure was performed. 5. Module no.: Shows the number of the module on which the procedure was performed. 6. Time: Shows the time when the procedure was performed. 7. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the module on which the procedure was performed. 8. Status: Shows the status of the procedure. 9. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed. 10. Results: Shows the results of the procedure.
Appendix A-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Analysis Report
QC Analysis Report
Appendix A-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Analysis Report
Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Assay Name: Shows the name of the assay. 5. Module: Shows the module number on which the controls were run. 6. Control Name: Shows the name of the control. 7. Module Serial Number: Shows the serial number of the module on which the controls were run. 8. Control Level: Shows the level of the control. 9. Date Range: Shows the date range selected for the QC report. 10. Control Lot Number: Shows the lot number of the control. 11. Control Expiration Date: Shows the expiration date of the control. 12. Calculation Type: Shows the calculation type, which includes cumulative data for both the module and the system. 13. Date / Time (column): Shows the date and time for each control result. 14. Results (column): Shows the results for each control. Results with an asterisk are excluded from the calculations. 15. Units (column): Shows the units for each control result. 16. Reagent Lot Number: Shows the lot number for the reagent kit used to run the control. 17. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 18. Flags: Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245. 19. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 20. EXPECTED:
Appendix A-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Analysis Report
Shows the expected mean and standard deviation configured. 21. MANUFACTURER: Shows the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured. 22. MODULE CUMULATIVE: Shows the module cumulative data for the control run on the specified module. 23. SYSTEM CUMULATIVE: Shows the system cumulative data for the control run on the system. This data is the same as the module cumulative data when there is only one module. 24. MODULE DATA FOR DATE RANGE: Shows the module data calculated for the specified module and date range. 25. SYSTEM DATA FOR DATE RANGE: Shows the system data calculated for the date range. This data is the same as the module data for date range when there is only one module.
Appendix A-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Result Details Report
Appendix A

Appendix A-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Control name: Shows the name and level of the control. 5. Assay: Shows the name of the assay. 6. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 7. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 8. Control lot number: Shows the lot number of the control. 9. Module / Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the assay was run. 10. Control comment: Shows the comment entered for the control. 11. Cal. lot: Shows the calibrator lot number for the calibration used to calculate the result. 12. Cal. date / time: Shows the calibration date and time for the reagent lot used to calculate the result. 13. Reagent master lot: Shows the reagent master lot for the calibration used to calculate the result. 14. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 15. Date completed: Shows the date the control completed. 16. Time completed: Shows the time the control completed. 17. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. 18. C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
Appendix A-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
19. Result (column): Shows the value of the control result. 20. Units (column): Shows the units for the control result. 21. Range (column): Shows the range configured for the control. 22. Dilution (column): Shows the dilution used for the test. 23. Flags (column): Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245. 24. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 25. mV (column): Shows the millivolt value for the control result. 26. Cuvette (column): Shows the number of the cuvette used to process the control.
Appendix A-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Results List Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system and as a hardcopy record of QC results.
Appendix A-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
5. Module (column): Shows the module that generated the control result. 6. SID (column): Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 7. Control name (column): Shows the name and level for the control. 8. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 9. Result (column): Shows the value of the control result. 10. Flags (column): Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245. 11. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 12. Date / Time (column): Shows the date and time the control result was completed.
Appendix A-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Summary Report
QC Summary Report
Appendix A-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

QC Summary Report
Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Start Date: Shows the Start Date entered in the QC summary review screen. 5. End Date: Shows the End Date entered in the QC summary review screen. 6. Control Name: Shows the name of the control. 7. Module: Shows the module that generated the control result(s). 8. Control Lot Number: Shows the lot number of the control 9. Module Serial Number: Shows the serial number of the module on which the controls were run. 10. Assay: Shows the name of the assay. 11. Level: Shows the level of the control. 12. N: Shows the number of samples for that control level within the specified date range. 13. Actual: Shows the Mean, SD, and %CV for that control level within the specified date range. 14. Expected: Shows the expected mean and standard deviation configured.
Appendix A-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent Load Error Report

Use this report to troubleshoot reagent load errors.
Appendix A-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Module: Shows the number of the module in which the reagent is located. 5. Reagent status: Shows the status of the reagent kit. 6. Assays: Shows the name of the assay. 7. Location (column): Shows the position in which you loaded the reagent bottle/cartridge. 8. Serial number / Onboard (column): Shows the serial number of the reagent bottle/cartridge loaded on board the reagent carousel(s). 9. Serial number / Expected (column): Shows the serial number of the reagent bottle/cartridge expected to be loaded on the reagent carousel(s).
Appendix A-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reagent Status Report (i 2000/i 2000SR)

Use this report to quickly identify empty reagent kits.
Appendix A-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. M / P (column): Shows the module and position in which the reagent kit is located. 5. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 6. Cal status (column) Shows the status of the calibration for the reagent lot. 7. Reagent lot (column): Shows the lot number of the reagent kit. 8. Remaining tests (column): Shows an estimated number of tests remaining for the reagent kit (c System). Shows the number of tests remaining for the reagent kit (i System). 9. Reagent status (column): Shows the status of the reagent kit. 10. Exp. date (column): Shows the date on which the reagent kit expires. 11. Stability (column): Shows the number of onboard stability days/hours remaining for the reagent kit.
Appendix A-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Rerun List Report
Rerun List Report

Use this report to find samples that have reruns ordered.
Appendix A-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Rerun List Report
Appendix A
Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. *C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
5. SID (column): Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Name (column): Shows the name of the patient or control. 7. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 8. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Appendix A-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Result Details Report

Use this report to troubleshoot your system. Up to three result details print per page.
Appendix A-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix A
3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Name: Shows the name of the patient. 5. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 6. Assay: Shows the name of the assay. 7. Patient ID: Shows the ID assigned to the patient. 8. Assay number: Shows the number assigned to the assay. 9. Draw date / time: Shows the date and time the sample was drawn. 10. Module / Serial no.: Shows the module and serial number on which the test was run. 11. Sample comment: Shows the comment entered for the test. 12. Cal. lot: Shows the calibrator lot number for the calibration used to calculate the result. 13. Cal. date/time: Shows the calibration date and time for the reagent lot used to calculate the result. 14. Reagent master lot: Shows the reagent master lot for the calibration used to calculate the result. 15. Serial no.: Shows the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. 16. Date completed: Shows the date the result completed. 17. Location: Shows the location associated with the patient. 18. Time completed: Shows the time the result completed. 19. Doctor: Shows the name of the patient's doctor. 20. Operator ID: Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed.
Appendix A-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

21. C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
22. Result (column): Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. 23. Units (column): Shows the units for the result. 24. Range (column): Shows the normal / therapeutic range for the assay, if configured. 25. Dilution (column): Shows the dilution used for the test. 26. Flags (column): Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. 27. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 28. RLU (column): Shows the RLU (relative light unit) value for the result.
Appendix A-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Results List Report
Appendix A
Results List Report

Use this report as a hardcopy record of the results generated by your system. You can configure this report to print automatically. See Configure report settings, page 2-7.
Legend: 1. Report title: Shows the name of the report. 2. Operator ID:
Appendix A-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Results List Report
Shows the ID of the operator logged on when the report was printed. 3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. C / P (column): Shows the sample location for one of the following: Carrier ID and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the sample carousel (c System) LAS - Shown if the sample was pipetted from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
5. Module (column): Shows the module that generated the test result. 6. SID (column): Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 7. Name (column): Shows the name of the patient associated with the result. 8. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 9. Result (column): Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. 10. Flags (column): Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. 11. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. 12. Date / Time (column): Shows the date and time the test result was completed.
Appendix A-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample Report
Appendix A
Sample Report
Use this report as a hardcopy sample record. If you add a test to an existing order, the system generates a separate sample report for that test unless the original order is still pending.
Legend: 1. Report header: Shows the configured report header information. 2. Name: Shows the name of the patient.
Appendix A-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Gender: Shows the gender of the patient. 4. Patient ID: Shows the ID assigned to the patient. 5. Birthdate: Shows the birthdate of the patient. 6. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 7. Draw date / time: Shows the date and time the sample was drawn. 8. Location: Shows the location associated with the patient. 9. Doctor: Shows the name of the patient's doctor. 10. Assay: Shows the name of the assay. 11. Result: Shows the value and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. 12. Units: Shows the units for the result. 13. Flags: Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. 14. Range: Shows the normal / therapeutic range for the assay, if configured. 15. Date Completed / Time completed: Shows the date and time the result completed.
Sample Report
Appendix A-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample Status Report
Appendix A

Use this report to check the status of a sample or as a hardcopy record of the results generated by your system.
Appendix A-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. System serial number: Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Sample ID: Shows the bar code number or ID assigned to the sample. 5. C / P: Shows the carrier or carousel (CRSL) ID and position for the sample. 6. Name: Shows the name of the patient. 7. Bay (column): Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) 8. Assay (column): Shows the name of the assay. 9. Status / Result (column): Displays the:
Status - current status of the test, see Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Time the order will complete (in 24- hour format), for all samples with a status of Running Result - value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of result Date and time the result was completed
Shows the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225.
10. Flags (column):
11. Code (column): Shows the code(s) to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Appendix A-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Temporary Message Log Report
Appendix A

Appendix A-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Shows the serial number configured for your ARCHITECT System. 4. Date (column): Shows the date the temporary message occurred. 5. Time (column): Shows the time the temporary message occurred. 6. Module (column): Shows the module that generated the temporary message. 7. Error code / Message text (column): Shows the numeric error code for the exception and the message text that describes the error that occurred.
Appendix A-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix B
Verification of i System assay claims
Introduction
You can verify the ARCHITECT i System assay claims by performing verification protocols. These protocols are categorized into method groups. You can find the method group number for an assay under QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES/VERIFICATION of the ASSAY CLAIMS section in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Method groups for verification protocols

Method Group Number Protocol Analytical sensitivity Functional sensitivity Precision Reportable range / calibration verification Automated dilution verification Methods comparison (correlation) Methods comparison (concordance) Analytical specificity Reference range Group 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 1 Group 2 Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 2 N/A Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 1 Group 3 N/A N/A Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 1 Group 4 Method 2 N/A Method 1 Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 2 Method 1 N/A Group 5 N/A Method 1 Method 1 N/A N/A N/A Method 2 N/A N/A Group 6 Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 3 N/A Method 1 N/A Method 1 Method 1
Verification of i System assay claims topics include: Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection), page Appendix B-3 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation), page Appendix B-6 Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution), page Appendix B-11 Precision - method 1, page Appendix B-14 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1, page Appendix B-16 Reportable range/calibration verificationmethod 2, page Appendix B-22
Appendix B-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Verification of i System assay claims Appendix B

Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3, page Appendix B-28 Automated dilution verification - method 1, page Appendix B-34 Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation), page Appendix B-37 Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance), page Appendix B-39 Analytical specificity - method 1, page Appendix B-43 Reference range - method 1, page Appendix B-44
Appendix B-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection)

This method uses the LOD (limit of detection) at a 95% confidence level to determine assay sensitivity on an ARCHITECT i System. A worksheet and example are provided: Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-4 Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example, page Appendix B-5
Procedure 1. Run MasterCheck Level 0 (zero conc.) in replicates of 10. 2. Run MasterCheck Level 1 in replicates of 4. NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. Data evaluation 1. Calculate the mean and standard deviation for the MasterCheck Level 0 (zero conc.) replicates and the mean for the MasterCheck Level 1 replicates. 2. Determine the sensitivity using the following formula:
NOTE: The concentration of MasterCheck Level 1 changes with each lot. Therefore, insert the concentration listed on the data sheet for that particular lot. Analytical sensitivity = __________
Appendix B-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet
Appendix B-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Analytical sensitivity - method 1 data sheet example
Appendix B-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation)
Appendix B

This method uses the LOQ (limit of quantitation), the concentration value of the last dilution at which the observed values still fall inside the tolerance limits established for MasterCheck Level 1, to determine assay sensitivity on an ARCHITECT i System. Worksheets and examples are provided: Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet, page Appendix B-7 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph, page Appendix B-8 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example, page Appendix B-9 Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example, page Appendix B-10
Procedure 1. Prepare the following serial dilutions of MasterCheck Level 1 with MasterCheck Level 0. 1:2, 1:4, 1:8, 1:16, 1:32, and so forth until the expected value is well below the claimed value. NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material.
Dilution 1 2 3 4 5 6 Level 1 1:2 1:4 1:8 1:16 1:32 Volume of Level 1 _____ L 400 L 400 L of Dilution 2 400 L of Dilution 3 400 L of Dilution 4 400 L of Dilution 5 Volume of Level 0 0 L 400 L 400 L 400 L 400 L 400 L Expected Value Label Value Label Value/2 Label Value/4 Label Value/8 Label Value/16 Label Value/32
2. Run the serial dilutions and the undiluted MasterCheck Level 1 in replicates of 4. Data evaluation 1. Calculate the mean for each level. 2. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory. Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable tolerance limits.
Appendix B-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

3. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges, and then record the upper and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet. 4. Plot the assayed value mean versus the expected value on the graph, and then the tolerance limits.
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet
Appendix B-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph
Appendix B-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Analytical sensitivity - method 2 data sheet example
Appendix B-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Analytical sensitivity - method 2 graph example
Appendix B-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution)

This method uses serial dilution of positive samples and comparison of performance to a reference method to determine the sensitivity of a qualitative assay on an ARCHITECT i System. If an assay has comparable sensitivity the dilution factor should be equivalent or better than the reference method. A worksheet and example are provided: Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet, page Appendix B-12 Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example, page Appendix B-13
Procedure 1. Prepare the following serial dilutions of 5 or more positive samples (mid to high-range) with a known negative sample: 1:2, 1:4, 1:8, 1:16, 1:32 (and so forth until the sample is nonreactive) NOTE: The positive and negative samples should be serum or plasma of the same anticoagulant type. 2. Run 2 replicates of the undiluted sample and each dilution for each method. Data evaluation 1. Average the 2 replicates for each sample. 2. Determine the highest dilution at which the sample was reactive for each method.
Appendix B-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet
Appendix B-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Functional sensitivity - method 1 serial dilution data sheet example
Appendix B-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Precision - method 1
Appendix B
This method uses the calculation of mean values to determine assay precision on an ARCHITECT i System. Precision indicates how well the assay or system provides the same result when a given sample is tested repeatedly. Within-run and total precision is used to evaluate the performance of an assay or system. Within-run precision provides a "best case" estimate of the expected performance since there is minimal opportunity for conditions to change during the course of the run. Total precision is the most realistic assessment of the performance because it includes variables such as different operators and laboratory conditions. Precision data for assays on the ARCHITECT i System is found under the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section in the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert. A worksheet is provided: Precision - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-14
Procedure 1. Determine the material to use (Abbott control material, commercial control material, or patient pool). 2. Run the material in duplicate, twice a day. NOTE: The runs should be at least two hours apart. Data evaluation 1. Calculate the mean values for both runs. 2. Perform the appropriate calculation to determine the precision. See the SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS section of the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert.
Precision - method 1 data sheet
Appendix B-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1
Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification method 1

This method uses the measurement of samples throughout the reportable range to determine the reportable range/calibration verification for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System. The terms reportable range and calibration verification are interchangeable and use the same protocol. When MasterCheck is available for an i System this method uses the measurement of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3. If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. If the value exceeds the assay range, method 1 uses an 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3. If MasterCheck is not available, substitute Calibrator F when available. NOTE: By adding MasterCheck Level 4 to the run you can perform this procedure concurrently with the automated dilution verification procedure. Worksheets and examples are provided: Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-18 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph, page Appendix B-19 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet example, page Appendix B-20 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example, page Appendix B-21
Procedure 1. Determine the number of replicates (up to 3) to run. 2. Run MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 as unknown samples. If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the assay range, make an 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3 using eight parts MasterCheck Level 3 to two parts MasterCheck Level 0. NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. 3. Use the appropriate analytical sensitivity method for the specific assay to determine the limit of detection.
Appendix B-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Data evaluation 1. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory. Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable tolerance limits. 2. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges, and then record the upper and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet. 3. Average the replicates for each level if you ran more than one replicate. 4. Plot the assayed MasterCheck value on the Y-axis of the graph versus the expected MasterCheck value on the X-axis. If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the calibrator range, plot the calculated value of the 8:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3. 5. Plot the lower tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis. 6. Plot the upper tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis. 7. Connect the points for each of the three lines. If the line formed by connecting the points for the assayed MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 values falls between the upper and lower tolerance limits, the reportable range is verified. Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1
Appendix B-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 data sheet
Appendix B-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph
Appendix B-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 - data sheet example
Appendix B-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reportable range/calibration verification - method 1 graph example
Appendix B-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reportable range/calibration verificationmethod 2
Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verificationmethod 2

This method uses the measurement of samples throughout the reportable range to determine the reportable range/calibration verification for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System. The terms reportable range and calibration verification are interchangeable and use the same protocol. When MasterCheck is available for an i System this method uses the measurement of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3. If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. If the value exceeds the assay range, method 2 uses an 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3. Worksheets and examples are provided: Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet, page Appendix B-24 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 graph, page Appendix B-25 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet example, page Appendix B-26 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 graph example, page Appendix B-26
Procedure 1. Determine the number of replicates (up to 3) to run. 2. Run MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 as unknown samples. If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the assay range, make a 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3 using nine parts MasterCheck Level 3 to one part MasterCheck Level 0. NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. 3. Use the appropriate analytical sensitivity method for the specific assay to determine the limit of detection. Data evaluation 1. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory. Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable tolerance limits.
Appendix B-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

2. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges, and then record the upper and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet. 3. Average the replicates for each level if you ran more than one replicate. 4. Plot the assayed MasterCheck value on the Y-axis of the graph versus the expected MasterCheck value on the X-axis. If the value of MasterCheck Level 3 exceeds the calibrator range, plot the calculated value of the 9:10 dilution of MasterCheck Level 3. 5. Plot the lower tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis. 6. Plot the upper tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis. 7. Connect the points for each of the three lines. If the line formed by connecting the points for the assayed MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 values falls between the upper and lower tolerance limits, the reportable range is verified.
Appendix B-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Appendix B-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 2 data sheet example
Appendix B-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification method 3

This method uses the measurement of samples throughout the reportable range to determine the reportable range/calibration verification for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System. The terms reportable range and calibration verification are interchangeable and use the same protocol. When MasterCheck is available for an i System this method uses the measurement of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3. If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. Worksheets and examples are provided: Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet, page Appendix B-30 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 graph, page Appendix B-31 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet example, page Appendix B-32 Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 graph example, page Appendix B-32
Procedure 1. Determine the number of replicates (up to 3) to run. 2. Run MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 as unknown samples. NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. 3. Use the appropriate analytical sensitivity method for the specific assay to determine the limit of detection. Data evaluation 1. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory. Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable tolerance limits. 2. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges, and then record the upper and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet. 3. Average the replicates for each level if you ran more than one replicate.
Appendix B-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

4. Plot the assayed MasterCheck value on the Y-axis of the graph versus the expected MasterCheck value on the X-axis. 5. Plot the lower tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis. 6. Plot the upper tolerance limit on the Y-axis versus the expected values of MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 on the X-axis. 7. Connect the points for each of the three lines. If the line formed by connecting the points for the assayed MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 values falls between the upper and lower tolerance limits, the reportable range is verified.
Appendix B-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Appendix B-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Reportable range/calibration verification - method 3 data sheet example
Appendix B-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Automated dilution verification - method 1
Appendix B

This method uses the calculation of a mean value to verify the automated dilution for an assay on an ARCHITECT i System. NOTE: By adding MasterCheck Levels 0, 2, and 3 to the run you can perform this procedure concurrently with the reportable range procedure. A worksheet and example are provided: Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet, page Appendix B-35 Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example, page Appendix B-35
Procedure 1. Determine the number of replicates (up to 3) to run. 2. Run MasterCheck Level 4 using the automated dilution protocol. NOTE: If MasterCheck is not available, substitute other appropriate material. 3. Perform the following steps if the value of MasterCheck Level 4 exceeds the assay range: a. b. Prepare the desired manual dilution of MasterCheck Level 4 (for example, 8:10) using MasterCheck Level 0. Run the diluted MasterCheck Level 4 with the automated dilution protocol in replicates of up to 3.
Data evaluation 1. Determine the tolerance limits acceptable to your laboratory. Your laboratory is responsible for determining acceptable tolerance limits. 2. Calculate the tolerance limit ranges. Record the upper and lower tolerance limits on the data sheet. 3. If more than one replicate was run, average the results obtained. If the value of MasterCheck Level 4 exceeds the calibrator range, evaluate the calculated value of the manual dilution for MasterCheck Level 4. 4. If the assayed MasterCheck Level 4 value falls between the upper and lower tolerance limits, the automated dilution for this assay is verified.
Appendix B-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet
Automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet example
Appendix B-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Appendix B-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Methods comparison - method 1 (correlation)

This method uses correlation to determine the method comparison between your existing assay method and the ARCHITECT i System assay method. A worksheet is provided: Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet, page Appendix B-38
Procedure 1. Determine the number of samples to run ensuring adequate distribution throughout the assay range. 2. Run the samples. 3. Record the sample values using the X column for your existing method and the Y column for the ARCHITECT i System method values.
Appendix B-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Methods comparison - method 1 correlation data sheet
Appendix B-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Methods comparison - method 2 (concordance)

This method uses concordance to determine the method comparison between your existing assay method and the ARCHITECT i System. Concordance is a study used to compare the agreement between two methods when assessing the distribution of values in specific concentration ranges (for example, at a cut-off value). Worksheets and examples are provided: Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet, page Appendix B-40 Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet, page Appendix B-41 Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet example, page Appendix B-41
Procedure 1. Determine the number of samples to run ensuring adequate distribution throughout the assay range. 2. Run the samples. 3. Record the sample values using the X column for your existing method and the Y column for the ARCHITECT i System method values. 4. Determine the concordance using the following formula. % Concordance = (total true positives and true negatives)/total samples x 100 5. Determine the specificity, correct true negative results, using the following formula. (optional) % Specificity = true negatives/(total true negatives and false positives) x 100 6. Determine the sensitivity, correct true positive results, using the following formula. (optional) % Sensitivity = true positives/(total true positives and false negatives) x 100 Where:
True negative True positive = = Negative by both reference and test method Positive by both reference and test method
Appendix B-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
False negative = False positive =
Negative by test method; positive by reference method Positive by test method; negative by reference method
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance data sheet
Appendix B-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet
Methods comparison - method 2 concordance calculation sheet example
Appendix B-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Appendix B
Appendix B-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Analytical specificity - method 1
Analytical specificity - method 1

See the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert for the description of the procedure used and the results for specificity and interferences studies. Procedures in NCCLS Document EP-7, Vol. 6, No. 13 were followed.
Appendix B-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Reference range - method 1
Appendix B
Reference range - method 1

Initially use the reference range for the specific ARCHITECT i assay as stated in the assay-specific package insert. NOTE: Your laboratory is responsible for determining the appropriate reference range(s).
Appendix B-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix C
Math models
Introduction
Data reduction/calibration methods use various math models to analyze a set of given data and calculate results. These math models may range in complexity from simple subtraction to polynomial equations. Math model topics include: c System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2 i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-13 i System adjustment methods, page Appendix C-19
Appendix C-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
c System data reduction methods
Appendix C

The ARCHITECT c System uses photometric and potentiometric technology to measure analyte concentrations in samples. Data reduction/calibration methods are specific to the technology type. c System data reduction methods topics include: Photometric data reduction methods, page Appendix C-2 Potentiometric data reduction method, page Appendix C-8
Photometric data reduction methods

Photometric data reduction/calibration methods analyze photometric read data to calculate results. Photometric data reduction methods include: Absorbance method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2 Factor method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-2 Linear method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-3 Logit-4 method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-5 Spline method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-6 Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System), page Appendix C-7
Absorbance method (photometric - c System)

The absorbance data reduction method uses the comparison between the absorbance of the sample and the absorbance of water to calculate results. For end-point assays the data is expressed as absorbance and for rate assays the data is expressed as the rate of absorbance change/minute.
Factor method (photometric - c System)

The Factor data reduction method uses a reagent blank and a fixed cal factor value to calculate results. This method is applicable to assays for which the reaction is linear and stable across all reagent lots. It is ideal for measuring enzyme activity in a sample at a predictable and steady rate that can be determined for the chromophore, wavelengths, and instrument in use. The enzyme activity or sample concentration is calculated using the following equation:
Appendix C-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models Appendix C

X = (A-Ablk) x Factor Where:
X A Ablk Factor = = = = Activity or concentration of the sample (unknown) Absorbance or absorbance change of the unknown Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank Calibration factor
Linear method (photometric - c System)

The linear data reduction method uses a reagent blank and one to six calibrators to generate a point-to-point calibration curve. The slope is calculated for each segment of the curve between the calibrator levels. Figure Appendix C.1: Linear calibration curve - six calibrators
Legend:
blk C1 to C6 Ablk Ac1 to Ac6 Concentration of the reagent blank Concentration of calibrator Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
The absorbance or absorbance change measured for the sample determines which of the following equations are used to calculate the sample concentration. When A Ac1
Appendix C-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
X = F1 (A - Ablk) + blk
When Ac1 < A Ac2 X = F2 (A - Ac1) + C1
When Ac5 < A X = F6 (A - Ac5) + C5
Where:
A Ac1 to Ac6 Ablk X = = = = Absorbance or absorbance change of the sample (unknown) Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank Concentration of the sample (unknown)
Appendix C-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

C1 to C6 blk F1 to F6
= = =
Concentration of calibrator Concentration of the reagent blank Cal factor (1 / slope)
Logit-4 method (photometric - c System)

The Logit-4 data reduction method uses a reagent blank and three to six calibrators to generate a calibration curve. This method is applicable to assays for which the absorbance or absorbance change increases as the calibrator concentration increases. Figure Appendix C.2: Logit-4 calibration curve - three to six calibrators
Legend:
blk C1 to C(n) X Ablk Ac1 to Ac(n) A Concentration of the reagent blank Concentration of calibrator Concentration of unknown sample Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator Absorbance or absorbance change of the unknown sample
The equation used in the approximation is:
Appendix C-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
Where:
A Kc, a, b Ablk X ln = = = = = Absorbance or absorbance change of the sample (unknown) Constants of the approximation expression Approximate value of the absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank Concentration of sample (unknown) Natural log
When the concentration is close to 0, the Logit-4 calibration curve converges asymptotically toward the absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank as the concentration approaches 0. This convergence may not show on the graph if the scale is too large. The approximation expression is simple and the constant is determined through approximation by non-linear regression. Therefore, the curve may not always pass through the absorbance (or absorbance change) data points of the calibrator. It is possible to set a parameter to detect an error if the SD (standard deviation) of the absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrators exceeds the user-specified value.
Spline method (photometric - c System)

The spline data reduction method uses a reagent blank and three to six calibrators to generate a calibration curve. The concentration axis of the calibration curve graph is divided into multiple sections with the divisions corresponding to the concentrations of the calibrators. Each section of the curve is interpolated using a polynomial expression so that the adjoining sections are connected smoothly.
Appendix C-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure Appendix C.3: Spline calibration curve - three to six calibrators
Legend:
blk C1 to C(n) Ablk Ac1 to Ac(n) Concentration of the reagent blank Concentration of calibrator Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator
The polynomial equation used is:
Where:
A a(n), b(n), c(n), d(n) X = = = Absorbance or absorbance change of the sample (unknown) Constants of the approximation expression Concentration of sample (unknown)
Use factor and blank method (photometric - c System)

The use factor and blank data reduction method uses the factor and reagent blank of a calibration curve generated for another assay
Appendix C-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
(reference assay) to calculate results. This method is used when two or more assays use the same reagents. The reference assay is defined in the assay parameter file. Figure Appendix C.4: Use factor and blank - linear calibration curve
Legend:
blk Ac1' Ablk' C1' Concentration of the reagent blank Absorbance or absorbance change of the calibrator used for the reference test Absorbance or absorbance change of the reagent blank for the reference test Concentration of the calibrator used for the reference test
The equation used is:
Potentiometric data reduction method

The potentiometric data reduction method analyzes electrical potential data to calculate electrolyte results. There are three components to the potentiometric method:
Appendix C-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-9 Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-10 Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System), page Appendix C-11
Electromotive force measurement (potentiometric - c System)

The electromotive force measurement uses the difference (potential difference) between the electromotive force of an unknown sample and the electromotive force of the ICT Reference Solution, measured immediately after the sample, to determine electrolyte concentration. Figure Appendix C.5: Electromotive force calculation
Where:
Ei = Potential difference between the sample and ICT Reference Solution for each electrode Potential of each electrode (i), in contact with ICT Reference Solution Potential of each electrode (i), in contact with the sample Ion of interest (Na+, K+, and Cl-) Electromotive force expressed in millivolts
Es,i i EMF
= = =
Appendix C-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
Slope calculation (potentiometric - c System)

The slope calculation uses the differences (potential differences) between the electromotive forces of two calibrators and the electromotive force of the ICT Reference Solution and compares them to the calibrator concentrations to generate a calibration curve. Two graphs are generated: Calibration graph showing the relationship of the ion electrolyte concentration to the electromotive force Electrode response curve during calibration
Figure Appendix C.6: Relationship between ion electrolyte concentration and electromotive force
Where:
S CL, CH CN EL, EH Ci EMF = = = = = = Slope (mV/decade) of each electrode Concentration of the Low and High Calibrators Concentration of ICT Reference Solution Difference in potential of each electrode between the ICT Reference Solution and the calibrator Concentration of the specific ion of interest Electromotive force expressed in millivolts
Appendix C-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Figure Appendix C.7: Electrode (mV) response curve during calibration
Where:
CL, CH CN EL, EH Ci EMF = = = = = Concentration of the Low and High Calibrators Concentration of ICT Reference Solution Difference in potential of each electrode between the ICT Reference Solution and the calibrator Concentration of the specific ion of interest Electromotive force expressed in millivolts
Sample measurement (potentiometric - c System)

The sample measurement uses the following data to determine the electrolyte (ICT) concentration in an unknown sample: The difference between the electromotive forces of the unknown sample and the ICT Reference Solution The difference between the electromotive forces of the low calibrator and the ICT Reference Solution The slope of the specific ICT electrode
The following equation is used:
Appendix C-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
Figure Appendix C.8: Electrode (mV) response curve during sample measurement
Where:
Ci CL S Ei EL = = = = = Concentration of the specific ion of interest in the sample Concentration of the ion of interest in the Low Calibrator (This is the baseline for sample calculations.) Slope of the ICT electrode of interest Difference in electrode potential when exposed to the sample and ICT Reference Solution Difference in the ICT electrode potential when exposed to ICT Reference Solution and the Low Calibrator during calibration Concentration of ICT Reference Solution Electromotive force expressed in millivolts
CN EMF
= =
Appendix C-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

i System data reduction methods

The ARCHITECT i System uses CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) technology to measure analyte concentrations in samples. Data reduction/calibration methods are specific to this type of technology. i System data reduction methods topics include: Point to point method (i System), page Appendix C-13 Linear regression method (i System), page Appendix C-13 4PLC methods (i System), page Appendix C-15 Cutoff assay method (i System), page Appendix C-17
Point to point method (i System)

The point to point data reduction method uses the average RLU (relative light unit) value obtained for each calibrator compared to the calibrator concentration to generate a calibration curve. A straight line is used to connect each point and the slope is calculated for each line segment. Concentrations of unknown samples are calculated from the line segment that brackets the sample RLU values. Figure Appendix C.9: Point to point calibration method
For example, if a sample has an RLU value between the RLU values for Calibrator B and Calibrator C, the unknown sample concentration is calculated using the following equation:
Linear regression method (i System)

The linear regression data reduction method uses the linear relationship between the RLU (relative light unit) value and the
Appendix C-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
concentration of the analyte in the sample as follows to generate a calibration curve:
The intercept in this case is the RLU value at concentration zero. The slope defines how much the concentration increases when the RLU value increases. Figure Appendix C.10: Linear regression calibration method
The unknown specimen concentration is calculated using the following equation:
Slope and intercept are obtained from the calibration. The parameters are determined by minimizing the sum of squares of the difference between the observed and predicted (by the regression equation) values for all calibrators as shown in the following formulas:
Appendix C-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Where:
= Standard deviation associated with a calibrator
Observed calibrator concentration
Observed calibrator RLU value
4PLC methods (i System)

4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit or four-parameter logistic calibration) data reduction methods use the difference between the predicted and observed calibrator concentration or signal to generate a calibration curve. 4PLC is calculated as follows:
Appendix C-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
The four parameters (P1 through P4) control the shape of the curve. Depending on the data generated a 4PLC curve can be either sigmoidal (S-shaped) or have no second bend at all. The four parameters are used as follows:
Defines the signal at an infinite concentration
Defines the maximum theoretical range of the RLU (relative light unit) value from concentration zero to infinity
Defines the concentration that yields a signal midway between the highest and the lowest possible signal
Determines if the curve is S-shaped. The curve is S-shaped when P4>1.
These parameters are calculated to find the P values that result in a curve with the lowest sum of squares.
There are two types of 4PLC curve fit methods: 4PLC with x residual minimization (x weighted) 4PLC with y residual minimization (y weighted)
4PLC with x residual minimization (x-weighted) method (i System)

The 4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit) with x-residual minimization data reduction method uses the difference between the predicted and observed calibrator concentration to generate a calibration curve. The four parameters are computed to result in the lowest possible sum of squares using the following equation:
Appendix C-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Where:
= Observed calibrator concentration
Predicted calibrator concentration
Standard deviation associated with a calibrator
4PLC with y residual minimization (y-weighted) method (i System)

The 4PLC (four-parameter logistic curve fit) with y-residual minimization data reduction method uses the difference between the predicted and observed calibrator signals to generate a calibration curve. The four parameters are computed to result in the lowest possible sum of squares using the following equation:
Where:
= Observed calibrator signal (RLU)
Predicted calibrator signal (RLU)
Standard deviation associated with a calibrator
Cutoff assay method (i System)

The cutoff assay data reduction method uses a one or two point calibration to determine the point (cutoff) where reactive and non-reactive samples are differentiated. Cutoff formulas can use addition, subtraction, and multiplication and it is possible to add constants. Once the cutoff is determined the unknown sample RLU (relative light unit) value is divided by the cutoff to determine the cutoff ratio (index). For more information on the methods, see:
Appendix C-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System), page Appendix C-18 Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System), page Appendix C-18
One-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System)

The one point qualitative data reduction method uses one calibrator in the index formula. Depending on the cutoff formula, the calibrator can be either reactive or non-reactive for the assay. The following is an example of a one-point cutoff formula where a and b are assay-specific constants: Cutoff = a x Calibrator Signal + b
Two-point qualitative (index formula) method (i System)

The two point qualitative data reduction method uses two calibrators in the index formula. Depending on the cutoff formula, the calibrators for the assay can be: Both reactive Both non-reactive One reactive and the other non-reactive
The following is an example of a two-point cutoff formula where a and b are assay-specific constants: Cutoff = a x Calibrator 1 Signal + Calibrator 2 Signal - b
Appendix C-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

i System adjustment methods

Adjustment methods allow you to run two calibrator levels instead of six to calibrate an assay. The two calibrator levels (adjusters) are used to adjust the master calibration curve stored in the reagent bar code to reflect the actual RLU (relative light unit) values measured on your system. The ARCHITECT i System offers the following methods of calibration adjustment: Ratio technique method (i System), page Appendix C-19 Linear transformation method (i System), page Appendix C-20 Parameter method (i System), page Appendix C-21 Curve shape method (i System), page Appendix C-21
Ratio technique method (i System)

The ratio technique adjustment method compares the RLU (relative light unit) value of the calibrators to the corresponding calibrator values from the master calibration curve. This technique is used when the lower end of the calibration curve has different characteristics than the rest of the curve, but the general behavior of the curve is still proportional and linear. Ratios are calculated for calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 using the following formulas:
Where:
Calibrator1 Master1 = = RLU (value) measured for Calibrator 1 RLU (value) stored in the reagent bar code for the calibrator corresponding to Calibrator 1
Where:
Calibrator2 Master2 = = RLU (value) measured for Calibrator 2 RLU (value) stored in the reagent bar code for the calibrator corresponding to Calibrator 2
Appendix C-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
Two types of ratio techniques, A and AB, are used depending on which master calibrator level(s) is multiplied by ratio 1 and ratio 2. The ratio A technique adjustment method produces an estimate of RLU values by multiplying the RLU (relative light unit) value stored in the reagent bar code for: Calibrator A by ratio 1 Calibrator B through F by ratio 2
The ratio AB technique adjustment method produces an estimate of RLU values by multiplying the RLU (relative light unit) value stored in the reagent bar code for: Calibrators A and B by ratio 1 Calibrators C through F by ratio 2
The estimated instrument specific RLU values are used to generate the calibration curve.
Linear transformation method (i System)

The linear transformation adjustment method assumes a linear relationship between the calibrator RLU (relative light unit) values generated by the system and the master calibration information stored in the reagent bar code. The following is an example where the slope and intercept that describe the linear relationship are based on the RLU values of calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 generated by the system and their corresponding values stored in the reagent bar code. The slope is calculated as follows:
The intercept is calculated as follows:
The instrument RLU values for the six calibrators in the master calibration can be estimated as follows:
Appendix C-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

The resulting estimated instrument RLU values for the six calibrators are then used to generate the calibration curve using the appropriate calibration curve model.
Parameter method (i System)

The parameter adjustment method uses the RLU (relative light unit) values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the master calibration. Calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 adjusters are then used to provide an instrument specific calibration curve based on the parameters. The following equation is used to calculate the residual sum of squares for the parameter adjustment method:
Where:
= Population average parameter
System specific parameter
Standard deviation parameter
Predicted calibrator signal
Observed calibrator signal
Standard deviation of calibrator signal
Curve shape method (i System)

The curve shape adjustment method uses the RLU (relative light unit) values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the master calibration. Calibrator 1 and calibrator 2 adjusters are then
Appendix C-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Math models
Appendix C
used to provide an instrument-specific calibration curve based on the shape of the curve. The following equation is used to calculate the residual sum of squares for the curve shape adjustment method:
Where:
= Population average shape parameter
System specific shape parameter
Standard deviation shape parameter
Predicted calibrator signal
Observed calibrator signal
Standard deviation of calibrator signal
Appendix C-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix D
List numbers
ARCHITECT System
List numbers are unique identifiers that are used when ordering products. These numbers are provided for guidance only and are subject to change. Contact your Abbott representative for the most current list numbers. List numbers topics include: Consumable list numbers (c System), page Appendix D-2 Consumable list numbers (i System), page Appendix D-3 Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000), page Appendix D-4 Accessory kit list numbers (c 16000), page Appendix D-7 Accessory kit list number (i System), page Appendix D-10 Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12 Electronic media list numbers, page Appendix D-13 Manual list numbers, page Appendix D-14 SCC component list numbers, page Appendix D-15 Sample handler kit list numbers, page Appendix D-17 Processing module list numbers, page Appendix D-18
Appendix D-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Consumable list numbers (c System)
Appendix D
Consumable list numbers (c System)

Consumables are replenishable items required to run assays on an ARCHITECT c System. Contact your Abbott representative to order the following consumables.
ARCHITECT c System consumables

Item Acid Wash Solution Alkaline Wash Solution ICT Reference Solution ICT Cleaning Fluid ICT module Detergent A Detergent B Water Bath Additive Sample Cups Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) Small Cartridge, White (55 mL) Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) Large Cartridge, White (90 mL) 20 mL Truncated, Clear 20 mL Truncated, Opaque Container Caps Quantity 2 x 500 mL 2 x 500 mL 2x2L 10 x 12 mL 1 2 x 500 mL 4 x 250 mL 2 x 500 mL 1000/box 20/bag 20/bag 20/bag 20/bag 20/bag 20/bag 20/bag List Number 06K01-20 09D31-20 01E49-20 01E50-20 09D28-03 01J72-20 02J94-20 09D29-20 07C14-01 03E20-20 03E21-20 03E22-20 03E23-20 04J67-20 04J66-20 03E24-20
Appendix D-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers Appendix D

Consumable list numbers (i System)
Consumable list numbers (i System)

Consumables are replenishable items required to run assays on an ARCHITECT i System. Contact your Abbott representative to order the following consumables.
ARCHITECT i System consumables

Item Concentrated Wash Buffer: Concentrated Wash Buffer (1 L bottle) Concentrated Wash Buffer, ARCHITECT ARM (10 L cubitainer) Multi-Assay Manual Diluent Pre-Trigger Solution Trigger Solution Reaction Vessels Replacement Caps Septums Sample Cups 4 x 975 mL 1 x 9.75 L 1 x 100 mL 4 x 975 mL, 9000 tests/btl 4 x 975 mL, 3000 tests/btl 2000/box 100/box 200/box 1000/box 06C54-55 06C54-85 07D82-50 06E23-65 06C55-60 07C15-01 04D19-01 04D18-02 07C14-01 Quantity List Number
Appendix D-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit list numbers (c 8000)
Appendix D

There are three accessory kits for the ARCHITECT c 8000 System: Accessory kit 1 (c 8000) - LN 01G09-01, page Appendix D-4 contains items used for the installation of the system, items used to perform maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, and some spare accessories for as-needed component replacement. Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01, page Appendix D-6 - contains some consumable items used during installation of the system and while you perform any required validation studies, and two calibration tools used for some maintenance procedures. Customer maintenance kit (c 8000) - LN 02J53-01, page Appendix D-6 - contains all accessories required to perform scheduled maintenance for one year.
Your Abbott representative orders the accessory kits for you. Contact your Abbott representative to order individual items. For other accessories such as sample carriers, carrier trays, and cuvette segments see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12.
Accessory kit 1 (c 8000) - LN 01G09-01

Item Installation components Power Cable - UL and IEC Plug Waste and Water Tubing Kit High Concentration Waste Tubing Kit ICT Probe ICT Probe Holder Reagent Probe Reagent Probe Tubing Sample Probe Sample Probe Tubing 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 02J54-01 NA NA 09D63-03 NA 01G47-03 01G47-02 01G48-03 01G48-02 04J30-01 04J33-01 04J32-01 04J29-01 04J31-01 01G52-01 Quantity List Number
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A (Target) c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A, B, C c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Segment D (Target)
R2, Small Cartridge, Segment A (target) R2, Large Cartridge, Segment B, C, and D R2, Small Cartridge, Segment B, C, and D Maintenance components
Appendix D-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Accessory kit 1 (c 8000) - LN 01G09-01 (continued)
Item Phillips Screwdriver Slotted Screwdriver 10 mm Wrench Quantity 1 1 1 1 10 1 10 20 6 1 2 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 2 5 3 1 1 2 1 1 5 1 1 List Number NA NA NA 02J93-01 09D50-02 NA 09D22-11 09D22-06 09D41-02 NA 01G46-02 09D42-02 09F93-02 09D35-02 09D59-02 NA NA NA 01G47-03 01G47-02 09D53-02 09D39-02 09D40-02 02J51-01 09D43-02 01G48-03 01G48-02 09D52-02 09D37-02 09D38-02 NA 09D45-02 09D34-02
c 8000 Cuvette Segment Alignment Tool

Nozzle, Cleaning Wire Container, Parts case Accessories 20 mL Reagent Cartridge Adapter Small Reagent Cartridge Adapter Spare components 1 mL Syringe Cuvette Dry Tip Cuvette Pair Replacement Set Cuvette Wiper ICT O-ring ICT Reference Solution Check Valve Mixer Sample Probe Tubing, Joint to Syringe R1 Tubing, Joint to Syringe R2 Tubing, Joint to Syringe Reagent Probe Reagent Probe Tubing Reagent Syringe O-ring Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 1 Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 2 Reagent/Sample Probe Screw Reference/Wash Solution Line Filter Sample Probe Sample Probe Tubing Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #1 Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #2 Syringe Incoming Water Line Seal Source Lamp Wash Solution Check Valve
Appendix D-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D
Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01

Item Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) 20 mL Truncated, Clear Container Caps Sample Cups Quantity 1 bag of 20 1 bag of 20 1 bag of 20 1 bag of 20 1 box of 1000 List Number 03E22-20 03E20-20 04J67-20 03E24-20 07C14-01
Customer maintenance kit (c 8000) - LN 02J53-01

Item 1 mL Syringe ICT Reference Solution Check Valve Reagent Syringe O-ring Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 1 Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 2 Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #1 Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #2 Source Lamp Quantity 24 4 8 8 8 12 12 12 4 List Number 09D41-02 09D35-02 09D53-02 09D39-02 09D40-02 09D52-02 09D37-02 09D38-02 09D45-02
Appendix D-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007


There are three accessory kits for the ARCHITECT c 16000 System: Accessory kit 1 (c 16000) - LN 08L71-01, page Appendix D-7 contains items used for the installation of the system, items used to perform maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, and some spare accessories for as-needed component replacement. Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01, page Appendix D-9 - contains some consumable items used during installation of the system and while you perform any required validation studies, and two calibration tools used for some maintenance procedures. Customer maintenance kit (c 16000) - LN 08L72-01, page Appendix D-9 - contains all accessories required to perform scheduled maintenance for one year.
Your Abbott representative orders the accessory kits for you. Contact your Abbott representative to order individual items. For other accessories such as sample carriers, carrier trays, and cuvette segments see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12.
Accessory kit 1 (c 16000) - LN 08L71-01

Item Installation components Power Cable - UL and IEC Plug Waste and Water Tubing Kit High Concentration Waste Tubing Kit ICT Probe ICT Probe Holder Reagent Probe - R1A/R2B (L) Reagent Probe - R1B/R2A(r) Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2A Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2B Sample Probe Sample Probe Tubing 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 3 02J54-01 NA NA 09D63-03 NA 09D48-02 09D49-02 09D48-05 09D49-05 01G48-03 01G48-02 04J30-01 04J33-01 04J32-01 01G51-01 Quantity List Number
c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A (Target) c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Large Cartridge, Segment A, B, C c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Segment D (Target) c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Small Cartridge, Segment A, B, C
Maintenance components
Appendix D-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D
Accessory kit 1 (c 16000) - LN 08L71-01 (continued)

Item Phillips Screwdriver Slotted Screwdriver 10 mm Wrench Quantity 1 1 1 1 10 1 20 30 8 2 2 1 5 1 1 3 1 1 3 2 2 4 4 4 3 1 1 1 5 2 1 1 5 1 1 List Number NA NA NA 08L73-01 09D50-02 NA 09D22-11 09D22-06 09D41-02 09D51-02 09D33-03 09D42-02 09F93-02 09D35-02 09D59-02 09D46-20 09D48-02 09D49-02 09D48-10 09D48-05 09D49-05 09D53-02 09D39-02 09D40-02 09D43-02 01G48-03 01G48-02 NA 02J51-01 09D52-02 09D37-02 09D38-02 NA 09D45-02 09D34-02
c 16000 Cuvette Segment Alignment Tool

Nozzle Cleaning Wire Container, Parts case Accessories 20 mL Reagent Cartridge Adapter Small Reagent Cartridge Adapter Spare components 1 mL Syringe Cuvette Dry Tip Cuvette Pair Replacement Set Cuvette Wiper ICT O-ring ICT Reference Solution Check Valve Mixer Pipettor Arm Cover Screw Reagent Probe R1A/R2B Reagent Probe R1B/R2A Reagent Probe Screw Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2A Tubing, Joint to R Probe, R1 & 2B Reagent Syringe O-ring Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 1 Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 2 Reference/Wash Solution Line Filter Sample Probe Sample Probe Tubing Sample Probe Tubing, Joint to Syringe Probe Screw, c 8000 (Reagent and Sample)/c 16000 (Sample) Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #1 Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #2 Syringe Incoming Water Line Seal Source Lamp Wash Solution Check Valve
Appendix D-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Accessory kit 2 (c 8000 and c 16000) - LN 02K10-01
Item Large Cartridge, Natural (90 mL) Small Cartridge, Natural (55 mL) 20 mL Truncated, Clear Container Caps Sample Cups Quantity 1 bag of 20 1 bag of 20 1 bag of 20 1 bag of 20 1 box of 1000 List Number 03E22-20 03E20-20 04J67-20 03E24-20 07C14-01
Customer maintenance kit (c 16000) - LN 08L72-01

Item 1 mL Syringe ICT Reference Solution Check Valve Reagent Syringe O-ring Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 1 Reagent Syringe Seal Tip # 2 Sample/Wash Solution Syringe O-ring Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #1 Sample/Wash Solution Syringe Seal Tip #2 Source Lamp Quantity 32 4 16 16 16 12 12 12 4 List Number 09D41-02 09D35-02 09D53-02 09D39-02 09D40-02 09D52-02 09D37-02 09D38-02 09D45-02
Appendix D-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Accessory kit list number (i System)
Appendix D

The ARCHITECT i System accessory kit contains items used for the installation of the system, items used to perform maintenance and troubleshooting procedures, and some spare accessories for as-needed component replacement. Your Abbott representative orders the accessory kits for you. Contact your Abbott representative to order individual items. For other accessories such as an external thermometer, sample carriers, and carrier trays see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12. NOTE: Accessories for an i 2000SR processing module may contain common items labeled as ARCHITECT i 2000. These parts are interchangeable and you may use them on an i 2000SR.
ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR accessory kits - LN 08C94-01 (i 2000) and LN 03M77-01 (i 2000SR)
Item Quantity List Number
i 2000 and i 2000SR components - LN 08C94-01 and LN 03M77-01

Bag, Biohazard Bleach Preparation Container External Waste Tubing Filter, Buffer Filter, Card Cage/Supply Filter, Processing Center Maintenance Kit: Bar Code Calibration Tool Carrier Calibration Tool Flashlight Fuse Kit Grease Lens Paper Maintenance Cleaning Bottle Optics Cap WZ Probe Maintenance Water Bottle Screwdriver #1 Phillips Screwdriver #2 Phillips SH Bar Code Tool Thermistor Removal Wrench 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 06E67-01 05E13-01 NA NA NA NA 02G16-99 NA 06E68-01 NA NA 06E69-01 NA 12 1 1 1 2 1 NA 08C94-63 NA 08C94-28 08C94-07 08C94-14
Appendix D-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

ARCHITECT i 2000/i 2000SR accessory kits - LN 08C94-01 (i 2000) and LN 03M77-01 (i 2000SR) (continued)
Item Valve Removal Tool Power cord kit Probe, Wash Zone Probe (Sample/Reagent) Probe/Tubing, Waste Arm Sensor, Level, Buffer Sensor, Level, Trigger Sensor, Level, Pre-Trigger Tubing, Probe Tubing/Sensor, Temp, WZ Tubing, Wash Buffer Transfer Wash Buffer Preparation Container Wash Buffer Reservoir Quantity 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 List Number NA NA 08C94-35 08C94-42 08C94-89 08C94-25 08C94-26 08C94-27 08C94-49 08C94-87 08C94-21 08C94-56 NA 06E27-10 06E27-20 06E27-30 06E27-40 06E27-50 06E27-60 06E27-70 03M77-49 06E27-10 06E27-20 02J63-04 02J63-05 02J63-06 02J63-07
i 2000 components - LN 08C94-01

Internal component cover 1 Internal component cover 2 & 3 Internal component cover 4 (i 2000 accessory kit only) Internal component cover 5 (i 2000 accessory kit only) Internal component cover 6 (i 2000 accessory kit only) Internal component cover 7 (i 2000 accessory kit only) Internal component cover 8 (i 2000 accessory kit only)
i 2000SR components - LN 03M77-01

STAT Probe Tubing (i 2000SR accessory kit only) Internal component cover 1 Internal component cover 2 & 3 Internal component cover 4 (i 2000SR accessory kit only) Internal component cover 5 (i 2000SR accessory kit only) Internal component cover 6 (i 2000SR accessory kit only) Internal component cover 7 (i 2000SR accessory kit only)
Appendix D-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Additional accessory list numbers
Appendix D
Additional accessory list numbers

Additional accessories are products not included in an accessory kit. These products are used during routine processing, in maintenance procedures, and for component replacement. Contact your Abbott representative to order the following accessories.
Additional accessories
Item Alternate c System Reagent Supply Center Segments: c 8000 (R1)/c 16000 (R1 and R2) Small Cartridge, Segment A, B, C R2, large cartridge, segments B, C, and D R2, small cartridge, segments B, C, and D Cuvette Segment (c 8000) Cuvette Segment (c 16000) Cuvette Dry Tip (c 8000 and c 16000) LAS Sample Carousel ID Labels (i 2000) LAS Sample Carousels (i 2000) Pump Poppet Valve Set (c System) RSH Sample Carrier Trays Sample Carousel (c System) Sample Carousel Clip (c System) Sample Carriers Thermometer, External (i System) Carrier Calibration Tool Bar code Calibration Tool 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 sheet 2 1 2 1 1 10 1 1 1 01G51-01 04J31-01 01G52-01 01G46-01 09D32-03 09D51-02 08C96-25 08C96-07 09D36-02 04J49-01 02J50-01 04J45-01 05E15-01 08C94-88 05E13-01 06E67-01 Quantity List Number
Appendix D-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Electronic media list numbers
Electronic media list numbers

Some products are distributed on electronic media such as assay files, maintenance and diagnostic procedure files, and online documentation. Contact your Abbott representative to order the following electronic media.
Electronic media
Item ASIST software diskettes Assay disk, ARCHITECT c System: Assay disk (Conventional Units) Assay disk (SI Units) Assay CD-ROM, ARCHITECT i System: Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Assay CD-ROM - US Assay CD-ROM - Japan only Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition A Assay CD-ROM - US Addition A Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition B Assay CD-ROM - US Addition B Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition C Assay CD-ROM - WW (excluding US) Addition D Assay CD-ROM - US Addition D Computer Based Training, ARCHITECT System Host/Instrument Interface Data Disk Operations Manual, ARCHITECT System Operations Manual, ARCHITECT System (with c 16000) System Software CD-ROM, ARCHITECT System 06E59 06E58 05F94 03K52 03K50 03K53 03K51 08K30 07K32 07K33 03E48 06D03 06E28 08L43 05F48 08G98 04J62 List Number 06D02
Appendix D-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Manual list numbers
Appendix D
Manual list numbers

Support documentation is available in printed format. Contact your Abbott representative to order the following manuals.
Manuals
Item Abbott Standard Interface RS232 Manual, ARCHITECT System Laboratory Automated System Standard Interface Manual, ARCHITECT i System Package Insert Manual, AEROSET and ARCHITECT System List Number 06F71 05M71 04J69
Appendix D-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

SCC component list numbers

The following products are required and optional SCC (system control center) components. Contact your Abbott representative to order the following components.
SCC components
Item Required CPU SCC Serial Expansion (External Multiport Serial Adapter) Keyboard: English Keyboard French Keyboard German Keyboard Italian Keyboard Spanish Keyboard Japanese Keyboard Monitor - 15" Mouse Network HUB: Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AA) [US, Canada, Japan, Korea, Taiwan, Latin America Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AE) [UK, Ireland, Hong Kong, Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Indonesia, Vietnam] 07D04-01 07D04-12 07D11-01 07D11-20 07D11-30 07D11-40 07D11-50 07D11-60 07D03-15 07D01-99 07D01-04 07D01-40 List Number
Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AX) [Central Europe, Israel, Algeria, Austria, Belgium, 07D04-24 Finland, France, Germany, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Sweden] Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-AZ) [Australia, New Zealand, China] Network Hub & Cables, (DEL08-BJ) [India, South Africa] Optional Bar Code Scanner ARCHITECT and AxSYM Bar Code Scanner User's Guide Component Stand Modem (110V) Printer: Printer (110V) Printer (220V) Speakers UPS for SCC only: 07D08-11 07D08-22 07D05-11 07D09-02 02K93 09D19-01 07D07-11 07D04-36 07D04-48
Appendix D-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Appendix D
SCC components (continued)

Item UPS 110V UPS 220V List Number 07D06-11 07D06-22
Appendix D-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Sample handler kit list numbers
Sample handler kit list numbers

Depending on your system configuration different sample handler kits are available. Your Abbott representative orders the appropriate kit for you. To order accessories within these kits, see Additional accessory list numbers, page Appendix D-12.
Sample handler kits

Item Sample Handler, RSH (robotic sample handler): i 2000SR Standalone Base RSH Kit (includes 60 carriers, 6 RSH trays) i 2000SR Add on Kit RSH (includes 60 carriers, 8 RSH trays) 02J47-10 02J47-20 List Number
c 8000 Standalone Base RSH Kit (includes 60 carriers, 8 RSH trays) + Control Boards 02J47-50 (PCBs) c 16000 Standalone Base RSH Kit (includes 60 carriers, 8 RSH trays) + Control Boards 02J47-60 (PCBs) c 8000 Add on Kit RSH (includes 60 carriers, 10 RSH trays) c 16000 Add on Kit RSH (includes 60 carriers, 10 RSH trays) c 8000/c 16000 Standalone Card Cage + Cables Sample Handler, SSH (standard sample handler): Base SH Kit (includes 30 carriers) Single Module SH Kit Single to Multi-module SH Upgrade Multi-module Original Sample Handler, i 2000 LAS (Laboratory Automation System): LAS General Kit (includes 2 LAS sample carousels, 1 sheet of carousel ID labels, 1 pipettor calibration tool, 1 carousel calibration tool) LAS General Upgrade Kit (includes 2 LAS sample carousels, 1 sheet of carousel ID labels, 1 pipettor calibration tool, 1 carousel calibration tool) Sample Handler, c System LAS (Laboratory Automation System): c 8000 LAS Standard Kit c 8000 LAS Upgrade Kit NOTE: Other items in these kits are used to build the sample handler. 07L18-01 07L20-01 08C96-01 08C96-23 08C90-01 08C90-11 08C91-01 08C92-01 02J47-40 02J47-70 02J47-55
Appendix D-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
List numbers
Processing module list numbers
Appendix D
Processing module list numbers

Depending on your system configuration different processing modules and optional components are available. Your Abbott representative orders the appropriate products for you.
Processing modules
Item List Number 08C89 03M74 03M74-98 01G06 01G06-02 03L77-01 08L41-01 03E50-26 03E50-31 08C94-99 09D61-02 08C95-88
i 2000 processing module i 2000SR processing module i 2000SR processing module (refurbished) c 8000 processing module c 8000 Skins Kit c 16000 processing module c 16000 Skins Kit
High Concentration Waste Bottle High Concentration Float Switch Cable External Waste Pump: i System c 8000 ARCHITECT ARM (Automated Reconstitution Module) accessory
Appendix D-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Appendix E
Descriptions of screen elements
Introduction
Screen elements are items on each screen that allow you to interact with the system software. Screen elements can be any of the following: Icons, which allow you to display a menu Menus, which allow you to display a screen Buttons, which allow you to initiate a command such as: Display another screen or window Add items to a list Refresh the data on the screen or window Confirm that you want to save the changes you have entered Delete items from the system Display help for a screen, window, or error message
Data entry boxes, which allow you to enter text List buttons, which allow you to display a list so you can select an item Options, which allow you to select one item from the displayed choices Check boxes, which allow you to select one or more items from the displayed choices
Descriptions of screen elements topics include: Icons and menus, page Appendix E-2 Shows each icon and its related menu items, and describes what each icon and menu displays. Buttons, page Appendix E-6 Shows each button and provides a description of what the button does. Field descriptions, page Appendix E-15 Describes each field found on the user interface screens and windows.
Appendix E-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Icons and menus
Appendix E
Icons and menus

Icons and menus allow you to display screens. Also, icons blink to inform you that a condition requires your attention.
Overview icon The Overview icon provides access to overall system monitoring data. When you select it, a menu displays the following options: Snapshot Select to navigate to the Snapshot screen, which displays system status information. Sample status - Select to navigate to the Sample status screen, which allows you to: View all unreleased tests for a sample regardless of test status Rerun patient results Release completed patient results Suspend a bay or section on the RSH to allow immediate access to a sample in process Operations manual - Select to access the online ARCHITECT System Operations Manual. Orders icon The Orders icon provides access to test ordering functions and illuminates to notify you that new orders have been downloaded by the host computer but have not been viewed. When you select the Orders icon, a menu displays the following options. Order status - Select to navigate to the Order status screen, which displays information on the patient, control, and calibration orders currently managed by the ARCHITECT System. An indicator next to this menu item displays when new orders have been downloaded by the host computer but have not been viewed. Patient order - Select to navigate to the Patient order screens and views, which allows you to enter a patient order. Control order - Select to navigate to the Control order screen and views, which allows you to enter single analyte or multiconstituent control orders. Calibration order - Select to navigate to the Calibration order screen, which allows you to enter a calibration order.
Appendix E-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E

Icons and menus
Results icon The Results icon provides access to patient results and illuminates to notify you results have completed and are awaiting review prior to release. When you select the Results icon, a menu displays the following options. Results review - Select to navigate to the Results review screen, which displays information on the completed patient results awaiting review and release. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you results have completed. From this screen you can select the patient results to rerun. Stored results - Select to navigate to the Stored results screen, which allows you to: View patient results that have been reviewed and released Retransmit patient results to the host computer Archive patient results
Appendix E-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Icons and menus
Appendix E
QC-Cal icon The QC-Cal icon provides access to QC results, QC graphs, and calibration results. The icon illuminates to notify you that QC samples have completed and are awaiting review prior to release, or that a calibration is within 1 hour of expiration or has an Expired or Failed status. When you select the QC-Cal icon, a menu displays the following options: QC result review - Select to navigate to the QC result review screen, which displays information on completed QC results awaiting review and release. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you QC results have completed. From this screen you can select the QC results to rerun. QC summary - Select to navigate to the QC summary review screen, which provides a summary of QC data for all assay control levels. You can select and review individual control level QC data details and the associated Levey-Jennings graph. From this screen you can also print the QC analysis, QC summary, and Levey-Jennings reports. Levey-Jennings graph - Select to view and manipulate QC data. From this screen you can also print the Levey-Jennings report. Calibration status - Select to navigate to the Calibration status screen, which provides a summary list of the calibration status of each assay and reagent lot loaded on the system. You can select and review individual calibration curves. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you when a calibration is within 1 hour of expiration or has an Expired or Failed status. Calibration history - Select to navigate to the Calibration history screen, which provides a summary list of the calibration status for current and previously performed calibrations. You can select, review, and archive individual calibration curves. Stored QC results - Select to navigate to the Stored QC results screen, which allows you to: View QC results that have been reviewed and released Retransmit QC results to the host computer Archive QC results QC reports - Select to navigate to the QC reports screen, which allows you to print the QC analysis, QC summary, and Levey-Jennings reports. Exceptions icon The Exceptions icon provides access to patient, QC, and calibration result exceptions and illuminates to notify you of new order exceptions. When you select the Exceptions icon, a menu displays the following options: Exception status - Select to navigate to the Exception status screen, which provides a summary listing of the exceptions that have occurred. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you there are new exceptions. From this screen you can select the patient and QC exception results to rerun. Rerun status - Select to navigate to the Rerun status screen, which provides a listing of the orders scheduled to be rerun.
Appendix E-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Icons and menus
Reagents icon The Reagents icon provides access to reagent inventory management functions and illuminates to notify you that a reagent kit has a status other than OK, Mixing (i System), or Overridden. When you select the Reagents icon, a menu displays the following options: Reagent status - Select to navigate to the Reagent status screens, which provides a summary and listing of the current inventory status of the onboard reagents, and allows you to request a scan of the current reagent kits for a selected processing module. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you that a reagent kit has a status other than OK, Mixing (i System), Overridden, or Low Alert. Reagent history - Select to navigate to the Reagent history screen, which provides a historical summary listing of the reagent kits that have been scanned by the reagent bar code reader. Supplies icon The Supplies icon provides access to supply inventory management functions and illuminates to notify you that an inventory item has a status other than OK. When you select the Supplies icon, a menu displays the following option: Supply status - Select to navigate to the Supply status screen and views, which provides inventory information for the onboard supplies for each processing module. An indicator next to this menu item displays to notify you that an inventory item has a status other than OK. From this screen you can update the status for each item. System icon The System icon provides access to system diagnostics, maintenance, and configuration functions and illuminates to notify you that an in-process maintenance procedure requires user interaction or that a new message has been entered into the Temporary message log. When you select the System icon, a menu displays the following options: Maintenance - Select to navigate to the Maintenance screen, which allows you to perform system maintenance procedures. An indicator next to this menu item displays when an in-process maintenance procedure requires user input or is complete. Diagnostics - Select to navigate to the Diagnostics screen, which allows you to perform system diagnostic procedures. System logs - Select to navigate to the System logs screen, which allows you to review the Temporary message log and Message history log. An indicator next to this menu item displays when a new message has been entered into the Temporary message log. Configuration - Select to navigate to the System configuration, which allows you to configure system, assay, and QC-Cal parameters. Utilities - Select to navigate to the Software installation and backup, which allows you to perform system software maintenance tasks.
Appendix E-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Appendix E
Buttons
Each screen, window, and message has buttons. Buttons allow you to display other screens or windows, add, edit, or delete information from the system, print reports, or toggle between two views of a screen or window.
Activity Allows you to toggle from the Result list to the Activity list during maintenance and diagnostic procedures. Add Saves the information you enter and updates the corresponding list or table. Also clears data from the window so you can add the next new item. Add kit (c System) Allows you to configure a new reagent kit. This button is unavailable until you select a lot. Add level Allows you to add the control level information you define. Once added, the new control level displays in the Level list. This button is unavailable until you select a lot. Add rule Displays the Add / edit assay retest rules window. In this window you can configure or edit retest rules for the assay you selected. Cancel Cancels your selections or entries and displays the screen or window you were previously viewing. Carousel (c System) Allows you to order a sample to be run on the carousel. Carrier Allows you to order a sample to be run on the carrier. Close window Allows you to close the Maintenance Perform window of an in-process procedure so you can perform a maintenance procedure on another module or access other screens and windows. Continue Allows you to continue to the next step of a maintenance or diagnostic procedure.
Appendix E-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Define data Displays the Define data window allowing you to enter expected values for multiconstituent controls. This button is unavailable until you select an assay(s). Delete assay Allows you to delete an assay(s) for a multiconstituent control. This button is unavailable until you select an assay(s). Delete kit (c System) Allows you to delete a reagent kit. This button is unavailable until you select a reagent kit. Delete level Allows you to delete the control level(s) you selected. This button is unavailable until you select a control level. Delete rule Allows you to delete the retest rule(s) you selected. This button is unavailable until you select a retest rule. Delete Allows you to delete the item(s) you selected. Deselect all Allows you to deselect all items in a list. This button toggles between Deselect all and Select all. Details view (c System) Displays the details window(s) for QC and patient results. This window displays information for a test run using a photometric assay (c System). Done Accepts or saves your selections or entries and displays the screen or window you were previously viewing. Edit result Displays an edit result window allowing the system administrator to edit the result. The result flag EDIT displays for the result to indicate it was edited by the system administrator. This button is available only for photometric or potentiometric test results. Edit rule Displays the Add / edit assay retest rules window allowing you to edit a retest rule to create a new one. This button is unavailable until you select a retest rule.
Appendix E-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Appendix E
Edit Allows you to edit the item(s) you selected. Error ? Displays help for the probable cause and corrective action for the error. Export Initiates the process of exporting an assay file. F1 - Exit Displays the Snapshot screen. F2 - Add order Saves the order information and clears data from the screen so that you can add the next order. F2 - Batch details Displays the Details for batch window allowing you to name the batch and add comments for the current batch order. This button is available only when the order type is batch. F2 - Log on Displays the Log on window allowing you to log on to the system. F2 - Maint. Log Displays the Maintenance log screen. This button toggles between F2 - Maint. Log and F2 - To do. F2 - Print Displays the Print options window allowing you to select the report you want to print. F2 - QC selection Displays the QC selection window allowing you to select the data to display on the Levey-Jennings graph screen. F2 - Sample details Displays the Details for sample window allowing you to enter patient demographic information and comments for the current sample. This button is available only when the order type is single. F2 - Select all / F2 - Deselect all Allows you to select or deselect all items in a list or table. This button toggles between Select all and Deselect all. F2 - To do Displays the Maintenance screen with the To do tab selected. This button toggles between F2 - To do and F2 - Maint. Log.
Appendix E-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
F2 - Update supplies Displays the Windows - Supply status screen allowing you to update the inventory for the supplies. F3 - Add order Saves the order information and clears data from the screen so that you can add the next order. F3 - Find Displays a find options window allowing you to search for specific data. F3 - Import (c System) Displays the Import assay window allowing the system administrator to import a clinical chemistry assay parameter file(s). F3 - Install Scans the CD and initiates the system software installation program. This button is available only if your log on is system administrator, CSC, or FSE. F3 - Print Displays the Print options window allowing you to select the report you want to print. F3 - Shutdown Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to shut down the system. F4 - Approve Displays the Approve maintenance log window allowing the system administrator to approve the maintenance log. This button is unavailable for the months when no procedures were performed. F4 - Create backup Displays the Create backup window allowing you to initiate a system backup. F4 - Export (c System) Displays the Export assay window allowing you to export a clinical chemistry assay parameter file(s) to a floppy disk. F4 - Print Displays the Print options window allowing you to select the report you want to print. F4 - Scan Allows you to request a scan of the reagent carousel(s) for a selected module for the assay(s) you selected.
Appendix E-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Appendix E
F5 - Assay options Displays an assay options window allowing you to select or enter assay-specific data for the assay(s) you selected. F5 - Delete Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected item(s). F5 - Details DIsplays the details window allowing you to view detailed information for the item(s) you selected. F5 - Perform Displays the Maintenance perform window or Diagnostic perform window for the selected procedure. F5 - Print Displays the Print options window allowing you to select the report you want to print. F5 - Start-up Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to start-up the system. F6 - Assign location (c System) Displays the assign location window allowing you to select a specific location for the reagent. F6 - Configure Displays the configuration window allowing you to configure the information for the selected item(s). F6 - Delete Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected item(s). F6 - Rerun Displays a rerun options window allowing you to schedule the selected tests to be rerun, the module on which you want to rerun them, and the dilutions for the assay. F6 - Suspend Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to suspend the selected bay or section to access the sample you selected. F6 - Stop Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to stop the selected module. F6 - Transmit to host Allows you to transmit the selected result(s) to the LIS. This button is unavailable until bidirectional host communication is configured to On or On with query.
Appendix E-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
F6 - Version Displays the Version details for procedure (maintenance) window, or the Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window. This button is unavailable until you select a maintenance item from one of the categories. F7 - Delete Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected item(s). F7 - Details Displays the details window allowing you to view detailed information for the item(s) you selected. F7 - Pause Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to pause the selected module. F8 - Archive Displays the Archive results window, page 5-277 so that you can save the selected results or calibration curves to a floppy disk. This button is unavailable until you select a result or calibration curve. F8 - Release Releases the selected test results. NOTE: On the Sample status screen this button is not available if any of the selected items are exceptions (red text) or are already released (blue text). F8 - Reset (c System) Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to reset the volume and onboard stability for the non-bar coded reagent kit you selected. F8 - Run Displays a message asking you to confirm that you want to initialize the selected module to running status. F8 - Transmit to host Allows you to transmit the selected result(s) to the host (LIS). This button is unavailable until bidirectional host communication is configured to On or On with query. Fail Curve Displays a message asking that you confirm you are failing the selected curve so that it can no longer be used to calculate results.
Appendix E-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Appendix E
Formula tool Allows the system administrator to enter a formula when creating a calculated assay. Buttons on the formula tool provide the following functions: / = Divide * = Multiply + = Add - = Subtract = Backspace = Calculate square root exp = Perform an exponential calculation Graph scroll buttons Allows you to scroll left and right one page at a time. Graph view (c System) Displays the reaction graph and absorbance data for QC and patient results. Help Provides access to context-sensitive help for the active SCC screen, window, or error message. Import (c System) Initiates the process of importing an assay file. L1 Corresponds to the processing module keypad L1 key. When you are instructed to select this button during a maintenance or diagnostic procedure, you can select either the screen button or the keypad button. L2 Corresponds to the processing module keypad L2 key. When you are instructed to select this button during a maintenance or diagnostic procedure, you can select either the screen button or the keypad button. L3 Corresponds to the processing module keypad L3 key. When you are instructed to select this button during a maintenance or diagnostic procedure, you can select either the screen button or the keypad button. L4 Corresponds to the processing module keypad L4 key. When you are instructed to select this button during a maintenance or diagnostic procedure, you can select either the screen button or the keypad button.
Appendix E-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Left scroll arrow Allows you to move left one grid square at a time to select a procedure. Line scroll down arrow Allows you to scroll down one line at a time. Line scroll up arrow Allows you to scroll up one line at a time. List Displays a list of items from which to choose. You can select one of the items from the list or press the Esc key on the keyboard to exit. This button is unavailable (gray background) if there are no items in a list. Next Allows you to display the next item when you have selected more than one. OK Allows you to acknowledge a displayed message and displays the screen or window you were previously viewing. Page scroll down Allows you to move the cursor down one page (view) at a time. Page scroll up Allows you to move the cursor up one page (view) at a time. Point details scroll buttons Allows you to scroll left or right one point at a time. Previous Allows you to display the previous item when you have selected more than one. Print Allows you to print the results of the procedure you selected. Proceed Allows you to continue to the next step of the maintenance or diagnostic procedure. Quit Cancels your selection and displays the screen or window you were previously viewing.
Appendix E-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Buttons
Appendix E
Recalc (c System) Allows you to recalculate results based on a new active calibration curve. Refresh Allows you to refresh the screen to see any new items that may be available. Rescale (c System) Allows you to adjust the Y axis scale for the reaction graph based on the range provided. Results Allows you to toggle from the Activity list to the Result list during maintenance and diagnostic procedures. Right arrow Allows you to move right one grid square at a time to select a procedure. Select all Allows you to select all items in a list. This button toggles between Select all and Deselect all. Select assays Displays the Select assay window, page 2-172 allowing you to select one or more assays from the list. Unload (c System) Notifies the system that the selected non-bar coded reagent kit is no longer in the selected position. Update Allows you to update the screen to view data for the selected date range.
Appendix E-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Field descriptions
Field descriptions explain the kinds of information you can enter, select, or view. Field description topics include: Overview icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-15 Orders icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-21 Results icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-41 QC-Cal icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-63 Exceptions icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-97 Reagents icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-109 Supplies icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-118 System icon screens and windows, page Appendix E-121
Overview icon screens and windows

The Overview icon allows you to access the menu items Snapshot, Sample status, and Operations manual. Overview icon screens and windows topics include: Snapshot screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-15 Log on window field descriptions, page Appendix E-19 Sample status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-19 Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-21
Snapshot screen field descriptions

To see a description of the function bar buttons on this screen, see Buttons, page Appendix E-6. Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the screen or window.
Operator Displays the ID of the operator who is logged on. Date Displays the current system date. Time Displays the current system time.
Appendix E-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Sample handler graphic Displays the status of the sample handler graphic. The sample handler graphic is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. Processing module graphic (c System) Displays the module number in an integrated system and the current status of the module.
Processing module graphic (i System) Displays the module number in a multi-module/integrated system and the current status of the module.
Order status button Displays the number of tests currently processing for the module you selected. When you select the Order status button, the Order status screen, page 5-150 displays. Reagent status button Displays the total number of reagent kits on the module you selected. If you select the Reagent status button, the Reagent status screens, page 5-61 displays. A caution symbol displays if any kit has a status other than OK, Mixing (i System), or Overridden. Once you resolve the problem(s), the caution symbol no longer displays.
Appendix E-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Calibration status button Displays the status of the calibration curves for the c System module. When you select the Calibration status button, the Calibration status screen, page 6-15 displays. OK displays if all calibration curves for the onboard reagents have an Active or Overridden status. A caution symbol displays if any calibration curve for the onboard reagents is within 1 hour of expiration or has an Expired or Failed status. Once you resolve the problem(s), the caution symbol no longer displays. Supply status button (c System) Displays the status of bulk and onboard solutions and liquid waste for the processing module. If you select the Supply status button, the Supply status screen - c System view, page 5-24 displays. For bulk and onboard solutions, OK displays if all liquids have inventory of 20% volume or more. For bulk and onboard solutions, a caution symbol displays if liquid inventory is either empty or the volume is less than 20%. For onboard solutions in the sample carousel, OK displays if the sample carousel contains adequate volume. For onboard solutions in the sample carousel, a caution symbol displays if the sample carousel does not contain adequate volume. Once you replenish the solution(s), the caution symbol no longer displays. For liquid waste, OK displays until the waste is full. A caution symbol displays when the waste is full. Once you empty the waste, the caution symbol no longer displays.
Appendix E-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Supply status button (i System) Displays the status of bulk solutions, solid waste, and RVs (reaction vessels) for the processing module. If you select the Supply status button, the Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view, page 5-27 displays. For bulk solutions, OK displays if all liquids have inventory of 20% volume or more. For bulk solutions, a caution symbol displays if liquid inventory is either empty or the volume is less than 20%. Once you replenish the solution, the caution symbol no longer displays. For solid waste, OK displays until the waste inventory is at 80%. A caution symbol displays when the waste is 80% or more. Once you empty the waste, the caution symbol no longer displays. For RVs, OK displays until inventory is at 20%. A caution symbol displays when inventory is below 20%. Once you add RVs, the caution symbol no longer displays. Reruns status button Displays the number of tests waiting to be rerun. The tests may have been ordered manually or automatically. After the system software schedules the tests, the button no longer displays. When you select the Reruns status button, the Rerun status screen, page 5-257 displays. Exceptions status button Displays the number of exceptions for review. When you select the Exceptions status button, the Exception status screen, page 5-293 displays. Printer status button Displays only if a printer is available. When you select the Printer status button, the Printer window, page 5-347 displays. The Printer status button displays a caution symbol if an alert condition exists.
Appendix E-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
LIS status button Displays only when the LIS (host) is enabled. The number of results pending transmission to the host display below the button. When you select the LIS status button, the System logs screen, page 10-11 displays. The button displays a caution symbol when a communication problem exists with the LIS. ARM status button Displays only when the system is configured with the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module accessory). When you select the ARM status button, the System logs screen, page 10-11 displays. The button displays a caution symbol when a problem exists with the ARM. LAS status button Displays only when the system is configured for the LAS sample handler. When you select the LAS status button, the System logs screen, page 10-11 displays. The button displays a caution symbol when a communication problem exists with the LAS.
Log on window field descriptions

To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see Buttons, page Appendix E-6. Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the screen or window.
User name Password Allows you to enter your operator ID, up Displays if you type ADMIN in the User to 12 alphanumeric characters, or type name field and allows you to enter the ADMIN to log on as an administrator. system administrator password. NOTE: General operators are not required to enter a password.
Sample status screen field descriptions

To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see Buttons, page Appendix E-6.
Appendix E-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the screen or window.
SID and Name Displays the sample ID, which can be one of the following: C / P and BAY or SECTION Displays one of the following sample locations:
The bar code number or ID assigned Carrier ID (C) and position (P) to the patient sample (RSH/SSH) The SID of the first sample in the batch The control name and level The calibrator name and level Displays the first 15 characters of the name, which can be one of the following: The patient's name for patient orders The batch name for batch orders The control name and level for control orders The calibrator name and level for calibration orders ASSAY and CODES Displays the: Assay - name of the test requested for processing and displays: Black if the test has a status of Pending, Scheduled, or Running STATUS/RESULT Displays the: Status - current status (Pending, Scheduled, or Running) of the test displays black. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152 Bay number (RSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank.
Green if the test is completed but Date and time (estimated time of completion) - displays black not released Blue if the test is completed and Result - value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of result released and displays: Red if the test is an exception Green if the test is completed but Codes - up to four single character not released codes to indicate processing Blue if the test is completed and condition(s) and displays: released Green if the test is completed but Date and time (time of completion) not released and displays: Blue if the test is completed and Green if the test is completed but released not released Descriptions of processing codes, Blue if the test is completed and page 5-153 released Error code and message (where applicable) - displays red
Appendix E-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E Find options (Sample status) window field descriptions
Name Allows you to enter the patient or control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. P
Field descriptions
Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position number you want to search on. Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. Bay or Section Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for. (RSH) PID Allows you to enter the patient ID you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Orders icon screens and windows

The Order icon allows you to access the menu items Order status, Patient order, Control order, and Calibration order. Orders icon screens and windows topics include: Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions, page Appendix E-22 Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-24 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-25
Appendix E-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-26 Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-27 Details for sample window field descriptions, page Appendix E-28 Details for batch window field descriptions, page Appendix E-29 Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions, page Appendix E-29 Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-31 Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions, page Appendix E-32 Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS), page Appendix E-33 Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-34 Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions, page Appendix E-35 Order status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-35 Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-36 Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view field descriptions, page Appendix E-37 Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-39 Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions, page Appendix E-40
Patient order screen - Single patient view field descriptions

Appendix E-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Order type Sampling priority Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to indicate the priority of the sample on the Order List Report, to create a single patient or batch order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the STAT option, an S code displays on the NOTE: Batch ordering is not Order List report. You MUST priority available on the sample carousel (c load the samples with the S code to System) or if your system is process these samples first. configured with an LAS (laboratory automation system). C/P Allows you to select the carrier or carousel button to specify whether to run the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c System). This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. C Displays when you select the carrier button. Allows you to enter the ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in which you place the sample for processing. (Optional when using bar coded samples.) This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. P Allows you to enter the position for the sample carrier or carousel in which you place the sample for processing. (Optional when using bar coded samples). SID Allows you to enter the sample ID. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters, which are defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>. IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify that your host computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as characters rather than functions. Some computers may interpret special characters as a line return, line feed, delimiter, or wildcard.
Appendix E-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Panels (list) Lists the panels available on the system. When you select a panel, all assays in that panel are selected. NOTE: If you deselect an assay from the panel, the panel name is deselected. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Allows you to specify a manual dilution factor for a sample. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999.
Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must select at least one assay before you can create an order using the F3 - Add order button.
Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions

Order type Starting SID Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to enter the starting sample ID of the batch to be processed. You to create a single patient or batch can enter up to 20 alphanumeric order. characters, which are defined by Abbott NOTE: Batch ordering is not Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and available on the sample carousel (c the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { System) or if your system is ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and configured with an LAS (laboratory <space>. automation system). IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify your host computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as characters rather than functions. Some computers may interpret special characters as a line return, line feed, delimiter, or wildcard.
Appendix E-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Ending SID
Panels (list)
Allows you to enter the ending sample Lists the panels available on the system. When you select a panel, all ID of the batch to be processed. You assays in that panel are selected. can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters, which are defined by Abbott NOTE: If you deselect an assay from Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the panel, the panel name is the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { deselected. ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>. IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify your host computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as characters rather than functions. Some computers may interpret special characters as a line return, line feed, delimiter, or wildcard. Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must select at least one assay before you can create an order using the F3 - Add order button. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Allows you to specify a manual dilution factor for a sample. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999.
Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions

Order type Starting C Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to enter the starting carrier ID. to create a single patient or batch order. NOTE: Batch ordering is not available on the sample carousel (c System) or if your system is configured with an LAS (laboratory automation system).
Appendix E-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
P Allows you to enter the starting carrier position for the sample.
Starting SID Allows you to enter the starting sample ID of the batch to be processed. You can enter up to nine numeric characters. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Allows you to specify a manual dilution factor for a sample. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999.
Number of samples Allows you to enter the number of samples to be tested as part of this batch.
Panels (list) Lists the panels available on the system. When you select a panel, all assays in that panel are selected. NOTE: If you deselect an assay from the panel, the panel name is deselected.
Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must select at least one assay before you can create an order using the F3 - Add order button.
Assay options (Patient order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank. Assay Displays the name of the assay(s) you ordered.
Appendix E-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID.
Name Displays the patient's name if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 Module (i System)
Module selection (i System)
Allows you to select a processing Displays a check box for each module other than the default module processing module if you select manual when you have a multi-module (i as the Module selection option. System). If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module. Dilution protocols / number of replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the specified manual dilution factor when you desire more than one replicate.
Assay options (Patient order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank. SID Displays the sample ID. Name Displays the patient's name if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133. Assay Displays the name of the assay(s) you ordered.
Appendix E-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Module selection (i System)
Module (i System)
Allows you to select a processing Displays a check box for each module other than the default module processing module if you select manual when you have a multi-module (i as the Module selection option. System). If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module. Dilution protocols / number of replicates Allows you to select an automated dilution and number of replicates.
Details for sample window field descriptions

SID PID Allows you to enter a patient ID Displays the sample identification number that you entered on the Patient number. You can enter up to 20 order screens and views, page 5-113. alphanumeric characters. NOTE: When you enter a PID, enter only details that you know to be accurate. If you do not know the information, leave this field empty. Never edit information entered previously in a field. If you make edits, the software recognizes the PID as a different and unique patient. Last name Allows you to enter a patient's last name. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. M. First name Allows you to enter a patient's first name. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Date of birth
Allows you to enter the patient's middle Allows you to enter the month, year, name. You can enter up to 12 and the day of the patient's birth. This alphanumeric characters. information provides an age-specific reference range if you have configured the assay to provide reference ranges.
Appendix E-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Gender Allows you to select a gender. This information provides a gender-specific reference range if you have configured the assay to provide reference ranges. Time
Draw date Allows you to enter the date the sample was drawn.
Location
Allows you to enter the time the sample Allows you to enter the location was drawn. associated with the patient. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Doctor Comment Allows you to enter the name of the Allows you to enter a comment for the patient's doctor. You can enter up to 20 sample. You can enter up to 50 characters. alphanumeric characters.
Details for batch window field descriptions

Batch name Displays the name of the batch. The default name is BATCHXX:XX:XX, where XX:XX:XX represents a timestamp. The timestamp is based on when the patient order batch screen was entered, or the time after the previous order was added. The name can be edited to contain up to 20 alphanumeric characters. The name displays for all samples in the batch order. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the samples in the batch. You can enter up to 50 characters. The comment displays for all samples in the batch order.
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions

Appendix E-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Order type Sampling priority Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to indicate the priority of the sample on the Order List Report, to create a single analyte or multiconstituent control order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the STAT option, an S code prints on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples with the S code to process these samples first. C/P Allows you to select the carrier or carousel button to specify whether to run the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c System). Starting C Displays when you select the carrier button. Allows you to enter the starting ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in which you place the first control for processing. NOTE: All control levels selected must fit on one carrier/carousel. Starting P Displays the position (P) in which you place the first control for processing. (Optional when using bar coded samples). NOTE: All control levels selected must fit on one carrier/carousel. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Lot (list) Allows you to select a manual dilution Displays a list of control lots configured for the sample. You must then enter the for the assay. The default lot displays when you select the assay. manual dilution factor. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999. Levels Required field that allows you to select user-configured control levels for the selected assay. You can select one or more levels to process. Based on the assay selected, up to six levels of controls are supported. Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must first select an assay to display the control level(s) and lot number(s) configured for that assay.
Appendix E-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Control order screen - Single analyte view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS)
Order type Sampling priority Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to indicate the priority of the sample on the Order List Report, to create a single analyte or multiconstituent control order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the STAT option, an S code prints on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples with the S code to process these samples first. SID Allows you to enter the sample ID. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters, which are defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>. IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify that your host computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as characters rather than functions. Some computers may interpret special characters as a line return, line feed, delimiter, or wildcard. Assays (list) Lists the assays available on the system. You must first select an assay to display the control level(s) and lot number(s) configured for that assay. Levels Required field that allows you to select user-configured control levels for the selected assay. You can select one or more levels to process. Based on the assay selected, up to six levels of controls are supported. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Allows you to select a manual dilution for the sample. You must then enter the manual dilution factor. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999.
Lot (list) Displays a list of control lots configured for the assay. The default lot displays when you select the assay.
Appendix E-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions

Order type Sampling priority Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to indicate the priority of the sample on the Order List Report, to create a single analyte or multiconstituent control order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the STAT option, an S code displays on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples with the S code to process these samples first. C/P Allows you to select the carrier or carousel button to specify whether to run the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c System). Starting P Displays the position (P) in which you place the first control for processing. Starting C Displays when you select the carrier button. Allows you to enter the starting ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in which you place the first control for processing. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Allows you to select a manual dilution for the sample. You must then enter the manual dilution factor. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999. Control (list) Displays a list of the multiconstituent control names configured on the system. Lot (list) Displays a list of lot numbers configured for the control. The default lot displays when you select the control.
Appendix E-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Levels Allows you to select the user-configured control levels for the control. Based on the control you select, up to three levels are supported. Assays (list) Lists the assays configured for the control level on the system. You must select at least one assay before you can create an order using the F2 - Add order button.
Panels (list) Lists the QC panels available on the system. When you select a panel, all assays in that panel are selected. NOTE: If you deselect an assay from the panel, the panel name is deselected.
Control order screen - Multiconstituent view field descriptions (i 2000SR LAS)

Order type Sampling priority Allows you to specify whether you want Allows you to indicate the priority of the sample on the Order List Report, to create a single analyte or multiconstituent control order. page Appendix A-51. If you select the STAT option, an S code displays on the Order List report. You MUST priority load the samples with the S code to process these samples first. SID Allows you to enter the sample ID. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters, which are defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>. IMPORTANT: Contact your host system vendor to verify that your host computer handles special characters (if used in sample IDs) as characters rather than functions. Some computers may interpret special characters as a line return, line feed, delimiter, or wildcard. Sample manual dilution factor: 1: Allows you to select a manual dilution for the sample. You must then enter the manual dilution factor. The system uses the dilution factor to automatically calculate the sample concentration and report the result. NOTE: The entry range that is allowed for a manual dilution factor is 2 - 999.
Appendix E-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Control (list) Displays a list of the multiconstituent control names configured on the system. Levels Allows you to select the user-configured control levels for the control. Based on the control you select, up to three levels are supported. Assays (list) Lists the assays configured for the control level on the system. You must select at least one assay before you can create an order using the F2 - Add order button.
Lot (list) Displays a list of lot numbers configured for the control. The default lot displays when you select the control. Panels (list) Lists the QC panels available on the system. When you select a panel, all assays in that panel are selected. NOTE: If you deselect an assay from the panel, the panel name is deselected.
Assay options (Control order) window - Manual dilution view field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank Control name Displays the name of the control you selected on the Control order screen. Control lot Displays the control lot number you selected on the Control order screen. Control level Displays the control level you selected on the Control order screen. Module selection (i System) Allows you to select a processing module other than the default module when you have a multi-module i System. If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module. Assay Displays the name of the assay(s) you ordered.
Appendix E-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Module (i System)
Displays a check box for each processing module if you select manual Allows you to enter the number of as the Module selection option. replicates for the dilution when more than one replicate is desired.
Dilution protocols / number of replicates
Assay options (Control order) window - Automated dilution view field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank Control name Displays the name of the control you selected on the Control order screen. Control lot Displays the control lot number you selected on the Control order screen. Control level Displays the control level you selected on the Control order screen. Module selection (i System) Allows you to select a processing module other than the default module when you have a multi-module i System. If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module. Dilution protocols / number of replicates Assay Displays the name of the assay(s) you ordered.
Module (i System)
Displays a check box for each processing module if you select manual Allows you to select an automated as the Module selection option. dilution and number of replicates.
Order status screen field descriptions

Appendix E-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) SID Displays the sample ID, which can be one of the following: The bar code number or ID assigned to the patient sample
The SID of the first sample in the batch LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) The control name and level The calibrator name and level (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank
NAME Displays the first 15 characters of the name, which can be one of the following: The patient's name for patient orders The batch name for batch orders The control name and level for control orders The calibrator name and level for calibration orders STATUS
ASSAY Displays the name of the test you ordered.
TIME
Displays the current status of the assay Displays the time the order will you ordered. See Descriptions of test complete (in 24 hour format). Time information displays for all samples statuses, page 5-152. with a status of Running. CODE Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Find options (Order status/Rerun status) window field descriptions

Appendix E-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module/integrated system to search on. SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Name Allows you to enter the patient or control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C Allows you to enter one of the following: Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. P Bay or Section Allows you to enter the position number Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for. (RSH) you want to search on. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. PID Allows you to enter the patient ID you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Time from / to Allows you to enter a time range you want to search for. Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Details for order (Order status/Rerun status) window - Single order view field descriptions
Appendix E-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank SID Displays the sample ID. Name Displays the name, which can be one of the following: The patient's name for patient orders The batch name for batch orders The control name and level for control orders The calibrator name and level for calibration orders PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. (For patient samples only) Assay Displays the name of the assay you ordered. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Dilution Displays the dilution requested for the assay. Status Displays the status of the order. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152. Draw date/time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn. (For patient samples only) Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Bay or Section Displays the number of the bay or section in which the sample is located. (RSH)
Appendix E-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Codes Displays the codes that indicate processing conditions. See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the order. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Time to completion Displays the time and date the test will complete.
Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Reference assay Displays the photometric reference assay. (For sample interference index assays only - c System)
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (bar coded) view field descriptions
Starting C / P Displays the starting carrier (C) and position (P) for the first sample in the batch. Ending SID Displays the sample ID of the last sample in the batch. Samples scanned Displays the number of samples in the batch order scanned by the sample handler. Starting SID Displays the sample ID of the first sample in the batch. Name Displays the name of the batch. Assay info (table) Displays the assay(s) and dilution(s) ordered for the batch. Assay Dilution
Appendix E-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Status Displays the status of the batch order. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the batch. You can enter up to 50 characters. NOTE: If the status is Pending, the comment is applied to all orders within the batch. If the status is In Process, a comment cannot be entered for batch orders and must be entered for each individual sample. If you entered a comment on the Details for batch window, page 5-133, the comment displays here.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered.
Details for order (Order status) window - Batch (non-bar coded) view field descriptions
Starting C / P Displays the starting carrier (C) and position (P) for the first sample in the batch. Number of samples Displays the number of samples to be processed in the batch. Samples scanned Displays the number of samples in the batch order scanned by the sample handler. Starting SID Displays the sample ID of the first sample in the batch. Name Displays the name of the batch. Assay info (table) Displays the assay(s) and dilution(s) ordered for the batch. Assay Dilution
Appendix E-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Status Displays the status of the batch order. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the batch. You can enter up to 50 characters. NOTE: If the status is Pending, the comment is applied to all orders within the batch. If the status is In Process, a comment cannot be entered for batch orders and must be entered for each individual sample. If you entered a comment on the Details for batch window, page 5-133, the comment displays here.
Operator ID Displays the ID that of the operator logged on when the test was ordered.
Results icon screens and windows

The Results icon allows you to access the menu items Results review and Stored results. Results icon screens and windows topics include: Results review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-42 Find options (Results review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-43 Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-44 Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-45 Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-47 Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-48 Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-50 Rerun options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-51 Stored results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-52
Appendix E-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-53 Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-54 Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-56 Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-58 Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-59 Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-61 Archive results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-62
Results review screen field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NAME Displays the name of the patient. RESULT Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. CODE Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. ASSAY Displays the name of the assay. FLAG Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. SID Displays the sample ID.
Appendix E-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E Find options (Results review) window field descriptions
Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module system to search on. Name Allows you to enter the patient or control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C P Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position number you want to search on. Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. Bay or Section Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for. (RSH) SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search PID Allows you to enter the patient ID you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Reagent lot Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Results with option This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Field descriptions
Allows you to search by the reagent lot Allows you to search for results with flags or interpretations. number. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Appendix E-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. Operator ID Allows you to search for the operator ID logged on to the system at the time the order was placed. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Time from / to Allows you to enter a time range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval.
Details for result (Results review) window - Calculated view field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient or batch. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and system serial number.
Appendix E-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay
Constituent assays (table)
Displays the assay that was processed. Displays the names, results, and flags for the constituent assays used to determine the calculated result. Module (M) Assay Result Flags Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Normal range Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Flags
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the flags associated with the of the assay. result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed processing Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for result (Results review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and serial number of the module on which the Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) assay was run. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient or batch. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Assay Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay number
Displays the assay that was processed. Displays the number defined for the assay. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Absorbance Displays the response value used in calculating the result. mV (ICT only) absorbance (photometric assays only) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays. Normal range Cuvette Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the number of the cuvette of the assay. used to process results. Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed processing
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Appendix E-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the sample and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Time of cal
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the date and time the sample lot calibration was completed. was drawn. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for result (Results review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and serial number of the module on which the Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) assay was run. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient or batch. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Appendix E-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
POINT (table) Displays the read points and absorbance readings. Point - Displays the read points 1 through 33. Primary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary wavelength. Secondary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary wavelength. PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference of the primary wavelength minus the secondary wavelength absorbance. NOTE: If no absorbance data is available, no information displays in this table. Graph Indicates the type of absorbance data that displays on the graph.
Wavelength Displays the wavelength and reaction type.
Y axis scale Allows you to specify the absorbance axis range to view on the graph. When you edit these fields, the Rescale button becomes available. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result.
Details for result (Results review) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No.: Displays the module number and serial number of the module on which the Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) assay was run. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system)
Appendix E-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Name Displays the name of the patient or batch. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Assay
Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay number
Displays the assay that was processed. Displays the number defined for the assay. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed processing Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the sample and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Reference assay Displays the photometric reference assay. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Appendix E-49
Normal range Displays the normal range configured for the assay. Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for result (Results review) window (i System) field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient or batch. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Assay Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and serial number of the module on which the assay was run.
Assay number
Displays the assay that was processed. Displays the number defined for the assay. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Normal range Displays the normal range configured for the assay. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. RLU Displays the response value in RLUs (relative light units) used to calculate the result. Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Appendix E-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed processing Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the order was placed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed.
Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the sample and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration was completed. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Rerun options window field descriptions

C/P Allows you to select the carrier or carousel button to specify whether to rerun the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c System). This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. C Allows you to enter the RSH/SSH carrier ID or i 2000 LAS carousel ID (C) in which the sample will be rerun. The default carrier or carousel ID and position are the same location as the original order. NOTE: If the original order did not have a carrier or carousel ID (C) and position (P) manually assigned, these fields are blank. P Allows you to enter the position (P) in which you place the sample for rerun. Assay Displays the name of the assay to be used for rerun. SID Displays the identifier for the sample or control being rerun. Name Displays the name of the patient or control.
Appendix E-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result.
Module selection (i System) Allows you to select a processing module other than the default module when you have a multi-module i System. If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module. Selecting multiple modules results in processing being performed on each module. Dilution protocols / number of replicates
Module (i System)
Displays a check box for each processing module if you select manual Displays the dilution at which the as the Module selection option. original order was run. Allows you to select an automated dilution and number of replicates. If the original order was a manual dilution, only Number of replicates is available. The rerun must use the original manual dilution. To use a different dilution protocol, you must generate a new order. If the original order was undiluted or an automated dilution, you can select a dilution protocol and replicates.
Stored results screen field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NAME Displays the name of the patient. ASSAY Displays the name of the assay. SID Displays the sample ID.
Appendix E-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
RESULT Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the stored result. CODE Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
FLAG Displays the flags associated with the stored result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225.
Find options (Stored results) window field descriptions

Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module system to search on. Name Allows you to enter the patient or control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C P Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position number you want to search on. Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. Bay or Section Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for. (RSH) SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. PID Allows you to enter the patient ID you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Appendix E-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reagent lot
Results with option
Allows you to search by the reagent lot Allows you to search for results with flags or interpretations. number. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. Operator ID Time from / to Allows you to enter a time range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. Status
Allows you to search for the operator ID Allows you to search by result status. logged on to the system at the time the See Descriptions of test statuses, order was placed. page 5-152. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Calculated view field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host.
Appendix E-54
Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and system serial number.
Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed.
Constituent assays (table) Displays the following information for the constituent assays used to determine the calculated result. Module (M) Assay Result Flags
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Normal range
Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Flags
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the flags associated with the for the assay. result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending collation - Results have been selected for release to the host and, depending on the collation option setting: all results associated with the SID have not completed or have not been selected for release. OR all results associated with the SID on a particular processing module have not completed or have not been selected for release. Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test completed. Location Displays the location associated with the patient.
Appendix E-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Comment Displays the comment entered for the result.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) run. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Absorbance Displays the response value used in calculating the result. mV (ICT only) absorbance (photometric assays only) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays.
Normal range
Cuvette
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the number of the cuvette for the assay. used to process results.
Appendix E-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test.
Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending collation - Results have been selected for release to the host and, depending on the collation option setting: all results associated with the SID have not completed or have not been selected for release. OR all results associated with the SID on a particular processing module have not completed or have not been selected for release.
Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed. Reagent lot Displays the master lot number of the reagent used to process the sample and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Time of cal
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test completed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the date and time the sample lot calibration was calibrated. was drawn. Comment Displays the comment entered for the result.
Appendix E-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for result (Stored results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) run. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. POINT (table) Displays the following information. Point - Displays the read points 1 through 33. Primary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary wavelength. Secondary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary wavelength. PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference of the primary wavelength minus the secondary wavelength absorbance. NOTE: If no absorbance data is available, no information displays in this table. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Wavelength Displays the wavelength and reaction type.
Appendix E-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Graph Indicates the type of absorbance data that displays on the graph.
Y axis scale Allows you to specify the absorbance axis range to view on the graph. When you edit these fields, the Rescale button becomes available. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result.
Details for result (Stored results) window - Sample interference index view (c System) field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) run. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Normal range Displays the normal / therapeutic range for the assay.
Appendix E-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending collation - Results have been selected for release to the host and, depending on the collation option setting: all results associated with the SID have not completed or have not been selected for release. OR all results associated with the SID on a particular processing module have not completed or have not been selected for release. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test completed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed.
Reagent lot Displays the master lot number of the reagent used to process the sample and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Reference assay Displays the photometric reference assay. Comment Displays the comment entered for the result.
Appendix E-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value, unit, and (where applicable) interpretation of the result. Normal range Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run.
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. RLU Displays the response value in RLUs (relative light units) used to calculate the result. Dilution
Displays the normal / therapeutic range Displays the dilution used for this test. for the assay. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Appendix E-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending collation - Results have been selected for release to the host and, depending on the collation option setting: all results associated with the SID have not completed or have not been selected for release. OR all results associated with the SID on a particular processing module have not completed or have not been selected for release. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test completed. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Time completed Displays the date and time the result was completed.
Reagent lot Displays the master lot number of the reagent used to process the sample and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration was completed. Comment Displays the comment entered for the result.
Archive results window field descriptions

Appendix E-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
INSTRUCTIONS (box) Displays the step-by-step instructions you must perform. Archive name Displays the name the system uses to archive the file. You cannot change the name. The naming convention displays in the format xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Pzz, where: xxxxx represents the ARCHITECT System number yyyyyyyy represents that day's date Pzz represents the archive number The patient archive identifier (.Pzz) starts at 01 and increments for each patient archive created on each new day. Number of results selected Space required Displays the number of results you Displays the approximate amount of selected for the archive from the Stored space needed on the CD to perform the results screen, page 5-262. archive. Space available Delete records after archive Displays the amount of space available Allows you to delete the result records on the CD currently in the CD drive. If after you archive them. the correct CD is not recognized, an Default: Delete records after archive. information message displays in this field. See Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-271.
QC-Cal icon screens and windows

The QC-Cal icon allows you to access the menu items QC result review, QC summary, Levey-Jennings graph, Calibration status, Calibration history, Stored QC results, and QC reports. QC-Cal icon screens and windows topics include: QC result review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-65 Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-66 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-67 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-68
Appendix E-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-70 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-71 Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-72 Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-73 QC selection window field descriptions, page Appendix E-74 Point detail window field descriptions, page Appendix E-75 Calibration order screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-76 Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-76 Calibration status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-77 Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-77 Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-78 Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-79 Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-80 Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-81 Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-83 Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-84 Calibration history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-85 Archive calibration curves window field descriptions, page Appendix E-85 Stored QC results screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-86 Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-87 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-88
Appendix E-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-90 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-91 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field descriptions, page Appendix E-92 Archive QC results window field descriptions, page Appendix E-93 QC reports screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-94 QC summary review screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-95 Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-95 Details for QC summary window field descriptions, page Appendix E-96
QC result review screen field descriptions

M C/P Displays the number of the module that Displays one of the following sample locations: processed the control. NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5. Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) SID Displays the sample ID. LEVEL Displays the level of the control that was processed. RESULT Displays the value and units of the result. CONTROL NAME Displays the name of the control that processed. ASSAY Displays the name of the assay. FLAG Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245.
Appendix E-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Find options (QC result review) window field descriptions

Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module system to search on. Control name Allows you to enter the control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Control lot Allows you to enter the lot number of the control you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. P
Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position (P) number you want to search on. Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. Bay or Section Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for. (RSH) Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Reagent lot Results with option Allows you to search by the reagent lot Allows you to search for results with flags. number. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Appendix E-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. Operator ID Allows you to search for the operator ID logged on to the system at the time the order was placed. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Time from / to Allows you to enter a time range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Control name Displays the name of the control. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Control level Displays the level that was run for the control. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value and unit of the result.
Appendix E-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Absorbance Displays the response value used in calculating the result. mV (ICT only) absorbance (photometric assays only) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays. Dilution
Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control during QC configuration.
Flags
Displays the dilution value used for this Displays the flags associated with the control. result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control completed. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the control and generate the result. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed. Time completed Displays the date and time the control was processed. Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration was completed. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Control name Displays the name of the control. Control level Displays the level that was run for the control. POINT (table) Displays the following information. Point - Displays the read points 1 through 33. Primary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary wavelength. Secondary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary wavelength. PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference of the primary wavelength minus the secondary wavelength absorbance. NOTE: If no absorbance data is available, no information displays in this table. Graph Indicates the type of absorbance data that displays on the graph. Y axis scale Allows you to specify the absorbance axis range to view on the graph. When you edit these fields, the Rescale button becomes available. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results. Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Wavelength Displays the wavelength and reaction type.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value and unit of the result.
Appendix E-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Control name Displays the name of the control. Control level Displays the level that was run for the control. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value and unit of the result. Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control during QC configuration. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. RLU Displays the response value in RLUs (relative light units) used to calculate the result. Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test.
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Module / Serial No.
Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was Complete - Results have completed run. processing Time completed Displays the date and time the control was processed. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control completed.
Appendix E-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Time of cal
Reagent lot
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the reagent lot used to lot calibration was completed. process the control and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Calculated view field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Control name Displays the name of the control. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Constituent assays (table) Displays the following information for the constituent assays used to determine the calculated result. Module (M) Assay Result Flags Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Control level Displays the level that was run for the control. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay.
Appendix E-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Result Displays the value and unit of the result. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed processing Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control completed.
Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control during QC configuration. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the control was processed.
Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Rerun options (QC result review) window field descriptions

C/P Allows you to select the carrier or carousel button to specify whether to rerun the sample on the sample carrier or the sample carousel (c System). C Allows you to enter the RSH/SSH carrier ID or i 2000 LAS carousel ID (C) in which the sample will be rerun. The default carrier or carousel ID and position are the same location as the original order. NOTE: If the original order did not have a carrier or carousel ID (C) and position (P) manually assigned, these fields are blank. P Allows you to enter the position (P) in which the sample will be placed for rerun. Assay Displays the name of the assay you requested for the control. Control name Displays the name of the control.
Control level Displays the name of the level for the control.
Appendix E-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Result Displays the value and unit of the result. Module selection (i System) Allows you to select a processing module other than the default module when you have a multi-module i System. If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module. Selecting multiple modules results in processing being performed on each module. Dilution protocols / number of replicates Displays the dilution at which the original order was run. Allows you to select an automated dilution and number of replicates. If the original order was a manual dilution, only Number of replicates is available. The rerun must use the original manual dilution. To use a different dilution protocol, you must generate a new order.
Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Module (i System) Displays a check box for each processing module if you select manual as the Module selection option.
Levey-Jennings graph screen field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay. Comparison type Displays the source of the mean used to compare to the expected mean. Exp. date Displays the expiration date of the control lot selected. Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Control Displays the name of the control selected. Module Displays the number of the module used to process the control(s).
Appendix E-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Status
Statistics (fields)
Displays the current status of the assay Displays the following statistical data on the selected module. elements related to a specific level of control: Level Mean SD N Comparison mean Visible data range See Levey-Jennings graph statistical data elements, page 5-313. Date range Displays the date range used for the calculation. Value Displays the value of the selected point on the graph. Date Displays the date for the selected point on the graph.
QC selection window field descriptions

Module Allows you to select a processing module other than the default module. NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5. Comparison type Assay (list) Allows you to select the source of the Allows you to select one assay to mean used to compare to the expected include in the Levey-Jennings graph. control mean. Options are: None Manufacturers Module cumulative System cumulative Date range for calculations / to Allows you to enter the date range of the data to display.
Appendix E-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Control name (list)
Control lot (list)
Allows you to select one control name Allows you to select one control lot to to include in the Levey-Jennings graph. include in the Levey-Jennings graph. The system uses the configured default Control level lot number if you do not make another Allows you to select one or more levels selection. to include in the Levey-Jennings graph.
Point detail window field descriptions

Point value Displays the value and units of the control point selected. Mean Displays the expected mean of the control data selected. 2 SD Point SD Displays the point value's standard deviation from the mean. 1 SD Displays the +/- 1 standard deviation of the control data selected. 3 SD
Displays the +/- 2 standard deviation of Displays the +/- 3 standard deviation of the control data selected. the control data selected. Time completed Displays the date and time the control result completed. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control completed. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the control and generate the result. Include / Exclude Allows you to include the point again or exclude it. NOTE: You must enter a comment before the point is included again or excluded. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the control point. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Westgard re-evaluation Allows you to re-evaluate a selected control result after including or excluding the point.
Appendix E-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Calibration order screen field descriptions

C/P Starting C Allows you to specify whether to run the Displays when you select the carrier sample on the sample carrier or the button. Allows you to enter the starting sample carousel (c System). ID for the carrier or LAS carousel (i 2000) in which you place the first NOTE: This field is not displayed on control for processing. an i 2000SR LAS. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. NOTE: The system automatically increments the correct number of positions required for the calibration for up to five consecutive carriers. Starting P Assays (list) Displays the starting carousel position Lists the assays installed on the (P) in which the calibrator will be placed system. If you select the carousel for processing. button, only c System assays display. NOTE: This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Assay options (Calibration order) window field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay to be processed. Lot Allows you to enter the calibrator lot number. Calibration type Displays the calibration type for the assay selected. (i System) Allows you to select the calibration type if configured for the assay. (c System) Calibrator name Displays the name of the calibrator set used to calibrate the assay. Expiration date Allows you to enter the calibrator expiration date. Number of levels Displays the number of levels defined for the assay.
Appendix E-76
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Module selection (i System) Allows you to select a processing module other than the default module when you have a multi-module i System. If you select Manual, a check box displays for each processing module.
Module (i System) Displays a check box for each processing module if you select manual as the Module selection option.
Calibration status screen field descriptions

M ASSAY Displays the name of the assay. Displays the module on which the calibration was ordered and processed for the reagent lot. REAGENT LOT CAL DATE / TIME Displays the lot number of the reagent. Displays the date and time of the last calibration. CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the reagent lot. See Calibration statuses, page 6-18. EXP DATE / TIME Displays the date and time the calibration curve expires. (c System)
Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to search. Assay Allows you to search by assay name. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Appendix E-77
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reagent lot Allows you to search by reagent lot number. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Status Allows you to search by calibration Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Curves with an expiration less than Allows you to enter an expiration time interval from 1-24 hours for a c System calibration curve(s).
Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed. Reagent lot Displays the lot number of the reagent kit used to calibrate the assay. Expiration date Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve. Calibration status
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current Descriptions of reagent lot number used for calibration. calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the assay. Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed. Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay. Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot used to calibrate the assay. Operator ID Cal method Displays the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. Calibrator lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Error code
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the calibration error code and on when the calibration was performed. message text, if any.
Appendix E-78
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Curve expiration date / time
Override curve expiration date
Allows you to override the calibration Displays the expiration date and time curve expiration date if the calibration for the full and adjust (assay specific) calibration curve. If the curve is expired, expiration override is configured On. the date/time displays in red. CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator. CONC / UNITS Displays the concentration value for each level of calibrator defined in the assay parameters. CAL FACTOR
CAL / ABSORBANCE
Displays the median absorbance value Displays the calibration factor for the for the calibrator level. calibration level(s). REP 1 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 1. REP 3 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 3. REP 2 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 2.
Calibration curve window - Use cal factor / blank assay view (c System) field descriptions
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current calibration reagent lot number used for calibration. Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the assay. Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed. Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay. Cal method Displays the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. Calibrator lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay.
Appendix E-79
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot used to calibrate the assay. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration was performed. Curve expiration date / time Displays the expiration date and time for the full and adjust (assay specific) calibration curve. If the curve is expired, the date and time displays in red. CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator.
Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Error code Displays the calibration error code and message text, if any. Reference assay Displays the name of the assay from which the calibration data is referenced when the calibration method is Use Cal factor/Blank. CONC / UNITS Displays the concentration value for each level of calibrator defined in the assay parameters. CAL FACTOR
CAL / ABSORBANCE
Displays the median absorbance value Displays the calibration factor for the for the calibrator level. calibration level(s). REP 1 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 1. REP 3 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 3. REP 2 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 2.
Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed. Reagent lot Displays the lot number of the reagent kit used to calibrate the assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the calibration curve.
Appendix E-80
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Expiration date
Calibration status
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current Descriptions of reagent lot number used for calibration. calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the assay. Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed. Calibrator lot Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay. Expiration date
Displays the lot number of the calibrator Displays the expiration date of the used to calibrate the assay. calibrator lot used to calibrate the assay. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Error code Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration was performed. Curve expiration date / time
Displays the calibration error code and Displays the expiration date and time for the calibration curve. If the curve is message text, if any. expired, the date and time displays in red. Override curve expiration date Allows you to override the calibration curve expiration date if the calibration expiration override is configured On. CONC / UNITS Displays the concentration value for each level of calibrator defined in the assay parameters. CAL / SLOPE CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator.
CAL / mV Displays the median millivolt value for each calibrator level. REP 1
Displays the percent response of the Displays the absorbance value or mV ICT (integrated chip technology) value for replicate 1. module for the low and high calibrators. REP 2 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 2. REP 3 Displays the absorbance value or mV value for replicate 3.
Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) field descriptions

Appendix E-81
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current calibration reagent lot number used for calibration. Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the assay. Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed. Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay. Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot used to calibrate the assay. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration was performed. Cal 1 ratio Displays the calibration 1 adjustment ratio. CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator. REP 1 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 1. Cal method Displays the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. Calibrator lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Error code Displays the calibration error code and message text, if any. Cal 2 ratio Displays the calibration 2 adjustment ratio. MEAN RLU Displays the mean of the calibrator replicates RLU (relative light units). REP 2 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 2.
Appendix E-82
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
CONC / UNITS Displays the concentration value for each level of calibrator defined in the assay parameters. NOTE: The displayed concentration is the default unit. FIT CURVE RLU Displays the fit curve RLU data for each calibrator.
REF CAL RLU Displays the reference (master cal) data read from the 2-D reagent bar code label on the microparticle bottle.
Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) field descriptions

Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current calibration reagent lot number used for calibration. Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the assay. Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed. Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay. Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot used to calibrate the assay. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration was performed. Cal method Displays the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. Calibrator lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Error code Displays the calibration error code and message text, if any.
Appendix E-83
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator. REP 1 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 1. REP 3 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 3.
MEAN RLU Displays the mean of the calibrator replicates RLU (relative light units). REP 2 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 2.
Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) field descriptions

Displays the expiration date of the Displays the current calibration reagent lot number used for calibration. Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17 of the assay. Cal date / time Displays the date and time the calibration completed. Calibration type Displays the calibration type for this assay. Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the calibrator lot used to calibrate the assay. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration was performed. CAL ID Displays the name of the calibrator. Cal method Displays the mathematical procedure used to analyze the data. Calibrator lot Displays the lot number of the calibrator used to calibrate the assay. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Error code Displays the calibration error code and message text, if any. CONC / UNITS Displays the concentration value for each level of calibrator defined in the assay parameters.
Appendix E-84
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
FIT CURVE RLU
MEAN RLU
Displays the fit curve RLU (relative light Displays the mean of the calibrator units) data for each calibrator. replicates. REP 1 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 1. REP 2 RLU Displays the RLU value for replicate 2.
Calibration history screen field descriptions

M ASSAY Displays the module on which the Displays the name of the assay. calibration was ordered and processed for the reagent lot. REAGENT LOT CAL DATE / TIME Displays the lot number of the reagent. Displays the date and time of the last calibration. CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the reagent lot. See Calibration statuses, page 6-18. EXP DATE / TIME Displays the date and time the calibration curve expires (c System).
Archive calibration curves window field descriptions

Appendix E-85
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
INSTRUCTIONS (box) Displays the step-by-step instructions you must perform. Archive name Displays the name the system uses to archive the file. You cannot change the name. The naming convention displays in the format xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Czz, where: xxxxx represents the ARCHITECT System number yyyyyyyy represents that day's date Czz represents the archive number The calibration curve archive identifier (.Czz) starts at 01 and increments for each calibration curve archive created on each new day. Number of results selected Displays the number of results you selected for the archive from the Calibration history screen, page 6-25. Space available Displays the amount of space available on the CD currently in the CD drive. If the correct CD is not recognized, an information message displays in this field. See Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-271. Space required Displays the approximate amount of space needed on the CD to perform the archive. Delete inactive curves after archive Allows you to delete the inactive curves after you archive them. Default: Delete inactive curves after archive.
Stored QC results screen field descriptions

M C/P Displays the number of the module that Displays one of the following sample locations: processed the control. NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5. Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000)
Appendix E-86
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. LEVEL Displays the level of the control that processed. RESULT Displays the value and units of the stored result.
CONTROL NAME Displays the name of the control that processed. ASSAY Displays the name of the assay. FLAG Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of quality control result flags, page 5-245.
Find options (Stored QC results) window field descriptions

Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module system to search on. Control name Allows you to enter the control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C P Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position (P) number you want to search on. Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. SID Allows you to enter the sample ID. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Control lot Allows you to enter the lot number of the control you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Appendix E-87
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Results with option Allows you to search for results with flags.
Reagent lot Allows you to search by the reagent lot number. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval.
Time from / to Allows you to enter a time range you want to search for. NOTE: Do not enter multiple dates when searching for a specific time interval. Status Allows you to search by result status. See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152.
Operator ID Allows you to search for the operator ID logged on to the system at the time the control order was placed. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Control name Displays the name of the control. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results. Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Control level Displays the name of the level for the control result.
Appendix E-88
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Absorbance Displays the response value used in calculating the result. mV (ICT only) absorbance (photometric assays only) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays. Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Result Displays the value and units of the control result. Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control during QC configuration.
Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer).
Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the last calibration was performed. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the control and generate the result. Comment Displays the comment entered for the QC result.
Time completed Displays the date and time the control completed. Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration was completed. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the QC result.
Appendix E-89
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions
SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Control name Displays the name of the control. Control level Displays the name of the level for the control result. POINT (table) Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Wavelength
Displays the wavelength and reaction NOTE: If no absorbance data is type. available, no information displays in this table. POINT - Displays the read points 1 through 33. PRIMARY- Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary wavelength. SECONDARY - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary wavelength. PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference of the primary wavelength minus the secondary wavelength absorbance. Graph Indicates the type of absorbance data that displays on the graph. Y axis scale Allows you to specify the absorbance axis range to view on the graph. When you edit these fields, the Rescale button becomes available. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed.
Appendix E-90
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Result Displays the value and units of the control result.
Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process results.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) field descriptions

SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Control name Displays the name of the control. Control level Displays the name of the level for the control result. Assay Displays the name of the assay that was processed. Result Displays the value and units of the control result. Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control during QC configuration. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. RLU Displays the response value in RLUs (relative light units) used to calculate the result. Dilution Displays the dilution used for this test.
Appendix E-91
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Status Displays the status of the result as follows:
Module / Serial No.
Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was Complete - Results have completed run. and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Time completed Displays the date and time the control was processed. Time of cal Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control completed. Reagent lot
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the reagent lot used to lot calibration completed. process the control and generate the result. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used to obtain the result. Comment Displays the comment entered for the QC result.
Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Calculated field descriptions

SID Displays the sample ID. C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Control name Displays the name of the control. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number on which the assay was run. Control lot Displays the lot number for the control. Control level Displays the level that was run for the control.
Appendix E-92
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Constituent assays (table) Displays the following information for the constituent assays used to determine the calculated result. Module (M) Assay Result Flags Result Displays the value and unit of the result. Flags Displays the flags associated with the result. See Descriptions of patient result flags, page 5-225. Status Displays the status of the result as follows: Complete - Results have completed and are not pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Pending transmission - Results have completed and are pending transmission to the host (when connected to a host computer). Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the control completed.
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay.
Control range Displays the control range configured when you created the control during QC configuration. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the control was processed.
Comment Displays the comment entered for the QC result.
Archive QC results window field descriptions

Appendix E-93
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
INSTRUCTIONS (box) Displays the step-by-step instructions you must perform. Archive name Displays the name the system uses to archive the file. You cannot change the name. The naming convention displays in the format xxxxx\yyyyyyyy.Qzz, where: xxxxx represents the ARCHITECT System number yyyyyyyy represents that day's date Qzz represents the archive number The QC archive identifier (.Qzz) starts at 01 and increments for each QC archive created on each new day. Number of results selected Space required Displays the number of results you Displays the approximate amount of selected for the archive from the Stored space needed on the CD to perform the results screen, page 5-262. archive. Space available Delete records after archive Displays the amount of space available Allows you to delete the result records on the CD currently in the CD drive. If after you archive them. the correct CD is not recognized, an Default: Delete records after archive. information message displays in this field. See Descriptions of archive messages, page 5-271.
QC reports screen field descriptions

Module Allows you to select a processing module to be used for the report. NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5. Controls Allows you to select the control(s) to include in the report. Date from / to Allows you to enter the date range to be used for the report.
Appendix E-94
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E QC summary review screen field descriptions

Date range Displays the date range used for the calculation. M Displays the number of the module that processed the control. NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5. Assay Displays the name of the assay. Level Displays the name of the control level. ACTUAL MEAN CONTROL NAME/LOT Displays the name and lot number of the control. N Displays the number of control points within the specified date range. ACTUAL SD
Field descriptions
Displays the calculated mean of the QC Displays the calculated standard data. deviation of the QC data. % CV Displays the calculated percent coefficient of variation of the QC data. EXPECTED SD Displays the expected standard deviation configured for the control level. EXPECTED MEAN Displays the expected mean configured for the control level.
Find options (QC summary review) window field descriptions

Control name Allows you to enter the control name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Control lot Allows you to enter the lot number of the control you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Appendix E-95
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Level Allows you to search for a specific control.
SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay ordered. This field supports a wildcard (*) search.
Results with Allows you to search for results with Flags.
Details for QC summary window field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay. Control name Displays the name of the control. Date range Control lot Displays the lot number of the control. Control level Displays the name of the control level. Module/Serial No.
Displays the date range entered for the Displays the module number and the QC summary. serial number on which the assay was run. Expected Displays the expected mean and standard deviation configured. Actual data for date range Displays the data calculated for the specified module and date range. Manufacturer Displays the manufacturer's mean and standard deviation configured. System data for date range Displays the data calculated for the specified date range for all processing modules in a multi-module i System. This data is the same as the actual data for date range for other system configurations. System cumulative
Module cumulative
Displays the cumulative data calculated Displays the cumulative data calculated for the specified module. for all processing modules in a multi-module i System. This data is the same as the module cumulative data for other system configurations.
Appendix E-96
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Exceptions icon screens and windows

The Exceptions icon allows you to access the menu items Exception status and Rerun status. Exceptions icon screens and windows topics include: Exception status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-97 Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-98 Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-99 Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-100 Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-102 Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions, page Appendix E-103 Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-104 Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field descriptions, page Appendix E-106 Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions, page Appendix E-107 Rerun status screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-108
Exception status screen field descriptions

The control name and level for control orders LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) The calibrator name and level for calibration orders (i 2000)
Appendix E-97
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
NAME Displays the name or PID, which can be one of the following: The patient's name for patient samples The control name and level for control orders The calibrator name and level for calibration orders M
ASSAY Displays the name of the assay requested for processing.
ERROR CODE
Displays the number of the module that Displays the numeric error code for the generated the exception. This field is exception and the error code text that blank when the test cannot be assigned describes the error that occurred. to or processed on a module. NOTE: Calculated assay results are assigned to module 5.
Find options (Exception status) window field descriptions

Module Allows you to select the module in a multi-module system to search on. Name Allows you to enter the patient, control, or calibrator name you want to search for. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. C P Allows you to enter one of the following: Allows you to enter the position number you want to search on. Carrier ID (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS for samples aspirated from the LAS track LAS carousel ID (i 2000) This field supports a wildcard (*) search. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS. This field is not displayed on an i 2000SR LAS.
Appendix E-98
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Bay or Section Allows you to enter the bay or section number you want to search for. (RSH)
SID Allows you to enter the sample ID you want to search for. You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters. This field supports a wildcard (*) search Error code Allows you to enter the error code you want to search for.
Assay Allows you to search for a specific assay. This field supports a wildcard (*) search. Status Allows you to search by the following statuses: Pending transmission Pending collation See Descriptions of test statuses, page 5-152.
Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number of the module that Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) processed the exception. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. (For patient samples only) Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Appendix E-99
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Dilution Displays the dilution used for the test.
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Absorbance Displays the response value used in calculating the result. mV (ICT only) absorbance (photometric assays only) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays.
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Error code Displays the exception error code number and text. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process the exception. NOTE: The cuvette number does not display if the test was not dispensed. Time completed Displays the date and time the test exception occurred. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the test and generate the exception. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used when the exception occurred. Time of cal Displays the date and time the reagent lot calibration completed. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-100
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number of the module that Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH) processed the exception. CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the patient ID. POINT (table) Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Wavelength
Displays the wavelength and reaction NOTE: If no absorbance data is type. available, no information displays in this table. Displays the following information: Point - Displays the read points 1 through 33. Primary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the primary wavelength. Secondary - Displays the absorbance readings for each read point at the secondary wavelength. PRIM - SEC - Displays the difference of the primary wavelength minus the secondary wavelength absorbance. Graph Indicates the type of absorbance data that displays on the graph. Y axis scale Allows you to specify the absorbance axis range to view on the graph. When you edit these fields, the Rescale button becomes available.
Appendix E-101
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Cuvette Displays the number of the cuvette used to process the exception. NOTE: The cuvette number does not display if the test was not dispensed.
Details for exceptions window (i System) field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. (For patient samples only) Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Dilution Displays the dilution used for the test. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. RLU Displays the response value in RLUs (relative light units) used to calculate the result. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number of the module that processed the exception.
Appendix E-102
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed
Error code Displays the exception error code number and text.
Operator ID
Displays the date and time the test was Displays the ID of the operator logged ordered. on when the test was ordered. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the test and generate the exception Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used when the exception occurred. Time of cal Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Draw date / time
Displays the date and time the reagent Displays the date and time the sample lot calibration completed. was drawn. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient. Gender Displays the gender of the patient. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the system serial number.
Appendix E-103
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
SID Displays the sample ID. PID Displays the assigned patient ID, if entered on the Details for sample window, page 5-133 or sent by the host. (For patient samples only) Constituent assays (table) Displays the following for the constituent assays used to determine the calculated result. Module (M) Assay Result Flags Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay.
Date of birth Displays the date of birth for the patient. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH)
Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed.
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the test exception occurred. Doctor Displays the name of the patient's doctor. Draw date / time Displays the date and time the sample was drawn.
Error code Displays the exception error code number and text. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered. Location Displays the location associated with the patient. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for exceptions window - Control view field descriptions

Appendix E-104
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. RLU Displays the response value used in calculating the result: RLU (i System) Absorbance (photometric) mV - (ICT) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays. Result This field is blank for control exceptions. Time completed Displays the date and time the test exception occurred. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the control and generate the exception Error code Displays the exception error code number and text. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered. Doctor This field is blank for control exceptions. Lot Displays the control lot run. Level Displays the name of the control level. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Dilution Displays the dilution used for the test. Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number of the module that processed the exception.
Appendix E-105
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used when the exception occurred. Time of cal
Location This field is blank for control exceptions. Draw date / time
Displays the date and time the reagent This field is blank for control lot calibration completed. exceptions. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Details for exceptions window - Calculated control view field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) Name Displays the name of the patient. SID Displays the sample ID. Bay Displays the bay in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Lot Displays the control lot run. Level Displays the name of the control level. Constituent assays (table) Displays the following for the constituent assays used to determine the calculated result. Module (M) Assay Result Flags Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the system serial number that processed the exception.
Appendix E-106
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Codes Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153. Time completed Displays the date and time the test exception occurred. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to 50 characters.
Error code Displays the exception error code number and text.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the test was ordered.
Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view field descriptions

C/P Displays one of the following sample locations: Carrier ID (C) and position (P) (RSH/SSH) CRSL (c System sample carousel) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) LAS (laboratory automation system) Name Displays the name and level of the calibrator. SID Displays the sample ID. Bay or Section Displays the bay or section in which you loaded the sample. (RSH) Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. Lot This field is blank for calibrator exceptions. Type Displays the type of calibration run. Assay Displays the name of the assay that processed. Dilution Displays the dilution used for the test. Module / Serial No. Displays the module number and the serial number of the module that processed the exception.
Appendix E-107
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
RLU Displays the response value used in calculating the result: RLU (i System) Absorbance (photometric) mV - (ICT) NOTE: This field does not display for sample interference index assays. Result Displays a blank field as the system is unable calculate the result due to the exception error. Time completed Displays the date and time the test exception occurred. Reagent lot Displays the reagent lot used to process the test and generate the exception Time of cal
Error code Displays the exception error code number and text. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the calibration was ordered. Reagent S / N Displays the serial number of the reagent used when the exception occurred. Comment
Displays the date and time the reagent Allows you to enter a comment for the result. You can enter up to lot calibration was completed. approximately 50 characters.
Rerun status screen field descriptions

The control name and level for control orders LAS (laboratory automation system) LAS carousel ID (C) and position (P) (i 2000) NOTE: For pending orders when you have not manually assigned a carrier or carousel position, this field is blank
Appendix E-108
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
NAME Displays the name or PID, which can be one of the following: The patient's name for patient samples The control name and level for control orders STATUS
ASSAY Displays the name of the assay.
TIME
Displays the current status of the assay Displays the time the order will complete (in 24 hour format). Time you ordered. See Descriptions of test information displays for all samples statuses, page 5-152. with a status of Running. CODE Displays up to four single character codes to indicate a processing condition(s). See Descriptions of processing codes, page 5-153.
Reagents icon screens and windows

The Reagents icon allows you to access the menu items Reagent status and Reagent history. Reagents icon screens and windows topics include: Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions, page Appendix E-110 Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions, page Appendix E-111 Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions, page Appendix E-112 Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-113 Assign location window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-114 Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-115 Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-115 Reagent history screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-116 Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-117
Appendix E-109
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reagent status screen - c System field descriptions

Module Allows you to select an individual module or all modules to view reagent status information. R1 carousel graphic Displays the R1 supply center segments and positions. Positions may be colored as follows: White - No reagent is loaded in the position Teal - Reagent with an OK status loaded in the position Gold - Reagent with a Low Alert or Overridden status loaded in the position Red - Reagent with an error condition that requires your attention loaded in the position R2 carousel graphic R1, R2 Displays the reagent supply center Displays the R2 supply center segments and positions. Positions may position of a specific R1 and R2 reagent. be colored as follows: White - No reagent is loaded in the position Teal - Reagent with an OK status loaded in the position Gold - Reagent with a Low Alert or Overridden status loaded in the position Red - Reagent with an error condition that requires your attention loaded in the position ASSAY Displays the name of the assay using the reagent kit. CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Appendix E-110
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
REMAINING TESTS Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit. NOTE: When you load a new bar coded reagent and it is scanned, the system calculates the number of remaining tests in the cartridge using the maximum cartridge capacity instead of the actual fill volume. The remaining tests number updates when the system aspirates the reagent and a liquid level sense occurs.
REAGENT STATUS Displays the status of the reagent kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69. For statuses other than OK, Overridden, and Low Alert text in the list associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the caution symbol displays on the Reagent status button on the processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen, page 1-18. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69.
Reagent status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR field descriptions

Module Allows you to select an individual module or all modules to view reagent status information. Reagent carousel graphic Displays the reagent carousel positions. Positions may be colored as follows: White - No reagent is loaded in the position Teal - Reagent with an OK status loaded in the position Gold - Reagent with a Low Alert or Overridden status loaded in the position Red - Reagent with an error condition that requires your attention loaded in the position P Displays the carousel position of a specific reagent. Some assays require two adjacent carousel positions. ASSAY Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Appendix E-111
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17. REAGENT STATUS Displays the status of the reagent kit. For statuses other than OK, Overridden, and Low Alert text in the list associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the caution symbol displays on the Reagent status button on the processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen, page 1-18. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69.
REMAINING TESTS Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit.
Reagent status screen - View all view field descriptions

Module Allows you to select an individual module or all modules to view reagent status information. ASSAY Displays the name of the assay using the reagent kit. REAGENT LOT Displays the reagent lot number. M/P Displays the module and position of a specific reagent kit. CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit. REMAINING TESTS Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c System). NOTE: When you load a new bar coded reagent and it is scanned, the system calculates an estimated number of tests remaining in the cartridge using the maximum cartridge capacity instead of the actual fill volume. This number updates when the system aspirates the reagent and a liquid level sense occurs. (c System) Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (i System).
Appendix E-112
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
REAGENT STATUS Displays the status of the reagent kit.
EXP. DATE
Displays the date the reagent expires. If you override the expiration, Overridden For statuses other than OK, Mixing (i System), and Overridden, text in the list displays. associated with the reagent kit displays red. In addition, the caution symbol displays on the reagent status button on the processing module graphic on the Snapshot screen, page 1-18. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69. STABILITY Displays the number of onboard stability days remaining for the reagent kit. If the time remaining is less than 24 hours, <1 displays. (c System)
Details for reagent (Reagent status) window field descriptions

Reagent lot number Reagent status Displays the lot number for the reagent Displays the status for each reagent kit. kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69. Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the reagent kit. Remaining tests Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c System). NOTE: When you load a new bar coded reagent and it is scanned, the system calculates an estimated number of tests remaining in the cartridge using the maximum cartridge capacity instead of the actual fill volume. This number updates when the system aspirates the reagent and a liquid level sense occurs. (c System) Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (i System).
Appendix E-113
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Onboard stability: Displays the number of hours remaining for stability tracking. (c System)
Assay info (table) Displays the following information for each assay using the selected reagent kit:
Displays the number of days remaining Module for stability tracking. (i System) Assay / Number Component info (table) Assay Version Displays the following information for each bottle / cartridge in the reagent kit: Position S/N Remaining Tests (c System) Control No. (i System) Cal Status
Assign location window (c System) field descriptions

Reagent kits (table) Lot number Displays the lot number for the reagent Displays non-bar coded reagent and sample diluent kits currently configured kit. on the system and their locations if they have already been assigned a location. R1 / R2 - Displays the location of the reagent kit Reagent - Displays the name of the reagent kit Serial number Displays the serial number for the reagent kit. R1 / R2 cartridge size Displays the size of the cartridge the reagent kit is using for R1 and R2. NOTE: If the kit is an R1 cartridge only, R2 cartridge size does not display. Expiration date Displays the expiration date for the reagent kit. Select location Allows you to select the location in: Reagent supply center 1 - To load the cartridge, and then to enter the position in which you will load the cartridge. Reagent supply center 2- To load the cartridge, and then to enter the position in which you will load the cartridge.
Appendix E-114
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E Find options (Reagent status) window field descriptions
P Allows you to search on the position in which the reagent is loaded. NOTE: For c System processing modules, if a carousel position is not selected the search includes the R1 and R2 reagent carousels. Carousel (c System) Reagent status Allows you to search for the reagent kit Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its status. See Descriptions of by its specific carousel location. reagent statuses, page 5-69. NOTE: You must enter a position before the R1 and R2 checkboxes become available. Cal status Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its calibration status. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17. Assay Allows you to search by assay name.
Field descriptions
Find options (Reagent status - View all) window field descriptions

NOTE: The same Find options window displays from both the Reagent status screen - View all view and the Reagent history screen. To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see Buttons, page Appendix E-6. Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the screen or window.
Module Allows you to search by module to locate the reagent kit. P Allows you to search on the position in which the reagent is loaded. NOTE: For c System processing modules, if a carousel position is not selected the search includes the R1 and R2 reagent carousels.
Appendix E-115
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Allows you to search by assay name.
Carousel (c System) Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its specific carousel location. NOTE: You must enter a position before the R1 and R2 checkboxes become available.
S/N Allows you to search by the serial number of the reagent kit. Reagent lot
Control no. (i System) Allows you to search by the control number of the reagent kit. Reagent status
Allows you to search by the reagent lot Allows you to search for the reagent kit number for the reagent kit. by its status. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69. Cal status Allows you to search for the reagent kit by its calibration status. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17.
Reagent history screen field descriptions

M/P Displays the module and position of a specific reagent kit. CAL STATUS Displays the calibration status for the assay using the reagent kit. See Descriptions of calibration statuses, page 6-17. ASSAY Displays the name of the assay using the reagent kit. REAGENT LOT Displays the reagent lot number.
Appendix E-116
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
REMAINING TESTS
REAGENT STATUS
Displays an estimated number of tests Displays the status of the reagent kit. remaining in the reagent kit (c System). For statuses other than OK, Mixing (i System), and Overridden, text in the list NOTE: When you load a new bar associated with the reagent kit displays coded reagent and it is scanned, the red. In addition, the caution symbol system calculates an estimated displays on the reagent status button number of tests remaining in the on the processing module graphic on cartridge using the maximum the Snapshot screen. See Descriptions cartridge capacity instead of the of reagent statuses, page 5-69. actual fill volume. This number updates when the system aspirates the reagent and a liquid level sense occurs. (c System) Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (i System). EXP. DATE STABILITY Displays the date the reagent expires. If Displays the number of onboard stability days remaining for the reagent the user overrides the expiration, kit. If the time remaining is less than 24 Overridden displays. hours, <1 displays (c System).
Details for reagent (history) window field descriptions

Reagent lot number Reagent status Displays the lot number for the reagent Displays the status for each reagent kit. kit. See Descriptions of reagent statuses, page 5-69.
Appendix E-117
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Expiration date Displays the expiration date of the reagent kit.
Remaining tests Displays an estimated number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (c System). NOTE: When you load a new bar coded reagent and it is scanned, the system calculates an estimated number of tests remaining in the cartridge using the maximum cartridge capacity instead of the actual fill volume. This number updates when the system aspirates the reagent and a liquid level sense occurs. (c System) Displays the number of tests remaining in the reagent kit (i System).
Onboard stability Displays the number of hours remaining for stability tracking. (c System)
Assay info (table) Displays the following information for each assay using the selected reagent kit:
Displays the number of days remaining Module for stability tracking. (i System) Assay / Number Component info (table) Assay version Displays following information for each bottle / cartridge in the reagent kit: Position S/N Remaining Tests (c System) Control no. (i System) Cal status
Supplies icon screens and windows

The Supplies status icon allows you to access the menu item Supply status. Supplies icon screens and windows topics include: Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions, page Appendix E-119 Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions, page Appendix E-119 Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions, page Appendix E-120 Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions, page Appendix E-121
Appendix E-118
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E Supply status screen - c System view field descriptions
Module Allows you to select a module to view supply status information. ICT reference Displays the volume remaining in mL and % for the supply of ICT (integrated chip technology) reference solution onboard. When approximately 400 mL (20%) remains, the arrow changes from gray to red. NOTE: If the system is configured with no ICT module installed, the ICT reference solutions icon is grayed out. Alkaline wash Displays the volume remaining in mL and % for the supply of alkaline wash solution onboard. When approximately 100 mL (20%) remains, the arrow changes from gray to red. Reagent supply center 1 Displays the position and onboard solution name as configured for reagent supply center 1. Sample carousel Acid wash Displays the volume remaining in mL and % for the supply of acid wash solution onboard. When approximately 100 mL (20%) remains, the arrow changes from gray to red. Reagent supply center 2 Displays the position and onboard solution name as configured for reagent supply center 2. Waste icon
Field descriptions
Displays the sample carousel position Displays the high-concentration waste for the wash solutions and the onboard bottle status. status. NOTE: If the system is configured Cup icon status: with no high-concentration waste Clear - OK bottle installed, the waste icon is grayed out. Red - Empty
Supply status screen - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions

Appendix E-119
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Module Allows you to select a module to view supply status information. Solid waste Displays the amount of available space in the container measured in number of RVs (reaction vessels) and % remaining. When approximately 20% remains the arrow changes from gray to red. Wash buffer Displays the amount of wash buffer remaining on the system measured in liters. When approximately 20% (5 liters) remains, the arrow changes from gray to red. Pre-Trigger Displays the amount of pre-trigger remaining on the system measured in milliliters. When approximately 20% (195 mL) remains, the arrow changes from gray to red. NOTE: Stability displays the number of days remaining for onboard stability of the pre-trigger solution. When the stability reaches zero days, EXPIRED displays next to the name. If pre-trigger solution is configured for expiration override, OVERRIDDEN displays next to the name.
RVs remaining Displays the approximate number of RVs remaining on the system. Each icon represents 50 RVs. When approximately 20% (240 RVs) remains the arrow changes from gray to red. Trigger Displays the amount of trigger remaining on the system measured in milliliters. When approximately 20% (195 mL) remains, the arrow changes from gray to red. NOTE: Stability displays the number of days remaining for onboard stability of the trigger solution. When the stability reaches zero days, EXPIRED displays next to the name. If trigger solution is configured for expiration override, OVERRIDDEN displays next to the name.
Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions

Appendix E-120
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Bulk solutions Reagent supply centers (R1 / R2) Select the following bulk solution to Select the following onboard solutions indicate that you loaded a new bottle in to indicate that you loaded a new the supply center: cartridge in reagent supply centers R1 and R2: ICT reference Alkaline wash Acid wash Sample carousel Select the following wash solutions to indicate that you loaded a new sample cup/tube with wash solution: 0.5% Acid wash Detergent A 0.5% Acid wash Detergent A 10% Detergent B
Update supplies window - i 2000/i 2000SR view field descriptions

Solid waste Select the check box to indicate that you emptied the solid waste container. RVs added Allows you to enter the number of RVs (reaction vessels) you added. Select 500 (one bag), 1000 (two bags), or Other (partial bag) as appropriate. If you added a partial bag, you must also enter the estimated number of RVs you added. Trigger
Wash buffer
Select to load buffer into the 25 L wash Select to indicate you loaded a new buffer reservoir. bottle of trigger solution. Pre-Trigger Select to indicate you loaded a new bottle of pre-trigger solution.
System icon screens and windows

The System icon allows you to access the menu items Maintenance, Diagnostics, System logs, Configuration, and Utilities. System icon screens and windows topics include:
Appendix E-121
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Maintenance screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-127 Maintenance Perform window field descriptions, page Appendix E-128 Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-129 Details for maintenance item window field descriptions, page Appendix E-129 Maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-130 Approve maintenance log window field descriptions, page Appendix E-130 Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-131 Diagnostics screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-131 Diagnostic perform window field descriptions, page Appendix E-132 Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-133 System logs screen field descriptions, page Appendix E-133 Find options (System logs) window field descriptions, page Appendix E-134 Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions, page Appendix E-134 Configure sample ordering window field descriptions, page Appendix E-135 Details for sample ordering window field descriptions, page Appendix E-136 Configure host - release mode window field descriptions, page Appendix E-137 Details for host - release mode window field descriptions, page Appendix E-139 Configure reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix E-140 Details for reports printing window field descriptions, page Appendix E-140 Configure reagents - supplies window field descriptions, page Appendix E-141
Appendix E-122
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Details for reagents - supplies window field descriptions, page Appendix E-143 Configure password window field descriptions, page Appendix E-144 Details for password window field descriptions, page Appendix E-144 Configure system control center window field descriptions, page Appendix E-145 Details for system control center window field descriptions, page Appendix E-146 Configure modules window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-147 Details for modules window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-148 Configure modules window (i 2000) field descriptions, page Appendix E-148 Details for modules window (i 2000) field descriptions, page Appendix E-149 Configure modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions, page Appendix E-149 Details for modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions, page Appendix E-150 Configure sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-151 Details for sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-151 Details for sample handler window (SSH) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152 Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152 Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions, page Appendix E-152 Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions, page Appendix E-153 Configure bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix E-153 Details for bar codes window field descriptions, page Appendix E-155
Appendix E-123
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Configure serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix E-156 Details for serial ports window field descriptions, page Appendix E-157 Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field descriptions, page Appendix E-158 Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-158 Import assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-158 Export assay window field descriptions, page Appendix E-160 Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-161 Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-162 Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-163 Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions, page Appendix E-164 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-165 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-168 Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-169 Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-171 Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-172 Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-175 Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-176 Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions, page Appendix E-177
Appendix E-124
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-178 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-178 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-179 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-180 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-181 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-182 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-182 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-183 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-184 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-185 Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-186 Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-187 Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-188 Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-189 Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-190 Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-190 Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-191
Appendix E-125
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-192 Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-192 Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-193 Configure results parameters window field descriptions, page Appendix E-194 Details for assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions, page Appendix E-195 Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-196 Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions, page Appendix E-196 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-197 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-197 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-198 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions, page Appendix E-199 Configure result units window field descriptions, page Appendix E-199 Details for result units window field descriptions, page Appendix E-200 Configure panel definitions window field descriptions, page Appendix E-200 Details for panel definition window field descriptions, page Appendix E-201 Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions, page Appendix E-201 Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions, page Appendix E-202 Details for assay retest rules window field descriptions, page Appendix E-204
Appendix E-126
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions, page Appendix E-205 Configure single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix E-206 Details for single analyte window field descriptions, page Appendix E-206 Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions, page Appendix E-207 Define data window field descriptions, page Appendix E-208 Details for multiconstituent control window field descriptions, page Appendix E-209 Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-210 Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211 Configure Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211 Details for Westgard window field descriptions, page Appendix E-211 Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-212 Details for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-212 Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions, page Appendix E-212 Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions, page Appendix E-213 Create backup window field descriptions, page Appendix E-213 Print options window field descriptions, page Appendix E-213 Printer window field descriptions, page Appendix E-214
Maintenance screen field descriptions

Appendix E-127
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to perform maintenance. Categories Displays the following categories for maintenance procedures that can be performed on a selected module: To do Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly As needed In process See Maintenance categories and procedure descriptions, page 9-20. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (box) Displays a list of procedures you can perform for the selected module and category.
Maintenance Perform window field descriptions

Category Displays the category of the maintenance procedure you selected. Operator ID Procedure Displays the name of the maintenance procedure you selected. Module
Displays the name of the operator who Displays the module on which the is currently logged on to the system. maintenance procedure will be performed on. Status INSTRUCTIONS (box) Displays the status of the maintenance Displays the instructions for each step procedure. See Maintenance statuses, of the maintenance procedure. page 9-20.
Appendix E-128
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
User Input
Keypad
Allows you to select the Proceed button Displays buttons specific to the procedure. These buttons correspond to continue the procedure. to the L1 - L4 keys on the processing NOTE: Input field buttons change module keypad. You can select the depending on the procedure. keys on the SCC (system control center) or the processing module keypad. Result Displays the results of the procedure. Activity Displays the activity of the module while performing the procedure. When you select Activity, the Results window toggles to the Activity window.
Version details for procedure (maintenance) window field descriptions

Procedure name Displays the name of the procedure. Category Displays the category of the maintenance procedure. User access level Displays the user access level required to perform the procedure. Current version Displays the current version of the maintenance procedure you selected. Status to perform procedure Displays the status the module must be in for you to perform the procedure. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20.
Details for maintenance item window field descriptions

Procedure name Displays the name of the maintenance procedure you performed. Performed with version Displays the version of the maintenance procedure when last performed. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is blank.
Appendix E-129
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Date Displays the date and time on which you last performed the procedure. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is blank. Status Displays the last status of the selected maintenance procedure. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is blank. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20.
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the procedure was performed. If the procedure has not been performed, this field is blank.
Maintenance log screen field descriptions

Module Allows you to select the module for which you want to view the log. Status Displays the approval status of the log you selected. Statuses are: Approved Unapproved Operator ID Displays the ID of the system administrator who approved the log. Date / time Displays the date and time the log was approved. If the maintenance log has MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES (box) not been approved, this field is blank. Displays the maintenance procedures that have been performed.
Approve maintenance log window field descriptions

Appendix E-130
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the log was approved. Approve log option Allows the system administrator to approve the maintenance log for the displayed month. Maintenance log month Displays the month of the maintenance log to be approved.
Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions

Procedure name Displays the name of the maintenance procedure. Performed with version Displays the version of the maintenance procedure performed on the displayed date and time. Completion Date and Time Displays the date and time when the procedure was performed. Comment Allows you to enter a comment for the maintenance procedure selected. You can enter up to approximately 200 characters. NOTE: The comment window is not available for a procedure with a status of Pending or Scheduled. Category Displays the maintenance category of the procedure you selected. Operator ID Displays the ID of the operator who was logged on when the maintenance procedure was performed. Status Displays the status of the maintenance procedure. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20.
Diagnostics screen field descriptions

Appendix E-131
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to perform the diagnostic procedure. Categories Displays the following categories for diagnostic procedures that can be performed on a module: Reaction Mechanisms Pipettors Fluidics / Wash Syringes / Pumps Bar code Readers Modules Solenoids / Sensors Fuses / Motors Optics / Temperature Carousels Precision ICT Utilities Other See Diagnostic categories and procedure descriptions, page 10-657. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES Displays the list of diagnostic procedures available for the selected module and category.
Diagnostic perform window field descriptions

Category Procedure Displays the category for the diagnostic Displays the name of the diagnostic procedure you selected. procedure you selected. Operator ID Module Displays the name of the operator who Displays the module you selected to is currently logged on to the system. perform the diagnostic procedure on.
Appendix E-132
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Status
INSTRUCTIONS (box)
Displays the instructions for each step Displays the status of the selected of the diagnostic procedure. diagnostic procedure. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20 for a description of the statuses. User Input Keypad Allows you to select the Proceed button Displays buttons specific to the to continue the procedure. procedure. These buttons correspond to the L1 - L4 keys on the processing NOTE: Input field buttons change module keypad. You can select the depending on the procedure. keys on the SCC (system control center) or the processing module keypad. Result Displays the results of the procedure. Activity Displays the activity of the module while performing the procedure. When you select Activity, the Results window toggles to the Activity window.
Version details for procedure (diagnostics) window field descriptions

Procedure name Displays the name of the selected procedure. Category Current version Displays the version of the diagnostic procedure currently on the system. Status to perform procedure
Displays the category of the diagnostic Displays the status the module must be procedure. in for you to perform the procedure. See Maintenance statuses, page 9-20 User access level for descriptions of statuses. Displays the log on level required to perform the procedure.
System logs screen field descriptions

Appendix E-133
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Module Allows you to select the module on which you want to view the Temporary Message log or the Message History log. DATE / TIME Displays the date and time the error occurred on the module. ERROR CODE - TEXT Displays the numeric error code and text that describes the error that occurred. Log selection (list) Allows you to select the following logs: Temporary Message log Message History log M Displays the module on which the error occurred.
Find options (System logs) window field descriptions

Module Allows you to select the module to search on Error code Allows you to enter an error code to search on. Error level Allows you to select an error level to search on. Date from / to Allows you to enter a date range you want to search on. Error category Allows you to select error categories to search on.
Configuration screen - System settings view field descriptions

Appendix E-134
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Configure System categories (list) Allows you to select one of the following Allows you to select the following categories for configuration: system configuration items: System settings Assay settings QC-Cal settings Sample ordering Host - Release mode Reports - Printing Reagents - Supplies Password System control center Modules Sample handler Sample bar code reader Serial ports
Configure sample ordering window field descriptions

Appendix E-135
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Batch ordering Allows you to select the sample identification type used when ordering samples in a batch. Options are: IA Sample options Allows you to enter the average number of tests ordered per sample. This setting is used for multi-module systems to optimize the scheduling of tests per module.
Bar coded - Only bar coded samples are used in the batch run. (Default) Range: 1.0 - 25.0 (Default: 1.4) Non-bar coded - Only non-bar coded samples are used in the batch run. NOTE: If a batch order is pending, you cannot change the options. This option is not available for systems configured with a LAS (laboratory automation system). CC Sample options Allows you to select whether the calibration curve can be overridden or not overridden. Options are: On Off (Default)
Details for sample ordering window field descriptions

Batch ordering Displays the current sample identification type used when ordering samples in a batch. NOTE: This option is not available for systems configured with a LAS (laboratory automation system). CC Sample options Displays whether or not the calibration curve can be overridden. IA Sample options Displays the average number of tests per sample. The range is 1.0 to 25.0.
Appendix E-136
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E Configure host - release mode window field descriptions
Communications Bi-directional host: Allows the general operator to enable the bidirectional host mode, so the system can receive orders from and transmit results to a host computer. Options are: On On with query Off (Default) NOTE: Turning bidirectional host off allows you to clear all results waiting to be sent to the host. Host query timeout: Allows the general operator to enter the maximum time period (in seconds) that the system waits for the host computer to respond to a query. Range: 5 - 60 seconds (Default: 10 seconds) NOTE: System throughput may degrade if this timeout period is greater than ten seconds. Error code number and text: Allows the general operator to define the information transmitted to the host for error messages. Options are: Both - Allows both the numeric error code and the message text to be sent to the host computer. Number only - Allows only the numeric error code to be sent to the host computer. Release and Transmit options Allows the general operator to select patient or QC results for configuration.
Field descriptions
Appendix E-137
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Patient results or QC results Release mode: Allows the general operator to select the release mode for results: Options are: Manual - All results must be manually released. (Default) Hold - All results with flags must be manually released. Automatic - Results are released automatically. Automatic with exceptions - Results and exceptions are automatically released. Transmit approved results: Allows the general operator to define the method for transmitting approved results to the host computer: Options are: Collated (Default) - Allows for results for multiple orders for a single sample ID to be sent within a message. Collated by module (patient results only) - Allows for results for multiple orders for a single sample ID on a processing module to be sent within a message. NOTE: Results (both completed results and exceptions) are collated. Released results are held in Pending collation status until all completed results for a sample ID are released and all exceptions for the sample ID have been reported. All test orders for the sample ID must produce an outcome, either a completed result or an exception, before any released results for the sample ID are sent to the host computer.
Appendix E-138
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Single - Allows fro a single result for a single sample ID to be sent within a message. Off (QC results only) - Approved QC results are not sent to the host computer. Doctor, Location, and Draw Date/Time (patient results only): Allows the general operator to enable the release of doctor, location, and draw date/time to the host computer. Options are: On - Allows doctor, location, and draw/date time to be sent to the host computer (if data is available) in result messages. Off (Default) - Does not allow doctor, location, draw date/time to be sent to the host computer in result messages even if the data is available.
Details for host - release mode window field descriptions

Communications Displays the current setting for: Bidirectional host transmission Maximum time period (in seconds) that the system waits for the host computer to respond to a query Information transmitted to the host for error messages QC results Displays the current setting for: Result release mode Method for transmitting approved results to the host computer Patient results Displays the current setting for: Result release mode Method for transmitting approved results to the host computer Release of doctor, location, and draw date/time to the host computer
Appendix E-139
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Configure reports printing window field descriptions

Print flags on reports Allows you to enable the printing of flags on sample and patient reports. Options are: On (default) Off Automatic report printing Allows you to enable automatic printing of the Procedure (Maintenance), Sample, Results List, and Cal Curve Details (Calibration curve results) reports. Options are:
NOTE: The control (CNTL), expired On (EXP), expired calibration curve (c Off (Default) System only) (EXPC), and EDIT (c System only) flags print on the NOTE: The Results List Report sample and patient reports whether prints after 18 results have been the feature is turned on or off. generated and released or ten minutes have elapsed. Header for sample and patient reports Allows you to enter up to five lines (approximately 50 characters per line) of text which print on each sample and patient report. Each field on the screen represents one line of the report header.
Details for reports printing window field descriptions

Appendix E-140
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Print flags on reports Displays on or off to indicate whether flags are printed on the sample or patient reports. Automatic report printing Displays on or off to indicate that Procedure (Maintenance), Sample, Results List, or Cal Curve Details (Calibration curve results) reports print NOTE: The control (CNTL), expired automatically. (EXP), expired calibration curve (c System only) (EXPC), and EDIT (c NOTE: The Results List Report System only) flags print on the prints after 18 results have been sample and patient reports whether generated and released or ten the feature is turned on or off. minutes have elapsed.
Header for sample and patient reports Displays the report header information that prints on the sample and patient reports.
Configure reagents - supplies window field descriptions

Default reagent low alert Allows you to specify a low alert level for reagent kits for CC tests and IA tests. Default: CC tests - 100 IA tests - 0 Reagent expiration override Indicates that the system allows you to override a reagent's expiration on the Details for reagents - supplies window. Options are: On Off (Default)
Appendix E-141
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reagent stability override
Run controls for onboard reagents Indicates that the system allows you to by override a reagent's onboard stability Allows you to specify which reagent kits on the Details for reagents - supplies you want to run for QC. window. Options are: Options are: On Off (Default) Lot: Run QC on only one kit per lot (Default) Kit: Run QC for every kit in lot NOTE: Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically run on one kit on one module (selected by the system software) regardless of the option selected. Wash buffer transfer Pre-Trigger / Trigger stability Allows you to select the current setting override for wash buffer transfer. Options are: Manual (Default) Automatic NOTE: Automatic option should be selected when the ARCHITECT ARM (Automatic Reconstitution Module) is installed. Allows you to specify whether the pre-trigger and trigger stability dates can be overridden. Options are: On Off (Default)
c 8000
Position (R1 & R2) E1 (list)
c 8000
Position (R1 & R2) E2 (list)
Allows you to select the onboard Allows you to select the onboard solution for position E1 in the (R1 & R2) solution for position E2 in the (R1 & R2) onboard solution area. onboard solution area. Default: Detergent A Default: 10% Detergent B
c 8000
Position (R1) D1 (list) Allows you to select the onboard solution and cartridge size in the (R1) D1 reagent carousel segment. NOTE: The onboard solution selected here is automatically configured for position (R2) D1 too. Default: 0.5% Acid Wash
c 8000
Position (R2) D1 (list) Allows you to select the cartridge size for the onboard solution in the (R2) D1 reagent carousel segment. NOTE: The solution displayed for this position is the solution configured for position (R1) D1.
Appendix E-142
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) C1,D1 (list) Allows you to select the onboard solution for positions C1 and D1 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments and the cartridge size. Default: Detergent A
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) C2,D2 (list) Allows you to select the onboard solution for positions C2 and D2 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments and the cartridge size. Default: 10% Detergent B
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) C3 (list) Allows you to select the onboard solution for positions C3 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments and the cartridge size. Default: 0.5% Acid Wash
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) D3 (list) Allows you to select the onboard solution for positions D3 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments and the cartridge size. Default: 0.5% Acid Wash
Details for reagents - supplies window field descriptions

Default reagent low alert Reagent expiration override Displays the current setting for the Displays the current setting for reagent default low alert level for reagent kits for kit expiration override. CC tests and IA tests. Reagent stability override Run controls for onboard reagents Displays the current setting for reagent by kit stability override. Displays the reagent kits you want to run for QC. Lot - Run QC on only one kit per lot Kit - Run QC for every kit in lot NOTE: Controls for constituents of calculated assays are automatically run on one kit on one module (selected by the system software) regardless of the option selected. Wash buffer transfer Displays the current setting for wash buffer transfer. Pre-Trigger / Trigger stability override Displays to indicate whether the system is configured to override pre-trigger/trigger onboard stability.
Appendix E-143
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
c 8000
Position (R1 & R2) E1 Displays the onboard solution configured for position E1 in the (R1 & R2) onboard solution area.
c 8000
Position (R1 & R2) E2 Displays the onboard solution configured for position E2 in the (R1 & R2) onboard solution area.
c 8000
Position (R1) D1
c 8000
Position (R2) D1
Displays the cartridge size and Displays the cartridge size configured onboard solution configured in the (R1) for the onboard solution in the (R2) D1 D1 reagent carousel segment. reagent carousel segment.
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) C1,D1 Displays the cartridge size and onboard solution configured for position C1 and D1 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments.
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) C2,D2 Displays the cartridge size and onboard solution configured for position C2 and D2 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments.
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) C3 Displays the cartridge size and onboard solution configured for position C3 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments.
c 16000
Position (R1 & R2) D3 Displays the cartridge size and onboard solution configured for position D3 in the (R1 & R2) reagent carousel segments.
Configure password window field descriptions

System administrator password System administrator password Allows you to enter a password of up to confirm 20 alphanumeric characters. The Requires that the password be entered password you enter is case sensitive. a second time to confirm the original entry. The password you enter displays Default - ADM as asterisks.
Details for password window field descriptions

Appendix E-144
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
System administrator password Displays the current password for the system administrator.
Configure system control center window field descriptions

System date Allows you to edit the system date. Date format Allows you to edit the date format setting. Options are: MM.DD.YYYY (Default) DD.MM.YYYY YYYY.MM.DD Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings time Allows you to select the check box to automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings. Default: checked Thousands separator Allows you to select the number format for the thousands separator. Options are: Comma None (Default) NOTE: Previously generated results are not updated to the new format. System no. Allows the Abbott service representative to enter the ARCHITECT serial number. SCC serial no. Allows the Abbott service representative to enter the SCC serial number. System time Allows you to edit the system time. Time zone (list) Allows you to select the area-specific time zone used to automatically adjust for daylight savings time.
Appendix E-145
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
System language (list) Allows the general operator to select the system language. Options are: English French German Italian Spanish Japanese QC run definition - Start time Allows you to enter the run definition start time. This information is used during Westgard rule application, page 5-309. Default: Start time - 6:00 Beep volume Allows you to enter a value for the beep volume for the following audible tones: Alert (occurs when an information message displays) Invalid key (occurs when you press an invalid keyboard key) Range: 0 - 10 Default: 5 NOTE: This setting is only available if your system is configured with speakers.
Screen timeout Allows you to edit the setting for screen timeout. Range: 0 - 60 minutes Default: 0 NOTE: System generated information or information messages do not remove the screen saver. To restore the screen, press Enter on the keyboard. QC run definition - No. of hours per run Allows the you to enter the run definition number of hours per run. This information is used during Westgard rule analysis. Default: Hours per run - 12
Details for system control center window field descriptions

System date Displays the current system date. Date format Displays the current date format setting. System time Displays the current system time. Time zone Displays the area-specific time zone used to automatically adjust for daylight savings time.
Appendix E-146
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Automatically adjust clock for daylight savings If selected, indicates the system automatically adjusts the clock for daylight savings.
Number format - Thousands separator Displays the current number format for the thousands separator NOTE: Previously generated results are not updated to the new format.
System no. Displays the ARCHITECT System number. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this setting. System language Displays the current setting for system language. QC run definition - Start time Displays the run definition start time. This information is used during Westgard rule analysis. Beep volume Displays the beep volume settings for the Alert and Invalid key audible tones. NOTE: Displays only if your system is configured with speakers.
SCC serial number Displays the SCC serial number. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this setting. Screen timeout Displays the current setting for screen timeout in minutes. QC run definition - No. of hours per run Displays the run definition number of hours per run. This information is used during Westgard rule analysis.
Configure modules window (c System) field descriptions

Module (list) Allows you to select the desired module. Type Displays the current settings for a module. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information.
Appendix E-147
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Serial No. Displays the module serial number NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information.
Sample saving mode Allows you to enable or disable the sample saving mode. When this mode is enabled, the system aspirates an over-aspiration volume once per sample rather than each time it aspirates a test. Options are: Enabled - Yes (Default) Enabled - No
ICT Module
High concentration waste container
Allows you to define whether or not the Allows you to indicate whether or not ICT module is installed. the high-concentration waste container is used. Options are: Installed - Yes (Default) Installed - No Options are: Installed - Yes Installed - No (Default)
Details for modules window (c System) field descriptions

Module (list) Displays the configured modules. Serial No. Displays the module serial number. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. ICT Module Type Displays the current settings for a module. Sample saving mode Displays whether or not the sample saving mode is enabled. When this mode is enabled, the system aspirates an over-aspiration volume once per sample rather than each time it aspirates a test. High concentration waste container
Displays whether or not the ICT module Displays whether or not the is installed. high-concentration waste container is used.
Configure modules window (i 2000) field descriptions

Appendix E-148
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Module (list) Allows you to select the desired module. Type Displays the current settings for a module. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Serial number Displays the module serial number. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Optics values - Linearity Allows you to edit the optics linearity value. Optics values - Normalization Allows you to edit the optics normalization value.
Details for modules window (i 2000) field descriptions

Module (list) Displays the configured modules. Serial number Displays the serial number for the module. Optics values - Linearity Displays the current optics linearity value. Type Displays the current settings for a module. Optics values - Normalization Displays the current optics normalization value.
Configure modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions

Appendix E-149
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Module (list) Allows you to select the desired module. Type Displays the current settings for a module. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Serial number Displays the module serial number. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Optics values - Linearity Allows you to edit the optics linearity value. STAT protocol percentage Allows you to select the percentage of STAT protocol tests to be performed, which defines the number of reaction vessel positions allocated for STAT assay protocols. Options are: Low 25% (Default) Medium 50% High 75% None NOTE: If this percentage does not reflect the actual number of STAT protocols run, throughput may be decreased. Optics values - Normalization Allows you to edit the optics normalization value.
Details for modules window (i 2000SR) field descriptions

Module (list) Displays the configured modules. Serial number Displays the serial number for the module. Type Displays the current settings for a module. Optics values - Normalization Displays the current optics normalization value.
Appendix E-150
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Optics values - Linearity Displays the current optics linearity value.
STAT protocol percentage Displays the percentage of STAT protocol tests to be performed, which defines the number of reaction vessel positions allocated for STAT assay protocols.
Configure sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions

Type (list) Allows the Abbott service representative to select the sample handler type. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Retest options Allows you to enable or disable automatically repositioning samples for retest. Options are: Yes (Default) No Serial No. Allows you to enter the serial number for the module. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information.
Details for sample handler window (RSH) field descriptions

Type list Displays the option configured for the sample handler type. Retest options Displays the option configured for automatically repositioning samples for retest. Serial No. Displays the sample handler serial number
Appendix E-151
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for sample handler window (SSH) field descriptions

Type Displays the option configured for the sample handler type. Serial No. Displays the sample handler serial number
Configure sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions

Type (list) Allows the Abbott service representative to select the sample handler type. Options are: No lane LAS Interface Allows the Abbott service representative to select the LAS interface type. Options are: Standard Hitachi Response timeout Allows the general operator to edit the value for response timeout. Range: 500 - 9000 milliseconds Default: 500 Send communication message to LAS Allows the general operator to send a communication message to the LAS to re-initialize communication. Default: unchecked Initialization timeout Allows the general operator to edit the value for initialization timeout. Range: 1 - 99 seconds Default: 1 Carousel serial No. Allows the Abbott service representative to enter the serial number of the LAS carousel sample handler (i 2000).
Details for sample handler window (LAS - standard) field descriptions

Appendix E-152
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Type Displays the option configured for the sample handler type. Interface Displays the type of LAS interface being used. Response timeout Displays the current settings for response timeout. Carousel serial No. Displays the serial number of the LAS carousel sample handler. Initialization timeout Displays the current settings for initialization timeout.
Details for sample handler window (LAS - Hitachi) field descriptions

Type Displays the option configured for the sample handler type. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Interface Displays the LAS interface type. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information. Carousel serial No. Displays the serial number of the LAS carousel sample handler. NOTE: Only an Abbott service representative can edit this information.
Configure bar codes window field descriptions

Appendix E-153
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Bar code type (list) Bar code type Allows you to select the bar code type. Allows you to enable or disable a bar Select the list button to view all the bar code type. code types from which to choose. Options are: Options are: Enabled (Default) Code 128 Code 39 Codabar I 2 of 5 See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Checksums Allows you to enable checksums if the selected bar code type supports checksums. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Send checksum digits to the SCC Allows you to specify whether or not checksums are sent to the SCC (system control center) if the selected bar code supports it. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Disabled See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155.
Send the start/stop characters to the Code length #1 SCC Allows you to specify the length for the primary bar code. The range is 2 to 20 Allows you to specify whether or not with an incremental value of 2. start/stop characters are sent to the SCC if the selected bar code type See Bar code configuration options, supports it. page Appendix E-155. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Code length #2 Allows you to specify the length for the secondary bar code. The range is 2 to 20 with an incremental value of 2. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155.
Appendix E-154
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Table Appendix E.1: Bar code configuration options
Bar code type Code 39 Default option Enabled Checksums Start/stop characters Code length N/A
Field descriptions
N/A Select Enabled if a checksum is used. Select the check box if the checksum is to be sent to the SCC (system control center).
Codabar
Enabled
Default setting N/A Select is Disabled. Enabled if a checksum is used. Select the check box if the checksum is to be sent to the SCC. N/A N/A N/A Code length #1: Enter an even number between 2 and 20. (Default is 10.) Code length #2: (Optional) If a second code length is required, enter an even number between 2 and 20. (Default is 8.) N/A Select Enabled if a checksum is used. Select the check box if the checksum is to be sent to the SCC.
Code 128 I 2 of 5
Enabled Enabled
Details for bar codes window field descriptions

Appendix E-155
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Bar code type Bar code type Displays the bar code types the system Displays whether the bar code type supports. Select the list button to view selected is enabled or disabled. all bar code types. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Checksums If the bar code selected supports checksums, indicates whether checksums are enabled or disabled. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Send the start/stop character to the SCC Send checksums digits to the SCC If the bar code selected supports sending checksums, indicates whether checksums are sent to the SCC (system control center). See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Code length #1
If the bar code selected supports code lengths, indicates the code lengths. If the bar code selected supports sending start/stop characters, indicates See Bar code configuration options, whether start/stop characters are sent page Appendix E-155. to the SCC. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155. Code length #2 If the bar code selected supports code lengths, indicates the code lengths. See Bar code configuration options, page Appendix E-155.
Configure serial ports window field descriptions

Port type (list) Allows you to select the list button to view the port types supported by the system, and then select the desired port type(s). Options are: LIS (Default) ARM LAS
Appendix E-156
Port ID Displays the unique ID for the port.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Baud rate (list) Allows you to select the baud rate for the selected port. Options are: 1200 2400 4800 9600 (Default) 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 NOTE: You cannot edit the baud rate for the ARCHITECT ARM serial port Data bits Allows you to select from the following options: 7 8 (Default) NOTE: You cannot edit data bits for the ARCHITECT ARM serial port.
Parity Allows you to select from the following parity options: None (Default) Even Odd NOTE: You cannot edit the parity option for the ARCHITECT ARM serial port.
Stop bits Allows you to select from the following options: 1 (Default) 2 NOTE: You cannot edit stop bits for the ARCHITECT ARM serial port
Details for serial ports window field descriptions

Port type (list) Port ID Displays the selected port type Displays the unique ID and the supported by the system. Select the list communication connector number for button to view all port types. the port. Baud rate Displays the selected baud rate. Data bits Displays the selected data bits. Parity Displays the selected parity. Stop bits Displays the selected stop bits.
Appendix E-157
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Configuration screen - Assay settings - Assay parameters view field descriptions

Configure Allows you to select the configuration category. Categories include: System settings Assay settings QC-Cal settings Assays (list) Allows you to select the assays to configure. Assay categories (list) Displays the configuration items in the Assay settings category. Assay parameters CC reagent settings New assay Result units Panel definitions Retest rules
Configuration screen - Assay settings - New assay view field descriptions

Configure Allows you to select the configuration category. Categories include: System settings Assay settings QC-Cal settings Select assay type Allows you to select the type of user-defined assay to configure. Options are: Calculated (default) Photometric Assay categories (list) Displays the configuration items in the Assay settings category. Assay parameters CC reagent settings New assay Result units Panel definitions Retest rules
Import assay window field descriptions

Appendix E-158
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
INSTRUCTIONS (box) Displays step-by-step instructions for importing assay file(s) to another ARCHITECT c System. ASSAY VERSION ASSAY / NUMBER Displays the assay name and number of the exported ARCHITECT c System assays on the floppy disk. IMPORT STATUS
Displays the version of the exported Displays the status of import for each ARCHITECT c System assay(s) on the assay file. See Descriptions of import floppy disk. status messages, page Appendix E-159.
Descriptions of import status messages

The following table lists the import status messages and their meanings. Table Appendix E.2: Descriptions of import status messages
Message Floppy disk error Assay already installed No disk in drive File was not found Sample diluent / reagent name exists Description A general floppy drive hardware error occurred. The assay has already been installed on your system. You did not place a floppy disk in the drive. You removed the floppy disk from the drive. The sample diluent or reagent name exists for another diluent or reagent. Delete the reagent or diluent before importing the assay. The selected assay requires a reference assay that is not installed on your system. The module(s) must not be in Running or Scheduled pause. No errors reported.
Reference assay not installed
Module not in correct state OK
Appendix E-159
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Table Appendix E.2: Descriptions of import status messages
Message OK - Multiple parameters converted, review Message History. Description The following assay parameters were changed: Sample wash protocol for sample probe changed from Optimized throughput (c 8000 only) to Maximum wash (c 8000 and c 16000). See Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-191. Primary wavelength and/or Secondary wavelength. See Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-165. OK - Sample wash protocol for sample Sample wash protocol for sample probe converted to Maximum wash. probe changed from Optimized throughput (c 8000 only) to Maximum wash (c 8000 and c 16000). See Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-191. OK - One or more wavelengths were changed. Primary wavelength and/or Secondary wavelength. See Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions, page Appendix E-165.
Export assay window field descriptions

INSTRUCTIONS (box) Displays step-by-step instructions for exporting assay file(s). ASSAY / NUMBER Displays the assay name and identifier.
Appendix E-160
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
ASSAY VERSION Displays the assay definition revision number.
EXPORT STATUS Displays the status of export for each assay file. See Descriptions of export status messages, page Appendix E-161.
Descriptions of export status messages

The following table lists the export status messages and their meanings. Table Appendix E.3: Descriptions of export status messages
Message Floppy disk error Description A general floppy drive hardware error occurred or the assay file contains one of the following characters: \ / : * ? "< > | Disk full The floppy disk does not have enough space for the assays selected for export. You did not place a floppy disk in the drive. You inserted a floppy disk that is write protected. The module(s) must not be in Running or Scheduled pause. The exported assay file has a file format error. Assay contains a non-English or non-alphanumeric character. No errors reported.
No disk in drive Disk write protected Module not in correct state File syntax error Non-English character used OK
Configure assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions

Appendix E-161
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay name Allows you to edit the name of the assay. You can enter up to ten characters. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay.
The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory NOTE: You must use a unique name information system) and a LAS for each assay. (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version.
Assay availability (list) Allows you to enable an assay so that it can be selected on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen. Options are: Enabled (Default) Disabled Patient Disabled Current value Allows you to edit the current value for the selected general assay parameter. This field is not shown in the example provided.
General assay parameters (list) Allows you to view assay-specific parameters used in assay formulas for some i System assays. This general assay parameters list is not available for all assays and you cannot edit the list. This field is not shown in the example provided. Range Allows you to edit the current range for the selected general assay parameter. This field is not shown in the example provided.
Details for assay parameters window - General view (i System) field descriptions
Assay name Displays the name of the selected assay. Assay type Displays the assay protocol types.
Appendix E-162
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Assay version Displays the version number of the assay. Cal version Displays the calibration version of the assay. General assay parameters (list)
Pretreatment option Displays the pretreatment option the system uses in the assay protocol.
Assay availability Displays the availability of the assay for ordering. Assay status Displays the assay status defined for the assay. Current value / Range
Displays the assay-specific parameters Displays the current value and allowable range for the general assay used in formulas. This field is not shown in the example parameter. provided. This field is not shown in the example provided.
Configure assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions

Assay Allows you to enter the name for the calculated assay. You can enter up to ten characters. NOTE: You must use a unique name for each assay. Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the calculated assay was created. Date Displays the date the calculated assay was created. Type Displays calculated as the type of assay.
Appendix E-163
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Number Allows you to enter the number for the user-defined assay. A calculated assay automatically created during assay installation has an assay number ranging from 3000-3099. This number cannot be edited.
Assay availability (list) Allows you to enable the user-defined assay so that it can be selected on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen. Options are: Enabled (Default) Disabled Patient Disabled Formula Displays the calculated formula you entered using the keypad keys.
Time Displays the time the calculated assay was created. Selected assays Displays the minimum and maximum value for each constituent assay selected for the calculated formula. The minimum and maximum values define the valid range for each constituent assay. You can select up to four constituent assays for each calculated formula.
Details for assay parameters window - General view (calculated) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the calculated assay. Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the assay was last edited. Number Displays the number defined for the calculated assay. Type Displays the type of assay. Date Displays the date the constituent assay was last edited. Assay availability (list) Displays the availability of the calculated assay for ordering.
Appendix E-164
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Time Displays the time the calculated assay was last edited. Selected assays Displays the constituent assays used in the calculated formula and the minimum and maximum values defined for the valid constituent ranges.
Formula Displays the calculated formula you enter using the keypad keys.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see Buttons, page Appendix E-6. For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide. Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the screen or window.
Assay Allows you to enter the name for the calculated assay. You can enter up to ten characters. NOTE: You must use a unique name for each assay. Version Operator Displays the version of the Displays the ID of the operator logged ARCHITECT c System assay. This field on when the assay was last edited. is blank for user-defined assays. Type Displays the type of assay.
Appendix E-165
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Number Displays the number defined for the ARCHITECT c System assay and allows you to enter a number for a user-defined assay. The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Reaction mode (list)
Assay availability (list) Allows you to enable the assay so that it displays on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen. Options are: Enabled (Default) Disabled Patient Disabled
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited. Primary wavelength (list)
Allows you to select the type of reaction Allows you to select the primary that occurs for the assay. wavelength used to measure the assay concentration. Options are: End Up (default) End Down Rate Up Rate Down Options are: 340 (default) 380 404 412 (c 8000) or 416 (c 16000) 444 (c 8000) or 450 (c 16000) 476 500 524 548 572 604 628 660 700 748 804
Appendix E-166
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Secondary wavelength (list)
Main read time
Allows you to select the secondary Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) wavelength used to measure the assay and ending (1 - 33) photometric points concentration. for the main read time. Options are: None (default) 340 380 404 412 (c 8000) or 416 (c 16000) 444 (c 8000) or 450 (c 16000) 476 500 524 548 572 604 628 660 700 748 804 Last required read Allows you to specify the last read (1 33) required for test calculation so the result can be calculated sooner than the entire ten minute protocol. Default is 33 Absorbance range Allows you to define the upper and lower limit of absorbance within which all reads for a sample should measure. If any read is outside the absorbance limits during main or flex time reads, the data is not used to calculate the result. Flex read time Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric points for the flex read time used for rate assays if all main read times are outside the absorbance range. Color corrections read time Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric points to specify a read time for color correction. The color correction is used to adjust the absorbance range limits based on measured sample color.
Appendix E-167
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Sample blank type (list)
Blank read time
Allows you to select the type of sample blank. Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) Options are: and ending (1 - 33) photometric reads for the blank read time. None Self Blank
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reaction definition view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay. Version Type Displays the type of assay. Operator
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay. This field on when the assay was last edited. is blank for user-defined assays. Number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Reaction mode Displays the type of reaction that occurs for the assay. Secondary wavelength Displays the secondary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration.
Appendix E-168
Assay availability Displays the availability of the assay for ordering.
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited. Primary wavelength Displays the primary wavelength used to measure the assay concentration. Main read time Displays the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 to 33) photometric points for the main read time.
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Last required read Displays the last read (1 - 33) that is required for test calculation so that the result can be calculated sooner than the entire ten minute protocol.
Flex read time Displays the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric points for flex read time used for rate assays if all main read time reads were outside the absorbance range. Color corrections read time Displays the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric points to specify a read time for color correction. The color correction is used to adjust the absorbance range limits based on measured sample color. Blank read time Displays the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric reads for the blank read time when the sample blank type is configured as self blank.
Absorbance range Displays the upper and lower limit of absorbance within which all reads for a sample should measure. If any read is outside the absorbance limits during main or flex time reads, the data is not used to calculate the result. Sample blank type Displays the type of sample blank.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Assay Type Allows you to enter/edit the name of the Displays the type of assay. assay. You can enter up to ten characters. NOTE: You must use a unique name for each assay. Version Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay. This field on when the assay was last edited. is blank for user-defined assays.
Appendix E-169
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Number Displays the number defined for the ARCHITECT c System assay and allows you to enter a number for a user-defined assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Reagent (list)
Assay availability (list) Allows you to enable the assay so that it can be selected on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen. Options are: Enabled (Default) Disabled Patient Disabled
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited. R1 & R2 Reagent volumes
Allows you to select the reagent to use Allows you to enter the R1 and R2 for the assay. You must scan bar coded reagent volume that is dispensed into reagents for them to display in the list. the cuvette. You must configure non-bar coded reagents in the Configure reagents window for them to display in this list. Diluent (list) R1 & R2 Water volumes Allows you to select the sample diluent Allows you to enter the volume of water that is used. the system dispenses along with the R1 reagent when you use concentrated reagents. Diluent dispense mode (list) Allows you to select the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense diluent(s). Options are: Type 0 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 6 Dilution name Allows you to enter the names of up to three dilutions to be defined. R1 & R2 Dispense mode (list) Allows you to select the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense reagent(s). Options are: Type 0 Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 (R2 only) Type 6 (R1 only) Sample Allows you to enter the sample volume to be aspirated from the sample cup or tube for each of up to three dilutions.
Appendix E-170
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Diluted sample Allows you to enter the diluted sample volume to be aspirated from the cuvette used for each dilution for each of up to three dilutions. Water
Diluent Allows you to enter the diluent volume to be dispensed in the cuvette used for each dilution for each of up to three dilutions. Dilution factor
Allows you to enter the water volume to Displays the sample dilution factor the be dispensed along with the diluent, if system calculated based on the you are using concentrated diluent(s), volumes you specified. for each of up to three dilutions. Default dilution Allows you to select the default dilution performed for patient samples when you do not select a dilution option when ordering the test.
Details for assay parameters window - General - Reagent / Sample view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay. This field on when the assay was last edited. is blank for user-defined assays. Number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Assay availability (list) Displays the availability of the assay for ordering.
Appendix E-171
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Reagent Displays the reagent to use for the assay. Diluent (list) Displays the sample diluent that is used.
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited. R1 & R2 Reagent volumes Displays the R1 and R2 reagent volumes that are dispensed into the cuvette. R1 & R2 Water volumes Displays the volume of water the system dispenses along with the R1 and R2 reagent when you use concentrated reagents. R1 & R2 Dispense mode Displays the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense reagent(s) for each dilution defined. Sample Displays the sample volume to be aspirated from the sample cup or tube for each dilution. Diluent Displays the diluent volume to be dispensed in the cuvette used for each dilution for each of up to three dilutions. Dilution factor
Diluent dispense mode Displays the reagent pipetting profile the system uses to aspirate and dispense diluent(s). Dilution name Displays the names of dilutions defined. Diluted sample Displays the diluted sample volume to be aspirated from the cuvette used for each dilution for each of up to three dilutions. Water
Displays the sample dilution factor the Displays the water volume to be dispensed along with the diluent, if you system calculated based on the are using concentrated diluent for each volumes you specified. dilution. Default dilution Displays the default dilution performed when you do not select a dilution option when ordering the test.
Configure assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
To see a description of all buttons on this screen or window, see Buttons, page Appendix E-6. For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide.
Appendix E-172
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Allows you to enter the name for the calculated assay. You can enter up to ten characters. NOTE: You must use a unique name for each assay. Version Operator Displays the version of the Displays the ID of the operator logged ARCHITECT c System assay. This field on when the assay was last edited. is blank for user-defined assays. Number Displays the number defined for the ARCHITECT c System assay and allows you to enter a number for a user-defined assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Assay availability (list) Allows you to enable the assay so that it can be selected on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen. Options are: Enabled (Default) Disabled Patient Disabled Type Displays the type of assay.
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited.
Appendix E-173
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reaction check (list)
A and B Read time
Allows you to select the reaction check Allows you to enter the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric points type used to evaluate unexpected for the A and B read times used for the reaction performance. reaction check. Options are: End subtraction - Difference between the absorbance measured during read time A and read time B (A-B) End ratio - Ratio of the absorbance measured during read time A and read time B (A/B) Rate subtraction - Differences between the rate per minute measured during read time A and read time B (A-B) Rate ratio - Ratio of the rate per minute measured during read time A and read time B (A/B) None - No check (default) NOTE: The absorbances for this check are measured at the primary wavelength only. Maximum absorbance variation / Allows you to enter the lower and upper Rate linearity % Displays if you select a reaction mode limits for the acceptable range for the calculated results of the comparison of option of: the data from the two read times. End up or End down - The maximum Calculation limits Minimum Allows you to enter a minimum absorbance change acceptable for read time B if the reaction check type is End ratio or Rate ratio. absorbance variation data entry box displays allowing you to enter the acceptable absorbance variation (0 3.2) allowed for absorbance readings within the main read time. When the absorbance variation exceeds the defined limit, the assay becomes an exception and is not processed. Rate up or Rate down - The rate linearity % data entry box displays allowing you to enter the allowable percent variation change in absorbance measured during the first three reads, and then compared to the last three reads for the main and flex read time.
Appendix E-174
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Details for assay parameters window - General - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay. Version Displays the Abbott assay release version for Abbott assays. This field is blank for user-defined assays. Number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Date Time Displays the date the assay file was last Displays the time this assay file was edited. last edited. Reaction check Displays the reaction check type used to evaluate unexpected reaction performance. A and B Read time Displays the starting (1 - 33) and ending (1 - 33) photometric points for the A and B read times used for the reaction check. Type Displays the type of assay. Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the assay was last edited. Assay availability (list) Displays the availability of an assay.
Appendix E-175
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Calculation limits Displays the lower and upper limits for the acceptable range for the calculated results of the comparison of the data from the two read times. Maximum absorbance variation /Rate linearity % Displays if you configured a reaction mode of: End up or End down - The maximum absorbance variation data entry box displays allowing you to enter the acceptable absorbance variation (0 3.2) allowed for absorbance readings within the main read time. When the absorbance variation exceeds the defined limit, the assay becomes an exception and is not processed. Rate up or Rate down - The rate linearity % data entry box displays allowing you to enter the allowable percent variation change in absorbance measured during the first three reads, and then compared to the last three reads for the main and flex read time.
Minimum Displays the minimum absorbance change acceptable for read time B if the reaction check type is End ratio or Rate ratio.
Configure assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions

Assay Allows you to edit the name of the assay. You can enter up to ten characters. NOTE: You must use a unique name for each assay. Version Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay. Operator Displays the ID of the operator logged on when the assay was last edited. Type Displays the type of assay.
Appendix E-176
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Number Displays the number defined for the ARCHITECT c System assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Reagent 1 Displays the name of the reagent associated with the assay selected.
Assay availability (list) Allows you to enable the assay so that it can be selected on the Patient order screen, Calibration order screen, or Control order screen. Options are: Enabled (Default) Disabled Patient Disabled Time Displays the time the assay was last edited.
Details for assay parameters window - General - ICT view field descriptions
Displays the ID of the operator logged Displays the version of the ARCHITECT c System assay. This field on when the assay was last edited. is blank for user-defined assays. Number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterisk displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Assay availability Displays the availability of the assay for ordering.
Appendix E-177
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Date Displays the date the assay was last edited. Reagent 1 Displays the name of the reagent associated with the assay selected.
Time Displays the time the assay was last edited.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the selected assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Calibration replicates Allows you to edit the number of replicates for the calibrator. The assay-specific minimum number of replicates allowed displays as the default as well as the allowable range.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration view (i System) field descriptions
Appendix E-178
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the selected assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Type Displays the calibration type Adjust, Full, 1-point Index, or 2-point Index. Adjustment method Calibration method Displays the data reduction used in the calibration math model. Replicates
Displays the type of adjustment used in Displays the number of replicates of the the calibration mode. For information calibrator used in the calculation of the on calibration adjustment methods, see calibration curve. i System data reduction methods, page Appendix C-13 and i System adjustment methods, page Appendix C-19. Standard concentrations / Adjustors Displays the concentrations of the standard calibrators (Calibrators A - F) and calibrator adjustors (Calibrator 1 / Calibrator 2) used for the assay selected.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-179
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method (list) Allows you to select the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear (default) Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Calibrator (list) Allows you to select the name of the calibrator set. Calibrator level (list) Allows you to select a level name from the levels defined for the selected calibrator set. The list also includes the Water option. Concentration Allows you to enter the concentration values for the Blank and each calibrator level defined.
Replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the Blank and all calibrator levels defined.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Calibrators view (photometric c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank
Appendix E-180
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Calibrator
Calibrator level
Displays the name of the calibrator set. Displays the level names defined for the calibrators. Replicates Displays the number of replicates you selected for the Blank and all the calibrator levels. Concentration Displays the concentration value defined for each calibrator level.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Calibrator Calibrator level Displays the name of the calibrator set. Displays the level names defined for the calibrators. Sample Diluted sample Allows you to enter the sample volume Allows you to enter the diluted sample volume for the Blank and each for the Blank and each defined calibrator level. calibrator level. Diluent Allows you to enter the diluent volume for the Blank and each defined calibrator level. Water Allows you to enter the water volume for diluting concentrated diluent for the Blank and each defined calibrator level.
Appendix E-181
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Volumes view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Calibrator Calibrator level Displays the name of the calibrator set. Displays the level names defined for the calibrators. Sample Diluted sample Displays the sample volumes for the Displays the diluted sample volume for Blank and each defined calibrator level. the Blank and each calibrator level. Diluent Displays the diluent volume for the Blank and each calibrator level. Water Displays the water volume for diluting concentrated diluent for the Blank and each defined calibrator level.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-182
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Full interval Adjust interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration curve is in hours, that the adjust calibration is valid. valid. This field displays when an adjust type is defined. Adjust type (list) Allows you to select the type of adjust calibration to be performed for the assay. Options are: None Blank adjust 1-point adjust 2-point adjust Default ordering type Allows you to select the full or adjust ordering type as the default type selected in the Assay options (Calibration order) window. Adjust level Allows you to select the calibrator level to be used for 1-point or 2-point adjust.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Intervals view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-183
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Full interval Displays the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration curve is valid. Adjust interval Displays the amount of time, in hours, that the adjust calibration is valid. This field displays when an adjust type is defined. Adjust level Displays the calibrator level to be used for 1-point or 2-point adjust.
Adjust type Displays the type of Adjust calibration that can be performed for the assay. Options are: None Blank adjust 1-point adjust 2-point adjust Default ordering type Displays the full or adjust type as the default type selected in the Assay options (Calibration order) window.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-184
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Blank absorbance range Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for the acceptable blank absorbance range if a data check is desired. Span absorbance range Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for the acceptable absorbance range if a span check is desired. Expected cal factor tolerance % Allows you to enter the percent tolerance from the expected cal factor target value that is allowed when the calibration curve is calculated. Span (list) Allows you to select the calibrator level used to perform the calibration data check. Expected cal factor Allows you to enter the expected target value for the cal factor that you expect when the calibration curve is calculated.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - Validity checks view (photometric - c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-185
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Calibration method Displays the calibration method. Options are: Abs Factor Linear Logit-4 Spline Use Cal factor/Blank Blank absorbance range Span Displays the upper and lower limits for Displays the calibrator level used to the acceptable blank absorbance range perform the calibration data check. if a data check is desired. Span absorbance range Displays the upper and lower limits for the acceptable absorbance range if a span check is desired. Expected cal factor tolerance % Displays the percent tolerance from the expected cal factor target value that is allowed when the calibration curve is calculated. Expected cal factor Displays the target value for the cal factor that you expect when the calibration curve is calculated.
Configure assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Slope limit (%) Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for the acceptable slope limits for the ICT (integrated chip technology) calibration curve. The slope cannot be defined below 45% or above 120%. Full interval Allows you to enter the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration is valid. Calibrator low Displays the name of the low calibrator.
Appendix E-186
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Low concentration Allows you to enter the concentration for the low calibrator. High concentration Allows you to enter the concentration for the high calibrator.
Calibrator high Displays the name of the high calibrator. Replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates for the low and high calibrators and for the index, if defined. Default: 3 Index concentration Allows you to enter the concentration for the index solution.
Index used Allows you to select whether or not to use an index solution during a calibration. Options are: Yes No (default) Index range Allows you to specify the upper and lower limits for acceptable range for the index concentration calculated during the ICT calibration.
Details for assay parameters window - Calibration - ICT view (c System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Slope limit (%) Full interval Displays the amount of time, in hours, that the full calibration is valid. Calibrator low
Displays the upper and lower limits for Displays the name of the low calibrator. the acceptable slope limits for the ICT (integrated chip technology) calibration curve. The slope cannot be defined below 45% or above 120%. Low concentration Displays the concentration for the low calibrator. Calibrator high Displays the name of the high calibrator.
Appendix E-187
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
High concentration Displays the concentration for the high calibrator. Index used
Replicates Displays the number of replicates for the low and high calibrators and for the index, if defined. Index concentration
Displays whether or not to use an index Displays the concentration for the index solution during a calibration. solution. Options are: Yes No (default) Index range Displays the upper and lower limits for acceptable range for the index concentration calculated during the ICT calibration.
Configure assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the selected assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version.
Appendix E-188
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Default dilution Allows you to select the default dilution performed for patient samples when you do not select a dilution option when ordering the test. Each assay has up to six dilutions. Dilution options valid for the assay display. Refer to the ARCHITECT i System assay-specific package insert for dilution information.
Details for assay parameters window - Dilution view (i System) field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the selected assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Manual dilution Indicates whether the selected assay uses the manual dilution option selected from the Patient order screen or Control order screen. Result units Displays the result concentration units selected for the assay. Default dilution Displays the default dilution performed for patient samples when you do not select a dilution option. Dilution ranges (table) Displays the minimum and maximum concentrations allowable for the dilution options. Dilution name Low High
Appendix E-189
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Configure assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Volume Displays the amount of wash solution to use for the selected SmartWash definition. For reagent probes, you can define the volume to any volume from 20 to 345 L. For cuvettes, the volume is fixed at 345 L. Replicates Displays the number of times the reagent probe wash protocol is performed for the selected SmartWash definition. SmartWash parameters (table) Displays the following parameters defined for SmartWash for the assay selected: Sample wash protocol Displays the type of sample probe wash to be performed for the selected SmartWash definition. Options are: Optimized throughput (c 8000) - The system uses the Smart Sampling feature to try and change the order in which the tests aspirate to avoid a wash cycle.
Components - Displays the hardware components related to Maximum wash (c System) - The SmartWash. (R1, R2, Sample probe, system always performs the defined or Cuvette) wash before each sample regardless of the order in which tests aspirate. Reagent/Assay - Displays the reagent for Rgt 1 probe and Rgt 2 probe reagent prewash option, the assay for cuvettes, and a blank field for sample probes. Wash - Displays the wash solution to be used.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Rgt 1 probe view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-190
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Reagents (list) Assay Displays the name of the assay Allows you to select the name of the reagent that interferes with the reagent selected. used for the assay you are configuring. List items are dependent on the reagent probe option selected. For the Rgt 1 probe the list includes an All option and the name of each configured reagent and sample diluent. For the Rgt 2 probe the list includes an All option and the name of each reagent defined as type R1 and R2. NOTE: If you select the All option, the system always performs the defined wash before aspirating the reagent(s) for this assay unless the previous aspiration was the same reagent. The system does not perform the wash between aspirations of the same reagent unless you configure a separate wash protocol to define this wash. Wash (list) Volume Allows you to select a solution to wash Allows you to define the amount of the Rgt 1 and Rgt 2 probes. wash solution to use. For reagent probes, you can define the volume to Options are: any volume from 20 to 345 L. Water Reagent 0.5% Acid Wash Detergent A 10% Detergent B Replicates Allows you to specify the number of times the defined wash protocol is performed.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Sample probe view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-191
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Sample wash protocol Wash (list) Allows you to select a solution to wash the sample probe. Options are:
Allows you to select the type of sample Water probe wash to be performed. 0.5% Acid Wash Options are: Detergent A Optimized throughput (c 8000) - The system uses the Smart Sampling feature to try and change the order in which the tests aspirate to avoid a wash cycle. Maximum wash (c System) - The system always performs the defined wash before each sample regardless of the order in which tests aspirate.
Add / edit SmartWash window - Cuvette view (c System) field descriptions

Assays (list) Allows you to select one of the c System assays to be used for washing the cuvettes. Wash (list) Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Volume
Allows you to select a solution to wash Displays the amount of wash solution to the cuvettes. use. For cuvettes, the volume is fixed at 345 L. Options are: 0.5% Acid Wash Detergent A 10% Detergent B
Details for assay parameters window - SmartWash view (c System) field descriptions
Appendix E-192
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
For additional information see the ARCHITECT c System Assay Application Guide. Field descriptions are listed from left to right, top to bottom of the screen or window.
Assay Displays the name of the assay selected. Replicates Displays the number of times the reagent probe wash protocol is performed. SmartWash parameters (table) Displays the following parameters defined for SmartWash for the assay selected: Volume Displays the amount of wash solution configured for the selected SmartWash definition. Sample wash protocol Displays the type of sample probe wash to be performed. Options are: Optimized throughput (c 8000) - The system uses the Smart Sampling feature to try and change the order in which the tests aspirate to avoid a wash cycle.
Components - Displays the hardware components related to Maximum wash (c System) - The SmartWash. (R1, R2, Sample probe, system always performs the defined or Cuvette) wash before each sample regardless of the order in which tests aspirate. Reagent/Assay - Displays the reagent for Rgt 1 probe and Rgt 2 probe reagent prewash option, the assay for cuvettes, and a blank field for sample probes. Wash - Displays the wash solution to be used.
Configure assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions

Appendix E-193
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the assay selected on the Configuration screen - Assay settings view. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Result units Displays the result concentration units selected for the assay. Low-Linearity Allows you to edit the low limit value for the linearity range of the assay. For i System assays this field can only be edited when the first default dilution option is configured. High-Linearity Allows you to edit the high limit value for the linearity range of the assay. Gender and age specific ranges (table) Displays the following information for the selected assay.
For i System assays this field can only be edited when the first default dilution Gender option is configured. This value cannot Age (Units) be edited above the assay default high Normal range linearity. Extreme range
Configure results parameters window field descriptions

Appendix E-194
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay. Flag range specifications Allows you to define a flag range, which includes the following parameters: Gender (Male, Female, or Either) Age units (Days, Months, Years) and age range Normal range for the defined gender and age range Extreme range for the defined gender and age range (optional)
Details for assay parameters window - Results view field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the selected assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Result units Displays the result concentration units selected for the assay. Low-Linearity Displays the low limit value for the linearity range of the assay.
Appendix E-195
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
High-Linearity Displays the high limit value for the linearity range of the assay.
Gender and age specific ranges (table) Displays the following information specified for the selected assay. Gender Age (Units) Normal range Extreme range
Configure assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. The assay number must be the same number used for a LIS (laboratory information system) and a LAS (laboratory automation system). NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Name (list) Allows you to select the interpretation name from the list (assay-specific). Results review required Allows you to select the settings at which results are held until they are manually reviewed and released. Range Allows you to enter the range for interpretations for the assay.
Details for assay parameters window - Interpretation view field descriptions

Appendix E-196
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Assay Displays the name of the assay. Assay number Displays the number defined for the assay. NOTE: If you modify an assay parameter in an Abbott assay that affects result measurement, calculation, or validity checks an asterick displays next to the assay number to indicate the assay was modified from the Abbott released version. Name Range Displays the names of the Displays the settings to determine the interpretations configured for the assay. range for the interpretations configured for the assay. Results review required Displays settings at which results are held until they are manually released.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions
Reagent name Displays the name of the reagent you selected. Reagent low alert Allows you to enter the number of tests remaining in a reagent kit, which defines the level at which a reagent low alert notification displays. Reagent type Displays the type of reagent or diluent cartridge.
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view field descriptions
Appendix E-197
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Reagent name Displays the name of the reagent you selected. Reagent low alert Displays the number of tests remaining, which defines the level at which a reagent low alert notification displays. Reagent type Displays the type of reagent or diluent cartridge.
Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions
Reagent name Allows you to enter the name for the new user-defined reagent. Reagent low alert Allows you to enter the number of tests remaining in a reagent kit, which defines the level at which a reagent low alert notification displays. Onboard stability Allows you to enter the onboard stability time, in hours, for the new user-defined reagent.
Reagent type (list) Allows you to select the reagent type for the new user-defined assay. Options are: R1 only R1 and R2 Sample diluent Lot number (list) Allows you to enter the lot number for new reagent kits. It also displays previously configured lot numbers.
Configured kits (table) Displays the following configuration information for the selected reagent kit: Lot number Serial number Expiration date R1 cartridge size R2 cartridge size
Serial number Allows you to enter the serial number for the new user-defined reagent kit.
Expiration date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the new user-defined reagent kit.
Appendix E-198
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
R1 cartridge size (list) Allows you to select the cartridge size for the R1 reagent. Options are: Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) 70 mL (cartridge)
R2 cartridge size (list) Allows you to select the cartridge size for the R2 reagent. Options are: Large (90 mL cartridge) Small (55 mL cartridge) 20 mL (cartridge) 20 mL (bottle) 100 mL (cartridge) 70 mL (cartridge)
Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view field descriptions
Reagent name Displays the name of the reagent. Reagent type Displays the type of reagent or diluent cartridge. Configured kits (table) Displays the following configuration information for the selected reagent kit: Lot number Serial number Expiration date R1 cartridge size R2 cartridge size Reagent low alert Displays the number of tests when a reagent low alert notification displays. Onboard stability Displays the onboard stability for the selected reagent.
Configure result units window field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay. Version Displays the version of the assay.
Appendix E-199
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Result units
Decimal places
Allows you to change the concentration Allows you to edit the number of decimal places currently configured for units reported for the assay. the assay. IMPORTANT: If you edit the result Range: 0 - 4 (c System) concentration unit, all previous Range: 1 - 4 (i System) Levey-Jennings and QC summary information is deleted. For c System Default: assay-specific assays, the system changes the result unit name displayed but does not automatically adjust any values. To ensure the appropriate parameters are adjusted, see Change the result units setting, page 2-126. Correlation factor Allows you to enter a factor for c System assays if results require a calculation to match another system. Intercept Allows you to enter an intercept for c System assays if results require a calculation to match another system.
Details for result units window field descriptions

Assay Displays the name of the assay. Result units Displays the concentration units currently configured for the assay. Correlation factor Displays the factor configured for the c System assay if results require a calculation to match another system. Version Displays the version of the assay. Decimal places Displays the number of decimal places currently configured for the assay. Intercept Displays the intercept configured for the c System assay if results require a calculation to match another system.
Configure panel definitions window field descriptions

Appendix E-200
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
New panel name Allows you to enter the name for the panel. Panel type Allows you to select the panel type. The type indicates whether the panels display on the Patient order screen and/or Control order screen. Options are: Patient QC Both Panels (list) Lists the configured panels. When you select a panel, all assays in that panel are displayed. Assays (list) Lists available assays that may be configured for the panel. NOTE: You must select at least two assays before you can add the panel.
Details for panel definition window field descriptions

New panel name Displays the selected panel name. Panel type Displays the selected panel type. The type indicates whether the panels are displayed on the patient and/or control order screens. Assays (list) Lists the assays included in the selected panel.
Panels (list) Lists the configured panels. When you select a panel, all assays in that panel are displayed.
Configure assay retest rules window field descriptions

Appendix E-201
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Units Displays the result units for the assay Displays the name of the assay you selected from the Configuration screen selected. - Assay settings view. Assay retest rules Original dilution List that displays the current name and Displays the dilution run on the original settings for each rule. See Assay retest test. The original test must be run at rule settings, page Appendix E-205. this dilution to be considered for a retest. Retest indicator Allows you to enter minimum and maximum limits that the original test must fall within to be considered for an auto retest. NOTE: An entry in both fields is not required. You can enter either a minimum or maximum limit. Retest assays (table) Displays the assay(s) and the dilution that is run if the original assay result falls within the defined limits. Assay Dilution NOTE: You can define any number of assays to be retested for a given rule. Replicates Displays the number of replicates to be run for the retest assay(s). NOTE: The number of replicates entered is run for all retest assays.
Add / edit assay retest rules window field descriptions

Assay Units Displays the name of the assay you Displays the result units for the assay selected from the Configuration screen selected. - Assay settings view.
Appendix E-202
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Rule name Allows you to enter the retest rule name. You can enter up to 18 characters.
Replicates Allows you to enter the number of replicates to be run for the retest assay(s). NOTE: The number of replicates you enter runs for all retest assays for that rule.
Retest indicator
Result range
Allows you to specify whether the retest Allows you to enter minimum and maximum limits that the original test rule is based on a result range or an must fall within to be considered for an error with result. auto retest. NOTE: If you have selected the error code option and one of the following NOTE: An entry in both fields is not error codes occur, the result is required. You can enter either a retested. minimum or maximum limit. 1005 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the lowest calibrator. 1007 - Unable to process test, activated read failure. 1008 - Unable to process test, final read failure. 1051 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeded optical limits. 1053 - Unable to calculate result, rate reaction linearity failure. 1054 - Unable to calculate result, Reaction check failure. 1232 - Result cannot be calculated, final RLU read is outside the specification of the highest calibrator. 1250 - Unable to calculate result, absorbance exceeds highest calibrator. 1350 - Unable to calculate result, no absorbance reads within absorbance range. 1351 - Unable to calculate result, insufficient absorbance reads within absorbance range.
Appendix E-203
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Original dilution
Selected retest assays
Displays the selected retest assay(s) to Allows you to select the dilution for running the original test in order to be be run. considered for an auto retest. You must NOTE: You can define any number run the original test at this dilution to be of assays to be retested for a given considered for a retest. rule. Retest dilution Allows you to select the dilution protocol for each of the selected assays to use for the auto retest.
Select assay window field descriptions

Assays (list) Allows you to select or deselect the assay(s) you want to retest. NOTE: You can define any number of assays to be retested for a given rule.
Details for assay retest rules window field descriptions

Assay Units Displays the name of the assay you Displays the result units for the assay selected from the Configuration screen selected - Assay settings view. Assay retest rules List that displays the current name and settings for each rule. See Assay retest rule settings, page Appendix E-205 for more information. Original dilution Displays the dilution run on the original test. The original test must be run at this dilution to be considered for a retest.
Appendix E-204
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Result range Displays the minimum and maximum limits for the result at the original dilution in order to be considered for a retest. Retest assays (table) Displays the assay(s) and the dilution that is run if the original assay result falls within the defined limits. Assay Dilution
Replicates Displays the number of replicates to be run for the retest assay(s). NOTE: The number of replicates entered is run for all retest assays.
Table Appendix E.4: Assay retest rule settings

Original dilution The dilution run on the original test. The original test must be run at this dilution to be considered for a retest. Displays the minimum and maximum limits for the result at the original dilution in order to be considered for a retest. The number of replicates to be run for the retest assay(s). NOTE: The number of replicates entered is run for all retest assays. Retest assays The assay(s) and the dilution that are run if the original assay result falls within the defined limits. NOTE: You can define any number of assays to be retested for a given rule.
Result range
Replicates
Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view field descriptions

Configure QC-Cal categories (list) Allows you to select one of the following Allows you to select the following categories for configuration: QC-Cal configuration items: System settings Assay settings QC-Cal settings Assays (list) Allows you to select the assay to configure.
QC - Single analyte QC - Multiconstituent Multiconstituent bar code SID Westgard rules Calibrator set
Appendix E-205
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Configure single analyte window field descriptions

Assay Lot number (list) Displays the assay you selected on the Allows you to enter the lot number for the control. You can enter up to 20 Configuration screen - QC - Cal different lot numbers. settings view. Default Allows you to select the default lot number for the control. Level name Exp. date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the control. Manufacturer mean
Allows you to enter the manufacturer Allows you to enter a name for the specific control level. You can enter up mean for the control level. to 10 alphanumeric characters for the level name and 6 different levels per lot number. Manufacturer 1 SD Allows you to enter the manufacturer value that represents one standard deviation for the control level. Expected 1 SD Expected mean Allows you to enter the expected mean for the control level. Default dilution (list)
Allows you to enter the expected value Allows you to select a dilution option that represents one standard deviation other than the default. for the control level. Bar code SID Display order (list) Allows you to enter a specific bar code Allows you to select a display order SID, up to 20 characters, to identify a position on the Control order screen. sample as a control.
Details for single analyte window field descriptions

Assay Displays the assay you selected from the Configuration screen - QC - Cal settings view. Lot number (list) Displays the lot number for the control.
Appendix E-206
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Exp. date Displays the expiration date for the control. Level (list) Displays the control levels configured for this control. Manufacturer 1 SD Displays the manufacturer value that represents one standard deviation for the control level. Expected 1 SD Displays the expected value that represents one standard deviation for the control level. Bar code SID Displays the specific bar code SID used to identify the sample as this control level.
Level name Displays the name for a specific control level. Manufacturer mean Displays the manufacturer mean for the control level. Expected mean Displays the expected mean for the control level. Default dilution Displays the selected dilution for the assay. Display order Displays the display order position in the Control order screen.
Configure multiconstituent control window field descriptions

Control name Lot number Allows you to enter a lot number for the Displays the name of the multiconstituent control you selected. If multiconstituent control. You can enter you select New, you may enter a name up to 20 different lot numbers. for the multiconstituent control.
Appendix E-207
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Level (list) Allows you to select a multiconstituent control level. Options are: Level 1 (default) Level 2 Level 3 ASSAY (table) Displays the following information: Assay - Displays the name of the assays configured for the multiconstituent control level. Default Dilution - Displays the default dilution for the assays configured for the multiconstituent control level. Manufacturer Mean - Displays the manufacturer mean for the assays for the multiconstituent control level. Manufacturer 1 SD - Displays the manufacturer value that represents one standard deviation for the assays for the multiconstituent control level. Expected Mean - Displays the expected mean for the assays for the multiconstituent control level. Expected 1 SD - Displays the expected value that represents one standard deviation for the assays for the multiconstituent control level.
Expiration date Allows you to enter the expiration date for the multiconstituent control.
Define data window field descriptions

Control name Displays the name of the multiconstituent control. Assay Displays the name of the assay you selected on the Configure multiconstituent control window. Level Displays the name of the multiconstituent control level. Lot number Displays the lot number for the assay you selected on the Configure multiconstituent control window.
Appendix E-208
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Manufacturer mean Allows you to enter the manufacturer mean value for the multiconstituent control level. Expected mean
Manufacturer 1 SD Allows you to enter the manufacturer value that represents one standard deviation for the multiconstituent control level. Expected 1 SD
Allows you to enter the expected mean Allows you to enter the expected value value for the multiconstituent control that represents one standard deviation level. for the multiconstituent control level. Default dilution (list) Allows you to select a dilution for the assay.
Details for multiconstituent control window field descriptions

Control Displays the name of the multiconstituent control you selected. Lot number (list) Allows you to select the lot number of the multiconstituent control to display.
Appendix E-209
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Level (list)
Expiration date
Allows you to select the Displays the expiration date of the multiconstituent control level to display. multiconstituent control. ASSAY (table) Displays the following information: Assay - Displays the name of the assays configured for the multiconstituent control level. Default Dilution - Displays the default dilution for the assays configured for the multiconstituent control level. Manufacturer Mean - Displays the manufacturer mean for the assays for the multiconstituent control level. Manufacturer 1 SD - Displays the manufacturer value that represents one standard deviation for the assays for the multiconstituent control level. Expected Mean - Displays the expected mean for the assays for the multiconstituent control level. Expected 1 SD - Displays the expected value that represents one standard deviation for the assays for the multiconstituent control level.
Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions

Bar codes Displays the configured multiconstituent bar code SIDs. Control New bar code SID Allows you to enter a specific bar code SID, up to 20 characters, to identify a sample as a control. Lot
Allows you to select the Allows you to select the control lot multiconstituent control for the bar code number. SID. Level Allows you to select the control level. Assays Allows you to select the assays for the multiconstituent bar code SID.
Appendix E-210
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window field descriptions

Bar codes Displays the available multiconstituent bar code SIDs. Lot Displays the control lot number. Assays Displays the assays configured for the multiconstituent bar code SID. Control Displays the control for the multiconstituent bar code SID. Level Displays the control level configured for the multiconstituent bar code SID.
Configure Westgard window field descriptions

Assay Displays the assay you selected. Rules (list) Allows you to select each Westgard rule. NOTE: The default configuration setting for all assays is: 1 - 2s Enabled, Warning 1 - 3s Enabled, Failure Status Allows you to select the status for the rule. Options are: Enabled Disabled Flag type Allows you to select the type of Westgard flag for the rule. Options are: Warning Failure
Details for Westgard window field descriptions

Appendix E-211
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Assay Displays the assay you selected. Status Rules (list) Displays the Westgard rule you selected. Flag type
Displays the current status (enabled or Displays the type of Westgard flag disabled) of the selected rule. displayed for the selected rule.
Configure calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions

Calibrator name Number of levels Displays the name of the calibrator you Allows you to enter the number of levels that the calibrator set contains. selected. If you select New, you may enter a name for the calibrator set.
Details for calibrator set window (c System) field descriptions

Calibrator name Displays the name of the calibrator set you selected. Number of levels Displays the number of levels defined for the calibrator.
Utilities screen - Software install view field descriptions

Software install (option) Displays the software install options. Current software version Displays the current system software version. Backup software (option) Displays the backup options.
Appendix E-212
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Descriptions of screen elements Appendix E Utilities screen - Backup software view field descriptions
Software install (option) Displays the software install options. Available backups (list) Displays a list of the backup files that have been created. Comment Displays any comments that were entered when the selected backup was created. Backup software (option) Displays the backup options. Date / Time Displays the date and time of the selected backup.
Field descriptions
Create backup window field descriptions

Backup name Displays the file name for the backup you are creating. Comment Allows you to enter a comment, You can enter up to approximately 50 characters.
Print options window field descriptions

Printer name Displays the name of the printer. Printer status Displays the current status of the printer. NOTE: Printer status is specific to the type of printer you are using.
Appendix E-213
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Field descriptions
Appendix E
Print selection
Reports available (list)
Allows you to select one or more items Lists the names of the reports available to print. to print. For a complete list of available reports, see Print a report, page 5-333. Number of copies Allows you to enter the number of copies you want to print. Default: 1
Printer window field descriptions

Printer status Displays the current status of the printer. NOTE: Printer status is specific to the type of printer you are using. Printer queue (list) Displays a list of the reports you requested, including printing status and the time you requested the report. Printing statuses include: Failed Pending Printing Downloading records Deleting NOTE: If more than one report is in the queue and the first report has a status of Failed, you must delete this report before the other reports in the queue will print.
Appendix E-214
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
absorbance limit absorbance limit check absorbance mode accessory Acid Wash
c System; Configured range of absorbance values that are considered acceptable for measurement purposes. Values outside this range are not used for calculation. c System; Calibration data check that evaluates the absorbance or change in absorbance obtained during sample measurement. If the absorbance or change in absorbance is outside the specified range an error message is generated. c System; Calibration mode in which results are based on the absorbance of water and are represented as absorbance for an end-point assay or as absorbance change (rate of absorbance change per minute) for a rate assay.
Item that is used repeatedly such as a sample carrier, carrier tray, and reagent segment.
c System; Acidic wash solution used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis. A dilution of the acid wash solution may also be used for probe washing.
Calibration curve that has passed all instrument verifications and is stored in memory (processing module-specific) for a specific reagent lot. The ARCHITECT System can store active calibration curves for four (4) reagent lots for each assay per processing module. Screen that is currently displayed. Window that is currently displayed.
active curve
active screen active window adjustment calibration
c System; Adjustment method that allows you to run a reagent blank or fewer calibrator levels to adjust a calibration curve. See also one-point adjust, page Glossary-10, and two-point adjust, page Glossary-18. i System; Adjustment method that allows you to run two calibrator levels instead of six to calibrate an assay. The two calibrator levels (adjusters) are used to adjust the master calibration curve stored in the reagent bar code on the microparticle bottle. See also one-point adjust, page Glossary-10, linear transformation method, page Glossary-9, parameter method, page Glossary-11, and ratio technique method, page Glossary-13.
SCC (system control center) access level (user ID and password) required to perform administrator functions such as configuring settings, performing specific diagnostic procedures, and approving the maintenance log. Tube (75 mm - 100 mm in height) that contains an aliquot of sample. Aliquot tubes may be used in conjunction with sample cups. If used alone, you must use the sample gauge to verify adequate sample is present.
administrator logon aliquot tube
Alkaline Wash alphanumeric characters ARM accessory
c System; Alkaline wash solution used by the cuvette washer to clean the cuvettes after sample analysis.
Characters defined by Abbott Laboratories as A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9 and the special characters , / > < ? ; : ] [ \ } { ' - = ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ) ( _ + and <space>.
i System; Automatic Reconstitution Module, optional component that automatically dilutes Concentrated Wash Buffer to the proper concentration and delivers it to the wash buffer reservoir.
Analysis to determine the presence, absence, or quantity of one or more analytes.
Glossary-1
assay
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
assay calibration
Method of analyzing samples of known concentrations, recording the instrument response value(s), and plotting the measured value(s) against the known concentration to create a curve. File containing assay-specific parameters. Values that define specific characteristics or verify the performance of an assay. Settings within each assay configuration category that the system administrator configures to meet site-specific requirements. Software used to install assay files. Assay-specific information included with each reagent kit. American Society for Testing and Materials; Organization that defines the specifications for the transfer of information between laboratory instruments and computer systems. Process the system uses to automatically generate rerun orders for patient samples. Unique identifier comprised of black bars that represent patient information. Glass window that prevents debris and liquid from collecting on the bar code reader components. Optional component used to scan sample bar codes to allow positive sample identification. Type of sample processing where each sample has the same assay(s) ordered. Activity or area where you may be exposed to potentially infectious material.
assay file assay parameters assay settings assay software assay-specific package insert ASTM
auto retest bar code label bar code reader window bar code scanner batch processing biological hazard blank adjust boards bulk solutions bulk solution supply center
c System; Calibration type that uses the absorbance data for the reagent blank to adjust the calibration curve.
Printed circuit board. Liquid solutions provided in large quantities that are used in sample processing.
c System; Onboard storage area for Acid Wash, page Glossary-1, Alkaline Wash, page Glossary-1, and ICT Reference Solution, page Glossary-8. c System; Chemistry analyzer that processes up to 1600 photometric and 600 potentiometric tests per hour. c System; Chemistry analyzer that processes up to 800 photometric and 600 potentiometric tests per hour. c System; Rate of absorbance change per minute as calculated using the linear least squares method.
c 16000 processing module c 8000 processing module

calculated absorbance
Glossary-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
calibration, 6-point calibration, factor calibration, index calibration, linear mode (1-point method) calibration, linear mode (multi-point method) calibration, logit-4 calibration, spline
i System; Calibration method in which six calibrators (A-F) are measured and a calibration curve is generated using these data points. c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which only the reagent blank is measured and a user defined factor is used to calculate results. i System; Calibration method used for qualitative (cutoff) assays in which an index calibrator is run to generate the cutoff value for the assay. c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and one calibrator are measured, and a calibration curve is generated using these two data points. c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and two to six calibrators of different concentrations are measured, and a point-to-point calibration curve is generated using these data points. c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method that measures a reagent blank and three to six calibrators for which the absorbance or absorbance change increases as the concentration increases. c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and three to six calibrators are measured, and a multiple sectioned calibration curve is generated using a polynomial expression so that the adjoining sections are connected smoothly. c System; Calibration method in which the concentration or activity is calculated using the factor and reagent blank from a calibration curve generated for another assay. i System; Method used to determine the reportable range of an assay.
Housing that contains the printed circuit boards that provides the power distribution and signal interconnection for the system. Accessory used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or SSH (standard sample handler) to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor(s). Mechanism on the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions sample carriers at the appropriate processing module sample aspiration position. Accessory used to hold sample carriers for loading on the RSH (robotic sample handler). Each tray holds up to five sample carriers. Mechanism used to transport sample carriers from a bay on the RSH (robotic sample handler) to the carrier positioner. Rotating mechanism on which samples or reagents are placed. Compact Disc Read Only Memory drive; Read device used for installing system and assay software and online documentation.
calibration, use factor and blank calibration verification card cage carrier
carrier positioner carrier tray carrier transport carousel CD-ROM drive
Glossary-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
CE marking check box Chemiflex chemiluminesce nse CMIA CMIA optics reader
Symbol that indicates the product is in conformance with the EC (European Community) Directives. Software interface element that allows you to select one or more items from the displayed choices. A black check mark in the box indicates it is selected.
i System; Assay protocols which incorporate chemiluminescent detection technology with flexible assay pipetting protocols. i System; Emission of light produced by a chemical reaction. i System; Chemiluminescent Microparticle Immunoassay; Detection technology used to perform automated immunoassays. i System; Sub-assembly that houses the PMT (photomultiplier tube) and optics reader and produces the chemiluminescent reads by collecting the emitted photons of light and translates them to yield RLUs, which are then used by the system to calculate results. c System; Adjustment performed on the absorbance range limits to correct for sample color so that only flags and error messages associated with the absorbance of the analyte are generated. Color correction does not adjust the reported result. i System; Solution containing phosphate buffered saline that must be diluted prior to use. See also wash buffer, page Glossary-19.
Process you use to define system, assay, and QC-Cal settings to meet your site-specific requirements. Replenishable items required to run assays on an ARCHITECT System, such as bulk and onboard solutions, calibrators, controls, reagents, sample cups, and so forth. Buttons on the function bar that have yellow lettering and are available (green background) or unavailable (gray background) based on selections you make from the screen. For example, from the Order status screen you can only select the F5 - Details function button after you select an order. See also screen available function bar buttons, page Glossary-16. Information that displays online and is specific to the screen, window, or error message currently displayed. Material with a known concentration of a specific analyte. Controls are run with patient samples and are used to monitor assay and system performance over time. See also single constituent control, page Glossary-17 and multiconstituent control, page Glossary-10. Carrier/position; Identifier that indicates the location of a sample, its position within a carrier, and the specific carrier in which it is loaded. For example, a C/P of A001/4 indicates the sample is located in position 4 of sample carrier A001.
color correction
Concentrated Wash Buffer configuration consumables
context available function bar buttons
context-sensitive help control
C/P
Glossary-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
C/P (LAS)
Carousel/position; Identifier that indicates the location of a sample, its position within an LAS (laboratory automation system) sample carousel (i 2000), and the specific carousel it is loaded onto. For example, a C/P of A/4 indicates the sample is located in position 4 of LAS sample carousel A. Central processing unit; Computational and control unit of the SCC (system control center) that interprets and executes instructions.
CPU curve shape method cuvette cuvette tab cuvette segment cuvette segment alignment tool cuvette washer cycle power decontamination depressed concentration diagnostic procedure dry tip elevated concentration end ratio
i System; Adjustment method that uses the RLU (relative light unit) values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the master calibration. c System; Rectangular glass container that contains the assay reaction components for analysis. c System; Plastic tab on top of the cuvette segment that is used to detect the positioning of the reaction carousel for optical readings. c System; Segments that sit in the reaction carousel and hold cuvettes. Each cuvette segment holds 15 cuvettes. c System; Accessory placed in the reaction carousel during the sample and reagent pipettor calibration procedures. c System; Device with eight nozzles that washes and dries the cuvettes after each use.
Process of removing power and then applying it again. Process that removes contamination. Concentration that is less than expected. Procedure you perform to check the status of assemblies and mechanisms in reaction to certain hardware malfunctions on your ARCHITECT System.
c System; Absorbent material on the end of the cuvette washer nozzle used to dry the cuvette after it has been washed and before a sample is dispensed.
Concentration that is greater than expected.
c System; Assay validity check that uses a ratio of absorbances (A/B) measured at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or other reaction anomalies. c System; Assay validity check that uses the difference between absorbances (A-B) measured at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or other reaction anomalies. c System; Reactions that are allowed to react until all reactant is depleted and the absorbance is stable. When the reaction is complete, the system measures the absorbance readings used for calibration and calculating results.
Results that exceed the expected tolerance limits.
end subtraction
end-point assay
erratic results
Glossary-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
error code error message exception external modem
Numeric identifier for an error message. Displayed message informing the operator of an error condition. Test order that failed to complete. Optional component that connects the ARCHITECT System to a telephone line, which allows communication with Abbott personnel for training and troubleshooting purposes.
extrapolated calculation factor method failed curve field FlexRate method
c System; Calculation used in linear calibration methods to extend the calibration curve for samples with concentrations higher than the calibrators. c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which only the reagent blank is measured and a user defined factor is used to calculate results.
Calibration curve with values that fall outside the predetermined range, that was manually failed, or could not be completed due to a hardware error. Software interface element that displays a specific type of data (for example, alphabetic or numeric).
c System; Method used to extend the linear range of an enzymatic assay. Data points in the flex read time are used for high-activity and high-concentration samples. Results calculated using these data points are identified by the FLEX result flag.
Procedure performed to flush solution through the fluidic system to remove bubbles.
flush full calibration
c System; Measurement of a reagent blank and all data points specified for an assay plotted against known concentrations to create a curve for evaluating unknown samples. i System; Measurement of all data points specified for an assay plotted against known concentrations to create a curve for evaluating unknown samples.
Buttons at the bottom of every software screen that allow you to perform actions or access windows associated with the screen. They correspond to the function keys on the keyboard. See also screen available function bar buttons, page Glossary-16 and context available function bar buttons, page Glossary-4. SCC (system control center) identifier that is used to add your operator ID to printouts and reports. Graphical user interface; Software display format that allows you to initiate commands or make choices by selecting icons, buttons, items from lists, and so forth. You can use the mouse, touch-screen monitor, and/or keyboard to make your selections. Situations that could cause physical harm to a user or damage to the system or laboratory environment. Online documentation that provides information on the screen, window, or error message currently displayed.
function bar buttons
general operator logon GUI
hazards Help?
Glossary-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
help button Help window
Button located on every software screen, window, and error message that provides access to Help?. Window in which the content of the online operations manual or Help? display. In addition to displaying information, Help windows provide several functional elements to help you find and use the information.
high-concentrati on waste bottle home host host interface operation host query timeout hot spot hypertext
c System; Optional bottle that collects the high-concentration liquid waste from the cuvettes and the ICT unit.
Starting position for mechanical components. Auxiliary computer system that can communicate with an ARCHITECT System. Act of communication between the ARCHITECT System and a host computer. The length of time the ARCHITECT System waits for a response from the host. Area on an image map that when selected provides access to further information about the area it represents. A text hyperlink (predefined link) to related information that displays as blue, underlined text in the online documentation.
i 2000 processing module i 2000SR processing module

icon
i 2000; Immunoassay analyzer that processes up to 200 CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) tests per hour. i 2000SR; Immunoassay analyzer that processes up to 200 CMIA tests per hour and provides STAT processing.
Navigational element on the menu bar that allows you to display specific screens. Additionally, icons serve as blinking indicators to inform you that a condition requires your attention.
ICT
c System; Integrated chip technology; Method for measuring Na+, K+, and Clpotentiometrically using ion-selective electrodes that are combined into a single electronic device. c System; Syringe-drive pump that aspirates samples or ICT Reference Solution into the ICT module for measurement. Once measurement is complete, the pump aspirates waste from the ICT unit and moves it into the water bath/waste overflow area. c System; Cleaning agent prepared by the operator and used during daily maintenance procedures to clean the ICT module. c System; Reagent used to dilute samples for electrolyte analysis. c System; Integrated chip located within the ICT unit that contains the Na+, K+, Cl-, and reference electrodes.
ICT aspiration pump
ICT cleaning fluid ICT diluent ICT module
Glossary-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
ICT Reference Solution ICT reference solution preheater ICT reference solution pump ICT unit
c System; Mid-concentration standard that is aspirated and analyzed by the ICT module before and after each sample to provide a reference concentration used to calculate results. c System; Metal tube located within the water bath through which the ICT Reference solution flows to preheat the solution before it is used to fill the ICT reference solution cup. c System; Pump that aspirates ICT Reference Solution through the ICT reference solution pre-heater into the ICT reference solution cup, and then drains the cup. c System; Device that consists of the ICT probe and ICT module that is used to perform indirect potentiometric analysis. The ICT probe aspirates the sample. The ICT module simultaneously measures Na+, K+, and Cl- using integrated chip technology.
Image that contains graphical hyperlinks with selectable areas or "hot spots" that provide access to additional information about the area they represent.
image map index method information area infranatant fluid
i System; Calibration method used for qualitative (cutoff) assays in which an index calibrator is run to generate the cutoff value for the assay.
Main area of software screens and windows that displays data and allows you to make selections and/or enter information to perform various functions. Clear fluid that, after the settling out of an insoluble liquid or solid by the action of normal gravity or of centrifugal force, takes up the lower portion of the contents of a vessel. Hardware (for example mouse, touch-screen monitor, keypad, and so forth) that is used to enter information into the SCC (system control center). Computer hardware component used with the mouse and/or touch-screen monitor to enter information. You can use the keyboard as an alternate means of performing most functions.
input device keyboard
lamp LAS carousel sample handler LAS sample carousels Levey-Jennings graphs linear method
c System; Tungsten-halogen lamp used to provide the light source for photometric measurement. i 2000; Transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing module that is integrated with an LAS (Laboratory automation system) track. i 2000; Carousels used on the LAS (laboratory automation system) carousel sample handler to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor.
Control graphs that are used to monitor mean and range of control measurement values from run to run.
c System; Calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and one to six calibrators are measured, and a point-to-point calibration curve is generated using these data points.
Glossary-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
linear transformation method linearity range liquid level sensing liquid waste arm list button LLS error
i System; Adjustment method that assumes a linear relationship between the calibrator RLU (relative light unit) values generated by the system and the master calibration information stored in the reagent bar code on the microparticle bottle.
Minimum and maximum reportable values of an assay. Detection of liquid level as measured by the change in capacitance.
i System; Device that removes liquid from RVs (reaction vessels) prior to unloading them to the solid waste container.
Software interface element that displays a list of items from which to choose. Liquid level sense error; Error that occurs when there is not enough fluid present, when there are bubbles or extra drops of fluid, or due to incorrect probe positioning.
load diverter log off log on logit-4 method
i System; Mechanism to move RVs from the inner track to the outer track of the process path when RVs are needed for processing.
Process of signing off the SCC (system control center). Process of signing in or gaining access to certain SCC functionality.
c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method that measures a reagent blank and three to six calibrators for which the absorbance or absorbance change increases as the concentration increases.
SCC identifier that controls access to SCC functionality. See also administrator logon, page Glossary-1 and general operator logon, page Glossary-6. Unique number used by Abbott to distinguish preparations of reagents or commodities. Identified as "Lot" on labels and boxes. Detailed error message that can be found in the Message history log and is used for advanced troubleshooting. Procedures performed on the ARCHITECT System to ensure continued proper function. Electronic log updated by the system to track performance of maintenance procedures.
logon lot low level error message maintenance Maintenance log maximum absorbance variation menu
c System; The maximum acceptable absorbance variation (0 - 3.2) allowed for absorbance readings within the main read time.
Software interface element that displays when you select an icon. Menus list the selection of available screens and when you select an item, the associated screen displays. Area at the top of software screens where icons that provide navigational and status indication support are located. Item on a menu that represents an available screen. When you select a menu item, the associated screen displays.
Glossary-9
menu bar menu item
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
message
Software interface element that provides important information during the course of normal system operation. Messages display in front of the currently displayed screen or window and require an acknowledgement. Electronic log that displays and stores a record of error-related messages that you use to troubleshoot problems associated with system performance and/or results reporting. The log holds a capacity of 12,000 messages. When capacity is reached messages are replaced on a first in - first out basis. See also Temporary message log, page Glossary-18. One one-thousandth of an inch.
Message history log
Mils mixer unit module status multimedia multiconstituent control NCCLS
c System; Device that houses two mixers (1 and 2) that mix the sample and reagent(s) together.
Operational mode of the processing module or sample handler. Video clips and animations in the online documentation that illustrate procedures, system functionality, and chemical reactions. Control material that contains multiple analytes. Up to 3 levels of each control can be configured and analyzed. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards; Nonprofit organization that provides a communication forum for the development, promotion, and use of standards for the world's medical science community. Water with a resistivity of 1.0 megohm/centimeter or greater and a microbiological content of 1000 colony-forming units/mL or less. External device that joins communication lines and enables the electronic transfer of information between the SCC (system control center) and processing module(s).
NCCLS Type II water network hub
onboard solutions onboard solution areas onboard stability one-point adjust option o-ring OSS
c System; Detergents used to wash the sample and reagent probes, mixers, and reaction cuvettes. c System; Storage locations for probe wash solutions used for the SmartWash function and maintenance procedures.
Amount of time that a reagent or solution remains stable when it is opened and placed on the system in its designated location.
c System; Calibration type that uses the absorbance data for a single calibrator to adjust the calibration curve.
Software interface element that allows you to select one item from the displayed choices. A black-filled circle indicates it is selected. Flexible seal used in many fluidics connections to prevent leakage at the connections.
c 8000 processing module; Optimum sampling sequence; Feature that maximizes the processing speed when SmartWash is in use by rearranging the sampling sequence so that the number of empty reaction cuvettes is minimized.
Glossary-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
over-aspiration volume panel parameter method password pause
Additional volume of sample aspirated by the system to prevent the water in the sample probe from diluting the sample. Option that allows you to quickly order multiple tests by selecting one button instead of individual assay buttons.
i System; Adjustment method that uses the RLU (relative light unit) values stored in the reagent bar code for calibrators A through F to determine the 4PLC (four parameter logistic curve) parameters of the master calibration.
String of characters entered during logon that is used in conjuction with your user ID to provide access to SCC (system control center) functionality. Procedure that changes the status of the processing module or sample handler from Running to Ready without losing tests currently in process. Use when you need to load sample carriers, reagents, and bulk solutions or perform maintenance and diagnostic procedures.
photometer
c System; Device that uses a concave diffraction grating capable of taking measurements at 16 different wavelengths to measure luminous intensity, luminous flux, illumination, and brightness. c System; Series of absorbance measurements taken for each reaction cuvette as it passes the photometric read position. These measurements are used to calculate result concentration. c System; Progression of a reaction from the initial sample dispense to the final read phase represented as the elapsed time at each of the 33 photometric points. i System; Detector on the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reader assembly that receives and amplifies light signals from the reaction solution.
Process of transferring liquid. Devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents or samples. See also reagent pipettor, page Glossary-14, sample pipettor, page Glossary-16, and STAT pipettor, page Glossary-18 Automated maintenance procedure that optimizes probe positioning. See photomultiplier tube, page Glossary-11. Input device (mouse) included with the SCC. Position indicator that you control with the mouse. Typically, the pointer is an arrow and the text entry position pointer is a blinking underscore or vertical bar. In the online Operations Manual and Help? the pointer turns into a pointing hand when it is pointed to an object that can be selected. Device that provides DC and AC voltages to various parts of the module.
photometric reads photometric timing photomultiplier tube pipetting pipettor
pipettor calibration PMT pointing device pointer
power supply pre-trigger level sensor
i System; Assembly with a magnetic float sensor that indicates when the liquid level in the pre-trigger bottle is low.
Glossary-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
pre-trigger/trigge r manifold Pre-Trigger Solution pre-trigger/trigge r tray pre-trigger/trigge r storage area primary tube
i System; Device that dispenses Pre-Trigger Solution, and then Trigger Solution into RVs. i System; Hydrogen peroxide solution used to split the acridinium dye off the conjugate bound to the microparticle complex. This process prepares the acridinium dye for the addition of Trigger Solution. i System; Platform in the supply and waste center that holds the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution bottles. i System; Location in the supply and waste center that provides onboard storage for the Pre-Trigger Solution and Trigger Solution, which are necessary for test processing.
Tube (75 mm - 100 mm in height) that contains a sample obtained by venipuncture. Primary tubes may be used in conjunction with sample cups. If used alone, you must use the sample gauge to verify there is adequate sample volume.
prime priority bay priority loading priority processing processing center processing center map
i System; System process of dispensing solutions into RVs (reaction vessels) to ensure the fluidics system is primed.
Holding area of the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions samples for priority processing. Procedure used to position a sample carrier(s) for priority processing. Sample processing in which samples that were priority loaded are pipetted first. Main activity area of the processing module where samples and reagents are dispensed and mixed, and where all assay processing is performed.
i System; Label attached to the front and rear processing center covers to assist you in locating components. Each component is labeled with a letter and/or number identifier. The additional components of the i 2000SR, which are used when processing STAT assay protocols, are indicated in pink.
Analyzer that performs all sample processing activities from aspiration to final read. The type(s) and number(s) of processing module(s) determines your system configuration. See also c 8000 processing module, page Glossary-2, c 16000 processing module, page Glossary-2, i 2000 processing module, page Glossary-7, and i 2000SR processing module, page Glossary-7. Graphic(s) on the Snapshot screen that indicates the status of the processing module(s) and displays other key system information. Input device used by the operator to direct processing center activities. Operational mode of the processing module. Statuses include Offline, Stopped, Warming, Ready, Scheduled Pause, Running, Initializing, and Scanning. Software interface element that allows you to continue or cancel the requested operation. Prompts display in front of the currently displayed screen or window and require a response.
processing module
processing module graphic processing module keypad processing module status prompt
Glossary-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
pumps pump center QC-Cal settings quality control analysis query message
Devices that provide accurate amounts of specific fluids to components in the processing center.
c System; Area that houses the processing module pumps.

Settings within each quality control/calibrator configuration category that the system administrator configures to meet site-specific requirements. Process of monitoring control activity. The ARCHITECT System allows you to monitor control activity using standard Levey-Jennings graphs and Westgard rules. Control data includes both unreleased and released results. Message sent to a host computer system from the SCC (system control center) to request orders for a sample when a sample bar code is scanned by a system bar code reader.
rate assay
c System; Reactions that are allowed to reach a stable rate in which the change in absorbance between readings is constant. The system performs several readings during this time, calculates absorbance change per minute (rate), and then uses the rate to calculate results. c System; The allowable percent variation change in absorbance measured during the first three reads, and then compared to the last three reads for the main and flex read time. c System; Assay validity check that uses a ratio of rates (A/B) measured at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or other reaction anomalies. c System; Assay validity check that uses the difference between rates (A-B) measured at two different times during the reaction to check for prozone effect or other reaction anomalies. i System; Adjustment method compares the RLU (relative light unit) value of the calibrators to the corresponding calibrator values from the master calibration curve. c System; Device that holds the cuvettes and rotates counter-clockwise to position them for sample processing.
Rectangular glass cuvette. See photometric timing, page Glossary-11.
rate linearity %
rate ratio
rate subtraction
ratio technique method reaction carousel reaction cuvette reaction timing reaction vessel
i System; Disposable container in which the CMIA (chemiluminescent microparticle immunoassay) reaction takes place. RVs (reaction vessels) are stored in bulk in the RV hopper and are automatically loaded into the process path as needed. The maximum onboard storage is 1200 RVs. You can add RVs to the hopper at any time. c System; Range (or window) of photometric reads that are defined in the assay parameter file and determine which of the 33 photometric reads measured for each assay reaction are used to calculate result concentration.
read time
Glossary-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
reagent bar code reader reagent carousel
Device that reads bar code labels on reagent bottles.
c System; Refrigerated carousels (R1 and R2) that are part of the reagent supply centers and provide cooled, temperature-controlled storage for reagent cartridges. i System; Refrigerated carousel located in the processing center that provides cooled, temperature-controlled storage for reagent bottles. c System; Container used in the reagent supply centers to hold the reagents used during operation. c System; Positioners used to ensure correct alignment of the small (55 mL cartridge), 20 mL (cartridge), and 20 mL (bottle) reagent cartridges placed in reagent supply centers 1 and 2.
Consumable that contains all reagent components necessary to run an assay on the ARCHITECT System. c System; Reagent kits may include only R1 reagent or may include both R1 and R2 reagents, i System; Reagent kits may include from two to six bottles. Unique identifier on Abbott pre-packaged reagents that contains a 2D (two-dimensional) bar code. Unique number used by Abbott for tracking purposes.
reagent cartridge reagent cartridge adapters reagent kit
reagent label reagent lot reagent pipettor
c System; Devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the cuvette. Reagent pipettor 1 also transfers sample diluents from reagent supply center 1 into a cuvette to be used for onboard sample dilution. i System; Devices that detect, aspirate, transfer, and dispense reagents into the RV. Each pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration. c System; Active wash station that washes any remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Process of rotating the reagent carousels and reading the bar codes on each of the reagents to update reagent inventory after reagents are added or removed.
reagent probe wash cup reagent scan reagent segment
c System; Section of each reagent supply center that hold reagents and diluents. Some segments have a target for pipettor calibration used for aligning sample or reagent pipettors when necessary. c System; Two areas (R1 and R2) of the processing center that include refrigerated reagent carousels and locations for additional onboard solutions.
Devices that control the aspiration and dispense of reagents.
reagent supply center reagent syringe reagent wash stations 1 and 2 (R1S/R2S) reference range
i System; Active wash stations that wash any remaining fluid from the probe interior and exterior surfaces. A vacuum source dries the exterior of the probe.
Normal clinical range of an analyte.
Glossary-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
refresh released result
Function that allows you to update the data displayed on the screen. Control or patient result that was determined to be acceptable. You can view released results from the Stored QC result and Stored results screens. If your system interfaces with a host computer the results transmit to the host.
replacement cap
i System; Teal-colored caps used when storing reagents that are temporarily removed from the processing module. The color visually indicates that reagent bottles have been opened.
Duplicate test measurement on the same sample performed within the same run. See linearity range, page Glossary-9. User-specified criteria for each assay that determines whether the system automatically reorders the assay for samples that meet the criteria. Holding area of the RSH (robotic sample handler) that positions samples for routine processing. Robotic sample handler; Transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to a c 8000 and/or i 2000SR processing module. Input device on the RSH (robotic sample handler) used by the operator to control the sample handler.
replicate reportable range retest rules routine bay RSH
RSH keypad RV RV access door
i System; See reaction vessel, page Glossary-13. i System; Opening used for diagnostic purposes only that allows access to one RV position on the outer track of the process path. You should always make sure it is closed during system operation. i System; Cover that allows you to add RVs to the RV hopper. i System; Device that provides onboard storage for RVs and transports the RVs into the process path. i System; Device that removes used RVs from the process path and discards them into the solid waste container after assay processing. c System; Location for the sample and reagent syringes and drives.
RV hopper cover RV loader and hopper assembly RV unloader sample and reagent syringe area sample bar code reader sample carrier
Device that scans the sample carrier ID, sample position, and sample tube bar code IDs to verify the position of the sample(s). Accessory used on the RSH (robotic sample handler) or SSH (standard sample handler) to transport patient samples, calibrators, or controls to the sample pipettor(s). Four digit alphanumeric identifier used to indicate where a sample is loaded. Disposable container (1400 L) that holds patient samples, calibrators, and controls. You can load a sample cup directly into a carrier or into a bar coded tube.
sample carrier ID sample cup
Glossary-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
sample handler
Component that transports samples through an ARCHITECT System. Each system has a single, primary sample handler regardless of the number of processing modules and types. See also LAS carousel sample handler, page Glossary-8, RSH, page Glossary-15, or SSH, page Glossary-17. Input device used by the operator to direct sample handler activities. Operational mode of the sample handler. Statuses include Offline, Stopped, Ready, Running, and Load queue paused.
sample handler keypad sample handler status sample load queue sample load queue bar code reader sample pipettor
i 2000; Track that transfers sample carriers to the sample processing queue on the standard sample handler. i 2000; Device that reads the sample carrier ID, position, and sample ID.
c System; Device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into the cuvettes. The pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration. i System; Device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples into the reaction vessel. The pipettor assembly includes a fluid sense/pressure monitoring system that helps to identify errors in aspiration. c System; Active wash station that washes any remaining fluid from the probe exterior, interior, and tip to eliminate carryover. i 2000; Track that transfers sample carriers to the sample pipettor. Once samples are aspirated, the sample carriers are transferred to another processing module or to the sample unload queue.
Setting that allows the system to aspirate an over-aspiration volume once per sample rather than each time it aspirates a test. Device that controls the aspiration and dispense of samples.
sample probe wash cup sample processing queue sample saving mode sample syringe sample unload queue sample wash station SCC screen screen available function bar buttons
i 2000; Track on the right side of the processing module where sample carriers are unloaded. i System; Passive wash station where the sample probe dispenses excess sample and any remaining fluid is washed from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
System control center; Computer system that provides the software interface to the ARCHITECT System and can provide an interface to a host computer. Software interface element that provides access to all related system information and functions. Buttons that have white lettering and are always available (green background) when you access the screen. For example, from the Order status screen you can always select F3 - Find. See also context available function bar buttons, page Glossary-4.
Glossary-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
scroll bar scroll box self blank septum
Vertical or horizontal bar at the side or bottom of a Help window that you use to move or "scroll" through topic content. Box on a scroll bar that displays the current position in a topic and allows you to drag it to another location.
c System; Blank read time used to correct the absorbance for sample coloring due to lipemia, hemolysis, bilirubin, and so forth. i System; Membrane with a slit that is used to prevent reagent evaporation and contamination, and to ensure reagent integrity. You place septums on all open reagent bottles prior to loading the bottle into the processing module.
A connection point between the SCC and an external device.
serial port SSH
i 2000; Standard sample handler; Transport system used for loading calibrators, controls, and patient samples and presenting them to an i 2000 processing module(s). i 2000; Input device on the SSH (Standard sample handler) used by the operator to control the sample handler.
Procedure used to turn off the power to the processing module and SCC. Assay-specific sample that contains known concentrations of analyte. Single constituent controls are typically labeled L, M, and H, or Pos and Neg.
SSH keypad shutdown single constituent control SmartWash feature Snapshot screen software interface solenoid valve solid waste storage area spline method
c System; Additional wash for the reagent probes, sample probe, and cuvette to prevent assay-to-assay interference.
Main ARCHITECT System software screen that displays key system information and provides quick access to related screens. Portion of the computer program with which you interact by making selections and entering information. The interface is common among all ARCHITECT Systems. See also GUI, page Glossary-6.
c System; Valves (six) located at the top of the sample and reagent syringe drives that open or close as required for flushing, aspiration, and dispense. i System; Location in the supply and waste center that provides a storage area for the solid waste container that holds used RVs (reaction vessels). c System; Non-linear calibration or data reduction method in which a reagent blank and three to six calibrators are measured, and a multiple sectioned calibration curve is generated using a polynomial expression so that the adjoining sections are connected smoothly.
Procedure used to home motors and initialize the processing module and sample handler. Changes the processing module and sample handler status from Stopped to Ready.
startup
STAT assay protocol
i 2000SR; Assay protocol with a shorter incubation time than the routine assay protocol and provides faster result completion. The STAT assay protocol does not determine sampling priority. See also priority processing, page Glossary-12.
Glossary-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
STAT diverter STAT pipettor STAT syringe STAT wash station supernatant fluid
i 2000SR; Device that moves RVs from the inner track to the outer track of the process path when the RVs are needed for STAT assay protocols. i 2000SR; Device that detects, aspirates, transfers, and dispenses samples processed using a STAT assay protocol(s) into the RV. i 2000SR; Device that controls the aspiration and dispense of samples processed using a STAT assay protocol(s). i 2000SR; Passive wash station where the STAT probe dispenses excess sample and any remaining fluid is washed from the probe exterior, interior, and tip.
Clear fluid that, after the settling out of an insoluble liquid or solid by the action of normal gravity or of centrifugal force, takes up the upper portion of the contents of a vessel.
supply and pump center supply and waste center syringe
c System; Storage area for processing module pumps, bulk solutions, and sample and reagent syringes and drives. i System; Storage area for bulk solutions and solid waste.
Device that controls the aspiration and dispense of sample or reagents by moving the piston in the syringe body. See also reagent syringe, page Glossary-14 and sample syringe, page Glossary-16. Optional mobile shelf unit which holds the computer, monitor, keyboard, and printer. Settings within each system configuration category that the system administrator configures to meet site-specific requirements. Software application that controls operation of an ARCHITECT System. Operational modes of the processing module and/or sample handler. Electronic log that displays non-critical error-related messages that you can address, and then delete. The log holds a capacity of 200 messages. Error that may occur for software communication functions when a defined time limit is exceeded while waiting for a response from a device. Area under the menu bar of every screen or at the top of every window that contains the name of the screen or window. Main interface between the operator and the ARCHITECT System that allows you to make onscreen selections by touching text areas and graphics, icons and menu items, and function bar buttons.
system control center stand system settings system software system status Temporary message log timeout title bar touch-screen monitor Trigger Solution trigger level sensor two-point adjust
i System; Sodium hydroxide solution used to produce the chemiluminescent reaction that provides the final read. i System; Assembly with a magnetic float sensor that indicates when the liquid level in the trigger bottle is low. c System; Calibration type that uses the absorbance data for the reagent blank and a calibrator to adjust the calibration curve.
Glossary-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
UPS unreleased result user defined reagent user ID vortexer wash buffer
Uninterruptible power supply; Optional component that provides a temporary, continuous flow of power to the processing module during a power failure. Control or patient result that has not been reviewed and released. You can view unreleased results from the QC result review and Results review screens.
c System; Non-bar coded reagents or reagents not supplied by Abbott, which must be configured and manually assigned to positions in the reagent supply centers.
String of characters entered during logon that may be used in conjuction with a password to provide access to SCC (system control center) functionality.
i System; Device that mixes the sample and reagents in an RV (reaction vessel) to suspend the microparticles. i System; Solution containing phosphate buffered saline. Wash buffer is used throughout assay processing and is pumped to the sample and reagent pipetting assemblies and the two wash zones. i System; Assembly containing a tube with three magnetic float sensors that indicate when the wash buffer reservoir is full, needs to be filled by the ARCHITECT ARM (automatic reconstitution module) accessory, or is empty. i System; Onboard container in the supply and waste center that holds up to 25 liters of wash buffer. i System; Location in the supply and waste center for onboard storage of wash buffer, which is used in test processing. i System; Assembly containing material used to eliminate particulates that might damage the fluidics components of the system. c System; Syringe drive pump that aspirates and dilutes Alkaline and Acid Wash Solutions to wash cuvettes during daily operation and maintenance procedures. i System; Device that directs RVs to one of two paths. One path moves RVs through the wash zone where a wash occurs. The other path moves RVs around the wash zone. i System; Device that removes and discards unbound analyte from the reaction mixture in an RV. i System; Device in the supply and waste center that receives used RVs by gravity and directs them into the solid waste container. The trap door holds up to 50 RVs when you remove the solid waste container during processing. c System; Incubator that surrounds the reaction cuvettes and maintains the reaction temperature. c System; Antimicrobial solution used to minimize bacterial growth in the water bath. During the daily maintenance procedure, the solution is dispensed into the water bath.
Control rules that use various standard deviation limits to monitor the performance of the system by detecting trends or shifts.
Glossary-19
wash buffer level sensor wash buffer reservoir wash buffer storage area wash buffer filter wash solution pump wash zone diverter wash zone manifold waste chute and trap door water bath Water Bath Additive Westgard rules
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Glossary
window
Software display that provides additional information or functions related to the active screen. You access windows by selecting a button on the screen. The window displays on top of, or in front of, the screen.
Glossary-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Revision history
Document control numbers 201837-102 201837-103
Revision date 10/2006 04/2007
Content revised Original issue Read me first, Sections 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 10, and Appendix E. Sections 2, 5, 9, 10, and Appendix E.
201837-104
06/2007
Revision history-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
maintenance description, 9-67 quality control result flag description, 5-246 result flag description, 5-225 1117 STAT Pipettor Calibration (i 2000SR) illustration of, 9-75 maintenance description, 9-68 1118 LAS Pipettor Calibration maintenance description, 9-81 1119 Transport Calibration maintenance description, 9-77 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c 16000) illustration of, 9-59 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c 8000) illustration of, 9-49 1120 Sample Pipettor Calibration (c System) maintenance description, 9-35 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c 16000) illustration of, 9-60 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c 8000) illustration of, 9-50 1121 R1 Pipettor Calibration (c System) maintenance description, 9-36 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c 16000) illustration of, 9-61 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c 8000) illustration of, 9-51 1122 R2 Pipettor Calibration (c System) maintenance description, 9-37 1151 Probe Alignment Test diagnostics description, 10-659 1155 Probe Straightness Test diagnostics description, 10-671 1160 Pipettor Move diagnostics description, 10-671 1161 Probe Move diagnostics description, 10-660 1170 Wash Station Test diagnostics description, 10-672 2001 Sample Pipettor Check (i System) diagnostics description, 10-682
Symbols
* processing code description of, 5-154
Numerics
1 mL syringes (c 16000) checking (illustration), 9-53 replacing the, 9-204 1 mL syringes (c 8000) checking (illustration), 9-43 replacing the, 9-126 1 mL syringes (c System) changing, 9-32 checking, 9-22 1000 Absorbance Reads diagnostics description, 10-664 1003 Change Lamp maintenance description, 9-29 1008 Optics Total Test diagnostics description, 10-664 1010 Cuvette Integrity Test diagnostics description, 10-665 1020 Optics Background diagnostics description, 10-680 1030 Shutter diagnostics description, 10-680 1100 Pipettor Test diagnostics description, 10-670 1111 Sample Pipettor Calibration (i System) illustration of, 9-72 maintenance description, 9-65 1112 R1 Pipettor Calibration (i System) illustration of, 9-73 maintenance description, 9-66 1113 R2 Pipettor Calibration (i System) illustration of, 9-74
Index-1
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
2002 R1 Pipettor Check (i System) diagnostics description, 10-682 2003 R2 Pipettor Check (i System) diagnostics description, 10-682 2004 Pre-Trigger Check diagnostics description, 10-683 2005 Trigger Check diagnostics description, 10-683 2006 Wash Zone 1 Check diagnostics description, 10-683 2007 Wash Zone 2 Check diagnostics description, 10-683 2009 STAT Pipettor Check (i 2000SR) diagnostics description, 10-684 2043 Sample Pipettor Check (c System) diagnostics description, 10-666 2044 R1 Pipettor Check (c System) diagnostics description, 10-667 2045 R2 Pipettor Check (c System) diagnostics description, 10-667 2050 WZ Aspiration Test diagnostics description, 10-672 2110 Syringes and Pumps Test diagnostics description, 10-674 2129 Add Water Bath Additive maintenance description, 9-38 2130 Flush Fluids maintenance description, 9-69 2131 Flush ICT Cup maintenance description, 9-38 2132 Flush Water Lines maintenance description, 9-38 2133 Air Flush maintenance description, 9-69 2134 Change Water Bath maintenance description, 9-38 2135 Long Term Shutdown diagnostics description, 10-675 2151 Prime Wash Zones maintenance description, 9-69 2152 Prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger maintenance description, 9-70
2155 Flush Bulk Solutions maintenance description, 9-39 2185 Wash Buffer Unload maintenance description, 9-70 3000 Reagent Carousel Test diagnostics description, 10-681 3010 Reaction Carousel Home Move diagnostics description, 10-665 3011 Reagent Sample Carousel Home diagnostics description, 10-666 3115 Vortexer Test diagnostics description, 10-669 3125 Hopper Level Sensor Test diagnostics description, 10-669 3126 Mixer Vibration Test diagnostics description, 10-659 3150 Diverter Test diagnostics description, 10-669 3175 Vacuum System Test diagnostics description, 10-676 3200 Reagent Bar Code Reader Test (i System) diagnostics description, 10-675 3206 Reagent Bar Code Test (c System) diagnostics description, 10-662 3210 Reagent Bar Code Calibration diagnostics description, 10-675 3220 SH Bar Code Calibration diagnostics description, 10-689 3222 RSH Bar Code Calibration diagnostics description, 10-685 3225 LAS Crsl Bar Code Calibration diagnostics description, 10-692 3250 SH Bar Code Reader Test diagnostics description, 10-689 3251 Sample Carousel Bar Code Test diagnostics description, 10-662 3252 RSH Bar Code Reader Test diagnostics description, 10-685 3255 LAS Crsl Bar Code Test diagnostics description, 10-692 3315 Sample Handler Test
Index-2
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
diagnostics description, 10-689 3317 RSH Test diagnostics description, 10-686 3323 RSH Section Test diagnostics description, 10-687 3400 Interlock Sensors Test diagnostics description c System, 10-663 i System, 10-677 3401 Section Bay Sensors Test diagnostics description, 10-687 3410 Level Sensors Test diagnostics description, 10-677 3520 Temperature Status (i System) maintenance description, 9-70 3525 Temperature Status (c System) maintenance description, 9-39 3526 Check Water Bath Temperature maintenance description, 9-40 3530 Temperature Check - Manual maintenance description, 9-71 3600 LLS Test diagnostics description, 10-672 3610 Sample Handler LLS Test diagnostics description c System, 10-661 i System, 10-673 3625 Pipettors LLS Test diagnostics description, 10-661 3700 Keypad Test (i System) diagnostics description, 10-676 3710 Keypad Test diagnostics description RSH, 10-686 SSH, 10-690 3720 Keypad Test (c System) diagnostics description, 10-662 3800 Pressure Monitoring Test diagnostics description, 10-673 4080 Module Initialization diagnostics description c System, 10-663 i System, 10-676 4090 Sample Handler Initialization
diagnostics description LAS carousel sample handler, 10-692 RSH, 10-686 SSH, 10-690 4PLC methods (i System) description of, Appendix C-15 x residual minimization (x-weighted), Appendix C-16 y residual minimization (y-weighted), Appendix C-17 5100 PP & Carousel Motor Tests diagnostics description, 10-679 5110 Pipettor & Syringe Motor Tests diagnostics description, 10-679 5120 Pump Motor Tests diagnostics description, 10-679 5131 WZ, Wash Station, Valve Test diagnostics description, 10-677 5132 Syringe Vacuum PT T Valve Test diagnostics description, 10-678 5133 Other Valves & Diverter Test diagnostics description, 10-678 5220 RV Sensors Test diagnostics description, 10-669 5400 Crash Sensor Test (i System) diagnostics description, 10-671 5405 Crash Sensor Test (c System) diagnostics description, 10-660 5500 SH Motor Tests diagnostics description, 10-691 5501 RSH Motor Tests diagnostics description, 10-688 5506 RSH Sensor Test diagnostics description, 10-687 5507 RSH Indicator Lights Test diagnostics description, 10-686 5700 Fuse Status diagnostics description, 10-679 6008 Controller Configuration diagnostics description, 10-694 6009 Log Utilities diagnostics description, 10-694 6010 Load Queue Cleaning
Index-3
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
maintenance description, 9-79 6011 Clean Reagent Supply Centers maintenance description, 9-29 6012 Air Filter Cleaning maintenance description, 9-64 6013 Clean Sample Carousel Area maintenance description, 9-30 6014 Pipettor Probe Cleaning maintenance description, 9-64 6015 WZ Probe Cleaning - Manual maintenance description, 9-64 6016 Check Dispense Components maintenance description, 9-27 6017 Unload Queue Cleaning maintenance description, 9-80 6018 Clean Cuvette Washer Nozzles maintenance description, 9-27 6019 Check ICT Probe and Tubing illustration of (c 16000), 9-54 illustration of (c 8000), 9-44 maintenance description, 9-24 6020 Processing Queue Cleaning maintenance description, 9-80 6021 Clean Mixers maintenance description, 9-25 6022 LAS Carousel Cleaning maintenance description, 9-81 6023 Clean Sample Reagent Probes maintenance description, 9-25 6024 Check 1 mL Syringes illustration of (c 16000), 9-53 illustration of (c 8000), 9-43 maintenance description, 9-22 6025 Check Wash Solution Trays maintenance description, 9-28 6026 Check Syringes and Valves illustration of (c 16000), 9-57 illustration of (c 8000), 9-47 maintenance description, 9-28 6028 - Check DI Water Purity maintenance description, 9-22 6029 Assay Information diagnostics description, 10-694
6037 WZ Probe Straightness diagnostics description, 10-673 6038 External Decontamination maintenance description, 9-82 6041 Daily Maintenance (i System) maintenance description, 9-63 6043 WZ Probe Cleaning - Bleach maintenance description, 9-71 6052 Wash Cuvettes maintenance description, 9-40 6053 Probe Water Wash maintenance description, 9-40 6054 Probe Acid Wash maintenance description, 9-40 6055 Detergent B Probe Wash maintenance description, 9-41 6056 Clean Cuvettes with Detergent maintenance description, 9-26 6062 Wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid maintenance description, 9-41 6063 Flush ICT Module maintenance description, 9-41 6070 Daily Maintenance (c System) maintenance description, 9-22 6114 Install Delete Assays diagnostics description, 10-695 6115 Install Delete Procedures diagnostics description, 10-695 6116 Update 6115 Procedure diagnostics description, 10-695 6300 Clean ICT Drain Tip illustration of (c 16000), 9-58 illustration of (c 8000), 9-48 maintenance description, 9-28 6301 Sample Syringe Maintenance description of, 9-30 6302 Wash Syringe Maintenance description of, 9-31 6303 Reagent Syringe Maintenance description of, 9-32 6304 Change 1 mL Syringes maintenance description, 9-32
Index-4
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
6305 Change ICT Asp Check Valve maintenance description, 9-33 6306 Check ICT Ref Check Valves maintenance description, 9-33 6307 Check Clean HC Waste Sensor maintenance description, 9-34 6308 Check HC Waste Pump Tubing illustration of (c 8000), 9-46 maintenance description, 9-26 6309 Change ICT Module maintenance description, 9-42 6310 Clean cuvettes - manually maintenance description, 9-42 6311 RSH Cleaning maintenance description, 9-77 6500 MAC Hardware Address Procedure diagnostics description, 10-696 8000 Unload RVs diagnostics description, 10-670 8010 Reverse RV Loader Wheel diagnostics description, 10-670
i System processing module keypad, 1-78 accessing Snapshot screen, 1-20 accessing calibration screens Calibration order screen, 6-11 Calibration status screen, 6-17 accessing configuration screens Configuration screen - Assay settings (Assay parameters view), 2-67 Configuration screen - Assay settings (New assay view), 2-68 Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings view, 2-175 Configuration screen - System settings view, 2-5 accessing consumable inventory management screens Supply status screen - c System view, 5-27 Supply status screen - i 2000 i 2000SR view, 5-29 accessing diagnostic screens Diagnostics screen, 10-651 System logs screen, 10-12 accessing exception management screens Exception status screen, 5-295 accessing maintenance screens Maintenance log screen, 9-16 Maintenance screen, 9-4 accessing online documentation Help?, System documentation-28 Help? for error message, illustration, System documentation-8 Help? for screen or window, illustration, System documentation-7 operations manual, System documentation-27 operations manual from the system software, illustration, System documentation-6 accessing patient and control order screens Control order screen - Multiconstituent view, 5-138 Control order screen - Single analyte view, 5-136
A
A#1 c System quality control result flag, 5-246 c System result flag, 5-225 A#2 c System quality control result flag, 5-246 c System result flag, 5-225 Abbott assays procedures associated with configuring, 2-70 Absorbance Data Report illustration of, Appendix A-3 absorbance method (photometric - c System) description of, Appendix C-2 absorbance reads (c System) 1000 diagnostics description, 10-664 access indicator light c 16000 sample carousel, 1-53 c 8000 sample carousel, 1-33
Index-5
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
Order status screen, 5-152 Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view, 5-116 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view, 5-117 Patient order screen - Single patient view, 5-114 Sample status screen, 5-164 accessing patient and QC result review screens QC result review screen, 5-245 Rerun status screen, 5-259 Results review screen, 5-224 accessing patient and QC stored results screens Stored QC results screen, 5-280 Stored results screen, 5-264 accessing quality control management screens QC reports screen, 5-331 accessing reagent inventory management screens Reagent history screen, 5-77 Reagent status screen - c System view, 5-64 Reagent status screen - i 2000 i 2000SR view, 5-66 Reagent status screen - View all view, 5-69 accessing software installation and backup screens Utilities screen - Backup software view, 2-212 Utilities screen - Software install view, 2-210 accessories c 16000 reagent cartridge adapters, 1-154, , 1-155 c 8000 reagent cartridge adapters, 1-151 c System reagent segments, 1-149 LAS sample carousel, 1-148 list numbers, Appendix D-12 RSH and SSH sample carriers, 1-147 RSH carrier trays, 1-148 accessory kit 1 list numbers c 16000 System LN 08L71-01, Appendix
D-7 c 8000 System LN 01G09-02, Appendix D-4 accessory kit 2 list numbers c System LN 02K10-01, Appendix D-6 accessory kit list numbers c 16000 System LN 02K10-01, Appendix D-9 c 16000 System, description, Appendix D-7 c 8000 System, description, Appendix D-4 i 2000 LN 08C94-01, Appendix D-10 i 2000SR LN 3M77-01, Appendix D-10 i System, description, Appendix D-10 Acid Wash (c 16000) replacing onboard solutions in reagent supply centers, 5-41 Acid Wash (c 8000) replacing onboard solutions in reagent supply centers, 5-39 Acid Wash (c System) bulk solution supply center illustration, 1-49, , 1-69 description of, 1-135 illustration of, 1-136 preparing, 5-35 replacing, 5-33 replacing onboard solutions in sample carousel, 5-44 updating supply status, 5-33 active calibration curve guidelines, 6-2 storage, 6-9 active calibration status description of, 6-18 sampling rules, 6-3 verification by system, 6-15 active lane indicator lights SSH keypad, 1-123 adapters c 16000 reagent cartridge, 1-154, , 1-155 c 8000 reagent cartridge, 1-151, , 1-152 Add edit assay retest rules window description of, 2-171
Index-6
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
field descriptions, Appendix E-202 illustration of, 2-172 Add edit SmartWash window (c System) Cuvette view description, 2-158 Cuvette view field descriptions, Appendix E-192 Cuvette view illustration, 2-158 Rgt 1 probe view description, 2-156 Rgt 1 probe view field descriptions, Appendix E-190 Rgt 1 probe view illustration, 2-157 Sample probe view description, 2-157 Sample probe view field descriptions, Appendix E-191 Sample probe view illustration, 2-157 Add Water Bath Additive (c System) 2129 maintenance description, 9-38 Adding an assay to a multiconstituent bar code SID, 2-194 adding assay to a multiconstituent control, 2-191 assay to a retest rule, 2-112 comment to a control result, 5-249 comment to a Levey-Jennings point, 5-320 comment to a maintenance procedure, 9-17 comment to a patient result, 5-229 comment to an exception, 5-298 comment to an order, 5-157 lot to a single analyte control, 2-187 test to a patient order, 5-128 adjust assay view - Calibration curve window (i System) description of, 6-22 illustration of, 6-23 adjust calibration (i System) description, 6-8 adjustment calibration (c System) 1-point adjustment, 6-6 2-point adjustment, 6-7 blank adjustment, 6-6 description, 6-5 adjustment methods (i System)
curve shape, Appendix C-21 linear transformation, Appendix C-20 parameter, Appendix C-21 ratio technique, Appendix C-19 administrator, system changing password, 1-23 log on window illustration, 1-21 user log on, 1-23 advance indicator light sample carousel (c 16000) illustration, 1-53 sample carousel (c 8000) illustration, 1-33 air filter cleaning (i System) 6012 maintenance description, 9-64 air flush (i System) 2133 maintenance description, 9-69 aliquot sample tube illustration of, 5-171 specifications, 5-171 volumes, 5-174 Alkaline Wash (c 16000) bulk solution supply center illustration, 1-69 Alkaline Wash (c 8000) bulk solution supply center illustration, 1-49 Alkaline Wash (c System) description of, 1-134 illustration of, 1-135 replacing, 5-33 updating supply status, 5-33 analytical sensitivity - method 1 (limit of detection) data sheet, Appendix B-4 data sheet example, Appendix B-5 description of, Appendix B-3 analytical sensitivity - method 2 (limit of quantitation) data sheet, Appendix B-7 data sheet example, Appendix B-9 description of, Appendix B-6 graph, Appendix B-8 graph example, Appendix B-10 analytical specificity - method 1
Index-7
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
description of, Appendix B-43 animations playing, using online operations manual, System documentation-41 Approve Maintenance log description of window, 9-18 description of window field descriptions, Appendix E-130 illustration of window, 9-19 procedure, 9-17 ARCHITECT System components of, 1-2 general specifications, 4-4 overview, 1-2 Archive calibration curves window description of, 6-28 field descriptions, Appendix E-85 illustration of, 6-28 Archive QC results window description of, 5-291 field descriptions, Appendix E-93 illustration of, 5-292 Archive results window description of, 5-277 field descriptions, Appendix E-62 illustration of, 5-278 Archived test status description, 5-153 archiving calibration curves, 6-33 messages, 5-271 stored control results, 5-284 stored patient results, 5-269 ARM (i System) general description, 1-109 powering off and powering on description, 5-19 ARM (i System) components connectors (rear), 1-113 connectors (top), 1-114 connectors, description of, 1-113 fluidics and electronic bay, 1-110 illustration of front view, 1-110 illustration of rear view, 1-111 keypad description, 1-111
keypad illustration, 1-112 mixing chamber, 1-110 power switch, 1-113 status button, 1-18 ARM (i System) observed problems and corrective action procedures corrective action procedures, 10-710 observed problems, 10-626 ARM (i System) procedures disconnecting buffer tubing, illustration, 5-55 initializing, 5-20 initiating wash buffer transfer, 5-60 powering off, 5-20 powering on and initializing, 5-20 replacing Concentrated Wash Buffer, 5-55 ARM (i System) specifications and requirements dimensions, 4-37 operating environment requirements, 4-39 storage environment requirements, 4-39 weight specifications, 4-37 ARM status button description of, Appendix E-19 as-needed maintenance description c System, 9-35 i 2000 i 2000SR, 9-65 LAS carousel sample handler, 9-81 RSH, 9-77 SCC, 9-82 SSH, 9-79 assay calibration methods c System photometric, 6-3 c System potentiometric, 6-4 assay calibrations description, 6-2 guidelines, 6-2 mandatory, 6-2 optional, 6-3 viewing history, 6-29 viewing status, 6-29 assay claims (i System) verifying, Appendix B-1
Index-8
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
assay configuration settings procedures associated with changing, 2-107 assay file management managing assay files, 2-214 assay files c System exporting, 2-216 c System importing, 2-215 installing or deleting, 2-214 assay information (SCC) 6029 diagnostics description, 10-694 Assay options (Calibration order) window description of, 6-13 field descriptions, Appendix E-76 illustration of, 6-14 Assay options (Control order) window Automated dilution view description of, 5-149 field descriptions, Appendix E-35 illustration of, 5-150 Assay options (Control order) window Manual dilution view description of, 5-149 field descriptions, Appendix E-34 illustration of, 5-149 Assay options (Patient order) window Automated dilution view description of, 5-132 field descriptions, Appendix E-27 illustration of, 5-132 Assay options (Patient order) window Manual dilution view description of, 5-131 field descriptions, Appendix E-26 illustration of, 5-131 Assay Parameter Report c System illustration, Appendix A-6 i System illustration, Appendix A-15 printing (all assays), 5-343 printing (specified assays), 5-342 procedures associated with printing, 2-127 assay processing description of (c System), 3-13 description of (i 2000 i 2000SR), 3-29
assay protocol types c System, 3-17, , 3-18, , 3-19 i 2000 i 2000SR, 3-31, , 3-33, , 3-36, , 3-38, , 3-41 assay reaction (c System) end-point, 3-3 rate, 3-3 assay retest rule settings description of, Appendix E-205 viewing, 2-100 assay specific error codes descriptions of error codes 1000-1999, 10-113 assay technology c System, 3-2, , 3-6 i System, 3-24, , 3-27, , 3-29 assays changing availabilty of, 2-109 changing the name of, 2-108 configuring photometric, 2-88 removing from retest rule, 2-113 viewing availability, 2-98 viewing retest rule settings, 2-100 Assign location window (c System) description of, 5-72 field descriptions, Appendix E-114 illustration of, 5-73 auto retest patient samples description of, 5-112 automated dilution verification - method 1 data sheet, Appendix B-35 data sheet example, Appendix B-35 description of, Appendix B-34 automated ordering controls, 5-111 host computer download, 5-110 host order query, 5-111 patient samples auto retest, 5-112 automatic processing module activities c System automatic rotation of reagent supply center(s), 1-168 c System processing module wash, 1-168 c System system flush, 1-166 description of, 1-166 i System system flush, 1-167
Index-9
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
i System system prime, 1-168 automatic report printing setting viewing, 2-12 average number of tests per sample viewing, 2-10
batch sample ordering type changing, 2-21 viewing, 2-10 bay door (RSH) location of, 1-118 BC Fail reagent status description of, 5-69 biohazard bag dimensions of, 4-8 replacing, 5-47 blank adjustment (c System) description of, 6-6 Blank maintenance status description of, 9-20 boolean operators description of, System documentation-37 using to search, System documentation-37 buffer filter (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the, 9-272 buffer level sensor (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the, 9-269 buffer quality error indicator i System ARM, 1-112 bulk solution supply center (c 16000) Acid Wash, 1-69 Alkaline Wash, 1-69 description of, 1-69 ICT reference solution, 1-69 illustration of, 1-69 bulk solution supply center (c 8000) Acid Wash, 1-49 Alkaline Wash, 1-49 description of, 1-49 ICT reference solution, 1-49 illustration of, 1-49 bulk solutions storing and using, 7-5 bulk solutions (c 16000) illustration of supply center, 9-203 bulk solutions (c 8000) illustration of supply center, 9-125 bulk solutions (c System)
B
B processing code description of, 5-154 bar code configuration options description of, Appendix E-155 bar code label requirements 1D reagent labels, 4-29, , 4-30, , 4-32 sample labels, 4-33, , 4-34, , 4-35 bar code reader diagnostics description c System, 10-661 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-674 LAS carousel sample handler, 10-691 RSH, 10-684 SSH, 10-688 bar code reader error codes descriptions of error codes 4000-4999, 10-311 bar code readers c 16000 reagent, location, 1-55 c 16000 sample, location, 1-53 c 8000 reagent, location, 1-35 c 8000 sample, location, 1-33 c System, 4-5 cleaning the window, 10-697 i 2000 i 2000SR, 4-5 i System reagent, location, 1-84 RSH sample, location, 1-116 SSH - i 2000 sample, location, 1-121 bar code scanner connector, 1-10 description of, 1-11 bar coded reagents (c System) loading, 5-85 unloading, 5-98 bar coded samples RSH - loading for batch processing, 5-183 SSH - loading for batch processing, 5-198 batch processing description of, 5-215
Index-10
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
2155 maintenance description, 9-39 Acid Wash, 1-135 Alkaline Wash, 1-134 capacities, 4-7 description of, 1-132 flushing, 9-39 ICT reference solution, 1-133 replacing and updating inventory, 5-33 bulk solutions (i System) capacities, 4-8 Concentrated Wash Buffer, 1-145 description of, 1-143 Pre-Trigger Solution, 1-143 Trigger Solution, 1-144 Busy (archive message) description of, 5-271 buttons function bar, 1-14 toolbar of Help window, System documentation-12 buttons - Snaphsot screen ARM status, Appendix E-19 cal status, Appendix E-17 exception status, Appendix E-18 LAS status, Appendix E-19 LIS status, Appendix E-19 order status, Appendix E-16 printer status, Appendix E-18 reagent status, Appendix E-16 reruns status, Appendix E-18 supply status (c System), Appendix E-17 supply status (i System), Appendix E-18
supply and pump center illustration, 9-203 c 16000 component replacement procedures 1 mL syringes, replacing the, 9-204 check valves, replacing the, 9-207 cuvette dry tip, replacing the, 9-189 cuvette segment, replacing a, 9-186 cuvette, replacing the, 9-183 float switch cable, replacing the, 9-236 high-concentration waste bottle, replacing the, 9-234 ICT module or probe, replacing the, 9-194 ICT reference solution filter, replacing the, 9-212 lamp or lamp plate, replacing the, 9-178 mixer, replacing the, 9-192 pump poppet valve set, replacing the, 9-231 reagent probe tubing, replacing the, 9-174 reagent probes, replacing the, 9-167 sample carousel clip, replacing the, 9-200 sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, replacing the, 9-224 sample probe tubing, replacing the, 9-171 sample probe, replacing the, 9-164 wash solution filter, replacing the, 9-214 wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, replacing the, 9-217 c 16000 processing module front processing center cover, 1-28 illustration of front view, 1-28 illustration of rear view, 1-29 keypad, 1-28 main power supply, 1-29 pump center door, 1-28 rear processing center cover, 1-29 supply center door, 1-28 water management unit, 1-29 c 8000 description of, 1-3 illustration of, 1-4 processing center component replacement procedures, 9-83
C
c 16000 description of, 1-4 illustration of, 1-5 processing center component replacement procedures, 9-162 processing center components description, 9-163 processing center components illustration, 1-51 processing center map, 9-163 reagent hardware components, 1-54 supply and pump center component replacement, 9-202
Index-11
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
processing center components description, 9-84 processing center components illustration, 1-31 processing center map, 9-84 reagent hardware components, 1-34 supply and pump center component replacement, 9-124 supply and pump center illustration, 9-125 c 8000 component replacement procedures 1 mL syringes, replacing the, 9-126 check valves, replacing the, 9-130 cuvette dry tip, replacing the, 9-111 cuvette segment, replacing a, 9-108 cuvette, replacing the, 9-104 float switch cable, replacing the, 9-160 high-concentration waste bottle, replacing the, 9-158 ICT module or probe, replacing the, 9-116 ICT reference solution filter, replacing the, 9-134 lamp or lamp plate, replacing the, 9-99 mixer, replacing the, 9-114 pump poppet valve set, replacing the, 9-155 reagent probe tubing, replacing the, 9-95 reagent probes, replacing the, 9-88 sample carousel clip, replacing the, 9-122 sample or reagent syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, replacing the, 9-148 sample probe tubing, replacing the, 9-92 sample probe, replacing the, 9-85 wash solution filter, replacing the, 9-136 wash solution syringe o-ring and seal tips 1 and 2, replacing the, 9-139 c 8000 processing module card cage door, 1-26 description of, 1-25 front processing center cover, 1-26 illustration of front view, 1-26 illustration of rear view, 1-27 keypad, 1-26 main power supply, 1-27 optional components, 1-70 pump center door, 1-26
rear processing center cover, 1-27 supply center door, 1-26 water management unit, 1-27 C processing code description of, 5-154 c System bar code readers, 4-5 cables (SCC) replacing network hub and cables, 9-281 reseating the, 10-710 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System) illustration of, Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System) illustration of, Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System) illustration of, Appendix A-34 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System) illustration of, Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report - Potentiometric (c System) illustration of, Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor Blank (c System) illustration of, Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Summary Report illustration of, Appendix A-37 cal status button description of, Appendix E-17 calibrating i System ARM level sense, 10-712 calibration finding a specific, 6-30 verifying, 6-15 calibration adjustment type and interval (c System - photometric) configuring, 2-78 Calibration curve window - Adjust assay view (i System) description of, 6-22 field descriptions, Appendix E-81 illustration of, 6-23 Calibration curve window - factor, linear, and non-linear assay views (c System)
Index-12
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
description of, 6-19 Calibration curve window - Full assay view (i System) description of, 6-24 field descriptions, Appendix E-84 illustration of, 6-25 Calibration curve window - Index assay view (i System) description of, 6-23 field descriptions, Appendix E-83 illustration of, 6-24 Calibration curve window - Linear assay view (c System) field descriptions, Appendix E-78 illustration of, 6-20 Calibration curve window - Potentiometric assay view (c System) description of, 6-21 field descriptions, Appendix E-80 illustration of, 6-22 Calibration curve window - Use cal factor blank assay view (c System) description of, 6-20 field descriptions, Appendix E-79 illustration of, 6-21 calibration curves archiving, 6-33 c System status, 1-18 failing an active, 6-32 storing active curves, 6-9 storing failed curves, 6-10 viewing information, 6-31 calibration guidelines description of, 6-2 mandatory calibration, 6-2 optional calibration, 6-3 Calibration history screen accessing the, 6-27 Archive calibration curves window illustration, 6-28 description of, 6-25 field descriptions, Appendix E-85 illustration of, 6-26 procedures associated with, 6-28 sorting options, 6-26 windows associated with, 6-27
calibration methods c System photometric, 6-3 c System potentiometric, 6-4 i System, 6-4 Calibration order screen accessing the, 6-11 description of, 6-10 field descriptions, Appendix E-76 illustration of, 6-11 procedures associated with, 6-12 windows associated with, 6-13 calibration orders creating, 6-12 viewing test status, 5-154 Calibration review procedures associated with, 6-29 calibration sampling rules description of, 6-3 Calibration status screen accessing the, 6-17 description of, 6-15 field descriptions, Appendix E-77 illustration of, 6-16 sorting options, 6-16 calibration statuses description of, 6-17 viewing, 6-29 calibration types c System 1-point adjustment, 6-6 c System 2-point adjustment, 6-7 c System blank adjustment, 6-6 c System description, 6-5 c System full, 6-5 i System adjust, 6-8 i System description, 6-8 i System full, 6-9 i System index, 6-9 calibrator concentration settings (c System) entering, 2-77 viewing, 2-102 calibrator curve information viewing the, 6-31 calibrator expiration date Assay options (Calibration order) window, 6-13
Index-13
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
entering a, 6-12 calibrator lot number Assay options (Calibration order) window, 6-13 entering the, 6-12 calibrator set (c System) configuring, 2-182 deleting, 2-120 viewing settings for, 2-186 calibrators (c System) description of, 1-129 illustration of, 1-130 calibrators (i System) description of, 1-142 illustration of, 1-143 calibrators (ICT - c System) description of, 1-131 illustration of, 1-132 calibrators troubleshooting c System, 10-7 i System, 10-8 Callibration status screen windows associated with, 6-18 canceling print job, 5-345 result transmission, 5-268 capacities bulk solutions, 4-7, , 4-8 c System, 4-7 i System, 4-8 LAS carousel, 4-9 sample handlers, 4-8 SCC, 4-6 card cage door c 16000 processing module, 1-28 c 8000 processing module, 1-26 i 2000 processing module, 1-72 i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-74 i 2000SR processing module, 1-76 carousel advance key c System processing module, 1-30 i System processing module keypad, 1-78 LAS carousel sample handler, 1-125
carousel diagnostics description c System, 10-665 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-680 carrier positioner (RSH) location of, 1-116 carrier transport (RSH) location of, 1-116 carrier trays (RSH) capacities, 1-148 description of, 1-148 illustration of, 1-148 location of, 1-118 cart (SCC) description of, 1-11 cartridges c System reagent, description, 1-128 c System reagent, illustration, 1-129 caution label, 8-20 caution symbol definition of messages, 1-17 CD drive is initializing archive message description, 5-271 CD-RW drive SCC standard component, 1-9 specifications for, 4-26 certification label, 8-20 change 1 mL syringes (c 16000) 6304 maintenance location, 9-203 change 1 mL syringes (c 8000) 6304 maintenance location, 9-125 change 1 mL syringes (c System) 6304 maintenance description, 9-32 change ICT asp check valve (c System) 6305 maintenance description, 9-33 change ICT module (c 16000) description and illustration, 9-194 change ICT module (c 8000) description and illustration, 9-116 change ICT module (c System) 6309 maintenance description, 9-42 change lamp (c 16000) description and illustration, 9-178
Index-14
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
change lamp (c 8000) description and illustration, 9-99 change lamp (c System) 1003 maintenance description, 9-29 change water bath (c System) 2134 maintenance description, 9-38 changing i System ARM wash buffer transfer option, 10-711 Levey-Jennings graph, 5-316 system administrator password, 1-23 changing assay configuration settings assay availability, 2-109 c System - photometric default calibration type, 2-118 c System default dilution setting (photometric), 2-117 c System last required read setting (photometric), 2-116 c System linearity range, 2-115 c System reagent-specific low alert setting, 2-121 correlation factor and intercept settings, 2-119 i System default dilution setting, 2-124 i System interpretation settings, 2-125 name of an assay, 2-108 normal and extreme ranges, 2-110 patient or QC panel, 2-111 changing QC-Cal settings default dilution for a single analyte control level, 2-190 multiconstituent control settings, 2-193 single analyte control settings, 2-188 Westgard rule settings, 2-197 changing system settings automatic report printing settings, 2-22 automatic repositioning for retest setting (RSH), 2-28 average number of tests per sample, 2-35 batch sample ordering type, 2-21 c 16000 onboard solution options, 2-34 c 8000 onboard solution options, 2-33 date and time settings, 2-27 i 2000SR STAT protocol percentage, 2-36 LAS serial port settings, 2-32
LAS timeout settings and reinitialize communications, 2-35 LIS serial port settings, 2-31 option for running controls, 2-37 printing flags option, 2-23 report header text, 2-24 result unit setting, 2-126 sample bar code settings for codabar, 2-28 sample bar code settings for code 39, 2-29 sample bar code settings for I 2 of 5, 2-30 screen timeout setting, 2-15 system language setting, 2-25 system low alert setting for reagent kits, 2-24 check 1 mL syringes (c 16000) 6024 maintenance illustration, 9-53 check 1 mL syringes (c 8000) 6024 maintenance illustration, 9-43 check 1 mL syringes (c System) 6024 maintenance description, 9-22 check clean HC waste sensor (c System) 6307 maintenance description, 9-34 check DI water purity (c System) 6028 maintenance description, 9-22 check dispense components (c System) 6016 maintenance description, 9-27 check HC waste pump tubing (c 8000) 6308 maintenance description, 9-46 6308 maintenance location, 9-46 check ICT probe and tubing (c 16000) 6019 maintenance illustration, 9-54 check ICT probe and tubing (c 8000) 6019 maintenance illustration, 9-44 check ICT probe and tubing (c System) 6019 maintenance description, 9-24 check ICT ref check valves (c System) 6306 maintenance description, 9-33 check syringes and valves (c 16000) 6026 maintenance location, 9-57 check syringes and valves (c 8000) 6026 maintenance location, 9-47 check syringes and valves (c System)
Index-15
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
6026 maintenance description, 9-28 check valve (c System), evaluating the, 10-701 check valves (c 16000) replacing the, 9-207 check valves (c 8000) replacing the, 9-130 check wash solution trays (c System) 6025 maintenance description, 9-28 check water bath temperature (c System) 3526 maintenance description, 9-40 checking system operation after installation, 2-2 chemical hazards precautions, 8-9 risk and safety numbers and phrases, 8-9 sodium azide, precautions for, 8-9 ci 8200 integrated system c 8000 processing module, 1-2 i 2000SR processing module, 1-2 illustration of, 1-3 RSH, 1-2 SCC, 1-2 ci integrated system description of, 1-2 clean cuvette washer nozzles (c System) 6018 maintenance description, 9-27 clean cuvettes - manually (c System) 6310 maintenance description, 9-42 clean cuvettes with detergent (c System) 6056 maintenance description, 9-26 clean ICT drain tip (c 16000) 6300 maintenance illustration, 9-58 clean ICT drain tip (c 8000) 6300 maintenance illustration, 9-48 clean ICT drain tip (c System) 6300 maintenance description, 9-28 clean mixers (c System) 6021 maintenance description, 9-25 clean reagent supply centers (c System) 6011 maintenance description, 9-29 clean sample carousel area (c System) 6013 maintenance description, 9-30
clean sample reagent probes (c System) 6023 maintenance description, 9-25 cleaning bar code reader window, 10-697 spills, 8-11 clearances c System processing module with LAS, 4-17 c System processing module with RSH, 4-16 i 2000 i 2000SR processing module with RSH, 4-17 i 2000 processing module with LAS, 4-18 i 2000 processing module with SSH, 4-18 i 2000SR processing module with LAS, 4-19 SCC, 4-16 CMIA (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of reader, 1-96 CMIA (i System) illustration of reader, 1-97 CMIA reaction sequence description of, 3-24 CMIA technology description of, 3-24 CNTL patient result flag description, 5-225 codes processing, 5-153 collecting specimens requirements, 7-8 color coding i 2000 i 2000SR reagent carousel, 1-85 comments, adding to a control result, 5-249 to a Levey-Jennings point, 5-320 to a patient result, 5-229 to an exception, 5-298 to an order, 5-157 Completed maintenance status description, 9-20 component replacement c 16000 processing center, 9-162 c 16000 supply and pump center, 9-202
Index-16
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
c 8000 processing center, 9-83 c 8000 supply and pump center, 9-124 general description, 9-83 i 2000 i 2000SR processing center, 9-240 i 2000 i 2000SR supply and waste center, 9-266 i System internal components' covers, 9-238 SCC, 9-274 components ARCHITECT System, 1-2 c 16000 System, 1-5 c 8000 System, 1-4 ci integrated system, 1-3 i 2000 System, 1-6 i 2000SR System, 1-7 optical system (c System), 3-5 optical system (i System), 3-28 computer and interface specifications, 4-26 computer hardware error codes descriptions of error codes 8000-8999, 10-440 Concentrated Wash Buffer (i System) ARM, location, 1-110 description of, 1-145 illustration of 1 L bottle, 1-146 replacing on the ARM, 5-55 configuration options bar code, Appendix E-155 Configuration screen - Assay settings Assay parameters view description, 2-65 Assay parameters view field descriptions, Appendix E-158 Assay parameters view illustration, 2-66 Assay parameters view, accessing the, 2-67 description of, 2-65 New assay view description, 2-67 New assay view field descriptions, Appendix E-158 New assay view illustration, 2-68 New assay view, accessing the, 2-68 procedures associated with, 2-70 windows associated with, 2-127 Configuration screen - QC-Cal settings
accessing the, 2-175 description of, 2-174 field descriptions, Appendix E-205 illustration of, 2-175 procedures associated with, 2-176 windows associated with, 2-198 Configuration screen - System settings accessing the, 2-5 description of, 2-4 field descriptions, Appendix E-134 illustration of, 2-5 procedures associated with, 2-6 Configuration screen -System settings windows associated with, 2-38 Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view (c System photometric) description of, 2-143 field descriptions, Appendix E-179 illustration of, 2-144 Configure assay parameters window Calibration - ICT view (c System) description of, 2-151 field descriptions, Appendix E-186 illustration of, 2-152 Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Intervals view (c System photometric) description of, 2-147 field descriptions, Appendix E-182 illustration of, 2-148 Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Validity checks view (c System - photometric) description of, 2-149 field descriptions, Appendix E-184 illustration of, 2-150 Configure assay parameters window Calibration - Volumes view (c System photometric) description of, 2-145 field descriptions, Appendix E-181 illustration of, 2-146 Configure assay parameters window Calibration view (i System) description of, 2-141
Index-17
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
field descriptions, Appendix E-178 illustration of, 2-142 Configure assay parameters window Dilution view (i System) description of, 2-153 field descriptions, Appendix E-188 illustration of, 2-154 Configure assay parameters window General - ICT view description of, 2-139 field descriptions, Appendix E-176 illustration of, 2-140 Configure assay parameters window General - Reaction definition view (c System - photometric) description of, 2-133 field descriptions, Appendix E-165 illustration of, 2-134 Configure assay parameters window General - Reagent Sample view (c System photometric) description of, 2-135 field descriptions, Appendix E-169 illustration of, 2-136 Configure assay parameters window General - Validity checks view (c System photometric) description of, 2-137 field descriptions, Appendix E-172 illustration of, 2-138 Configure assay parameters window General view (calculated) description of, 2-131 field descriptions, Appendix E-163 illustration of, 2-132 Configure assay parameters window General view (i System) description of, 2-129 field descriptions, Appendix E-161 illustration of, 2-130 Configure assay parameters window Interpretation view description of, 2-162 field descriptions, Appendix E-196 illustration of, 2-163
Configure assay parameters window Results view description of, 2-159 field descriptions, Appendix E-193 illustration of, 2-160 Configure assay parameters window SmartWash view (c System) description of, 2-155 field descriptions, Appendix E-190 illustration of, 2-156 Configure assay retest rules window description of, 2-170 field descriptions, Appendix E-201 illustration of, 2-171 Configure bar codes window description of, 2-62 field descriptions, Appendix E-153 illustration of, 2-63 Configure calibrator set window (c System) description of, 2-207 field descriptions, Appendix E-212 illustration of, 2-207 Configure host - release mode window description of, 2-40 field descriptions, Appendix E-137 illustration of, 2-41 Configure modules window (c 8000) field descriptions, Appendix E-147 illustration of, 2-51 Configure modules window (c System) description of, 2-50 Configure modules window (i 2000) description of, 2-52 field descriptions, Appendix E-148 illustration of, 2-53 Configure modules window (i 2000SR) description of, 2-54 field descriptions, Appendix E-149 illustration of, 2-55 Configure multiconstituent bar code SID window description of, 2-203 field descriptions, Appendix E-207 illustration of, 2-204 Configure multiconstituent control window
Index-18
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
description of, 2-200 illustration of, 2-201 Configure panel definitions window description of, 2-169 field descriptions, Appendix E-200 illustration of, 2-169 Configure password window description of, 2-47 field descriptions, Appendix E-144 illustration of, 2-48 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view description of, 2-164 field descriptions, Appendix E-197 illustration of, 2-164 Configure reagent (CC reagent settings) window - User-defined assay view description of, 2-165 field descriptions, Appendix E-198 illustration of, 2-166 Configure reagents - supplies window description of, 2-44 field descriptions, Appendix E-141 illustration of, 2-45 Configure reports printing window description of, 2-42 field descriptions, Appendix E-140 illustration of, 2-43 Configure result units window description of, 2-167 field descriptions, Appendix E-199 illustration of, 2-168 Configure results parameters window description of, 2-160 field descriptions, Appendix E-194 illustration of, 2-161 Configure sample handler window LAS-standard description, 2-59 LAS-standard illustration, 2-60 RSH illustration, 2-57 Configure sample handler window (LAS standard) field descriptions, Appendix E-152 Configure sample handler window (RSH) description of, 2-56
field descriptions, Appendix E-151 Configure sample ordering window description of, 2-39 field descriptions, Appendix E-135 illustration of, 2-39 Configure serial ports window description of, 2-64 field descriptions, Appendix E-156 illustration of, 2-64 Configure single analyte window description of, 2-198 field descriptions, Appendix E-206 illustration of, 2-199 Configure system control center window description of, 2-48 field descriptions, Appendix E-145 illustration of, 2-49 Configure Westgard window description of, 2-205 field descriptions, Appendix E-210 illustration of, 2-206 configuring system, 2-4 configuring Abbott assays c System calibration adjustment type and interval (photometric), 2-78 c System default dilution setting (photometric), 2-76 i System default dilution setting, 2-82 interpretation options (c System and calculated), 2-79 normal and extreme ranges, 2-71 patient and QC panels, 2-72 result units and decimal places, 2-75 retest rule, 2-73 Configuring QC-Cal settings Westgard rules, 2-181 configuring QC-Cal settings bar code for a single analyte control level, 2-178 c System calibrator set, 2-182 multiconstituent bar code SID, 2-180 new multiconstituent control, 2-179 new single analyte control, 2-176 configuring system settings
Index-19
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
host interface settings, 2-6 QC run definition, 2-8 report settings, 2-7 configuring user-defined assays c System SmartWash settings, 2-90 c System user-defined reagent (photometric), 2-93 c System user-defined reagent kit (photometric), 2-94, , 2-95 c System user-defined sample diluent (photometric), 2-92 photometric assay, 2-88 connectors bar code scanner, 1-10 com 1 port, 1-10 CPU, 1-10 ethernet, 1-10 i System ARM rear, 1-113 i System ARM top, 1-114 keyboard, 1-10 mouse, 1-10 printer, 1-10 video, 1-10 consumables ARCHITECT System, 1-126 ARCHITECT System inventory management, 5-31 bulk solutions, storing and using, 7-5 c System, 1-126 c System inventory management, 5-32 c System list numbers, Appendix D-2 i 2000 i 2000SR inventory management, 5-46 i System, 1-138 i System list numbers, Appendix D-3 inventory management description, 5-24 consumables troubleshooting c System, 10-5 i System, 10-7 contents tab description of online operations manual table of contents, System documentation-15 illustration of, System documentation-16
control level Levey-Jennings graph viewing, 5-328 Control order screen general description, 5-134 multiconstituent view (i2000SR LAS), field descriptions, Appendix E-33 multiconstituent view, accessing, 5-138 multiconstituent view, description, 5-137 multiconstituent view, field descriptions, Appendix E-32 multiconstituent view, illustration, 5-137, , 5-138 procedures associated with, 5-139 single analyte view (i2000SR LAS), field descriptions, Appendix E-31 single analyte view description, 5-135 single analyte view, accessing, 5-136 single analyte view, field descriptions, Appendix E-29 single analyte view, illustration, 5-135, , 5-136 windows associated with, 5-148 Control order window assay options - automated dilution view description, 5-149 assay options - automated dilution view illustration, 5-150 assay options - manual dilution view description, 5-149 assay options - manual dilution view illustration, 5-149 control orders multiconstituent (i2000SR LAS), creating, 5-146 multiconstituent, creating, 5-143 single analyte (i2000SR LAS), creating, 5-141 single analyte, creating, 5-139 viewing status of, 5-154 control results adding a comment to, 5-249 archiving released, 5-284 finding a specific, 5-247 releasing, 5-250 viewing all, 5-247 viewing details, 5-248
Index-20
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
control sample processing, 5-208 description, 5-208 control tests rerunning, 5-231 controller configuration (SCC) 6008 diagnostics description, 10-694 controls adding a lot to a single analyte control, 2-187 adding an assay to a multiconstituent control, 2-191 automated ordering, 5-111 changing multiconstituent, 2-193 changing single analyte, 2-188 changing the default dilution for a single analyte control, 2-190 creating order for multiconstituent, 5-143 creating order for multiconstituent (i2000SR LAS), 5-146 creating order for single analyte, 5-139 creating order for single analyte (i2000SR LAS), 5-141 multiconstituent, description, 1-141 multiconstituent, illustration, 1-142 single constituent, description, 1-141 single constituent, illustration, 1-141 controls troubleshooting c System, 10-7 i System, 10-8 conventions online documentation, System documentation-8 printed documentation, System documentation-4 corrective action procedures i System ARM, 10-710 LAS, 10-714 processing module, 10-697 sample handler, 10-708 SCC, 10-710 correlation factor and intercept settings (c System) changing, 2-119 viewing, 2-104 CPU
back panel description, 1-10 back panel illustration, 1-10 location of, 1-9 crash sensor test c System 5405 diagnostics description, 10-660 Create backup window description of, 2-213 field descriptions, Appendix E-213 illustration of, 2-213 creating calibration order, 6-12 control orders (multiconstituent i2000SR LAS), 5-146 control orders (multiconstituent), 5-143 control orders (single analyte), 5-139 control orders (single analyte) i2000SR LAS, 5-141 Levey-Jennings graph, 5-315 patient orders (batch, bar coded), 5-121 patient orders (batch, non-bar coded), 5-125 patient orders (single order), 5-118 system software backup, 2-212 curve shape adjustment method (i System) description of, Appendix C-21 customer maintenance kit LN 02J53-01 (c 8000 System) listing of components, Appendix D-6 customer maintenance kit LN 08K72-01 (c 16000 System) listing of components, Appendix D-9 cutoff assay data reduction methods (i System) description of, Appendix C-17 one-point qualitative (index formula), Appendix C-18 two-point qualitative (index formula), Appendix C-18 cuvette dry tip (c 16000) replacing the, 9-189 cuvette dry tip (c 8000) replacing the, 9-111 cuvette integrity test (c System) 1010 diagnostics description, 10-665
Index-21
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
cuvette segments (c 16000) description of, 1-60 illustration of, 1-61 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-59 replacing, 9-186 cuvette segments (c 8000) description of, 1-41 illustration of, 1-42 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-40 replacing, 9-108 cuvette wash pump (c 16000) illustration of, 9-203 location of, 1-66 cuvette wash pump (c 8000) illustration of, 9-125 location of, 1-68 cuvette washer (c 16000) description of, 1-62 illustration of, 1-63 location of, 9-163 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-59 cuvette washer (c 8000) description of, 1-43 illustration of, 1-44 location of, 9-84 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-40 cuvette washer (c System) cleaning nozzles, 9-27 cuvettes (c 16000) replacing, 9-183 cuvettes (c 8000) replacing, 9-104 cuvettes (c System) capacities, 4-7 cleaning manually, 9-42 cleaning with detergent, 9-26 washing, 9-40 cycling power processing module and or sample handler, 5-12 SCC, 5-5
D
D processing code description of, 5-153 daily maintenance c System 6070 maintenance description, 9-22 c System processing module, 9-21 i 2000 i 2000SR processing module, 9-63 daily maintenance (i System) 6041 maintenance description, 9-63 data reduction calculation description of (i System), 3-29 description of photometric, 3-6 description of potentiometric, 3-12 data reduction methods c System photometric, Appendix C-2 c System potentiometric, Appendix C-8 i System 4PLC, Appendix C-15 i System cutoff assay, Appendix C-17 i System linear regression, Appendix C-13 i System point to point calibration, Appendix C-13 data storage capacities message history log, 4-6 printer spool, 4-6 QC results, 4-6 reagent kits, 4-6 released results, 4-6 temporary messages, 4-6 unreleased results, 4-6 date and time settings changing, 2-27 viewing, 2-15 decontamination, 8-13 SCC, external, 9-82 decontamination key i System ARM, 1-112 decontamination port 1 i System ARM, 1-113 default calibration ordering type (c System photometric) changing, 2-118 viewing, 2-102
Index-22
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
default dilution settings c System changing photometric, 2-117 c System configuring photometric, 2-76 c System viewing photometric, 2-101 i System changing, 2-124 i System configuring, 2-82 i System viewing, 2-106 Define data window description of, 2-201 field descriptions, Appendix E-208 illustration of, 2-202 deleting assay file, 2-214 c System calibrator set (photometric), 2-120 c System reagent, 2-122 c System reagent kit, 2-123 exception, 5-299 maintenance or diagnostic procedure file, 2-218 multiconstituent bar code SID, 2-195 multiconstituent control level, 2-196 patient or QC panel, 2-111 patient result, 5-233 print job, 5-345 retest rule, 2-114 single analyte control level, 2-189 stored patient result, 5-269 temporary messages, 10-15 test from a patient order, 5-158 test from a rerun order, 5-261 description of, 8-19, , 8-21 descriptive elements Maintenance log screen, 9-15 Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Calibrators view (c System photometric) description of, 2-144 field descriptions, Appendix E-180 illustration of, 2-145 Details for assay parameters window Calibration - ICT view (c System) description of, 2-152 field descriptions, Appendix E-187 illustration of, 2-153 Details for assay parameters window -
Calibration - Intervals view (c System photometric) description of, 2-148 field descriptions, Appendix E-183 illustration of, 2-149 Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Validity checks view (c System - photometric) description of, 2-150 field descriptions, Appendix E-185 illustration of, 2-151 Details for assay parameters window Calibration - Volumes view (c System photometric) description of, 2-146 field descriptions, Appendix E-182 illustration of, 2-147 Details for assay parameters window Calibration view (i System) description of, 2-142 field descriptions, Appendix E-178 illustration of, 2-143 Details for assay parameters window Dilution view (i System) description of, 2-154 field descriptions, Appendix E-189 illustration of, 2-155 Details for assay parameters window General - ICT view description of, 2-140 field descriptions, Appendix E-177 illustration of, 2-141 Details for assay parameters window General - Reaction definition view (c System - photometric) description of, 2-134 field descriptions, Appendix E-168 illustration of, 2-135 Details for assay parameters window General - Reagent Sample view (c System photometric) description of, 2-136 field descriptions, Appendix E-171 illustration of, 2-137 Details for assay parameters window General - Validity checks view (c System -
Index-23
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
photometric) description of, 2-138 field descriptions, Appendix E-175 illustration of, 2-139 Details for assay parameters window General view (calculated) description of, 2-132 field descriptions, Appendix E-164 illustration of, 2-133 Details for assay parameters window General view (i System) description of, 2-130 field descriptions, Appendix E-162 illustration of, 2-131 Details for assay parameters window Interpretation view description of, 2-163 field descriptions, Appendix E-196 illustration of, 2-164 Details for assay parameters window Results view description of, 2-161 field descriptions, Appendix E-195 illustration of, 2-162 Details for assay parameters window SmartWash view (c System) description of, 2-158 field descriptions, Appendix E-192 illustration of, 2-159 Details for assay retest rules window description of, 2-173 field descriptions, Appendix E-204 illustration of, 2-174 Details for bar codes window description of, 2-63 field descriptions, Appendix E-155 illustration of, 2-64 Details for batch window description of, 5-133 field descriptions, Appendix E-29 illustration of, 5-134 Details for calibrator set window (c System) description of, 2-208 field descriptions, Appendix E-212 illustration of, 2-208
Details for exceptions window - Calculated view description of, 5-304 field descriptions, Appendix E-103, , Appendix E-106 illustration of, 5-305 Details for exceptions window - Calibrator view description of, 5-307 field descriptions, Appendix E-107 illustration of, 5-308 Details for exceptions window - Control view description of, 5-305, , 5-306 field descriptions, Appendix E-104 illustration of, 5-306, , 5-307 Details for exceptions window - Data view (c System) description of, 5-301 field descriptions, Appendix E-99 illustration of, 5-302 Details for exceptions window - Photometric - graph view (c System) description of, 5-302 field descriptions, Appendix E-100 illustration of, 5-303 Details for exceptions window (i System) description of, 5-303 field descriptions, Appendix E-102 illustration of, 5-304 Details for host - release mode window description of, 2-41 field descriptions, Appendix E-139 illustration of, 2-42 Details for maintenance item window description of, 9-13 field descriptions, Appendix E-129 illustration of, 9-14 Details for maintenance log screen field descriptions, Appendix E-131 Details for maintenance log window description of, 9-19 illustration of, 9-19 Details for modules window (c 8000) field descriptions, Appendix E-148
Index-24
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
illustration of, 2-52 Details for modules window (c System) description of, 2-51 Details for modules window (i 2000) description of, 2-53 field descriptions, Appendix E-149 illustration of, 2-54 Details for modules window (i 2000SR) description of, 2-55 field descriptions, Appendix E-150 illustration of, 2-56 Details for multiconstituent bar code SID window description of, 2-204 field descriptions, Appendix E-209 illustration of, 2-205 Details for multiconstituent control window description of, 2-202 illustration of, 2-203 Details for order (Order status Rerun status) window - Single order view description of, 5-159 field descriptions, Appendix E-37 illustration of, 5-160 Details for order (Order status) window Batch (bar coded) view description of, 5-160 field descriptions, Appendix E-39 illustration of, 5-161 Details for order (Order status) window Batch (non-bar coded) view description of, 5-161 field descriptions, Appendix E-40 illustration of, 5-162 Details for panel definitions window description of, 2-169 field descriptions, Appendix E-201 illustration of, 2-170 Details for password window description of, 2-48 field descriptions, Appendix E-144 illustration of, 2-48 Details for QC result (QC result review) Data view (c System) field descriptions, Appendix E-67
Details for QC result (QC result review) Photometric - graph view (c System) field descriptions, Appendix E-68 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Data view (c System) description of, 5-252 illustration of, 5-253 Details for QC result (QC result review) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) description of, 5-253 illustration of, 5-254 Details for QC result (QC result review) window (i System) description of, 5-254, , 5-255 field descriptions, Appendix E-70, , Appendix E-71 illustration of, 5-255, , 5-256 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Data view (c System) description of, 5-287 field descriptions, Appendix E-88 illustration of, 5-288 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window - Photometric - graph view (c System) description of, 5-288 field descriptions, Appendix E-90 illustration of, 5-289 Details for QC result (Stored QC results) window (i System) description of, 5-289, , 5-290 field descriptions, Appendix E-91, , Appendix E-92 illustration of, 5-290, , 5-291 Details for QC summary window description of, 5-329 field descriptions, Appendix E-96 illustration of, 5-330 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings) window - Abbott assay view description of, 2-165 field descriptions, Appendix E-197 illustration of, 2-165 Details for reagent (CC reagent settings)
Index-25
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
window - User-defined assay view description of, 2-166 field descriptions, Appendix E-199 illustration of, 2-167 Details for reagent (history) window description of, 5-77 field descriptions, Appendix E-117 illustration of, 5-78 Details for reagent (Reagent status) window description of, 5-71 field descriptions, Appendix E-113 illustration of, 5-72 Details for reagents - supplies window description of, 2-46 field descriptions, Appendix E-143 illustration of, 2-46 Details for reports printing window description of, 2-43 field descriptions, Appendix E-140 illustration of, 2-44 Details for result (Results review) window Calculated view description of, 5-236 field descriptions, Appendix E-44 illustration of, 5-237 Details for result (Results review) window Data view (c System) description of, 5-237 field descriptions, Appendix E-45 illustration of, 5-238 Details for result (Results review) window Photometric - graph view (c System) description of, 5-238 field descriptions, Appendix E-47 illustration of, 5-239 Details for result (Results review) window Sample interference index view (c System) description of, 5-239 field descriptions, Appendix E-48 illustration of, 5-240 Details for result (Results review) window (i System) description of, 5-240 field descriptions, Appendix E-50 illustration of, 5-241
Details for result (Stored results) window Calculated view description of, 5-273 field descriptions, Appendix E-54 illustration of, 5-273 Details for result (Stored results) window Data view (c System) description of, 5-273 field descriptions, Appendix E-56 illustration of, 5-274 Details for result (Stored results) window Photometric - graph view (c System) description of, 5-274 illustration of, 5-275 Details for result (Stored results) window Sample interference index view (c System) description of, 5-275 field descriptions, Appendix E-59 illustration of, 5-276 Details for result (Stored results) window (i System) description of, 5-276 field descriptions, Appendix E-61 illustration of, 5-277 Details for result units window description of, 2-168 field descriptions, Appendix E-200 illustration of, 2-168 Details for sample handler window (LAS Hitachi) description of, 2-61 field descriptions, Appendix E-153 illustration of, 2-62 Details for sample handler window (LAS standard) description of, 2-60 field descriptions, Appendix E-152 illustration of, 2-61 Details for sample handler window (RSH) description of, 2-57 field descriptions, Appendix E-151 illustration of, 2-58 Details for sample handler window (SSH) description of, 2-58 field descriptions, Appendix E-152
Index-26
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
illustration of, 2-59 Details for sample ordering window description of, 2-39 field descriptions, Appendix E-136 illustration of, 2-40 Details for sample window description of, 5-133 field descriptions, Appendix E-28 illustration of, 5-133 Details for sample windowDetails for result (Stored results) window - Photometric graph view (c System) field descriptions, Appendix E-58 Details for serial ports window description of, 2-65 field descriptions, Appendix E-157 illustration of, 2-65 Details for single analyte window description of, 2-199 field descriptions, Appendix E-206 illustration of, 2-200 Details for system control center window description of, 2-49 field descriptions, Appendix E-146 illustration of, 2-50 Details for Westgard window description of, 2-206 field descriptions, Appendix E-211 illustration of, 2-207 detection technology c System, 4-2 i System, 4-2 Detergent A (c 16000) replacing onboard solutions in reagent supply centers, 5-41 Detergent A (c 8000) replacing onboard solutions in reagent supply centers, 5-39 Detergent A (c System) preparing, 5-37 replacing onboard solutions in sample carousel, 5-44 Detergent B (c 16000) replacing onboard solutions in reagent
supply centers, 5-41 Detergent B (c 8000) replacing onboard solutions in reagent supply centers, 5-39 Detergent B (c System) preparing 10% solution, 5-38 Detergent B probe wash (c System) 6055 maintenance description, 9-41 DI water (c System) check purity, 9-22 diagnostic categories c System, 10-658 description of, 10-657 LAS carousel sample handler, 10-691 SCC, 10-693 SSH, 10-688 Diagnostic perform window description of, 10-655 field descriptions, Appendix E-132 illustration of, 10-656 diagnostic procedures installing or deleting, 2-218 Diagnostics screen accessing the, 10-651 description of, 10-650 field descriptions, Appendix E-131 illustration of, 10-651 procedures associated with, 10-652 windows associated with, 10-655 diagnostics, system description of, 10-650 diluted wash buffer outlet i System ARM, 1-113 dimensions i System ARM, 4-37 i System biohazard bag, 4-8 processing modules, 4-9 SCC, 4-9 disabling or enabling the ICT module (c System) procedure for, 10-700 Disk is read-only archive message, 5-271 dispensing volume specifications
Index-27
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
i System, 4-6 display area c System processing module keypad, 1-30 displaying favorite topic in online operations manual, System documentation-40 value for a Levey-Jennings point, 5-318 disposing of waste, 8-12 diverter test (i System) 3150 diagnostics description, 10-669 double load queue lane defaults (i System) description of, 5-196 downloading host computer, 5-110
(potentiometric - c System) calculation, Appendix C-9 description of, Appendix C-9 electronic media list numbers, Appendix D-13 emergency shutdown multi-module, 5-22 single module, 5-21 emission measurement CMIA optical system, 3-27 Empty reagent status description, 5-70 emptying c System high-concentration waste bottle, 5-41, , 5-45 enabling or disabling the ICT module (c System) procedure for, 10-700 end-point assay description of, 3-3 example of reaction curve, 3-3 entering c System calibrator concentration, 2-77 environmental specifications and requirements ARCHITECT System, 4-26 ARM, 4-39 error codes assay specific (1000-1999), 10-113 bar code reader (4000-4999), 10-311 computer hardware (8000-8999), 10-440 general (0001-0999), 10-17 level sense (3000-3999), 10-230 maintenance (2000-2999), 10-181 optics (6000-6999), 10-411 robotic and sensor (5000-5999), 10-333 software (9000-9999), 10-477 temperature (7000-7999), 10-420 error messages viewing low level, 10-14 ethernet connectors location of, 1-10 evaluating the check valve (c System) procedure for, 10-701
E
E1 and E2 onboard solution areas (c 8000) description of, 1-38 EDIT c System result flag description, 5-225 Edit result window (c System) illustration of, 5-242 electrical precautions, 8-15 electrical requirements troubleshooting, 10-9 electrical safety parameters ARCHITECT System, 4-22 ARM, 4-38 electrical specifications c System processing module with sample handler, 4-20 i System processing module with sample handler, 4-21 SCC, 4-20 electrode (mV) response curve (potentiometric - c System) during calibration, illustration, Appendix C-11 during sample measurement, illustration, Appendix C-12 electromotive force measurement
Index-28
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
examples icons, 1-14 menu, 1-14 message, 1-17 prompt, 1-17 reagent syringe (R1 or R2), 1-88 reagent wash station (R1 or R2), 1-89 sample or STAT syringe, 1-83 sample or STAT wash station, 1-84 screen, 1-13 window, 1-16 Exception test status description, 5-153 Exception Details Report illustration of, Appendix A-39 exception management description of, 5-293 Exception Status Report illustration of, Appendix A-42 Exception status screen accessing, 5-295 adding a comment to an exception, 5-298 description of, 5-293 field descriptions, Appendix E-97 illustration of, 5-294 procedures associated with, 5-295 sorting options, 5-294 windows associated with, 5-300 exceptions adding a comment to, 5-298 deleting, 5-299 finding a specific, 5-296 rerunning, 5-231 transmitting to the host, 5-299 viewing all, 5-296 viewing details, 5-297 Exceptions icon description of, Appendix E-4 exceptions status button description of, 1-18 excluding Levey-Jennings point, 5-318 EXP quality control result flag description,
5-246 result flag description, 5-225 EXPC c System quality control result flag description, 5-246 c System result flag description, 5-225 Expired calibration status (c System), 6-18 reagent status description, 5-70 Export assay window description of, 2-70 field descriptions, Appendix E-160 export status messages descriptions of, Appendix E-161 exporting c System assay file, 2-216 exposure, 8-19, , 8-21 mechanical components, 8-17 to biohazardous or potentially infectious materials, 8-7 exposure to, 8-21 external decontamination (SCC) 6038 maintenance description, 9-82 external modem (SCC) description of, 1-11 external waste pump clearances, 4-25 dimensions, 4-24 electrical specifications and requirements, 4-25 weight, 4-24 Extra Bottle reagent status description, 5-70
F
factor assay view - Calibration curve window (c System) description of, 6-19 factor data reduction method (photometric c System) description of, Appendix C-2 Failed maintenance status description, 9-20 failed calibration curve
Index-29
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
storage, 6-10 failed calibration status description of, 6-18 verification by system, 6-15 failing calibration curve, 6-32 favorite topics adding or removing a favorite topic from online favorites list, System documentation-44 favorites tab description, System documentation-20 favorites tab illustration, System documentation-20 field descriptions general description, Appendix E-15 file options reference, 3-21 files common test, 3-21 extra test, 3-21 filter c 16000 ICT reference solution, replacing, 9-212 c 16000 wash solution, replacing, 9-214 c 8000 ICT reference solution, replacing, 9-134 c 8000 wash solution, replacing, 9-136 Find options (Calibration history) window description of, 6-27 illustration of, 6-28 Find options (Calibration status and Calibration history) window field descriptions, Appendix E-77 Find options (Calibration status) window description of, 6-19 illustration of, 6-19 Find options (Exception status) window description of, 5-300 field descriptions, Appendix E-98 illustration of, 5-301 Find options (Order status Rerun status) window description of, 5-158
field descriptions, Appendix E-36 illustration of, 5-159 Find options (QC result review) window description of, 5-251 field descriptions, Appendix E-66 illustration of, 5-252 Find options (QC summary review) window description of, 5-328 illustration of, 5-329 Find options (QC summary) window field descriptions, Appendix E-95 Find options (Reagent status - View all) window description of, 5-74 field descriptions, Appendix E-115 illustration of, 5-75 Find options (Reagent status) window description of, 5-73 field descriptions, Appendix E-115 illustration of, 5-74 Find options (Results review) window description of, 5-235 field descriptions, Appendix E-43 illustration of, 5-236 Find options (Sample status) window description of, 5-168 field descriptions, Appendix E-21 illustration of, 5-168 Find options (Stored QC results) window description of, 5-286 field descriptions, Appendix E-87 illustration of, 5-287 Find options (Stored results) window description of, 5-272 field descriptions, Appendix E-53 illustration of, 5-272 Find options (System logs) window description of, 10-15 illustration of, 10-16 finding a specific calibration, 6-30 control result, 5-247 exception, 5-296 message, 10-13 patient result, 5-227
Index-30
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
reagent, 5-81 sample, 5-166 stored control result, 5-282 stored patient result, 5-265 summary for specific QC data, 5-326 test order, 5-155 flags patient result, 5-225 quality control result, 5-245 FLEX c System quality control result flag, 5-246 c System result flag, 5-225 flexible protocols (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 3-29 float switch cable (c 16000) replacing the, 9-236 float switch cable (c 8000) replacing the, 9-160 flood indicator i System ARM, 1-112 floppy drive SCC standard component, 1-9 specifications, 4-26 fluidic wash diagnostics description c System, 10-660 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-671 fluidics and electronic bay - ARM (i System) location of, 1-110 fluidics subsystems troubleshooting c System, 10-4 i System, 10-6 flush bulk solutions (c System) 2155 maintenance description, 9-39 flush fluids (i System) 2130 maintenance description, 9-69 flush ICT cup (c System) 2131 maintenance description, 9-38 flush ICT module (c System) 6063 maintenance description, 9-41 flush to drain key i System ARM, 1-112 flush water lines (c System)
2132 maintenance description, 9-38 flushing i System ARM, 10-711 front processing center cover c 16000 processing module, 1-28 c 8000 processing module, 1-26 i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-74 i 2000 processing module - SSH, 1-72 i 2000SR processing module, 1-76 full assay view - Calibration curve window (i System) description of, 6-24 illustration of, 6-25 full calibration c System description, 6-5 i System description, 6-9 function bar buttons description of, 1-14 illustration of, 1-15 functional sensitivity - method 1 (serial dilution) data sheet, Appendix B-12 data sheet example, Appendix B-13 description of, Appendix B-11 fuse motor diagnostics description i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-678 RSH, 10-687 SSH, 10-690 fuse status (i System) 5700 diagnostics description, 10-679
G
gauge label (sample) description of, 5-174 illustration of LAS sample carousel, 5-175 illustration of sample carrier, 5-175 general error codes descriptions of error codes 0001-0999, 10-17 general operator user log on, 1-22 glossary procedure for using, System
Index-31
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
documentation-38 graph elements (Levey-Jennings graph screen) description of, 5-313 graphical symbols i System assay technology, 3-25 GUI (graphical user interface) description of, 1-11 guidelines for calibration description of, 6-2
result flag description, 5-226 high outlet pressure indicator i System ARM, 1-112 high-concentration waste bottle (c 16000) replacing the, 9-234 high-concentration waste bottle (c 8000) replacing the, 9-158 high-concentration waste bottle (c System) c System capacities, 4-7 c System description, 1-70 emptying, 5-41 high-concentration waste pump (c 16000) location in supply and waste center, 9-203 high-concentration waste pump (c 8000) checking tubing (illustration), 9-46 location in pump center, 1-68 location in supply and waste center, 9-125 high-concentration waste sensor (c System) checking cleaning, 9-34 hopper assembly (i System) location of, 1-90 hopper level sensor test (i System) 3135 diagnostics description, 10-669 host configuring interface settings, 2-6 downloading from host computer to SCC, 5-110 interface specifications, 4-27 transmitting exceptions to the, 5-299 viewing communication settings, 2-11 host interface components troubleshooting, 10-10 host order query description of, 5-111 hot objects, 8-21 humidity requirements ARCHITECT System, 4-26
H
hard drive specifications, 4-26 hardware troubleshooting c System, 10-5 i System, 10-6 hazards, 8-19, , 8-21 chemical, 8-9 electrical, 8-15 mechanical, 8-17 sodium azide in drains, 8-9 symbols, description of, 8-6 hazards, description of, 8-21 heavy objects, 8-21 help button location of, 1-12 Help? accessing error message, illustration, System documentation-8 accessing Help?, System documentation-28 accessing online, System documentation-28 accessing screen or window, illustration, System documentation-7 window example, System documentation-12 hemolysis measurement of, 3-22 protocol, description of, 3-21 HH result flag description, 5-225 HIGH
I
i 2000 i 2000SR internal components' covers replacement, 9-238
Index-32
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
processing center component replacement, 9-240 supply and waste center component replacement, 9-266 i 2000 i 2000SR component replacement procedures buffer filter, replacing the, 9-272 buffer level sensor, replacing the, 9-269 pre-trigger or trigger level sensor, replacing the, 9-267 sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes, replacing the, 9-240 sample, reagent, or STAT probe tubing, replacing the, 9-244 wash zone probe, replacing the, 9-248 wash zone temperature tubing and sensor, replacing the, 9-255 waste arm probe tubing, replacing the, 9-264 i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler card cage door, 1-74 front processing center cover, 1-74 illustration of front view, 1-74 illustration of rear view, 1-75 power supply panel, 1-75 processing module keypad, 1-74 pump bay panel, 1-75 rear processing center access panel, 1-75 rear processing center cover, 1-75 sample pipettor cover, 1-74 supply and waste center door, 1-74 i 2000 processing module - SSH card cage door, 1-72 front processing center cover, 1-72 illustration of front view, 1-72 illustration of rear view, 1-73 keypad, 1-72 power supply panel, 1-73 pump bay panel, 1-73 rear processing center access panel, 1-73 rear processing center cover, 1-73 supply and waste center door, 1-72 i 2000SR processing module - RSH card cage door, 1-76 description, 1-75 front processing center cover, 1-76
illustration of front view, 1-76 illustration of rear view, 1-77 power supply panel, 1-77 processing module keypad, 1-76 pump bay panel, 1-77 rear processing center access panel, 1-77 rear processing center cover, 1-77 supply and waste center door, 1-76 i 2000SR System description of, 1-6 illustration of, 1-7 i System description of, 1-5 illustration of, 1-6 internal components covers illustration, 9-239 optional components, 1-109 processing modules, 1-71 i System calibration types adjust, 6-8 full, 6-9 index, 6-9 IA-MCC (multiconstituent control - i System) description of, 1-141 icons description of, 1-14 example of, 1-14 Exceptions, Appendix E-4 Orders, Appendix E-2 Overview, Appendix E-2 QC-Cal, Appendix E-4 Reagents, Appendix E-5 Results, Appendix E-3 Supplies, Appendix E-5 System, Appendix E-5 icons and menus description of, Appendix E-2 ICT (c System) washing with cleaning fluid, 9-41 ICT asp check valve (c System) changing, 9-33 ICT aspiration pump (c 16000) location in pump center, 1-68 location in supply and pump center,
Index-33
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
9-203 ICT aspiration pump (c 8000) location in supply and pump center, 9-125 ICT calibrators (c System) description of, 1-131 illustration of, 1-132 ICT Cleaning Fluid (c System) description of, 1-132 illustration of, 1-132 procedure for preparing, 9-23 ICT cup (c System) flushing, 9-38 ICT drain tip (c 16000) cleaning (illustration), 9-58 ICT drain tip (c 8000) cleaning (illustration), 9-48 ICT drain tip (c System) cleaning, 9-28 ICT measurement description of, 3-7 ICT module illustration of internal components, 3-12 ICT module (c 16000) replacing, 9-194 ICT module (c 8000) replacing, 9-116 ICT module (c System) changing, 9-42 description of, 1-130 enabling or disabling the, 10-700 flushing, 9-41 illustration of, 1-131 warranty, 1-130 ICT probe (c 16000) location of, 1-64 replacing, 9-194 ICT probe (c 8000) location of, 1-45 replacing, 9-116 ICT probe and tubing (c 16000) checking (illustration), 9-54 ICT probe and tubing (c 8000)
checking (illustration), 9-44 ICT probe and tubing (c System) checking (maintenance description), 9-24 ICT ref check valves (c System) checking, 9-33 ICT reference pump (c 16000) location of, 9-203 ICT reference pump (c 8000) location of, 9-125 ICT reference solution (c 16000) bulk solution supply center illustration, 1-69 pump, 1-68 replacing the filter, 9-212 ICT reference solution (c 8000) bulk solution supply center illustration, 1-49 replacing the filter, 9-134 ICT reference solution (c System) description of, 1-133 illustration of, 1-134 replacing, 5-33 updating supply status, 5-33 ICT reference solution delivery description of sequence, 3-8 illustration of, 3-8 ICT sample delivery description of sequence, 3-10 illustration of, 3-10 ICT unit (c 16000) description of, 1-63 illustration of, 1-64 location of, 9-163 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-59 ICT unit (c 8000) description of, 1-44 illustration of, 1-45 location of, 9-84 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-40 icterus measurement of, 3-22
Index-34
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
protocol, description of, 3-21 ideal slope (ICT) description of, 6-4 Import assay window description of, 2-69 field descriptions, Appendix E-158 import status messages descriptions of, Appendix E-159 importing c System assay file, 2-215 In Process calibration status description, 6-18 test status description, 5-153 inactive calibration status description of, 6-18 verification by system, 6-15 including Levey-Jennings points, 5-318 index online operations manual, description of tab, System documentation-18 procedure for using in online operations manual, System documentation-31 index assay view - Calibration curve window (i System) description of, 6-23 illustration of, 6-24 index calibration i System description, 6-9 indicators buffer quality error, 1-112 flood, 1-112 high outlet pressure, 1-112 inventory level, 1-112 low inlet pressure, 1-112 sample carousel, 1-33, , 1-53 status - RSH, 1-117 water quality error, 1-112 water temperature, 1-112 information area (screen) location of, 1-13 information symbol (messages) example of, 1-17 initializing
i System ARM, 5-20 initiating c System sample carousel sample processing, 5-188 i System ARM wash buffer transfer, 5-60 LAS carousel sample handler sample processing, 5-207 RSH and SSH sample processing, 5-206 sample processing, description, 5-205 inlet assembly (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-105 inlet assembly (i System) illustration of, 1-106 install delete assays (SCC) 6114 diagnostics description, 10-695 install delete procedures (SCC) 6115 diagnostics description, 10-695 installing assay file, 2-214 maintenance or diagnostic procedure file, 2-218 system, 2-2 system software, 2-209 instructions box (maintenance) description of, 9-6 Insufficient disk space for archive archive message, 5-271 integrated chip technology description of, 3-7 interlock sensors test c System 3400 diagnostics description, 10-663 i System 3400 diagnostics description, 10-677 internal components covers (i System) illustration, 9-239 internal components' covers (i 2000 i 2000SR) description, 9-238 interpretation options (c System and calculated) configuring, 2-79 interpretation settings changing, 2-125
Index-35
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
inventory level indicator i System ARM, 1-112 inventory management (consumables) c System procedures, 5-32 description of, 5-24 i 2000 i 2000SR procedures, 5-46 inventory management (reagent) ARCHITECT System procedures, 5-79 c System procedures, 5-84 i 2000 i 2000SR procedures, 5-102
i System processing module keypad illustration, 1-78 labels c System reagent, description, 1-127 c System reagent, illustration, 1-128 i System reagent, description, 1-139 i System reagent, illustration, 1-140 sample bar code label guidelines, 4-33 lamp (c 16000) description of, 1-61 illustration of, 1-61 location of, 9-163 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-59 replacing the, 9-178 lamp (c 8000) description of, 1-42 illustration of, 1-42 location of, 9-84 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-40 replacing the, 9-99 lamp (c System) change, 9-29 lamp plate (c 16000) replacing the, 9-178 lamp plate (c 8000) replacing the, 9-99 lane defaults i System double load queue, 5-196 language setting viewing, 2-14 LAS carousel bar code calibration 3225 diagnostics description, 10-692 LAS carousel bar code test 3255 diagnostics description, 10-692 LAS carousel cleaning 6022 maintenance description, 9-81 LAS carousel sample handler capacities, 4-9 carousel cover, 1-124 description of, 1-123 diagnostic categories, 10-691 illustration of, 1-124
K
keyboard function button equivalents, 1-14 icon equivalents, 1-14 location of, 1-9 replacing the, 9-275 specifications, 4-27 keypad test c System 3720 diagnostics description, 10-662 i System 3700 diagnostics description, 10-676 RSH 3710 diagnostics description, 10-686 SSH 3710 diagnostics description, 10-690 keypads c System processing module, description, 1-29 c System processing module, illustration, 1-30 i 2000 i 2000SR processing module, description, 1-77 i System ARM, description, 1-111 i System processing module, illustration, 1-78 LAS carousel sample handler, illustration, 1-125 RSH, description, 1-120 RSH, illustration, 1-120 SSH, description, 1-122 SSH, illustration, 1-123
L
L1, L2, L3, L4 keys c System processing module keypad illustration, 1-30
Index-36
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
initiating or resuming sample processing, 5-207 keypad description, 1-124 keypad illustration, 1-125 loading samples and the carousel, 5-203 maintenance categories, 9-80 pausing the, 5-18 status types, 1-159 LAS communications verifying, 10-714 LAS corrective action procedure description of, 10-714 LAS pipettor calibration 1118 maintenance description, 9-81 LAS sample carousel description of, 1-148 illustration of, 1-149 LAS sample handler sample processing (i System) description of, 5-213 illustration of, 5-214 LAS serial port settings changing, 2-32 viewing, 2-17 LAS status button description of, 1-18 field descriptions, Appendix E-19 LAS timeout settings changing, 2-35 viewing, 2-19 laser, 8-19, , 8-20 laser light, 8-19 last required read setting (c System photometric) changing, 2-116 viewing, 2-105 level sense (i System ARM) calibrating, 10-712 level sense error codes descriptions of error codes 3000-3999, 10-230 level sensors test (i System) 3410 diagnostics description, 10-677 Levey - Jennings Report
illustration of, Appendix A-44 Levey-Jennings graph changing, 5-316 creating, 5-315 Levey-Jennings graph screen description of, 5-312 field descriptions, Appendix E-73 graph elements, 5-313 illustration of, 5-312 procedures associated with, 5-314 statistical data elements, 5-313 windows associated with, 5-321 Levey-Jennings points adding a comment to, 5-320 displaying the value for, 5-318 excluding or including, 5-318 viewing details, 5-319 Levey-Jennings Report printing the, 5-337 lifting heavy objects hazard, 8-21 light, exposure to, 8-19 linear assay view - Calibration curve window (c System) description of, 6-19 illustration of, 6-20 linear calibration curve - six calibrators (photometric - c System) illustration of, Appendix C-3 linear data reduction method (photometric c System) description of, Appendix C-3 linear regression data reduction method (i System) description of, Appendix C-13 illustration of, Appendix C-14 linear transformation adjustment method (i System) description of, Appendix C-20 linearity ranges changing, 2-115 viewing settings, 2-103 lipemia measurement of, 3-22 protocol, description of, 3-21
Index-37
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
liquid waste arm (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-97 liquid waste arm (i System) illustration of, 1-98 liquid waste output specifications (i System) description of, 4-6 LIS serial port settings changing, 2-31 viewing, 2-17 LIS status button description of, 1-18 field descriptions, Appendix E-19 list numbers accessories, Appendix D-12 c 16000 System accessory kit 2 LN 02K10-01, Appendix D-9 c 16000 System accessory kit LN 08L71-01, Appendix D-7 c 16000 System customer maintenance kit LN 02J53-01, Appendix D-9 c 8000 System accessory 1 kit LN 01G09-02, Appendix D-4 c 8000 System customer maintenance kit LN 02J53-01, Appendix D-6 c System accessory kit description, Appendix D-4 c System consumables, Appendix D-2 c System System accessory kit 2 LN 02K10-01, Appendix D-6 electronic media, Appendix D-13 i 16000 System accessory kit, Appendix D-7 i 2000 accessory kit LN 08C94-01, Appendix D-10 i 2000SR accessory kit LN 03M77-01, Appendix D-10 i System accessory kit, Appendix D-10 i System consumables, Appendix D-3 manuals, Appendix D-14 processing module, Appendix D-18 sample handler kit, Appendix D-17 SCC components, Appendix D-15 LL result flag description, 5-225 LLS Error reagent status description, 5-70
LLS test (i System) 3600 diagnostics description, 10-672 load diverter (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-91 load diverter (i System) illustration of, 1-91 location of, 1-90 Load Error reagent status description, 5-70 load queue cleaning (SSH) 6010 maintenance description, 9-79 loading reagents c System bar coded, 5-85 c System non-bar coded, 5-91 i 2000 i 2000SR, 5-106 loading sample diluents (c System) procedure for, 5-88 loading samples (c System - sample carousel) description of, 5-188 procedure for, 5-188 loading samples (RSH) bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-183 non-bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-185 priority processing, 5-181 routine processing, 5-179 sample carriers, 5-176 loading samples (SSH) bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-198 non-bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-201 priority processing, 5-197 routine processing, 5-194 sample carriers, 5-192 loading samples and the carousel (LAS carousel sample handler) procedure for, 5-203 log off procedure, 1-24 log on description of user, 1-21 procedure (general operator), 1-22
Index-38
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
procedure (system administrator), 1-23 window description, 1-21 window illustration (system administrator), 1-21 Log on window field descriptions, Appendix E-19 log utilities (SCC) 6009 diagnostics description, 10-694 Logit-4 calibration curve - three to six calibrators (photometric - c System) illustration of, Appendix C-5 Logit-4 data reduction method (photometric - c System) description of, Appendix C-5 long-term shutdown (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 5-23 long-term shutdown (i System) 2135 diagnostics description, 10-675 LOW result flag description, 5-226 Low Alert reagent status description, 5-70 low inlet pressure indicator i System ARM, 1-112 low level error messages viewing, 10-14
description, 9-27 c System quarterly maintenance description, 9-28 c System weekly maintenance description, 9-24 description of, 9-20 i 2000 i 2000SR as-needed maintenance description, 9-65 i 2000 i 2000SR daily maintenance description, 9-63 i 2000 i 2000SR weekly maintenance description, 9-63 LAS carousel sample handler as-needed maintenance description, 9-81 RSH as-needed maintenance description, 9-77 SCC as-needed maintenance description, 9-82 SSH as-needed maintenance description, 9-79 maintenance error codes descriptions of error codes 2000-2999, 10-181 Maintenance History Report illustration of, Appendix A-47 specific procedure, printing, 5-340 specified month, printing, 5-339 maintenance kit (c 16000 System) listing of LN 08K73-01, Appendix D-9 maintenance kit (c 8000 System) listing of LN 02J53-01, Appendix D-6 Maintenance log screen accessing the, 9-16 description of, 9-14 field descriptions, Appendix E-130 illustration of, 9-15 procedures associated with, 9-16 Maintenance Perform window description of, 9-11 field descriptions, Appendix E-128 illustration, 9-12 maintenance procedures adding a comment, 9-17 installing or deleting, 2-218 performing, 9-6 Maintenance screen
M
M processing code description of, 5-153 MAC Hardware Address procedure (SCC) 6500 diagnostics description, 10-696 maintenance overview of, 9-2 maintenance and diagnostic file management description of, 2-218 maintenance categories and procedure descriptions c System as-needed maintenance description, 9-35 c System daily maintenance description, 9-21 c System monthly maintenance
Index-39
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
accessing the, 9-4 description of, 9-3 field descriptions, Appendix E-127 illustration of, 9-4 procedures associated with, 9-5 To do tab, 9-3 maintenance statuses description of, 9-20 managing maintenance and diagnostic files description of, 2-218 manual list numbers listing of, Appendix D-14 map of c System processing center illustration of, 9-84, , 9-163 math models description of, Appendix C-1 measurements systems physical specifications, 4-9 measuring sample interference indices (c System) description of, 3-22 mechanical hazards description of, 8-17 menus description of, 1-14 example of, 1-14 Message History Log illustration of report, Appendix A-49 printing the report, 5-342 SCC capacities, 4-6 message logs reviewing, 10-13 messages caution definition, 1-17 deleting temporary, 10-15 description of, 1-16 example of, 1-17 finding, 10-13 information, 1-17 method groups for verification protocols description of, Appendix B-1 methods comparison - method 1 (correlation) data sheet, Appendix B-38
description of, Appendix B-37 methods comparison - method 2 (concordance) calculation sheet, Appendix B-41 calculation sheet example, Appendix B-41 data sheet, Appendix B-40 description of, Appendix B-39 minimum sample volume printing on report, 5-124 Mismatch i System reagent status description, 5-70 Missing Bottle reagent status definition, 5-70 mixer unit (c 16000) description of, 1-61 illustration of, 1-62 location of, 9-163 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-59 mixer unit (c 8000) description of, 1-42 illustration of, 1-43 location of, 9-84 reaction carousel hardware components, 1-40 mixer vibration test (c System) 3126 diagnostics, 10-659 mixers (c 16000) description of, 1-61 replacing the, 9-192 mixers (c 8000) description of, 1-42 replacing the, 9-114 mixers (c System) cleaning the, 9-25 Mixing i System reagent status description, 5-70 modem specifications description of, 4-27 module diagnostics description c System, 10-662 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-675 LAS carousel sample handler, 10-692
Index-40
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
RSH, 10-685 SSH, 10-689 module initialization c System 4080 diagnostics description, 10-663 i System 4080 diagnostics procedure, 10-676 monitor replacing the, 9-291 monitor specifications description of, 4-26 monthly maintenance c System description, 9-27 mouse replacing the, 9-278 SCC standard component, 1-9 multiconstituent bar code SID configuring, 2-180 multiconstituent control bar code SID viewing settings, 2-185 multiconstituent controls add an assay to a bar code SID, 2-194 adding an assay, 2-191 changing, 2-193 configuring new, 2-179 viewing settings, 2-184 multiconstituent controls (i System) description of, 1-141 illustration of, 1-142
illustration of, 1-10 keyboard connector, 1-10 mouse, 1-10 printer port, 1-10 replacing the, 9-281 video connector, 1-10 new reagent bottles (i 2000 i 2000SR) preparing, 5-102 No Assay reagent status description, 5-70 No Cal calibration status description, 6-18 No CD drive is detected archive message, 5-271 No disk or incorrect disk type detected archive message, 5-271 noise level specifications, 4-26 non-bar coded reagents (c System) loading, 5-91 replacing, 5-96 unloading, 5-100 non-bar coded samples (RSH) loading for batch processing, 5-185 non-bar coded samples (SSH) loading for batch processing, 5-201 non-linear assay view - Calibration curve window (c System) description of, 6-19 normal and extreme result ranges changing, 2-110 configuring, 2-71 viewing settings, 2-99 number of exceptions pending review description of, 1-18 number of orders pending rerun description of, 1-18
N
navigation of software, 1-17 navigation pane online operations manual, illustration of tabs, System documentation-15 nested expressions description of, System documentation-37 network hub bar code scanner connector, 1-10 com 1 port, 1-10 CPU connectors, 1-10 description of, 1-10 ethernet connectors, 1-10
O
observed problems c System processing module, 10-547 c System sample results, 10-562 general description, 10-547 i System ARM, 10-626 i System processing module, 10-560
Index-41
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
i System sample results, 10-575 printer, 10-646 sample handler, 10-607 SCC, 10-609 OK reagent status description, 5-70 onboard data storage ARCHITECT System location, 4-5 capacities, 4-6 onboard solution areas (c 8000) description of, 1-38 illustration of, 1-39 onboard solution options (c 16000) changing, 2-34 onboard solution options (c 8000) changing, 2-33 onboard solution options (c System) viewing, 2-18 onboard solutions (c 16000) replacing in reagent supply centers and updating inventory, 5-41 onboard solutions (c 8000) replacing in reagent supply centers and updating inventory, 5-39 onboard solutions (c System) Acid Wash illustration, 1-137 description of, 1-136 Detergent A illustration, 1-137 Detergent B illustration, 1-137 replacing in sample carousel and updating inventory, 5-44 storing and using, 7-5 one-point adjustment (c System) description of, 6-6 one-point qualitative (index formula) data reduction method (i System) description of, Appendix C-18 online documentation conventions used in, System documentation-8 description of, System documentation-6 procedure map description, System documentation-21 task lists on procedure map, System
documentation-22 tips for using, System documentation-24 window descriptions, System documentation-10 window toolbar, System documentation-12 window topic pane, System documentation-13 online documentation procedures closing the window, System documentation-43 displaying and using the procedure map, System documentation-29 displaying related information, System documentation-39 playing videos and animations, System documentation-41 printing topics, System documentation-41 redisplaying online topics, System documentation-40 resizing and moving the Help window, System documentation-43 scrolling through a topic, System documentation-39 tips for using, System documentation-24 using the glossary, System documentation-38 operation precautions, 7-4 requirements before, 7-3 operations manual (online) access from system software, illustration, System documentation-6 contents tab description, System documentation-15 conventions used in, System documentation-8 description of, System documentation-6 favorites tab description, System documentation-20 index tab description, System documentation-18 navigation pane and tabs description, System documentation-14 organization of, System documentation-17
Index-42
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
procedure map, System documentation-22 search tab description, System documentation-19 tips for using, System documentation-24 window example, System documentation-11 operations manual (printed) conventions used in, System documentation-4 organization of, System documentation-2 operations manual procedures (online) accessing the operations manual, System documentation-27 adding or removing a favorite topic, System documentation-44 displaying favorite topic, System documentation-40 paging through content, System documentation-30 performing advanced search, System documentation-33 renaming favorite topic, System documentation-45 searching for a term, System documentation-32 tips for using, System documentation-24 using boolean operators to search, System documentation-37 using nested expressions to search, System documentation-37 using the index, System documentation-31 using the table of contents, System documentation-30 using wildcard expressions to search, System documentation-38 operator responsibility for using the system, 8-3 optic temperature diagnostics description c System, 10-664 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-680 optical measurement emission measurement (i System), 3-27 optical system (c System), 3-4
optical specifications (c System) description of, 4-22 optical subsystem troubleshooting c System, 10-4 i System, 10-6 optics background (i System) 1020 diagnostics description, 10-680 optics diagram illustration of (c System), 3-5 illustration of (i System), 3-28 optics error codes descriptions of error codes 6000-6999, 10-411 optics total test (c System) 1008 diagnostics description, 10-664 optimizing throughput on a multi-module i System procedure for, 2-35 optimum sampling sequence (c System) description of, 3-20 option for running controls changing, 2-37 optional components c System high-concentration waste bottle, 1-70 c System UPS, 1-70 i System ARM, 1-109 i System UPS, 1-109 SCC bar code scanner, 1-11 SCC cart, 1-11 SCC external modem, 1-11 SCC printer, 1-11 SCC speakers, 1-11 SCC UPS, 1-11 Order List Report illustration of, Appendix A-51 printing the, 5-336 order status button description of, Appendix E-16 Order Status Report illustration of, Appendix A-53 Order status screen accessing, 5-152 adding a comment to an order, 5-157
Index-43
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
description of, 5-150 field descriptions, Appendix E-35 illustration of, 5-151 procedures associated with, 5-154 sorting options, 5-151 windows associated with, 5-158 orders adding a comment to, 5-157 batch, processing, 5-215 calibration, creating, 6-12 calibration, finding, 6-30 control (multiconstituent - i2000SR LAS), creating, 5-146 control (multiconstituent), creating, 5-143 control (single analyte) i2000SR LAS, creating, 5-141 control (single analyte), creating, 5-139 patient (batch, bar coded), creating, 5-121 patient (batch, non-bar coded), creating, 5-125 patient (single order), creating, 5-118 patient, deleting test from, 5-158 rerun, deleting test from, 5-261 viewing status details, 5-156 Orders icon description of, Appendix E-2 screens and windows description, Appendix E-21 OSS (optimum sampling sequence) fetaure description of, 3-20 other valves and diverter test (i System) 5133 diagnostics description, 10-678 Overridden c System calibration status description, 6-18 reagent status description, 5-70 Overview icon description of, Appendix E-2 screens and windows description, Appendix E-15
passwords system administrator, 1-23 Patient order screen adding a test to a patient order, 5-128 procedures associated with, 5-118 windows associated with, 5-131 Patient order screen - Batch (bar coded) view accessing, 5-116 description of, 5-115 field descriptions, Appendix E-24 illustration of, 5-115 Patient order screen - Batch (non-bar coded) view accessing, 5-117 description of, 5-116 field descriptions, Appendix E-25 illustration of, 5-117 Patient order screen - Single patient view accessing, 5-114 description of, 5-113 field descriptions, Appendix E-22 illustration of, 5-114 Patient order window - assay options automated dilution view description of, 5-132 illustration of, 5-132 Patient order window - assay options manual dilution view description of, 5-131 illustration of, 5-131 patient orders batch, bar coded, creating, 5-121 batch, non-bar coded, creating, 5-125 single order, creating, 5-118 patient panels changing, 2-111 configuring, 2-72 deleting, 2-111 viewing, 2-100 Patient Report illustration of, Appendix A-55 patient result flags, 5-225 patient results adding a comment to, 5-229
P
parameter adjustment method (i System) description of, Appendix C-21
Index-44
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
archiving released, 5-269 deleting, 5-233 deleting stored, 5-269 finding a specific, 5-227 releasing, 5-234 viewing all, 5-226 viewing details, 5-228 patient results, QC results, and exceptions rerun review description of, 5-257 patient samples auto retest, 5-112 patient stored results description of, 5-262 patient tests rerunning, 5-231 viewing status of orders, 5-154 pause indicator light LAS carousel sample handler, 1-125 SSH keypad, 1-123 pause key c System processing module, 1-30 LAS carousel sample handler, 1-125 RSH, 1-120 SSH keypad, 1-123 pausing c System sample carousel, 5-16 LAS carousel sample handler, 5-18 processing module, 5-14 RSH, 5-15 SSH sample load queue, 5-17 Pending maintenance status description, 9-20 test status description, 5-153 Pending Collation test status description, 5-153 Pending Transmission test status description, 5-153 performance characteristics c System, 4-2 i System, 4-2 performing checkout, 2-2 diagnostic procedure, 10-653
peripheral devices observed problems, 10-626 i System ARM, 10-626 printer, 10-646 photometric calibration method (c System) description of, 6-3 photometric data reduction methods (c System) absorbance, Appendix C-2 description of, Appendix C-2 factor, Appendix C-2 linear, Appendix C-3 Logit-4, Appendix C-5 spline, Appendix C-6 use factor and blank, Appendix C-7 photometric timing illustration of, 3-17 physical, 8-19 physical hazards, 8-19 physical requirements troubleshooting, 10-9 physical specifications ARCHITECT System, 4-9 pipettor and syringe motor tests (i System) 5110 diagnostics, 10-679 pipettor calibration - R1 (i System) illustration of, 9-73 maintenance description, 9-66 pipettor diagnostics description c System, 10-659 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-670 pipettor move (i System) 1160 diagnostics, 10-671 pipettor probe cleaning (i System) 6014 maintenance description, 9-64 pipettor probes (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing sample, reagent, STAT, 9-240 pipettors c 16000 reagent, description, 1-57 c 16000 reagent, illustration, 1-58 c 16000 sample, description, 1-53 c 16000 sample, illustration, 1-54 c 8000 reagent, description, 1-37 c 8000 reagent, illustration, 1-38
Index-45
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
c 8000 sample, description, 1-33 c 8000 sample, illustration, 1-34 i 2000 i 2000SR reagent, description, 1-86 i 2000 i 2000SR sample and STAT, description, 1-81 pipettors LLS test (c System) 3625 diagnostics description, 10-661 placement requirements ARCHITECT System, 4-26 Point detail window description of, 5-322 field descriptions, Appendix E-75 illustration of, 5-323 point to point data reduction method (i System) description of, Appendix C-13 illustration of, Appendix C-13 poppet valve set (c 16000) replacing the, 9-231 poppet valve set (c 8000) replacing the, 9-155 potentiometric assay view - Calibration curve window (c System) description of, 6-21 illustration of, 6-22 potentiometric calibration method (c System) description of, 6-4 potentiometric data reduction methods (c System) description of, Appendix C-8 electromotive force measurement, Appendix C-9 sample measurement, Appendix C-11 slope calculation, Appendix C-10 potentiometric method description of, 3-6 power emergency shutdown description, 5-21 processing module and or sample handler, cycling, 5-12 SCC, cycling, 5-5 power supply panel
i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-75 power switch i System ARM, 1-113 powering off i System ARM, 5-20 processing module and or sample handler, 5-9 SCC, 5-4 powering on i System ARM, 5-20 processing module and or sample handler, 5-7 SCC, 5-3 PP and carousel motor tests (i System) 5100 diagnostics description, 10-679 precautions before operation, 7-3 biological hazards, 8-7 chemical hazards, 8-9 during operation, 7-4 electrical hazards, 8-15 for system operation, 7-3 spill cleanup, 8-11 waste handling and disposal, 8-12 precision - method 1 data sheet, Appendix B-14 description of, Appendix B-14 precision diagnostics description c System, 10-666 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-681 preparing c System 0.5% acid wash solution, 5-35 c System 10% detergent B solution, 5-38 c System Detergent A, 5-37 c System ICT Cleaning Fluid, 9-23 c System Water Bath Additive, 9-23 i System new reagent bottles, 5-102 i System used reagent bottles, 5-105 i System wash buffer, 5-51 pressure monitoring test (i System) 3800 diagnostics description, 10-673 pretreatment types description of, 3-36 pretreatment 14, 3-38
Index-46
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
pretreatment 7, 3-37 pretreatment 7-7, 3-37 Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions (i System) prime, 9-70 Pre-Trigger check (i System) 2004 diagnostics description, 10-683 pre-trigger level sensor (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-101 replacing the, 9-267 pre-trigger level sensor (i System) illustration of, 1-102 Pre-Trigger Solution (i System) description of, 1-143 illustration of, 1-144 replacing and updating inventory, 5-57 pre-trigger trigger manifold (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-96 pre-trigger trigger manifold (i System) illustration of, 1-96 pre-trigger trigger storage area (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-99 pre-trigger trigger storage area (i System) illustration of, 1-100 pre-trigger level sensor, 1-100 pre-trigger trigger tray, 1-100 trigger level sensor, 1-100 pre-trigger trigger tray (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-100 pre-trigger trigger tray (i System) illustration of, 1-101 primary components ARCHITECT System, 4-4 primary sample tubes specifications, 5-171 volumes, 5-173 prime Pre-Trigger and Trigger Solutions (i System) 2152 maintenance description, 9-70 prime wash zones (i System) 2151 maintenance description, 9-69 print job deleting, 5-345
viewing the print queue, 5-344 Print options window description of, 5-346 field descriptions, Appendix E-213 illustration of, 5-346 printer description of, 1-11 electrical specifications, 4-28 guidelines for sample bar code labels, 4-33 observed problems, 10-646 parallel cable length, 4-27 power cord length, 4-27 replacing the, 9-285 spool capacities, 4-6 status button, 1-18 printer status button description of, Appendix E-18 Printer window description of, 5-347 field descriptions, Appendix E-214 illustration of, 5-347 Printing QC Summary report, 5-338 printing Assay Parameter report for all assays, 5-343 Assay Parameter report for specified assays, 5-342 assay parameter reports, 2-127 flags on reports option, changing, 2-23 flags on reports option, viewing, 2-13 Levey-Jennings report, 5-337 Maintenance History report for a specific procedure, 5-340 Maintenance History report for a specified month, 5-339 Message History Log report, 5-342 Order List report, 5-336 Procedure report, 5-341 QC Analysis report, 5-337 reports, 5-333 screen image, 5-345 topics from online documentation, System documentation-41 priority bay - RSH
Index-47
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
description of, 1-116 illustration of, 1-117 sample carrier, 1-117 status indicator, 1-117 priority processing RSH loading samples, 5-181 SSH loading samples, 5-197 probe acid wash (c System) 6054 maintenance description, 9-40 probe alignment test (c System) 1151 diagnostics description, 10-659 probe move (c System) 1161 diagnostics description, 10-660 probe tubing c 16000 reagent, replacing, 9-174 c 16000 sample, replacing the, 9-171 c 8000 reagent, replacing, 9-95 c 8000 sample, replacing the, 9-92 i 2000 i 2000SR waste arm, replacing the, 9-264 probe wash pump (c 16000) location of, 1-66 supply and pump center components, 9-203 probe wash pump (c 8000) location of, 1-68 supply and pump center components, 9-125 probe water wash (c System) 6053 maintenance description, 9-40 probes c 16000 reagent, replacing, 9-167 c 16000 sample, replacing, 9-164 c 8000 reagent, replacing, 9-88 c 8000 sample, replacing, 9-85 i 2000 i 2000SR sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor, replacing, 9-240 i 2000 i 2000SR wash zone, replacing, 9-248 probes and sharps, 8-19 probes and sharps hazards, 8-19 procedure information viewing, 10-652 procedure map
description of, System documentation-21 illustration of, System documentation-21 tasks lists, System documentation-22 viewing list of procedures online, System documentation-29 Procedure Report illustration of Basic, Appendix A-57 illustration of Columnar, Appendix A-59 printing the, 5-341 procedure requirements, 8-13 procedures diagnostic, 10-653 maintenance, 9-6 viewing online procedure map, System documentation-29 process path (i System) capacities, 4-8 components used in assay processing, 3-30 reagent pipetting locations, 3-30 process path drive motor (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-95 process path drive motor (i System) illustration of, 1-96 process path hardware components (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-89 process path hardware components (i System) CMIA reader, 1-90 drive motor, 1-90 illustration of, 1-90 liquid waste arm, 1-90 load diverter, 1-90 pre-trigger trigger manifold, 1-90 RV access door, 1-90 RV loader and hopper assembly, 1-90 RV unloader, 1-90 STAT diverter, 1-90 vortexers, 1-90 wash zone diverter, 1-90 wash zone manifolds, 1-90 processing batch orders
Index-48
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
description of, 5-215 processing center (c 16000) description of, 1-50 illustration of, 1-51 reaction carousel hardware components illustration, 1-51 reagent hardware components illustration, 1-51 sample hardware components illustration, 1-51 processing center (c 8000) description of, 1-31 illustration of, 1-31 reaction carousel hardware components illustration, 1-31 reagent hardware components illustration, 1-31 sample hardware components illustration, 1-31 processing center (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-78 process path hardware components, 1-89 reagent hardware components, 1-84 reagent hardware components description, 1-84 sample hardware components description, 1-80 processing center (i System) sample hardware components description, 1-80 sample hardware components illustration, 1-81 processing center c 16000 location of components, 9-163 processing center c 8000 location of components, 9-84 processing center component replacement c 16000, 9-162 c 8000, 9-83 i 2000 i 2000SR, 9-240 processing center map c 16000 illustration, 9-163 c 8000 illustration, 9-84 i 2000 i 2000SR description, 1-79 i System illustration, 1-80
processing codes description of, 5-153 processing module automatic activities, 1-166 c System observed problems, 10-547 c System specifications, 4-5 corrective action procedures, 10-697 cycling power to, 5-12 cycling power, starting up, and pausing description, 5-6 i System observed problems, 10-560 i System specifications, 4-5 list numbers, Appendix D-18 pausing the, 5-14 powering off, 5-9 powering on, 5-7 starting, 5-13 processing module graphic c System field descriptions, Appendix E-16 i System field descriptions, Appendix E-16 processing module interface specifications description of, 4-27 processing module keypad c System description, 1-29 c System illustration, 1-30 i 2000 i 2000SR description, 1-77 i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler illustration, 1-74 i 2000SR processing module illustration, 1-76 i System illustration, 1-78 processing module pump center (c 16000) description of, 1-66 illustration of, 1-66 processing module pump center (c 8000) illustration of, 1-48 processing module pump center (front view) (c 16000) illustration of, 1-67 processing module pump center (rear view) (c 16000) illustration of, 1-68 processing module specifications, bar code
Index-49
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
readers c System, 4-5 i System, 4-5 processing module specifications, dispensing volume i System, 4-6 processing module specifications, liquid waste output c System, 4-23 i System, 4-6 processing module specifications, noise level, 4-26 processing module specifications, temperature c System, 4-5 i System, 4-6 processing module status c System processing module status types, 1-161 description of, 1-160 i 2000 and i 2000SR processing module status types, 1-163 illustration of, 1-161 iSystem processing module status types, 1-164 sequence illustration, 1-156 Snapshot screen graphic, 1-18 processing module wash (c System) description of, 1-168 processing modules c System description, 1-25 general description, 1-25 i System description, 1-71 processing queue cleaning (SSH) 6020 maintenance description, 9-80 prompts description of, 1-17 example of, 1-17 PSHH (c System ICT assays) quality control result flag, 5-246 result flag, 5-226 pump bay panel i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-75
pump center (c 16000) description of, 1-66 illustration of, 1-66, , 1-68 pump locations (c 16000) cuvette wash, 9-203 high-concentration waste, 9-203 ICT aspiration, 9-203 ICT reference, 9-203 probe wash, 9-203 wash solution, 9-203 pump locations (c 8000) cuvette wash, 9-125 high-concentration waste, 9-125 ICT aspiration, 9-125 ICT reference, 9-125 probe wash, 9-125 wash solution, 9-125 pump motor tests (i System) 5120 diagnostics description, 10-679 pumps (c 16000) cuvette wash pump, 1-66, , 1-68 high-concentration waste pump, 1-68 ICT aspiration, 1-68 probe wash pump, 1-66, , 1-68 wash solution, 1-66, , 1-68 pumps (c 8000) ICT reference solution, 1-68
Q
QC Analysis Report illustration, Appendix A-61 printing the, 5-337 QC data viewing details, 5-327 QC data summary finding a specific, 5-326 viewing, 5-326 QC panels changing, 2-111 configuring, 2-72 deleting, 2-111 viewing, 2-100 QC reports screen accessing, 5-331 description of, 5-330 field descriptions, Appendix E-94
Index-50
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
illustration of, 5-331 QC Result Details Report illustration of, Appendix A-64 QC result review screen accessing, 5-245 adding a comment to a control result, 5-249 description of, 5-243 field descriptions, Appendix E-65 illustration of, 5-244 procedures associated with, 5-246 sorting options, 5-244 windows associated with, 5-251 QC results SCC capacities, 4-6 QC Results List Report illustration of, Appendix A-67 QC run definition configuring, 2-8 QC selection window description of, 5-321 field descriptions, Appendix E-74 illustration of, 5-322 QC Summary Report illustration of report, Appendix A-69 QC Summary report printing, 5-338 QC summary review screen description of, 5-323 field descriptions, Appendix E-95 illustration of, 5-324 procedures associated with, 5-325 sorting options, 5-63, , 5-324 statistical data elements, 5-325 windows associated with, 5-328 QC-Cal icon description of, Appendix E-4 screens and windows description, Appendix E-63 QC-Cal settings procedures associated with, 2-186 quality control analysis description of, 5-309 quality control result flags
description of, 5-245 quality control specification ARCHITECT System, 4-5 quarterly maintenance (c System) description of, 9-28 queue sample load unload (double lane) description, 1-121 sample load unload (double lane) illustration, 1-122 sample load unload (single lane) description, 1-121 sample load unload (single lane) illustration, 1-121 quiet zone 1D reagent bar code labels, 4-30 sample bar code labels, 4-34
R
R processing code description of, 5-154 R1 and R2 bar code readers (c 16000) illustration of, 1-55 R1 and R2 bar code readers (c 8000) illustration of, 1-35 R1 and R2 onboard solution areas (c 16000) illustration of, 1-55 R1 and R2 onboard solution areas (c 8000) illustration of, 1-35 R1 pipettor calibration (c 16000) 1121 maintenance illustration, 9-60 R1 pipettor calibration (c 8000) 1121 maintenance illustration, 9-50 R1 pipettor calibration (c System) 1121 maintenance description, 9-36 R1 pipettor calibration (i System) 1112 maintenance description, 9-66 1112 maintenance illustration, 9-73 R1 pipettor check c System 2044 diagnostics description, 10-667 i System 2002 diagnostics description, 10-682 R1 reagent supply center (c System)
Index-51
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
cartridge configurations, 1-152, , 1-155 R2 pipettor calibration (c 16000) 1122 maintenance illustration, 9-61 R2 pipettor calibration (c 8000) 1122 maintenance illustration, 9-51 R2 pipettor calibration (c System) 1122 maintenance description, 9-37 R2 pipettor calibration (i System) 1113 maintenance description, 9-67 1113 maintenance illustration, 9-74 R2 pipettor check c System 2045 diagnostics description, 10-667 i System 2003 diagnostics description, 10-682 R2 reagent supply center (c System) automatic rotation, 1-168 cartridge configurations, 1-152 rate assay description of, 3-3 down rate reaction curve, example of, 3-4 ratio 1D reagent bar code labels, 4-30 sample bar code labels, 4-33 ratio adjustment technique method (i System) description of, Appendix C-19 reaction carousel (c 16000) description of, 1-59 illustration of, 1-60 location of, 9-163 reaction carousel (c 8000) description of, 1-40 illustration of, 1-41 location of, 9-84 reaction carousel (c System) assay processing positions, 3-15 capacities, 4-7 components used in assay procesing, 3-13 reaction carousel hardware components (c 16000) description of, 1-58
illustration of, 1-59 reaction carousel hardware components (c 8000) description of, 1-39 illustration of, 1-40 reaction carousel home move (c System) 3010 diagnostics procedure, 10-665 reaction graph and absorbance data (c System) viewing data for a result, 5-230 reaction mechanism diagnostics description c System, 10-658 i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-668 reaction vessels (i 2000 i 2000SR) replenishing and updating inventory, 5-49 reaction vessels (i System) description of, 1-146 illustration of, 1-146 reagent bar code calibration (i System) 3210 diagnostics description, 10-675 reagent bar code labels c System description, 1-127 i System description, 1-139 reagent bar code reader test (i System) 3200 diagnostics description, 10-675 reagent bar code readers c 16000 illustration, 1-55 c 8000 illustration, 1-35 i 2000 i 2000SR description, 1-85 i System illustration, 1-84 reagent bar code test (c System) 3206 diagnostics description, 10-662 reagent bottles (i 2000 i 2000SR) preparing new, 5-102 preparing used, 5-105 reagent carousel (i 2000 i 2000SR) color coding of, 1-85 description of, 1-85 reagent carousel (i System) capacities, 4-8 illustration of, 1-86 reagent carousel test (i System) 3000 diagnostics description, 10-681
Index-52
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
reagent carousels scanning, 5-84 reagent cartridge adapters (c 16000) description of, 1-154 illustration of, 1-154 reagent cartridge adapters (c 8000) description of, 1-151 illustration of, 1-151 reagent cartridges (c 16000) reagent supply center configuration, 1-155 reagent cartridges (c 8000) reagent supply center 1 configuration, 1-152 reagent supply center 2 configuration, 1-152 reagent cartridges (c System) description of, 1-128 illustration of, 1-129 reagent details viewing, 5-82 reagent hardware components (c 16000) description of, 1-54 illustration of, 1-55 onboard solution areas, 1-55 reagent bar code readers, 1-55 reagent pipettors, 1-55 reagent supply centers, 1-55 reagent hardware components (c 8000) description of, 1-34 illustration of, 1-35 onboard solution areas, 1-35 reagent bar code readers, 1-35 reagent pipettors, 1-35 reagent supply centers, 1-35 reagent hardware components (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-84 reagent hardware components (i System) illustration of, 1-84 reagent bar code reader, 1-84 reagent carousel, 1-84 reagent pipettors, 1-84 reagent syringes, 1-84 reagent wash stations, 1-84
reagent history details viewing, 5-83 Reagent history screen accessing, 5-77 description of, 5-75 field descriptions, Appendix E-116 illustration of, 5-76 sorting options, 5-76 windows associated with, 5-77 reagent inventory verifying all modules, 5-80 verifying single module, 5-79 reagent inventory management ARCHITECT System, 5-79 c System, 5-84 general description, 5-61 i 2000 i 2000SR, 5-102 reagent kits changing the system low alert, 2-24 SCC data storage capacities, 4-6 viewing system low alert setting, 2-14 reagent kits (c System) configuring user-defined (photometric), 2-94, , 2-95 deleting, 2-123 description of kits and components, 1-127 illustration of kits and components, 1-127 reagent troubleshooting, 10-7 reagent kits and components (i System) description of, 1-138 illustration of, 1-139 reagent troubleshooting, 10-8 reagent labels (c System) description of, 1-127 illustration of, 1-128 reagent labels (i System) description of, 1-139 illustration of, 1-140 reagent pipettors (c 16000) description of, 1-57 location of, 1-58 location of pipettors 1 and 2, 9-163 reagent hardware component, 1-55
Index-53
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
reagent pipettors (c 8000) description of, 1-37 location of, 1-38 location of pipettors 1 and 2, 9-84 reagent hardware component, 1-35 reagent pipettors (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-86 reagent pipettors (i System) illustration of R1, 1-87 illustration of R2, 1-87 location of, 1-84 reagent probe wash station (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-88 reagent probe wash station (i System) illustration, 1-89 reagent probes (c 16000) replacing the, 9-167 replacing the tubing, 9-174 reagent probes (c 8000) replacing the, 9-88 replacing the tubing, 9-95 reagent probes (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the tubing, 9-244 reagent sample carousel home (c System) 3011 diagnostics description, 10-666 reagent segments (c 16000) description of, 1-153 illustration of, 1-153 reagent segments (c 8000) description of, 1-149 illustration of, 1-150 reagent septums and replacement caps (i System) description of, 1-140 illustration, 1-141 reagent status button description of, Appendix E-16 Reagent status screen - View all view accessing the, 5-69 c System field descriptions, Appendix E-112 description of, 5-67 illustration of, 5-68 sorting options, 5-68
Reagent status screen (c 16000) illustration of, 5-63 Reagent status screen (c 8000) illustration of, 5-62 Reagent status screen (c System) accessing, 5-64 description of, 5-61 field descriptions, Appendix E-110 sorting options, 5-63 Reagent status screen (i 2000 i 2000SR) accessing, 5-66 description of, 5-64 field descriptions, Appendix E-111 Reagent status screen (i System) illustration of, 5-65 sorting options, 5-66 Reagent status screens Assign location window description, 5-72 Assign location window illustration, 5-73 windows associated with, 5-70 reagent statuses description of, 5-69 reagent supply centers (c 16000) A-line and B-line location, 1-56 capacities, 4-7 centers 1 (R1) and 2 (R2) illustration of, 1-55 illustration of, 1-57 location of, 9-163 reagent cartridge configurations, 1-155 reagent supply centers (c 8000) capacities, 4-7 centers 1 (R1) and 2 (R2) illustration of, 1-35 centers 1 (R1) and 2 (R2) onboard solutions illustration, 1-39 illustration of, 1-37 location of, 9-84 R1 reagent cartridge configurations, 1-152 R2 reagent cartridge configurations, 1-152 reagent supply centers (c System)
Index-54
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
cleaning the, 9-29 reagent syringe (c 16000) replacing the, 9-224 reagent syringe (c 8000) replacing the, 9-148 reagent syringe (c System) 6303 maintenance description, 9-32 reagent syringes c 16000 description, 1-69 c 16000 illustration, 1-70 c 8000 description, 1-49 c 8000 illustration, 1-50 i 2000 i 2000SR description, 1-87 i System example of R1 or R2, 1-88 i System illustration, 1-84 reagent wash cups (c 16000) description of, 1-57 illustration of, 1-58 reagent wash cups (c 8000) description of, 1-37 illustration of, 1-38 reagent wash stations (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-88 reagent wash stations (i System) example of R1 or R2, 1-89 illustration of, 1-84 reagents finding a specific, 5-81 reagents (c System) configuring location of non-bar coded, 5-72 configuring user-defined (photometric), 2-93 deleting, 2-122 loading bar coded, 5-85 loading non-bar coded, 5-91 replacing non-bar coded, 5-96 unloading bar coded, 5-98 unloading non-bar coded, 5-100 using, 7-5 reagents (i 2000 i 2000SR) loading, 5-106 unloading, 5-108 reagents (i System)
storing, 7-5 reagents 1 and 2 onboard solution area (c 8000) location of, 9-84 Reagents icon description of, Appendix E-5 screens and windows description, Appendix E-109 reagent-specific low alert setting (c System) changing, 2-121 viewing, 2-105 rear processing center access panel i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-75 rear processing center cover c 16000 processing module, 1-29 c 8000 processing module, 1-27 i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-75 i 2000 processing module - SSH, 1-73 recalculating Westgard analysis, 5-320 reference file options description of, 3-21 reference range - method 1 description of, Appendix B-44 reinstalling c System sample carousel, 10-707 the system, 2-4 released results SCC capacities, 4-6 releasing control results, 5-250 patient results, 5-234 relocating the system, 2-3 removing assay from a retest rule, 2-113 c System sample carousel, 10-706 favorite topic - online operations manual favorites list, System documentation-44 favorite topic for online operations manual, System documentation-44
Index-55
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
RSH sample carriers from the carrier transport and carrier positioners, 10-708 solid waste and updating inventory (i 2000 i 2000SR), 5-47 renaming favorite topic for online operations manual, System documentation-45 replace buffer key (i System ARM) location of, 1-112 replacement caps (i System) description of, 1-140 illustration of, 1-141 replacing biohazard bag, 5-47 c 16000 onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and updating inventory, 5-41 c 8000 onboard solutions in the reagent supply centers and updating inventory, 5-39 c System bulk solutions and updating inventory, 5-33 c System non-bar coded reagents, 5-96 c System onboard solutions in the sample carousel and updating inventory, 5-44 c System sample diluents, 5-93 i 2000 i 2000SR Pre-Trigger and or Trigger Solution and updating inventory, 5-57 i System ARM concentrated wash buffer, 5-55 replenishing i 2000 i 2000SR RVs and updating inventory, 5-49 i 2000 i 2000SR wash buffer manually and updating inventory, 5-52 report header text changing, 2-24 viewing, 2-13 report printing windows associated with, 5-346 report settings configuring, 2-7
reportable range calibration verification method 1 data sheet, Appendix B-18 data sheet example, Appendix B-20 description of, Appendix B-16 graph, Appendix B-19 graph example, Appendix B-21 reportable range calibration verification method 2 data sheet, Appendix B-24 data sheet example, Appendix B-26 description of, Appendix B-22 graph, Appendix B-25 graph example, Appendix B-26 reportable range calibration verification method 3 data sheet, Appendix B-30 data sheet example, Appendix B-32 description of, Appendix B-28 graph, Appendix B-31 graph example, Appendix B-32 reports Absorbance Data Report, Appendix A-3 Assay Parameter Report (c System), Appendix A-6 Assay Parameter Report (i System), Appendix A-15 Cal Curve Details Report - Adjust (i System), Appendix A-28 Cal Curve Details Report - Full (i System), Appendix A-31 Cal Curve Details Report - Index (i System), Appendix A-34 Cal Curve Details Report - Linear (c System), Appendix A-22 Cal Curve Details Report Potentiometric (c System), Appendix A-19 Cal Curve Details Report - Use Cal Factor Blank (c System), Appendix A-25 Cal Curve Summary Report, Appendix A-37 changing printing settings, 2-22 Exception Details Report, Appendix A-39 Exception Status Report, Appendix A-42 Levey-Jennings Report, Appendix A-44 Maintenance History Report, Appendix
Index-56
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
A-47 Message History Log Report, Appendix A-49 Order List Report, Appendix A-51 Order Status Report, Appendix A-53 Patient Report, Appendix A-55 printing, 5-333 printing assay parameter, 2-127 Procedure Report, Basic, Appendix A-57 Procedure Report, Columnar, Appendix A-59 QC Analysis Report, Appendix A-61 QC Result Details Report, Appendix A-64 QC Results List Report, Appendix A-67 QC Summary Report, Appendix A-69 Rerun List Report, Appendix A-75 Result Details Report, Appendix A-77 Results List Report, Appendix A-80 Sample Report, Appendix A-82 Sample Status Report, Appendix A-84 Temporary Message Log Report, Appendix A-86 viewing option for printing flags, 2-13 viewing printing setting, 2-12 repositioning (RSH) changing for retest setting, 2-28 Rerun List Report illustration of, Appendix A-75 Rerun options (QC result review) window description of, 5-256 field descriptions, Appendix E-72 illustration of, 5-257 Rerun options (Results review) window description of, 5-241 field descriptions, Appendix E-51 illustration of, 5-242 rerun status details viewing, 5-156 Rerun status screen accessing the, 5-259 description of, 5-257 field descriptions, Appendix E-108 illustration of, 5-258 procedures associated with, 5-260 sorting options, 5-259 rerun test orders
viewing status, 5-154 rerunning tests, 5-231 reruns status button description of, Appendix E-18 reseating cables (SCC) procedure for, 10-710 resizing and moving Help window, System documentation-43 Result Details Report illustration of, Appendix A-77 result interpretation limitation description of, 7-10 result transmission canceling, 5-268 result units and decimal places configuring, 2-75 result units setting changing, 2-126 results control result details, viewing, 5-248 control, releasing, 5-250 patient result details, viewing, 5-228 patient, deleting, 5-233 patient, releasing, 5-234 patient, viewing all, 5-226 stored control, viewing all, 5-281 stored patient, deleting, 5-269 Results icon description of, Appendix E-3 screens and windows description, Appendix E-41 Results List Report illustration of, Appendix A-80 Results review screen accessing the, 5-224 adding a comment to a patient result, 5-229 description of, 5-222 field descriptions, Appendix E-42 illustration of, 5-223 procedures associated with, 5-226 sorting options, 5-223
Index-57
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
windows associated with, 5-235 resuming LAS carousel sample handler sample processing, 5-207 RSH and SSH sample processing, 5-206 sample processing, description, 5-205 retest rule settings description of, Appendix E-205 retest rules adding an assay, 2-112 configuring, 2-73 deleting, 2-114 removing an assay from, 2-113 viewing settings, 2-100 retransmitting stored control result, 5-284 stored patient result to the host, 5-267 reverse key SSH keypad, 1-123 reviewing message logs procedure for, 10-13 robotic and sensor error codes descriptions of error codes 5000-5999, 10-333 routine bay - RSH bay door, 1-118 carrier tray, 1-118 description of, 1-117 illustration of, 1-118 status indicator, 1-118 routine processing (RSH) loading samples, 5-179 routine processing (SSH) loading samples, 5-194 RS232 port i System ARM, 1-113 RSH bar code reader, 1-116 carrier positioner, 1-116 carrier transport, 1-116 components description (c 8000 i 2000SR, 1-115 components illustration, 1-116 cover, 1-116
diagnostic categories, 10-684 illustration of keypad, 1-120 keypad description, 1-120 maintenance categories, 9-76 pausing the, 5-15 priority bay, 1-116 routine bay, 1-118 status types, 1-157 RSH and SSH sample processing initiating or resuming, 5-206 RSH bar code calibration 3222 diagnostics description, 10-685 RSH bar code reader test 3252 diagnostics description, 10-685 RSH cleaning 6311 maintenance description, 9-77 RSH indicator lights test 5507 diagnostics description, 10-686 RSH motor tests 5501 diagnostics description, 10-688 RSH non-bar coded samples loading for batch processing (i 2000 i 2000SR), 5-185 RSH sample processing (ci 8200, c 8000, i 2000SR) illustration of, 5-209 RSH sample processing (ci System, c System, i 2000SR) description of, 5-208 RSH section test 3323 diagnostics description, 10-687 RSH sensor test 5506 diagnostics description, 10-687 RSH test 3317 diagnostics description, 10-686 run definitions Westgard rules, 5-311 run descriptions Westgard rules, 5-311 run key c System processing module, 1-30 i System processing module keypad, 1-78 LAS carousel sample handler, 1-125 RSH keypad, 1-120
Index-58
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
SSH keypad, 1-123 Running test status description, 5-153 Running maintenance status description of, 9-20 RV access door (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-91 RV access door (i System) illustration of, 1-92 location of, 1-90 RV hopper capacities i System, 4-8 RV loader and hopper assembly (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-92 RV loader and hopper assembly (i System) illustration of, 1-92 location of, 1-90 RV sensors test (i System) 5220 diagnostics description, 10-669 RV unloader (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-98 RV unloader (i System) illustration of, 1-98 RVs (i 2000 i 2000SR) replenishing and updating inventory, 5-49
illustration of, 1-33 sample bar code settings changing codabar, 2-28 changing code 39, 2-29 changing I 2 of 5, 2-30 viewing, 2-16 sample carousel (c 16000) access indicator light illustration, 1-53 advance indicator light illustration, 1-53 description of, 1-52 illustration of, 1-53 location of carousel and cover, 9-163 replacing the clip, 9-200 sample bar code reader, 1-53 sample pipettor, 1-54 sample probe wash cup, 1-54 sample carousel (c 8000) access indicator light illustration, 1-33 advance indicator light illustration, 1-33 description of, 1-32 illustration of, 1-33 location of carousel and cover, 9-84 replacing the clip, 9-122 sample bar code reader, 1-33 sample pipettor, 1-34 sample probe wash cup, 1-34 sample carousel (c System) capacities, 4-7 cleaning the carousel and area, 9-30 initiating sample processing, 5-188 loading samples, 5-188 pausing the, 5-16 reinstalling the, 10-707 removing the, 10-706 sample processing description, 5-210 sample carousel bar code test (c System) 3251 diagnostics description, 10-662 sample carrier trays (RSH) capacities, 1-148 sample carriers capactities, 1-147 description of, 1-147 illustration of, 1-148 SSH - loading samples, 5-192 sample carriers (RSH) loading samples, 5-176
S
S processing code description of, 5-153 safety icons description of, 8-4 safety parameters electrical, ARCHITECT System, 4-22 electrical, ARM, 4-38 sample and reagent syringe drives (c 16000) location of, 9-203 sample and reagent syringe drives (c 8000) location of, 9-125 sample bar code reader (c 16000) illustration of, 1-53 sample bar code reader (c 8000)
Index-59
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
removing carriers from carrier transport and carrier positions, 10-708 sample cups description of, 1-126 illustration of, 1-126 replacing in sample carousel, 5-44 volumes, 5-172 sample diluents c System, configuring user-defined (photometric), 2-92 c System, loading, 5-88 c System, replacing, 5-93 sample gauge label description of, 5-174 illustration of LAS sample carousel, 5-175 illustration of sample carrier, 5-175 sample handler capacities carrier trays, 4-9 description of, 4-8 RSH priority bay, 4-9 RSH routine bay, 4-9 sample carriers, 4-8 SSH, 4-8 sample handler graphic description of, Appendix E-16 sample handler initialization LAS carousel sample handler 4090 diagnostics description, 10-692 RSH 4090 diagnostics description, 10-686 SSH 4090 diagnostics description, 10-690 sample handler kit list numbers listing of, Appendix D-17 sample handler LLS test c System 3610 diagnostics description, 10-661 i System 3610 diagnostics description, 10-673 sample handler status description of, 1-156 LAS carousel, 1-159 RSH, 1-157 sequence illustration, 1-156
SSH, 1-158 status button on Snapshot screen, 1-157 sample handler test (SSH) 3315 diagnostics description, 10-689 sample handlers corrective action description, 10-708 cycling power to, 5-12 cycling power, starting up, and pausing description, 5-6 description of, 1-115 observed problems, 10-607 powering off, 5-9 powering on, 5-7 RSH (c 8000 i 2000SR), 1-115 SSH (i 2000), 1-121 starting, 5-13 sample hardware components (c 16000) description of, 1-51 illustration of, 1-52 indicator lights, 1-52 sample bar code reader, 1-52 sample carousel, 1-52 sample pipettor, 1-52 sample probe wash cup, 1-52 sample hardware components (c 8000) description of, 1-31 illustration of, 1-32 indicator lights, 1-32 sample bar code reader, 1-32 sample carousel, 1-32 sample pipettor, 1-32 sample probe wash cup, 1-32 sample hardware components (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-80 sample hardware components (i System) description of, 1-80 processing center, 1-81 sample and STAT pipettors illustrated, 1-81 sample and STAT syringes illustrated, 1-81 sample and STAT wash stations illustrated, 1-81 sample ID length (bar code labels) description of, 4-34
Index-60
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
sample integrity description of, 5-176 sample interference indices (c System) absorption spectra illustration, 3-22 measurement, description of, 3-22 sample management general description, 5-170 sample measurement data reduction (potentiometric - c System) description of, Appendix C-11 electrode (mV) response curve during sample measurement, Appendix C-12 sample or STAT syringe illustration of, 1-83 sample or STAT syringe (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-82 sample or STAT wash station illustration of, 1-84 sample or STAT wash station (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-83 sample orders host computer downloading, 5-110 host order query, 5-111 sample pipettor (c 16000) location of, 9-163 sample pipettor (c 8000) location of, 9-84 sample pipettor calibration (c 16000) 1120 maintenance illustration, 9-59 sample pipettor calibration (c 8000) 1120 maintenance illustration, 9-49 sample pipettor calibration (c System) 1120 maintenance description, 9-35 sample pipettor calibration (i System) 1111 maintenance description, 9-65 1111 maintenance illustration, 9-72 sample pipettor check c System 2043 diagnostics description, 10-666 i System 2001 diagnostics description, 10-682 sample pipettor cover
i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-74 sample pipettors c 16000 description, 1-53 c 16000 illustration, 1-54 c 8000 description, 1-33 c 8000 illustration, 1-34 i 2000 i 2000SR description, 1-81 i System illustration, 1-82 sample probe (c 16000) replacing the, 9-164 sample probe (c 8000) replacing the, 9-85 sample probe carryover performance ARCHITECT System, 4-5 sample probe wash cup (c 16000) description of, 1-53 illustration of, 1-54 sample probe wash cup (c 8000) description of, 1-33 illustration of, 1-34 sample probes (c 16000) replacing the tubing, 9-171 sample probes (c 8000) replacing the tubing, 9-92 sample probes (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the tubing, 9-244 sample processing c System sample carousel description, 5-210 i System LAS sample handler description, 5-213 initiating or resuming, 5-205 sample processing (RSH) ci System, c System, i 2000SR description, 5-208 sample reagent probes (c System) cleaning the, 9-25 Sample Report illustration of, Appendix A-82 sample results c System observed problems, 10-562 i System observed problems, 10-575 sample status
Index-61
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
viewing, 5-165 viewing details, 5-167 Sample Status Report illustration of report, Appendix A-84, , Appendix A-86 Sample status screen accessing the, 5-164 description of, 5-162 field descriptions, Appendix E-19 illustration of, 5-163 procedures associated with, 5-165 sorting options, 5-164 window associated with, 5-168 sample syringe (c 16000) 6301 maintenance illustration, 9-224 replacing o-ring and seal tips, 9-224 sample syringe (c 8000) 6301 maintenance illustration, 9-148 replacing o-ring and seal tips, 9-148 sample syringe (c System) 6301 maintenance description, 9-30 sample syringes c 16000 description, 1-69 c 16000 illustration, 1-70 c 8000 description, 1-49 c 8000 illustration, 1-50 i 2000 i 2000SR description, 1-82 i System illustration, 1-83 sample tube specifications (aliquot and primary) illustration and measurements, 5-171 sample types ARCHITECT System, 4-4 sample vessel requirements aliquot and primary sample tube specifications, 5-171 general description, 5-170 sample cup, 5-171 sample volume requirements aliquot tube, 5-174 ARCHITECT System, 4-5 description of, 5-172 primary tube, 5-173 sample cup, 5-172 sample gauge label description, 5-174
sample gauge label on LAS sample carousel illustration, 5-175 sample gauge label on sample carrier illustration, 5-175 sample wash stations (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-83 sample wash stations (i System) illustration of, 1-84 sample, reagent, or STAT pipettor probes (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the, 9-240 samples finding a specific, 5-166 patient, auto retest, 5-112 samples (c System) loading samples in sample carousel, 5-188 unloading samples from sample carousel, 5-218 samples (LAS carousel sample handler) loading samples and the sample carousel, 5-203 unloading, 5-220 samples (RSH) accessing a sample with tests in process, 5-217 loading bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-183 loading for priority processing, 5-181 loading for routine processing, 5-179 loading in sample carriers, 5-176 loading non-bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-185 unloading, 5-216 samples (SSH) loading bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-198 loading for priority processing, 5-197 loading for routine processing, 5-194 loading in sample carriers, 5-192 loading non-bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-201 unloading, 5-219 sampling rules for calibration description of, 6-3
Index-62
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
sampling sequence (c System) description of optimum sampling sequence, 3-20 scanning reagent carousels procedure for, 5-84 SCC clearances, 4-16 component list numbers, Appendix D-15 computer and interface specifications, 4-26 corrective action procedure, 10-710 cycling power to, 5-5 diagnostic categories, 10-693 electrical requirements, 4-20 maintenance categories, 9-82 observed problems, 10-609 onboard data storage capacities, 4-6 powering off, 5-4 powering off and powering on, general description, 5-3 powering on, 5-3 processor specifications, 4-26 SCC component replacement procedures keyboard, replacing the, 9-275 mouse, replacing the, 9-278 network hub and cables, replacing the, 9-281 printer, replacing the, 9-285 speakers, replacing, 9-288 touch-screen monitor, replacing the, 9-291 SCC optional components description of, 1-11 SCC standard components CD-RW drive, 1-9 CPU, 1-9 floppy drive, 1-9 illustration of, 1-9 keyboard, 1-9 mouse, 1-9 network hub, 1-9 touch-screen monitor, 1-9 Scheduled maintenance status description, 9-20 test status description, 5-153
screen image printing, 5-345 screen timeout setting changing, 2-15 screens description of, 1-13 example of, 1-13 function buttons, 1-13 help button, 1-13 icons, 1-13 information area, 1-13 title bar, 1-13 search tab online operations manual, System documentation-19 searching online operations manual advanced search, System documentation-33 online operations manual for a term, System documentation-32 online operations manual using boolean operators, System documentation-37 online operations manual using nested expressions, System documentation-37 online operations manual using wildcard expressions, System documentation-38 section bay sensors test (RSH) 3401 diagnostics description, 10-687 Select assay window description of, 2-172 field descriptions, Appendix E-204 illustration of, 2-173 sensor cable (i System ARM) location of, 1-114 sensors i 2000 i 2000SR pre-trigger level, description, 1-101 i 2000 i 2000SR trigger level, description, 1-102 i 2000 i 2000SR wash buffer level, description, 1-105 i System pre-trigger level, description, 1-101 i System pre-trigger level, illustration, 1-102
Index-63
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
i System trigger level, illustration, 1-103 i System wash buffer level, illustration, 1-106 septums (i System) description of, 1-140 illustration of, 1-141 serial port settings LAS, changing, 2-32 LIS viewing, 2-17 LIS, changing, 2-31 System viewing, 2-17 serum calibrators description of, 6-4 set LAS gain 3650 diagnostics description, 10-671 SH bar code calibration 3220 diagnostics description, 10-689 SH bar code reader test 3250 diagnostics description, 10-689 SH motor tests 5500 diagnostics description, 10-691 shutdown (emergency) description of, 5-21 shutdown (long-term) (i System) description of, 5-23 shutter (i System) 1030 diagnostics description, 10-680 single analyte control levels configuring a bar code for, 2-178 deleting, 2-189 single analyte controls adding a lot, 2-187 changing, 2-188 changing the default dilution, 2-190 configuring new, 2-176 viewing settings, 2-183 single constituent controls (i System) description of, 1-141 illustration of, 1-141 six-point assay calibration (i System) description of, 6-9 slope calculation data reduction (potentiometric - c System) description of, Appendix C-10
electrode (mV) response curve during calibration, Appendix C-11 relationship between ion electrolyte concentration and electromotive force, Appendix C-10 SmartWash feature (c 8000) onboard solution areas, 1-38 SmartWash feature (c System) configuring settings, 2-90 description of, 3-19 Snapshot screen accessing the, 1-20 description of, 1-18 field descriptions, Appendix E-15 illustration of, 1-19 processing module graphic (c System), Appendix E-16 processing module graphic (i System), Appendix E-16 sample handler graphic, Appendix E-16 status buttons, 1-18 statuses, 1-18 sodium azide removing from drains, 8-9 sodium hydroxide c System Alkaline Wash, 1-135 c System Detergent B, 1-137 i System Trigger Solution, 1-145 software backup creating, 2-212 software error codes descriptions of error codes 9000-9999, 10-477 software installation description of, 2-209 software interface description of, 1-11 function bar buttons, 1-12 help button, 1-12 icons, 1-12 illustration of, 1-12 menu, 1-12 message or prompt, 1-12 screen, 1-12 window, 1-12
Index-64
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
software navigation description of, 1-17 illustration of, 1-18 software troubleshooting c System, 10-5 i System, 10-6 software version viewing, 2-210 solenoid sensor diagnostics description i 2000 i 2000SR, 10-663 i System, 10-677 RSH, 10-687 solid waste (i 2000 i 2000SR) container, 1-108 storage area description, 1-107 waste chute and trap door description, 1-108 solid waste (i System) capacities, 4-8 removing (i 2000 i 2000SR), 5-47 storage area illustration, 1-108 updating inventory (i 2000 i 2000SR), 5-47 waste chute and trap door illustration, 1-109 speakers replacing the, 9-288 specifications ARCHITECT System, 4-4 ARM, 4-37 c 8000 processing module and sample handler, physical, 4-9 CD-RW drive, 4-26 ci 8200 processing module and sample handler, 4-9 electrical (c System), 4-20 electrical (i System), 4-21 external modem, 4-27 general, 4-3 host interface, 4-27 i 2000 processing module and sample handler, physical, 4-9 i 2000SR processing module and sample handler, physical, 4-9 optical (c System), 4-22 physical, 4-9
processing module (c System), 4-5 processing module (i System), 4-5 processing module interface, 4-27 system dimensions, 4-9 specifications, bar code readers c System, 4-5 i System, 4-5 specifications, dispensing volume i System, 4-6 specifications, external waste pump clearances, 4-25 dimensions, 4-24 electrical, 4-25 weight, 4-24 specifications, liquid waste output c System, 4-23 i System, 4-6 specifications, noise level, 4-26 specifications, printer description of, 4-28 parallel cable length, 4-27 power cord length, 4-27 specifications, SCC floppy drive, 4-26 hard drive, 4-26 keyboard, 4-27 monitor, 4-26 physical, 4-9 pointing device, 4-27 specifications, temperature c System, 4-5 i System, 4-6 specifications, weight and force c 8000 System, 4-13 ci 8200 System, 4-11, , 4-12 i 2000 System, 4-15 i 2000SR System, 4-14 spills cleaning up, 8-11 spline data reduction method (photometric - c System) description of, Appendix C-6 spline calibration curve - three to six calibrators, Appendix C-7
Index-65
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
SSH (i 2000) description of, 1-121 diagnostic categories, 10-688 initiating or resuming sample processing, 5-206 keypad description, 1-122 loading non-bar coded samples for batch processing, 5-201 maintenance categories, 9-79 pausing the sample load queue, 5-17 sample processing description, 5-211 sample processing illustration, 5-212 status types, 1-158 SSH (i 2000) double lane description of, 1-121 illustration of, 1-122 sample load queue, 1-122 sample unload queue, 1-122 SSH (i 2000) single lane description of, 1-121 illustration of, 1-121 left processing queue access door, 1-121 right processing queue access door, 1-121 sample carriers, 1-121 sample handler keypad, 1-121 sample load queue, 1-121 sample load queue bar code reader, 1-121 sample procesing queue bar code reader, 1-121 sample processing queue, 1-121 sample unload queue, 1-121 start key i System ARM, 1-112 starting up processing module and or sample handler, 5-13 starting up, pausing, and shutting down the system description of, 5-3 STAT (i 2000 i 2000SR) diverter description, 1-92 pipettors description, 1-81 syringes description, 1-82 wash stations description, 1-83
STAT (i System) diverter illustration, 1-93 pipettors illustration, 1-82 STAT assay protocols (i 2000 i 2000SR) one-step (One step 11), description of, 3-38 two-step (Two step 4-4), description of, 3-41 STAT pipettor calibration (i 2000SR) 1117 maintenance description, 9-68 1117 maintenance illustration, 9-75 STAT pipettor check (i 2000SR) 2009 diagnostics description, 10-684 STAT probes (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the tubing, 9-244 STAT protocol percentage (i 2000SR) changing, 2-36 viewing, 2-19 statistical data elements (Levey-Jennings graph screen) description of, 5-313 Statistical data elements (QC summary review screen) description of, 5-325 status buttons exceptions, 1-18 i System ARM, 1-18 LAS, 1-18 LIS, 1-18 printer, 1-18 Snapshot screen, 1-18 status indicator RSH, 1-118 status types c System processing module, 1-161 i 2000 and i 2000SR processing module, 1-163 i System processing modules, 1-164 LAS carousel sample handler, 1-159 RSH, 1-157 SSH, 1-158 statuses calibration, 6-17 maintenance, 9-20 reagent, 5-69
Index-66
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
Snapshot screen, 1-18 system, description of, 1-156 test, 5-152 stop key c System processing module, 1-30 i System ARM, 1-112 i System processing module keypad, 1-78 LAS carousel sample handler, 1-125 RSH keypad, 1-120 SSH keypad, 1-123 Stopped with errors maintenance status description of, 9-20 storage areas i 2000 i 2000SR solid waste, description, 1-107 i 2000 i 2000SRpre-trigger trigger, description, 1-99 i 2000 i 2000SRwash buffer, description, 1-103 i System pre-trigger trigger, illustration, 1-100 i System solid waste, illustration, 1-108 i System wash buffer, illustration, 1-104 storage capacity i System RVs, 5-49 i System RVs added, 5-50 storage environment specifications i System ARM, 4-39 stored control result details viewing, 5-283 stored control results archiving procedure, 5-284 finding a specific, 5-282 retransmitting, 5-284 viewing all, 5-281 stored data protection ARCHITECT System, 4-5 stored patient results archiving procedure, 5-269 deleting, 5-269 finding a specific, 5-265 retransmitting to the host, 5-267 viewing, 5-266 Stored QC results Archive QC results window description,
5-291 Stored QC results screen accessing the, 5-280 description of, 5-278 illustration of, 5-279 procedures associated with, 5-281 sorting options, 5-280 windows associated with, 5-286 Stored results screen accessing the, 5-264 Archive results window description, 5-277 Archive results window illustration, 5-278 description of, 5-262 field descriptions, Appendix E-52 illustration of, 5-263 procedures associated with, 5-264 sorting options, 5-263 windows associated with, 5-271 storing consumables bulk solutions, 7-5 storing failed calibration curve description of, 6-10 Supplies icon description of, Appendix E-5 screens and windows description, Appendix E-118 supply and pump center (c 16000) description of, 1-66 illustration, 9-203 illustration of components, 9-203 supply and pump center (c 8000) illustration, 9-125 illustration of, 1-47 illustration of components, 9-125 supply and waste center (i 2000 i 2000SR) component replacement description, 9-266 description of, 1-98 supply and waste center (i System) illustration of, 1-99 pre-trigger and trigger storage area, 1-99 solid waste storage area, 1-99 wash buffer storage area, 1-99
Index-67
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
supply and waste center door i 2000 processing module - LAS carousel sample handler, 1-74 i 2000 processing module - SSH, 1-72 i 2000SR processing module, 1-76 supply and waste inventory verifying, 5-32 supply and waste status Snapshot screen button, 1-18 supply status button c System, Appendix E-17 i System, Appendix E-18 Supply status screen windows associated with, 5-29 Supply status screen (c 16000 view) illustration of, 5-26 Supply status screen (c 8000 view) illustration of, 5-25 Supply status screen (c System view) accessing the, 5-27 description of, 5-24 field descriptions, Appendix E-119 Supply status screen (i System view) accessing the, 5-29 description of, 5-27 field descriptions, Appendix E-119 illustration of, 5-28 symbology 1D bar code labels, 4-29 sample bar code labels, 4-33 symbols caution (messages), 1-17 hazard, description of, 8-6 syringe pump (i 2000 i 2000SR) diagnostics description, 10-674 syringe vacuum PT T valve test (i System) 5132 diagnostics description, 10-678 syringes c 16000 1 mL, replacing, 9-204 c 16000 reagent, 1-69 c 16000 sample, 1-69 c 8000 1 mL, replacing, 9-126 c 8000 reagent, 1-49 c 8000 sample, 1-49
i 2000 i 2000SR sample and STAT, 1-82 i 2000 i 2000SRreagent, 1-87 syringes and pumps test (i System) 2110 diagnostics description, 10-674 syringes and valves (c 16000) checking, 9-57 syringes and valves (c 8000) checking, 9-47 system checking for proper operation, 2-2 configuring the, 2-4 installing the, 2-2 reinstalling the, 2-4 relocating, 2-3 system administrator changing password, 1-23 user log on, 1-23 system capacities storage information for the SCC, 4-6 system diagnostics description of, 10-650 system flush c System, 1-166 i System, 1-167 System icon description of, Appendix E-5 screens and windows description, Appendix E-121 system language setting changing, 2-25 viewing, 2-14 System logs screen accessing the, 10-12 description of, 10-11 field descriptions, Appendix E-133 illustration of, 10-11 procedures associated with, 10-12 windows associated with, 10-15 system low alert setting for reagent kits changing, 2-24 viewing, 2-14 system operation precautions when operating the system, 7-3
Index-68
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
system prime (i System) description of, 1-168 system settings procedures associated with changing, 2-20 system software online operations manual acccess from, System documentation-6 Snapshot screen, 1-18 software interface description, 1-11 software navigation, 1-17 system statuses c System processing module, 1-161 description of, 1-156 i 2000 and i 2000SR processing modules, 1-163 i 2000 i 2000SR processing modules, 1-164 LAS carousel sample handler, 1-159 RSH, 1-157 SSH, 1-158
temporary messages deleting, 10-15 SCC capacities, 4-6 test orders finding a specific, 5-155 test processing status description of, 1-18 test statuses description of, 5-152 tests adding to patient order, 5-128 deleting from patient order, 5-158 deleting from rerun order, 5-261 rerunning, 5-231 status of orders, viewing, 5-154 status of scheduled reruns, viewing, 5-260 throughput c 16000, 4-4 c 8000, 4-4 i 2000, 4-4 i 2000SR, 4-4 i System, optimizing on a multi-module, 2-35 title bar location of, 1-13 TM-MCC (Lyophilized) - multiconstituent controls (i System) description of, 1-141 To do tab (maintenance) description of, 9-3 to hot objects, 8-21 to laser light, 8-19 to probes and sharps, 8-19 toolbar and command buttons Help window description, System documentation-12 topic pane Help window description, System documentation-13 touch-screen monitor SCC standard component, 1-9 transmitting exception to the host, 5-299
T
table of contents procedure for using in online operations manual, System documentation-30 task lists description of, System documentation-22 illustration of, System documentation-22 temperature ARM water source requirement, 4-39 c System processing module, 4-5 environmental requirements, 4-26 i System processing module, 4-6 temperature check - manual (i System) 3530 maintenance description, 9-71 temperature error codes descriptions of error codes 7000-7999, 10-420 temperature status (c System) 3525 maintenance description, 9-39 temperature status (i System) 3520 maintenance description, 9-70
Index-69
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
transport calibration (RSH) 1119 maintenance description, 9-77 Trigger check (i System) 2005 diagnostics description, 10-683 trigger level sensor (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-102 replacing the, 9-267 trigger level sensor (i System) illustration of, 1-103 Trigger Solution (i System) description, 1-144 illustration of, 1-145 replacing and updating inventory (i 2000 i 2000SR), 5-57 tripping, 8-21 troubleshooting approach to, 10-2 general description, 10-1 troubleshooting (c System) reagent variables calibrators, 10-7 controls, 10-7 description of, 10-7 reagent kits, 10-7 troubleshooting (c System) system variables consumables, 10-5 description of, 10-4 fluidics subsystems, 10-4 hardware, 10-5 optical subsystem, 10-4 software, 10-5 troubleshooting (i System) reagent variables calibrators, 10-8 controls, 10-8 description of, 10-8 reagent kits, 10-8 troubleshooting (i System) system variables consumables, 10-7 description of, 10-5 fluidics subsystems, 10-6 hardware, 10-6 optical subsystem, 10-6 software, 10-6 troubleshooting environmental variables description of, 10-9 electrical requirements, 10-9
host interface components, 10-10 physical requirements, 10-9 troubleshooting operator variables description of, 10-8 two-point adjustment (c System) description of, 6-7 two-point calibration adjustment (i System) description of, 6-8 two-point qualitative (index formula) data reduction method (i System) description of, Appendix C-18
U
Undefined reagent status definition, 5-69 unload queue cleaning (SSH) 6017 maintenance description, 9-80 unloading reagents c System bar coded, 5-98 c System non-bar coded, 5-100 i 2000 i 2000SR, 5-108 unloading RVs (i System) 8000 diagnostics description, 10-670 unloading samples c System sample carousel, 5-218 LAS carousel sample handler, 5-220 RSH, 5-216 RSH - accessing a sample with tests in process, 5-217 SSH, 5-219 unreleased results SCC capacities, 4-6 Update supplies window - c System view field descriptions, Appendix E-120 Update supplies window - i 2000 i 2000SR view field descriptions, Appendix E-121 Update supplies window (c 16000 view) illustration of, 5-30 Update supplies window (c 8000 view) illustration of, 5-30 Update supplies window (c System view) description of, 5-29 Update supplies window (i 2000 i 2000SR
Index-70
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
view) description of, 5-31 Update supplies window (i System view) illustration of, 5-31 updating 6115 procedure (SCC) 6116 diagnostics description, 10-695 updating inventory (i 2000 i 2000SR) solid waste, 5-47 UPS c System processing module, 1-70 i System processing module, 1-109 SCC, 1-11 urine calibrators description of, 6-4 use cal factor blank assay view - Calibration curve window (c System) description of, 6-20 illustration of, 6-21 use factor and blank - linear calibration curve (photometric - c System) illustration, Appendix C-8 use factor and blank data reduction method (photometric - c System) description of, Appendix C-7 used reagent bottles (i System) preparing, 5-105 User Canceled maintenance status description, 9-20 user logon description of, 1-21 user-defined assays procedures associated with configuring, 2-83 user-defined reagent kits (c System photometric) configuring, 2-94, , 2-95 user-defined reagents configuring, 2-93 user-defined sample diluent (c System photometric) configuring, 2-92 Utilities screen - Backup software view accessing the, 2-212
description of, 2-211 field descriptions, Appendix E-213 illustration of, 2-211 procedures associated with, 2-212 windows associated with, 2-213 Utilities screen - Software install view accessing the, 2-210 description of, 2-209 field descriptions, Appendix E-212 illustration of, 2-209 procedures associated with, 2-210
V
vacuum system test (i System) 3175 diagnostics description, 10-676 verification protocols method groups for, Appendix B-1 verifying calibration, 6-15 i System assay claims, Appendix B-1 LAS communications, 10-714 reagent inventory on a single module, 5-79 reagent inventory on all modules, 5-80 supply and waste inventory, 5-32 Version details for procedure (Diagnostics) window description of, 10-656 illustration of, 10-657 Version details for procedure (maintenance) window description of, 9-12 field descriptions, Appendix E-129 illustration of, 9-13 Version details for procedure window field descriptions, Appendix E-133 videos playing, using online operations manual, System documentation-41 View details for a maintenance procedure description of, 9-10 View maintenance procedure information description of, 9-5 Viewing details for QC data, 5-327
Index-71
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
viewing a print job in the print queue, 5-344 all control results, 5-247 all exceptions, 5-296 all patient results, 5-226 all stored control results, 5-281 all stored patient results, 5-265 assay calibration status, 6-29 calibration curve information, 6-31 calibration history, 6-29 control level Levey-Jennings graph, 5-328 control result details, 5-248 details for a Levey-Jennings point, 5-319 diagnostic procedure information, 10-652 exception details, 5-297 low level error messages, 10-14 order or rerun status details, 5-156 patient result details, 5-228 QC data summary, 5-326 reaction graph and absorbance data for a result (c System), 5-230 reagent details, 5-82 reagent history details, 5-83 sample status, 5-165 sample status details, 5-167 status of ordered tests, 5-154 status of tests scheduled for rerun, 5-260 stored control result details, 5-283 stored patient results details, 5-266 system software version, 2-210 viewing assay settings assay availability, 2-98 assay retest rule settings, 2-100 c System calibrator concentration settings, 2-102 c System correlation factor and intercept settings, 2-104 c System default calibration ordering type (photometric), 2-102 c System default dilution setting (photometric), 2-101 c System last required read setting (photometric), 2-105 c System reagent-specific low alert setting, 2-105 i System default dilution setting, 2-106
linearity range settings, 2-103 normal and extreme result range settings, 2-99 patient and QC panel definitions, 2-100 Viewing QC-Cal settings multiconstituent control bar code SID, 2-185 Westgard rule settings, 2-185 viewing QC-Cal settings c System settings for a calibrator set, 2-186 multiconstituent control settings, 2-184 single analyte control settings, 2-183 viewing system settings automatic report printing setting, 2-12 average number of tests per sample setting, 2-10 batch sample ordering type, 2-10 c System onboard solution options, 2-18 date and time settings, 2-15 host communication settings, 2-11 i 2000SR STAT protocol percentage, 2-19 i System wash buffer transfer option, 2-18 LAS serial port settings, 2-17 LAS timeout setting, 2-19 LIS serial port settings, 2-17 option for printing flags on reports, 2-13 option for running controls, 2-20 report header text, 2-13 sample bar code settings, 2-16 system language setting, 2-14 system low alert setting for reagent kits, 2-14 volumes sample cups, 5-172 sample requirements (aliquot tube), 5-174 sample requirements (primary tube), 5-173 vortexer test (i System) 3115 diagnostics description, 10-669 vortexers (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-93 vortexers (i System) illustration of, 1-94
Index-72
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
location of, 1-90
W
Waiting user response maintenance status description of, 9-20 warming ring description of, 1-45, , 1-64 warranty ICT module, 1-130 wash buffer (i 2000 i 2000SR) manually replenishing and updating inventory, 5-52 wash buffer (i System) preparing, 5-51 wash buffer filter (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-106 wash buffer filter (i System) illustration of, 1-107 wash buffer level sensor (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-105 wash buffer level sensor (i System) illustration of, 1-106 wash buffer reservoir (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-104 wash buffer reservoir (i System) illustration of, 1-105 wash buffer storage area (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-103 wash buffer storage area (i System) illustration of, 1-104 wash buffer transfer (i System ARM) initiating, 5-60 wash buffer transfer option (i System ARM) changing the, 10-711 wash buffer transfer option (i System) viewing, 2-18 wash buffer unload (i System) 2185 maintenance description, 9-70 wash cups c 16000 sample probe, description, 1-53 c 16000 sample probe, illustration, 1-54 c 8000 sample probe, description, 1-33 c 8000 sample probe, illustration, 1-34
wash cuvettes (c System) 6052 maintenance description, 9-40 wash ICT with Cleaning Fluid (c System) 6062 maintenance description, 9-41 wash solution filter (c 16000) replacing the, 9-214 wash solution filter (c 8000) replacing the, 9-136 wash solution pump (c 16000) location in pump center, 1-66 wash solution pump (c 8000) location in pump center, 1-68 wash solution trays (c System) check, 9-28 wash station test (i System) 1170 diagnostics description, 10-672 wash stations i 2000 i 2000SR sample and STAT, description, 1-83 i 2000 i 2000SRreagent, description, 1-88 wash syringe (c 16000) replacing the, 9-217 wash syringe (c 8000) replacing the, 9-139 wash syringe (c System) 6302 maintenance description, 9-31 wash zone 1 (i System) 2006 diagnostics description, 10-683 wash zone 2 (i System) 2007 diagnostics description, 10-683 wash zone diverter (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-94 wash zone diverter (i System) illustration of, 1-90 wash zone manifolds (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of, 1-94 wash zone manifolds (i System) illustration of, 1-95 wash zones (i 2000 i 2000SR) probe, replacing the, 9-248 temperature tubing and sensor, replacing the, 9-255
Index-73
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
wash zones (i System) prime, 9-69 washing processing module (c System), 1-168 waste 1 port i System ARM, 1-113 waste 2 port i System ARM, 1-113 waste arm probe tubing (i 2000 i 2000SR) replacing the, 9-264 waste bottle c 16000 high-concentration, replacing, 9-234 c 8000 high-concentration, replacing, 9-158 c System high-concentration, emptying, 5-41 waste chute capacity of, 5-49 waste chute and trap door description of, 1-108 waste chute and trap door (i System) illustration of, 1-109 waste handling and disposal description of, 8-12 waste storage area (i 2000 i 2000SR) description of solid waste storage, 1-107 waste storage area (i System) illustration of solid waste storage, 1-108 water and liquid waste requirements c System processing module, 4-23 i System processing module, 4-24 water bath (c System) changing, 9-38 checking temperature, 9-40 Water Bath Additive (c System) adding, 9-38 description of, 1-137 illustration of, 1-138 procedure for preparing, 9-23 water inlet connector i System ARM, 1-113 water management unit
c 16000, 1-29 c 8000, 1-27 water quality error indicator i System ARM, 1-112 water temperature indicator i System ARM, 1-112 weekly maintenance description c System, 9-24 i 2000 i 2000SR, 9-63 weight and force specifications, 4-10 weight specifications i System ARM, 4-37 Westgard analysis recalculating, 5-320 Westgard rules application, 5-309 changing settings, 2-197 configuring, 2-181 descriptions, 5-310 quality control result flag, 5-246 run definitions, 5-311 run descriptions, 5-311 viewing settings, 2-185 wildcard expressions description of, System documentation-38 windows description of, 1-15 example of, 1-16 help button, 1-15 information area, 1-15 Maintenance log screen, 9-18 Maintenance screen, 9-11 Snapshot screen, 1-21 title bar, 1-15 WZ aspiration test (i System) 2050 diagnostics description, 10-672 WZ probe cleaning - bleach (i System) 6043 maintenance description, 9-71 WZ probe cleaning (i System) 6015 maintenance description, 9-64 WZ probe straightness (i System) 6037 diagnostics description, 10-673 WZ, wash station, valve test (i System)
Index-74
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007
Index
5131 diagnostics description, 10-677
Index-75
(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

I2000SR

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

I2000SR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

I2000SR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ARCHITECT System Operations Manual (i 2000, i2000SR, c 8000, ci 8200, c 16000, ci 16200)

Abbott Laboratories Abbott Park, IL 60064

Read me first. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Read me-1

System documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System documentation-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Use or function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Installation procedures and special requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Principles of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Performance characteristics and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Operational precautions and limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Physical hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Service and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Abbott ARCHITECT System Operations Manual

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007

(PN 201837-104) June, 2007